QWT  OIF 
Prof.    G.    R.    Noyes 


PRACTICAL 
RUSSIAN  GRAMMAR 

PART   I 


BY 


R.  T.   CURRALL,  MA. 

•I 
SENIOR   MODERN   LANGUAGE   MASTER 

GEORGE  Watson's  college 

EDINBURGH 


D.  C.   HEATH   &   CO.,   PUBLISHERS 
BOSTON  NEW  YORK  CHICAGO 


^<:^^  ^' 


/^....  ^'<  2t^>^ 


PREFACE 

Personal  experience  in  commencing  the  study  of  Russian,  con- 
firmed by  more  recent  experience  in  teaching  classes  supplied  with 
one  of  the  best  of  existing  manuals,  has  convinced  the  compiler  of 
this  book  that  Russian  grammar,  if  presented  from  the  same  end 
as  that  at  which  the  study  of  Latin  or  French  or  German  is  usually 
begun,  will  always  appear  to  be  more  formidable  than  it  is.  This 
book,  the  manuscript  of  which  was  practically  complete  before  the 
end  of  December  1916,  is  an  attempt  to  deal  with  the  subject 
starting  from  a  rather  unusual  point.  The  plan,  however,  once  it  is 
explained,  may  commend  itself  to  teachers  working  with  classes 
of  younger  pupils  and  to  adult  private  students,  and  it  is  hoped 
that  it  will  justify  the  book's  claim  to  the  title  of  a  '  practical ' 
grammar. 

In  Russian,  though  it  is  possible  to  express  many  a  simple 
thought  or  command  without  actually  using  a  verb  at  all,  the  verb 
is  still,  as  in  our  own  speech,  the  "  soul  of  the  sentence,"  and 
is  the  part  of  speech  which  offers  the  greatest  difficulty  to  strangers. 
The  distinctive  feature  of  the  Russian  verb  is  the  system  of 
'  Aspects,'  the  theory  of  which  can  be  made  clear  to  a  serious 
student  in  half  an  hour  (see  Lesson  LI  of  this  book).  But  the 
appHcation  of  this  theory  to  the  practical  purposes  of  reading  and 
writing  depends  upon  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  forms  of  the 

present  tense.    Unfortunately  the  present  tense  of  the  Russian 

6 

__...._ KAi^Qnrrr^^ _ 


6  PKEFACE 

verb,  while  it  is  beyond  question  the  most  frequently  employed  of  all 
the  forms,  is  for  a  beginner  something  Hke  a  maze  in  its  apparent 
confusion  of  consonantal  and  accentual  changes.  More  real  and,  in 
the  final  result,  more  rapid  progress  may  be  made  if  we  take  what 
may  seem  at  first  sight  to  be  a  longer  way  round. 

It  happens  that  the  past  tense  of  Eussian  verbs  is  remarkably 
regular  and  simple,  having  only  four  endings — ^mascuHne,  feminine, 
and  neuter  singular  and  one  plural — identical  in  form  with  those  of 
nouns  of  corresponding  gender  and  number.  Upon  that  fact  this 
method  is  based.    We  begin  with  the  past  tense. 

From  the  first  lesson  sentences  are  constructed  and  read,  but 
while  the  student  is  learning  the  common  forms  of  nouns,  pronouns, 
and  adjectives  his  attention  is  not  simultaneously  being  distracted 
by  the  vagaries  of  the  verb,  for  the  past  tense  requires  hardly  any 
special  study.  When  a  considerable  number  of  verbs  have  by 
mere  iteration  become  famihar,  the  present  is  taken  up,  the  student 
having  the  advantage  of  learning  the  forms  without  at  the  same 
time  having  to  acquire  a  completely  new  set  of  words.  Not  until 
a  useful  store  of  material  has  been  accumulated  and  is  at  command 
is  the  presentation  of  the  Aspects  attempted. 

Participles  are  of  very  frequent  occurrence  in  Russian  texts : 
their  forms  must  therefore  be  known.  These  have  been  indicated 
in  the  grammatical  summary  at  page  35  and  illustrated  in 
notes  to  the  paragraphs  referred  to  on  page  35,  but  otherwise 
participles  have  been  systematically  ignored.  There  is  much  to 
be  done  by  the  beginner  before  he  need  concern  himself  seriously 
with  the  study  of  participles  in  composition.  Indeed  the  foreigner 
who  does  not  enjoy  complete  mastery  of  the  language,  provided  he 


PEEFACE  7 

can  recognize  participles  in  his  reading,  may  get  along  very  well 
by  tlie  use  of  adverbial  and  relative  clauses. 

Numerous  summaries  in  tbe  form  of  Lists  bave  been  given  as  an 
aid  to  clearness. 

For  those  who  hesitate  to  adopt  uncompromisingly  the  plan 
of  the  book,  some  suggestions  as  to  its  use  have  been  given  on 
page  36. 

Much  attention  has  been  devoted  to  the  important  matters  of 
Script  and  Pronunciation.  For  those  who  value  such  things  a 
phonetic  transcript  of  every  word  used  in  the  exercises  and  of  the 
Kussian  exercises  themselves  is  given .  As  for  the  system  of  phonetics 
adopted,  it  will  be  found  to  be  approximately  exact,  though, 
especially  with  regard  to  the  representation  of  certain  unaccented 
vowels,  there  may  be  occasional  and  considerable  divergence 
of  opinion. 

The  Vocabularies  at  the  end  of  the  book  are,  it  is  hoped,  complete. 
Users  of  the  book  will  welcome  the  arrangement  of  the  general 
Russian-EngHsh  vocabulary  of  verbs. 

The  total  number  of  words  employed  is  considerable,  but  as 
the  main  purpose  of  this  volume  is  to  impress  on  the  memory  the 
essential  forms  of  the  language,  the  forms  that  must  be  mastered 
by  the  learner,  there  is  a  good  deal  of  deliberate  iteration  in  the 
exercises. 

For  illustrations  of  many  kinds  indebtedness  is  acknowledged  first 
of  all  to  Tolstoi's  «  AsSyKa  »  and  «  KHHrn  njifl  HxeniH  »,  which 
*  Primer  '  and  *  Readers  '  have  exercised  a  very  marked  influence 
on  the  substance  and  arrangement  of  many  a  Russian  school-book 
pubhshed  since  Tolstoi  gave  up  his  experiments  as  a  dominie. 


8  PEEFACE 

Secondly,  reference  has  been  made  to  many  admirable  books  issued 
in  Russia  with  tbe  approval  of  the  Eussian  Government  for  the 
teacbing  of  Eussian  to  foreign  children  in  Eussian  schools.  Three 
series  of  this  kind  that  deserve  to  become  widely  known  among 
those  interested  in  the  teaching  of  Eussian  are  : 

MnxeeB'B,     «KHHrH     hjih     HTeHifl»,    pubhshed    by     the 
LJeHTpajibHafl  Tnnorpa^ia  in  Kazan  ; 

flaBHCb,  «Poji;hoh  Mip-L)),  pubhshed  by  K.  F.  SnxMaH'b 
in  Eiga ; 

BoJibnept,  «PyccKafl  P-h^b)),  pubhshed  by  the  author  in 
Petrograd. 

While  he  is  alone  responsible  for  the  plan  of  the  book  and 
whatever  faults  it  may  still  contain,  the  compiler  gratefully 
expresses  his  sense  of  obhgation  to  his  friend  Mr  James  Melville, 
of  George  Heriot's  School,  in  whose  company  he  began  the  study  of 
Eussian,  and  who  has  kindly  read  the  proofs  of  this  book.  Finally, 
for  the  care  he  has  taken  with  the  printing  more  than  a  word  of 
thanks  is  due  to  Messrs.  E.  &  E.  Clark's  reader. 

E.  T.  C. 

Edinburgh,  September  1917 


CONTENTS 


PREFACE 


INTRODUCTION 13 

Pars.  I  and  II.— The  Alphabet 13 

Par.  III. — Phonetic  Symbols  used      .  .  .  .  .15 

Par.  IV.— Hard  and  Soft  Vowels 16 

Par.  V. — Voiced  and  Voiceless  Consonants  .  .  .  .16 

Par.  VI. — Pronunciation  ......       16 

Par.  VII.— Contents  of  Pars.  VIII-XX        ....       17 

Pars.  VIII-XX. — Examples  and  Phonetic  Values  of  the  Letters  17-31 
Par.  XXI. — Importance  of  learning  Accent  .  .  .31 

Par.  XXII. — Summary  of  Regular  Forms  .  .  .  32-35 


PAGE 

5 


SUGGESTIONS  for  the  Use  of  this  Book 


36 


LESSONS  I-LVI 

As  Pronouns  are  used  in  every  Lesson,  beginning  with  the  first,  they 
are  not  often  separately  mentioned  in  headings  of  Lessons. 

I.  PAST  TENSE   OF  VERB 
1.  Masculine  and  Neuter  Nouns  in  Singular 

LESSON 

I.  Typical  Masculine  Nominative  Singular  Noun  (hard  form)  and 

Adjective.     "  Is,"  "  is  not  "  . 
II.  Masculine  Singular  Past  Tense.     Nominative  Singular  of  Pronouns, 
Personal,  Possessive,  Interrogative    ..... 

III.  Genitive,  Dative,  and  Accusative  of  Nouns  in  "b.     Pronouns 

IV.  Use  of  y  with  Genitive  to  translate  "  to  have  "       . 

V.  Masculine  Noun — Soft  Forms  in  h  and  ii.      Genitive  after  flsa, 

TpH,  HeTTiipe     .  .  .  .  . 

VI.  Genitive  in  Negative  and  Partitive  Forms.     Infinitive 
VII.  Neuter  Nouns  in  o,  e — Four  Cases.     Neuter  Adjectives.     Certain 
General  Rules  of  Orthography  ..... 

9 


37 

38 
41 
44 

45 
47 

49 


10  CONTENTS 


VIII.  Neuter   Past  Tense.     Reflexive  Verb  Hp^BHTbCfl.     Dative 
with  Kt     . 

IX.  XOHHJI-L  and  meji-b.  Idioms  with  Infinitive.  Complete  Declen 

sion  of  Masculine  and  Neuter  Nouns.     Instrumental  Case 

X.  Prepositional  Case.     Forms  in  ;y^ 

XI.  Revision  of  Pronouns         ..... 

Paes.  48-50. — ^Accentuation  of  Masculine  and  Neuter  Nouns  that  have 
occurred.     Lists  ...... 

Pab.  51. — Prepositions  that  have  occurred  ... 

2.  Masculine,  Feminine,  and  Neuter  Nouns  in  Singular 

XII.  Feminine  Nouns  in  a  and  h.     Rules  of  Orthography 

XIII.  Feminine  Adjectives,     oiiiih'b,  OHHa,  ojiiHO     . 

XIV.  Feminine  Form  of  Past  Tense.     Pronouns 
XV.  Prepositions  Bt  and  Ha.     Compounds  of  meji'B 

XVI.  Same  subjects  as  last  Lesson :    Accusative  and  Prepositional 


51 

53 
56 
59 

61 
61 


62 
63 
65 
66 

68 
70 
71 
73 


XVII.  Feminine  Nouns  in  b         . 
XVIII.  Idiomatic  Uses  of  Instrumental  Case 
XIX.  Prepositions  with  Genitive  .... 

3.  Complete  Declension  of  Noun  and  Adjective 

Pars.  72-79. — Nouns  that  have  occurred  classified  according  to  Form 

and  Accentuation  of  Plural.     Lists     .  .  .  .76 

XX.  Plural  of  Past  Tense.     Pronouns.     Adjectives.     Suggestions 
for  the  learning  of  the  Plurals  of  Nouns  and  incidentally  for 
the  impressing  of  the  Vocabulary  in  Lessons  I-XIX  .       81 

XXI.  Plurals  and  Pronouns         .  .  .  .  .  .84 

XXII.  MaTb  and  aoqb.     Preposition  no  with  Dative  .  .       85 

XXIII.  Complete  Declension  of  the  Adjective.     Forms  in  Liii,  an,  oe, 

and  6tt,  an,  6e   .  .  .  .  .  .  .       87 

XXIV.  Declension  of  Adjective  in  ifi,  hh,  ee    .  .  .  .89 
XXV.  Declension  of  Adjective  in  nift,  Kan,  Koe        .           .  .90 

XXVI.  Declension  of  Adjective  in  hIh,  qafl,  qee         .  .  .91 

XXVII.  A   few  very  common  Irregular   Past   Tenses.     lueji'b   and 

"fexaJi-B.     Translation  of  '  from '  .  .  .  .92 

XXVIII.  Prepositions  ao  and  npo.     Indefinite  3rd  Plural.     Passive 

Voice.     Reflexive  Pronoun       .  .  .  .  .95 

XXIX.  Pronouns :    CBOfi  and  forms  similarly  declined  .  .       98 

XXX.  Dative,  Instrumental,  and  Prepositional  Plurals  of  Nouns  and 

Adjectives  .......     101 

XXXI.  Some  Useful  Idioms 102 


CONTENTS  11 

LESSON  PAGE 

Pars.  117-119. — List  of  Nouns  occurring  for  the  first  time  in  Lessons 
XX-XXXI,  classified  according  to  Form  and  Accentua- 
tion        ........     104 

Par.  120. — Prepositions  that  have  occurred  ....     106 

Note.— Genitive  Plurals  are  discussed  in  Lessons  XXXVI,  XL,  XLV. 


II.  FUTURE  AND  PRESENT  TENSES 

Pars.  121, 122. — Lists  of  Verbs  that  have  occurred  classified  (1)  according 
to  Aspect — A  Imperfective,  B  Perfective  ;  (2)  under  A, 
according  to  form  of  Present  Tense  .  .  .     106 

1.  Future  Tense 

XXXII.  Future  of  6biTb.     Future  of  any  A  Verb       .  .  .108 

XXXIII.  Complete  Plurals  of  Personal  Pronouns  .  .  .     109 

XXXIV.  Time  Phrases        .  .  .  .  .  .  .110 

2.  Present  Tense  of  I  A  Verbs 

XXXV.  Endings  of  Present  Tense  ;  Two  Main  Types.    Present  Tense 

of  jt^jiaTb  Type  .  .  .  .  .  .112 

XXXVI.  Genitive  Plural  of  Masculine  Nouns.     Numerals  5-10,  20  .     116 

3.  Present  Tense  of  II A  Verbs 

XXXVII.  Type  CTOib,  CTOiinib.     Distinction  between  cujifkih  and 

caHHTbCfl.     Sequence  of  Tenses     .  .  .  .117 

XXXVIII.  Type  ctok),  CTonnib.    Numerals  11-19        .  .  .120 

XXXIX.  Type  CMOxpib,  CMOTpninb.     Numerals  30-100       .  .     122 

XL.  Genitive  Plural  of  Feminine  Nouns.     Numerals  100-1000. 

Adverbs  of  Quantity  ......     124 

XLI.  Revision — Past,  Present,  Future  .  .  .  .127 

4.  Present  Tense  of  I  A  Verbs  with  Consonantal 
Stem,  or  Stem  in  'h 

XLII.  Type  JKHB^,  >KHBemb.  VariousForms  of  Infinitive.  xoA^Tb 

and  HTTii.  Compounds  of  htth,  their  Future  Tense  .  129 
XLIII.  Monosyllabic    Verbs :    nnxb ;  H^axb.     Ordinal    Numerals 

lst-19th 133 

XLIV.  Type  nnm;^,  nHineuib.      Regular  Consonantal  Changes. 

Ordinal  Numerals  20th-100th  .  .  .  .136 

XLV.  Genitive  Plural  of  Neuter  Nomis         .  .  .  .139 

XL VI.  Exercises  on  the  Verbs  of  all  Types  discussed  in  Lessons 

XXXII-XLV 140 


12  CONTENTS 

Lessons  ivhich  may  be  read  at  any  time  after  Lesson  XX,  though  the 
exercises  cannot  he  worked  with  any  satisfaction  till  after  Lesson  XL  VI. 

LESSON  PAGE 

XL VII.  On  Numerals — Declension,  etc.     Ordinal  Numerals  from  100th 

upwards     ........     142 

XL VIII.  Verbs  governing  Instrumental  Case         .  .  .  .146 

XLIX.  Predicative  Adjective  ......     149 

L.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  .  .  .  .  .  .152 


in.    THE  ASPECTS  OF  THE  VERB 

LI.  Explanation  of  this  feature  of  the  Russian  Verb.     Illustrative 

Passages  with  Translation  .  .  .  .  .155 

LII.  The  Imperative.     Salutations.     Distinction  between  Imper- 

fective  and  Perfective  Imperative.     Verbs  in  Vocabulary 

grouped  in  Classes  according  to  formation  of  Aspects  .  164 
LIII.  Declension     of    Bp^MH.      Verbs    ifecTb,    "fexaTb,    xot'^tb. 

Conditional.  Verbs  in  Vocabulary  grouped  as  in  Lesson  LII  168 
LIV.  Verbs  in  OBaxb  and  BieaTb.    Mixture  of  Tenses.     '  Whether.' 

Verbs  grouped  as  in  Lesson  LII  .  .  .  .172 

LV.  Declension  of  ^hth  and  peGcHOK-b.    Nouns  in  anHH-b.    Verb 

AaeaTb.     Verbs  grouped  as  in  Lesson  LII    .  .  .     176 

LVI.  Long  and  Short.     Construction  with  Verbs  of  Wishing  and 

Fearing.    Distinction  between  caMTb  and  c^Mbiii    .  .180 

List  of  Prepositions  .  .  .  .  .  .  .185 

List  of  Adjectives  showing  Form  and  Accentuation  of  Predicative  .     186 
Examples  of  Predicative  Comparative  in  e    .  .  .  .188 

A  FEW  Irregular  Verbs      .  .  .  .  .  .  .189 

Examples  of  Russian  Script         .  .  .  .  .  .190 

Phonetic  Transcript  of  the  Exercises  .  .  .  .194 

VOCABULARIES : 

Verbs — Russian-English         .  .  .  .  .  .210 

General  Vocabulary  :   Russian-English  (no  Verbs)      .  .     217 

General  Vocabulary:   English-Russian    ....     229 

INDEX  .  .  . 246 


INTRODUCTION 

I.  The  Kussian  alphabet  is  called  the  Cyrillic,  as  its  creation  is 
rightly  or  wrongly  ascribed  to  St.  Cyril,  a  Greek  missionary,  of  the 
ninth  century  who  carried  Christianity  to  the  Slavs  of  Macedonia. 
This  alphabet  is  based  on  the  Greek  capitals.  It  includes  a  few 
letters  corresponding  to  Latin  characters  of  similar  form,  a  few 
more  that  have  the  form  but  not  the  value  of  Latin  sjnubols,  and 
several  entirely  new  symbols  that  must  have  been  invented. 

As  applied  to  modem  Russian  the  alphabet  is,  for  various 
historical  reasons,  by  no  means  perfect  in  its  approximation  to 
the  phonetic  ideal.  It  is,  however,  for  the  purpose  of  representing 
a  Slav  tongue  far  better  adapted  than  the  Latin  character,  for, 
once  the  Cyrillic  alphabet  is  mastered,  it  is  seen  that  the  words  are 
neither  so  long  nor  so  barbarous  in  appearance  in  their  native  dress 
as  when  transliterated  for  EngUsh  readers.  The  Czechs,  Poles, 
and  other  Northern  Slavs  (exclusive  of  the  Russians)  use  the 
Latin  character,  while  the  Russians,  Bulgars,  Serbs,  and  most  other 
Southern  Slavs  use  the  Cyrillic. 


II.  THE  ALPHABET 

Printed 

ItaKc 

Phonetic 

Characters 

Characters 

Symbols 

A,     a  (viii)  1 

A, 

a 

[a]  [a] 

B,     6  (XI v) 

E, 

6 

[b]  [b] 

B,     B  (xiv) 

B, 

e 

[v]  [v] 

r,     r  (XV) 

r, 

8 

[g]  [g]  [g] 

»;.ln^^«^^    fl»     a  (xvi) 

a. 

d 

[d]  [d] 

-Z/     '     E,     e(ix) 

E, 

e 

[J8]  [je]  [j9] 

^  Paragraph  in  which  illustrations  of  the  phonetic  value  of  each  letter  will  be 
found.     Specimens  of  script  are  given  at  pages  190-193. 

13 


14 


INTRODUCTION 


Printed 

ItaUo 

Phonetic 

Characters 

Characters 

Symbols 

E,     e  (xi) 

E, 

e 

[jo] 

}K,  m  (xviii) 

m. 

MC 

[3] 

3,     3  (xvii) 

3, 

3 

[2]  [i] 

H,     H(X) 

a. 

U 

P] 

I>i     i(x) 

I, 

i 

[i] 

IT,     fi(x) 

a. 

a 

P] 

K,     K  (xv) 

K, 

K 

[k]  [k] 

JI,     JI  (xx) 

JI, 

JI 

[t]  [i] 

M,    M  (xix) 

M, 

M 

[m]  [m] 

H,    H  (xix) 

H, 

H 

W  [A] 

0,     0  (xi) 

0, 

0 

[0]  [a] 

n,    n  (xiv) 

n. 

n 

[P]  [p] 

P,     p  (xx) 

p. 

P 

[r]  [r] 

C,     c  (xviii) 

c. 

c 

[s]  M 

T,     T  (xvi) 

T, 

m 

[t]  [t] 

y,    y(xii) 

y. 

y 

[u] 

<D,    $  (xiv) 

o. 

0 

[i]  m 

X,    X  (xv) 

X, 

X 

M 

l\,    ^  (xvi) 

^, 

^ 

[ts]  [ts] 

H,     H  (xviii) 

1, 

H 

[tn 

in,  m  (xvm) 

in, 

Ul 

[S] 

lU,,  m  (xviii) 

m, 

m 

[StJ] 

"L,     T>  (xiii) 

rb. 

■b 

None 

bl,    Bl  (x) 

hi. 

u 

p] 

h,     h  (xiii) 

h. 

b 

[^]  [J] 

%    ^(ix) 

■B, 

Tb 

[is]  [je]  [j9]  [jo] 

a,    3  (ix) 

9, 

3 

[s]   [e] 

K),   K)  (xii) 

10, 

10 

[ju] 

H,    fl  (vm) 

H, 

a 

[ja]  [JA]  [J9] 

9,     e  (xiv) 

e. 

e 

[f]  [i] 

Y,     V    this  letter  is  another 

'i'; 

it  is  no  longer  in  use. 

There  is  no  h,  no  w,  no  x;  these  are  usually  represented  by  r, 
B,  KG  respectively.  Certain  symbols  are  redundant,  e.g.  i,  ^,  and 
others  have  to  stand  for  more  than  one  distinct  sound. 


INTRODUCTION  15 

III.  The  phonetic  symbols  employed  in  the  transcript  are  as 
follows :  ^ 

Vowels 

[a]  as  in  *  father.' 
[a]  as  in  *  another.' 
[e]  as  in  *  them.' 
[e]  as  in  *  the^/.' 

[a]  as  in  *  mother.' 

[i]  as  in  *b*t'  (but  see  Par.  X,  note  1). 

[i]  as  in  *  been.' 

[i]  second  half  of  diphthong  in  words  like  *  boi/,'  *  mi/,'  *  tr?/.' 

[o]  as  in  *  yon.' 

[u]  as  in  *  too.' 

[j]  to  represent  sound  of  EngHsh  y  before  any  vowel. 

[  —  ]  The  dot  placed  over  any  consonant  indicates  that  the  consonant  is  to  be 

pronounced  '  soft,'  i.e.  to  be  palataUzed  (French  mouilU). 
[(  Y]  added  to  a  vowel  indicates  that  a  very  faint  i  is  audible  just  before  the 

succeeding  consonant. 

Consonants 
Labials  (6,  n,  b,  4>>  ©)• 

[b]  as  in  *6ooty,'  [b]  as  in  *6eauty.'   [p]  as  in  *^at,'  [p]  as  in  *pure.' 
[v]  as  in  *  van,'  [v]  as  in  *  t;iew.'      [f]  as  in  */ar,'  [f J  as  in  */ew.' 

GUTTUBALS  (r,  K,  X). 

[g]  as  in  *  gfood,'  [g]  as  in  *  %urative.' 

[g]  voiced  form  of  ch  which  is  sometimes  written  in  EngUsh  gh  (North 

German  '  wegren '  with  the  g  aspirated), 
[k]  as  in  *  Aick,'  [k]  as  in  *  Z^ew.' 
[x]  as  in  '  ic^ '  (German),  softer  than  ch  in  *  loch.' 

Dentals  (h,  t,  i^). 
[d]  as  in  *c?one,'  [d]  as  in  *  due.'  [t]  as  in  *<ool,'  [t]  as  in  *<une.' 

Sibilants  (1)  (3,  c). 
[z]  as  in  *  ma^e ' ;   [z]  as  in  *  (he)  sees  you '  spoken  as  one  word, 
[s]  as  in  *  I055 ' ;   [s]  as  in  *  disunion.' 

(2)  (JK,  m,  q,  m). 
[j]  as  in  *  hush ' ;   [5]  as  in  *  azure.'     (Of.  Par.  XVIII.) 

Nasals  (m,  h). 
[m]  as  in  *  wan ' ;  [m]  as  in  *  muse.'       [n]  as  in  *  wone '  f  [n]  as  in  *  news.* 

Liquids  (ji,  p). 
[t]  as  in  *  cattZe ' ;  [1]  as  in  *  mi^^«on.'     [r]  as  in  *JRussia ' ;  [r]  as  in  *  Hamet." 


16  INTRODUCTION 

IV.  Russian  Vowels  fall  into  two  exactly  corresponding  series 
called  hard  vowels  and  soft  vowels.  This  distinction  is  most  im- 
portant, as  it  meets  one  at  every  turn  in  Russian  orthography, 
and  the  observation  of  the  exact  correspondence  will  reduce  by  one 
half  the  labour  of  memorizing  conjugations  and  declensions. 

The  hard  vowels  are  : 

a  [a]         3[s]or[e]  H  [i]  o  [o]  y  [u] 

The  soft  or  palatal  vowels  corresponding  are : 

H  [ja]         e,  'fe  [j8]  or  [je]         h,  1,  Vl  [i]  [i]         e  [jo]  lo  [ju] 

There  are,  further,  two  signs  that  occupy  much  space  in  Russian 

printing,  viz.  !>  and  b :   !>  is  called  the  '  hard '  sign,  and  indicates 

merely  the  absence  of  h,  the  ^  soft '  sign.     (See  Par.  XIII.) 

No  Russian  word  is  written  with  a  consonant  as  the  last  letter : 

a  word  must  end  in  a  vowel  or  in  Tb  or  b.     These  two  signs  were 

themselves  originally  vowels. 

V.  It  is  often  convenient  to  distinguish  voiceless  consonants 
(n,  $,  K,  X,  T,  c,  m)  from  voiced  consonants  (6,  b,  r,  r  [g],  n,  3,  m), 
while  certain  consonants  {m,  m,  H,  m),  are  by  nature  soft,  in  the 
sense  that  they  tend  to  palatalize  even  the  hard  vowels. 


VI.  PRONUNCIATION 

The  articulation  of  the  individual  sounds  in  Russian  is  not  so 
difficult  for  an  English-speaking  person  as  is  the  correct  production 
of  French  sounds.  The  one  serious  difficulty  in  Russian  pronuncia- 
tion lies  in  the  fact  that  Russian  more  than  other  European  tongues 
resembles  English  in  two  important  respects  :  the  accent  is  variable, 
and  only  the  accented  vowels  have  their  full  normal  value.  That 
is  to  say,  in  order  to  pronounce  a  Russian  word  with  a  semblance 
of  correctness,  one  must  know  on  which  syllable  the  accent  falls, 
and  bear  in  mind  that  unaccented  vowels  are  for  the  most  part 
short  and  relatively  obscure,  though  long  compound  words  often 
have  what  may  be  called  a  secondary  accent. 


INTRODUCTION 


17 


Voiced  consonants  standing  before  final  !>  or  B  tend  to  become 
voiceless  (see  preceding  paragraph),  but  this  tendency  should  not 
be  exaggerated,  especially  in  monosyllables. 

In  Paragraphs  VIII  to  XX  numerous  examples  illustrating 
all  ordinary  combinations  of  letters  are  given. 

VII.  The  following  pages.  Par.  VIII  to  Par.  XX,  show  for  every 
letter  of  the  alphabet : 

(1)  Printed  Character 

(2)  Italic 

(3)  Russian  Nanfie 

(4)  Phonetic  Value 
Examples.    Explanatory  notes. 

The  letters  of  the  Alphabet  are  arranged  in  the  following  order  : 
Vowels  : 
a,  H  (Par.  VIII) ;    3,  e,  ife  (Par.  IX) ;    bi,  h,  i,  ft  (Par.  X) ;    o,  e  (Par. 
XI) ;   y,  10  (Par.  XII) ;  -b,  b  (Par.  XIII). 

Cotisonants  : 

Labials  (Par.  XIV). 

Gutturals  (Par.  XV). 

Dentals  (Par.  XVI). 

Sibilants  (1)  (Par.  XVII) ;   (2)  (Par.  XVIII). 

Nasals  (Par.  XIX). 

Liquids  (Par.  XX). 


VIII.  (1) 

A 

a,  A  a. 

Name  :    a.       Value  : 

[a]    (acceni 

[a]  (unaccented) 

). 

AnrjilH 

AmjiiR 

[dngiiJA(ijA)]i 

England 

noKaaajl'b 

noKasajih 

[pAkAzat]2,i 

he  showed 

KapaHflami. 

KapaHdaiuh 

[kArAnddJ]2,i 

pencil 

HaCOBOH 

Hacoeou 

[tJASAv6i]3 

sentry 

jKapa 

oicapa 

[3Ard]3 

heat 

^  '  a'  when  accented  has  the  sound  of  a  in  'father,'  =[a]. 

2  '  a '  when  not  accented  has  the  sound  of  a  or  o  in  *  another,'  =  [a]. 

3  '  a '  when  unaccented  after  the  consonants  -m,  'i,  m,  m  retains  so  little 
of  the  original  open  [a]  sound  that  it  might  often  be  rendered  by  the 
symbol  [a];  i.e.  it  becomes  almost  as  obscure  as  the  last  vowel  of  'another.* 
But  it  has  been  thought  advisable  not  to  insist  on  this  refinement  in  the 
phonetic  transcript. 


18 


INTRODUCTION 


Soft  vowel  corresponding  to  *  a ' : 
(2)  H.  H,  H  H.    Name  :    h.     Value :    [ja]  (accented),  [ja,  jo] 
(iinaccented). 

(This  vowel  never  follows  r,  k,  x,  m,  h,  m,  m.) 


Hn6HiH 
jiroaa 

fl3lilK'B  „ 

eA     £C 

3anpiiri> 
;^qHTCH 

1 


Hnoma 
Rzoda 

HdblKh 

ea. 

aanpRZh 

ynumcR 


[J9p6niJA  (nJA)]  2. 8 

Japan 

[jagAdA]! 

berry 

[jaztk]2 

tongue 

[i9j6,j9jd]4 

of  her,  Tier 

[zAprok]  * 

he  yoked 

[<itJitSA]5 

learns 

when  accented  has  the  sound  of  ya  as  in  '2/^k,'  =  [ja,  — a], 
when  unaccented  has  the  sound  of  ye  in  '  lawyer,'  =[J9,  —  a]. 
in  the  unaccented  terminations  -h,  -ifl  in  nouns  =[ja]. 
in  a  very  few  words  has  the  value  of  yo  in  '  yon,^  =[jo»  —  o]. 
in  the  syllable  -CH  of  reflexive  verbs  =[a]. 

(1)  dd,99.   Name :  9  odopoTHoe  (e  reversed).  Value:  [s,  e]. 

dcrruiRudiH  [estiandiJA  (dJA)]  ^  Esthonia 

dmonih  [stAt]  ^  tUsy  that 

dmu  [6ti]2  these,  those 

SMUZpaHmb  [emigrant]  *  emigrant 

^  '  3 '  before  a  consonant  or  a  group  of  consonants  followed  by  the  hard 
sign  or  any  hard  vowel  has  the  open  sound  of  the  vowel  in  '  them,'  =  [s]. 

2  '  3  '  before  a  consonant  or  a  group  of  consonants  followed  by  the  soft  sign 
or  by  any  soft  vowel  has  the  close  sound  of  the  vowel  in  '  they,'  '  hate,'  =  [e].* 

Soft  vowels  corresponding  to  *  3  ' : 

e.     Value:  [js,  je]  (accented),  [jo,  —9] 


IX. 

BCTJIHHAifl 
^TOT-B 

SMHrpdHTt 


(2)  Ee,  E 

e.    Name 

(unaccented). 

EBp6na 

Eepona 

M^jioqb 

MCJlOHb 

BCCb 

eecb 

CKaM^HKa 

cKaMeuna 

Mope 

Mope 

[J9vr6pA]  8 

[ril^tAtJ]! 

[ves]  or  [ves]  ^ 
[skAm6ikA]  2 
[more]  ^ 


Europe 
trifle 

all,  whole 
bench,  seat 
sea 


^  '  e '  when  accented  and  preceding  a  consonantal  group  followed  by  the 
hard  sign  or  a  hard  vowel  has  the  open  sound  of  ye  in  '  yet,'  =  [J6,  —  s]. 

2  '  e '  when  accented  and  preceding  a  consonantal  group  followed  by  the 
soft  sign  or  any  soft  vowel  has  the  close  sound  of  the  vowel  in  '  yea,'  =  [je,  —  e]. 

^  '  e '  when  unaccented  has  the  value  oi  ^ye'  in  *  lawyer  '  =  [ja,  —  a]. 
For  the  value  of  *  e '  see  Par.  XI  (2). 

*  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  pronounce  this  sound  like  the  Southern  English 
£1  or  ei.     Russian  vowels  are  pure  vowels,  not  diphthongs. 


INTKODUCTION  19 

(3)  'h  %,  "B  7b.     Name  :  htb.     Value  :  same  as  that  of  '  e.' 


-fesAHTb 

Tbadumh 

[j^zdit] 

to  ride,  drive,  travel 

i^ymift 

Tbdyu^iu 

[jsdujtji] 

travelling,  traveller 

'feji'b 

TbAh 

[jst] 

he  ate 

*CTb 

Tbcmh 

[jest] 

to  eat 

TflJKCJI^e 

mROfcejivbe 

[t839l6J9] 

heavier 

-hsjidK-b 

TbSdOKh 

[jazdok] 

traveller,  passenger 

BlkjlfbTh 

eudrhTYih 

[vfd9t] 

to  see 

3B^3JS,U 

aemadbi 

[zvozdi]! 

stars 

^BifeJI'b 

v^erbjib 

[tSVot]! 

was  blooming 

TH'feana 

8H7b3da 

[gnosdA]  ^ 

nests 

npio6p';fejn> 

npio6prbJih 

[priAbrot]  1 

he  obtained 

ci^Jia 

CTbdjia 

[s6dtA]i 

saddles 

This  letter  is  superfluous,  as  it  has  no  sound  which  is  not  also  represented 
by  *  e.' 

It  has  the  sounds  [js,  je,  J9]  according  to  the  same  rules  as  *e.' 

1  In  a  few  words  '  -h '  has  the  sound  of  *  e,'  =[jo,  —  o],  for  which  see  Par. 

XI  (2). 


X.  (1) 

LI 

H,  hi  bi.    Name :  epH. 

Value:  [i]. 

(This  vowel 

is  never  initial  and  never  follows 

r,  K,  X,  m,  H,  m,  m. 

TBI 

mbi                       [ti]  1 

thm 

MblTb 

Mbimb                   [mit]  1 

to  wash 

Mbm^Tb 

Mbmamb               [mitja^t]  ^ 

to  low,  bellow 

6bITb 

dumb                    [bit]  1 

to  be 

6bITOB6H 

dbimoeou              [biUvoi]  ^ 

taken  from  real  life 

BlijIHTb 

emjiumb               [vilit]  ^ 

to  pour  out 

CTapbift 

cmapbiii               [stari]  ^ 

old 

KdMCHHblfi 

KaMeHHbiu            [kdm9ni]2 

made  of  stone 

^  '  bi,'  accented  or  unaccented,  is  a  vowel  not  difficult  to  imitate  from 
the  living  voice,  but  not  so  easily  described.  We  have  it  as  an  unaccented 
vowel  in  the  second  syllable  of  '  pretty/.'  As  an  accented  vowel  it  is  very 
nearly  equivalent  to  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  of  '  pretty,'  as  pronounced 
in  the  south  of  England,  or  more  exactly,  it  is  almost  identical  with  the  thick, 
slovenly  utterance  of  the  vowel  i  heard  in  some  parts  of  Scotland  in  '  hit ' 
and  'f^t,'  =[i]. 

2  In  the  termination  of  the  masculine  singular  of  the  adjective  this  sound 
is  theoretically  prolonged  by  the  half -vowel  ii,  but  the  practical  effect  is  so 
sUght  that  it  has  been  ignored  in  the  transcript. 


20 


INTRODUCTION 


Soft  vowels  corresponding  to  '  li  ' : 
(2)  H  H,  Jf  w.     Name :  i  ^BofiHoe  {i  double).     Value :  [i]. 


Ht^jiIh 

HmcuiiH 

[italiJA(lJA)]i 

Italy 

liea 

uea 

[ivA]l 

willow 

CMOTpHTt 

CMompumh 

[sm6trit]i 

he  looks  {at) 

H{H3Hb 

;>tCU3Hb 

[3izn]2 

life 

ni6pMa 

uiupMa 

[JirmA]  2 

screen 

HX-L 

UXh 

[ix,jix]3 

them,  of  them 

HM-B 

UMh 

[im,jim]3 

to  them 

laMH 

IIMU 

[imi,jiriii]3 

{with)  them 

^  '  H '  has  the  sound  of  ee  in  '  deem,'  =  [i],  the  d  being  pronounced  as 
in  *  c^uty.'    Like  all  other  vowels  it  is  short  when  unaccented. 

2  'h'  after  i^,  jk,  m  is  pronounced  like  bi  [i].      After  n  and  in  this 
modification  is  not  quite  so  noticeable  and  '  i '  has  been  kept  in  the  transcript. 

3  Only  in  the  last  three  words  has  initial '  h  '  the  sound  [ji]. 


(3)   I  i,  /  I.     Name :  i  Cb  tohkoh  (i  with  a  dot). 
(This  letter  never  stands  before  consonants.) 


Value:  [ij. 


iHC^Ct 

lucycb 

[iisiis]! 

Jesus 

iibnt 

ilOHb 

[ijiiin,]Vn]i 

June 

iiojib 

iWJlb 

[ijdiijuii]! 

July 

Poccifl 

PocciR 

[rAsiJA]  1 

Russia 

3HaHie 

3HaHie 

[znanja]  2 

knowledge 

Mip-b 

Miph 

[mir]3 

world,  peasant  vilkige 

MHp-B 

MUph 

[riiir]3 

peace             [community 

1  '  i '  has  the  same  value  as  h  ;  it  replaces  h  before  vowels  ;   =[i]. 

2  The  termination  '  -ie '  might  also  have  been  rendered  by  [-ija],  but  in 
natural  rapid  speech  the  [i]  is  so  short  that  the  dotted  consonant  +[ja] 
seems  adequate  to  represent  this  combination. 

^  '  i '  stands  before  a  consonant  in  the  one  word  Mipi),  '  world,'  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  MHpTj,  '  peace.' 

(4)  Vi  Vl,  H  ii.  Name :  h  ct>  KpaxKoii  (i  with  a  short  mark). 
Value:  [i]. 

(This  letter  is  never  initial;  it  always  stands  after  a  vowel,  forming  su 
diphthong  with  it.) 

Matt                     MaU  [mai]i                 jj^^iy 

capafi                   capau  [sArai]^                cart-shed 

jlOMoft                  doMoU  [dAmoi]!              homeward 

Bofina                  eouHa  [vAina]i              war 


INTRODUCTION 


21 


yfiaeTt 

qeii? 

cxapbift 

flftL[6 

nocjiymaftxe ! 


yudemh  [uid6t]  i 

HeuF  [tJ6l]i 

cmapuii  [stdri]^ 

HUi^o  [jitso,  jatso]  3 

nocjiyuiaiime !  [pAsMJata]  ^ 


^  m;*7Z  go  away 

whose  ? 

old 

egg 

listen  I 


1  *  ii  '  added  to  a  vowel  turns  it  into  a  diphthong  [al,  oi,  ui,  etc.] ;  com- 
pare English  '  huy,^  '  boy.' 

^  '  ii '  added  to  bi  and  1  makes  in  natural  discourse  so  slight  a  change 
that  it  has  been  ignored  in  the  transcript. 

^  '  ii '  added  to  unaccented  a,  h,  e,  gives  an  indistinct  sound  which  can 
be  rendered  by  [a]  or  [i]. 


XI.  (1)  0  0,  0  0. 
(unaccented). 


Name :    o.      Value :    [o]  (accented),  [a] 


(When  unaccented,  '  o '  is  replaced  by  '  e '  after  jk,  h,  m,  m,  n.) 


Cjitra 

OAhza 

TBOft 

meoU 

repdft 

zepoU 

^Toro 

dmozo 

nji6xo 

njioxo 

njioxdii 

njioxoii 

xopom6 

xopouio 

[6ilgA]  1 
[tvoi]  1 
[garoi]! 

[stAVA]  2 
[ptoXA]  2 
[ptAXOi]  2, 

[xArAjo]  2, 


Olga 

thy 

hero 

of  that 

badly 

bad 

well 


1  '  o  *"  accented  has  the  sound  of  o  in  '  yon,'  =  [o]. 

2  '  o '  unaccented  has  the  sound  of  o  in  '  other,'  =  [a].  Russian  *  o  '  is 
always  open  as  in  '  yon '  or  '  other ' ;  it  never  has  the  value  of  the 
rounded  o  in  '  home,'  '  bone.' 

Soft  vowel  corresponding  to  '  o  ' : 


(2) 

Ee, 

E  e.     Name : 

e.     Value : 

[jo, 

^0]. 

eJKHTCH 

eotcumcR 

[j63itsA] 

it  shrivels  up 

JKCJITMH 

Mcejimuu 

[56tti] 

yellow 

jier-b 

Ji'ezh 

[log] 

he  lay  down 

c^eT-B 

CHenvb 

[stjot] 

account 

mejiT. 

m'ejib 

[Jot] 

he  went 

BeST. 

e'eah 

[voz,  vos] 

he  conveyed  {in  a  vehicle) 

8031. 

eo3h 

[voz,  vos] 

cart-had 

'  e '  is  always  accented,  i.e.  *  e '  when  accented  often  =  [jo,  —  o].  The 
occurrence  of  this  sound  should  be  carefully  noted,  as  it  is  only  in  books  for 
beginners  that  accents  and  diacritics  are  used  ;  in  ordinary  Russian  printing 
they  do  not  appear,  and  there  is  nothing  to  distinguish  *  e '  from  '  e.' 


22 


INTRODUCTION 


XII.  (1) 

yy,yy. 

Name :  y.    Value  :  [u]. 

VKpaftna 

ynpaUHa 

[uki'uinA] 

Ukraine 

^xo 

yxo 

[tixA] 

ear 

y^xaTb 

ymxamh 

[ujSXAt] 

to  drive  away 

ye^HH^Hie 

yeduHenie 

[uj8din6nja] 

loneliness 

yiiTH 

yiimu 

[uitf] 

to  go  away 

6^fly 

6ydy 

[btidu] 

I  shall  be 

TyA^ 

myda 

[tuda] 

thither 

'y'  always 

has  the  sound  of  oo  in  '  too,' 

=  [u].     The  only  difference 

between  the  accented  and  the  unaccented  vowel  is  one  of  quantity,  the 
unaccented  vowel  being  very  short. 

Soft  vowel  corresponding  to  '  y  ' : 

(2)  K)  K),  iO  /o.     Name:  k).     Value:  [ju,-^u]. 
(In  native  Russian  words  this  vowel  never  follows  r,  K,  x,  jk,  q,  m,  m.) 


lOpbCBT. 

lOpbeeh 

[jiirj9f]i 

Dorpat  {city) 

lor'b 

lOZh 

[jug,juk] 

south 

cioaa 

cioda 

[suda] 

hither 

ibHoma 

lOHoma 

[jtinAjA] 

a  youth 

jiioSjiib 

/iiodjiio 

[lublli] 

I  love 

lOCTiiuifl 

iocmui\iR 

[justitsJA] 

justice^  law 

HibxaTb 

Hioxamb 

[liiixAt] 

to  smell  {trans.) 

Fiord 

Fiozo 

[gugo]  ^ 

Hugo 

1   '10' 

always  has  the  sound  of  u  in  ' use' 

=  [ju,  — ul.    As  with  'y,'  the 

corresponding  hard  vowel,  the 

difference  between  '  K)  '   accented  and  un- 

accented  is  one  of  quantity  only. 

2   '10' 

is  used  to  transUterate  French  u  and  German  u. 

XIII.  (1)  Id  -h,!)  z>.  Name :  ept,  or  TBepnBifi  snaK'b  (Jiard 
sign).    Value:  [none]. 

(This  sign  is  never  initial ;   it  never  follows  a  vowel.) 
[brat]  hrotlier 

[sad,  sat]  garden 

[Abjom]  extent i  size 

[jut]  buffoon^  joker 

[isJ9vl6nJ8]  testimony 

Examples  will  be  given  with  each  of  the  consonants  showing  the  use  of 
this  hard  sign,  which  was  originally  a  vowel,  but  is  really  a  superfluous  char- 
acter in  the  modem  tongue,  for  it  merely  indicates  that  the  b,  or  soft  sign, 
is  not  present. 

The  distinction  between  zvh  and  Jib  is  particularly  important  (see 
Par.  XX). 


SpaxT, 
caai, 

6pamh 

cadh 

odheMh 

myx-b 
HStHBJieHie 

luymh 
\        ushHe/ieuie 

INTEODUCTION 


23 


qyxb 

Hymh 

rOBOpHTb 

zoeopumh 

CHAbl 

CRdb! 

Becb 

eecb 

MajieHbKift 

McuieubKiii 

JIIOGOBb 

jiio6oeb 

ji;eHb 

deub 

pyjKbe 

pyoiCb'e 

jibBa 

jibea 

pOJKb 

pOMCb 

(2)  B  b,  L  6.  Name  :  epb  or  MarKiii  anaKi*  {soft  sign). 
Value:  [  — ,  j,  or  nil]. 

(This  sign  is  never  initial ;  it  never  follows  a  vowel,  or  r,  K,  x.) 

[tju^t]  1  hardly 

[gAVAiit]  ^  ix)  speak 

[sa^t]  1  sit  dovm  ! 

[ves]  2  ally  whole 

[mdldnki]  ^  small 

[iub6if]3  love 

[de^n]  ^  6iai/ 

[ru3J6]  *  arm,  rifle 

[iva]^  of  the  lion 

[roj]  ^  ri/e 

'  b,'  the  soft  sign,  is  very  important,  as  it  may  not  only  alter  the  value  of 
the  consonant  preceding,  but  very  often,  especially  with  H,  Ji  and  x,  may  affect 
the  preceding  vowel. 

1  The  consonant  preceding  the  b  is  softened  by  the  suggestion  of  a  very 
slight  [ja],  which  however  must  not  be  made  into  an  extra  syllable.  The 
consonants  which  show  most  clearly  the  difference  between  the  effects  of  the 
hard  and  soft  signs  are  Ji,  H,  T.  Examples  are  given  with  the  various  consonants 
to  illustrate  this  point,  the  effect  of  the  soft  sign  being  indicated  by  [  —  ]. 

2  After  some  final  consonants  and  when  occurring  between  two  consonants 
its  effect  is  very  slight,  except  in  as  far  as  it  may  modify  the  preceding  vowel. 

^  In  many  cases  its  effect  is  noticeable  on  the  preceding  vowel  to  which 
it  adds  a  very  short  [I].  (Cf.  French  *  Espagrwe.')  When  this  effect  is 
decided,  it  is  marked  in  the  transcript  by  [a^]  [o^],  etc. 

*  When  the  b  serves  to  separate  clearly  a  vowel  from  the  preceding 
consonant,  it  has  been  indicated  by  the  use  of  [j]. 

5  The  absence  of  b  in  JibBa  would  indicate  the  hard  [t]  (see  Par.  XIII  (1)). 

*  After  the  consonants  -m,  q,  m,  m,  the  b  has  no  effect. 


XIV.  B  6 

Bojirapifl 

6^jiKa 

6epi;e 

ayS-b 

3bl6b 

2  '6 


B  6.     Name:  6e.     Value 


[b,  b]. 

Eojizapin  [bAtgariJA(rJA)]i  Bulgaria 

6y/iKa  [butkA]  ^  roll  {of  bread) 

depute  [bortsa]^  shin,  tibia 

6eU!  [bei]2  beat/ 

3y6h  [zup]^  tooth 

3bi6b  [zip]^  swell,  ripple 

before  any  hard  vowel  sounds  as  6  in  '  &ooty,'  =  [b]. 

before  any  soft  vowel  sounds  as  6  in  '  6eauty,'  =  [bj. 
^  '  6 '  final  resembles  p  rather  than  b,  =  [p].     The  distinction  between 
6t>  and  6b  is  not  perceptible. 


24 


INTEODUCTION 


B  B,  B  e. 

Name:  Be. 

Value :  [v,  v]. 

Beu^nm 

BeHei\iH 

'v9ii6tsiJA  (sja)]  2 

Venice 

BijaaTb 

eudamb 

VidAt]  1 

to  betray 

BHTb 

eumb 

Vit]2 

to  wind 

BnacTb 

enacmb 

^fpast]  3.  5 

to  fall  in 

BT*  KOMHaX-fe 

eh  KOMHamm 

fkomiiAto]  3-  6 

in  the  room 

POMaHOBT, 

PoMauoeh 

rAmanAf]  * 

Rorrmnof 

JIIoGOBb 

jiiodoeb 

luboif  ]  4 

love 

BHyK-b 

enuKb 

ynuk]S 

grandson 

1  '  b'  before  any  hard  vowel  sounds  as  t;  in  '  t;an,'  =  [v]. 

2  '  B '  before  any  soft  vowel  sounds  as  ?;  in  '  tdew,'  =  [v]. 

3  '  B '  is  sounded  [f]  before  any  voiceless  consonant,  i.e.  before  p,  t,  k,  etc. 
There  is  no  difficulty  in  making  this  distinction ;  English-speaking  people 
make  it  instinctively. 

*  '  B '  when  final  =  [f ].     The  distinction  between  Bt  and  Bb  when  final 
is  negligible,  except  in  so  far  as  the  preceding  vowel  may  be  affected. 
^  '  B  '  is  often  initial  before  consonants. 


n  n,  il  n.     Name :  ne.     Value  :  [p,  p]. 


nexp-b 

Ilemph 

[potr]  2 

Peter 

nana 

nana 

[pdpA]i 

papa 

noji-b 

no/ih 

[poqi 

floor 

npiiiraxb 

npbizamb 

[prigAt]  1 

to  jump  about 

nflTb 

nnmb 

[pait]  2 

five 

nefi! 

neu! 

[pei]  2 

drink  ! 

nnxb 

numb 

[pit]  2 

to  drink 

0  cHon^ 

0  cHonrb 

[AsnApg]  2 

about  the  sheaf 

nannpoca 

nannpoca 

[pApirosA]  1'  2 

cigarette 

1  '  n '  before  consonants,  "b,  and  hard  vowels  sounds  as  ^  in  '  _pat,'  =  [p]. 

2  '  n '  before  b  and  soft  vowels  sounds  as  ^  in  'pure,'  =[p].     The  soften- 
ing before  h  is  not  so  noticeable  as  before  h,  e,  %  e,  K). 


O  $,  CD  g6.    Name :  3(|)T>.     Value :  [f,  {\. 


Opannifl 

4)aHTa3ifl 

$6pMa 

^ap^dp-b 

^ypajKKa 

^liipKaTb 

$HJl6C0$'b 


<X>paHi^m 

0aHma3iH 

0opMa 

0ap0oph 

0ypa:HCKa 

0bipKamb 

0UJlOCO0h 


[frantsiJA  (sja)] 
[fAntaziJA(4JA)] 
[formA] 
[fArfor] 

[furdJkA] 
[firkAt] 

[fitoSAf] 


France 

fancy,  imagination 

form 

porcelain 

uniform  cap 

to  snort 

philosopher 


$'  has  the  value  of  English /in  */ar,'  =[f],  or  of /in  'few,'  =[f]. 


INTRODUCTION 
9  e,  9  e.    Name:  enxa.     Value:  [f,  f]. 


25 


0e;i;opT> 

Q'edoph 

[fodAr] 

Theodore 

eoMa 

GoMa 

[fAma] 

Thomas 

KaecApa 

Kaeedpa 

[kdfedrA] 

pulpity  teacher's  desk 

Geccajiifl 

OeccajiiR 

[f9sdiiJA  (ijA)] 

Thessaly 

GeocJ)!!:!^ 

Oeo0ujih 

[fAfit] 

Theophilus 

GHXa 

euma 

[fitd] 

nume  of  this  letter 

This  consonant  appears  only  in  a  few  words  of  Greek  origin,  and  in  many 

of  these  even 

it  is  often  replaced  by  $,  which  has  exactly  the  same  phonetic 

value. 

XV.  r 

r,  r  2.    Name :  re.     Value  :  [g,  g 

■  rf.* 

(This  letter  is  never 

followed  by  H,  H,  ] 

EG,  b.) 

ToJiJiaHAiH 

FojiJiaHdiR 

[gAtandiJA  (dJA)] 

^'^  Holland 

rOBOpHTb 

eoeopumb 

[gAVAfit]  1 

to  speak 

Apyroii 

dpyeou 

[drugol]  ^ 

other 

MHoro 

MH020 

mnogA]  ^ 

much,  many 

Bpar-L 

epazh 

vrak]  2 

enemy 

ffpyr-L 

dpyzh 

druk]  2 

friend 

Bora 

Eoza 

bogA]  3 

of  God 

MflrKitt 

MRBKiU 

liiaxki]  4 

soft 

6oraTaro 

dozamaeo 

bAgdtAVA] s 

of  rich 

6ojibm6ro 

dojibmozo 

;bAiij6vA]  6 

large 

HOMamHflro 

dOMaiUHHZO 

dAmaJiiAVA]  5 

domestic,  tame 

caMoro 

caMozo 

"sAmAvol  5 

self 

BliKTop'L  Tiot6      Bunmoph  Fweo  [viktAr  gugo]  « 

Victor  Hugo 

rHHJIOH 

eHUjioii 

[gnitoi]  7 

decayed 

1  *  r  '  usu 

ally  has  the  sound  of 

grin  'grood,'  =[g]. 

2  *  r  '  when  final  has  the  sound  of  k,  =  [k]. 

3  *  r  '  in  a  few  words  is  a  deep  aspirated  voiced  guttural  sometimes  trans- 
literated by  gh  (the  same  as  the  initial  g  in  Dutch  or  the  aspirated  German 
g  in  'Segren'),  =[g]. 

*  Preceding  a  voiceless  consonant  (t,  p,  k,  etc.),  the  sound  described 
under  (3)  becomes  voiceless  like  ch  in  '  loc^ '  or  more  exactly  like  ch  in 
German  *ic^,'  =[x]. 

^  In  the  genitive  singular  termination  of  masculine  and  neuter  adjectives 
'r'=[v]. 

®  There  is  no  h  in  Russian,  and  although  the  consonant  x  is  much  nearer 
than  r  to  h,  this  letter  in  foreign  words  has  been  generally  transliterated 
by  r,  =  [g].     The  lo  transliterates  French  u. 

'  '  r '  must  always  be  pronounced,  even  when  immediately  preceding  H. 

*  In  a  very  few  words  the  dotted  [g]  has  been  used  in  the  transcript,  but  the  dis- 
tinction is  not  important. 


26 


INTRODUCTION 


K  K,  JT  K.    Name :   Ka.     Value :  [k,  k]. 

(This  letter  is  never  followed  by  H,  H),  bi,  b.) 

[kitai]  1 
[komnAtA]  ^ 

[kvoHl  1 


KhtM 
KdMHaxa 

Rumail 
KOMHama 

KBaCT, 

Keach 

KTb  HCM^ 

KTb  66pery 

K'feM'B 

KHHra 

Kb  HCMy 

Kb  6epezy 

KThMb 

KHuaa 

KpOTKitt 

Kpommii 

China 

room 

kvass 

toward  him 

toward  the  shore 

with  whom 

book 

gentle 


[knemu]  ^ 
[gb6rogu]  2 
[ksm]  3 
[knigA]  * 
[krotki]  5 
^  '  K '  usually  has  the  sound  of  A;  in  '  A;ick,'  =  [k]. 

2  There  are  in  Russian  several  prepositions  which  consist  of  a  single  con- 
sonant prefixed  to  the  noun,  and  pronounced  as  one  word  with  the  noun. 
Kt  is  such  a  preposition.  In  some  cases,  as  before  voiced  consonants 
(b,  d,  V,  etc.),  where  the  clear  sharp  value  of  k  is  almost  impossible,  the 
pronunciation  is  faciUtated  by  taking  [g]  instead  of  [k]. 

3  '  K '  before  'fe  is  pronounced  as  in  '  iCew,'  =  [k]. 
*  '  K '  must  always  be  pronounced,  even  before  H. 

^  The  termination  iii  is  pronounced  after  gutturals  with  a  slight  rounding 
of  the  lips,  but  as  this  is  not  sufficient  to  warrant  the  use  of  [i]  in  the 
transcript,  [i]  has  been  used  throughout. 

X  X,  Z  X.    Name  :  xa.     Value  :  [x]. 

(This  letter  is  never  followed  by  fl,  K),  H,  l.) 
XpHCT0(J)6p'b  Xpucmo0oph       [xristAfor]  Christopher 

xfme  xy^Mce  [XU39]  worse 

XHipbift  xiimpbiii  [xitri]  cunning 

xpa6pi>ift  xpaCpbiii  [xrabri]  brave 

oxoTHHKi)  oxomuuKb  [Axotnik]  sportsman 

AByx-b  deyxb  [dvux]  of  two 

'  X  '  has  the  sound  of  c^  in  '  loc^,'  or  of  softer  ch  in  German  *  icA,'  =  [x]. 

XVI.  J\n,  a  d.     Name  :  He.    Value  :  [d,  d]. 


JlMlR 

JJamH 

[ddniJA  (nJA)]  ^ 

Denmark 

«Ba 

dea 

[dva]i      • 

two 

H>iflH 

dndR 

[dadA] 2 

uncle 

ntA-b 

dmdb 

[dst,  dsd]  2.  3 

grandfather 

6y«b! 

6ydh! 

[biiit]  3 

be! 

^  '  3; '  before  a  hard  vowel  has  the  sound  of  d!  in  '  t^one,'  =  [d]. 

2  '  a '  before  a  soft  vowel  has  the  sound  of  c?  in  '  cZue,'  =  [d], 

3  ' « '  when  final,  before  either  the  hard  or  the  soft  sign,  approximates  to 
the  sound  of  i,  =  [t,  t]. 


INTKODUCTION 


27 


T  T,  T  m. 

Name:  xe. 

Value :  [t,  t]. 

T^P^iH 

TypqiH 

ttirtsiJA  (sJA)]  1 

Turkey 

TaKt 

maKh 

^tak]  1 

so 

TBOii 

meoR 

tvAJa]  1 

thy  (Jem.  sing.) 

Spaxt 

6pamh 

^rat]  1 

brother 

dpaxb 

6pamb 

'hTO^i]  2 

to  take 

xpH 

mpu 

tri]  1 

three 

xedii 

me6a. 

tabd]  2 

thee,  of  thee 

MBIT-b 

Mhimb 

[mit]! 

washed 

MHTb 

Mbimb 

[mit]2 

to  wash 

=[t]. 


=[t]. 


before  the  hard  sign  or  a  hard  vowel  has  the  value  of  i  in  '  tool,' 
before  the  soft  sign  or  a  soft  vowel  has  the  value  of  <  in  '  fane,' 


Hn,  IJ  i^.     Name :  ne.     Value :  [ts,  ts]. 


(This  letter  is 

never  followed 

by  K),  fl,  or  by 

unaccented  o,  which  is 

replaced  by  *  e.') 

Uapbrpaai. 

Uaphzpadh 

[tsAifgrdt]  1 

Constantinople 

^apH^a 

i^apui^a 

[tSAi-itSA]  1 

czarina 

^BifeT•B 

t^emmb 

[tSVSt]! 

colour,  flower 

mino^KH 

t^binOHKU 

[tsipAtJki]  1 

tip-toes 

miHHKT. 

V^UHUKh 

[tstnik]  1 

cynic 

i;6pK0Bb 

i^epnoeb 

[tserkAf  ]  2 

church 

i^'fejibiii 

i\rhAbiii 

[tSSti]2 

whole,  entire 

^  '  It '  has  the  sound  of  fs  in  '  hits,'  =  [ts]. 

2  or  the  sound  of  ts  in  "  it's  useless,"  pronounced  as  one  word,  =[ts]. 


XVII. 

3  3, 

3  3.     Name : 

36.     Value : 

[z,  z]. 

SanaA-b 

3anadh 

[zapAt]  ^ 

West 

3a6iiiTb 

3a6bimb 

[zAbtt]  1 

to  forget 

BHaji-b 

anajib 

r         *.n  1 

znaij  ^ 

he  knew 

SB-fepb 

serbpb 

'zv6ir]i 

wild  beast 

3flTb 

3Hmb 

•tdit]  2 

son-in-law,  or  sister's 

BflSTb 

eR3h 

>as]  3 

elm             [husband 

BH3b 

en3b 

>ais]  3 

binding 

^  '  3  '  normally  has  the  sound  of  z  in  '  maze,'  =  [z]. 

2  '  3 '  before  soft  vowels  has  the  value  of  5  in  "  he  sees  you,"  =[i]. 

3  '  3 '  when  final  before  hard  sign  =  [s],  before  soft  sign  [s]  or  [s]. 


28 


INTRODUCTION 


C  c,  C  c. 

Name :  act. 

Value :  [s,  s]. 

CeBacTonojib 

Ceeacmonojib 

[savAstopA^i]  2         Sebastopc 

COJIb 

COJlb 

[so^i]  1                      salt 

CTyjiT. 

cmyjih 

[stut]  1                     chair 

CT.  HHMt 

Cb  HUMh 

[snim]  1                    w;*7^  him 

cejia 

ceJia 

[soIa]  2                     villages 

rdjiocb 

eo/ioch 

[g6}As]  3                   ^;o^ce 

OCb 

OCb 

[os,  os]3                   aa;Ze 

1  '  c '  normally  has  the  value  of 

ss  in  '  lo55,'  =  [s]. 

2  '  c '  before  soft  vowels  has  the  sound  of  5  in  *  disunion,'  =  [s]. 

3  Final  01.  =  [s] ;  final  Cb  =  [s]  or  [s]. 

XVIII.^  mm,  m  ui.     Name :  ma.     Value :  [J]. 
(This  letter  is  never  followed  by  fl,  K),  Li,  or  unaccented  o.) 

[Jv6tsiJA  (sja)]  Sweden 

[jak] 


niB^mfl 

Uleei^iR 

mar-b 

uiazh 

mecTb 

luecmb 

6amMaKii 

daiuManu 

mi^pe 

luupe 

Ham-b 

HOmh 

^fembl 

ThlUb! 

mocc6 

uiocce 

lUoTJiaHAlH 

UIomjiaHdiR 

SIX 

shoes 
broader 
our 
eat ! 
road 


[jest] 

[bAjmAki] 

[Jlre] 

[naj] 

[jej] 

[JAS6]\.        , 

[jAttdndiJA  (dJA)]  ^  Scotland 
*  m '  has  the  sound  of  sh  in  '  swi5^,'  =  [J].     Compared  mth  the  correspond- 
ing EngUsh  sound  '  m '  is  more  mouth-filling,  and  before  the  vowel  following 
this  consonant  there  is  just  the  suggestion  of  a  [j].     It  is,  along  with  jk,  q,  m, 
regarded  as  by  nature  a  soft  consonant. 

^  m  may  precede  unaccented  o  in  foreign  words. 

UK  m,  }K  a^.     Name :  me.     Value  :  [3]. 

(This  letter  is  never  followed  by  H,  10,  bi,  or  unaccented  o.] 


JKyKdBCKlti           TKymecKiu 

;5uk6fski]  1             Zhukofsky 

wajK^a                   (Hca^Hcda 

5a5dA]  1                  thirst 

mUSlTy                                 MCUAh 

^5itp                      he  lived 

nojiojKiiTb              nojio^icumb 

pAtAgit]  1               to  put,  lay 

ji6}KKa                    Jiootcna 

'tojkA]  2                   spoon 

MyjK-b                      My^ncb 

"muj]  3                     husband 

pojKb                      po:mb 

roJ]  3                      rye 

1  '  JK '  usually  has  the  sound  of 

s  in  '  measure,'  =[^]. 

2  '  JK '  before  voiceless  consonants  (p,  t,  k,  etc.)  has  the  sound  of  sh  in 

*  swis^,'  =  [J]. 

3  Final  jkt.  or  jKb=[n. 

*  The  French  name  for  the  consonants  dealt  with  in  this  paragraph,  chuintants, 

best  describes  them. 

INTKODUCTION 

H  q,  ¥  I/.     Name :  ne.     Value :  [tS]. 

(This  letter  is  never  followed  by  a,  K),  li,  or  unaccented  o.) 


29 


HexoBt 

Hexoeh 

[tjSXAf] 

Tchechof 

Hdft 

nail 

•tjai] 

tea 

qepeai. 

uepeah 

;tJ6r9s] 

through 

Mor^qifl 

Moeyuiil 

mAgtitJi] 

powerful 

cypr^qt 

cypzyHh 

Wgutj] 

sealing-wax 

JI  CHb 

JlBHh 

letj] 

to  lie  down 

HTO 

umo 

■Jto,  tjto]  1 

what 

HOpTT. 

Hopmh 

;t|ort] 

devil 

qepHbiii 

HepHhiii 

[tjorni] 

black 

'  q '  is  pronounced  like  ch  in  '  c^at,'  =  [t  J].     Like  jk,  m,  m,  this  letter  is 
regarded  as  by  nature  a  soft  consonant. 

^  Occasionally  the  '  h  '  is  heard  without  the  [t]  element. 

m  m,  ZZ(  u/.     Name :  ma.     Value :  [StS]. 

(This  letter  is  never  followed  by  fl,  K),  bi,  or  unaccented  o.) 


m^nKHH-b 

meriKUHh 

[JtJ6pkin] 

Shtshepkin 

ll^li 

mu 

[Jtji]. 

cabbage  soup 

mejib 

li{eAh 

[jtjeil] 

crevice 

JKCHmnna 

diceninuHa 

[S^njtjin..] 

woman 

SpojKamia 

dpooicau^iii 

[drAsaJtJi] 

trembling 

Sopm-b 

6opiJHh 

[borjtj] 

beetroot  soup 

Momb 

MOlL^b 

[mojtj] 

power 

m^Ka 

iL^yna 

[jtjukA] 

pike  {fish) 

mcKa 

mena 

[Jtj9ka] 

cheek 

'm'    is   the   equivalent  of    m  +  q,    i.e. 
foolish  chatter,'  or  *  As^c^urch  '  =  [Jtj]. 


it   has  the  sound  of  shch  in 


XIX. 

M  M,  M  M.     Name : 

:  SMT,.     Value: 

[m,  lii]. 

MocKBa 

Mocnea 

'mAskvd]  ^ 

Moscow 

MblTTTb 

MbllUb 

mij]  1 

mouse 

Mosr-b 

M03Zh 

mosk]  ^ 

brain,  marrotv 

cojioMa 

cojioMa 

SAtonLAJ  ^ 

straw 

MHJIO 

MUJIO 

IhitA]  2 

dear,  nice 

MeflTb 

Medh 

mot]  2 

honey 

M'fecflU'b 

Mrbcm^h 

^m6s9ts]  2 

month,  moon 

MOMCHT-b 

MOMeHnVb 

^moihsnt]  ^'  2 

moment 

^  '  M '  before  hard  vowels  has  the  soxmd  of  English  m  in  '  mass,'  =  [m]. 
2  '  M '  before  soft  vowels  has  the  sound  of  EngUsh  m  in  *  muse,'  =  [m]. 


30 


INTKODUCTION 


H  H,  if  H. 

Name:  bht*. 

Value :  [n,  n]. 

KHKOJiaii 

HuKOAau 

[nikAtai]  2 

Nicholas 

HyjK«a 

HMH-fe 

Hy^Hcda 

HblHTb 

nu5da]  i 

nin9]i.2 

need 
nowadays 

bohtjI 

eoHh! 

von]  1 

away  I 

Hibxaxb 

Hjoxamh 

[ni'ixAt]  2 

to  smell  {trans.) 

HHTb 

Humb 

[nit]  2 

thread 

ncHb 

MOHT^Hb 

HaKaH^H-fe 
mapMaHKa 

deHb 

MoHmdHb 
HanaHyHTh 
UiapMaHKa 

^dein]  2 
montd^n]  2 
nAkAnuna]  ^'2 
jarmdnkA]  ^ 

day 

Montaigne 
eve,  day  before 
barrel-organ 

^  '  H '  before  -l  and  hard  vowels  has  the  sound  of  n  in  '  none,'  =  [n]. 
2  '  H  '  before  b  and  soft  vowels  has  the  value  of  ?i  in  '  Tiew,'  =  [n]. 
^  '  H '  before  k  and  r  does  not  take  the  value  of  English  ng,  but  retains 
the  sound  [n]. 


XX.  Jl  Ji 

:,  Jl  Jl.     JName  : 

:  3Jn>,  3Jib.      Value 

:   Lt,  1]. 

JlanjiaHAlH 

JlaiuiaHdia. 

[taptdndiJA(dJA)]i 

Lapland 

Jiana 

jiana 

[tdpA]l 

paw 

ji^naTb 

jinnamb 

[idpAt]  2 

to  smack 

Ji^quie 

jiynuie 

[tut  jo]  1 

better 

jirbSHUib 

jiio6mub 

[iubij]  2 

thou  lovest 

3JI0H 

3J10U. 

[ztoi]i 

spiteful,  wicked 

sejieHbitt 

se/ieHbiii    > 

[zoiom]  2 

green 

njiaMfi 

WiaMR 

[ptdriiA]  1 

flame 

6ojibm6ft 

60JIUIOU 

[bAiij6i]2 

big 

A-fejiajiocb 

drbjiajiocb 

[dstAtAS]  1 

it  was  done 

yHHTCJIb 

ynumejib 

[ut  jitai]  2 

teacher 

CTOJIt 

cmo/ib 

[stot]  1 

table 

CTOJIb 

cmoAb 

[St0il]2 

so 

^roji-L 

yzojih 

[ugAt]i 

corner 

:y^rojib 

y  20  Jib 

[ugAii]2 

coal 

'  JI '  has  two  sounds  which  are  so  distinct  that  they  require  the  use  of 
different  symbols. 

^  Hard  '  Ji '  has  a  sound  akin  to  that  of  I  in  English  '  battte,'  '  peopfe.' 
In  Russian  it  occurs  in  any  position,  and  may  be  produced  by  pronouncing 
I  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  drawn  back  so  as  to  touch  the  upper  palate 
just  behind  the  teeth;  =[t].  Tliis  sound  never  precedes  b  or  any  soft 
vowel. 

2  Soft  *  JI '  is  sounded  like  I  in  EngUsh  '  mi^^ion  ' ;  =  [1].  This  sound 
never  precedes  "b  or  any  hard  vowel. 


INTEODUCTION 


31 


p  p.  -P  p. 

Name :  ap-L. 

Value :  [r,  f]. 

Poccffl 

Poccia 

[rAsiJA]  1 

Russia 

pa^'b 

padh 

[rad,  rat]  i 

glad 

pflflt 

padh 

[rad,  rat]  ^ 

roWy  rank 

pyKa 

pyna 

[ruka]  1 

hand,  arm 

pibMKa 

pwMKa 

[ri-imkA]  2 

wine-glass 

K6pKa 

Kopna 

[korkA]  1 

shell,  rind 

p^aaxb 

pvbsamh 

[rszAt]  2 

to  cut 

Benpo 

eedpo 

[V9dr6]  1 

pail 

r6pbKift 

zophKiu 

[g6irki]2 

hitter 

nopT) 

noph 

[por]i 

of  times 

Ten^pb 

meuepb 

[tep^ir]  2 

now 

^  '  p '  is  never  silent  and  never  uvular.  It  is  distinctly  trilled,  as  in 
Northern  English  '  were,'  '  JSussia,'  =  [r]. 

2  Preceding  b  or  any  soft  vowel,  '  p '  is  pronounced  as  in  English  '  Harnet,' 
but  rather  more  softly,  =[r]. 


XXI.  In  ordinary  Kussian  books  accents  are  not  used. 

It  is  in  Russian,  as  in  Englisli,  important  to  learn  with  every 
word  the  tonic  accent.  A  difference  in  accentuation  sometimes 
distinguishes  to  the  ear  words  that  in  print  are  identical  in  appear- 
ance, e.g. : 


6ijiKa 

[bstk.v] 

squirrel 

SifejiKa 

[betkd] 

of  the  white  (of 
the  eye,  or  egg) 

BCApo 

[v6drA] 

fine  weather 

Bejipo 

[vadro] 

pail 

BOpOTT. 

[vorAt] 

collar 

BOpOTT, 

[vArot] 

of  a  gate 

«op6roH 

[dArogAl] 

on  the  way 

AoporoH 

[dArAgoi] 

dear 

jKapKoe 

[SarkAJa] 

hot 

H^apKoe 

[3Ark6J9] 

roast  meat 

saMOK-b 

[zdmAk] 

castle 

BaMOKT. 

[zAm6k] 

lock- 

Kanejib 

[kapai] 

of  drops 

Kanejib 

[kAp^^i] 

chapel 

KpOK) 

[kroju] 

I  cover 

KpOK) 

[kTAJli] 

I  cut 

MOID 

[moju] 

I  wash 

MOlb 

[mAJii] 

my  {fern,  ace.) 

M^Ka 

[mukA] 

torture 

MyKa 

[muka] 

flour 

Haqajio 

[UAtJatA] 

beginning 

Hanajio 

[UAtjAto] 

it  began 

njiaqy 

[ptatju] 

I  weep 

njiaqy 

[ptAtJti] 

I  pay 

nojibi 

[poll] 

sexes 

nojibi 

[pAtl] 

floors 

copoKa 

[sArokA] 

magpie 

copoKa 

[sArAka] 

of  forty 

CTdviT-b 

[stoit] 

it  costs 

CTOHT'b 

FstAit] 

it  stands 

^me 

[U39] 

narrower 

yme 

[U3S] 

already 

^xa 

[tiXA] 

of  the  ear 

yxa 

[uxa] 

flsh  soup 

32  INTEODUCTION 

XXII.  Kussian  is  richly  endowed  with  prepositions  and  particles, 
but  it  is  a  highly  inflected  language,  i.e,  the  relations  between  words 
are  indicated  by  modifications  in  the  form  of  termination  and  stem. 
For  this  reason,  no  doubt,  the  word-order,  though  by  no  means  a 
matter  of  absolute  indifference,  is  not  so  rigid  as  in  English.  The 
total  number  of  diflerent  inflections  is,  however,  small ;  the  principal 
ones  are  given  in  the  following  summary  of  regular  forms. 

SUMMARY  OF  REGULAR  FORMS 


NOUNS 

Masculines 

Hard  Form 

8oft  Forms 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

nom. 

Ty 

BI 

Vl 

H 

b 

H 

gen. 

a 

0BT> 

fl 

est 

H 

ett 

dat. 

y 

SLWb 

H) 

flM-b 

K) 

flM-L 

ace. 

•L  or  a 

bi  or  OB-b 

H  or  fl 

H  or  CBT, 

b  or  H 

H  or  en 

instr. 

OMt 

aMH 

CM-L 

flMH 

CM-L 

flMH 

prep. 

'fe 

axTb 

-fe 

flX'L 

•h 

flX'L 

(See  Lessons  IX, 

LV.) 

Femtnines 

Hard  Form 

Soft  Forms 

Sing. 

a 

Plur. 
LI 

Sing. 

Plur. 
H 

Sing. 
b 

Pll 
H 

ir. 

nom. 

H                 iH 

gen. 

M 

Ty 

H            in 

L(H)1 

H 

CH 

[ 

dat. 

* 

aMTi 

*            in 

flMT. 

H 

flM-B 

ace. 

y 

LI  or  -b  1 

lO                iK) 

HOTL 

(fi)l   b 

H 

or  eft 

instr. 

OK), 

OH 

aMH 

eK),eH    ieio(eH)   hmh 

bK) 

flMH  (LMH) 

prep. 

-h 

axi) 

^            in  2 

flXT, 

H 

flX'L 

(L 

essons 

XII,  XVII,  XXII, 

Voc.  XXXIV.) 

Neuters 

Hard  Form 

, 

Soft  Forms 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing.           Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

nom. 

0 

a 

e             H 

Mfl 

MCHa 

gen. 

a 

-b 

H                  CH  (fl)  1 

MCHH 

MCH'L 

dat. 

y 

aMt 

K)                 HMT) 

MeUH 

McnaM'L 

ace. 

0 

a 

e               H 

Mfl 

Mcna 

instr. 

OWb 

aMH 

CM-L            aMH 

MCHeMTj 

McnaMH 

prep. 

-h 

axTb 

•fe  (h)  2       flX-L 

MCHH 

Mcnax'L 

(Se 

BLe 

ssons  IX  and  LIII.) 

^  ift  is  the  gen.  pi.  termination  of  nouns  in  -Ih  and  -ie. 
2  in  is  the  prep.  sing,  termination  of  nouns  in  -Ih  and  -ie. 


INTRODUCTION 


33 


ATTRIBUTIVE 

ADJECTIVES 

Singular 

Plural 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M.        F.        N. 

nom. 

aro 

afl 

oe 
aro 

He    biH    bifl 

gen. 

bix-b 

dat. 

OMy 

oft 

OMy 

blMT. 

aco. 

Hii  or  aro    yio 

oe 

nom.  or  gen. 

instr. 

JblM-B 

oVl  (ok)) 

hlWh 

bIMH 

prep. 

OM-L 

oft 

OM^ 

MXT, 

(Lesson 

XXIII.) 

Variants : 

6tt,  ^fl, 

6e 

(Lesson 

XXIII). 

ia,  HH,  ee  (     „      XXIV). 

Kitt,  KaH,  Koe    (     „      XXV). 
mift,  man,  mee  (     „      XXVI). 

PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVES 
Nom.  Case — "b,  a,  o,  bi  (Lesson  XLIX  and  Lists,  Par.  237). 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

Comparative  in  --fee.    Lists  of  comparatives  in  -e  at  Par.  238. 
Most  useful  form  of  attributive  comparative  :  doji'fee  +  positive  degree. 
Most  useful  form  of  superlative :  caMbifi  +  positive  degree. 
(See  Lesson  L.) 

ADVERBS 

Typical  form  derived  from  the  adjective  ends  in  -o  or  -e.     (See  Par.  189  (1) 
and  lists  of  predicative  adjectives  and  comparatives.) 

PRONOUNS 

Personal  (Pars.  47  A,  69,  125,  126).       Emphatic  (Pars.  107  c,  235). 
Possessive  (Pars.  104,  105,  108,  109).     Reflexive  (Pars.  38,  103,  132). 

Relative  and  interrogative  (Pars.  47  D,  106). 

Demonstrative  (Pars.  47  C,  106,  107). 

Indefinite  (Pars.  47  E,  106). 


NUMERALS 

Cardinals  (Par.  27,  Voc.  XXXVI,  Pars.  148,  160,  166). 
Ordinals  (Pars.  166,  171,  184). 
Declension  (Lesson  XLVII). 


34  INTEODUCTION 

VERBS 
6litl1  =  To  be 

Past  Tense 
Sing. — 1st,  2nd,  3rd  persons,  CwJit,  A,  0  (see  Pars.  9,  58). 
Plur. — 1st,  2nd,  3rd  persons,  6biJlH. 

Present  Tense 
Srd  Sing.  ecTB. 
3rd  Plur.  cyxb  (very  little  used). 

Future  Tense 
Sing.  6^Hy,  enib,  ex-B. 
Plur.  Ofj^ewbf  CTe,  yxTb. 

Imperative  (Lesson  LII) 
Sing.  6y3b,  nycxb  OH-b  (oh^,  oh6)  6fjieTT>. 
Plur.  C^ACM-b,  S^AbTe,  nycxb  ohh  (oH-fe)  dyAyxi.. 

Participles 
Adjectival  '  Adverbial 

Pres.  cy^mift,  being,  that  is.  6fjiy^u,  being,  while  being. 

Past  SbiBiniii,  having  been,  that  once      Gi^iemH,   having   been,   after   having 

was.  been. 

Fut.  Cyaymitt,  about  to  be,  that  is  to 
be,  future. 

REGULAR  VERB 

First  Conjugation 

Type  H'fejiaTb  (Stem  a-fejia-)  or  naxaxb  (Stem  nam-,  nax-) 

IMPEBFECTIVE  ASPECT  PERFECTIVE  ASPECT     (See  Pars.  202-208.) 

Past  Tense  ^ 
Sing,  jitj,  Jia,  Jio  ;   Plur.  jih.  Similar  endings. 

Present  Tense 
Sing.  K)  or  y,  eiiib,  ex'b.  No  present. 

Plur.  eMTj,  exe,  lox-b  or  yxx,. 

(Lessons  XXXV,  XLII-XLIV.)  ^* 

Future  Tense 
Future  of  Gbixb  +  infinitive.  Endings  as  for  the  endings   of    the 

(Lesson  XXXII.)  imperfective  present  tense.^ 

^  6BiB^Tb,  to  be  usually  the  case,  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  1st  conjugation. 

2  This  tense  corresponds  to  the  Imperfect,  Perfect,  and  Pluperfect  in  other 
languages,  and  has  to  be  rendered  accordiag  to  the  context  by  any  one  of  these 
forms. 

'  The  perfective  aspect  may  belong  to  the  First  or  Second  Conjugation. 


INTRODUCTION  35 

IMPERFEOTIVE  ASPECT  PERFECTIVE  ASPECT 

Imperative  Mood 
2nd  Sing,  ft,  H,  b  (one  of  these).  Similar  endings. 

2nd  Plur.  ftTe,  htc,  hie. 
(Lesson  LII.) 

Participles  have  been  indicated  but  not  thoroughly  discussed 
in  this  book  (see  Preface).     (Notes  to  Pars.  80,  96,  131,  139,  167). 

Adjectival  Participles 
Pres,  (active)  -lomift,  -ymift,  formed  No  present  participle, 

from  3rd  plur.  pres.  tense, 
'  one  who  is  doing. ^ 
(passive)  -CMLifi,  from  1st  plur.  No  present  participle, 

pres.,  '  one  that  is  suffering 
the  action.^ 
Past  (active) -Bmiii,  from  sing,  of  past  -Binifi.    r,. 

tense,  '  one  who  has  done.' 
(passive)      -hhlih,      sometimes  -HHbiii  or  -tuPl. 

-Tbiii,  from  sing,  of  past 
tense,  '  one  that  has  suffered 
the  action.' 

Adverbial  Participles 
Pres.  -H,   -a,  from    3rd   plur.    pres.,  No  present. 

*  doing,'  *  while  doing.' 
Past  -BTb  or  -(B)mH,  from  sing,  of  past  -b-b  or  -buih. 

tense,  '  having  done.' 

Second  Conjugation 
Type  roBopiiTb  (Stem  roBopn-) 
Has  endings  like  those  of  the  First  Conjugation  except  in  the 
present  tense,  which  has 

Sing.  K)  or  y,  Hinb,  ht-b. 

Plur.  HM-b,  HTC,  HT-b  or  SLTh  (see  Lessons  XXXVII-XXXIX). 

The  present  participle  active  has 

-Hmifi  or  -amitt. 
The  present  participle  passive  has 

-HMblft. 

The  p:^fective  aspect  may  be  of  the  First  or  Second  Conjugation. 

Passive  Voice 
Apart  from  the  Passive  Participles  indicated  above  there  is  no 
Passive  Voice  (Par.  102). 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  THE  USE  OF  THIS  BOOK 

Naturally  tlie  first  one  is  that  the  book  should  be  used  as  it  stands. 
But  many  may  not  care  to  spend  so  long  as  is  required  by  this  method 
before  extending  their  knowledge  of  the  verb  beyond  the  infinitive 
and  past  tense.     For  them  the  following  suggestions  will  be  useful. 

(1)  As  far  as  the  end  of  Lesson  VIII  nothing  outside  the  scheme 
of  Lessons  I-VIII  should  be  taken  up. 

(2)  Attention  is  drawn  to  the  summary  of  regular  forms,  pp.  32—35. 

(3)  After  Lesson  VIII,  Pars.  123,  124  of  Lesson  XXXII  may 
be  learned  and  the  future  tense  be  practised  with  any  verb  marked  A. 

(4)  After  Lesson  XIV,  Par.  131  of  Lesson  XXXV  may  be 
learned  and  the  present  tense  of  any  verb  marked  (131)  be  practised. 

(5)  After  Lesson  XXI,  Par.  211  (gen.  rule)  of  Lesson  LII 
may  be  learned  and  the  imperative  of  any  verb  marked  (131)  be 
practised.  But  the  exact  value  of  the  imperative  will  be  appreciated 
only  after  reading  Lesson  LI. 

(6)  It  will  tend  to  clearness  and  ultimate  progress  if  the  present 
tense  of  any  other  t3rpe  than  stjiaxb  be  left  severely  alone  till  after 
Lesson  XXXI. 

(7)  Certain  Lessons,  namely  XL VII,  XL VIII,  XLIX,  L,  may 
be  read  at  any  time  after  Lesson  XX,  and  the  principles  applied, 
though,  of  course,  the  exercises  in  these  lessons  cannot  be  done  satis- 
factorily until  everything  that  precedes  them  has  been  learned,  for 
all  that  is  assumed  in  them. 

(8)  The  predicative  form  of  every  adjective  that  occurs  in  the 
lessons  and  is  used  in  that  form  (see  Lesson  XLIX)  will  be  found  in 
the  lists  in  Par.  237. 

(9)  The  lesson  on  the  Aspects  (LI)  may  be  read  at  any  time,  but 
its  principles  cannot  be  profitably  applied  till  the  present  tense  of 
all  the  main  types  has  been  mastered. 

(10)  Illustrations  of  the  script  and  phonetic  transcript  of 
the  Eussian  exercises  will  be  found  at  pp.  190,  194.  The  student 
working  without  a  teacher  might  find  it  profitable,  after  studying 
each  lesson,  to  write  out  the  transcript  in  ordinary  Eussian  script, 
and  compare  his  version  with  the  original  exercise. 


LESSON  1 1 

1.  There  is  no  article  in  Kussian. 

2.  There  are  two  numbers,  Singular  and  Plural. 

3.  Gender  is  not  determined  by  natural  sex,  but  names  of  males 
are  generally  Masculine  and  names  of  females  are  generally  Feminine. 
Names  of  things  or  abstractions  may  be  Masculine,  Feminine,  or 
Neuter. 

As  a  rule  the  form  of  a  noun  determines  its  gender. 

4.  The  typical  masculine  noun  ends  in  the  Nominative  Singular 
in  -T>,  e.g. 

CBiH'B  [sin],  a  son,  the  son,  son. 

5.  The  nominative  singular  masculine  of  the  attributive  adjective 
ends  in  -bih  or  -oii,  e.g. 

CTapuft  MyjKHK'L  [stari  mu3ik],  the  {an)  old  peasant. 
MOJiojiioii  OT^u'L  [roAtAdoI  Atsts],  the  (a)  young  father. 

6.  If  the  adjective  ends  in  -oh,  the  termination  is  always  accented. 
The  termination  -Lift  is  not  accented. 

7.  In  the  phrase  He  is  an  old  man,  the  present  tense  of  the  verb 
"  to  be  "  is  not  used  in  Eussian,  so  that 

Oh-l — CTapBiH  My^KHK-B  [on  stari  mu5ik]  means  He  is  an  old  peasant. 
Ohx — rji;^nHfi  qejiOB'feK'b  [on  gtiipi  tJatAvek]  means  He  is  a  stupid  man. 

8.  The  negative  form  of  these  phrases  is : 

Ohi. — He  cxapLift  MyjKHKT*  [on  no  stari  mu5ik].  He  is  not  an  old  peasant. 
OhT) — He  rji^HLift  HCJiOB'feK'B  [on  n9  gMpi  tJotAvek],  He  is  not  a  stupid 
man. 

The  dash  is  often  used  to  replace  the  present  tense  of  "  to  be  " 
understood. 

^  A  word  enclosed  in  round  brackets  (  )  need  not  be  translated.  The  vocab- 
ulary of  nouns  and  verbs  in  the  first  eight  lessons  has  been  deliberately  restricted 
to  a  small  number  of  words. 

37 


38  LESSON  II  §§9-11 

Vocabulary 

Jl'hj^'h  [dsd  (t)],  grandfather  cjiaSbitt  [stabi],  weak 

CbiHi)  [sin],  son  ciiJibRbiii  [siini],  strcmg,  powerful 

noM'b  [dom],  house  rjiynbifi  [gtiipi],  stupid 

Ji-fecb  [ies],  wood,  forest  ^y^MHbiii  [dmiuj,  intelligent 

XJi-feS-b  [xisp],  bread,  corn  S-fejibiti  [bsti],  white 

M^Jib^HK-b  [maiitjik],  boy  HepHbift  [tjorm],  black 

qejiOB'feK'b  [tJetAvsk],  man  HoSpbiH  [dobri],  good  (kind) 

OTCi^'b  [Atsts'],  father  njioxofi  [ptAxoi],  bad 

Ham-b  [naj],  our  cxapbifi  [stari],  old 

BauiTj  [vaj],  your  MOJionoH  [mAtAdoi],  young 

H  [i],  and  He  [ns,  ne,  na],  not 
a^  [a],  but,  and 

Exercise 
Translate : 

(1)  GTapbiH  A'feH'L.  (2)  Hami)  0x61^11.  (3)  On-b — cjiaSbiii  cxapbiH 
HCjioB'feK'b.  (4)  B'fejibiH  xji-fed-b  H  qepHbiii  xji-feS-b.  (5)  Bam-b  cbm-b — 
clijibHbiii  MOJio^dft  MajibHHK-b.  (6)  HepHbifi  Ji-fecb.  (7)  Oht, — njioxoft 
M^jib^HK-b.     (8)  Haui-b  cbiH-b — rji^nbiii,  a  eam-b  cbiH-b — ^mhhh  M^jib- 

HVLKTy,      (9)    Gxapbltt  KOMT).      (10)    HSiUYb  JSfkjS.'h — HerjI^Hblii  ^  qejIOB'feK'b. 
BaUVb  CblHh yMHblii  Ma/lbHUKh. 

LESSON  II 

9.  The  past  tense  of  Kussian  verbs  is  peculiar  in  this  respect, 
that  it  agrees  with  the  subject  in  gender  and  number,  while  it  does 
not  vary  with  the  person,  i.e.  there  is  one  form  of  the  past  tense 
which  is  always  found  with  a  masculine  singular  subject,  whether 
that  subject  be  of  the  first,  second  or  third  person,  e.g. 

H  jli'fejiaji'b  [ja  dstAt],  /  used  to  do,  I  did  do,  I  was  doin^. 

Tbi  ^  K'fejiaji'b  [ti  dgtAt],  thou  didst  use  to  do,  thou  didst,  thou  wast  doing. 

Owh  jii'fejiaji'b  [on  dstAt],  he  used  to  do,  etc. 

Ham-b  Cbm-b  A'fejiaji'b  [naj  sin  dstAt],  Our  son  used,  etc. 

10.  This  verb  corresponds  either  to  did  do  or  made.  It  will  be 
observed  that  this  masculine  past  tense  ends  like  the  noun  in  -t. 

11.  The  negative  form  is  : 

H  He  rfjiajiX)  [ja  na  dstAt],  /  did  not  do,  or  make. 

1  This  word  may  often  be  translated  by  and,  but  it  always  has  adversative  force. 

2  Instead  of  making  the  verb  negative  the  Russian  often  makes  the  adjective 
or  adverb  negative. 

*  Familiar  second  personal  pronoun  used  only  among  intimates  and  children. 


§§12-13  LESSON   II  39 

12.  In  interrogative  sentences  the  particle  jih  is  used,  e.g. 

JX^JiasiTj  JIH  ohtj?  [detAt  ii  on  ?],  Did  he  do,  or  make  ?    Was  he  doing  f 
Tbi  jih  n^Jiajit?  [ti  ii  dstAt  ?],  Didst  thou  do,  etc.  ? 

13.  This  particle  is  not  required  if  there  is  in  the  sentence  an 
interrogative  word  like  who  ?  what  ?  how  ?  when  ?  e.g. 

Hto  OHt  n-fejiajit?  [Jto  on  detAt  ?],  What  did  he  do? 
Kto  a-fejiaji-L  5to?  [xto  detAt  stA  ^\Who  used  to  do  this  (or  that)  ?  or 
Kto  5to  A'fejiaJi'b?  [xto  stA  detA-t  T\]who  was  doing  this  (or  that)  ? 
Kyna  Tbi  X0HHjn>?  [kudd  ti  xAdit  ?],  Whither  did  you  use  to  go  ? 
KaKOBt  6bijn>  qejiOB'feK'b?  [kAkof  bil  tJetAvsk  ?],  What  like  was  the  man  f 
i.e.  What  sort  of  a  man  was  he  ?     What  manner  of  man  was  he  ? 


Vocabulary 

As  the  adverbs  and  pronouns  given  in  this  Vocabulary  will  recur  again  and 
again  in  succeeding  lessons,  it  is  not  necessary  to  commit  them  all  to  memory 
before  attempting  Exercise  II. 

For  explanation  of  figure  or  letter  A  with  verbs  iji  this  and  following 
vocabularies  see  Suggestions  3-6,  p.  36. 

Gujii*  [bil],  was,  used  to  he  toti>  [tot],  that  (to,  neuter  form) 

jKHJit  A  [sit],  lived,  was  living,  used  kto?  [xto],  wTw  ? 

to  live  HTO?  [tjto,  Jto],  whit  ? 

^zvh  A  [jet],  ate,  etc.  KaKOB-B?  [kAkof],  of  what  sort  ? 

cnajn>  A  [spat],  slejpt,  etc.  KaK'L?  [kak],  how  ? 

H'fejiaji'L  131 A  [detAt],  did,  made,  etc.  TaKt  [tak],  so 

BHajiT.  131  A  [znat],  knew,  etc.  TaKon  [tAkoi],  such,  such  a 

XOAHJI'B  A  [xAdit],  used  to  go  bot-b  [vot],  there  is  !  there  are  !  see  1 

nrpajiT)  131  A  [igrdt],  played  FA'S  [gds,  gds],  where  (with  verbs  of 
upBiraJiT.    131    A  [prigAt],  jumped  rest) 

about  KyAa   [kudd],   where,   whither  (with 
paSoTaji'B  131  A  [rAbotAt],  worked  verbs  of  motion) 

fl  [ja],  /  Korna  [kAgdd],  when 

mdVi  [mol],  my,  mine  wh  [v,  f],  into 

TBI  [ti],  thou,  you  (this  pronoun  is  b^  Ji'fec'B  [vlss],  into  the  wood 

used  only  in  familiar  discourse)  xopouio  [xArAJo],  well 

TBoft  [tvoi],  thy,  thine  njioxo  [ploxA],  badly 

OKI,  [on],  he,  it  ho  [no,  ua],  but 

ero  [J8v6],  him,  it  (direct  object)  MHoro  [mnogA],  much 

ero  [J9v6],  of  him,  his,  its  HeMH6ro  [nomnogA],  {a)  little 

^TOTT*  [stAt]  (m.),  this,  that,  that  one  Ji-fexoM-B  [IstAm],  in  summer 

(^TO,  neuter  form)  SHMOtt  [zimoi],  in  winter 


40  LESSON  II  §13 


Exercises 
A.  Translate : 

(1)  Bam-L  Ji-hjiii  Gbijitj  cxapLitt  qejioB-feKt.  (2)  SumoVi  owb 
paCoxaji-b  HeMH6ro;  oh-b  cnaji-b.  (3)  H  xopom6  snajit  qepntitt 
HOMT,  (see  Par.  16  (2)),  r^-fe  oht,  jkhjii>  3HM6i4.  (4)  Hamt  OT^iXb 
Smji-l  He  TaKoft  cjiaGbm  qejioB'feK'b.  (5)  Jl-feTOM-L  oh-l  xoahji-l  b-b 
Jiifecb,  rjifb  owb  MH6ro  paGoxajit.  (6)  Ero  cbiH-b  Oliji'l  ;^MHbii! 
MajibHHK-b.  (7)  JlibTOMTj  OH-b  HrpajiB  H  npi^iraji-b.  (8)  Ho  oht. 
ObiJi-b  Herji^nbifti  MajibHHK-b.  (9)  TA-fe  OH-b  nrpaji-b  3hm6h?  (10)  Tbi 
HeMHoro  padoxajiB  bhmoh;  xh  He  xoahjib  B-b  Ji-fecb.  (11)  ^xoxx) 
Majib^HKB  -feji-b  6ijibiH  xjiifeSB.  (12)  Tbi  xopouio  BHajiB  Ham-b  aomb. 
(13)  Tbi  er6  snaji-b.      (14)  Mofi  mojio«6h  cbin-b  anajiB  XBOii  aomtj. 

(15)    BOXX,  MOtt  CblHX,.       (16)    B0XT>  OH-b. 

Mou.  MOJiodou  cbiHh  ana/ih  meoii  doMh. 

B.  Bonpocbi  {=  questions). — This  rather  mechanical  exercise 
serves  a  twofold  purpose  :  it  affords  practice  in  the  interrogative 
forms  and  repeats  the  vocabulary  and  phrases  of  Exercise  A. 

(1)  Kxo  6bijn>  cxapbiii  qejioB'feKB?  (2)  Hxo  ohx>  a^Jiajix.  3HM6fi? 
(3)  K^Kx>  H  anaji-b  somi>,  r^-fe  >khjix>  Bamx,  n-fea-b?  (4)  Kxo  h6  6bijn> 
xaKOH  cjia6biH?  (5)  Kyjia  ohb  xonHjn>?  (6)  Kor^^  OH-b  xojiiijib 
B-b  Ji-fecx)?  (7)  KaKOBB  SbiJiB  er6  CbiHx.?  (8)  Hxo  ohx>  ^'fejiaji'b? 
(9)  Hxo  ifeji-b  MajibqHK-b?  (10)  3Hajix>  jih  h  xBott  aoMT>?  [say, 
*you  knew  it'). 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Our  father  was  a  strong  young  man.     (2)  He  did  not  sleep  much. 

(3)  In  winter  my  old  grandfather  slept  but  my  father  worked  a  great  deal. 

(4)  He  worked  and  {use  conj.  a)  his  young  son  plaj'-ed.  (5)  In  summer  the  boy 
used  to  go  into  the  wood,  where  your  grandfather  lived.  (6)  Whither  did  the 
boy  go  ?  (Whither  the  boy  went  ?)  (7)  Your  intelhgent  son  well  knew  my  old 
house.  (8)  He  was  a  young  boy  ;  summer  and  winter  he  played  and  jumped 
about.  (9)  Was  he  a  stupid  and  bad  man  ?  (10)  What  did  you  eat  ?  {say 
here,  '  thou  didst  eat,  i.e.  atest ').  (11)  I  ate  the  white  bread.  (12)  What 
did  the  boy  do  in  winter  ?  (13)  What  was  the  man  like  ?  (14)  He  was  a 
kind  intelligent  man. 

^  Form  described  in  Par.  69  is  also  common. 


14-18  LESSON  III  41 


LESSON  III 

14.  The  genitive  case  of  nouns  in  -T*  ends  in  -a,  e.g. 

npyr-B,  Hp;^ra  [druk]  [driigA], /newd 
CTapiiK-L,  CTapHKa  [stArlk]  [stArikd],  old  man. 

(a)  Some  words  preserve  througliout  the  singular  the  accent  of 
the  nominative  singular,  like  apyrij.     To  this  class  belong 
all  the  nouns  in  Vocabulary  I  except  oxeu'b. 
(6)  Some  words  do  not  have  the  accent  in  the  oblique  cases  on 
the  same  syllable  as  in  the  nominative.     To  this  class 
belongs  the  word  oxei^t,  OTuia  [Atsts]  Utsa],  father. 
Note. — This  word,  like  many  other  masculine  nouns  with  e  or 
o  in  the  final  syllable  of  the  nominative  singular,  drops  that  vowel 
in  all  the  other  cases. 

15.  The  dative  case  of  nouns  in  -t>  ends  in  -y,  e.g. 

Apyr-L,  «p:^ry  [druk]  [drdgu], /ne?wi. 
CTapHKT>,  CTapHK^  [stAiik]  [stAriku],  old  man. 
OT^U'b,  OTU^  [Atets]  [KiB<i],  father. 

16.  (1)  The  accusative  case  (direct  object  of  transitive  verbs)  of 

masculine  names  of  animate  beings  has  the  same  form 
as  the  genitive. 

(2)  The  accusative  case  (direct  object  of  transitive  verbs)  of 
masculine  names  of  inanimate  things  has  the  same 
form  as  the  nominative. 

17.  So  there  are  these  two  forms  of  declension  : 

Animate  Inanimate 

nom.  «pyn>  [druk]  Jiowb  [dom] 

gen.  Ap:y^ra  [drugA]  a^Ma  [domA] 

dat.  Apyry  [drdgu]  AOMy  [domu] 

ace.  spyra  [drtigA]  ji,owb  [dom] 

18.  In  the  phrase  B'b  Jii^CL,  into  the  wood,  Jii^cb  is  the  accusa 
tive  case  after  the  preposition  bt>. 


42 


LESSON  III 


§§  19-21 


19.  Tlie  genitive  means  *  of  a  thing  or  person.'     It  corresponds 
to  our  possessive  case,  e.g. 

cani,  MyjKHK^  [sad  (sat)  musikd],  the  garden  of  the  peasant,  the  peasant's 
garden. 

20.  The  dative  means  '  to  a  thing  or  person.'     It  is  used  after 

verbs  oi  giving,  saying,  etc.  to  indicate  the  indirect  object,  e.g. 

Ont  ABJiTb  MajibHHKy  xji-feS-b  [on  dat  mailtjiku  xisp],  He  gave  the  boy 
the  bread. 

21.  The  genitive  and  dative  of  pronouns  used  in  this  lesson  are  : 

from  fl 

TM 

OHt 

OHiS 

KTO 

( ^TOTt 

\     5to 

TOTt 
HTO 


(a)  meiiA^  [rhana],  of  me  (6)  uwh  [mns],  to  me, 

Te6ii  1  [t8bd],  of  thee  Te6i  [tabe],  to  thee, 

ero  1  [J9v6],  o/  Mm,  his  euf  [jamii],  ?o  Mm, 

HXT,  1  [jix],  o/  «^m,  their  hmt.  [jim],  to  ^^m, 
K6r6?  ^  [kAvo],  o/  ii?^m  ?  whose  ?    kom^?  [kAmu],  to  whom  ? 

^Toro  1  [stAVA],  of  this  ^TOMy  [stAmu],  to  this, 

Tor6 1  [tAv6],  of  thil  Touf  [tAmti],  to  that, 

Her6?  [tj9v6],  of  what  ?  qcM^?  [t/amu],  to  w;;ia«  ? 


VOCABULAEY 


6p^Ti>,  a  2  [brat],  brother 
BufKTi,  a  [vnuk],  grandson 
apyrij,  a  [druk], /nerifi 
oropoAt,    a    [AgAr6t],    kitchen- 
garden,  orchard 
caaij,  a  [sad,  sat],  garden 
CTapi^Kt,  a  [stArik],  art  oZ^i  maw 
MywHK-L,  a  [mu5ik],  a  peasant 
Ciipi),  a  [sir],  cheese 
juajit  [dot],  gave 
CKaaajTb  [skAzdt],  said;  told 
noKasaJii.  [pAk.\zat],  showed 


roBopi^[jn>  A  [gAVAfft],  spoke 

Ten6pb  [tap6*r],  now 

HHKorfla  [iiikAgda],  nsver 

Tor^a  [tAgda],  then 

TaMt  [tarn],  there 

BjlfloCh  [zdes  (s)],  here 

OHeuh  [otjen],  very 

^T0  [tjto,  Jto],  that  (conjunction) 

no-p^ccKH  [pArtiski],  Russian,  in 

Russian 
no-aHrjiificKH  [pAongifski  or  pAon- 

giiski],  {in)  English 


Owh  HHKorAa  hc^  roBopHjn>   no-p;^ccKH  [on  nikAgdd  n9  gAVAflt 
pATuski],  He  never  spoke  Russian. 

1  Are  also  accusatives.     Sxoro  and  Tor6  are  used  as  the  accusative  only  of 
animate  beings. 

2  When,  in  the  Vocabulary,  the  genitive  termination  is  not  accented,  the  accent 
falls  throughout  as  in  the  nominative  singular. 

^  Notice  the  double  negative  used  in  the  Russian  form  for  he  never,  etc.     So 
with  all  negative  adverbs  and  indefinite  pronouns. 


§21  LESSON  III  43 


Exercises 

A.  Give  tlie  genitive,  dative,  and  accusative  of 

CBIH'B,    XJI'feC'b,    M^JIbHHKt,    CTapi^KT.,    OT^lXby    H,    OH'b,    KTO. 

B.  Translate : 

(1)  M^jibqHK'b  aajiT*  exapHK^  tot-b  qepHHft  xjiifeGt.  (2)  TboK 
HoSpMft  OT^JXb  noKaa^jit  Mwh  TBoii  cani.  h  oropoA-L.  (3)  Bairnb 
BHyK-L  uhi'h  CKas^ji-B  5to.  (4)  Ohtj  MeH>i  hc  simsi-b.  (5)  H  Te6it 
He  SHajiTj.  (6)  Ero  ^mhhh  chht>  noKaaajit  ie6'k  Mott  CTapLitt  aomt*. 
(7)  H  noKasaji-B  cilHy  6'^jiuVl  aom-l  Spaxa.  (8)  5to — He  S-fejibift,  a 
HepHbia  xji-feS-b.  ^(19)  H  najiT)  cm^  Bami*  Cbip-b.  (10)  OH'b  ero  "fejii*. 
(11)  Hx-b  Spax-b  YoBopHJi-b  xopomo  no-pyccKH,  ho  OH'b  roBopiijiXi 
xoraa  oqeHb  hjioxo  no-anrjiiiieKH.  (12)  Tn'fe  Bam-b  ox^n-b? 
(13)  Ohx>  xenepb  a^'fecb.  (14)  JI'fexoMT.  CHJibHbift  MyjKHK'b  xoA^Ji'b 
Bx.  Ji-fecX);  OHx>  xaMx>  pa66xajix>.  (15)  TBoft  BHyKX>  noKa3ajix>  MH-fe 
orop6ax>  oxna.  (16)  Hami.  npyrx>  6biJii>  xor^a  MOJioffoii,  a  oht, 
xen6pb  cx^pbiii  HejiOB'feKx>.  (17)  H  xopom6  sHajix.  cx^pbitt  flOMX>, 
rji'h  JKHjix>  cxapiiKX>.     (18)  Tbi  HHKoraa  ne  paCoxajn*. 

C.  BonpocBi: 

(1)  KoM^  MajibqHKx>  najix>  Hepnbiii  xji^6i)?  (2)  ^xo  ohx>  cm^ 
a^jn>?  (3)  Hxo  MH-fe  noKa3ajn>  XBoii  ox6nx>?  (4)  Hxo  MH-fe  cnaaaji'b 
Bann>  bh^k-b?  (5)  Hxo  xeS-fe  noKa3^jn>  er6  cbiHX>?  (6)  Kom;^  h 
noKa3ajix>  ^omx.  6paxa?  (7)  Hxo  ohx>  'fejix>?  (8)  Kxo  roBopiijix> 
xopomo  no-pyccKH?  (9)  KaKX>  oht.  roBopiiJix>  xorj];a  no-aHrjiificKH? 
(10)  Kyjia  xoAiijn>  ji'fexoMx>  cxapbiii  My>KHKx>?  (11)  Hxo  ohi.  Tawb 
n-fejiajii.?     (12)  Hxo  MU'h  noKa3ajix>  XBoii  BnyKX.? 

Hyda  xodu/ih  jirbmoMh  cmapbiii  My^cuKb? 

D.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  brother's  garden ;  the  peasant's  kitchen-garden ;  the  father's 
house  ;  to  the  old  man's  son  ;  he  is  an  intelligent  boy  ;  that  is  his  white  house  ; 
your  black  bread ;  did  he  know  that  ?  what  did  he  do  in  summer  ?  he  used 
to  go  into  the  wood  ;  I  said  to  the  boy's  friend ;  I  spoke  English  badly  then. 

(2)  To  him,  to  me,  of  thee,  of  them,  to  whom,  of  that,  I  showed  him  that. 

(3)  There  he  is  ;  there  is  the  old  man  ;   he  was  never  there. 

(4)  He  showed  me  your  garden.  Who  was  speaking  ?  I  did  not  know 
where  he  (was).  Their  son  gave  them  your  old  house.  To  whom  did  he 
give  it  ?     He  said  that  you  (were)  there. 


[Xm 


44  LESSON  IV  §§22-26 

LESSON  IV 

22.  The  genitive  is  also  used  after  many  prepositions,  e.g.  y  [u],  at. 

23.  y  OTUia.  [u  Atsa]  means  at  the  father' Sy  i.e.  at  his  house,  at  his  place 
of  business,  in  his  possession,  near  him. 

y  MCHii  [u  riiand]  means  in  my  possession,  at  my  house,  etc. 

24.  (a)  The  form  most  frequently  used  to  express  our  verb 
to  have  is  a  combination  of  the  phrase  in  Par.  23  with  the  requisite 
tense  of  the  verb  "  to  be,"  e.g. 

(1)  y  oxna  Shjii.  MOJioaoii  chh-l  [u  Atsa  bit  mAtAdoI  sin],  The  father 
had  a  young  son. 

(2)  y  MyjKHKa  6i>ijn>  cxapbifi  hom'B  [u  mu5ika  bit  stari  dom],  The 
peasant  had  an  old  house.     , 

(3)  y  Hero  Shjite.  ;^MHHfi  Spax-L  [u  navo  bit  timni  brat],  He  had  an 
intelligent  brother. 

(4)  y  HHXt  dbiJi-B  xopomitt  xji-fedi.  [u  nfx  bit  xAr6Ji  xisp],  They  had 
the  good  bread,  ^t^ 

(h)  To  s^HRe  present  tense  of  the  phrases  in  (a)  the  verb  is 
simply  omjWa,  e.g. 

y  OT^j^pMOJiOAoft  CLIH-L  [u  Atso  niAtAd6i  sin],  The  father  has  a  young  son. 

(c)  The  usual  interrogative  form  is  : 

BBun.  Ji^  y  Hero?  etc.  [bil  ii  u  navo].  Was  there  to  him  ?  i.e.  Had  he  ? 

EcTb  JiH  y  Hero  xji'feO'L?  etc.  [jest  ii  u  n8v6  xisp  ?],  Is  there  to  him,  i.e. 
Has  he  the  bread  ? 

25.  In  examples  (3)  and  (4)  of  the  last  paragraph  notice  y  Hero 
and  y  hhx'B.  The  obUque  cases  of  the  third  personal  pronoun  when 
governed  by  any  preposition  always  have  this  H  prefixed.  We 
say  y  Hero  [u  ngvo],  in  his  'possession,  etc.,  but  y  ero  OTi^a  [u  jovo 
Atsa],  in  his  father^ s  possession,  because  it  is  oma,  not  ero,  that  is 
governed  by  the  preposition. 

VOCABULAKY 

xopomiii  [xAroJi],   good  (the   most  oanamAbi  [Adnasdi],  once 

general  equivalent)  pasT.  [raz,  ras],  once 

3ji;op6Bbiii  [zdArovi],  healthy  ji;jih  [dia,  diA], /or       ")  govern  the 

SojibHott  [bA^inoi],  ill,  sick  Sea-b  [bss,  bos],  without  Y^        .  . 

q^CTO  [tJastA],  often  y  [u],  at  i     ^ 

eCTb  [jest],  there  is,  there  are,  there  exist 


§26  LESSON  V  45 

^      ^  ,  EXEECISES 

A.  Translate : 

(1)  ]J,Jifi  Majib^HKa.  (2)  Besi,  cxapHK^.  (3)  Y  ap^ra.  (4)  V 
Hero.  (5)  JXsin  Menn;  y  HHXTb;  hjih  tcSh.  (6)  J^jih  Kor6?  (7)  y 
Kor6?  (8)  BesT,  tcSh.  (9)  y  oma.  (10)  J^jih  OTua.  (11)  r«* 
atHjn>  «66pBm  cx^pbifi  Jipyrt  OT^a?  (12)  Hto  cm^  aajii.  TBOtt 
ot^htj?  (13)  OnHa>K«bi  OH-b  Aajii  nejioB'feKy  xopomiii  d-fejitm  aomt.. 
(14)  KoM^  OH-b  CKaa^ji-b  6to?  (15)  JI-fexoM-b  ^tott,  MajibHHK'b  dbiji-b 
qacTo  y  MyjKHKa.  (16)  Tor^a  Bami.  ;^MHbiii  npyr-b  jKHJi-b  s^ifecb. 
(17)  3hm6h[  CMH'b  TaM-b  padoxaji-b  Sea-b  OTita.  (18)  Tbi  xopomo  anajii. 
5to.  (19)  Bpax-b  oxua  CKasaji-b  hmi.  5xo.  (20)  Kyjta  MajibHHK'b 
qacxo  xo^HJiTb  ji-fexoMX.?  (21)  Mo^  MOJioAott  BHyK-b  xen6pb  y  Mena. 
(22)  Kxo  SbiJi-b  xorAa  y  Te6A'>  (23)  y  uenA  aa-fecb  noSpbiii  Apyr-b. 
(24)  y  ^xoro  My>KHKa  SbiJi-b  qepHbiii  xji-fedx..  (26)  Gbip-b  h6  sjih 
xe6ii,  a  sjih  hhxx..  (26)  OhX)  nHKor^d  ne  nrpdji-b  y  mchh. 
Ee3h  dpyea  HHunozda  He  xodujvb  eh  jivbch. 

B.  Translate  into  Eussian : 

(1)  The  peasant's  friend  was  a  kind  intelligent  man.  (2)  To  whom  did 
he  give  [he  gave]  the  good  white  bread  ?  (3)  That  is  for  the  father.  (4)  He 
lived  then  at  the  son's.  (5)  He  is  now  without  a  friend.  (6)  The  black 
bread  is  for  their  grandson.  (7)  In  summer  he  hved  at  his  father's.  (8)  The 
peasant's  kind  friend  is  not  a  powerful  [strong]  man.  (9)  Who  gave  him  that  ? 
(10)  To  whom  did  he  show  your  old  house  ?  (11)  They  have  a  sick  son. 
(12)  At  their  friend's.  (13)  At  whose  house  ?  (14)  Who  is  here  ?  (15)  When 
did  he  live  with  him  ?  (16)  He  lived  with  me  then.  (17)  He  never  lived  with 
me.  (18)  There  is  his  friend.  (19)  Have  you  a  father  ?  (20)  Had  he  an 
old  house  ? 

LESSON  V 

26.  -T>  is  the  hard  termination  for  masculine  nouns.     But  there 
are  many  masculine  nouns  ending  in  the  nominative  case  in  -b  or  -ft 
with  corresponding  soft  terminations  in  the  other  cases,  e.g. 
Hard  Endings  Soft  Endings 

nom.  oxeu'b  [Atsts]  napb  [tsa^r],  czar  repofi  [g9r6i],  hero 

gen.  oxna  [Atsd]  napii  [tsAra]  repofl  [garoJAJ 

dat.  OXH^  [Atsy]  napib  [tsAru]  rep6K)  [garoju] 

ace.  oxna  [Atsa]  napii  [tsAra]  repofl  [goroJA] 

(a)  b  is  always  preceded  by  a  consonant,  Vi  always  by  a  vowel. 
(6)  As  stated  in  Par.  16,  names  of  inanimate  things  have  the 
same  form  for  accusative  and  nominative. 


46  LESSON  V  §27 

27.  Instead  of  the  nom.  plur.  and  the  ace.  2>^ur.,  the  genitive 
singular  ^  is  used  after  the  forms  HE  a  [dva],  two,  xpn  [tfi],  three, 
HCTbipe  [tSstirg],  four,  e.g. 

SB  a  cajxa  [dva  sadA],  two  gardens. 

qcTiipe  CTapHKa  [tjatirg  stArika  ],/o2*r  old  men, 

TpH  i^ap;i  [tri  tsAra],  three  czars. 

Vocabulary 

paSoTHHK'b,  a  [rAb6tnik],  workman  MaJiCHbKifi  [maianki],  small 

OJi^Hb,  fl  [Ai6^n],  stag  SojibmoH  [bA^ijoi],  big 

Uapb,  H  [tsa^r],  czar  xp^6pbiH  [xrabri],  brave 

cap^ii,  H  [sAiai],  cart-shed  p66KiH  [ropki],  timid 

repoii,  h  [garol],  hero  SpyroH  [drugoi],  other 

aBopeit'bj^-piia  [dvArsts,  dvArtsa],  TOJibKO  [to^ikA],  only 

palace  OHli  [aiu],  they  (m.  and  n.) 

ojUliH'b  [Adi'n],  07ie,  certain  no  -  ^pann^acKH    [pAfrAntsuski], 
SoraxHii  [bAgati],  rich  French,  in  French 

S-feAHbiii  [bsdni],  poor 

.    rri       IX  Exercises 

A.  Translate : 

(1)  Bea-b  rep6H.  (2)  ^jih  cxapHKa.'  (3)  JXbq.  cxapHKa.  (4)  V 
Ltapa.  (5)  Bea-b  oji6hh.  (6)  Tpn  rep6fl.  (7)  Bojibm6ft  capaii. 
(8)  XpaSpbift  rep6ii.  (9)  GnjibHbifi  i^apb.  (10)  3«op6Bbiii  Majib- 
qHR-b.      (11)  MojioA^ti  cbiH-b  i^apii.     (12)  y  tqQA  Gor^xbiti  Apyri.. 

B.  Translate : 

(1)  BibflHbift  MyjKHK'b  SHajiT.  rep6fl.  (2)  XpaSpbifi  rep6tt — n6- 
6pbiii  qejioB'feK'b.     (3)  3hm6h  cxapbiii  paSoxHUK-b  ne  qacxo  xoAiiji-b 

B-b   CSLKb.      (4)   Jl'fexOM'b  Bam-b  dOJIbHOH   CblH-b  JKHJI-b   sjxifecb.      (5)   Tflife 

OH-b  xen6pb?  (6)  Y  oxita  xpn  ciAim;  BOTit  ohpiI  (7)  V  MyjKHKa 
xenepb  oneuh  MajicHbKiii  oropoji'b  Sea-b  capdn;  ohx.  hc  dor^xbiii,  ho 
OHSHb  S-fenHbiii  qejiOB'feK'b.  (8)  Paa-b  c^JibHbifi  i^apb  aaji-b  repoio 
Gojibuioii  AOM-b.  (9)  y  cxapnK^  qexiiipe  BH^Ka.  (10)  y  Her6 
dojibHoii  cbiH-b.  (11)  OjtHHTb  cbiH-b  napfl  roBopHJi-b  xoponi6  no- 
$paHny^3CKH  H  no-p^ccKH,  a  npyrofi  roBopIiJi'b  x6jibK0  no-p;^ccKH. 
(12)  H  ero  HHKorAa  ne  anaji-b.  (13)  Fjifb  mun-b  6ojibm6ii  ojienb? 
ffpysoU  cbiHh  eoeopujih  mojibKO  no-pyccKu. 

C.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  At  the  father's.     (2)  The  czar's  friend.     (3)  Without  the  hero.     (4) 
For   the   stag.     (5)  Two   cart-sheds.     (6)  Three   peasants.     (7)  Four   boys. 
1  See  Pars.  179,  180.  2  Dechned  hke  ot^u-b. 


§§28-32  LESSON  VI  47 

(8)  Three  palaces.  (9)  Without  whom  ?  (10)  For  me.  (11)  At  his  house. 
(12)  Without  him.  (13)  Without  it.  (14)  The  czar  had  a  great  palace. 
(15)  He  was  never  a  timid  boy.  (16)  Your  friend  spoke  French,  but  very 
badly.  (17)  The  stupid  man  did  not  often  work  ;  he  slept.  (18)  Where  did 
the  peasant's  son  use  to  go  in  winter  ?     (19)  For  that.     (20)  Without  them. 


LESSON  VI 

28.  In  negative  phrases  the  genitive  of  the  object  is  used  instead 
of  the  accusative,  e.g. 

fl  aHajn)  homT)  [ja  znat  dom],  /  knew  the  house. 

fl  He  SHajii.  AOMa  [ja  na  znat  domA],  /  did  not  know  the  house. 

29.  The  genitive  is  used  also  instead  of  the  nominative  in  the 
negative  forms  corresponding  to  the  examples  given  in  Par.  24,  e.g, 

y  meuA  H-hTb  xji-feSa,  H-feT-B  capan  [u  mana  nst  xiebA,  net  SArdJAJ,  1 
have  no  bread,  no  cart-shed. 

This  word  H'^T'l  represents 

He  ecTb  [lie  jest],  not  is. 
He  cyTb  [ns  sii^t],  not  are. 

30.  The  genitive  is  used  after  adverbs  of  quantity,^  e.g. 

MHoro  xji'feSa  [mnogA  xiebA],  much  bread  (or  com). 
Majio  Ji'feca  [matA  Issa],  little  forest. 

31.  The  forms  given  in  Pars.  29-30  are  really  all  examples  of  the 
partitive  genitive  (cf.  the  French  forms  je  n'ai  pas  de  maison, 
heaucowp  de  pain).  This  partitive  genitive  appears  also  in 
simple  affirmative  phrases  without  any  adverb  or  measure  of 
quantity,  e.g. 

Owh  \i.wh  flajii*  xji'feSa  [on  jim  dat  xisbA],  He  gave  them  bread,  i.e.  some 
bread. 

Out  HMT.  Aajn>  XJi-feSi.  [on  jim  dot  xlsp].  He  gave  them  the  bread. 
Cf.  French  il  leur  donna  du  pain,  il  leur  donna  le  pain. 

32.  The  great  majority  of  Russian  verbs  have  the  infinitive  in 
-Tb,  e.g.  6hiTh  [bit],  pa66TaTL  [lAbotAt].  From  this  infinitive  is 
formed  the  masculine  past  tense  by  changing  Tb  into  Jit,  e.g. 

jKHTb,  >KHjn>  [3it,  ^li],  to  live,  lived. 
cnaxb,  cnajit  [spa^t,  spat],  to  skep,  slept. 
1  See  Voc,  XL. 


48  LESSON  VI  §33 

33.  The  infinitive  is  used  in  many  common  idioms  corresponding 
to  om:  English  forms,  e.g, 

Oht.  xoT'feji'L  Hrp^Tb  [on  xAtst  igrd^t],  He  wished  to  play. 
H  He  Mor-B  cnaTb  [ja  ne  mog  spa^t],  /  could  not  sleep. 

VOCABULAEY 

OBecb,^  BCd  [avos,  Afsa],  oats  cfeflTb  A  [s6jot],  to  sow       kiX^aaa^ 

HqM^Hb,  A  [J9tjm6^n,  d],  barley  roHiiTb  131  A  [gAnd^t],  to^unt) 

ocejii)/  cji^  [Asot,  Astd],  ass  noHHMaTb    131    A    [pAnimd^t],    to 
H^TTo  [nst],  no,  there  is  not  understand 

aa,  yes  KyoHTb  [kupit],  to  buy 

noqeMy?  [pAtJemti],  why  ?  xoT^Tb  A  [xAt6^t],  to  wish 

M^Jio  (adv.)  [mdtA],  little  ♦  tcTb  (irreg.)  A  [Jest],  to  eat 

CKOJibKO   [sko^kA],  how  mwihy  how  6biTb  [bit],  to  be 

many  jKHTb  A  [sit],  to  live  etc.,  see  Par. 
HHqer6   {gen.  of  HHqxd)  [iLitj9v6],  32  and  Vocab.  II 

nothing  n  Mdnb  [ja  m6g],  /  could 
KaK6ii  [kAk6I],  what  ?  what  sort  of? 

Exercises 

A.  Give  the  genitive,  dative  and  accusative  of 

oceji-b,  HHM^Hb,  uymikKh,  capM. 

B.  Translate : 

He  has  much  bread,  he  has  no  oats,  ^p  garden,  no  father,  no  friend,  little 
barley,  no  ass,  how  much  bread  ?  had  he  the  oats  ?  have  I  any  bread  ? 

C.  Translate : 

1  did  not  buy  bread,  oats,  barley,  an  ass,  a  house. 

D.  Translate : 

(ni  TT      '  y,  A  \    /  hve  here,  sleep,  eat,  hunt  the  stag,  buy  a  garden. 

E.  Translate:     ^jj^^ 

(1)  HcTiipe  ocji^.  (2)  Bes-b  nqMCHji.  (3)  JXzvr  ocjia.  (4)  Ocji^. 
(6)  BbijiT.  TorA^  6HeHb  CEfJibHHfi  H  CoraTbiH  napb;  y  nerd  Gbuii. 
GoJibmoH  ABop^U'b.  (6)  Y  napH  dbiji-b  jtpyr-b-repott.^  (7)  L^apb 
naji-b  rep6io  «Ba  n6Ma  h  6ojibm6ft  Ji-fecb.  (8)  JI-feTOM'b  gh-b  xoT'feji'b 
roHATb   oji^HH.      (9)  Brb^Hbifi  MyjKHK'b  noKaaajiT.  ^Mf   xpn  ojichh. 

^  Declined  like  ox^ut,  note  to  Par.  14. 

2  Treat  these  two  nouns  as  one  compound  noun  or  as  a  noun  plus  an  adjective 
clause. 


•iaWI 


r^  '<r 


§34  LESSON  VII  49 

(10)  MajieHbKift  cbiH-L  xoT-fejit  qacxo  nrpaTb,  a  er6  OT^ixb  He  xoT-feji-L. 

(11)  Oh-l  6bijn>  He6oraTi>iH  HejiOBfeK-B;  y  Hero  Majio  xji-feSa,  ho  ohi. 
cfenSib'^Horo  HHMeHH  H  OBca.  (12)  3HM6ii  ohi»  ne  Mon>  padoTaxb. 
(13)  GnjibHbift  napb  xot^jit.  Kynnxb  ero  MajieHbKift  aomt..  (14)  V 
MyjKHKa  TOJibKO  flBa  ciina;  ojtHH'b  chhi.  mhofo  padoxaji-b,  Apyroli 
HHKorjia  HHHero  ne  A^jiaji-b,  ho  ohb  -feji-b  xop6mifi[  xji-feS-b  y  oxna. 
(15)  Oxeii-b  HHKoraa  ne  xox'fejn>  aaxb  ei^^  xji'fe6a.  (16)  CxapHK'b 
flaji-b  ocjiy  MHoro  OBca.  (17)  y  Her6  H-fex-b  H^ivieHH.  (18)  H  Morx. 
xojibKo  Majio  noHHMaxb. 

Omei^h  HUKOzda  He  xommjih  damb  eMy  xjimda. 

F.  Bonpocbi: 

(1)  KaKdii  apyrx.  6bijix.  y  ^apfl?  (2)  Hxo  eivi;^  najix,  uapb? 
(3)  CK6jibK0  0HX>  eM^  Aajix.?  (4)  Koraa  repott  xox'fejix>  roHHXb 
oji6hh?  (5)  Hxo  eM^  noKaaaJix.  MyrnHKij?  (6)  Hxo  xox'fejix»  nacxo 
A'fejiaxb  CbiH-b  MyjKHKa?  (7)  Mnoro  jih  obc^  y  MymnKa?  (8)  Kor«a 
MyjKELKx.  Majio  pa66xajix>?  (9)  KaK6BX>  6bijiX)  oaHHx>  cbiHx>?  (10)  A 
jtpyrofi?     (11)  IIoqeM;^  oxenx.  ne  xox-fejiX)  aaxb  5xoMy  CHHy  xji-feSa? 

(12)  Hxo  cxapHKX>  Aajix>  ocjiy? 

G.  Translate : 

(1)  I  did  not  wish  to  buy  it.  (2)  The  czar's  young  friend  was  hunting 
the  stag.  (3)  Did  he  see  the  stag  ?  (4)  No.  I  do  not  know  why  he  did 
not  understand  it.     (5)  What  sort  of  a  house  did  the  man  give  him  ? 


LESSON  VII 

34.  Neuter  nouns  end  in  -o  or  -e  (-e  if  accented)  and  are  declined 
thus  : 

Habd  Form  Soft  Forms 

nom.  ceji6  [s9t6],  village  ^  Mope  [more],  sea      nnxbe  [pitjo],  drinh 

gen.  cejia  [seta]  Mopn  [m6rA]  HHXbfl  [pitjd] 

dat.  cejiy^  [satii]  M6pio  [mofu]  nnxbib  [pitju] 

ace.  cejio  [seto]  Mope  [mora]  HHXbe  [pitjo] 

(a)  Nominative  singular  ends  in  -o  or  -e,  -e  (always  accented). 
(6)  Genitive  and  dative  have  the  same  endings  as  the  mas- 
culine nouns. 

'  (c)  Accusative  has  the  same  form  as  nominative. 

This  is  true  of  all  i^euter  substantives  and  adjectives. 

^  With  a  church. 

D 


50  LESSON  VII  §36 

35.  Adjectives  like  nouns  have 

_  ,    rmasc.  6'fejii.itt  [bsti],  white 

Haed  EroiNGS  1  {^^^^    64jioe  [b«Ajl] 

^    rmasc.  SojibHott  [bA^in6t],  sicjfc,  ill 

I      Ineut.   SojibHoe  [bA^in6J9] 

cs        ^  ,  o    fjoiasc.  ciiHift  [sfrd],  blue 

or  Soft  Endings  3  -^       ,       ,        r-..      -, 

'        Ineut.   CHHce  [sineja] 

(a)  If  tlie  stem  ends  in  K,  r,  x,  m,  h,  m,  ii|,  itt  not  tifi  must 
be  written,  e.g.  MajieHbKifi  [maienki],  small. 

Similarly  we  must  write  ee,  not  oe,  when  the  o  is  not  accented, 
after  jk,  h,  m,  m,  i^,  e.g. 

xopomifi,  xopomee  [xAr6Ji,  xArojaja],  good. 

,  Vocabulary 

ceji6,  a  [s9t6,  a],  village  BK^CHbift  [fkusni],  mce  {to  taste) 

M6pe,  H  [mora,  a],  sea  Kiicjibiii  [kisti],  sour 

h66o,  a  [nsbA,  a],  shy,  heaven      diAt^iiHiH  [siiii],  blue 
iiSjiOKO,  a  [jab^AkA,  a],  apple  Moii,  Moe  [moi,  mAJo],  my,  mine 

3ji;aHie,  h  [zdanjg,  a],  building  TBOii,  TBoe  [tvoi,  tvAJ6],  thy,  thine 

riHTbe,  H  [pitjo,  a],  drink  KOTopbift,  oe  [kAt6ri,  Aja],  which 

K^maHbc,  fl  [kiiJAnja,  A\,food  namt,  name  [naj,  naja],  our,  ours 

i;B'feT'b,  a  [tsvet,  a],  colour  BauiTb^  ^W^  ['^^J'  ^^\^\  your,  yours 

noTOMT)  [pAtom],  then,  thereupon  ^TOXb^'i^Td  fstAt,  stA],  this,  that 

BOTT)  noHCMy  [vot  pAtJamu],  that  is      TOT-b,  to  [tot,  to],  that 

why  OflHO  {neuter  of  o^HH'b)  [Adno],  one, 

cn-fejibiH  [spsti],  ripe  a  certain 

yneHbe^ — CB'feT'b,  a  neyq^Hbe^ — TbMa  [utJ6nJ9 — svet,  a  nautj^nja — - 
tma],  Learning  is  light,  but  ignorance  is  darkness. 

Exercises 
A.  Translate  : 

(1)  BK^CHoe  iiSjiOKO.  (2)  CnHlii  nB-fex-b  H^Sa,  (3)  Cihiee  Mope. 
(4)  B-fejioe  h66o.  (5)  Gn'fejioe  h6jioko.  (6)  MajiCHbKoe  saanie. 
(7)  Xopomiii  CHpi)  h  xopomee  nHTbe.  (8)  Box-b  XBoe  cnibjioe 
A6JI0K0.  (9)  Hame  xopomee  Kymanbe.  (10)  Kncjioe  nnxbe.  (11) 
B^me  dojibmoe  cejio.  (12)  9xo  SAanie — Sojibmofi  ABop^n-b,  koxo- 
pbifi  Aaji'b  repoio  ciijibHbiii  napb.  (13)  MajieHbKiii  cbmT>  «p^ra 
ObiJiT.  SAopoBbiH  Majib^HK-b;  OUT.  ifeji-b  5x0  6ojibm6e  h6jioko,  Koxopoe 

TH   MH-fe   naJIX*.       (14)    riOXOMTj   OWh    XOX-fejII)   HrpdXb.       (15)    MaJIbHHK-b 

HrpaJiTj  H  npbiraji'b;  BOx-b  hohcm^  h  HHKorjta  ne  Morx.  cnaxb. 
JJomoMb  OHh  xomrbjih  uzpamh. 
^  Also  spelt  -ie. 


§§36-38  LESSON  VIII  51 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  A  ripe  apple.  (2)  Tasty  food  and  drink.  (3)  Blue  sky.  (4)  For  the 
village.  (5)  Without  food  and  without  drink.  (6)  Our  little  village.  (7)  My 
good  food.  (8)  His  sour  drink.  (9)  My  old  village.  (10)  Your  timid 
old  father.  (11)  The  colour  of  the  apple.  (12)  What  was  the  peasant's 
son  eating  ?  A  nice  ripe  apple.  (13)  At  his  father's.  (14)  At  their  house. 
(15)  The  blue  sea.  (16)  That  large  building  is  not  his  house.  (17)  That  is 
the  czar's  palace  ;  his  son  used  to  live  there  in  winter.  (18)  When  did  the 
man  use  to  go  [when  the  man  went]  to  work  ?  (19)  When  did  the  Uttle  boy 
eat  the  good  food  ?  (20)  He  never  had  food  and  drink  [ne  6biJio].^  (21)  The 
great  palace  that  used  to  be  there.  (22)  That  is  why  he  worked  little  and 
played  a  great  deal.  (23)  The  poor  man  who  did  not  Imow  the  friend's  house. 
(24)  Four  villages.     Two  apples.     Three  heroes.     Two  colours. 

C.  Give  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accusative  of 
KymaHbc,  bh^kt.,  caAi.,  AQsioko,  nBopen-L,  OBecb,  h66o. 


LESSON  VIII 

36.  The  neuter  singular  of  the  past  tense  ends  in  -o,  e.g. 

masc.  OH-L  dbiJi'B  [on  bil],  he  (it)  was. 
neut.  OHO  ^  6hjio  [Ano  bitA],  it  was. 

37.  Reflexive  verbs  are  very  numerous  in  Russian.  Sometimes 
they  may  be  rendered  hterally ;  sometimes  they  are  employed 
where  we  should  use  the  passive  voice  ;  sometimes  they  correspond 
to  Enghsh  neuter  verbs  ;  sometimes  they  do  not  admit  of  a  hteral 
translation  at  all. 

38.  HpaBHTLCfl  [nravitsA],  to  he  pleasing ^  is  a  common  reflexive 

verb  ;  the  syllable  -ch  is  a  contraction  for  ce5fl  meaning  self.    The 

past  tense  is 

masc.  HpaBHJiCH  [nrdvitsA],  was  pleasing, 
neut.  HpaBHJiocb  [nravitAs],  was  pleasing. 
Note  : 

(a)  The  t  after  the  Ji  is  absent  from  the  mascuUne  form,  (b)  -CH 
is  written  -Cb  after  the  vowel  in  the  neuter. 
The  word  is  used  thus : 

^TOT'B  noMt  CMy  HpaBHJiCH  [stAt  dom  jamii  nravitsA],  This  {that)  house 
was  pleasing  to  him,  i.e.  he  liked  this  house. 

^  Note  the  accentuation  in  He  Gbijio. 

2  oh6  is  not  so  frequently  used  as  oh-b  ;  its  place  is  often  taken  by  dxo,  to,  thisy 
that. 


52  LESSON  VIII  §39 

And  so  '  /  did  not  like  the  village '  is  '  The  village  did  not  please  me,'  i.e. 
Ceji6  MH-fe  HeiipaBHJiocb  [ssto  miis  nanravitAs],  the  thing  or  person  liked 
being  the  subject  of  the  Russian  verb,  while  the  name  of  the  person  who 
is  pleased  is  in  the  dative  case : 

5to  hm-l  H6Hp^BHJiocb  [stA  jim  nanravltAs],  They  did  not  like  that. 

39.  The  dative  is  governed  by  certain  prepositions,  e.g.  KTb 
(ko)  [k,  ko,  kA],  towards : 

K'B  OTn^  [kAtsii],  towards  the  father. 
Ki.  HHM'b  [kiiim],  towards  them,  to  them. 
KG  MH'fe  [kA  mns],  towards  me,  to  me. 

Note. — KG  is  used  instead  of  Kt  before  words  beginning  with  a  combination 
of  consonants  difficult  to  pronounce ;  k,  m  and  H  together  would  be  rather 
awkward ;  the  G  is  inserted  after  k. 

Vocabulary 

KHiisB,  H  [knas],  prince  HpaBHTbCfl  A  [nravitsA],  to  he  pleas- 

MCflB'fenb,  H  [ihadv^^t],  bear  ing 

ceroAHH  [savodnA],  to-day,  lit.  of  this  coJKaji'feHie  [sA5Ai6riJ9],  regret 

day  K'B  CGJKaji'feHiK)  [ksA5Alenju],  to  one's 
AOMa  [d6mA],  at  home  (with  verbs  of  regret,  unfortunately 

rest)  BTb  Ji-fecB  [viss],  into  the  forest  (ace.) 

nGTGMy-  qxo  [pAtAmiijtA],  because  bt.  Ji-fecy  [vlesu],  in  the  forest  (Par.  46) 

BH^-fexB  A  [yidot],  to  see  b-b  ca^-B  [fsat  (d)],  into  the  garden 

HHrfl'fe  [nigde],  nowhere  bT)  ca^y  [fsAdd],  in  the  garden 

Exercises 

A.  Add  the  necessary  terminations  where  they  are  lacking  in  the 
following  phrases  : 

(1)  Mg-  gt^ii-  Ten6pB  ohchb  cxap-  qe^iOB-feK-.  (2)  Ham- 
n66p-  jJipyri).  (3)  Bam-  xopom-  K^manB-.  (4)  5t-  d-feji-  xji^S-b. 
(5)  Ero  cn-feji-  hSjigk-.  (6)  Mg-  khcji-  nnxBe.  (7)  Oh-b  xg^hji-b 
B-B  6ojiBm-  ji-fecB.     (8)  Oho  Sjbiji-  b-b  ca^y.     (9)  H  xoahji'b  K'B  Mop- 

(10)    OH'B    XGAHJI-B    K-    MH'fe.         (11)    5x-    HJIGX-    HHXBe.         (12)    HcpH- 

xji'feS'B.  (13)  Xopom-  GBecB.  (14)  MajiCHBK-  hSjigkg.  (15)  Ma- 
jieHBK-  Gceji-B.  (16)  K'B  oxLt-.  (17)  y  Gxi^-.  (18)  fljifl  6pax-. 
(19)  y  exapHK-.  (20)  Tpn  ceji-,  (21)  Hexi;ip-  capa-.  (22)  y 
repo-.  (23)  Ham-  rji^n-  MaJie:^BK-  cbih'b.  (24)  H  xojimji'b  K'B 
MyjKHK-.  (25)  5x0  MH'fe  HpaBHJi-.  (26)  H^me  chh-  h66o  cm;^ 
HpaBHJi-.     (27)  Bea-B  hhxb-. 


§40  LESSON  IX  53 

B.  Translate  : 

(1)    CHHifi   UB'feT'L   MOpH   H   H66a    MH^   6qeHb   HpdBHJICH;   QosihuidVL 

jii^cb  MH-fe  HpaBHJicfl,  HO  Baiue  MajieHbKoe  cejio  MH'fe  oqeHb  Majio 

HpaBHJIOCb.       (2)    CerOAHH  OAHHI,  HCJIOB-feK-b  XOT^JIT.  BBfl-feTb  MeflB^Afl 

B-b  Ji'fec^^  (3)  KHH3b,  jipyr-b  napn,  roHHJi-b  Me^B^jiifl.  (4)  5to  eMy 
CKaaaji-b  MyjKHKTb.  (5)  noTOMi.  h  BH^-feji-b  ^Toro  qejiOB^Ka  bi.  can;^ 
MymHKa.  (6)  K-b  caJKaji-feniio  y  MyjKHKa  SojibHoft  MaJieHbKifi  chh^; 
cerojiHfl  OHT,  SbiJiTb  y  ^Toro  cxapHK^,  KOTopbift  bt.  caa^  paSoTaji-b. 

(7)  Bk^choc  K^y^maHbe  eM^  HpaBHJiocb,  hotom^  ^to  oh^  xoT'feji'b  -fecTb. 

(8)  Bojibinoe  sAanie,  KOTopoe  Tbi  Taan.  BHa-fejiT., — SBop^Lt-b  KHjisH.  (9) 
MoPl  jipfr-b  He  AOMa  xenepb .  (10)  K-b  cojKaji'feHiio  a  er6  OTi;a  HHrs'fe  He 
Mor-b  BHjt'feTb;  OH-b  HHKorna  h6  dbijii.  ^  A6Ma.    (11)  Bott*  OH-b  xenepb. 

Eojibiuoe  Bdame,  Komopoe  mui  maMh  eudmjih, — deopei^h  i^apn. 

C.  BonpocBi : 

(1)  Hto  TeS-fe  HpaBHJIOCb?     (2)  Hto  TeS-fe  HenpaBHJiocb?     (3)  Hto 

XOT^JI'b    BHA'feTb    HejIOB-feK-b?      (4)   KOF^a    OH-b    er6    XOT-fejIl)    BlIa'feTb? 

(6)  r^i^  Gbiji-b  MejiB'feAb?  (6)  KaKOBi,  y  MyjKHKa  chhti?  (7)  J^OMa 
JIH    oht.    cerojUHH?     (8)  rio^eM^   Tbi    ne    Mon.    BH^i^Tb    ero    oxi^d? 

(9)  Koro  Tbi  He  Mor-b  Bii^ifeTb? 

D.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  I  wished  to  see  my  friend  to-day,  but  unfortunately  he  was  not  at 
home  ;  that  is  why  I  could  not  see  him.  (2)  In  summer  he  often  used  to  go 
towards  the  sea,  because  he  liked  the  blue  sea.  (3)  The  little  village  that  I 
saw  there,  I  did  not  like.  (4)  The  intelUgent  boy  gave  the  old  man  tasty 
food  and  drink.  (5)  Did  he  wish  to  see  the  little  building  that  you  [thou] 
showed  me  ?     (6)  There  is  the  great  palace  where  the  czar's  friend  lived  ! 

(7)  Why  was  the  poor  man  sowing  oats  ?  (8)  He  gave  a  lot  of  oats  to  this 
ass.     (9)  Had  he  not  a  kind  friend  ?  * 

*  Pars.  123,  124  may  be  studied  at  this  point  and  the  future  tense  be 
practised  with  any  A  verb. 

LESSON  IX 

40.  The  word  xgahji'L,  past  tense  of  xohhtb,  lias  been  frequently- 
used.  It  means  '  one  was  in  the  way  of  going, ^  '  one  was  in  the  habit 
of  going, ^  as  when  we  say  in  English,  *  When  he  was  young,  not  every 
hoy  went  to  school.^  If  we  wish  to  say  that  *  one  was  actually  going, ^ 
as  when  we  say  in  EngHsh,  '  He  was  going  along  the  street  when  that 
happened,'  we  must  use  the  Russian  verb 

masc.  OH'L  luejit  [on  Sot],  neut.  oho  iiijio  [aho  Jto]. 

^  Note  the  accentuation  in  h6  Ghji-b. 


54 


LESSON  IX 


41-43 


41.  Notice  the  following  idioms  illustrating  tlie  use  of  the  in- 
finitive : 

Hto  ^-fejiaib?  [Jfco  dstAt],  What  is  to  be  done  ? 

Hto  MHife  (CMA^)  fl-fejiaTh?  [Jto  miis  (jamli)  dstAt],  What  am  I  {is  he)  to  do  ? 

Bo3m6}kho  jih  paSoxaxb  Ji-fexoMt  bI)  Ji-fecy?  [vAzm65iiA  ii  rAb6tAt 
IstAm  vlasii].  Is  it  possible  to  work  in  the  forest  in  summer  ? 

HejibBH  pa66TaTb  3hm6io  (-oh)  b-b  Ji-fec^  [naiza  rAb6Ut  zimoju  (61) 
vl9Sli],  It  is  impossible  to  work  in  the  forest  in  winter. 

42.  Four  cases  of  the  noun  have  been  given.  But  there  are 
altogether  six  cases  in  Russian.  (Only  one  or  two  nouns  have 
a  special  form  for  the  Vocative.)  The  remaining  two  are  the 
Instrumental  and  Prepositional. 

Their  endings  are  identical  for  masculine  and  neuter  nouns,  viz. 
Haed  Form  Soft  Form 

instr.  OM-B  ewb  (ewh  if  accented) 

prep,  ib  'fe 

43.  The  complete  declension  in  the  singular  of  the  five  types  of 
nouns  is,  therefore,  as  follows  : 

(The  plurals  are  printed  here,  but  as  no  plural  forms  wiU  be  used  before 
Lesson  XX.,  they  need  not  be  learned  at  this  point.) 

Hard  Forms 


Masc. 


Neut. 


Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

nom.  ot6ut> 

OTUbl 

ceji6 

cejia 

gen.  OTua 

OTUOBT, 

ceji^ 

ceJiT. 

dat.  OTu:^ 

OTUaMT, 

ceji:^ 

cejiaMT* 

ace.  OTi^a 

OTUbBT. 

ceji6 

cejia 

instr.  OTudM-b  1  [Ats6m] 

OTUaMH 

cejiOMTb  [88t6m] 

cejiaMH 

prep.  OTLt'fe  [Atss] 

OTixaxi. 

ceji'fe  [sale] 

cejiaxT. 

Soft  Forms 

Masculines 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

nom.  uapb 

uapH 

repofi 

repoH 

gen.  uapfl 

^apeH 

repofl 

repocBt 

dat.  uapib 

^apflM'b 

repoK) 

repoHM-b 

ace.  ixscpA 

uapett 

repoH 

repocBTb 

instr.  uapeMT>  [tsArom] 

uapflMH 

repocMT)  [g8r6jam] 

rep6HMH 

prep,  uap^  [tsArs] 

uapflX-B 

repo-fe  [garoje] 

repoHX-b 

1  After  w,  H,  ni,  m,  n. 

unaccented  o 

never  appears;  its  place 

is  taken  by 

e.g.  c-b  TOBkpvnafiwh  [stAvdfiJtJem],  with  the  companion 


§44  LESSON  IX  55 

Neuter 
Sing.  Plur. 

nom.     Mope  Mopii 

gen.     Mopfl  Mopefii 

dat.     M6pio  MopiiMTb 

ace.     M6pe  Mopii 

instr.     MopeM-B  [morain]  MopHMH 

prep.     Mop-fe  1  [mora]  MOpHXT*  ^ 

{a)  It  must  be  remembered  that  masculine  names  of  inanimate  things 
have  the  same  form  in  the  accusative  as  in  the  nominative. 

44.  The  instrumental  case  is  used  after  certain  prepositions,  e.g. 
CL  MaJib^HKOMt  [smd^itJikAm],  with  the  boy 
CO  2  MHOK)  (mhoK)  [sAmnoju  (mnoi)],  with  me 
nepcAt  cejiOMT)  [p^rat  satom],  before  the  village 
3a  CTOJiOMt  3  [zAstAtom],  behind  the  table 

Vocabulary 

TOBapniut,  a  [tAvdriJtJ],  companion  Mor^qiii  [mAgiitJi],  powerful 

aoMHK'b,  a  [dorhik],  little  house  aepeBHHHBiii  [daravdni],  wooden 

MHRHCxpt  [rhinistr],  minister  KaMCHHbitt  [kdiiiani],  of  stone 

CTOJi-L,  a  [stot,  stAtd],  table  co  mhok)  [sAmnoju],  with  me 

Kop6jib,  H  \kAx6A'\,  king  CB  to66k)  (oft)  [stAboju  (boi)],  with 
pySjib,  A  [rup,  rubld],  rouble  thee 

Macjio,  a  [mdstA],  butter  CL  HHM'b  [snim],  with  him,  with  it 

OKHO,  a  [Akn6,  d],  window  Cb  hhmh  [snfihi],  with  them 

Kpecjio,  a  [ki-EstA,  a],  arm-chair  Ch  ^THM-b  [s6tim],  with  this  (adj.  or 
CTOiixb  A  [stAJd^t],  to  stand  pron.) 

CTOHTb  A  [stoit],  to  cost,  be  worth  Cb T'feM'b[stsm],m^A^^<(adj.orpron.) 

KpacHBbiH  [krAsivi],  beautiful  Cb  K'feM'b?  [sksm],  with  whom  ? 

HCKpacHBbiH  [nakrAsivi],  not  pretty,  wiaWhl  [tjem],  with  what  ? 

u^ly  o6biKHOB6HHO  [AbiknAvsnA],  usually 

Exercises 

A.  Give  the  dative,  accusative,  and  instrumental  of 

repoii,  ABopei^-b,  pyGjib,  MacJio,  cojKaji'feHie. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Towards  me,  thee,  him,  that,  whom,  the  table,  the  boy.     (2)  Into 

[requires  the  accusative']  the  garden,  house,  forest,  village.     (3)  Behind  me,  thee, 

him  (it),  that,  whom,  the  building.     (4)  With  the  father,  czar,  hero,  sea,  man, 

stag.     (5)  For  me,  them,  thee,  him  (it),  that,  whom,  the  little  house  \(me  wcyrd], 

\  *  Nouns  in  -ie  like  ananie  have  prep.  sing,  in  -in  and  gen.  pi.  in  -iii. 

*  See  note  to  kg  in  Par.  39. 

'  This  is  the  Russian  phrase  for  at  table.  With  verbs  of  motion  aa  and  n^pea-t 
require  the  accusative. 


56  LESSON  X  §45 

C.  Translate  : 

(1)  Mor;^qiii  khhsb  Cb  mhhhctpom'b.  (2)  BK^CHbitt  xji-feSt  Qea-h 
Macjia.  (3)  Cn-fejioe  ;i6jiOKO  eny  HenpaEHJiocb.  (4)  Ero  aoSpLiii 
jipyrt  jKHjn>  3d  Ji-fecoMt.^  (5)  Oaho  Kpecjio  ctohjio  n^pej^-L  okhom'l, 
a  apyroe  ctohjio  y  CTOJia  (n^pen-L  ctojiom-b).  (6)  ^tottj  ctoji-b  hc 
ctohjitj  qexLipe  pySjiii.  (7)  MajieHbKiii  MajibHHKt  nrpaJi'B  ct 
TOBapnmcM'b'^B'L  ca^f.  (8)  B-fenHbrn  cbin-b  cTOHJi-b  cb  oTixoM-b 
nepe^-b  ^THM-b  OKHOM-b.  (9)  C-b  Ki^M-b  OH-b  meji-b  ktj  Mopio?  (10)  V 
MeHH  ebiji-b  Torna  KaMennbitt  soMnKT.  cb  capaeMi..  (11)  CKOJibKO 
CTOHJIO  5to  nepeBHHHoe  Kpecjio?  (12)  y  Kopojin  6bijn>  KpacHBbm 
caa-b. 

CKOAbKo  cmoujio  dmo  depeemiHoe  npecAO? 

D.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Why  was  the  boy's  companion  standing  [why  stood,  etc.]  behind  the 
arm-chair  ?  (2)  I  saw  him  when  he  was  going  towards  the  house.  (3)  When 
did  you  see  [thou  sawest]  the  father  with  his  son  ?  (4)  I  told  you  [thee]  that. 
(5)  Was  he  going  towards  the  window  ?  (6)  In  summer  I  used  often  to  go 
into  that  wood.  (7)  The  boy's  father  is  there  now  with  (his)  companion.  (8) 
He  was  going  towards  him.  (9)  The  peasant's  son  was  never  with  me  at  table. 
(10)  How  much  was  that  Uttle  house  worth  ?  (11)  The  wooden  table,  that 
used  to  stand  before  the  window,  was  worth  only  three  roubles.  (12)  To-day 
I  saw  the  boy's  companion.  (13)  Why  was  he  there  to-day  ?  (14)  Did  you 
[thou]  see  the  Uttle  stone  house  behind  the  garden  ?  (15)  No,  I  was  never  in 
the  garden.  .  (16)  He  used  often  to  go  towards  the  sea.  (17)  The  great  stone 
building  that  you  saw  there  was  not  their  palace.  (18)  Once  he  was  going 
home  with  them.  (19)  (With)  what  did  he  usually  do  that  ?  (20)  Before 
whom  was  he  standing  ?  (21)  What  is  he  to  do  ?  (22)  He  never  saw  the 
man ;  that  is  why  he  could  not  tell  you  where  he  (was).  (23)  It  is 
impossible  to  speak  with  his  friend.  (24)  Is  it  possible  to  work  in  the  forest 
in  winter  ?  , 


LESSON  X 

45.  The  Prepositional  case  is  never  found  without  a  preposition  : 
hence  its  name.  Prepositions  requiring  this  case  are  :  o  (written 
also  oCt  and  66o),  na,  bt>,  npn,  e.g. 

OhTj  roBopHJii.  o  flOM-fe  [on  gAVArit  a  d6m9],  He  was  speaking  of  the 
house. 

*  Note  the  accentuation. 


§46  LESSON  X  57 

660 1  MHife,  o  TeS-fe,  o  HeMt,  oSt  ^  ^tomt,,  0  TOMt  [AbAmn^,  Atebe,  An6m, 
AbstAm,  Atom],  0/,  about,  concerning  me,  thee,  him,  this,  that. 

Ha  CTOJi'fe  [na  stAis],  on  the  table. 

BT.  oropoa'fe  [vAgArode],  in  the  kitchen-garden. 

BO  1  MH'fe,  btj  TeS-fej^B-b  HeMt,  BT)  ^TOM-L,  BT)  TOMt  [vAmns,  ftabs,  vnom, 
vetAm,  ftom],  in  me,  in  thee,  in  him,  in  this,  in  that. 

npH  HeMT)  [pri  nom],  in  his  entourage,  in  his  presence. 

46.  A  number  of  very  common  masculine  nouns,  nearly  all 
monosyllabic,  bave  a  form  in  -^  following  tbe  prepositions  Bi.  and  . 
Ha.     BT>  Jiifecy  3  and  Bt  cajty  bave  already  been  given  in  tbe 
Vocabulary  to  Lesson  VIII.     Sucb  are 

Ha  noji^  [nApAtu],  on  th£.  floor. 

Ha  6eper;^  [nAboregu],  on  the  shore. 

Ha  Bcpxy  [nAvarxii],  on  top. 

Ha  Jiyry  [nAtugii],  on  the  meadow. 

Ha  moct;;^  [nAmAstii],  on  the  bridge. 

Bi.  roji;^  [vgAdu],  in  the  year. 

Bii  UB'fex^  [ftsvatti],  in  bloom. 

(a)  The  y  is  always  accented  in  tbese  pkcases. 

Vocabulary 

B'b'fesA'L,  a  [vjsst,  zdA],  entrance  ryjiHTB  131  A  [guid^t],  to  go  walking 

no  JIT),  a  [pot],  floor  {for  pleasure) 

expert,  a  [b^rek,  gA],  bank,  shore  K^maxb  131  A  [kiijAt],  to  eat 

BepxTb,  a  [vsrx],  top  part  nocjiaxb  [pAsta^t],  to  send 

TbKb,  a  [god  (t),  dA],  year  cxpoHTb  A  [stroit],  to  build 

Jifrii,  a  [tuk],  meadow  OH-b  nomejiT*    [on  pAjot],   he  went 

MOCTi*,  a  [most],  bridge  {once) 

nepo,  a  [paro],  pen  jiOKaxb  A  [i83a^t],  to  lie,  recline 

o,   oST),  660  [o.  A,  Ab  (Ap),  6bA],  HaKOH^ix-b  [lukAnsts],  at  last,  in  the 

about,  of,  concerning  end 

B'b  (bo)  [v,  f,  VA,  vo],  in  qxoSbi  [Jtobi],  in  order  that 

Ha  [ela,  na],  on  xome  [t659],  also 

npH  [pri],  near,  at,  in  the  time  of  xaKJKC  [tdg39],  also 

o  Hnx-b  [Anix],  about  them  npn  caMOM-b  B-b-ksjifk  [pri  sdmAm 
o  KOMTb?  [Akom],  about  whom  ?  vj6zd9],  near,  at  the  very  entrance 

o  no-Wht  [Atjom],  about  what  ?  saH'^M'b?  [zAtjsm],  with  what  object? 
A^Maxb  131  A  [dumAt],  to  think  why  ? 

^  See  note  to  kg  in  Par.  39.  ^  Used  before  vowels. 

^  Cf.  BT.  a-fec-B  in  Vocabulary  to  Lesson  II. 


58  LESSON  X  §46 

Exercises 

A.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  He  was  speaking  of  you  [thee],  him,  me,  that,  this,  the  floor,  the  bridge, 
the  shore,  the  garden,  the  forest,  the  window,  the  companion,  the  sea,  the 
regret.     (2)  The  pen  was  lying  on  the  table,  on  the  bridge,  on  the  floor. 

(3)  I  was  walking  on  the  shore,  in  the  garden,  in  the  kitchen-garden,  in  the 
forest ;  he  was  with  me  [in  my  presence]. 

• 

B.  Translate  : 

(1)  Ojukn-b  CHJibHHfi  i^apb  CTpoHJit  6ojibm6ii  KaMCHHLifi  ABop^nt. 

(2)  n^peat  ^THM-L  sh^hIcmt.  6bijn>  ohchb  KpacHBBiH  cajx-b.      (3)  Ho 

npH  CaMOMT.  B-b^aa-fe  BT.  Ca^-b  CTOHJI-b  MaJICHbKifi  nepeBHHHblH  AOMHK'b. 

(4)  5to  HenpaBHJiocb  i;apib.  (5)  B^b  ^TOM-b  jtoMHK'fe  musi-b  dlaHuuA 
MymHK-b,  a  ch  HHM-b  er6  OT^i^-b.  (6)  JI-feTOMi.  itapb  ^acxo  ryjiHjn. 
Cb  MKHHCTpoM-b  B^b  ca^y^.      (7)  Pas-b  ohtj  roBopHJi-b  cb  TOBapnmeM'b 

O     TOM-b     MyjKHK^.         (8)       HaKOHCIl'b     USL^h     HOCJiaJIT,     MHHHCTpa     K'b 

MyjKHKy^,  HT66bi  OH-b  KynHji-b  cxapHii  noMnK-b.  (9)  Korna  MnHficTp-b 
nomeji-b  B-b  oropo^'b,  nejioBi^K'b  ne  Sbiji-b  noMa;  OH-b  paSoTajii. 
Tor^a  B-b  Ji-fec^.  (10)  GxapHK-b  TaKJKe  He  Shjit.  aoMa,  a  T6jibK0 
OHCHb  MaJicHbKlH  cbiH-b  MyjKHKa  6biji'b  3a  CTOJiOM-b.  (11)  Ky'inaJi'b 
qepHbifi  xjiifedi)  cb  MacjiOM-b,  a  K'b  cojKaji'feHiio  Tox-b  MaJibHHK'b  ne 
Mor-b  CKasaTb  MHHiicTpy,  rflib  Tor^a  Sbui-b  OT^i^-b.  (12)  Hto  a-fejiaxb? 
Hejib3>i  KynHTb  A6MHKa. 

C.  BonpocH: 

(1)  Hto    cTpdHJiT.    i^apb?      (2)  Hto    ctohjio    nepea-b    SAanieM-b? 

(3)  Kto  jKHJi-b  BTb  ^TOM-b  AOMHR-fe?  (4)  OjtiiH'b  [alone,  by  himself] 
jiH  OH-b  TaiM-b  H^HJi-b?  (5)  FA'fe  ryjiHJi-b  i^apb?  (6)  G-b  K-feM-b  OH-b 
ryjiiiji'b?  (7)  O  KOM-b  OH-b  roBopnji-b  oanaJKabi?  (8)  KyAa  i^apb 
nocjiaji-b  MHHHCTpa?  (9)  Saq-^MX.?  (10)  Koro  MHHHCxp-b  Bik]s,1asn> 
y  MyatHKa?     (11)  rioHCMy'  MyrnHK-b  h6  dbiJi-b  flOMa? 

D.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  old  man's  wooden  house  used  to  stand  at  the  very  entrance  to  [bt. 
with  ace.]  the  king's  beautiful  stone  palace.  (2)  The  powerful  king  wished  to 
buy  that  little  house.  (3)  One  day  the  king  was  walking  with  the  minister  and 
saw  the  peasant  at  work  [saw  how  the  peasant  worked]  in  the  garden.  (4)  The 
peasant  saw  the  minister  and  sent  his  son  to  him.  (5)  When  the  king's 
minister  was  on  the  bridge,  the  peasant's  son,  who  was  not  a  stupid  boy  and 
spoke  Russian  very  well,  went  towards  him  and  said  to  him,  "The  little  house 
was  grandfather's  [use  y  with  genit.}.    He  never  wished  to  give  it  to  the  king." 


§47 


LESSON  XI 


59 


are 


LESSON  XI 

47.  The  pronouns  that  have  been  introduced  in  Lessons  I  to  X 

A.  Personal  Pronouns 


First 

Second 

Third 

nom. 

H,/ 

TBI,  tJlOU 

OHi,,  OHO,  he,  it 

OHiky  they'^ 

gen. 

MCHH,  of  me 

Te6fl,  etc. 

(H)er6,  etc. 

(h)hx'i>,  of  themy  their 

dat. 

MH-fe,  etc. 

leQ'h 

(H)eM:^ 

(H)HM'b,  to  them 

ace. 

MeHfl 

TCdH 

(H)er6 

(h)hx'I>,  etc. 

instr. 

MHOK)  (6ti) 

to66k)  (6ft)  (h)hm'i> 

(h)hmh 

prep. 

MHt 

TCO'fe 

HeM-L 

HHX-B 

B.    POSSESSIVES 

Moii,  Moe,  my,  mine  HaniTb,  name,  our,  ours 

TBOH,  TBOe,  thy,  thine  Bami),  B^me,  your,  yours 

For  the  third  person  there  is  no  possessive :  ero,^  the  genitive  of  OH-b,  is 
used  as  the  equivalent  of  his  or  its;  HXt,  genitive  plural  of  ohh,  stands 
for  their. 

C.  Demonstrative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives 
Masc.  Neut.  Masc.     Neut. 

nom.  TOTi>         TO,  that  ^tot-b     ^to,  this 


gen. 
dat. 


instr. 
prep. 


nom. 
ace. 


nom. 
gen. 
dat. 
ace. 

instr. 
prep. 


Toro 

TOMy 
TOT'b  TO 

or  Toro 

T-feMT. 
TOM-B 


^Toro 

^TOMy 
^TOT-L  5t0 

or  ^Toro 

^THMt 
^TOMT. 


D.  Interrogatives  and  Relatives 
Masc.  Neut. 

K0T6pbitt  KOTdpoe,  which,  that;  which? 

K0T6pbiii  {inanimate)  KOTopoe 

Singular  and  Plural 
KTO?  ^  who  ?  HTO?  ^  what  ?  which  ? 

Koro  qero 

kom;^  hcm;^ 

K0r6  HTO 

K-feM-L  q-feMT. 

KOMT)  HCM'B 


*  Fern,  form  is  oh+.. 


^  See  Lesson  XXIX  for  use  of  CB6tt. 


^  This  word  is  also  used  as  a  relative. 


60  LESSON  XI  §47 


LESSON  XI 

Masc. 

Neut. 

nom.     KaKdET,? 

ace.     KaK6Bi)  {inanimate) 
nom.     KaKoii?  (attrib.  adj.) 

ace.     KaKdfi  (inanimate) 

KaK0B6?  of  what  sort  ? 

KaKOBO 

KaKoe?  of  what  sort  ?  which  ? 
KaK6e 

E.  Indefinite 

hhkt6  [iiixt6],  no  one,  and  hh^to  [fiijto],  nothing,  are  declined  like  kto 
and  HTO,  e.g.  in  the  genitive  case  they  have  the  form  HHK0r6,  HHHer6 
[nikAvo,  riitJ9v6].  When  compounded  with  prepositions  the  negative  particle 
is  separated  from  the  pronoun  by  the  preposition,  e.g.  hh  cb  KifeMt 
[riisksm],  hh  o  newb  [riiAtJom],  with  no  one,  about  nothing. 

The  forms  kt6-to  [xto-tAJ,  kt6-jih6o  [xto-libA],  kto-hhS^AB  [xto- 
nibd^t],  and  qxo-TO  [Jto-tA],  ht6-jih6o  [Jto-iibA],  qxo-HHS^Ab  [Jto-nibuit], 
standing  for  some  one,  any  one  and  something,  anything,  are  in  very 
frequent  use,  but  in  this  book  the  forms  given  in  this  paragraph  (E)  will  be 
little  used  except  hhkto  and  HHqer6. 

Exercises 

A.  Supply  tlie  proper  forms  of 

H,  TBI,  GH-b,  5tO,  kto,  ^TO,  TOTT, 

after  each  of  the  prepositions 

AJIH,  n^pcAi*,  K-b,  Ha,  o,  CTb. 

B.  Translate  : 

y  Menn;  Sea-b  Koro?;  o  hcmT)?;  sa  mhoio;  y  tcSh;  GesTb  Her6; 
cb  K'feM'b?;  o  HCM-b;  B-b  Te6^;  ch  to66k);  na  ^eM-b?;  o  komT)  oht*  roBO- 
pi^ji-b?;  o  HCM-b?;  KOM^  OH-b  5to  roBopHJi-b?;  c-b  ^thmi,;  K-b  aroMy; 
KaKOBO  6biJio  ^To  3ji;^Hie?;  nepo,  KOTopoe  jiejKaJio  Taivi-b;  MajiCHbKift 
aoMii,  K0T6pbiH  CTOiiji'b  HpH  B'b'hsji'h;  KaKOB-b  Slijit.  er6  cbiH-b?;  tm 
nomeji'bK'b  hcm^;  qi^M-b?;  K-bcomaji-feniio;  h  HHKorAaHC  CKaaaJi-b  ^Toro. 
^  HUKoeda  He  cKoaajib  dmozo, 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  great  bridge  that  you  saw  yesterday.  (2)  That  black  arm-chair 
that  used  to  stand  before  the  window.  (3)  Where  was  his  palace  ?  (4)  What 
was  on  the  floor  ?  (5)  Who  had  a  friend  ?  (6)  Your  oats.  (7)  His  corn. 
(8)  At  their  house.  (9)  Who  told  him  that  ?  (10)  What  did  he  tell  you 
[thee]?  (11)  Forme,  (12)  Without  him.  (13)  With  you  [thee].  (14)  For 
him.  (15)  About  me.  (16)  With  what  ?  \no  preposition  required  :  use  in- 
strumental]. (17)  What  was  I  speaking  about  ?  (18)  I  did  not  know  that. 
(19)  He  did  not  know  you  [thee].  (20)  Our  building ;  your  companion ; 
ids  table  ;  that  butter  ;  my  food  ;  his  drink.  (21)  Behind  it.  (22)  I  liked 
it.     (23)  You  liked  it.     (24)  He  Uked  it.     (25)  He  never  saw  it. 


§§  48-61 


ACCENTUATION 


61 


Nouns  that  have  occurked  in  Lessons  I-XI 

48.  Nouns  that  preserve  throughout  the  singular  the  accent  of 
the  nominative,  e.g.  H'fen'L,  riji;a  ;  oropofl'L,  oropojta. 


H^^Kh 

Jl'feC'b 

OJl^Hb 

CblHt 

xji-feSt 

MejcB^flb 

BuyK-b 

CHpi. 

h66o 

Spaxt 

orop6m> 

A6ziOKO 

HCJIOB'feK'B 

C2LKh 

Kp6cjio 

MaJIbHHK'L 

UBifeTT. 

Macjio 

TOBapHIU'L 

MOCTI. 

Mope 

flpyr-B 

BCpX-b  1 

sflanie 

MHrnicTpt 

rem, 

coKaji-feHie 

paSdTHHKT. 

BT.'feaH'B 

ceji6 

HOMt 

Ceper'b 

OKHO 

noji'L 

capaii 

HHTbe 

AOMHKT, 

repdii 

K^maHbe 

Jiyr-L 

KHfl3b 

The  forms  in  -y  after 

B-L  or  Ha  (see 

Par.  46)  are  exceptional. 

49.  Nouns   which    have   the   accent 

on   the  termination,  e.g. 

cTapHKi*,  ciapHKa. 

cTapiiKT) 

K0p6jlb 

MymJiKi. 

napb 

CTOJIt 

HHM^Hb 

0T6^'b 

py6jib 

ji;Bop6ui> 

OBeCL 

ocejiT. 

50.  Observe  that  no  neuter  nouns  occur  in  the  second  Hst :   in 
neuter  nouns  the  accent  does  not  change  in  the  singular. 

51.  The  Peepositions  that  have  akeady  occurred  are  : 

with  the  genitive :  6e3'b,  y,  n^JiH 
dative-,  ktj  (kg) 
accusative'.  B'b,^  Ha,^  sa^ 
instrumental:  sa,^  c-h  (co),  nepe^-b^  (n^pcAo) 
prepositional:  o,  bt.^  (bo),  Ha,^  npn 

^  Bepx6Mi.  [v9rx6m]  with  the  verb  •fexaxi,  means  as  the  top,  astride  a  horse, 
mounted.  ^  ^  See  Lesson  XV. 

'  With  verbs  of  motion  governs  the  accusative. 


62  LESSON  XII  §§52-54 

LESSON  XII 

52.  Feminine  nouns  end  in 

-a,  e.g.  nana  [tapAJ,  jpaw 
-fl,  e.g.  HHHfl  [nanA],  nurse 
-h,  e.g.  HOHb  [notj],  night 

53.  Nouns  in  -a  and  -a  are  declined  thus : 

Haed  Form  Soft  Form 

Sing.  Plur.  Sing.  Plur, 

nom.    Jiana  [tapA]  JianLi  hhhh  [nariA]  uAuu 

gen.    jianbi  [tdpi]  Jian-L  hhhh  [nani]  HjiHb 

dat.     Jianib  [Wpa]  Ji^naMt  HHH-fe  [nana]  HflnHM-L 

ace.    Jiany  [tapu]  JianM  hhhk)  [nanu]  hhhb 

.  rjianoH  [tapAi]  jianaMH  fHHHefi  [nanal]  hhhhmh 

"^^  ^*  \jianoK)  [tdpAJu]  (HHHeio  [nanoju] 

prep.    Jian'fe  [tdpa]  Jianax-b  nAw^  [nana]  uAhhxtj 

Note. — The  plurals  need  not  be  learned  at  this  point,  as  no  plural  forms 
will  be  used  before  Lesson  XX. 

(a)  After  K,  r,  x,  m,  h,  m,  ui,  the  vowels  h,  h,  io  never  appear ; 
they  are  replaced  by  H,  a,  y,  e.g. 

co6aKa  [sAbakA],  a  dog 
gen.   co6aKH  [sAbaki] 

(b)  After  jk,  h,  hi,  m,  u„  unaccented  o  never  appears ;   it  is 

replaced  by  e,  e.g. 

K6jKa  [k63A],  leather,  hide 
instr.  KdmePL  (eio)  [k639i  (oju)] 

HTHua  [ptitsA],  bird 
instr.  UTiknem  (eio)  [ptitsai  (aju)] 

(c)  For    the    declension    of    nouns    in    -in    see    PocciH    in 
Voc.  XXXIV.     Dat.  and  prep.  sing,  in  -in  ;  gen.  pi.  in  -iii. 

54.  Some  nouns  accented  on  the  termination  draw  back  the 
accent  in  the  accusative,  e.g. 

BORSi  [vAdd],  water 
ace.  BOAy  [v6du] 


§§  55-66 


LESSON  XIII 


63 


Vocabulary 


JlSLMSLf  bi  [damA,  i],  lady 
co6aKa,  h  [sAbdkA,  i],  dog 
KoniKa,  H  [koJkA,  i],  cat 
jK^Hmnna,  li  [s^nJtJiiiA,  i],  woman 
cjiyjKaHKa,  h  [stu5diikA,  i],  servant 
cecxpa,  ii  [sastrd,  i],  sister 
6a6ymKa,  h  [babuJkA,  i],  grandmother 
fl-feBOiiKa,  H  [devAtJkA,  i],  little  girl 
hAhr,  h  [ndnA,  i],  child's  nurse 
Ji^na,  LI  [tdpA,  i],  paw 
K6jKa,  H  [k63A,  i],  skin,  leather 


m6fl,  H  [J^JA,  J6i],  neck 

Bona,  IJ  [vAdd,  i],  water 

nTHixa,  H  [ptitsA,  i],  bird 

OHa  [And],  she 

MOH  (fern.)  [niAJd],  my,  mine 

TBOfl  (/em.)  [tvAJd],  thy,  thine 

eA  {not  an  adjective:  genitive  ofouA) 

[J9J6»  j^.  of  her,  her,  hers 
Hama  ^  [ndjA],  our,  ours 
Bama  [vdJA],  your,  yours 
^xa;  Ta  [stA,  ta],  this;  that 


Exercise 
Translate  into  Kussian  : 

Without  water,  at  the  grandmother's,  for  the  nurse,  towards  the  lady, 
into  the  water,  behind  the  servant,  with  the  cat,  in  front  of  the  dog,  about  the 
lady,  in  the  water,  on  the  neck,  your  dog,  our  cat,  her  servant,  her  father,  she 
is  our  servant,  the  boy's  nurse,  the  servant's  son,  his  dog's  neck,  that  lady,  the 
colour  of  the  bird,  the  grandmother's  house,  the  girl's  bread,  for  the  woman, 
with  the  woman,  she  is  my  nurse,  she  is  not  his  sister. 

The  Uttle  boy  lived  in  that  house  with  his  grandmother.  He  was 
speaking  of  his  sister.  The  nurse  has  two  [rbIo,  femJ]  cats  and  a  dog. 
What  did  he  tell  the  lady  \datJ]  about  her  servant  ?  I  did  not  know  the 
woman. 


LESSON  XIII 

55.  Feminine  adjectives  end  in  -aa  or  -nn.    The  full  form  of  the 
nominative  singular  of  the  adjective  is  therefore  : 

Hard  Form 
M.  6oraTHH  [bA^dti]    F.  Gordxan  [bAgdtAJa]    N.  6oraxoe  [bAgdtAJa],  rich 
M.  SojibHoii  [bA^inoi]    F.  SojibHafl  [bA^indJA]    N.  SojibHoe  [bA^noja],  ill 

Soft  Form 
M.  CHHiii  [sini]  F.  chhah  [sfnaja]  N.  e^nee  [sineja],  blue 

56.  The  complete  nominative  singular  of  OflHH'b  is  : 
ojUHH'b,  onHa,  oaH6  [Adfn,  Adnd,  Adno],  ons,  a  certain,  alone. 

^  The  complete  declension  of  Hami.  and  the  other  possessives  will  be  found  in 
Pars.  104,  105. 


64  LESSON  XIII  §56 


Vocabulary 

KycoKT),^  Ka  [kus6k,  kuska],  piece  anrjiiiiCKitt  [angliski  or  angliski], 
Beapo,  a  [vedro],  pail  English 

MHCO,  a  [liiasA],  meat  ^panityscKiH  [frAntsiiski],  French 

qHCTbiii  [tjisti],  clean  ecTb  [jest],  there  is,  there  are 

rpflSHbift  [grdzni],  dirty  ecTB    jih?    [jest    ii],    is   there  ?    are 
p^ccKiii  [ruski],  Russian  there  ? 


Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  ycoSaKHKycoK'LMjica.  (2)  B^jiaflJianaKouiKH.  (3)  Gxapaa 
h>Ihh  H^bBOHKH.  (4)  y  Hero  SoraxaH  6a6ymKa.  (5)  JHoOpan 
py^ccKaH  naMa  cb  fl-feBO^Kott — bt>  ca«^.  (6)  San-feM-B  Hepnan  KOUiKa 
Ha  CTOJi-fe?  (7)  Ona  xenept  na  noji>\  (8)  H .  BHA-feji-B  aany  ci. 
coSaKOH  B-L  ji-fecy.  (9)  MajieHbKiii  pyccKm  MajibHHK'b  nrpaji-b  ct> 
Hiineio  Ha  Mocxy-.  (10)  Y  kohikh  KpacHBaa  men.  (11)  CeroHHH 
MOH  MOJioAaH  cecxpa  na  Jiyry^.  (12)  Hxo  OH-b  cerosHH  j^aji-b  coSaK-fe? 
(13)  H  He  roBopHJi-b  o  coOaK-fe.  (14)  Xopomift  xjifeO-b  dea-b  Macjia 
H  Mflca  He^paBHJicfl  cjiyjKaHK-fe.  (15)  FpHSHan  Boaa  bt.  Beap'fe; 
^HCxaH  Boa'i^  B-b  caff^. 

Fpsiauasi  eoda  eh  eedpm;  Hucman  eoda  eh  cady. 

B.  Translate : 

(1)  There  is  another  dog  behind  the  arm-chair.  (2)  The  Russian  peasant 
was  eating  a  piece  of  bread  and  [say  with]  butter.  (3)  His  son  used  to  live  in 
summer  at  his  grandmother's.  (4)  I  never  knew  her  grandmother.  (5)  The 
young  man  went  towards  the  lady  ;  he  was  Russian  but  he  spoke  French  and 
Enghsh  very  well.  (6)  I  have  one  servant ;  she  is  my  old  nurse.  (7)  The 
woman's  dirty  house  did  not  please  him.  (8)  Did  you  see  the  dog's  paw  ? 
(9)  I  did  not  see  his  dog  anywhere  [I  nowhere  not  saw].  (10)  There  it  is. 
(11)  Why  was  your  Httle  sister  standing  in  front  of  the  house  ?  (12)  She 
was  playing  with  the  cat,  that  is  why  she  was  in  the  garden.  (13)  It  is 
possible  to  work  in  the  house  without  a  servant.  (14)  What  is  the  woman 
to  do  ?  (15)  It  was  impossible  to  sleep,  because  the  boy  was  playing  with 
(his)  brother  and  sister  in  the  garden.  (16)  Has  the  boy  two  sisters  ?  [ecxb 
JIH  y  etc.]. 

^  Declined  hke  oT^qi  :  the  o  disappears  in  every  case  except  the  nominative 
singular. 


§§57-59  LESSON  XIV  65 

LESSON  XIV 

57.  The  feminine  form  of  the  past  tense  ends  in  -Jia,  e.g. 

Ona  jxyMajia,  roHiijia,  cnaji^,  Swjia  [Ana  dumAtA,  gAnatA,  spAtd 
bita].  She  was  thinking  {thought),  hunted,  slept,  was. 

58.  The  complete  singular  of  the  past  tense  is  therefore 

cnaJi'B,  cnajia,  cnajio  [spat,  spAtd,  spatA] 

n^Majit,  a^Majia,  a;^Majio  [ddmAt,  diimAtA,  diimAtA] 

The  accent  does  not  always  remain  on  the  same  syllable  in  all 
three  genders.  Wherever  the  termination  is  accented,  the  feminine 
form,  and  if  necessary  the  neuter  form,  will  be  indicated. 

59.  The  feminine  form  of  OHt  is  ona  [ahq],  she.  The  singular  is 
declined  thus :  ,  r     /  t 

gen.         (H)eH  [J8J6,  ]M\ 

dat.         (h)6h  [j6i]         ^ 

ace.         (H)ee  [J9J6] 
instr.         (h)6io  [j6ju] 
prep,  (o)  h6h  [An6i] 

As  with  the  masculineCand  neuter  forms,  the  oblique  cases,  when 
governed  by  prepositions,  must  have  the  H  prefixed. 

Vocabulary 
6^6a,  LI  [babA],  peasant-woman  crapyxa,  h  [stAiuxA],  old  woman 

repoHHH,  H  [gerAiriiV],  heroine  BH^qna,  h  [vnutJkA],  granddaughter 

napiana,  bi  [tsAritsA],  czarina  ^xy  [stu]  is  the  accusative  of  ^xa,  this 

caMKa,  H  (oji^Hfl)  [samkA  (aU^ha)],      Ty  [tu]  is  the  accusative  o/xa,  that 

hind,  doe  {female  of  stag)  Maxb  [ma^t],  mother 

noapyra,  H  [pAdrug  a],  female  friend      Mon>,  Morjia,  Morjio  [mog,  lUAgta, 
no^Ka,  H  [dotJkA],  Utile  daughter  mAgto],  could 

Hi;x'L  xaKoro  apyjKKa,  Kan-b  poanaH  Maxymna  [nst  tAk6vA  dru3ka, 
kak  lAdnaJA  matuJkA],  There  is  no  such  good  friend  as  one's  own  dear  mother. 

Exercise 

(1)  Rewrite  Exercises  B  and  D  of  Lesson  VIII,  substituting 
feminine  for  masculine  forms  wherever  that  is  possible. 

(2)  Rewrite  Exercises  B  and  D  of  Lesson  X,  treating  them 
in  the  same  fashion.     Substitute  noflpyra  for  MHHHCxp'b.i 

^  Par.  131  may  be  learned  at  this  point  and  the  present  tense  be  practised 
with  any  verb  marked  131. 

E 


66  LESSON  XV  §§  60-62 

LESSON  XV 

60.  btj  and  Ha  are  used  with  either  accusative  or  prepositional 
(cf.  Vocab.  VIII).  In  the  simplest  instances,  the  rule  that  decides 
which  case  is  to  be  used,  is  that  with  either  of  these  two  words  the 
accusative  suggests  motion  towards  ;  the  prepositional  does  not. 
In  less  obvious  idioms  this  principle  is  of  doubtful  utility. 

Compare  : 

Ona  Jierjia  Ha  nojit^  [Ana  iogta  nd  pAt],  She  lay  doum  on  the  floor  {i,e. 
she  performed  an  act  involving  motion), 

with 

Ona  JiejKaJia  na  nojiy'  [ahq  i93atA  nA  paM],  She  was  lying  on  the  floor 
{i.e.  she  was  occupying  a  certain  position,  no  suggestion  of  motion  being 
present). 

Similarly : 

(1)  Ona  cksiSi  na  cxyji'b  (ace.)  [Ana  s^tA  nA  stut],  She  sat  down  on  the  chair. 
Ona  CHA'fejia  na  CT^Jiife  (prep.)  [Ana  sidstA  nA  stiiie],  She  was  sitting  on 

the  chair. 

(2)  Oht>  nomeJiTj  {or  Bomejn>,  entered)  b-l  caa-L  [on  pAjot  (vaJoI) 
fsat],  He  went  into  the  garden. 

Oh-l  ryjiHjn>  bij  cajny  [on  guidt  fsAdu],  He  was  walking  in  the  garden 
(the  motion  was  not  from  somewhere  else  into  the  garden). 

In  Oh'B  CMOTp'feji'L  Ha  nrpy  {ace.  feminine)  [on  smAtrgt  nA  igrii],  He 
was  looking  at  the  game,  the  application  of  the  principle  can  stUl  be  felt ;  the 
gaze  was  directed  on  to  the  game. 

61.  Some  phrases  : 

HacoJiHuife  [nA  sontsa]  {prep,  neut.),  in  the  sun. 

Ha  ;^JiHH'fe  [nA  uiitsa]  {prep,  fem.),  in  {on)  the  street. 

Ha  i^TOMTb  M'fecTife  [nA  stAm  meste]  {prep,  neut.),  in  that  place. 

Ha  HpMapKy  [nA  jdrm^vrku]  {ace.  fem.),  to  the  fair. 

BT)  ^TOMTb  cjiynaife  [vstAm  stiitjAJo],  in  that  case. 

B-L  Ji-fec^  [viesu],  in  the  wood  (cf.  Par.  46). 

62.  The  verb  uicjiTj  has  been  employed  already :  its  meaning 
was  explained  in  Par.  40. 

Note  the  following  compounds  of  this  verb  : 

Oh-L   BOmejI-b   [on  VAJot],  \  ...         .  ^       j      -      t  ^^  -       a     x.       i.x. 

„    ,  '  r      '        li '  n      ^^^^  *^^o>   i«e-    entered,   is   followed   by   the 

Ona  BoniJia  [Ana  vAjTa],  y  •.•  '  .^u  ^u  ^- 

^    ,  '  r      '        ci-'-t      preposition  BT)  with  the  accusative,  e.  or. 

Oho  bouijio  [Ano  vaJTo],  )^    ^  '    » 

Ona  Bomjia  Bt  ^omT)  [And  vAjtd  vdom]. 

^  Notice  the  accentuation  ia  this  phrase. 


§63  LESSON  XV  67 

Ont  npHmejn>  [on  pri|6t],  went,  but  in  the  direction  of  the  speaker, 
i.e.  came ;  generally  followed  by  preposition  Kt,  e.g. 

Ona  npHHiJia  ko  MH-fe  [Ana  prijtd  kA  mns]. 

Oht.  npomejn>  [on  prAj6t],  went  through,  i.e.  traversed. 

OhT)  name  JIT}  [on  nAj6t],  came  upon,  i.e.  found. 

OhT)  nomejit  [on  pAjot],  went  once  (generally  to  some  definite  place). 

Ohi  uiejit  MHMO  [on  jot  mfni.v],  was  going  past. 

63.  Compare  with  me  Jit  and  npHUieJiTj  in  Par.  62  : 

Hect,  Hecjia,  necjio  [nos,  nasta,  nasto],  carried,  was  carrying,  and 
npHHecB,  npHHCCJia,  etc.  [prinos,  prinasta],  brought. 

{a)  Observe  that  Hect,  like  Mor-B,  has  no  Jl  in  the  masculine.     See  also 
Jier'b  and  enact  in  the  following  Vocabulary. 

In  Par.  239  is  given  a  list  of  irregular  verbs  many  of  which 
show  this  feature. 


VOCABULAKY 

cfejit  [sst],  he  sat  down  (inf.  cfeCTb)  ynajit  [updt],  he  fell 

Jiert,  Jierjia,   Jierjio    [log,   iagta,  enact,    cjia,    cjio    [spas,    spAsld, 

iegto],  he  lay  down,  i.e.  he  laid  spAsto],  he  etc.  saved 

himself  down  P'feKa,  H  (Par.  54)  [rakd],  river 

enrfjit  A  [sidst],  he  was  in  a  seat,  nocTejib    {nx)m.   or   ace.)    (Par.    64) 

he  was  sitting  [pAste^i],  bed 

JieJKajit  A  [i85dt],  he  was  in  a  re-  M^fecxo,  a  [liisstA],  place 

dining  position,  i.e.  he  was  lying  HeyjKCJiH  [ii9U36ii],  can  it  he  that  ? 
CMOipi^Tb  A  [smAtr^^t],  to  look  [at)  surely  not  ? 

Exercises 
A.  Translate : 

(1)  Ona  npniujia  na  HpMapKy.  (2)  GoSaKa  exapHKa  jiemajia 
Ha  cojinn-fe.  (3)  Hepnaa  KOUiKa  ynajia  Bt  p-feny  [or  p'^Ky].  (4)  H 
CH  HPira-fe  He  BHA-fejit,  HO  axoTt  MajiLqHKt  ee  enact.  (5)  Ona 
CMOxp-fejia  na  caMKy  Bt  Ji-fec^.  (6)  Ont  nect  Bcapo  ct  boji;6io. 
(7)  Heyn^^JiH  ona  enajia  na  5xoMt  M'fecx'fe?  (8)  Bt  5xoMt  cjiyqa-fe 
ona  CH  He  Morjia  BHa-fexB.  (9)  Mojioaan  noapyra  jKeHn5HHbi  npouijia 
caat  H  Bomjia  Bt  Ji-fect.  (10)  Hcjibsh  cKaaaxt,  r^-fe  ona  xen^pb. 
(11)  HeyjKejiH  ona  ynajia  Bt  Bo^y?     (12)  Boxt  onal 

Heyjfce/iu  ona  yna/ia  eh  eody? 


68  LESSON  XVI  §63 

B.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  The  poor  peasant  woman  went  into  the  house.  (2)  She  never  saw 
her  in  the  house.  (3)  The  czarina's  daughter  came  to  him.  (4)  The  woman's 
friend  went  home  with  her.  (5)  The  old  man's  granddaughter  was  going  past 
the  house  [genit.  after  mhmo,  which  may  be  either  an  adverb  or  a  preposition]. 
(6)  The  poor  old  woman  lay  down  on  the  bed.  (7)  She  was  lying  on  the 
floor.  (8)  The  peasant  woman's  friend  was  at  the  fair  {j^ep.).  (9)  Surely  she 
did  not  bring  it  here  [hither]  ?     (10)  It  is  not  possible  to  sit  on  that  chair. 

C.  Write  sentences  4  and  6  of  Ex.  A  in  the  feminine,  and  sentences 

1,  7,  8,  9,  11  in  the  masculine. 

LESSON  XVI  Y 

Same  subjects  as  in  Lesson  XV.  > 

Vocabulary 

lidcb,  a  [nos],  nose  6p6cHTB  [brosit],  to  throw 

Xbocttj,  a  [xvost],  tail  y6'fe>KaTb  [yb95a^t],  to  run  away 

rJiasTb,  a  [gtas],  eye  jihtl  (jiiijia)  A  [lit  (iiW)],  to  pour 

MOJIOKO,  a  [mAtAko],  milk  hhtb  (nnjia)  A  [pit  (pila)],  to  drink 

c6jiHii;e,  a  [sontsa],  sun  cxaTb  [std^t],  to  begin,  to  set  about, 
rojiOBa,  LI   (Par.  64,  ace.  roJiOBy)  to  become 

[gAtAva],  head  cIhtb  131  A  [sijd^t],  to  shine 

jipaKa  [drakA],  quarrel,  fight  Kai^t  paaii  [kak  ras],  just  then,  as  it 
Kpy^i'Jibift  [krugti],  round  happened 

p630Bbift  [rozAvi],  pink  cioji;a  [sudd],  hither 

seJiCHbift  [zoioni],  green  xyaa  [tudd],  thither 

piijKlH  [ri3i],  brown,  reddish  CHOBa  [snovA],  anew,  again 

HJiHHribiH  [diini],  long  Bqepa  [ftjord],  yesterday 

cfepbiii  [seri],  grey  MeiKfly  {instr.)  [m63du],  between 

CJiyHHJiocb  [stutjltAs],  happened  to,  hto  [to  jto],  that  which 

OTornaTb  [AtAgnd^t],  to  drive  away  eme  [J9|tj6],  still,  yet 

nocTynHTb  [pAstupit],  to  behave,  to  btj  5to  BpcMH  (neut.)  [vstA  vr6mA], 
act  at  that  time,  then 

Ona  JiHJia  na  Komny  BOfloii  [And  iitd  nAkoJku  vAdoi],  ^S'^e  poured 

with  water  on  to  the  cat,  i.e.  she  poured  water  on  the  cat. 

Exercises 
A.  Translate : 

(1)  Bqepa  noSpbifi  CTapliK'b  cuA'feji'b  sjvhch  na  ^xoM-b  cxyjiife, 
K0T6pbiH  ero  BHyn-b  npHHecb  na  Sepen,.  (2)  Cojihuc  eme  ciajio. 
(3)  On-b  BliA'feji'b,  KaK-b  Tarn.  JieiKajia  cfepan  Kdmna.      (4)  noxoM-b 


§63  LESSON  XVI  69 

OH^      CT^Jia      HHTb      MOJIOKO,      KOTOpOC      Cfi      npHHCCJld      aHFJliiiCKafl 

jI'feBoqKa.  (5)  KaK-L  pasi,  boiiiji^  b-b  caa-b  pi^LJKan  •  co6aKa. 
(6)  npHuiJia  K-b  KoiuK-fe,  xoT-fejia  oTornaTb  ee.  (7)  He  Morjia. 
(8)  BbiJia  apana  MCJKjiy  co6aKoii  h  koiukoh.  (9)  CTapHKi. 
CMOTp'feji'b  Ha  HpaKy.  (10)  B-b  ^to  BpeMfl  cxapaa  6a6a  lujia  mhmo. 
(11)  Biiflifejia  H^  OHa  to,  ^to  cjiyHMJiocb.  (12)  Hecjia  naK-b  paa-b 
6ojibin6e  Bej^po  c-b  Boa6tt  h  cxajia  JiHTb  Bondfi  na  KoniKy  u  co6aKy . 
(13)  Go6aKa  yS-fejKaJia.  (14)  KouiKa  Jierjia  h  cnbBa  cxajia  cnaxb  na 
cojiim'fe. 

Komna  nezjia  u  cHoea  cmojia  cnamb  Ha  cojiHi^m. 

B.  Bonpocbi : 
(1)  Kto    CHfl-feji-b    Ha    6eper^    p-feK^?      (2)  Kyaa    npHHecb    er6 

BHyK-b  cT^^ji-b?  (3)  KaKaH  Sbijia  nordaa?^  (4)  KaKOBa  6hisik 
KouiKa,  KOTopan  TaMb  jie>KaJia?  (5)  KaKofi  SbiJi-b  y  nefi  Hocb?  [pink] 
XBOCT-b?  [long]  rjias-b?  [green]  (6)  KaKaH  6biJia  y  nea  rojiOBd? 
[round].  (7)  Hto  ona  cxajia  nnxb?  (8)  Koxopoe  mojioko?  (9)  Hxo 
cjiyqHJiocb  KaK-b  paa-b?  (10)  Ki*  KOMy  npnuiJia  co6aKa?  (11)  Hxo 
HoxoM'b  cjiyqHJiocb?  (12)  Ha  qxo  CMOxp'feji'b  cxapiiK-b?  (13)  Kan-b 
nocxynnjia  cxapan  6a6a?   (14)  Hxo  cjiyqnjiocb  cb  [to,  lit.  with]  coSaKofi? 

(15)   A  C-B  K6u.K0ft?  ^^^,         ,  ^ 

C.  Rewrite  Exercise  A,  substituting 

cxap^i^xa  and  BHyqKa  for  cxapiiKX.  and  bh^kt.  ; 
MyiKiiK-b  for  6a6a ; 
^^meH6K'b,  Ka  [Jtjenok,  Jtjankd],  puppy,  for  co6aKa ; 
KOxenoK'b,  Ka  [kAtonAk,  kAtonkA],  kitten,  for  KOUiKa. 

D.  Translate  into  Russian  : 
(1)  I  did  not  know  what  had  happened  yesterday.     (2)  It  was  fine  weather 

[Ex.  B  3]  and  she  was  sitting  in  the  garden  before  the  house.  (3)  Just 
then  our  little  black  puppy  went  into  the  garden  and  lay  down  in  the  sun. 
(4)  The  peasant-woman's  stupid  son  saw  the  dog  lying  [how  the  dog  lay]  there 
and  wished  to  drive  it  away.  (5)  He  could  not.  (6)  Then  he  behaved  very 
badly.  (7)  He  found  a  small  bucket  of  [with]  water  that  was  standing  behind 
the  house.  (8)  He  brought  it,  poured  it  on  the  puppy,  and  threw  the  puppy 
into  the  water  ;  it  was  dirty  water.  (9)  Then  the  young  dog  ran  away  and 
unfortunately  it  fell  into  the  river.  (10)  But  another  boy  came  and  saved 
it.  (11)  Then  there  was  a  scrimmage  between  the  boy  who  (had)  poured 
the  water  on  the  dog  and  the  boy  who  (had)  saved  it.  (12)  The  little-girl 
[one  word]  liked  the  cat's  round  head,  its  pink  nose  and  green  eye.  (13)  Surely 
she  did  not  say  that  ?  (14)  It  is  impossible  to  say  what  she  used  to  do. 
(15)  What  is  she  to  do  now  ? 

^  H  in  this  position  means  too,  also. 
^  What  sort  of  weather  was  it  ?  (pAg6dA). 


f 


F-l  -H^^-^l 


70  LESSON  XVII  §§64-66 

LESSON  XVII 

64.  Many  feminine  nouns  end  in  -b.     They  are  declined  tlius : 

nom.     SBcpb  [dWr],  door 

gen.     JiBepH  [dv6ri] 

dat.     SBepn  [dv6ri] 

ace.     ABcpb  [dve^r] 
instr.     aBepbK)  [dverju] 
prep.     HBepn  [dv6ri] 
Note. — (1)  Nominative  and  accusative  are  identical. 

(2)  Genitive,  dative,  and  prepositional  are  identical. 

(3)  Prepositional  ends  in  -H. 

65.  MaTb  and  JtOHb  are  not  declined  like  aeepb  (see  Par.  86). 

66.  -b  is  the  one  termination  that,  of  itself,  affords  no  exact 
indication  of  gender,  for,  as  was  seen  in  Par.  26,  masculine  nouns 
also  have  this  ending.     The  feminines  are  in  a  majority. 

VOCABULAKY 

TCTpaAb,  H  [tatra^t],  copy-hook  «Bife  (fern,  of  HBa)  [dvs],  two 

JiomaAb,  H  [tojAt],  Jiorse  Tenjibiii  [topti],  warm 

Hoqb,  H  [not/],  night  xoJioaHbiii  [xAtodni],  cold 

nocTejib,  H  [pAsU^i],  hed  TeMHbiii  [tomni],  dark 

6ceHb,  H  [osan],  autumn  CB-fexjibiti  [svstti],  light 
KOHibuiHfl,  H  [kAnuJnA],  stable 

B^AHOCTb  (/.) — HC  nopoK-b  [bsdnAst  na  pAiok],  Poverty  is  no  vice. 

Exercises 

A.  Indicate  the  meanings  of  the  following  prepositions  and  the  case 

or  cases  they  govern  : 

Ses-b,  Ha,  K-b,  nepe^-b,  B-b,  3a,  o,  npn. 
Give  one  short  sentence  illustrating  the  meaning  of  each. 

B.  Indicate  the  meaning  of  the  following  nouns,  indicate  the  gender 

of  each  by  placing  an  adjective  before  each  nominative,  and 
give  the  dative  and  instrumental  case  of  each  noun  : 
uapb,    6a6a,   Bcapo,    KouiKa,   TOBapHiUT),   mhco,   BHyK^,   HOHb, 

capaft,    noApyra,    h66o,   pyOjib,   aBopen-b,    ojienb,   Mope,   KycoK-b, 

cojKaji'feHie,  caMKa,  pifena,  oceji-b,  KOHibniHH. 

C.  Combine  each  of  the  nouns  in  B  with  jiiBa,  flB'fe  or  nexbipe. 


§§67-69  LESSON  XVIII  71 


LESSON  XVIII 

67.  The  instrumental  case,  apart  from  its  use  after  prepositions 

as  explained  in  Par.  44,  is  also  employed,  as  its  name  implies,  to 

indicate  the  means  by  which,  or  instrument  with  which,  an  act  is 

performed.     Contrast 

Ona  npnmjia  Cb  aaMOii  [And  prijtd  sddmAi],  She  came  with,  i.e.  along 
withy  the  lady, 

with 

Ona  HHcajia  nepdn-L,  KapanaamoMt,  M-fejiOMt  [And  pisdtA  p9r6m, 
kATAndAJom,  liistAm],  She  wrote  with  a  pen,  a  pencil,  chalk. 

KpecTbHHHH'b  naxaJi'L  cox6k)  [krestjdrdn  pAxdt  sax6ju].  The  peasant 
was  ploughing  with  a  plough. 

68.  The  instrumental  is  also  used  in  certain  idioms  expressing 
times  and  seasons,  e.g. 

ceroAHH  ^TpoMTj  [s9v6dnA  litrAm],  this  morning  {to-day  in  the  morning). 

BHcpa  BeHcpoMt  [ftjard  v^tJarAm],  yesterday,  last  evening. 

saBxpa  yTpoM'L  [zdftiA  utrAm],  to-morrow  morning. 

JtneM'L  [dnom],  day,  by  day. 

HO^bK)  [notjju],  hy  night. 

BCCHOH  [vesnoi],  in  spring. 

3Hm6h  [zimoi],  in  winter. 

oceHbK)  [osgiiju],  in  autumn. 

Ji'^TOM'b  [istAm],  in  summer. 

69.  The  instrumental  case  is  also  used  predicatively  after  the 
verb  6i>iTb  (and  several  other  verbs,  some  of  which  are  illustrated 
in  Lesson  XL VIII).  This  is  the  general  form  of  the  phrase  when 
a  change  of  state  or  a  temporary  condition  is  described,  e.g. 

no  CMepxH  {prep.)  oxna  OH-b  SbiJii,  {or  cxaji-b)  uapeM-b  [pA  sm6rti  Atsd  on 
bit  (stat)  tsArom],  On,  i.e.  after,  his  father's  death  he  was  {became)  czar. 

Ona  c^-fejiajiacb  noBapHxcio  (oh)  [And  sdstAtAs  pAVArixAJu  (aI)],  She  made 
herself,  i.e.  became,  a  cook. 
Note. — If   the    complement    of    6bixb,    cjii'fejiaxbCH,   to   become,   is   an 

adjective,  use  the  instrumental  case  (Par.  88)  after  the  infinitive,  and  the 

predicative  nominative  (Par.  187)  after  any  other  form  of  the  verb,  e.g. 

Ona  xox'fejia  6HTb  doraxoio  [And  xAtstA  bit  bAgdtAJu],  She  wished  to  he 
rich. 

Ona  6biJia  Si^AHa  [And  bitd  badnd],  She  was  poor. 


72  LESSON  XVIII  §69 

Vocabulary 

BecH^,  jk  [vasnd],  spring  ji^me  [da 59],  even 

Ji'feTO,  a  [istA],  summer  hjih  [iii],  or 

dceiih,  H  [osaii],  autumn  OTflbixaTb  131  A  [Adixa^t],  to  rest 

3HMa,  ik  (ace.  ^y)  [zima],  winter  BCTp-feTHTb  [fstr6tit],  to  meet 

ji;eHb,  AHA  [de^n,  diia],  day  CKaaaxb  [skAza^t],  to  tell,  say 

;^Tpo,  a  [utrA],  morning  pascKaaaxb  [rAsskAza^t],  to  relate 

B^qep-b,  a  [v^tjor],  evening  ona  WHJia  A  [siW],  she  lived 

noroaa,  bi  [pAgodA],  weather  naxaTb  A  [pAxd^t],  to  plough 

Mopds-b,  a  \mA.v6B\,  frost  maib  A  [sa^t],  to  reap 

Aep^BHH,  H  [dar^vriA],  village  BbipacTaTbl31A[virAstd^t],^o5^row^, 
BI)  aep eBH'fe  [vdor^vne],  in  the  country  grow 

KpecTbiiHHH'b,       a       [krastjdrdn],  npHroTOBJiHXb  131  A[prigAtAvid^t], 

peasant  to  prepare 

nojie,  fl  [poio],  field  jKapKitt  [sdrki],  hot 

jKaxBa,  bi  [5dtvA],  harvest  xpyA0JiK)6HBbm  [trudAlubfyi],  w^orA:- 
JKHXO,  a  [s'itA],  grain  loving,  i.e.  industrious 

cepni),  a  [ssrp],  sickle  MOKpbiii  [mokri],  damp 

Koca,  bi  [kAsd],  scy^/ie  aypnoH  [durnoi],  had 

coxa,  II  [sAxd],  Russian  plough  noHXH  [pAtjtf],  nearly 

KHHra,  H  [kni'gA],  hook  Bcerna  [fsogdd],  always 

uiKOJia,  bi  [jkotA],  school  HHorji;a  [iiLigdd],  sometimes 

ypdK-b,  a  [urok],  lesson  y>K6  [U38],  already 

Bee  xo,  Hxo  a'fejiajiocb  [fso  to  Jto  dstAtAs],  aW  ^M«  did  itself,  i.e. 
aM  t^^  was  done,  took  place. 

Note. — cejio  is  a  village  with  a  church,  ^ep6BHfl  is  a  hamlet,  a  village  without 
a  church. 

Exercises 
A.  Translate  : 

(1)  Bnepa  yxpoM-b  h  Bcxp-fexHJia  noApyry,  Koxopan  mhIj  pascKa- 
sajia  Bce  xo,  ^xo  ji^jiajiocb,  Korjia  ona  JKHJia  B-b  aepeBH-fe.  (2)  BbiJia 
BecHOH  eme  xojioAHaa  noroaa,  ho  xpyaojiioSHBbift  KpecxbjiHHH'b 
naxaji-b  MOKpoe  nojie  coxoio,  h  cfenji-b  aqMCHb  h  obcct*.  (3)  ^HeMX> 
OH-b  paSoxajix.  na  Jiyr;^  hjih  B-b  canf;  BeqepoM-b  oii-b  oxAbixajix., 
a  HoqbK)  OKI)  cnaji-b.  (4)  Bcchoh  moh  nojipyra  xome  xo^HJia  bx> 
uiKOJiy.  (5)  BeqepoMX>  oh^  npnroxoBJiHJia  yp6KX>.  (6)  JT^xomx* 
6bijia  oSbiKHOBeHHo  xopoman,  xenjiaa,  nnoraa  H^apKan  noroaa, 
H  HHMeHb  ym6  BbipacxaJiij.  (7)  6ceHbH)  6biJia  JKaxBa.  (8)  Kpecxb- 
HHiiH-b  JKaji-b  >KHxo  ccpnoM-b  iKjiH  KOCOK).  (9)  3hm6h  6bijia  no^ixH 
Bcerna  aypnaH  noroaa  h  ciiJibHbm  Mopos-b.  (10)  3hm6h  HejibSH 
paOoxaxb  na  ABop'fe  [out  of  doors]. 

SuMoii  ueAhdR  padomamb  ua  deopm.  ♦ 


§70  LESSON  XIX  73 

B.  Bonpocbi : 

(1)  H-feM-b  naxaji-L  KpecTi>flHHHT>?  (2)  A  H'feM'B  owb  JKaji-B  jkiIto? 
(3)  KaKaH  dbijia  occhbio  bte>  aep^BH-fe  nor6Aa?  (4)  Bosmojkho  jih 
padoxaxb  3hm6h  na  HBop-fe?  (5)  IIoqeM^?  (6)  Kora^  A'feBoqKa 
npnroTOBJifljia  ypoK-L? 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  girl's  book  was  lying  with  her  pencil  on  the  table  that  stood  before 
the  window.  (2)  She  has  no  [y  ueA  H'feT'B]  copy-book,  and  her  pen  and  black- 
pencil  are  in  school.  (3)  In  spring  the  peasant  was  never  at  home ;  he  was 
always  ploughing  or  sowing,  and  often  he  was  still  working  in  jfield  or  meadow 
in  the  autumn.  (4)  Last  night  our  young  son  lay  down  in  [on  to]  bed,  but 
this  morning  he  was  lying  on  the  floor.  (5)  Surely  he  (had)  not  fallen  on 
to  the  floor  ?  Yes,  he  was  on  the  floor.  (6)  Yesterday  morning,  when  I  was 
walking  on  the  meadow,  I  saw  the  two  (little)  girls  ;  one  was  playing  with  the 
dog,  the  other  was  working.  (7)  In  that  year  there  was  a  hot  spring,  and  a 
cold  autumn.  (8)  In  winter  the  boy  usually  went  (Par.  40)  to  [into]  school. 
(9)  In  summer  the  idle  man  used  to  lie  in  the  sun  ;  he  would  never  [never  not 
wished  to]  work,  because  he  always  wished  to  sleep.  V  (10)  To  whom  did  the 
httle  girl  bring  the  nice  ripe  apple  ?  (11)  What  was  the  old  man  talking  about 
this  morning  ?  (12)  Who  was  standing  before  the  door  ?  (13)  Whom  did 
you  see  this  morning  ?  (14)  With  what  did  she  usually  do  that  ?  (15)  I 
was  not  speaking  of  the  rich  man  who  became  a  peasant.  (16)  Last  night  I 
saw  him  giving  [saw  how  he  gave]  oats  to  the  horse.  (17)  He  generally 
ploughed  in  spring  when  there  was  still  bad  weather ;  and  in  autumn,  when 
there  was  often  hot  weather,  the  industrious  peasant  reaped  barley  that  had 
grown  up  [grew  up]  in  the  summer.    (18)  Is  it  possible  to  reap  or  sow  in  winter  ? 

(19)  Why  did  your  old  friend  nearly  always  wish  to  work  outside  at  night  ? 

(20)  He  could  see  all  you  [thou]  showed  him.     (21)  I  never  knew  that  you 
[thou]  still  reaped  corn  with  a  scythe,  because  I  never  lived  in  the  country. 


LESSON  XIX 

70.  Of  the  prepositions  governing  the  genitive  several  have 
already  been  introduced.     The  most  frequently  used  are : 

6631.  [bss,  bas],  without  HSTb  [iz,  is],  out  of,  from 

SjiHaTb  [biis],  near  KpoM'fe  [kroriia],  besides 

BM-fecTO  [vilisstA],  instead  of  mhmo  [liiimA],  past 

BOSJi-fe  [vozio],  beside  ott.  [ot.  At],  from,  away 

flJiH  [dia,  diA], /or  y  [u],  at,  near 
ao  [do,  dA],  up  to,  till,  before 


74  LESSON  XIX  §7i 

B.g, : 

6e3T>  KHHrH  [bas  knfgi],  without  a  book. 

Sjihs-b  iiepKBH  [biis  ts6rk\d],  near  the  church. 

BM'fecTO  nepa  [vihsstA  para],  instead  of  a  pen. 

BOSJiife  neepH  [voT^h  dv6ri],  beside  the  door. 

flJlfl  MeHfl  [diA  riiand], /or  me. 

SO  ^Toro  AHH  [dA  stAVA  diio],  till  this  day. 

H3i>  niKOJibi  [is  jkoli],  from  school. 

H3'L  PocciH  [is  lAsii],  from  Russia. 

KpoM'fe  Toro  [kroiha  tAvo],  besides  that,  in  addition. 

MHMO  aoMa  [ihimA  domA],  past  the  house. 

OTt  Apyra  [At  drtigA],  from  a  friend. 

y  BacL  [u  vas],  with  you,  near  you,  in  your  possession,  etc. 

71.  Observe  : 

OHTb  SbiJiT.  aoMa  [on  bit  d6inA],  He  was  at  home  (rest). 

Oh-l  nomejit  aoMoii  [on  pAj6t  dAmoi],  He  went  home  (motion). 

Ona  npHUiJia  aoMOii  [Ana  prijta  dAmol],  She  cams  home. 


VOCABULAKY 

Kaeeapa,  li  [kafodrA],  teacher's  desk  pncoBaTb  A  [risAva^t],  to  draw 

CKaMCHKa,  H  [skAiii^IkA],  bench  yqiixt  A  [utjit],  to  teach 

6yMara,  h  [bumdgA],  paper  yqi^Tbca  A  [utJitsA],  to  teach  one- 

JtocKa,    li    {ace.    flocKy)    [dAska],  self,  to  be  taught,  i.e.  to  learn 

board  but  yqiiTb   ypoK'B  [utjit  urok],   to 

KJi^ccHaH  ji;ocKa  [ktasnAJa  dAska],  learn  a  lesson 

black-board  (class-board)  cnpocHTb  [sprAsit],  to  ask,  to  make 

noxBajia,  bi  [pAxvAtd],  praise  an  inquiry 

yHHxejibHHixa,  bi  [ut/itainitsA], /o^2/-  cnpauiHBaTb   131  A  [sprdJivAt],  to 

teacher  ask  questions 

yqHTCJib,  H  [utjitai],  teacher  OTB-feHaTb  131  A[AtY9tja^i],to answer 

yHCHiiK'b,  a  [utjanik],  pupil  KpacHbift  [krdsni],  red 

yqcHHua,  bi  [utjanitsA],  girl-pupil  Ji-feHHBbiii  [ianivi],  idle 

LtepKGBb,!  KBH  [tssrkAf],  church  BHHMaxejibHbiH  [vnimdtaim],  atten- 

whsiTy,  a  [mst],  chalk  tive 

BOKBaJiT),  a  [vAkzdt],  railway-station  npHJiejKHbiH  [priissni],  diligent 

nocifemaTb    131    A   [pAsaJtJd^t],    to  CTapmiii  [stdrji],  elder,  eldest 

visit,  frequent  MJiaamiH  [mtdtji],  younger 

(o)K6HHHTb  [(A)k6ntjit],  to  finish  cypoBbiii  [surovi],  severe 

HHTaxb  131  A  [tjitd^t],  to  read  OTKy;:^^  [AtktidA],  whence 

^  As  in  KycdK-B  or  oTe^•I.  the  vowel  in  the  second  syllable  disappears  in  the 
oblique  cases. 


§71  LESSON  XIX  75 

Exercises 
A.  Translate  : 

(1)  MoH  cxapmiii  ctmi.  ym6  KOHqHjit  niKOJiA^.  (2)  Ho  Kor^^ 
H  SbiJit  B-L  AepeBH'fe,  ero  MJiaaniiii  SpaxTj  noc%i5ajn>  eme  MajiCHbKoe 
yqnjiHme,!  Koxopoe  ctohjio  6jiH3'L'^0K3aJia.  (3)  Past  oh-l  npHineji-B 
HOMOH  HST*  lUKOJibi.     (4)  Er6  ^S^pSrHJii)  ero  MajienbKiii  TOBapnm'L. 

(5)  GnDocj^jit  ^6,  «Hto  tm  cer6ji;HH  ^xpoM-b  a-fejiaji-b  bx.  iiiKOJi'fe?* 

(6)  npfajiejKhLiH  yHeHHKx>  noKa3ajix>  eMy  KHHry  h  xexpa^b,  paacKa- 
aajit  Bce  xo,  hxo  ^-fejiajiocb  oSbiKHOB^HHo^H  ,CKa3ajn>,  hxo  6e3T> 
KHHrH  H  xexpaAH  Hejib3H  yqiixbcfl.  (7)  KpoM-^^  KHnrn  6biJix>  y 
Her6  qepHbiH  KapaH3;ann>.  (8)  Hnor^a  cxapmiii  yqeHHKX>  nncajix. 
nepoMt  BM^cxo  KapaHXtama.  (9)  KpoM-fe  ^  xoro  ohx>  nHcajn>  na 
CyMar-fe.  (10)  Kjia6raa^  Hocika  '  cxoHJia  B03Ji'fe'KaeeApi>i  yqE[xejiH 
H  nepej]ix>  okh6mx>.  (11)  Tpyaojiio6HBLiH  yqnxejib  nacxo  nncajix. 
M^JioivTb'  Ha  aocK-fe.  (12)  JliHHBbiii  yqeHHKx>  Bceraa  CHa'fejix>  na 
CKaMCHK-fe  6JIH3X,  KaoeApbi.  (13)  GypoBbift  cxapbitt  yqiixejib  j;ajix> 
yp6Kx>  ceroAHH  ^xpoMx>.  (I^J^Dh-l  .  mhofo  cnpamnBaji-b,  ho,  kX) 
cojKaji^HlK),  xojibKO  oniiHX.  BHHMaVcjibHbiii  y^enJiKX.  xox'fejix.  otw^- 
qaxb.     (15)  5xoxx>  MajibqHKX>  nojiyqnjnb  oxx>  y^Hxejifl  noxBajiy'. 

dmomb  MOJihHUKh  noAijHUAh  oim>  yuumeAR  noxeajiy. 

B.  Kewrite  Exercise  A  in  the  feminine,  as  far  as  the  sense  will 
admit  of  that.     (Use  no^pyra  in  place  of  TOBapHmi>.) 

C.  Complete  the  following  : 

KpoM-fe  ^x-,  6e3x.  xoBapnm-,  6e3'b  hhh-,  cx>  yq^xcjibHHit-,  cx> 
yqiaxeji-,  npn  napiiix-,  no  ABopit-,  BM-fecxo  kojk-,  kx,  cecxp-,  mm 
cxapyx-,  BX,  pifeK-  [in],  bx,  p'feK-  [into],  na  cxoji-,  na  Ji^r-,  Bbsji-fe 

ABep-,  OXX>  HCJIOB'feK-    H3X>  I^CpKB-,  HpH  I^ap-. 

D.  BonpocBi : 

(1)  OxKyaa  npHinejix,  Bauix,  chhx,?  (2)  Kyji;a  ohx,  npnmejix.? 
(3)  Hxo  ero  cnpocHJix>  xoBapnmxj?  (4)  Hxo  ohx>  noKasaJiX)  xoBa- 
pnmy?  (5)  Hxo  oh-l  Bce  pa3CKa3aJix,?  (6)  Tv<k  cna-fejix.  o6biKHO- 
BeHHO  yHHxejib?  (7)  TaMx>  jih  xaKjKe  cnnijix,  yqeHHKX.?  (8)  T^h 
cxoHjia  KJiaccnaH  AOCKa?  (9)  y  Koro  mhofo  M-fejia?  (10)  H-feMX} 
y^Hxejib  HHcaji'L  Ha  HocK'fe?  (11)  HaHeMx,nHcajix>yHeHiiKX>?  (12)  Kxo 
oxB-feqajiX),  Korfla  ynnxejib  cnpamHBajix>? 

^  yiiijiHme,  a  [utJiliJtj9]=niK6Jia. 


76  PLURALS  §72 

E.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

A  warm  spring  ;  a  cold  summer  ;  the  cat's  green  eye  ;  its  pink  nose  ;  its 
black  tail ;  its  two  paws  ;  ripe  corn  ;  good  barley  ;  blue  chalk  ;  a  red  pencil ; 
a  lazy  boy ;  she  is  a  kind  teacher  ;  he  is  a  good  teacher  ;  he  told  you  that ; 
I  told  her  that ;  she  never  spoke  French  well ;  I  related  everything  to  him  ; 
a  lot  of  paper ;  a  little  oats  for  the  ass ;  he  has  no  oats  for  the  horse  ;  how  much 
bread  ?  two  palaces  ;  three  heroes  ;  once  I  asked  him  ;  he  used  to  be  always 
putting  questions  ;  he  usually  went  to  school,  when  he  lived  with  his  grand- 
father ;  this  morning  he  was  going  past  the  house  ;  he  went  to  school  yester- 
day ;  she  was  at  home  ;  she  went  home  ;  what  is  his  sister  to  do  ?  surely  he 
has  not  left  school  yet  ?  was  it  possible  to  save  [cnacTii]  the  dog  that  fell  into 
the  river  ?  it  is  impossible  to  answer  [na  with  ace.]  this  question. 

F.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Once  in  the  spring  my  Uttle  sister  came  home  in  the  evening.  (2)  She 
showed  me  a  pretty  red  pencil  which  the  lady- teacher  had  given  her.  (3) 
She  always  used  to  answer  when  I  questioned  (her),  and  on  that  occasion 
she  related  everything  to  me,  when  I  asked  her  what  happened  in  school. 
(4)  I  (had)  bought  a  lot  of  paper.  (5)  I  gave  it  to  her,  so  that  she  might 
draw  or  write  on  it  [so  that  she  drew,  see  Ex.  X  B  8].  (6)  But  that 
paper  did  not  please  her.  (7)  She  read  very  well,  because  she  was  a  diligent 
little  pupil.  (8)  At  that  time  she  studied  in  the  school  that  used  to  stand 
beyond  the  meadow.  (9)  Her  young  brother  could  not  yet  read.  (10)  He 
was  always  a  lazy  boy ;  that  is  why  he  could  not  read.  (11)  Surely  he  was 
not  always  playing  out  of  doors  ? 


THE  PLURAL  OF  NOUNS 

72.  Masculine  and  Feminine  Nouns 

Hard  Form 

Nominative  plural  ends  in  -bi,  e.g. 

Jl'^Kh,  Jl'iiJiM  [dsd  (t),  dsdi],  grandfather. 
Jiana,  Jianti  [tapA,  tapij,  paw. 

Soft  Form 
Nominative  plural  ends  in  -H,  e.g. 

napb,  napii  [tsa^r,  tsAri],  czar. 
ABcpt,  ABepn  [dve^r,  dv6ri],  door. 

(a)  If  tlie  stem  ends  in  r,  k,  x,  m,  q,  m,  m,  the  termination 
is  always  -h,  e.g. 

KapaHAam-B,  KapaHAamii  [kATAndaJ,  kArAndAji],  pencil. 


§§73-77  PLUKALS  77 

73.  Neuter  Nouns 

Hard  Form 
Nominative  plural  ends  in  -a ;  e.g. 

MrbcTO,  M'fecTa  [ihestA,  riiasta],  place. 
Soft  Form 
Nominative  plural  ends  in  -fl  ;  e.g. 

Mope,  Mopii  [m6ra,  niArd],  sea. 
(a)  If  the  stem  ends  in  r,  k,  x,  m,  H,  m,  m,  the  termination 
is  always  -a ;  e.g. 

yqiijinme,  yqiiJiHiua  [utjliijtja,  ytJiiijtJA],  school. 

74.  In  all  neuter  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  in  masculine  and 
feminine  forms  denoting  inanimate  things,  the  accusative  plural 
has  the  same  form  as  the  nominative  plural. 

75.  The  accent  frequently  changes  in  the  plural  and  there  are 
many  other  irregularities  among  nouns  in  frequent  use.  A  list  is 
given  here  of  the  nouns  that  have  occurred  in  Lessons  I-XIX. 
The  list  is,  of  course,  chiefly  for  reference,  but  it  is  recommended 
that  the  list  be  learned  gradually  group  by  group  and  every  new 
noun  as  it  occurs  placed  in  the  proper  group. 

76.  Nouns  that  have  occurred  in  Lessons  I-XIX 

The  nominative  and  genitive  singular,  nominative  plural,  and 
occasionally  (in  brackets)  the  genitive  plural  are  given. 

The  genitive  plurals  will  not  be  used  before  Lesson  XXXVI. 

77.  Masculine  Nouns 

1 
n-feaib,  H'fena,  H^jibi,  grandfather 
BHy^K-B,  a,  H,  grandson  oropoji'L,  a,  li,  Jdtchen  garden 

usLJihmiK-b,  a,  H,  boy  Bt'feaji'L,  a,  li,  entrance 

MHHHCTpib,  a,  LI,  minister  M'feji'L,  a,  chalk 

ji6mhk'l,  a,  H,  little  house  Mopoa-L,  a,  u,  frost 

TOBapHiu'L,  a,  H,  companion  CB'feT'L,  a,  li,  light,  world 

paSoTHHKi.,  a,  H,  workman  ypoK-L,  a,  h,  lesson 

BOKS^ji'L,  a,  li,  railway  station  nopoK-L,  a,  h,  vice 


78  PLUKALS  §77 

Most  polysyllabic  masculine  nouns  not  accented  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular  on  the  last  syllable,  especially  nouns  in  eiJ['b,  o6t>,  OKh, 
yet,  do  not  change  the  accent  in  the  oblique  cases. 

2 
CTOjn>,  CTOJia,  ctojih,  table 
cepni),  a,  bi,  sickle  MymiiK-b,  a,  h,  peasant 

XBOCT'b,  a,  li,  tail  yqcHHK'B,  a,  h,  pupil 

ZlBop'b,  a,  LI,  court,  yard  Kapanaamt,  a,  li,  pencil 

exapHK-L,  a,  ii,  oZcZ  man 

Most  polysyllabic  masculine  nouns  accented  in  the  nominative 
singular  on  the  last  syllable  and  many  monosyllabic  nouns  have  the 
accent  on  the  termination  in  the  oblique  cases. 

3 
OTei^Tj,  oma,  OTixbi,  father 

ABopent,  pua,  LI,  palace  Kyn^U'L,  nua,  li,  merchant 

OBecL,  Bca,  i^i,  oats  KycoK'L,  CKa,  ii,  piece 

ocejiT),  cjia,  %  ass  npyjK6K'L,  Ka,  ii,  dear  friend 

4 
cajii'b,  cana,  cajubi,  garden 
nojiT*,  a,  LI,  floor  moct'L,  a,  li,  6nc?g'e 

HOCL,  a,  lii,  wose  Bepxi),  a,  ii,  to^,  upper  part 

paai),  a,  li,  a  fime  CLipi),  a,  li,  cheese 

5 

capaft,  capafl,  capan,  cartshed 

rep6tt,  fl,  H,  hero  cji^qafi,  h,  h,  occasion,  opportunity 

6 
i^apb,  i^apa,  i^apn,  C2;ar 
Kopojib,  A,  A,  Hiigr  flHMeHL,  h,  h,  ftar/ey 

p^6jib,  ii,  H,  rouble  oji^hl,^  h,  h,  s^agr 

acHb,  HHH,  aiiH,  (Za?/  MCjliB^Ab,^  H,  H,  bear 

7 
rjiasTi,  rjiasa,  rjiasa  (t>),  eye 
noMT),  a,  a  (oBT)),  y^owse  •h^T'l,  a,  a  (ob^),  meadow 

ji'fec'L,  a,  a  (oB'L),/ores^  Beqepi.,  a,  a  (obtj),  evening 

d^per-L,  a,  a  (ob-l),  bank,  shore 

^  Notice  the  accentuation  of  oji6Hb  and  MeflB'tflb. 


78  PLURALS  79 


y^HTejib,  yHiiTejiH,  yqHTeji}i,~»       , 
(mre)  y^HTCJiH,/ 


8 
xji-feS-L,  xji-feSa,  xji'fe6^,  6recw^,       rda-B,  roaa,  roaa,"\ 
Zoaves  (rare)  rosLi,/^ 

„  „        xji^6i>i,  c(yrn 

^B'feT'B,  UB-fexa,  ixB-fexa,  coto^^r 
„  „       ii;B'feTbi,  flower 

9 

ClilH'L,  Cl5[Ha,  CLIHOBBH  (B^ft),  SOn 

apyrt,  ap^ra,  JipysbH  (36H),/nenc? 

KH^3B,  KH^3H,  KHHBbii  (S^tt),  ^n^WJe 

dpax-b,  Spdxa,  SpaxBH  (BeBi>),  brother 
CT^jiT),  CTyjia,  CT^JiBH  (bcb-l),  chair 

10 
Young  of  animals 

peSeHOK-L,  peSeHKa,  peSflxa  [raWnAk],  child 
mcHOK'B,  HKa,  Hflxa,  puppy 
KOXCHOK-B,  HKa,  THxa,  Utten 

(Cf.  Par.  229.) 

11 
Names  of  classes  of  people  and  of  many  nationalities 
KpecxBHHHHT.,  KpecxbiiHHHa,  KpccxbiiHe,  a  peasant 
(Cf.  Par.  230.) 

12 
HCJiOB'feK'b,  qejiOB-^Ka,  juban  (eft),  man,  people 

78.  Feminine  Nouns 

1 
Accent  fixed 
6a6a,  5a5bi,  6a6i>i,  peasant  woman 
6yMara,  h,  h,  paper  A-feBOHKa,  h,  h  (ckx,),  little  girl 

6a6ymKa,  h,  h  (en-b),  grandmother       >KaxBa,  bi,  bi,  harvest 
BH;^qKa,  h,  h  (eKTb),  granddaughter       «KeHii;HHa,  bi,  bi,  woman 
repoHHH,  H,  H  (b),  heroine  Kaee^pa,  bi,  bi,  teacher's  desk 

nana,  bi,  bi,  Za^??/  KHHra,  h,  h,  600A; 

nepcBHfl,  H,  H  (cHb),  village,  hamlet      K6>Ka,  h,  h,  leather 
AOHKa,  H,  H  (eK'b),  little  daughter  KOHiomHH,  h,  h,  5to6Ze 

npaKa,  H,  H,  quarrel  KouiKa,  H,  h  (eK'b),  cai 


80  PLURALS  §79 

Ji^na,  H,  bi,  paw  CKaM^iiKa,  h,  h  (ck-b),  he'mh,  seat 

MaxyuiKa,  h,  h  (cK'b),  mother  cjiymaHKa,  h,  h  (oKt),  servant 

HHHH,  H,  H  (b),  child's  nurse  co6aKa,  h,  h,  dog 

noBapHxa,  h,  h,  cook  cxapy^xa,  w.,  u,  old  woman 

norojxa,  li,  weather  TbMa,  bi,  gloom,  darkness 

nojipyra,  h,  iiy  female  friend  yqeHHita,  bi,  bi,  schoolgirl 

noxBajia,  iJi,  bi,  praise  yqiixejibHHi^a,  bi,  bi,  ZacZ?/  teacher 

nxHixa,  bi,  bi,  ftiVc^  i^apHija,  bi,  bi,  czarina 
caMKa,    H,    H    (oKt),    female   (of      men,  h,  h  (ft),  neck 

animals)  lUKOJia,  bi,  bi,  scAooZ 

2 
Singular — termination  accented  ;  plural — stem  accented 
Hrpa,  iJi,  — bi,  game  Koca,  bi,  -^bi,  sc^/^^^ 

cecxpa,  bi,  -bi  (ep-b),  s*5ier  eecua,  ^i,  -bi  (ch-b),  spring  {season) 

coxa,  II,  -^H,  plough 

The  last  four  ma«/  also  have  ace.  sing,  accented  on  stem. 


Termination  accented  except  in  accusative  singular  and 
nominative  plural 
BOfla,  iJi,  ^y,  -^bi,  water  3HMa,  bi,  ^y,  -^bi,  m?ifer 

roJiOBa,bi,-^-y,--bi  (first syllable),      aocKa,  h,  ^y  or  -f,  -^h,  6oarc^ 
/leowi  pi^Ka,  ii,  ^y  or  -y,  -h,  nVer 

The  difference  in  accentuation  distinguishes  in  these  words  and 
in  the  words  in  Group  2  the  genitive  singular  from  the  nominative 
plural. 

4 
AB^pb,^  HBepH,  nBepH  (eft),  door         nocx^Jib,  h,  h,  bed 
Hoqb,^  H,  H  (eft),  night  occHb,  h,  h,  autumn 

Ji6maji;b,i  h,  h  (eft),  horse  xexpa^b,  h,  h,  exercise-book 

CM^pxb,^  H,  H  (6ft),  death  6'feaHOCXb,  h,  poverty 

^6pK0Bb,^  KBH,  H  (6ft),  church 

79.  Neuter  Nouns 

1 

Draw  bach  accent  in  plural 
Bejipo,  BCApa,  Benpa  (ep-b),  pail         okho,  OKHa,  OKHa  (KOH-b),  window 
cejio,  cejia,  cejia,  village 

*  Termination  accented  in  oblique  cases  of  plural. 


§80  LESSON  XX  81 

2 

Move  accent  forward  in  plural 
Macjio,Macjia,Macjia(ceji'b), 6ttWer      yxpo,  a,  a,  morning 
M'fecTO,  a,  a,  place  Miico,  a,  plur.  rare,  meat 

Jl'feTO,  a,  a,  summer,  years  jkhto,  a,  plur.  rare,  g^ram 

nojie,  nojifl,  nojiH  (6ft),  ^eW  Mope,  h,  h  (6ft),  5ea 

The  transposition  of  accent  in  neuter  nouns  is  very  general. 

3 

Do  not  change  the  accent 
mojiok6,  a,  a,  milh  nnxbe,  h,  h  (6ft),  cfrmA; 

Kpecjio,  a,  a  (cejit),  arm-chair  K^^manbe,  h,  h  (itt), /oo<Z 

coJiHue,  a,  a  (hcu'L),  sun  yn^uhe,^  ^h,  h,  learning 

yHlijiHiue,  a,  a,  sc^ooZ  Hey^eHbe,^  h,  h,  ignorance,  illiteracy 

BAanie,  h,  h  (ift),  building  coKaji-fenie,  a,  a  (ift),  pity 

4  5 

hSjioko,  a,  hSjigkh,  a^^te  nep6,  a,  n6pbH  (bCB-b),  pen 

6  7 

h66o,  H66a,  He6eca  (ecT>),  sky,  bp6mh,  chh,  end,  tim£ 

heaven  (Lesson  LIII) 


LESSON  XX 

80.  The  plural  of  the  past  tense  of  any  verb  ends  in  -jih. 
The  complete  form  of  the  past  tense  is  therefore  : 


tr 

H\]xfMSi^i>,  a^Majia  (ny^Majio),  thought 
TH  Vnomeji'b,  nonijia  (nouijio),  went 
owb,  OHa,  OHoJMor'b,  Morjia  (Morji6),  could 

Plural 
Mbi  [mi],  we^     ,  rj/      \-x 

ona  (m.  ay^  I )  [Ai].  [nom™  [P4  'J 
0H4c/:)[Anii(4i"°''™[°"ff"] 

^  Also  spelt  -ie. 


82  LESSON  XX  §§  81-83 

Note. — (a)  The  pronoun  bbi  and  the  possessive  Bamij  are  often, 
especially  in  correspondence,  written  with  a  capital. 

(6)  Adverbial  past  participle  (invariable) : 
jt^MaBT.  or  A;^MaBmH,  nom^AniH,  M6rmH,  having  thought,  gone,  been  able. 

Adjectival  past  participle  active  (declined  Hke  an  adjective) : 
a^MaBUiitt,  nomenmiii,  Mormifi,  one  who  has  thought,  gone,  been  able. 

Adjectival  past  participle  passive  (declined  like  an  adjective) : 
(3a)3;;^MaHHbitt,  something  that  has  been  thought. 

These  forms  are  given  only  in  order  that  the  student  may 
be  able  to  recognize  them  in  reading :  they  will  not  often  appear 
in  Part  I  of  this  book. 

81.  MOH  [mAi],  TBOH  [tvAi],  HaiiiH  [naji],  BauiH  [vaji]  are  the 
plurals  for  my,  thy,  our,  your  or  mine,  thine,  ours,  yours.  Hxt  [jix]  = 
of  them,  their,  theirs.  3TH  [eti]  and  xife  [ts]  are  the  pliu-als  of  axoxt 
and  TOT'B. 

82.  Nominative  Plural  op  the  Adjective 

Habd  Fobm 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

sing.    6'fejiHti  6'fejiaH  6'fejioe,  white 

plur.    6'fejibie  [bstija]  6'fejibiH  [betijo],  6'fejitiH  [bstije] 

sing.    MOJiOAoft  MOJioaaH  MOJionoe,  young 

plur.    MO  JIG  jpiie  [mAtAdij  9]  mo  jig  abih  [m  AtAdij  a]  mg  JiOAiiH  [niAtAdij  a] 

Soft  Form 
Ma^.  Fern.  Neut.  , 

sing.    Kpattnift  KpaftHHH  Kp  aft  nee,  extreme,  last,  least 

plur.    KpaftHle  [krdinije]   Kpaftnifl  [krairiija]  KpattniH  [krdinijs] 

That  is,  the  endings  are,  in  the  masculine  plural,  -Lie  or  -ie, 
and  in  the  feminine  and  neuter  plural,  -lih  or  -in. 

83.  Remember  that  h  can  never  stand  after  r,  K,  x,  m,  H,  in,  m  : 
the  plural  of  pyccKiii  is  pyccnie,  in  [ruskijo]. 

The  difference  between  tie  and  bih  and  that  between  ie  and  ia 
exist  only  in  writing,  as,  in  ordinary  discourse,  there  is  no  appreci- 
able distinction  to  the  ear. 


§§84r-86  LESSON  XX  83 

84.  The  accusative  of  masculine  and  feminine  plural  adjectives 
qualifying  names  of  inanimate  things  has  the  same  form  as  the 
nominative. 

All  neuter  accusatives  of  nouns  and  adjectives  have  the  same 
form  as  the  nominative. 

85.  Before  taking  up  Lesson  XXI,  at  least  the  regular  nomina- 
tive plurals  should  be  learned.  These  and  most  of  the  others  will 
be  impressed  on  the  memory  with  very  httle  effort  by  reading  over 
the  Kussian  examples  in  Lessons  I  to  XIX,  taking  them  according 
to  the  following  scheme. 

Re-read  the  Exercises,  substituting,  as  far  as  the  sense  admits 
of  it,  plural  for  singular  subjects.  Omit  oji;hht>,  etc.  (The  word  66a, 
66'fe,  65a  [obA,  6bo,  oIda],  meaning  both,  is  a  word  that  suggests 
itself  now  and  then,  but  66a  ^  takes  the  genitive  singular  like  flBa.) 

(a)  Learn  masculine  groups  1,  2,  3,  4,  12. 

Ex.  I  A,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  7,  10. 

Ex.  II  A  (omit  Nos.  6,  14,  15,  16). 

Ex.  Ill  B  (omit  Nos.  6,  8,  11,  and  16). 

Ex.  IV  A,  Nos.  13,  14,  15,  18,  20,  21,  24,  25. 

(b)  Learn  masculine  groups  5  and  6. 

Ex.  V  B,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  8,  12,  13. 

(c)  Learn  masculine  groups  7  and  9. 

Ex.  VI  E,  Nos.  5-13. 

(d)  Learn  masculine  group  8,  and  neuters  2-6. 

Ex.  VII  A. 

(e)  Learn  mascuHne  groups  7,  8,  9  again  and  the  remaining 
groups  of  neuter  nouns. 

Exx.  VIII  B,  IX  C,  X  B. 
(/)  Learn  masculine  groups  10  and  11   and  the  rule  for  the 
formation  of  feminine  plurals  (groups  1-3). 

Ex.  XIII  A,  Nos.  1-12,  Ex.  XV  A,  and  Ex.  XVI  A. 
(g)  Learn  feminines,  group  4. 
Exx.  XVIII  A,  XIX  A. 
/HaM'L  =  to  us  \ 
\BaM'B  =  ^o  you). 

»  See  Par.  176,  d. 


84  LESSON  XXI  §86 


LESSON  XXI 


PLURALS   AND   PKONOUNS 

Vocabulary 

npHKaaqHKT.,    a,  •  h    [prikdstjik],  kjhoh-b,  a,  vi  [klutj],  key 

shop-assistant,  clerk  cyxott  [suxoi],  dry 

BCMJiii,  ^,  -K),  ^H  [zemid],  earth,  land  HpKitt  [jarki],  bright 

OBu;a,  iJl,  -LI  [Aftsa],  sheep  cepaiiTbiH  [sorditi],  angry,  violent 

KopoBa,  bi,  bi  [kAiovA],  cow  eme  pas'b  [jajtjo  ras],  still  a  time, 

Tpaea,  lii,  — bi  [tiAvd],  grass  i.e.  once  more 

KyxHH,  H,  n  [kuxiiA],  kitchen  TOMy  Haaaai*  [tAmii  mvzdt],  to  that 

KOMHaxa,  bi,  bi  [komnAtA],  room  hack,  i.e.  ag'o 

;^jiHiia,  bi,  bi  [tiiitsA],  5iree^  TpH  roAa  tom^  Hasaa-b  [tri  godA 

saMOK'b,  MKa,  MKH  [zAmok],  lock  tAmii  nAzdt],  three  years  ago 

TpyflT),  a,  li  [trud  (t)],  trouble,  diffi-  ^aBHbiM'b-AaBHO     [dAvnim-dAvn6], 

culty  long  ago 


Exercises 

A.  Write  the  following  sentences  with  all  nominatives  in  the  plural : 

(1)  npundsHUKh  npninejiT.  kx  spyry.  (2)  Eopdea  a  oei^d  y 
Mcemi^UHbi.  (3)  Bn^HKa  ryjiHJia  ch  dddyiuKou.  (4)  H  cm^  j^aji-b 
KHiiry  cecmpiji.  (5)  yudmejib  roBopHJi'b  o  mempddu.  (6)  Cemmjiaa 
^jiui^a  MHife  OHCHb  HpaBHJiacb.  (7)  MonpaR  mpaed  na  Jiyry^.  (8) 
CyxdH  seMJiA  emf  H^paBHJiacb.  (9)  On-b  cTp6Hjn>  ji;epeB>iHHbi^ 
AOMT.  ndpefl-b  deopi^oMb.  (10)  CecTpa  omt{d  6bijia  xaM-b.  (11)  MoU 
moedpuuf^h  KynnjiT,  OojibiuoH  saMOK'b  cb  KJiioqoM'b.  (12)  Tbi  npn- 
uieji-b  K-b  onm^.  (13)  Cxapafl  cjiyjKanKa  npHHCCJia  MajieHbKoe 
Bcapo  ch  eodou,  (14)  YHHTejibHHi^a  cnn'fejia  ua  Mocm^.  (15)  On-b 
Tyaa  nomeji-b  Ses-b  Md/ibHUKa.  (16)  Hepnaa  Jiomasb  'fejia  mpae^. 
(17)  B-fejiafl  co6aKa  CToajia  n^pe^T)  jioiuadbio.  (18)  Kkhsb  BHA-fejiii 
kpKzu  cemmh  bi.  KOMuamrb.  (19)  Y  cmapund  CB-fexjibiH  homhkt., 
MaJiCHbKift  cajn-b,  SojibuioH  Jiyr-b,  d-fejibiii  oceji'b,  qepnafl  OBi^a.  (20) 
yqcHiii^a  nponiJia  luKo/iy. 

yneuui^a  npomjia  mno/iy. 

B.  Substitute  for  the  words  in  italics  in  Ex.  A  the  proper  form  of  the 

3rd  personal  pronoun. 


§§86-87  LESSON  XXII  85 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Did  the  diUgent  pupils  enter  [into]  the  school  ?  (2)  Why  were  they 
sitting  on  the  floor  ?  (3)  The  young  men  did  not  come  to  [Kt]  the  prince. 
(4)  Surely  they  did  not  go  home  ?  (5)  They  came  to  that  man.  (6)  The  old 
women  went  through  the  room.  (7)  Why  was  the  lazy  cook  not  working 
in  the  kitchen  ?  (8)  Once  more  the  industrious  peasant-women  went  into 
the  forest.  (9)  We  never  used  to  come  home  in  the  evening.  (10)  Surely 
you  were  not  always  out  of  doors  ?  (11)  The  Uttle  girl  was  going  home  when 
she  saw  a  bright  light.  (12)  Why  was  the  angry  teacher  always  asking 
questions  ?  (13)  That  happened  here  long  ago.  (14)  They  arrived  [came] 
here  [hither]  two  years  ago.  (15)  The  hard-working  lady- teacher  asked  once 
more  but  the  idle  pupils  never  answered  anything  [never  nothing  not  answered], 
(16)  Could  they  understand  that  without  difficulty  ?  (17)  They  sat  down  on 
the  wooden  chairs.  (18)  They  were  lying  in  bed.  (19)  We  were  sitting  at 
the  window.* 

*  Par.  211  may  be  studied  at  this  point  and  the  imperative  be  practised 
with  any  verb  marked  131. 

LESSON  XXII 

OF    MSLTh    AND    AOHb 
Plural 
MaxepH  [matari] 
Maxepeii  [mAtei-^i] 
MaxepflM-L  [mAterdm] 
Maxep6ft  [mAtor^l] 
MaxepflMH  (pbMH)  [mAtarami  (fmf)] 
Maxepiixi.  [mAtordx] 

The  declension  of  noHb  [dotj],  daughter,  is  exactly  similar. 

87.  The  preposition  no  is  used  with  the  dative  case ;  ^  it  means 
along,  on,  according  to,  over. 

Some  illustrations  : 
no  MH^  [pAmns],  or  no  MoeMy'  [pAmAJemii],  according  to  me,  as  far  as  I  am 

concerned,  in  my  opinion. 
no  HCMy  [pAnamti],  in  his  opinion. 

no  KpafiHeii  M'fep'fe  [pA  krainoi  rii^ra],  according  to  the  hast  measure,  at  least. 
Ona  mjia  no  y'Jinnli  [And  jla  pA  tiiitsa].  She  was  going  along  the  street. 
Ona  6poAHJia  no  ropojxy,  no  Ji-fecy  [And  brAditA  pA  gorAdu,  pdiasu],  She 

wandered  about  the  town,  the  forest. 
In  n6  Ji'fecy  note  the  accent,     no  ropojuy  may  be  similarly  accented. 

^  In  quite  different  senses  it  is  used  with  the  accusative  or  prepositional,  e.g. 
no  CMcpxH  in  Par.  69.     Cf.  also  Par.  183. 


86. 

Declension 

Singular 

nom. 

Maxb  [ma^t],  mother 

gen. 

Maxepn  [mdteri] 

dat. 

Maxepn  [mdtari] 

ace. 

Maxb  [ma^t] 

instr. 

MaxepbH)  [mdterju] 

prep. 

Maxepn  [mdtari] 

86  LESSON  XXII  §87 

Vocabulary 

M^pa ,  H ,  M  [ih^rA],  measure  ohx  y SHajit  [on  uzna t],  he  recognized, 

JI'fecTHH^a,  M,  H  [UsnitsA],  sto*Vs,  Ae  gro«  to  know 

flight  of  stairs  cna^aJia  [snAtJaU],  at  first,  to  begin 

OHt  CA-fejiaji-L  [on  sdetAt],  did  (once)  with 

OTKpiiiJii,  [Atkrit],  opened  caMT,,  a,  6,  caMH  [sam,  SAmd,  sAmo, 

OHT.  noAHHJiCH  [on  pAdnatsA],  raised  sdriii],  self  (emphatic) 

himself,  i.e.  went  up  no^TOMy  [pAstAmu],  so,  therefore,  for 

Ona    noAHHJiacb    no    JiicTunn-fe  that  reason 

[And  pAdriAtds  pA  Usnitsa],  She  Xopom6,  qxo  OHt   5to  CKasaJit 

raised  herself  by  the  stairs,  i.e.  [xaiaJo,  Jto  on  stA  skAzdt],  It  is 

went  up  the  stairs  good,  nice,  a  good  thing,  that  he 

said  that 
IIOBTopeHie — MaxB  yqentH  [pAftAr6nJ9— ma^t  utj6nJA],  Repetition  is 

the  mother  of  harning. 

Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  JKenmnHa  noniJia  no  yjinn-fe  cb  «6qepbK).  (2)  HaKon^n-B  ona 
npnmjia  k-l  nB^pn.  (3)  Gxapaa  Maxb  OTKpMJia  caMa  neepb  n  Bomjia. 
(4)  Gna^iajia  ona  npouiJia  k;^xhk)  h  HB-fe  KOMHaxM.  (5)  rioxoMx.  6"^^- 
nafl  jK^nmnna  noanajiacb  no  Ji'fecxnnn'fe  n  yanajia  HBepb.  (6)  JXbq. 
roAa  xoMy^  nasajii'b  ona  o^enb  xopomo  snajia  5xy  HBepb.  (7)  Ho 
jKenmHHa  ne  xox-fejia  caMa  oxKpi^ixb.  (8)  ITo^xoMy  ona  sajia  ^dqepn 
KJiK)Hx>  ox-b  KOMHaxbi.  (9)  flo^b  Oes-b  xpy^a  oxKpiijia  h  on-fe  eme 
paa-b  BOUiJiA. 

JJ,OHh  6e3h  mpyda  omKpbVia  a  oum  eu^e  pash  eoxujiu. 

B.  Rewrite  the  sentences  in  A  making  the  subjects  plural. 

C.  BonpocLi  : 

(1)  €!>  K-feM-b  noHb  nomjia  no  ^Jinii-fe?  (2)  Ky^a  on-fe  HaKon^nx. 
npnmjiH?  (3)  Hxo  cjiynnjiocb?  (4)  Kxo  oxKpi^iJix,  ABcpb,  Maxb 
HJiH  «OHb?  (5)  Hxo  cjiyqiijiocb  nox6Mx>?  (6)  KaKyio  KOMnaxy 
OH-fe  cnaqajia  npomjin?  (7)  Kani.  on-fe  noAHfljincb?  (8)  Hxo  oni 
ysnaJiH?  (9)  Kor^a  on-fe  oqenb  xopomo  anajin  5xy  HBepb?  (10) 
KoMy^  Maxb  Aajia  KjiK)qx>?  KaKott  kjiiohx*?  (11)  H-feM-b  «oqb  oxnpi^ijia 
HBcpb? 

D.  Translate  : 

(1)  Yesterday  morning  two  (little)  girls  were  walking  along  the  street. 
(2)  I  walked  along  the  street.  (3)  The  old  man's  sons  went  into  the  peasant's 
garden.     (4)  The  young  women  lived  in  the  house  that  used  to  stand  beyond 


§ 


LESSON  XXIII 


87 


the  village.  (5)  His  young  companions  opened  the  doors.  (6)  At  first  the 
lazy  pupils  thought  that  the  flowers  (were)  not  in  the  room.  (7)  The  lady- 
teachers  were  not  at  home.  (8)  The  diUgent  pupils  were  writing  with  pencil 
on  paper.  (9)  It  is  a  good  thing  that  the  two  boys  went  up  [verb  plural]  the 
stairs.  (10)  I  could  not  see  him  anywhere.  (11)  I  saw  the  old  benches  in 
the  room.  (12)  Surely  the  little  girls  did  not  wish  to  play  with  that 
woman's  daughter  ?  (13)  At  last  the  mother  came  and  opened  the  door. 
(14)  She  wished  to  go  for  a  walk  with  (her)  mother.  (15)  We  learned  that 
the  old  servants  (were)  in  the  kitchen.  (16)  At  least  one  old  peasant  woman 
went  in.  (17)  She  passed  through  the  room  and  entered  the  kitchen,  where 
the  grandmother  was  sitting.  (18)  Beautiful,  clean,  bright  villages.  \J{19)  In 
the  evening  we  saw  the  old  woman  once  more.  (20)  They  were  walking  on 
the  bank  of  the  stream  and  were  playing  with  the  nurse.  (21)  That  happened 
three  years  ago.  (22)  In  his  opinion  the  room  is  a  very  dark  (one). 
(23)  The  kind  intelligent  boys  saved  the  girl  from  [h3I>]  the  water. 


88. 


LESSON  XXIII 

Declension  of  Adjectives 

Hard  Forms 

(a)  Stem  accented 


Masc. 
CT^pbiH  [stdri] 


Neut.  Fern. 

cxapoe  [starAJa]     cxapafl  [stdrAJa],  old 


gen. 

dat. 

ace. 
instr. 
prep. 


nom. 

gen. 

dat. 

ace. 

instr. 


cxaparo  [starAVA] 
cxapoMy  [starAmu] 
gen.  or  nom.  nom. 

cxapbiMX>  [stdrim] 
cxapoMX)  [starAm] 

Plural 
Masc.  Neut. 

cxapbie  [starijo]       cxapbiH  [stdrija] 


cxapoii  [starAi] 
cxapoii  [stdrAi] 
cxapyio  [stdruju] 
cxapoii  (oK))  [stdrAi  (aju)] 
cxapoii  [stdrAi] 

Fern. 
cxapHfl  [stdrija] 


gen.  or  nom. 


cxapbixX)  [stdrix] 
cxapbiMX)  [stdrim] 

nom. 
cxapbiMii  [stdrimi] 


gen.  or  nom. 


prep.  cxapbiXT>  [stdrix] 

The  complete  declension  of  the  plural  is  printed  here  for  conveni- 
ence :  the  obhque  cases  will  not  be  employed  before  Lesson  XXX. 


88  LESSON  XXIII  §88 

(b)  Termination  accented 


Masc.  Neut.  Fern. 

nom.     npocT6it  [prAstoi]     npocT6e  [prAstoja]     npocT^n  [prAstaJA],  sm^Ze 


gen.  npocToro  [piAstovA]  npocToii  [prAstoi] 

dat.  npocTOMy  [prAstomu]  npocT6fi  [prAstoi] 

and  so  on,  in  all  forms  corresponding  to  (a)  above. 

Note. — (1)  Except  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  the  masculine  and 
neuter  forms  are  identical. 

(2)  In  the  feminine  singular  the  gen.  dat.  instr.  and  prep,  are  aUke. 

(3)  In  (6)  the  masc.  nom.  sing,  and  the  feminine  gen.  dat.  instr.  oxidprep.  are 
aUke. 


Vocabulary 

TBepsbiii  [tvordi],  hard  (opp.  of  soft)  anaKt,  a,  h  [znak],  sign 

Tp^SHbiii  [triidni],  difficult  Kyn^n'L,  nna,  ii  [kupsts],  merchant 

TflJKejibitt  [t836}i],  heavy  My>KqHHa,ibi,  bi  {masc.)  [muJtJfnA], 
JKCJiTbiH  [sotti],  yellow  man  {not  a  woman). 

HSiyLK-bf  a,  II  [J9zik],  tongue,  hinguage 


Exercises 

A.  Decline  in  tlie  singular  and  nominative  plural : 

jKejiTbifi  KapaHnam-b,  KpacHBan  fl'feBoqKa,  xoji6AHaH  hohb,  cxapHtt 
oceji-b,  qepnan  Jioma^b,  Tenjioe  ji-fexo. 

B.  Give  the  (1)  genitive  singular,  (2)  instrumental,  and  (3)  nominative 

jplural  of  the  Russian  equivalent  for  : 

Bad  weather,  a  large  pail,  a  diJfficult  tongue,  the  hard  sign,  a  young  boy, 
yellow  oats,  a  sick  peasant-woman,  long  lesson,  cold  day,  rich  merchant,  damp 
grass,  red  sun,  green  grass,  brown  horse,  long  nose,  grey  cat,  brave  hero,  the 
rich  woman,  old  book,  the  long  garden,  the  old  house,  intelHgent  man,  this 
woman  and  that  man. 

*  HejioB-feKi  can  have  the  wider  sense  of  person. 


§§  89-90 


LESSON  XXIV 


89 


89. 


LESSON  XXIV 
Declension  of  Adjectives  (continued) 


Soft  Form 

Singular 

nom. 

Masc.                       Neut. 
p^HHifi  [rdni]         paHHee  [rdnaja] 

Fem. 
paHHHH  [rdnaja],  early 

gen. 

dat. 

ace. 
instr. 
prep. 

paHHHro  [rdnavA] 
paHHeMy  [rdnamu] 
no7n.  or  gen.                     nom. 
paHHHMT.  [rdnim] 
paHHeMTj  [rdnem] 

Plural 

paHHeii  [rdnai] 
paHHCft  [rdnei] 
paHHiOK)  [rdnuju] 
paHHeii  (eio)  [rdnai  (9Ju)] 
paHHeii  [rdnoi] 

nom. 

pdHHie  [rdnaja]         paHHin  [rdnaje] 

paHHiH  [rdiiaja] 

gen. 

dat. 

ace. 
instr. 
prep. 

paHHHX'b  [rdnix] 
paHHHMt  [rdriim] 

nom.  or  gen. 
paHHHMH  [rdmriii] 
paHHHXT.  [rdnix] 

90.  That  is  to  say  tlie  declension  of  panniH  is  identical  with  that 
of  CTapHii,  the  soft  vowels  replacing  the  hard  vowels  throughout, 

i  corresponding  to  H  preceding  ii  or  a  vowel 
H         „  „        Bi  in  all  other  positions 

^         ))  j>        ^ 

e         „  „        unaccented  o 

10      „        »      y 


Vocabulary 


nosAHlii  [pozni],  hxie 

nep^AHflH   [pai'Miioja]   (a  feminine 

adjective  in  form  and  declined 

as  such),  entrance-hall 


aoManiHiii  [dAmdjni],  tame,  domestic 
JKHBOTHoe  [3iv6tnAJ8]  (a  neuter  ad- 
jective in  form  and  declined  as 
such),  an  animal 


90 


LESSON  XXV 


§§  91-92 


Exercises 

A.  Decline  in  singular  and  nominative  plural : 

CHHce  Mope,  nosAHHH  BCCHa,  soManiHce  jkhbothoc,  paHHHH  occhb. 

B.  Give  (1)  genitive  singular,  (2)  prepositional  singular,  (3)  nominative 

plural  of  the  Russian  equivalent  for  : 

tame  bird,  green  sea,  red  door,  white  paper,  warm  spring,  heavy  board, 
cold  day,  black  cat,  clean  water,  large  bed,  dark  entrance-hall,  late  summer, 
early  autumn. 


LESSON  XXV 

9L  Declension  op  Adjectives  {continued) 

In  tlie  writing  of  adjectives,  as  in  every  part  of  Russian  ortho- 
graphy, the  general  rules  must  be  observed,  that 

LI,  H,  K)  never  appear  after  r,  k,  x,  jk,  h,  m,  m ;  they  are  replaced 
by  H  (or  i  before  vowels  and  half-vowels),  a,  y  ; 

fl,  K),  never  appear  after  ii ;  they  are  replaced  by  a,  y ; 

unaccented  0  is  replaced  by  e  alter  >K,  H,  m,  m,  ii. 

In  words  hke  aHKiii  [diki],  wild,  and  ropHHiii  [gAratJi],  hot, 
these  rules  must  be  carefully -observed. 


92. 

Adjectives  in  r,  k. 

X 

nom. 

Singular 
Masc.                      Neut. 
jU^Kiii  [diki]         niiKoe  [dfkAJa] 

Fem. 
Ai^KaH  [dikAJa],  wild 

gen. 

dat. 

ace. 
instr. 
prep. 

HHKaro  [dikAVA] 
jliHKOMy  [dfkAmu] 
nom.  or  gen.                  nom. 
mKUMh  [dfkim] 
AHKOMT.  [dikAm] 

A^Koii  [dikAi] 
miKoii  [dikAi] 
nHKyio  [dikuju] 

miKOH  (OK))  [dikAi  (AJu)] 

miKOfi  [dikAi] 

nom. 

Plural 
miKfe  [dikija]      W^kir  [dikijo] 

jiAkih  [dikijg] 

gen. 
etc.,  H 

HUKUXh  [dikix] 
replacing  bi. 

§§93-94  LESSON  XXVI  91 

93.  The  terminations  in  wliich  tlie  type  flHKiii  differs  from  the 
type  cxapbiH  are  printed  in  italics  in  Par.  92. 

Vocabulary 
BCJiiiKiii  [vaiiki],^  great  mnpoKlti  [Jiroki],  hroad 

JierKifl  [ioxki],  light,  easy  ^3Kiii  [tiski],  narrow 

MiirKiii  [rhaxki],  soft 

Exercises  ' 

A.  DecHne  in  singular  and  nominative  plural : 

jKapKoe   ;^Tpo,   MHrniH   SHaK-B,   Beji^mtt   uapt,   jierKitt   ypdK-L, 
HiiKoe  mHBOTHoe,  mnpoKan  CKaMeiiKa,  ^3Kifi  CTOJi-b. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

soft  hands,  bright  suns,  broad  streets,  narrow  rooms,  easy  lessons,  hot 
[a^^pKlft]  days. 

C.  Give  the  proper  forms  in  the  singular  of  the  examples  in  Ex.  B 

(1)  with  the  prep,  o 

(2)  „        „        HJiH 

(3)  „         „         KT, 

LESSON  XXVI 

94.  Declension  of  Adjectives  {continued) 

Adjectives  in  >k,  q,  m,  m 

Singular 
Masc.  Neut.  Fern. 

nom.   ropflHiH[gAratJi]  ropHqee[gAratJoJ9]  ropiiqa^  [gArdt/eja],  ^o< 

gen.  ropaqaao  [gAratJavA]  ropaqeH  [gAratJai] 

dat.  ropHHCMy  [gAratjemu]  ropaqeH  [gArdtJoi] 

ace.  nom.  or  ace.                     nom.  ropHq[/io[gArdtJuju] 

instr.  ropflqHMT>  [gAratjim]  ropHHctt  (eio)  [gArdtj8i  (eju)] 

prep.  ropHHeMt  [gAratJ"9m]  ropH^eft  [gAratJai] 

Plural 
Masc.  Neut.  Fern. 

nom.     ropfl^ie  [gAratJija]     ropHHin  [gArat|iJ9]     ropHqin  [gArdtJijg] 

gen.  ropflqnx'L  [gArdtJix] 

etc.,  like  paHHift  in  Par.  89. 

^  Cf .  p.  26,  note  5  to  k. 


92  LESSON  XXVII  §§95-96 

95.  The  type  ropHqift  is  very  similar  to  the  type  paHHiii, 
from  which  it  differs  only  in  the  terminations  printed  in  italics  in 
Par.  94 :  a  and  lo  never  follow  m,  h,  ui,  ux. 

Vocabulary 
cqacxie,  h  [stjastja],  happiness  HCCHacTie,  h  [nastjdstja],  unhappi- 

cfwbf  a,  bi  [sup],  soup  ness,  misfortune 

Exercises 

A.  Decline  : 

xopomaH  noroaa,  ropiiqiH  cyni.. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

much  ripe  corn ;  how  much  clean  water  ?  he  was  speaking  of  the 
hard  sign  and  not  of  the  soft  sign  ;  little  warm  water ;  (it  is )  cold  weather 
to-day  ;  with  the  black  horse  ;  of  the  blue  chalk  ;  in  the  dark  room  ;  about 
the  easy  lesson  ;  a  late  summer  ;  to  a  difficult  language  ;  with  a  yellow  pencil ; 
on  the  wooden  table  ;  of  the  old  black  arm-chair ;  without  the  poor  man ; 
behind  the  dark  forest ;  into  the  old  school ;  about  a  difficult  language  ; 
on  to  the  wild  animals ;  I  was  speaking  of  your  great  misfortune  and  of 
her  happiness  ;  he  saw  a  tame  bird  ;  about  the  rich  merchant ;  into  the  deep 
water ;  towards  the  bright  light ;  there  are  our  black  horses ;  there  is  her 
poor  mother  ;  his  intelligent  sons. 


LESSON  XXVII 

96.  Certain  irregular  past  tense  forms,i  e.g.  necL,  carried,  and 
MOn>,  could,  was  able,  have  been  already  employed  (see  Par.  63). 
Two  verbs  in  frequent  use  having  mascuHne  past  tense  without  the 
usual  Ji  are  : 

OHt  yMcpij  [uriier],  he  died. 

OHT)  Bes'b  [vos],  he  carried  in  a  vehicle,  conveyed. 

In  all  such  verbs  the  other  forms  of  the  past  tense  are  regular  in 
appearance : 

yMepjiai  ^Mcpjio,  yMepjiH  [uiherla,  uriiorlA,  timarii] 
BCSJia,  BCBJio,  BCSJiH  [vazlo,  vazlo,  vazlij 

(a)  The  past  participles  (cf.  Par.  80,  note  b)  of  these  and  the 
verbs  dealt  with  in  Par.  97  are  : 

1  See  hst  of  several  such  forms  in  Par.  239. 


§§97-98  LESSON  XXVII  93 

Adverbial  past  participle :  yMepuiH,  BesuiH,  xohhb'L, 
lueAuiH,  ixaBt. 

Adjectival  past  participle :  yMepmift,  BeamlH,  xonHBUiifi, 
ineHuiiH,  ixaBuiili.       .    j..jjErU^    dt^^..^^^^ .  u^kf^ 

97.  The  verbs  xoaHJii*  {inj.  xoahtb)  and  mejn>  {inf.  htth)  both  v^  . 
mean  Ine  went.    The  distinction  between  them  was  explained  in   V 
Par.  40.     But  both  these  verbs  always  mean  to  go  on  foot,  to  go  hut 
not  in  a  conveyance.    If  the  word  go  means  to  travel  by  any  kind  of 
vehicle,  not  on  one's  own  legs,  then  the  word  that  replaces  uieji'L  is 
(oHT>)  'fexaji'L  [jsxAt],  e.g. : 

Oht>  mejiTb  MiiMO  [on  Jot  ihfmA],  He  was  walJcing  {walked)  past. 
OiYh  'fexaJi'B  MHMO  [on  jsxAt  rfiimA],  He  was  driving  {drove)  past. 

And  just  as  we  have 

Oht.  npHmejit  (n'femKOM'B)  [on  prijot  pejkom].  He  arrived  {on  foot), 

so 

OhT)  npi'fexaJi'B  [on  prijsxAt]  means  He  arrived  {in  a  conveyance). 
npi'fexaTb  BepxoMT)  [prijexAt  verxom],  to  come  riding. 

The  prefix  npn  in  these  words  evidently  corresponds  to  the 
EngUsh  near,  up,  up  to.  In  the  second  example  it  is  written  npi 
because  i,  not  u,  is  the  regular  form  of  this  vowel  when  it  precedes 
a  vowel. 

Similarly  we  form  compounds  of  'fexaxb  corresponding  to  all  the 

other  compounds  of  htth  {infin.  of  uieji'L)  given  in  Par.  62  : 

B-L-fexaxb  [vexAt];  npcfexaTb  [prAJsxAt];  na^xaTb  [nAJexAt],  to  drive 
up,  come  together;   ncfexaxb  [pAJsxAt]. 

98.  The  preposition  from  is  sometimes  troublesome  to  trans-     ^ 
late.     Notice  these  examples  :  6^ 

Fepoii   nojiynHJi-b   HBopeu'b    OTt  i^apii   [gardi  pAtutJit  dvArets  At      ««^ 
tsArd],  The  hero  received  a  palace  from  the  czar, 

Maxb  yMcpjia  oxt  xcji^pbi  [ma^t  uriiertd  At  xAlsri],  The  mother  died 
from  {of)  cholera. 

Ohtj  npi-fexajix.  nst  Apyr6ro  ropoAa  [onprijsxAtiz  drugdvA  gorAdA], 
He  arrived  from  {out  of)  another  tovm. 

Kojibuo  c^'fejiaHO  1  HS-L  aojioxa  [kA^itso  sdstAnA  iz  z6tAtA],  The  rin^  is 
made  from  {of,  out  of)  gold. 

^  Neuter  predicative  (Par.  187)  of  passive  past  participle  cfffejiaHHMft.  The 
active  past  participle  of  this  verb  is  cH'fejiaBinitt  (cf .  Par.  80,  a). 


94  LESSON  XXVII  §98 

G-L  Tor6  HHfl  OHt  HHKorsa  h6  SbiJit  xaM-L  [stAvo  dna  on  nikAgda 
nsbit  tarn],  From  {since)  that  day  he  was  never  there. 

Note.     Ct  (co)  =from,  is  used  with  the  genitive  : 

Ohtj  CHfljn>  KHHry  co  CTOJia  [on  snat  knigu  sAstAta],  He  took  the  hook 
from  {off)  the  table. 


Vocabulary 

r6pojii'b,  a,  a  [gorAt],  town  Bapyn*  [vdruk],  suddenly 

HapoAt,  a,  LI  [n^vrot],  people  OTBeat  [Atvoz  (s)],  conveyed  away 

^pMapKa,  H,  H  [jarmArkA],  fair  ocTaxbCH  [Asta^tsA],  to  remain,  be  left 

xojiepa,  LI  [xaIsia],  cholera  njiaKaxL  A  [ptdkAt],  to  weep 

H^ena,  li,  -li  [sand],  wife  saSoji-feTb  [zAbAkit],  to  fall  ill 

SojiLHHi^a,  Li,  LI  [bA^initsA],  hospital  SHaHHTTj  [znatjit],  that  means,  that  is 
6oJi43HL,  H,  H  [bAl^zn],  disease  to  say 

ymsicuhiii  [uT^asm],  terrible  MHoro   napojuy^  [mnogA  rnvrodu], 
ccHqaCL    [satjds],    immediately,    lit.  many  folks,  many  people 

this  hour 

Euf  TOJibKO  TpH  roaa  [jamti  t6^ikA  tri  godA],  He  is  only  three. 


Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  B-L  OAHOM-b  ropoA'fe  6Lijia  HpMapKa.  (2)  Bt.  5to  epeMH 
SLiJia  xoji^pa.  (3)  Mnoro  napday  yMepjio^  ot-l  5toh  ymacHoii 
doji-feaHii.  (4)  npiixaji-L  na  ^xy  npiviapKy  o^hh-l  Kynei^-L  hs-l 
apyroro  ropoAa  cl  jKenoH  h  mojig^oh  ao^KOii.  (5)  JX-^BO^K-h 
6LIJI0  TOJiLKO  HexLipe  r6ji;a.  (6)  Bjiipyr-L  oxeiiTb  h  Maxb  saGoJi-fejin. 
(7)  CeH^acL  oxbcsjiii  b-l  SoJiLHHtty  GojiLHoro  oxita  cl  6'fe^H0H 
MaxepbK).  (8)  SHaHHXx.,  ocxajiacb  MaJicHLKaa  A'^BO^Ka  o^Ha.  (9) 
njianajia,  6ibji;HaH,  njiaKajia.^ 

SHamimh,  ocmaaacb  McuieHbKaH  dmeoHKa  odua. 

B.  BonpocBi  : 

(1)  Tflife  SLiJia  HpnapKa?  (2)  KanaH  Soji-fesHL  Smia  b-l  5xo 
BpcMfl?      (3)  Hxo  yme  cjiynHJiocL?      (4)  Ox-l  KaKofi  Soji'fesHH  ohh 

^  This  form  in  -y  is  a  partitive  genitive  found  in  certain  phrases  after  measures, 
weights,  adverbs  of  quantity.     Cf.  namKa  Haio  (Voc.  XLIII). 

2  Note  the  neuter  singular  verb,  the  subject  having  the  force  of  a  singular 
collective. 

'  In  English,  too,  we  make  use  of  this  simple  device  of  repetition,  in  order  to 
deepen  the  impression  of  intensity :  she  wept  and  wept. 


§99-100  LESSON  XXVIII  95 

^MepjiH?  (5)  Ct.  K'hu'h  npi-fexaji-b  Kyneiit?  (6)  Ckojilko  nd^K-fe 
ji-feTt  [years]?  (7)  Hto  cjiyqnjiocb,  Koraa  Kyn^iit  Cb  JKenoil 
npi^xajiHi?  (8)  Ky^a  cettHact  oxBesjiii  otu^  h  Maxb?  (9)  Hto 
CJiyqiijiocb  ct  [happened  to]  AO^KOii? 

C.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  They  usually  lived  in  one  small  room.  (2)  In  the  winter  my  poor 
father  died  of  that  illness.  (3)  At  that  time  a  great  many  people  were  walking 
along  the  street.  (4)  The  rich  merchants  drove  up  when  we  were  standing 
before  their  door.  (5)  The  cold  streets  of  the  big  town  did  not  please  me. 
(6)  His  young  son  was  then  only  two  years  old.  (7)  When  did  her  old  mother 
turn  ill  ?  (8)  The  sick  boy  was  in  the  other  building,  but  I  did  not  know 
then  who  (had)  carried  him  away  there  [thither].  (9)  Why  were  they 
left  alone  in  that  great  dark  house  ?  (10)  She  received  that  book  from  my 
father. 


LESSON  XXVIII 

99.  The  preposition  no  governs  the  genitive  and  means  to,  up 
to,  till,  before,  e.g. 

ao  i^Toro  AHH  [do  (dA)  stAVA  dna],  up  to,  till,  before  that  day. 

no  PomnecTBa  [dA  rA5d9s(t)va],  till  Christmas. 

no  BOHHLi  [dA  VAini],  before  the  war. 

no  PoJKnecTBa  XpHCTOBa  ^  [dA  rAsdostvd  xristovA],  up  to,  i.e.  before  the 
birth  of  Christ,  B.C. 

OTt  Ha^aJia  no  KOHn;a  [At  nAtJatA  dA  kAntsa],  from  beginning  to  end. 
.  no  ^Toro  MajiCHBKaro  noMa  [dA  stAVA  maienkAVA  domA],  up  to  that 
little  house. 

100.  The  preposition  npo  is  used  with  the  accusative  ;  it  means 
about,  of,  concerning,  e.g. 

H  yanajit  npo  Bame  Hccqacxle  [ja  uznat  prA  vdja  nostjastja],  /  got 
to  know,  learned,  of  your  misfortune. 

Mm  pascKasaJiH  npo  Bofiny  [mi  rAsskAzdii  prA  vAinii],  We  told  of  the 
war. 

That  is,  npo  with  the  accusative  has  the  same  value  as  o 
with  the  prepositional. 

^  Notice  this  plural  form,  where,  in  English,  the  singular  would  be  used. 
*  Oenitive  of  Xphct6bi>,  a,  o,  h,  an  adjective  found  only  in  this  short  form. 


96  LESSON  XXVIII  §§  101-103 

101.  Tlie  3rd  plural  of  the  verb  used  without  a  subject  expressed 
has  the  force  of  the  indefinite  they  or  people,  e.g. 

roBopHJiH  [gAVAriii],  They  were  speaking,  they  were  saying. 
CKasaJiH  [skAzaii],  They  said,  it  was  said. 

102.  (a)  This  indefinite  3rd  plural  is  often  the  most  convenient 
idiom  to  use  in  translating  our  passive,  e.g. 

Mwh  CKasajiH  [mns  skAzaii],  They  told  me,  i.e.  /  was  told. 
He  nycKajiH  en.  [lis  puskaii  J9J6],  They  did  not  admit  her,  i.e.  she  was 
not  admitted. 

(b)  The  passive  may  often  be  rendered  by  the  Kussian  reflexive 
verb,  e.g. 

^TO  cjnibjiajiocb  [stA  sdstAtAs],  That  was  done,  that  took  place. 

103.  The  reflexive  pronoun  for  self  referring  to  any  subject  is 

decHned  thus  :  . 

gen.  ce6fl  [saba] 

dat.  ceS'fe  [sabs] 

ace.  ce6fl  [ssbd] 

instr.  C06610  [sAboju] 

prep.  ceS'fe  [sdhi] 

Vocabulary 

CHpoxa,  bi,  OTBi  [sirAta],  orphan  HCKaTb    (with    genit.    or    ace.)    A 

CHpoTKa,  H,  H  [sirotkA],  little  orphan  [iska^t],  to  seek 

BOftHa,  ik,  BOHHbi  [vAina],  war  sa^^Maxb  [zAdumAt],  to  conceive  a 

CCMbfl,  H,  — H  [s^mja],  family  plan 

PowaecTBO,  a  [rA5das(t)v6],  Christ-  p'feniHTb   [rajit],   to  make  up  one's 

mas  mind,  resolve,  solve 

HaqaJio,  a,  a  [iiAtjatA],  beginning  SpofliiTb    A    [brAdit],    to     wander 

rope,  H,  H  [goi-a],  grief,  sorrow  about 

CBOH  [svoi],  one's  own  B3Hjn>,   Jia    [vzat,   vzaIq],   he    took 

qyjKOH  [tju36I],  strange,    not   one's  {once) 

own  B3HTb  K-b  ceS-fe  [vza^t  ksabs],  to  take 

U'fejlbiH  [tssli],  whole,  entire  to  oneself,  to  adopt 

CHacTJiHBbiH  [stJAs(t)iivi],  happy  Homeji-b,  mjia,  6  [dAj6t,  jta,  6],  went 

HecHacTHbiH  [n9stjas(t)m],  unhappy,  up  to,  reached 

unfortunate  OTHiero?    [AtJ9v6]    stands    for    OTt 

TaK-b  H  [tok  i],  and  so  too  Hero?  from  what  ?  i.e.  from  what 

nycKaxb    131    A    [puska^t],   to    let,  cause  ?  and  is  a  common  equiva- 

admit  lent  for  why  ? 


§103  LESSON  XXVIII  97 

EXEKCISES 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  HsLKOu^JXh  OHa  saa^Majia  ncKaib  otu,§l  h  MaTb.  (2)  Ilomji^ 
OHa  no  r6poay.  (3)  Bpoanjia  i^-fejibiii  «eHb  h  xojibKO  Kt  B^nepy 
AouiJia  ona  no  Sojibuion  6ojibHHnbi.  (4)  Ho  BTt  GojibHnny  eA  ne 
nycKajiH.  (5)  'fexajii,  mhmo  fl-feBo^KH  Soraxbiii  Kyn^i^-b.  (6)  Ona 
pascKasajia  CMy  npo  CBoe  ^  rope.  (7)  j[i;66pbiii  HejioB^Ki*  Bomeji'b  B-b 
SojibHiiny  yanaTb  npo  OTi;a  h  Maxb  HecHacTHott  ^-febOHKH.  (8)  TaMt 
eMy^  CKaaajiH,  hto  ohh  yjK^  ;^MepjiH.  (9)  H  p'femnji'b  noSpbiii  Kynei^i. 
B3flTb  cnpoTKy  K-b  ceSi.  (10)  Tan-b  h  cjxhsiasn>.  (11)  Gxajia  jkhtb 
HecqacTHafl  cnpoxa  B-b  HyjKott  ceMb^  KaKX.  bx>  CBo6fi.2 

TaMh  eMy  cKaacuiu,  umo  ohu  y^yfce  yMepjiu. 

B.  Rewrite  Ex.  A,  making  the  subject  of  eacli  sentence  plural. 

C.  Bonpocbi : 

(1)  Hxo  ona  p'femiijia  cH-fejiaxb?  (2)  CK6jibK0  BpeMCHH  [of  time] 
OHa  SpoAHJia  no  ropoay?  (3)  Korji;a  ona  AoniJia  ao  6ojibHiinH? 
(4)  Morjia  jih  ona  BH^ifexb  oxu^a  h  Maxb?  (5)  Oxqer6  nifexx*?  (6)  Kxo 
npl-fexaji-b  B-b  5x0  Bp^MH?  (7)  Ilpo  ^xo  MajienbKafl  A'feBoqKa  bm^ 
pascKaaaJia?  (8)  KaKOBX.  6bijix.  ^xoxx.  Kynei;x>?  (9)  Hxo  OHt 
ysHaJiT*  Bx>  SojibRHi^-fe?  (10)  Hxo  ohx>  p'femHJii>  ca-fejiaxb  noxoMX*? 
(11)  Cff-fejiajiT)  JIH  OHX>  5x0  BT>  caMOMX>  A'feji'fe?  [in  very  deed,  cf.  npn 
c^MOMX>  EXj-fesA-fe  in  Ex.  X]. 

D.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Surely  she  did  not  wish  to  wander  all  day  about  the  street  ?  (2)  We 
took  it  into  our  heads  [conceived  the  plan]  to  remain  in  the  garden  all  [bcio] 
night  [ace.  sing.].  (3)  They  said  he  never  reached  the  white  house  in  which 
the  old  woman  lived.  (4)  From  the  beginning  of  the  year  till  Christmas  he 
was  left  alone  in  that  large  house.  (5)  Why  did  they  not  let  the  boy  into  those 
beautiful  rooms  ?  (6)  What  did  you  learn  about  the  poor  man's  unhappy 
son  ?  (7)  It  was  well  that  I  was  not  told  about  that.  (8)  The  rich  man 
(had)  already  died  in  the  great  hospital.  (9)  I  learned  that  only  last 
night.     (10)  The  young  men  were  standing  in  front  of  that  large  window. 

(11)  The  kind  Russian  ladies  who  arrived  to-day  adopted  the  little  orphan. 

(12)  She  was  walking  past  the  little  house. 

*  About  her  (own)  grief. 

2  In  her  (own)  family.  The  distinction  between  eA  and  cB6it  is  made  clear  in 
the  next  Lesson,  Par.  109. 


98  LESSON  XXIX  §§  104-107 

LESSON  XXIX 

Declensions  of  Possessives,  Demonstkatives,  etc. 

104.  MOH,  TBOH,  CBOH,  my^  thy,  one's  own. 

Singular  Plural 

M.  N.  F.  M.  N.  F. 

n.  CBoii  [svoi]  CBoe  [svajo]  CBo;i  [svAJa]  CBOii  [svAf] 

g.        CBoero  [svAJavo]  CBoett  [svAJ6i]  cbohx-l  [svaIx] 

d.        cbocm;^  [svAJomu]  CBo6ii  [svAJei]  cbohmi.  [svAim] 

a.  nom.  or  gen.        nom.  cbok)  [svAJii]  cboh  [svai]  ,  -Hxt  [svaIx] 

i.         CBOHM-L  [svAim]  CBoett(eio)[svAJ6i(6ju)]  cbo^mh  [svAuiii] 

p.        CBoeMT)  [svAJ6m]  cbo6h  [svAJ6i]  cbohx'l  [svaix] 

MOfi  and  TBOH  are  declined  in  exactly  tlie  same  way. 

105.  HauiTj,  Kama,  name,  nauiH,  our,  ours,  and  Bamt,  Bama, 
Bame,  BauiH,  your,  yours,  are  declined  exactly  Hke  tlie  words  in 
Par.  104,  except  that  the  termination  is  never  accented,  e.g. 
Hamero,  Hamen,  HaiuHX'B  are  the  genitives. 

106.  The  following  pronomis  and  adjectives  are  also  dechned 
like  CBoii : 

qett  [tj6I],  Hbfl  [tjja],  Hbe  [tjjo],  hbh  [tjji],  whose?  (stem  qt,  e.g.  ace. 
sing.  HLcro,  Hbio,  Mbe),  e.g.  O  ^bctt  KHHr-fe  Bm  roBopiaJiH?  [AtJj6I 
knige  vi  gAVArili],  Whose  hook  were  you  talking  about  ? 

ceii  [s6i],  cia  [sija],  cie  [sijo],  cIh  [sii],  this  (stem  c,  e.g.  gen.  sing,  cero,  cefi  ; 
ace.  fern.  CK)  or  ciib).  This  word  is  idiomatic  in  a  few  set  phrases  and 
is  otherwise  little  used,  e.g.  ceroffHH  [sevodnA],  of  this  day,  i.e.  to-day ; 
ciib  MHH^xy  [sijii  mimitu],  this  minute,  i.e.  at  once. 

BCCb  [ves],  BCfl  [fsa],  Bce  [fso],  Bcife  [fse],  all  (stem  bc,  e.g.  gen.  sing.  Bcero. 
'fe  replaces  H,  e.g.  instr.  sing.  BcfeMT*,  gen.  plur.  Bcifex'L),  e.g.  Bce  5x0 
[fso  stA],  all  that ;  jiiJiH  BcfexTi  Hact  [dlA  fssx  nas],  for  us  all. 

107.  aTOT'b  [stAt],  this,  is  dechned  fully  thus : 


Singular 

Plural 

Masc.           Neut. 

Fern. 

31.  N.  F. 

nom. 

^TOT-b            5to 

^xa  [stA] 
5xofi  [stAi] 

5xH  [6ti] 

gen. 

i^Toro 

^XHX-b  [etix] 

dat. 

^TOMy 

5X0H  [stAi] 

etc. 

ace. 

gen.  or  nom. 

5xy  [etu] 

instr. 

^THMT, 

5X0H  [stAi] 

prep. 

^TOM-b 

5xofl  [stAi] 

§§10^109  LESSON  XXIX  99 

(a)  TOT'b,  that,  is  similar  in  declension  but  takes  "fe  every- 
where instead  of  H  and  always  accentuates  the  final  syllable,  e.g. 
gen.  sing.  Toro  [tAVo]. 

axoT'L  corresponds  to  either  '  this '  or  '  that.'  TOTt  means  '  that.' 
When  both  words  occur  in  a  sentence  axoTt  means  *this'  and 
TOT'b  means  *  that.' 

(6)  OHHH'L,  oji;Ha,  ohho,  with  plural  ohhh  (-Hxt)  for  masc.  and 
neut.  and  OHH-fe  (-'fexT>)  for  feminine,  is  decHned  like  stottj,  but  the 
accent  always^falls  on  the  final  syllable,  e.g.  gen.  sing.  OAHoro 
[AduAVo],  OAHOii  [Adnoi], 

(c)  The  emphatic  pronoun  caMt,  caMa,  caMO,  caMH,  self, 
has  genitive  caMoro,  -oh,  -oro,  -hxt>,  and  is  otherwise  dechned 
like  OHHHt,  oana,  -ho,  -hh.^  (One  form  only  for  all  genders  in 
plural.) 

108.  The  words  ero  [J8v6],  en  [jajo],  hxt>  [ix,  jix],  are  the 
genitive  forms  of  oh-l,  oho,  ona,  ohh  and  oui,  but,  as  has  been 
learned  by  this  time,  they  do  duty  for  the  possessives  of  the  3rd 
person  with  the  meanings  his,  her,  its,  their. 

109.  The  distinction  in  use  between  the  possessives  moh,  tboh, 
HauiTb,  Bani'L,  ero,  en,  hxT),  and  the  word  cboh,  cboh,  CBoe,  cboh, 
must  be  carefully  observed.  The  latter  always  refers  to  the  sub- 
ject of  the  clause  and  may  refer  to  a  subject  singular  or  plural,  of 
first,  second,  or  third  person,  and  may  accordingly  at  different 
times  require  to  be  translated  by  any  one  of  our  possessive  adjec- 
tives, e.g. 

H  BiiA'feJit  er6  ciiHa  [ja  vidal:  J9v6  siiia],  /  saw  his  son. 

H  BHH'feji'b  CBoer6  ci»iHa  [ja  videt  svaJ9v6  siha],  /  saw  my  {ovm)  son. 

Oh-l  BHA'feji'b  Moero  Cbinsi  [on  videt  inAJ9v6  sinA],  He  saw  my  son. 

Ohtj  BVijifh^Ti  CBoer6  ci^ina  [on  videt  svaJ9v6  sinA],  He  saw  his  (own)  son. 

Oh'l  BHS'feji'L  ero  ciiiHa  [on  vid9t  J9v6  sinA],  He  saw  his  {another  man^s) 
son.  j» 

Ona  BHjt'fejia  ero  (oh)  Cbina  [Ana  vidgtA  J9v6  (J9J6)  smA],  She  saw  his 
or  her  {another  person's)  son. 

Ona  BHA'fejia  CBoero  ci^iHa  [And  vidgtA  svaJ9v6  sinxv],  She  saw  her 
(own)  son. 

^  In  the  fern.  ace.  singular  there  is  an  alternative  form  caMoe  [sAmAJo]. 


7^  /^^^  ^"^ 


100  LESSON  XXIX  §109 


VOOABULAEY 

TCTKa,  H,  H  [t6tkA],  aunt  npaBJia,  bi  [pravdA],  truth 

rAusi,  VLf  II  or  h a  [dadA],  uncle  r6jioc'L,  a,  a  [g6tAs],  voice 

nJieMiiHHHKT.,    a,    h    [piaihdnik],  KOJibi^o,  a,  -^a  [kA^itso],  ring 

nephew  bojioto,  a  [zoUtA],  gold 

nJieMHHHHi^a,  m,   bi  [piamdnitsA],  rpoMKitt  [gromki],  loud 

niece  aojiOTofi  [zAtAtoI],  of  gold 

pyna,   h,   ^h  [ruka],    ace.    pyKy,  Kp-fenKiii  [krspki],  firm 

hand  or  arm  «po>KamiH  ^  [drA5aJtJi],  trembling 

n^jieit'L,!     najibi^a,     li     [paiats,  cjnimaTB  A  [stiJAt],  to  hear 

pd^itsA],  finger  HyjKHO  [nu3nA],  it  is  necessary 

Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  Bbi  cxpoHJiH  CBoft  aoM'B.  (2)  Xopomo,  qxo  a  xox-fejit  KynHTb 
Baui-b  AOM-b.  (3)  Oh-b  paSoTaji-b  B-b  cBoeM-b  ca^^.  (4)  HeyjK^jiH 
OHi.  cioAa  npi'fexaji'b  hsi*  Toro  ropoaa?  (5)  Mm  5to  nojiyqHJiH  ot-b 
CBoero  OTi^a.  (6)  Bauia  KopoBa  SpoaiiJia  Becb  «eHb  no  i^TOMy  Jiyry. 
(7)  Heii  rpoMKiii  rojiocb  mm  xan-b  qacxo  cjibimajin?      (8)  Bcfe  5xh 

miKifl    mHBOXHMH    i^JIH    x6jIbK0    OAHy    OBny.        (9)    HYJKHO    SblJIO    HX-b 

SpysbflM-b  CKasaxB  Bce  xo,  hxo  mm  yjK6  nexbipe  roaa  snaJiH.  (10) 
Bo3m6h«ho  jih  6bijio  EHfl-fexB  xo,  qxo  Bbi  n'fejiaJiH  b-b  CBo6ii  KOMnax-fe? 
(11)  Bcfe  naniH  npy3BH  6bijih  xor^a  s^-fecB.  (12)  HBCMy-  ciiiHy  Bm 
a^jiH  cxapyio  CBoib  KH^ry?  (13)  HBeii  Honepn  bm  pascKaaajin  Bce 
xo,  qxo  cjiy^HJiocB?  (14)  HeyjK^JiH  ^xo  npaB^a?  (15)  ITo  CHacxiio 
fl  He  aHaJi-B  5xoro  r6pona. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  My  aunt  is  the  sister  of  my  father  or  mother,  or  my  uncle's  wife  ;  I 
am  her  nephew.  (2)  My  uncle  is  the  brother  of  my  father  or  of  my  mother  ; 
I  am  his  nephew.  (3)  My  niece  is  the  daughter  of  my  brother  or  sister ;  I 
am  her  uncle  and  my  wife  [remember  the  my  wife  is  the  subject  of  an  in- 
dependent statement]  is  her  aunt.  (4)  I  heard  his  trembling  voice.  (5)  He 
gave  me  his  trembling  hand.  (6)  The  little  boy  was  playing  with  his  finger. 
(7)  His  firm  hand  was  lying  on  the  table.  (8)  In  a  trembling  voice  \instr. 
without  preposition]  he  was  reading  my  book.  (9)  Whose  book  was  he  read- 
ing ?  (10)  I  saw  a  gold  ring  on  your  finger.  (11)  Her  ring  was  of  (Par.  98) 
gold.  (12)  Can  it  be  [is  it  possible]  that  he  slept  in  his  room  ?  {ambiguous  in 
English]. 

^  This  word  is  declined  like  oTe^'B,  but  as  the  ji  in  the  nominative  is  soft,  the 
b  appears  in  the  other  cases  to  indicate  that  the  Ji  is  still  soft. 
*  In  form  a  present  participle  active. 


§§110-114  LESSON  XXX  101 


LESSON  XXX 

110.  The  dative,  instrumental,  and  prepositional  plural  of 
nouns  have  one  set  of  endings  throughout,  viz. : 

Haed  Form 
dat.  plur.     aM-L,    e.g.     ctoji&M'B  [stAtdm],  tables 
instr.  „        aMH,  ctoji^mh  [stAtami] 

prep.  „        axt,  ctoji^x-l  [stAtdx] 

Soft  Form 
dat.  plur.     HWb,    e.g.     HiinflM-L  [nanam],  nurses 
instr.  „        HMH,  HiiHflMH  [ndnoihi] 

prep.  „        HXT.,  H^HHXt  [ndnax] 

111.  Exceptional  Forms  in  Instrumental  Plural. — ^Feminine 
nouns  belonging  to  group  4  in  Par.  78  often  end  in  lmh,  e.g. 
JiomaAbMH  [lAjAdihi],  horses. 

Maxb    has    MaTcpbMii  [matarmi]  (see  Par.  86) 
jiom,      „      noMepBMH  [dAtJerihi] 

112.  Note  that  those  words  marked  ^  in  group  4  in  Par.  78  have 
the  accent  on  the  termination  in  the  obhque  cases  of  the  plural,  e.g. 

nom.  sing.     Jioma^b  [t6jAt]    but      dat.  plur.    JiomaAiiM'b  [tAJAddm] 
nom.  plur.     JidmaAH  [t6jAdi]  instr.  plur.    JiomaABMJi  [tAjAdihi] 

prep.  plur.    Jioma^jix'B  [tAjAddx] 

113.  The  corresponding  case-endings  for  adjectives  are  : 

Hard  Form 
dat.  plur.         BiMt,    €.gr.     KpiLCUUWb  [hcasnim],  red,  beautiful 
instr.  „  LIMH,  KpdCHHMH  [krdsmmi] 

prep.  „  HXT.,  Kp^CKHXT)  [krdsnix] 

Soft  Form 
dat.  plur.         HM-B,    e.g.    paHKHM-B  [rdrdm],  early 
instr.  „  HMH,  paHHHMH  [rdnimi] 

prep.  „  HX'B,  paHKHXi.  [rdnix] 

114.  In  connexion  with  the  terminations  given  in  Pars.  110  and 
113  remember  the  universal  rules  of  Kussian  orthography : 

H  must  never  appear  after  r,  K,  x,  m,  h,  m,  m,  i^  :  write  a. 
H     „        „  „         „     r,  K,  X,  m,  H,  in,  m  :  write  h. 


102  LESSON  XXXI  §§115-116 

VOCABULAEY 

nopxHdii  (an  adj.  in  form)  [pArtnoI],  BHc6Kift  [visoki],  high 

tailor  rJiydoKiii  [gtuboki],  deep 

KopdxKiii  [kArdtki],  short  hhskIh  [nlski],  low  {not  high) 

fldJirift  [dotgi],  long  (more  generally  thxIh  [tixi],  low  (not  loud) 
of  time) 

Exercises 

A.  Decline  in  the  singular  and  plural  (omitting  the  genitive  plural)  : 
noSpLiH    Kyn^tti),    mojiojs,6Pl    njicMiiHHHK'B,    xop6mee    kojibiio, 

Tp^^Hbift  HSBiK'b,  innpbKaH  ^jiHi^a,  Moji  qepnaH  coSaKa,  ;^3Kafl 
KdMHaxa,  Hauia  rjiy66Kafl  p-feK^,  eA  Apomdmiii  rojioct,  ero  Kp-feuKiii 
n^jiei^t,  er6  npyraH  jiom>. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  He  was  speaking  about  the  long  days.  (2)  Into  all  the  long,  broad 
rooms.  (3)  Towards  these  low  doors.  (4)  For  my  rich  old  uncle.  (5)  Into 
the  deep  rivers.  (6)  About  all  the  loud  voices.  (7)  With  [cb]  whose  gold 
rings  ?  (8)  From  the  nephew  of  that  poor  tailor.  (9)  Along  [no]  our 
narrow  streets.  (10)  On  the  long  tables.  (11)  Between  your  kind  old  aunts. 
(12)  On  to  these  short  bridges.  (13)  Before  their  low  doors.  (14)  The  boys 
fell  into  the  deep  water  but  a  brave  man  saved  them.  (15)  About  our  damp 
fields.     (16)  Towards  that  high  place. 

LESSON  XXXI 

Notice  the  following  idioms  : 

115. 

Hto  ^to  3a  nepo?  [jto  stA  za  paro],  Wh^t  is  that  for  a  pen  ?  i.e.  Wh^t 
kind  of  pen  is  that  ?     What  is  there  to  know  about  that  pen  ? 

KaKHM-L  ddpaaoMt?  [kAkim  6brAZAm],  By  what  means  ?  How  ? 

116. 

Mjrh  JierK6  (h^jkho)  5to  S'fejiaTb  [mne  hxk6  (ntisnA)  ^tA  d^tAt],  It  is 
easy  (necessary)  for  me  to  do  that. 

Euf  Tp^AHO  roBopHTb  no-pA^ccKH  [J9mti  trdduA  gAVArit  pAidski],  It 
is  difficult  for  him  to  speak  Russian. 

Mn-fe  (HaMx)  nplHTHO  cjnimaTb  5to  [mne  (nam)  prijdtnA  si^iJAt  stA], 
It  is  pleasant  for  me  (v^)  to  hear  that. 

:^ft  HenpijiTHO  CMOTp'feTb  Ha  ^xy  nrp^  [j6I  naprijatnA  smAtr6^t  ua  ^tu 
igrti],  She  does  not  like  to  look  at  that  game.    Of.  Par.  189,  2. 


§116  LESSON  XXXI  103 

Vocabulary 

ndpeHb,  pHH,  H  [paran],  lad  CTapdTbCfll31A[stAra^tsA],to5«nve, 

piiat,  a,  iJi  (b-l  pflfl^,  among)  [ra  t  (d)],  try 

:■      row,  rank  CKpLiB^Tb  131  A  [skriva^t],  to  keep 

KpoeaTb ,  H ,  H  [krAvd  ^t],  bed,  bedstead  concealed 

H^BCTBO,  a,  a  [tjvifstYA],  feeling  CKpbiTb  [skrit],  to  conceal 

Kp^CHHfi  [krasni],  red  o^CBiinHO  [AtJavfdiiA],  evidently 

noKpacH-fexb  [pAkrAsn6^t],  to  blush  pii^OMi.  ch  [rddAm  s]  (with  instr.)y 

Gjl'feHHHfl  [biedni],  pale  alongside,  close  beside  (lit.  in  one 

no6ji'feji;HrfeTb    [pAbiadn^^t],   to  turn  row  with) 

pale  MauiHH^jibHO  [mA|ma^inA],  absently, 
3aM'feTHTb  [zAiii^tit],  to  notice  mechanically,  instinctively 


Exercises 

A.  Translate : 

(1)  O^H^  MOJiOAafl  jKenmHHa,  K0T6paH  CH^-fejia  oji;Hd>Kji;Li  pAjiou-b 
cb  cBo6tt  1  CTapoii  xeTKoii,  h  ManiHH^jibHO  nrpajia  naJibiiaMH  en^  pyKii, 
saM^THJia  aojioToe  KOJibi^o  na  usLSihixh  TexKH.  (2)  Ona  cnpocHJia, 
«TeTKa,  WTO  ^to  sa  K0Jibi;6?»  (3)  Gxapan  a^Ma  noKpacH-fejia, 
noTOMT.  noSji'feAH'fejia,  h  CKaaaJia  nsLKOU^ixh  npojKamnM'b  rojiocoMt, 
«MH'fe  HenplHTHo  oS-B  ^TOM-b  roBopHTb.»     (4)  OqeBi'iAHO  ona  cxapa- 

JiaCb  CKpblTb  OT-b  nJieMHHHHI^bl  CBOli^  H^^BCTBa. 

Oueeuduo  ona  cmapojiacb  cKpbimb  omh  n/ieMHHHUiibi  ceou  uyecmea. 

B.  Rewrite  tlie  passage  A,  substituting  a  small  hoy  for  the  young 

woman,  an  uncle  for  an  aunt,  and  make  the  old  uncle  answer 
in  a  firm  voice. 

C.  BonpocLi: 

(1)  r^'fe  cnrfjia  MOJioAaH  jK^nmnna?  (2)  KaKOBa  SbiJia  eii 
TexKa?  (3)  H-feMi.  nrpajia  njieMHHHHi^a?  (4)  KaKX*  ona  5to  H'fejiajia? 
(5)  Hto  ona  cnpoci^Jia?  (6)  Hto  cjiy^HJiocb?]  (7)  Xox-fejia  jih 
cxapaH  jtaivia  roBopiiTb  o  sojioxoM'b  KOJibn-fe?  (8)  Hxo  68  6iiJio 
HenpiflXHo?     (9)  Ox-b  Kor6  ona  xox-fejia  CKpHBaxb  H^BCXBa? 

D.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  rich  merchant's  beautiful  wife  drove  up  to  {Kh\  the  door.  (2)  At 
last  the  door  was  opened  [see  Par.  102,  a]  and  she  entered  [into]  the  hospital. 
(3)  First  she  passed  through  a  dark  entrance-hall,  then  she  entered  a  large 

1  cBoeft  referring  to  the  subject  MOJionaH  weHmnHa. 

2  eji  does  not  refer  to  the  subject,  but  to  the  other  person,  the  aunt. 
'  cBoii  referring  to  the  subject  in  this  sentence,  oh^. 


104  PLUKALS  §117 

bright  room,  where  (there)  were  clean  white  beds  on  which  ^  lay  the  sick 
men.  (4)  She  entered  another  room,  passed  one  bed  and  came  up  to  [Ex. 
XXVIII,  A,  3]  the  bed  which  she  was  seeking.  (6)  There  she  found  her  son, 
the  unhappy  boy  whom  she  had  adopted  two  years  ago.  (6)  He  had  been  a 
strong,  healthy  lad  then.  (7)  But  suddenly  he  had  fallen  [past  tense']  ill  with 
that  dreadful  disease.  (8)  There  he  (was)  now  a  poor  weak  man.  (9)  His 
pale  fingers  were  playing  absently  with  the  yellow  papers  that  were  lying  on 
the  bed  before  him.  (10)  The  mother  sat  down  on  the  chair  that  stood  beside 
the  wooden  bed.  (11)  It  was  evidently  difficult  for  her  to  conceal  her  feelings. 
(12)  But  she  could  say  in  a  firm  voice,  "  What  papers  are  these  ?  " 

Nouns  that  have  occurred  for  the  First  Time  in 
•      Exercises  XXI-XXXI 

The  numbering  of  the  groups  corresponds  to  that  used  in  tbe 
list  given  in  Pars.  77,  78,  79. 

117.  Masculine  Nouns  ^ 

1 
bh^kTj,  h,  h,  sign  njiCM^iHHHK'B,  a,  h,  nepheiv 

cfwh,  a,  LI,  soup  npHKa3^HKT>,  a,  h,  shop-assistant 

HapoA'L,  a,  bi,  people 

2 
xpys'b,  k,  ill,  trouble,  difficulty  kjiio^'B,  k,  ii,  key 

flSiiiK'b,  S,  il,  tongue 

3 

Kyn^U'B,  nua,  uuj^i,  merchant  n^Jieui,,  Jibua,  jibubi,  finger  {see 

BaMdKT.,  MKa,  H,  lock  note  to  Voc.  XXIX) 

4 
p^STi,  a,  lii  (t),  time,  occasion  pHAt,  a,  ii  (na  pnjty',  in  a  row,  at 

the  same  time),  row,  rank 

6 
ndpcHb,  pHH,  H  (eft),  (peasant)  lad 

7 
rdsiocb,  a,  §l,  voice  r6poji'b,  a,  k,  town 

Feminine  in  Form 

13 
AJiAH,  H,  H  (eft)  or  hA  (b^Bt),  uncle      MyjKHHHa,  u,  bi,  man 

^  KOT6pMii  is  declined  exactly  like  any  other  adjective  in  -mM. 
2  nopTiidti,  tailor,  is  in  form  an  adjective. 


§§  118-119  PLURALS  105 

118.  Feminine  Nouns 

1 

6ojibHHi^a,  M,  LI,  hospital  np^BHa,  bi,  truth 

KOMHaxa,  bi,  H,  room  CHp6TKa,  h,  h  (ok-l),  little  orphan 

KopoBa,  bi,  bi,  cow  TCTKa,  H,  H  (oK-b),  uunt 

K^XHH,  H,  H  (OHI)  or  OHb),  kitchen  ;^JiHi;a,  bi,  bi,  sfreei 

Ji-fecTHHUja,  bi,  bi,  5to*V5  X0Ji6pa,  bi,  bi,  cholera 

M-fepa,  bi,  bi,  measure  HpMapKa,  h,  h  (0K'b),/a*V 
njiCMHHHHi^a,  bi,  bi,  mece 

2 
BOHH^,  iJi,  -^bi,  t^ar  TpaB^,  iJi,  -^H,  grra«5 

JKCHa,  bi,  -bi,  w?*/e 

3 

OBi^a,  li,  -^H  (ei^i)),  5^eejp  seMJiii,  A,  -H),  -^h  (6jib),  eari^,  land 

CHpoxa,  bi,  6Tbi,  orphan  pyna,  li,  -^y,  -^h,  y^^wZ,  arm 

The  first  two  mai/  have  the  accent  drawn  back  one  syllable  in 
the  accusative  singular,  e.g.  cnpoxy. 

Note — ccMbii,  6,  -^H  {^i^),  family,  has  the  accent  on  the  stem  only  in 
the  nom.  plur. 

4 

6oJiife3Hb,  H,  H  (e^),  sickness,  disease      KpOB^Tb,  H,  H  (efi),  bed,  bedstead 

5 
M^Tb,  epH,*epH  (6ft),  mother  no^b,  epa,  epn  (6ii),  daughter 

6 
nep^AHHH  (fern,  adj.),  ^ZZ,  fo66y 

119.  Neuter  Nouns  ^ 

1 

K0Jibu6,  ^,  -^a  (jieuT)),  ring 

2 
r6pe,  fl,  A  (6h[),  g^ne/,  sorrow 

3 

H^^BCTBO,  a,  a,  feeling  naHaJio,  a,  a,  beginning 

SOJIOTO,  a,  groZc^  Pokacctbo,  a,  a,  Christmas 

^  a«HB6THoe,  animal,  is  in  form  an  adjective. 


106 


VERBS,  A 


§§  120-121 


Hecq^cTie,  h,  h  (iii), 

misfortune 


3  {cont.y 
inesSy      c^acTie,  h,  h  (itt),  happiness 
noBTop^Hie,  h,  h,  repetition 


120.  Prepositions  that  have  occurred  in  Lessons  I-XXXI 

With  gen. :  Sea-L,  Gjihst,,  BM'fecTO,  B63Ji'fe,  «jih,  ao,  hst,,  KpoM-fe,  m6mo, 
OT-L,  y. 
(iaf. :  Kt  (ko),  no. 
accits. :  npo,  3a,  b-l  (bo),  na. 
instr. :  M^JKsy,  3a,  cl  (co),  pii^OMTb  cb,  n^peni,. 
prep. :  o,  na,  Bt  (bo),  npn,  no  (Par.  69). 


Verbs  that  have  occurred  in  Lessons  I-XXXI 


121. 

I A  (cf.  Lesson  XXXV) 
(1)  BLipacxaTB 
(no)roHHTb 
(no)ryji;iTb 
(no)A;^MaTb 
(c)ji;'fejiaTb 
(c)A'fejiaTbCfl 
(y)3HaTb 

(C'b)HrpdTb  ^ 

(no)K^maTb 

(1)  OTB-fe^aXb 

(1)  oT^bixaxb 

(1)  nOHHM^Tb 

(1)  nocfen^aTb 
(1)  npnroTOBJijiTb 
(1)  npbiraxb 
(1)  nycKaxb 
(no)pa66TaTb 
(3a)ciHTb 

(1)  CKpblB^Tb 

(1)  cnpaniHBaTb 
(no)cTapaTbca 


A  (see  Par,  206) 

I A  a,  6,  c, 
(a)  (cf.  Lesson  XLII) 
(no)Be3Tti 
(no)>KHTb 


IIA  1,  2,  3 
1  (cf.  Lesson  XXXVII) 
*  (no)roBopHTb 
(no)jiejKaTb 


(no)HTTH  2  (inf.  of  meji-b)    (no)cHa^Tb 
(no)HecTii  (inf.  of  necb)     (no)cnaTb 

(6)  (cf.  Lesson  XLIII) 
(no)jiiiTb 

(BlJl)nHTb 

(c)jKaTb 

(c)  (cf.  Lesson  XLIV) 
(no)^xaTb 
(no)HCKaTb 
(Bc)naxaTb 
(Ha)nHcaTb 
(3a)nji^KaTb 

(c)Moqb  (inf.  of  Mon*) 
[fut.  is  CMor^] 
(no)c^flTb  (Par.  168  a) 


(no)CTOHTb 

2  (cf.  Lesson  XXXVIII) 
(y)B6fl;'feTb 

(no)HpaBHTbCfl 
(y)cjn^imaTb 

(2)  CXdHTb 

(no)cTp6HTb 

3  (cf.  Lesson  XXXIX) 
(no)6poji;iiTb 

(no)CMOTp'feTb 

(Ha)yqHTb 
(Ha)yqHTbCfl 
(2)  xoA^Tb 


(no)qHTaTb 

(3a)6oJi'feTb  (simple  verb  =  fo  be  ill) 


(3a)xoT'feTb  (irreg.,     (Ha)pHCOBaTb 
Par.  222)  (Par.  225) 

1  'hw  must  be  written  u. 


(no)^CTb,  to  eat,  is  ir- 
regular (Par.  220) 
*  Contracted  to  nofixHt. 


122 


VEKBS,  B 


107 


122. 


noKpacH-feTb 

noSjii^AH^Tb 

saSoji'feTb  ^ 

sanymsiTh 

CA'fejiaTb 

ysHkTh 


B  (see  Par.  206) 
I  a,  6,  c 

*  B3flTb 

(1)  otbcstA 
(1)  npHHecTii 

noiiTH  (nomejii.) 

*  npHTTiA  (npHinejiT*) 

*  npoiiT^ 

*  HafiTii 

*  BOfiTil 

(1)  nocjiaxb 

(1)  yndcTb  (yn^Ji-b) 

(1)  cnacTb  (cnacb) 

*  CKasaxb 

(1)  noKaa^Tb  (Par.  232) 
(1)  pa3CKa3aTb(Par.232) 
(1)  OTKpiiiTb  (Par.  232) 
(1)  CKpbiTb  (Par.  232) 
(1)  nO^HHTbCH 
(1)  CHHTb 

(1)  npi-fexaTb 
(1)  Jieqb  (jier-b) 
(1)  cfecTb  (c-fejib) 
(1)  CTaxb 

(1)  OCTaXbCH 

(1)  yaiep^Tb 


II 

1)  BaM-feTHTb 

1)  p'hunkTh 

1)  CJiyHHTbCfl 

1)  cnpociiTb 

1)  6p6CHTb 

1)  nojiyqHTb 

1)  K6HHHTb 

1)  KyniiTb 
1)  yQ-bm^iTh 
1)  nocTyniiTb 

1)  BCTp-fexHTb 

1)  OTornaTb 
1)  cjiyqHTbCH 


(1)  AaTb  (naji-b)  is  ir- 
regular (Par.  231) 


6iiiTb  is  irregular 
(Page  34) 


no'feji'L  is  irregular 
(see  Par.  220) 


*  See  note  to  Voc,  LIII. 


108  LESSON  XXXII  §§  123-124 

LESSON  XXXII 
The  Futuee  Tense 

123.  The  future  tense  of  the  verb  Cbitb  is  : 

fl    6^jiY  [budu],  /  shall  be 
TBI    Qfjieuih  [btidaj],  thou  wilt  be,  etc. 

OH-B^ 

OH^  le^^ACTi.  [btidet] 
oh6J 

MH   Qfjieu-b  [biidam] 

BLi    6;^AeTe  [btidata] 

OHil^^^y^^  [b6dut] 

124.  Tbe  future  tense  of  any  verb  in  the  groups  marked  A 
(Par.  121)  is  composed  by  simply  adtiing  to  the  forms  given  in  the 
preceding  paragraph  the  infinitive  of  the  verb,  e.g. 

Ona  6fjs,eT'b  pHCOBaxL  [Ana  btidat  risAva^t],  she  will  draw. 
Bbi  Oy'flCTe  CTapaTbCH  [v!  biideta  stAra^tsAJ,  you  will  try. 

Note. — ^No  verb  under  B  (Par.  122)  can  have  a  future  of  this 
form.     This  is  most  important  (cf.  Par.  204). 

VOCABULAEY 

np^BHJiLHO  [pratiinA],  correctly  ;icH0  [jasnA],  clearly 

npaBO  [pravA],  really  np6>K3;e    {prep,   with  gen.   or   adv.) 

npaBAa  [pravdA],  truth,  the  truth  is  [ipH^dd],  before,  formerly 

CKopo  [skoiA],  quickly,  soon  nocjiife    (prep,    with   gen.    or    adv.) 

M^HJICHHO  [rh^diaiiA],  slowly  [p6si9],  after,  afterwards 

nosAHO  [p6z(d)nA],  late  no-H^MeuKH       [pAnemetski],       in 

n63>Ke  [p639],  later  German 

pane  [ranA],  early  no-HTajibHHCKH    [pAitAljanski],    in 

paHbme  [rd^nja],  earlier,  sooner  Italian 

ropasAO  66jibme  [gArazdA  bo^ijo],  MOJKCTb-SbiTb  [m639t-bit],  may  be. 


far  more 

Hhkto  HHqer6  He  noHHMajni  [iiixt6  iiitjevd  na  pAiiiindt],  No  one 
understood  anything. 


125-126 


LESSON  XXXIII 


109 


A.  Translate : 

(1)  ripaBAa,  fl  ^Toro  He  3Hajn>.  (2)  P^ho  Ajih  n63AHO  h  bc6 
6^fly  3HaTi>.  (3)  Toraa  oh-l  roBopHJit  no-p^ccKH,  ho  d^enb  m6a- 
JICHHO.  (4)  CKopo  OHi>  SyAeT'L  roBopi^Tb  iicHO  h  npaBHJibHO.  (5) 
OhT)  npHuiejiTb  nosflHO,  a  ona  npHUiJia  ropasAO  n63>Ke.  (6)  Hhkt6 
^Toro  HHKorfla  ne  6yji;eTi>  noHHMaTb.  (7)  MojKeT-b-SbiTb,  OHTb 
MeHii  HHKorAa  He  noHHMaji'L.  (8)  Ona  TOJibKO  d^enh  neMHoro 
roBopHjia  no-H'^feM6i;KH  h  no-HTajib^iHCKH.  (9)  npem^e  ouA  TOJibKO 
HCMHoro  HHxajiH,  HO  BT.  mK6ji'fe  muTy  HyjKHO  6fji,eTi>  rop^3ji;o  66jibme 
HHTaxb.      (10)  Xopomo,    qxo    OH-fe    T6jibK0    n63>Ke    [not    till    later] 

6^ayTl>  OTB'feHaTb. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Why  will  the  boys  be  taught  at  home  ?  (2)  Will  they  not  learn  far 
more  at  school  ?  (3)  She  will  never  answer  quickly  and  clearly.  (4)  It  is 
impossible  to  say  when  the  industrious  workmen  will  rest.  (5)  It  is  well 
that  he  will  not  eat  all  his  bread  till  later  [say :  will  eat  only  later}.  {&)  No 
one  will  write  anything.  (7)  The  corn  will  be  growing  up  in  spring.  (8) 
From  whose  friend  will  she  try  to  conceal  her  feelings  ?  (9)  Sooner  or  later 
these  old  men  will  be  working  in  the  fields.  (10)  All  the  diligent  school-girls 
will  learn  their  lessons.  (11)  The  one  girl  will  lie  on  this  bed,  the  other  will 
sit  on  that  chair. 


LESSON  XXXIII 
125.  The  complete  plurals  of  the  1st  and  2nd  personal  pronouns 


are 


nom.     Mbi  [mi],  we                               bm  [vi],  ymt 

gen.     nacL 

[nas],  of  us,  etc.              Bacb  [vas],  of  you,  etc. 

dat.     HaMTj 

[nam]                              BaM-L  [vam] 

ace.     Hacb 

[nas]                                Bacb  [vas] 

instr.     HaMH 

[naihi]                             BaMH  [vaihi] 

prep.     HacL 

[nas]     !                            BacB  [vas] 

126.  The  plural  of  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  is  : 

Masc.  and  Neut,                    Fern. 

nom. 

OHH  [Alii]                 OH-fe  [aus],  they 

gen. 

(h)hxt>  [(j)ix],  of  them,  etc. 

dat. 

(H)HM'b  [(j)im] 

ace. 

(h)hx'L  [(j)ix] 

instr. 

(h)6mh  [(j)imi] 

prep. 

HHXT.  [nix] 

Most  of  these  forms  have  already  been  introduced. 


110  LESSON  XXXIV  §§  127-128 

127.  URWb  [nod],  over,  above, 

noat  [pod],  beneath,  below, 

are  both  used  with  the  instrumental.    Accompanying  verbs  of 
motion  noAT)  governs  the  accusative. 

Exercises 

Translate  into  Russian : 

A.  About  them,  on  to  them,  behind  us,  over  them,  over  me,  between  them, 
between  us  and  you,  with  you,  up  to  them,  under  us,  with  you,  for  them, 
towards  them,  according  to  them,  towards  you,  about  you,  before  them,  in 
them,  beside  them,  under  them,  over  you,  in  his  presence,  in  their  presence. 

B.  (1)  We  saw  them  all.  (2)  They  answered  us.  (3)  You  heard  it. 
(4)  What  were  you  doing  there  ?  (5)  We  shall  speak  of  you.  (6)  They  will 
ask  them  questions.  (7)  When  shall  we  eat  them  ?  (8)  They  never  let  us 
(in).  (9)  Are  you  speaking  of  our  tame  animals  ?  (10)  The  white  sheep  were 
lying  under  the  old  bridge.  (11)  I  saw  this  bright  light  above  them.  (12) 
We  shall  look  for  it  later.  (13)  He  will  know  it  far  better  to-morrow.  (14) 
Who  found  the  black  cow  that  fell  into  the  deep  water  ?  (15)  She  will  never 
do  that  again.  (16)  They  heard  nothing.  (17)  He  was  sitting  under  the 
old  chair.  (18)  He  never  spoke  to  us.  (19)  Whose  pupil  was  trying  to  read  ? 
(20)  Have  you  (got)  those  books  I  gave  you  yesterday  ? 


LESSON  XXXIV 

128.  Time  phrases  : 

KOTopLifi  ^acb  xen^pb?  [kAt6ri  tjas  tap6^r],  what  time  is  it  now  ? 

Bt  KOTopoMTj  qacy?  [fkAtorAm  tjAsd],  at  what  time  ?  at  what  o'clock  ? 

BT>  HE  a  qaca  [vdva  tJAsa],  at  two  o'clock. 

btj  paHHCM'B  Hacy  [vrdfi8m  tJAsuJ,  at  an  early  hour. 

"Bii  BOCKpec^Hbe  [vVAskr9s6nja],  on  Sunday. 

Bii  i^TOMb  roay  [vstAm  gAdii],  in  this  (or  that)  year. 

BX  Gy^aymcMb  ^  rojif  [vbudujtjom  gAdu],  next  year. 

Bb  TCKymeMb  1  roa^  [ftektijtjam  gAdu],  in  the  current  year. 

btj  HacTOHiuee  ^  BpeMH  [vnAstAJaJtJoja  vr^iiiA],  at  the  present  time. 

Ha  npyroH  AeHb  [ua  drug6I  de^n],  on  the  following  day. 

K'b  Beqepy  [kv6tJ9ru],  towards  evening. 

no  B^^iepaM'b  [pAv6tJorAm],  of  an  evening. 

P'fe^KO  [rstkA],  rarely,  seldom. 

^  These  words  are  participles. 


§128 


LESSON  XXXIV 


111 


Vocabulary 


oS^At,  a,  LI  [Ab^t],  dinner 

saBTpaKt,  a,  h  [zdftiAk],  break- 
fast 

qdcL,  a,  LI  [tjas]  (after  2,  3,  4,  gen. 
sing.  [tJAsa]),  hour 

noHe^-fejiLUHKi.,  a,  h  [pAngd^^inik], 
Monday 

BOCKpeceHLe,  h,  n  (eB-L)  [vAskra- 
seiija],  Sunday 

n^Jio,  a,  a  [dstA],  business,  ajfair 

poJKL,  pjKH  [roj],  r^/e 

nmeHHLta,  li  [pJanitsA],  wJieat 

PocciH,  H  (h,  k),  efi,  h)  [rAsiJA], 
Bussia 

B-L  Poccz'u  [vrAsii],  in  Russia 

OpaHLtiH,  H  (H,io,eft,H)[frdiitsiJA], 
France 

BO  OpaHi^iu  [vAfrantsii],  m  France 

Anrjiifl  [angiiJA],  England 

Hxajiifl  [italiJA],  Italy 


FepManiH  [ggrmaniJA],  Germany 
HHOcxpaiieu'L,      Hi^a,      li      [uia- 

strdnats],  stranger y  foreigner 
aHrJiHqaHHHT),  a  [angiitjdnin],  pi. 

aHrjiKHane,  aH-b  [angiitjdna], 


MH'feHie,  fl,  H  [mn6njo],  opinion 
HHHcro  [iiitj9v6],  i€s  not  worth  speak- 
ing about,  never  mind 
BOBce  [v6f89],  at  all 
6cjiH  [j6sii],  if 
H6BLifi  [n6vi],  new 
TCK^mitt  [takujtji],  current 
S^aymiii  [budujtji],  future 
HacTOJimift    [nAstAJdjtJi],    present, 

actual 
np6mjiLift  [pi*6J^i]»  V^ist,  last 
rpoMaaHLlii  [grAmddni],  enormous 
OHi>    ymeji'L    [on    ujoi:],    he   went 
away 


Exercises 
A.  Translate  : 

(1)  IIpejKne  MaJicHLKaH  yqen^i^a  tojilko  neMHdro  yqiijiacb,  a 
B-L  S^^ymeM-L  TOjif  OHa  rop^sao  66jiLine  Sy^nexT.  yqHXLCH.  (2) 
IIoqeM;^  OHa  S^nex-L  cnpLiBaxb  ox-l  mchh  cboh  MH-fenifl?  (3)  Hejib3^ 
3Haxb,  Hxo  saBxpa  Sy^ex-b.  (4)  B-b  BOCKpec^Hbe  ohh  d^ayx-b  hmxi 
HHcaxb.  (5)  ficjiH  Bbi  Bcer^a  nneM-b  h  Hoqbio  6yji;exe  pa66xaxb, 
Bli  6yAexe  doji-fexb.  (6)  ripaB^a,  h  HHKor«a  odxi  ^xoM-b  He  a^^Maji^. 
(7)  Hhkxo  HHKoraa  ne  Sy^nexnt  nycKaxb  xaKoro  MajicHbKaro  M^Jib- 
HHKa  B-b  Hamy  K6MHaxy.  (8)  B-b  CyAymeM-b  ro^^  ^xh  6oraxbie 
HHocxpaHi^bi  d^nyx-b  cxpoHXb  rpoMannbiii  HOBbiii  ^Bop^ix-b  na  6eper;^ 
p-feKii.  (9)  J\o  PojKjtecxBa  mh  Q^mwh  yniixbcfl  HOMa.  (10)  Ha 
Jtpyr6ii  nenb  mh  roBopHJiH  ciy  BauiHM'b  ap^roM'b.  (11)  BecHoii 
npHJi6>KHLiH  KpecxLiinHHi.  G^^ex-L  cibflxb  H^M^Hb  H  OBecb,  a  occhlio 
poJKb  H  nmeHHHy.  (12)  Xlo^eM^  anrjiH^^He  HHKorad  ne  xox^jih 
roBopAxb  c-h  HHMH?  (13)  Bx>  KOxdpoM-b  qac^  Bbi  npninjiii  aoMoii? 
(14)  On-b  npumeji'b  na  Apyrofi  nenb.  (15)  ObA  BdBce  ne  noHHMaJin 
Bcer6  5xoro. 


112  LESSON  XXXV  §129 

B.  BonpocH: 

(1)  Hto  yqeHtI^a  np^jK^e  ^-fejiajia?  (2)  Hto  ona  S^flext  ^'fejiaxb? 
(3)  Hero  HejibSH  snaTB?  (4)  Kor^a  OHii  6;^«yTT>  hmt,  nHcaxb? 
(5)  O  HCM-L  OHT,  HHKorAa  He  n^MajiT,?  [Oh-b  HHKorna  ne  ayMajii,  o 
TOMT),  HTO,  about  the  fact  that,  etc.]  (6)  Koro  HHKor^a  He  GyAyTt 
nycK^TB?      (7)  Kto  h  r«ife   S^ayxT,  CTponxB   J^Bop6^'B?     (8)  KaKofi 

^B0p6^'B    OHii    S^flyT-B    CTpOHTB?       (9)   ^O   KOTOparO   HHH   MBI    d^^^eMT* 

y^HTBCH?     (10)  Hto  KpecTBiiHe  S^Ayx-B  c^htb  BecHofi? 

C.  Translate  into  Eussian  : 

(1)  To-morrow  we  shall  speak  about  all  that  with  the  Russian  merchants 
who  arrived  here  last  Sunday.  (2)  We  shall  all  work  by  night  and  amuse  our- 
selves by  day  [say  ryJliixB  H  HrpaxB].  (3)  After  dinner  we  shall  sleep  in  your 
bed.  (4)  It  was  not  easy  to  speak  with  your  poor  friends,  as  [xaKX.  KaKi)]  they 
came  very  late.  (5)  Their  yoimger  daughter  will  speak  with  you  at  an  early 
hour  on  Monday.  (6)  How  much  will  that  breakfast  cost  ?  (7)  Next  year 
we  shall  be  in  Russia  and  perhaps  we  shall  live  there  till  Christmas.  (8)  She 
was  never  in  France  before  ;  last  year  she  was  in  Germany  and  this  year  she 
will  be  in  England.  (9)  Why  will  the  old  peasant-woman  pour  the  clean 
water  on  the  already  damp  ground  ?  (10)  Next  day  the  peasant's  friends 
arrived  early  from  the  town,  but  the  old  man  (had)  arrived  still  earlier 
along  with  us,  and  his  wife  arrived  only  a  little  later.  (11)  We  shall  write  to 
them  in  the  current  year  about  this  business.  (12)  At  what  time  did  they 
go  in  T^  (13)  They  found  him  here  at  four  o'clock.  (14)  Why  did  the  silly 
boy  not  eat  this  black  bread  ?  (15)  Never  mind,  he  will  eat  it  to-morrow. 
(16)  Wheat  was  sown  last  year  and  rye  will  be  sown  this  year.  (17)  EngHsh- 
men  will  not  always  speak  Russian  badly.  (18)  They  rarely  spoke  Russian 
well.  (19)  If  you  always  speak  [fut.]  so  fast,  no  one  will  ever  understand 
what  you  are  trying  to  say.  (20)  After  Sunday  we  shall  be  hving  with  our 
old  friend. 


LESSON  XXXV 

The  Present  Tense 

129.  Up  to  tliis  point  only  the  infinitive,  future,  and  past  tense 
of  the  verb  have  been  used.  The  Present  Tense  is  not  quite  so 
simple  in  form  as  the  past  tense,  and  in  many  verbs  it  is  not  so  simply 
derived  from  the  infinitive ;  in  fact  two  verbs  may  be  in  the  in- 
finitive very  similar,  and  in  the  present  tense  quite  different  in 
appearance.  Eussian  verbs  are  usually  classified  according  to  the 
form  of  the  present  tense. 


§§  130-131 

LESSON  XXXV 

113 

130.  All  verbs,  excluding  a  very 

few 

irregulars,  have  in  tlie 

present  tense  one 

of  the  two  following 

sets  of  endings : 

I 

n 

1.       fl 

— K)  or  — y  [ju,  u] 

— H)  or  — y  [ju,  u] 

2.      TH 

— euib  [j9j] 

^HlUb  [IJ] 

8ing.- 

OH'L^ 

3.   OH^  I 

— ex-B  [J9t] 

HXT,  [it] 

.       OHO  J 

'4.     MH 

CM-b  [J9m] 

— HMT)  [im] 

Plur. 

6.    Bh 

— exe  [jate] 

— Hxe  [ita] 

— ioxT>  or  — yx-b  [jut, 

ut] 

— HX-B  or  — axx.  [jot,  at]. 

Note,     (a)  Cf.  the  endings  learned  in  Par.  123. 

(6)  The  variety  of  possible 

stem-fori 

tns  is  considerable. 

131.  All  the  verbs  under  I A  in  Par.  121  form  the  present  tense 
by  substituting  the  endings  I  in  Par.  130  for  the  Tb  of  the  in- 
finitive, so  that  we  have  : 

(1)  (2)        .  (3) 

fl   n^Maio     [diimAJu],  ryjuiio       [gulaju],  cxapaiocb  [stArajus],  try 
think                               walk 

Xbi   ^^Maenib  [diiniAJaJ]  ryjifleuib  [gulajaj]  cxapaenibCfl  [stArd jaJsA] 

ona  j-a^^Maex'b  [ddniAJat]  ryjiflcx-b  [guidjat]  cxapaexcfl  [stAra jatsA] 

OHoi 

MH   H^MacM-b  [ddniAJem]  ryjiiieM-b  [guldjam]  cxapacMCfl  [stArdjemsA] 

Bm   jt^Maexe  [diimAJate]  ryjiiiexe  [guld J9t9]  cxapaexecb  [stArd J9t9s] 

^|Ay^MaH)X'b[dumAJut]     ryjiiiioxxj  [guld  jut]     cxapaioxcfl  [stArd  jutsA] 

These  are  not  three  distinct  types ;  they  are  merely  three 
examples.    Verbs  in  'fexb  belong  chiefly  to  this  class. 

(a)  The  present  participles  of  verbs  of  this  type  have  the  following 
forms  : 

Adverbial  present  participle  (invariable) : 

nyMaa,   ryjiaa,   CTapaacb  (pres.   stem  plus  a),   while 

thinking,  walking,  trying-, 

Adjectival  present  participle  active  (declined  as  an  adjective) : 

HyMaiomiii,   ryjiaiomlH,    CTapaiomiiica   (formed   from 

3rd  plur.  pres.  tense),  one  who  is  thinking,  walking,  trying. 

(b)  Compare  Par.  80  (b). 

H 


114  LESSON  XXXV  §132 

132.  Note  carefully  the  spelling  of  the  present  tense  of  the  re- 
flexive verb  : 

Cb  in  1st  sing,  and  2nd  plur.  {i.e.  after  vowels). 

Cfl  in  all  other  cases. 

Before  reflexive  cb,  ch,  in  all  parts  of  the  verb  h  is  preserved 
but  t  is  omitted. 

VOCABULABY 

Ji^Mna,  H,  Bi  [tampA],  lamp  3a>KHr^Ti>  [zAsigd^t],  to  light,  set  on 
niima,  h,  h  [piJtjA],  food  fire 

HtejiaTb  [38td^t],  to  wish,  desire  TporaTb  [tr6gAt],  to  touch 

npoHOJiJKaTb   [prAdAt5dit],   to  con-  cJiymaTb  [stuJAt],  to  listen 

tinue  ynoTpeSjiHTb  [upAtrebla^t],  to  use 

OTKpbiBaTb  [Atkrivd^t],  to  open  pifemaxb  [rejd^t],  to  solve,  resolve 

saKpbiBaxb  [zAkrivd^t],  to  shut  yM'fexb  [um6^t],  to  understand,  to  know 
nojiaraxb    [pAtAgd^t],    to    suppose,  hoiv  to 

have  an  opinion  BHHMaTeJibHO   [vnimdtaiiiA],   atten- 
nojKHBaTb  [pA5ivd^t],  to  live,  to  dwell,  tively 

to  he  {of  health) 

All  verbs  in  this  vocabulary  belong  to  class  I  A. 

.    ^       ,  ,  Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  H  BHHMaTeJibHO  cji^^maio  Bce  to,  hto  Bh  qnTacTC.  (2)  Ohh 
BcerAa  «^JiaioTi>,  KaK-b  JKCJiaiOT-b.  (3)  Ilo^eMy^  Bbi  npoaojuKacTe 
roBopHTb  oST)  ^TOM'b?  (4)  Hto  HaM'b  Cfl^JiaTb  \to  do  now,  once,  on  this 
occasion]!  Ohhl  cKpbiBaiOT'b  OT-b  nacb  Bce  to,  qTO  ohh  ayMaiOT-b. 
(5)  Ona  xopomo  yM'feeT'b  npHroTOBJiHTb  5to  miIco.  (6)  Bcer^a 
JIH  pano  sajKHraioT-b  JiaMny?  (7)  H  n^^Maio,  hto  ona  ne  cjiy^maeT'b. 
(8)  B-b  PocciH  H  B-b  repManin  pojKb  ynoxpeSjiHiOT'b  B-b  nnmy  [as 
food].  (9)  KaK-b  Bbi  nojiaracTc?  (10)  HeyH<6jiH  oH-b  yjK6  yqiiji-b 
ypoK-b?  (11)  He  nojiaracT-b  jih  OH-b,  hto  en  yneHHitbi  nosjKe 
S^ayx-b  yqHTbCH?  (12)  Xopomo,  hto  Mbipanbuie  ne  HpnuiJiiiciofla. 
(13)  KaK-b  Bbi  HOJKHBaeTe?     [How  are  you?] 

B.  Write  sentences  1-3,  5,  6,  8,  9,  11  in  the  past  and  future. 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  They  wish  ;  they  conceal ;  we  think  ;  you  know  ,•  do  you  know  ? 
what  do  you  know  ?  (2)  They  touch.  (3)  We  solve  them  all.  (4)  They  are 
preparing  that  meat.  (5)  We  are  opening  this  book.  (6)  They  shut  it.  (7)  I 
am  listening  to  all  that  [Bce  to,  hto]  you  are  reading.  (8)  He  supposes  that 
they  will  speak  to  them.     (9)  It  is  done  [H'fejiaTbCfl]  here.     (10)  We  are  trying 


§§133-137  LESSON  XXXVI  115 

to  teach  ;  they  will  learn.  (11)  Do  they  always  [Bceraa  JIH  OH  A]  do  that  ? 
(12)  She  fell  ill.  (13)  She  showed  them  all  that.  (14)  Who  generally  opened 
this  door  ?  (15)  Did  she  not  give  them  good  food  and  drink  ?  (16)  Does  he 
not  understand  what  [that  which]  you  said  ?  (17)  We  use  meat  as  food. 
(18)  She  can  [i.e.  knows  how  to]  speak  distinctly  and  quickly.  (19)  Will  he 
not  [He  Sy^fleT'b  jih]  touch  this  thing  ?     (20)  He  asks  them  how  they  are. 


LESSON  XXXVI 
Genitive  Plural  of  Masculine  Nouns  and  of  Adjectives 

133.  Nouns  in  -T>  have  genitive  plural  in 

-OBt,  e.g.  CTOJi'L,  ctojiobTj  [stAtof] 
or  -CB-L,  e.g.  najien'b,  najibi^eB-b  [pafeaf],  after  i^  when 
the  termination  is  not  accented. 

134.  The  most  notable  exceptions  that  have  occurred,  apart 
from  words  dealt  with  in  Par.  136  (b),  are : 

rjiasT),  eye,    which  has  gen.  pi.  rjiaat. 
paa-B,  time,        „        „        „      paa-b. 
anrjiHqaHHH'B  „        „        „      anrjinqaHi.  [anglitjan]. 
KpecTbflHHH-b   „        „         „      KpecTbHHT.  [krastjdn]. 

135.  Nouns  in  -Pi  have  the  genitive  plural  in  -eBij,  e.g. 

CJif^SiU,  cji^qaeB-B  [stutjAJaf]  (Group  6,  Par.  77). 

136.  (a)  All  nouns  in  -L,  both  mascuUnes  and  feminines,  have 
the  genitive  plural  in  -eii,  e.g, 

napb,  napeii  [tsAr6i]. 

nocTejib,  nocTejieH  [pAst^lsi]. 
(Masc.  nouns,  Group  6,  Pars.  77  and  117.) 
(Fem.  nouns.  Groups  4  and  5,  Pars.  78  and  118.) 

(b)  All  nouns  in  ->KT>,  -Hi>,  -ui'B,  -uxh,  have  the  genitive  plural 

in  -en,  e.g. 

HOKi),  HOJKeii  [noj,  nA36l],  knife. 

137.  The  genitive  plural  ending  of  adjectives  is  for  all  genders 
-i>ixi>  in  the  hard  form,  e.g. 

KpacHBHii,  KpacHEbixt  [kiAsfvix],  beautifuL 


116  LESSON  XXXVI  §  138 

and  -HX'b  in  the  soft  form,  and  after  r,  k,  x,  jk,  ^,  ui,  ux,  e.g. 
nocJi-feflHiii,  nocji-fe^Hnxt  [pAsUdnix],  latter,  last. 
MJi^Ainifi,  MJiajxinHX-B  [mtdtjix],  younger. 

138.  Tlie  genitive  singular  of  the  noiin  must  be  employed  after 
ji;Ba,  TpH,  HeTLipe,  these  words  being  nominative  or  accusative.^ 

With  numerals,  after  4,  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  case  the 
genitive  plural  of  the  noun  is  used. 

Examples  :   aea  pySjiH  [dva  rubid],  two  roubles. 

necHTb  pySjieii  [d6s9t  rubUi],  ten  roubles. 

BT)  BOCCMb  qacoBT.  [vvosom  tJAsof],  at  eight  o'clock. 

Notice  the  usage  with  compound  numerals : 

aBafluaxB  oflMHt  py6jib   [dvatsAt  Adin  rup]  (nom.  sing.),  twenty-one 

roubles  ; 
^BaAuaxL  ABa  py6jiH  (gen.  sing.),  twenty-two  roubles; 
and  so  with  23  and  24,  but 

ABaAnaTb  hhtb  pydJi^fi  [dvatsAt  pa^i  rubi6i]  (gen.  plur.),  twenty-five 
roubles,  etc.  etc. 

Vocabulary 

^^JKHH-B,  a,  LI  [u5in]  supper  yqHjiHmHbiii    [utjiiijni],    school,  of 
HBop-b,  a,  bi  [dvor],  yard,  court  the  school 

cajmax-b,  a,  bi  (tb)  [sAtddt],  soldier  bchkIh  [fsdki],  every 

3a«aHa,   h,   h    [zAddtjA],   problem,  KaJKabiii  [kdsdi],  each 

exercise  nocji'feaHiH  [pAsMdni],  latter,  last 

HHXb  [pa^t],  five  SesnpecxaHHO  [basprostdnA],  iTices- 
mecxb  [jest],  six  santly,  continually 

ceMb  [sem],  seven  BM'fecx'fe  c^h  [vih6stas],  together  with 

BOCCMb  [y6s9m],  eight  HrpaxbB-b  coJiji;axbi[igrd^tfsAtddti], 
ACBflXb  [d^vat],  nine  to  play  at  soldiers 

necHXb  [d6s8t],  ten  saHHMaxbca    I A    [zAnimd^tsA],    to 
HBaauaxb  [dvdtsAt],  twenty  occupy  oneself,  to  be  occupied 

Bce  [fso],  all,  always  xaK'b  KaKX)  [tak  kak],  as  (conj.) 

MH'fe    HyjKHO    [mns  niisnA],  to  me  ii6o  [ihA],  for  (conj.) 

necessary,  i.e.  I  must,  I  need  to 

Exercises 

A.  Give  the  genitive  plural  of  : 

Majib^HK-b,  oceji-b,  rjias-b  [irreg.],  repoit,  ji;Bepb,  najieit'b,  Maxb. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

3  boys,  5  boys,  20  boys,  21  boys,  22  boys,  26  boys. 
1  Read  Pars.  179,  180  at  this  point. 


139 


LESSON  XXXVII 


117 


C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

past  all  the  red  houses  ;  beside  these  black  tables  ;  for  those  tame  animals  ; 
from  the  other  houses  ;  from  my  kind  aunts  ;  out  of  the  narrow,  dark  entrance- 
halls  ;  from  those  Russian  towns  ;  till  a  late  day ;  that  is  done  in  our  house 
of  an  evening ;  we  are  trying  to  answer ;  they  are  ill  [Coji'feTb] ;  what  are 
their  sons  reading  ?  whose  sons  are  reading  ? 

D.  Translate  : 

(1)  Hto  ^'feJIaeT'b  xenepb  Bami,  mojioaoh  chh-b?  (2)  IlpaBO 
He  3Haio,  HO  fl  noJiaraio,  hto  oh-l  xenepb  BM'fecT'fe  co  cbohm'l  dpaxoM-b 
BTb  yqiijiHin-fe.  (3)  On-b,  MdjKex-b-Sbixb,  co  BcfeMH  apyriiMH  MaJienb- 
KHMH  MajibHHKaMH  Hrpacx-b  Ha  ynnjiHinnoM-b  ABopi  bt.  cojih^xh, 
xaKTb  KaKTb,  btj  Hacxoflmee  bp^mh,  BCHKift  nejioB'feK'b  saHHMaexcH 
BoiiHoio,  aajKe  MajienbKie  ayMaiox-b  xojibKO  o  H^ii.  (4)  KajK^bift 
B^Hcp-b,  Koraa  samHraroxT.  jiaMny,  hxx.  MJiaAuiiii  cbiH-b  Bcerna 
p^i^oM-b  ch  cxapuiHMH  cecxpaMH  y  cxojia.  (5)  Tporaex-b,  oxKpbiBaex'b, 
saKpbiBaex'b  KHiirH  h  xexpaan.  (6)  Bee  BHHMaxejibHO  cji^maex'b  xo, 
Hxo  HMxaiox-b  ero  6paxbfl  h  cecxpbi.  (7)  OShkhobchho  nocji-feanie 
no  ^H^HHa  npnroxoBJifliox'b  ypoKH  h  p'femaiox'b  3aji;aqH,  a  OH-b  Bcera^ 
acejiaexX)  yanaxb,  qxo  a-fejiaexcH.  (8)  BeanpecxaHHO  cnpauiHBaex'b, 
HO  cecxpbi  o^cHb  qacxo  ne  oxBibHaiox'b  na  ero  Bonpocbi. 

E.  As  far  as  tlie  sense  admits  of  it,  write  the  sentences  in  Ex.  D  in 

the  past  tense  and  future. 


LESSON  XXXVII 


Present  Tense  of  type  II A 

139.  Verbs  in  group  II A  in  Par.  121  have  in  the  present  tense 
the  second  set  of  endings  given  in  Par.  130,  e.g. 


(1) 
H    roBopib  [gAVArii],  speak 
Xbi    roBopiimb  [gAVArij] 

OWb\ 

ouk  VroBopHXT.  [gAVAi-it] 

oh6J 

Mbi    roBopHM'b  [gAVArim] 
Bbi   roBop^xe  [gAVAi-ita] 

^^SjroBopax'b  [gAVArat] 


,   (2) 
cxpoK)  [str6ju],  build 

cxpoHUib  [stroij] 

cxpoHX-b  [stroit] 

cxpbHM-b  [str6im] 
cxpoHxe  [str6ite] 

cxpoflx-b  [str6J8t] 


(3) 
yq^  1  [utjii],  teach 
^^HUib  [litjij] 

^qHXX)  [lit/it] 

^qHM-b  [lit  Jim] 
^HHxe  [utjita] 

^qax-b  1  [litjAt] 


1  H)  and  H  never  appear  after  r,  k,  x,  m,  n,  m,  m,  u,. 


118  LESSON  XXXVII  §§140-141 

(a)  Types  (1),  (2),  (3)  differ  only  in  accentuation. 
(6)  The  participles  of  verbs  of  these  types  have  the  following 
forms  : 

Adverbial  participle  present : 

roBopa,  cxpoa,  yna  ^  (pres.  stem  +  a),  while  speaking,  building, 


Adjectival  participle  present  active  : 

roBopHiniii,  CTpoflmiii,  ynamiH  ^  [from  3rd  plural  pres.],  one 
that  is  speaking,  etc. 

Adjectival  participle  present  passive  : 

,  cipoHMBiH,  yHHMBiH  [from  1st  plur.  pres.],  one  that  is 

being  built,  taught. 

Adverbial  participle  past : 

roBopiiB'B,  cxpoHB'B,  yHHB'B  [from  past  tense],  having  spoken, 
built,  taught. 

Adjectival  participle  past  active : 

roBopHBiuift,  cxpoHBUiiH,  yHHBmiii  [from  past  tense],  one 
who  has  spoken,  built,  taught. 

Adjectival  participle  past  passive : 

roBopeHHBiH,  (no)cTp6eHHHH,  yqeHHBm  [y  or  lo  of  pres.  tense 
changed  into  eHHBiii],  one  that  has  been  spoken,  built,  taught 
{  =  learned). 

(c)  Compare  Par.  80  (6),  96  (a),  131  (a). 

140.  There  is  very  frequently  a  change  in  the  form  of  the  stem. 
In  verbs  of  the  2nd  conjugation  such  a  change  in  the  present  tense 
appears  as  a  rule  only  in  the  1st  singular. 

141.  Present  Tense  of  Type  II  A 1 

CHA'^Tb,  to  be  sitting  BHcfexb,  to  hang,  to  be  hanging/ 

cumf  [sisii]  BHm^  [vijii] 

CHHiimb  [sidij],  etc.  BHCiimb  [visij],  etc. 

caaiiTbCfl  [sAditsA],  to  sit  doum  cnaxb,  to  sleep 

caJK^cb  [sA5tis]  cnjiK)  ^  [spiu] 

caAiiuibCH  [sAdijsA,  sadiJsA],  etc.  cnnmb  [spij],  etc. 

^  10  and  fl  never  appear  after  r,  k,  x,  jk,  %  m,  m,  u,. 
2  Ji  is  inserted  after  6,  b,  m,  n  before  m. 


§§142-144  LESSON  XXXVII  119 

JieJKdxL,  to  lie,  to  recline  cxoiiTb,  to  stand 

Jiemf  [iasu]  *  CTOib  [stAJii] 

JieJKHUib  [ias'ij],  etc.  CTOiimb  [stAij],  etc. 

JioJKliTbCfl,  to  lie  down  npHHajocJiejK^Tb,  to  belong 

nomfch  [tA^iis]  npHnaaJiem^  [prinAdiasu] 

JioJKHinbCfl  [tA3iJsA],  etc.  npHHaAJieH^Aiub  [prinAdigsiJ],  etc. 

142.  (1)  In  cmjifkTh  and  caAHTbCH  the  ji;  changes  to  m  in  the 
1st  singular  present  tense.  This  is  characteristic  of  verbs  ending 
in  -HHTb  and  -H'feTt. 

(2)  In  BHC^Tb  the  c  changes  into  ui  in  the  1st  singular  present 
tense.    This  is  characteristic  of  verbs  in  -CHTb  and  -cfexb. 

143.  Observe  carefully  the  difference  in  meaning  between 
jie^Kaxb,  to  be  lying  down  (a  verb  of  rest)  and  jio^khtbch,  to  lay 
oneself  down,  i.e.  to  lie  down.    Of.  CHaixb  and  caAHTbca  (Par.  60). 

Note  JiojKiATbCH  enaxb  [tA3itsA  spa^t],  to  go  to  bed. 

144.  In  English  we  say,  *  What  is  he  doing  ?  '  '  I  think  he  is 
reading,'  and  the  Kussian  «  Hto  oh'l  H'fcjiaeT'B?  »  «  Ilojiaraio,  hto 
OHt  HHTaexTb  »  exactly  corresponds. 

If  the  second  sentence  is  reported  in  the  past,  it  becomes,  '  She 
thought  he  was  reading,'  but  in  Russian  the  verb  in  the  subordinate 
class  must  still  be  present,  e.g. 

Ona  A^Majia,  hto  OH'b  qHT^eT-B. 

So :  H  CKasaJi'b  cm^,  hto  er6  Maxb  cujiAttj  y  OKHa,  /  told  him  that 
his  mother  ivas  sitting  at  the  windoiv. 


Vocabulary 

BOJIKX.,    a,    H    (oB-b,    termination  KapTHHa,  bi,  h  [kArtinA],  ptcf^re 

accented  throughout  oblique  cases  JiHca,  bl,  li  (jiHCHua,  bi,  m)  {use  2nd 

of  plural)  [votk],  wolf  word    in    oblique    cases)    [iisd , 

Jiee-b,  jibBa,  JibBbi  [isv  (isf),  iva,  IMtsA},  fox 

ivi],  lion  CBHHbii,  ii,  — H  {termination  accented 

^HCTTE),  a,  bi  [dist],  stork  in  oblique  cases  of  plural)  Isymja], 

MKypaBJib,  A,  6  [surdf,   surAvia],  pig 

crane  cxifena,  i^i,  ^y,  -h  [stand],  wall 

3B'fepb,  fl,  H  (6h,  jiM-b,  etc.)  [zWr],  ji;6peB0,  a,  a  or  aep^Bbfl  (BbCBt) 

wild  beast  [d^ravA],  tree 

A'feBymKa,  h,  h  (cK-b)   [dsvuJkA],  me  [T^e],  for,  indeed,  often  suggests  an 

girl  {growing  up)  antithesis 


120  LESSON  XXXVIII  §145 

Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  ^-feByuiKH  CHAHTt  y  OKH^.     (2)  Ona  CH^-fejia  na  CT^Ji-fe  y  OKHa; 
OHa  c^Jia  Ha  cTyjit.     (3)  ^hcmtj  jibbh  h  Bcfe  jtpyrm  seepH  cnax'b 

B-B     Jl-fec^.       (4)    JIhC^     CTOHTI.     3a     ^THMT,     A^pCBOM'B.        (5)    AhCTH     H 

wypaBJiii  CTOflTi>  Ha  moct^.     (6)  Mh  B6Bce  ne  noHHMaeMt,  noqeM^ 

eH   KpacilBLIH   KapTHHLI  BHCHTt   Ha   CT-fenaXt   ^TOtt  TCMHOft   KOMHaTLI. 

(7)  Mbi  nojiaracM'B,  'ito  T-h  CBiiHbH  npHHaAJien^aT'b  G-feflHOMV  npecTbii- 
HHHy;  eM^  >Ke  npHnaflJiejKHT'L  ^Ta  S^Jian  jidmaab.  (8)  5th  4>paH- 
HyacKie  coji^aTbi  jiomaTCH  naacMb  (=Ha  seMJiio);  ohh  siemki-b  na 
MOKpoii  acMji^. 

B.  Write  Exercise  A  in  the  past  and  future,  as  far  as  the  sense 

admits  of  that.     Omit  sentence  (2). 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  He  asks  whose  picture  is  hanging  on  this  wall.  (2)  Our  old  dog  is 
not  sleeping.  (3)  She  told  me  that  the  lazy  girls  were  lying  in  bed.  (4)  They 
lie  down  on  the  bed.  (5)  They  lay  down  on  the  bed.  (6)  They  always  went 
to  bed  at  nine  o'clock.  (7)  Why  are  you  always  speaking  either  [hjih]  of  lions 
[O  with  prepositional]  and  other  wild  beasts  or  of  tame  animals  that  belong 
to  poor  peasants  ?  (8)  To  whom  does  this  black  pencil  belong  ?  (9)  I  never 
go  to  bed  at  night ;  I  sit  at  the  table  and  work  all  night,  and  then  I  sleep  till 
dinner.  (10)  That  is  why  they  went  upstairs  [naBepx-b].  (11)  On  whose 
chair  are  you  sitting  ?     (12)  She  always  sits  on  my  chair. 


LESSON  XXXVIII 

145.        Present  Tense  of  Type  II A  2  (Par.  139) 

Bli^'feTb,  to  see  cjniimaTb,  to  hear 

BHJKy  ^  [vi'su]  cjHiimy  [stiju] 

Bii^Hmb  [vidij],  etc.  cjibimnmb  [stijij],  etc. 

CTpoHTb,  to  build  HpaBHTbCfl,  to  be  pleasing 

cxpoK)  [stroju]  HpaBJiiocb  ^  [nrdvius] 

CTpoHmb  [stroij],  etc.  HpaBHmbCfl  [nraviJsA],  etc. 

CT6HTb,  to  cost  n6MHHTb  [pomnit],  to  remember 

ct6k)  [stoju]  noMHK)^  [pomiiu] 

CTOHmb  [stoij],  etc.  noMHHmb  [pomnij],  etc. 

^  Cf.  Par.  142  (1).  ^  Ji  inserted  after  6,  b,  m,  n  before  lo. 

^  Governs  the  genitive  or  takes  o  with  the  prepositional. 


§§146-148  LESSON  XXXVIII  121 

146.  Do  not  confuse  ctohtb  with  CTOHTb.  Note  the  difference 
in  accentuation. 

He  CTOHTt  [na  stoit],  It  is  not  worth  while. 

«noK6pHO  6jiaroaapib  Bacb.))  «He  CTOHT-b.))  [pAkornA  btAgAdArd 
(II A  1)  vas.  na  stoit],  '/  thank  you  very  sincerely  (lit.  devotedly)'  'Do  not 
mention  it.' 

Em^  ct6hti»  tojibko  naMt  noKasaTb  nacnopTi>  [jamii  stoit  to^ikA 
nam  pAkAza^t  pa  JpArt],  He  only  needs  {it  costs  him  only)  to  show  iis  his  -passport. 

147.  noMHHTb  is  often  used  reflexively  and  impersonally,  e.g. 

BaMt  noMHHTCfl,  MomtT-h-^hiTh  [vam  pomnitsA,  mosat-bit],  You 
remember,  perhaps. 

148.  Numerals  11-19 

OAHHHaTOaTb  [AduiAtsAt]  11 

^B-feHajiiuaTb  [dvandtsAt]  12 

TpHHamJtaxb  [trinatsAt]  13 

qe-n^ipHaALtaxb  [tJotirnAtsAt]  14 

EHTHaauaTb  [patnatsAt]  15 

mecTHaAiiaxb  [JastnatsAt]  16 

ceMHaaLtaxb  [samnatsAt]  17 

BOCCMHaai^aTb  [vAsamndtsAt]  18 

ji;eBflTH4AU[aTb  [davatnatsAt]  19 

These  numerals  mean  some  unit  added  on  to  ten,  anaxt  being 
contracted  from  necflXb. 

Except  11  and  14  all  have  the  accent  on  Ha. 

Carefully  observe  the  speUing,  e.g.  the  final  e  of  qexBipe  and 
the  b  of  nflXb  etc.  are  dropped. 


Vocabulary 

noM-fenxHKTb,  a,  h  [pAih6jtJik],  land-  ffyS-b,  a,  iJi  [dup],  oah 

owner  CTOJiOBaH    {fem.    adj.)    [stAtovAJa], 
pnc^HOK'b,    HKa,    HKH    [ristinAk],  dining-room 

sketch,  drawing  Miiimb,  H,  h  (eii)  [mij],  mouse 

ycaAbSa,  bi,  u.  (aed-b)   [usd^dbA],  SjiaroaapHTb    II A 1   [btAgAdArit], 

estate  to  thank 

cnaJibHfl,   H,    H    (en-b)    [spa^iriA],  noKopHbm     [pAkorni],    submissive, 

bedroom  humble 


122  LESSON  XXXIX  §149 

Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  B^AHxe  jiH  Bm  ^tot-b  rpoM^^Hbifi  aomx?  (2)  Ilojiardio,  ^to 
owb    npHHaajiejKJ^T-B    ^TOMy    noM-femnKy.      (3)  T-fe    KapxHHbi    HMt 

BdBCe      HCHpaBHTCH.        (4)    MH-fe      OHCHb      HpaBHTCH      ^Ta      MaJICHBKaH 

co6aKa.  (5)  Gb^hbh  ctoht'b  noAt  nyGoM-L.  (6)  Ckojibko  ctoht-b 
xa  ycaAB6a?  (7)  He  ctoht'l  n^^Maxb  oS-b  ^tomt,.  (8)  Mn-fe  noM- 
HHTCH,  HTO  BauiH  flpysBH  HHKorji;a  He  Shjih  y  Menji.  (9)  Owb 
MeHH  noKopno  Gjiaro^apHT-b,  ho  npaBO  He  ctohti,.  (10)  BoT-b 
noqeM^  M6fi  ji,Aji,fi  HOBbifi  capdft  CTpoHX-b.  (11)  Hcjibsh  cjibimaxb 
BT.  CTOJioBOH  ero  npojKamaro  rojioca.  (12)  H  HHKorjia  He  cjniiuiaji'b, 
HTO  OHa  er6  naniJi^  na  Jiyr^.  (13)  TpHnaAi^axb  MajibHHKOB-b  na 
yniiJiHmHOM'b  HBop'fe. 

B.  Write  Exercise  A  in  tlie  past  tense. 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  All  that  belongs  to  that  rich  old  man  that  used  to  live  in  the  village, 
(2)  He  said  he  never  heard  or  saw  anything.  (3)  Don't  you  remember  the 
old  wooden  table  that  used  to  stand  in  the  dining-room  ?  (4)  Yes,  I  remember 
it.  (5)  I  don't  at  all  understand  why  he  always  goes  to  bed  so  early.  (6) 
Surely  you  know  that  I  have  no  sketches  here.  (7)  How  many  bedrooms  are 
there  in  this  immense  house  ?  (8)  I  supposed  there  were  at  least  four  large 
bedrooms.  (9)  Then  I  think  the  house  is  costing  too  [cJinniKOM'b]  much. 
(10)  I  do  not  like  these  little  pictures.  (H)  ^  Fifteen  men,  nineteen  men, 
three  tall  men,  six  tall  men,  twenty-four  tall  men.  [Note  that  with  numerals 
the  genitive  plural  of  qeJiOB'feKTb  is  like  the  nominative  singular. 1  (12)  Eleven 
rich  merchants,  five  long  fingers,  three  grey  mice,  fourteen  lazy  pupils, 
four  old  teachers,  five  heavy  keys.  (13)  '  Thank  you ;  I  did  not  know 
about  that.'     '  Don't  mention  it.' 


LESSON  XXXIX 

149.     •  Present  Tense  op  Type  II A  3  (Par.  139) 
xoAHTb,^  to  go  KypHTb  [kurit],  to  smoke 

xojK^  [xASti]  Kypib  [kurii] 

xoAHUib  [xodij],  etc.  K^pHnib  [kiirij],  etc. 

dpofliiTb,^  to  wander  jiioShtb  [lubit],  to  love 

6po>Ky  [brA5u]  jik)6jii5  ^  [iubiu] 

6p6aHmb  [brodij],  etc.  jhoShuib  [iiibij],  etc. 

1  Read  Pars.  179,  180.  ^  Cf.  Par.  142  (1). 

2  n  inserted  after  b,  b,  m,  n  before  lo. 


§150  LESSON  XXXIX  123 

CMOTp^Tb,  to  look  at  AepjK^Tb  [darsait],  to  hold 

CMOTpib  [smAtrii]  «epjK^  [d^r^ii] 

CMOTpHUib  [sm6trij],  etc.  j;6p>KHmb  [d^rsij],  etc. 

CJiyjKHTb  [stu3it],  to  serve 
cjiyjK^  [stu5u] 
cji^jKHUib  [stu3ij],  etc. 

150.  Numerals  30-100 

TpiimxaTb  [tritsAt]  30  c^Mb^ecflTi,  [s^mdosat]  70 

cdpoK-b  [s6rAk]  40  BdceMb^ecflT'b  [v6s8md9sat]  80 

nflTbji;eciiT'B  [padasat]  60  neBHHOCTO  [davanostA]  90 

mecTbaecjiT'b  [Jasdasdt]  60  cto  [sto]  100 

Distinguish  these  numerals  carefully  from  the  -feew5.  Here  we 
are  dealing  with  multiples  :  *  5  tens,'  etc.  Notice  that  the  accent 
does  not  always  fall  on  the  corresponding  syllable.  Again  observe 
the  spelling  (b  or  !>) :  xpHHi^axb  alone  is  contracted,  and  the  Tb  in 
50-80  is  to  be  thought  of  as  the  genitive  plural  ending  of  ^eCflXb. 
The  form  for  ninety  has  never  been  properly  explained,  while 
cop 0Kb  is  the  middle  part  of  the  Greek  word  for  40  (recraapdKovTa). 

Vocabulary 

qHH6BHHK'B,  a,  H  [tjin6vnik],  official  Ho6poTa,  h  [dAbrAta],  goodness 

CTapocTa,    bi,    bi    (m.)    [starAstA],  B^mb,  h,  h  [v6JtJ],  things  affair 

village  elder  npaB^HBOCTb,  h  [prAvdivAst],  up- 
CTaKan-b,  a,  u  [stAkan],  glass  rightness 

CK^3Ka,  H,  H  [skaskA],  tale,  fairy-tale  jKHJibe,  h,  -h  [3iij6],  dwelling 

6acHfl,  H,  H  (enx)  [basnA],/a6Ze  Ha     npHM'fep'b    [ha     primer],    for 
CHrapa,  w,  bi  [sigarA],  cigar  example 

nannpoca,  bi,  bi  [pApirosA],  cigarette  CKp6MHbift  [skromni],  modest 

Tp^6Ka,  H,  H  (oK-b)  [triipkA],  pipe  cjiiimKOM'b  [siijkAm],  too  much,  too 

H  jik)6jii5  er6  3a  CKp6MH0CTb  (ace.)  [ja  iubiu  javo  za  skromnAst], 
I  like  him  for  his  modesty. 

CJiy>KHTb  tp^6kok)  {instr.)  [stu3it  trtipkAJu],  to  serve  as  a  pipe. 

yniiTb  (II  A  3)  Hanay'CTb  [utjit  nAizdst],  to  learn  by  heart. 

JIioSoBbH)  Mipii  a^pjKHTCfl  [lubovu  riiir  d6r3iLtsA],  TTie  world  is  maintained 
by  love. 

JH66poe  a-fejio  caMO  ce5ii  XBdJiHT-b  [dobrAJa  dstA  sAmo  saba  xvdiit], 
A  good  deed  needs  no  praise  {praises  itself). 

Tpyni)  KopMHTi.,  a  Ji'feHb  nopTHT-b  [trut  korihit  a  ie^n  portit],  By  labour 
we  live,  but  sloth  leads  to  ruin  {work  feeds,  sloth  spoils). 


124  LESSON  XL  §§  151-152 

Exercises 

A.  Translate : 

(I)    OSlIKHOBCHHO    Mbl    XOHMMT,    HOMOft    B-L    J^^BHTb    qac6B'L.        (2) 

CLiHOBbii  Kyni^a  SponflTt  no  ropoay.  (3)  ^tot-b  j^epeBiinnbift 
capaii  cji^JKHT-b  SojibnoMy  cxapHK^'^  HtHJibCM-b.  (4)  Oht,  K;^pHT'b 
rpiianyK)  Tpy6Ky;  cnrapbi  n  nannpocbi  ctohtt.  cjiiimKOM-b  MHoro. 

(5)  Mbi  jnbSHMTj  Bamnx-b  Hpys^ii  3a  hxtj  jio6poTf  h  npaBaiiBOCTb. 

(6)  Bjiaro«apib  Bacb  sa  KpacHByio  KHnry,  KOTopyio  Bbi  MH-fe  aajin. 

(7)  HejibSii  yanaxb,  qxo  on-b  aepjKHT-b  pyKoio  (B-b  pyK'fe).  (8)  5to 
np6>KAe  cjiyjKiijio  HBopnoMTj.  (9)  npnjiejKHbie  yqennKH  ;^qaT'b 
ypoKH  HaH3;^cTb.      (10)  GTapocTa   h  HeBHHOcxo   mecxb   KpecxbHH-b 

CXOflLX'b  nepe^-b  nOMOM'b  ^HHOBHHKa. 

B.  Substitute  past  and  future  for  the  present  tenses  in  Ex.  A. 

C.  Translate  into  Eussian  : 

(1)  Wild  animals  are  wandering  about  [no  with  dat]  the  forest.  (2)  It  is 
possible  to  find  out  [get  to  know']  all  that.  (3)  What  are  you  holding  in  your 
hand  ?  (4)  They  said  they  liked  the  Russian  fairy-tales,  but  that  the  fables 
were  not  so  pleasing  to  them.  (5)  I  thought  they  were  always  smoking  bad 
cigars.  (6)  What  are  you  looking  at  ?  [on  to  what,  etc.].  (7)  They  sent  us 
five  glasses  of  water  and  a  little  black  bread.  (8)  Fifty  cigarettes  are  not 
worth  two  roubles.  (9)  Why  could  he  not  show  me  the  new  books  he  had 
bought  ?  (10)  Do  you  learn  this  lesson  by  heart  ?  (11)  15  industrious  men, 
55  poor  men,  46  red  pencils,  87  stone  houses. 


LESSON  XL 

Genitive  Plural  op  Feminine  Nouns 

15L  Nouns  in  -a  have  the  genitive  plural  in  -i>,  e.g. 
KOMHaxa,  KOMHaxX)  [komuAt],  room. 
^  cA^^  152.  (1)  Nouns  in  -a  have  the  genitive  plural  in  -b,  e.g. 
I   **^  HHHH,  HHHb  [110^11],  child's  nuTse. 

(2)  Nouns  in  -h  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  b  take  h,  e.g. 
m6fl,  m6i4  [J6ja,  |6!],  neck, 

or  eft,  e.g. 

ccMbji,  ceMeii  [samja,  h^mkl],  family. 


§§  153-155  LESSON  XL  125 

153.  If  tlie  a  or  H  is  preceded  by  two  consonants  whicli  would 
be  diflS.cult  to  pronounce  when  final,  the  pronunciation  is  facilitated 
by  inserting  o  or  e  (when  accented  tliis  is  sometimes  e)  between 
those  two  consonants  in  the  genitive  plural,  e.g. 

cjiyjKaHKa,  cjiyjK^HOK'L  [stusdnAk],  servant. 
cecTpa,  cecTep'L  [89st6r],  sister. 
caSjifl,  ca6ejib  [sdblA,  sabei],  sahre. 

This  e  is  also  used  in  the  genitive  plural  to  replace  b  or  h,  e.g. 

Kon^iiKa,  KonecKT.  [kAp6IkA,  kAp^jak],  copeck. 
cnaJibHH,  cnaJiCHt  [spd^iiiA,  spdkn],  bedroom. 

Notice  in  this  last  example  T>  is  found  where  we  might  have 
expected  b. 

Note.  Nouns  in  b  were  discussed  in  Par.  136. 

154.  As  the  points  dealt  with  in  Pars.  152,  153  are  rather 
troublesome  to  remember,  the  genitive  plural  has  been  indicated  of 
all  feminine  nouns  not  accounted  for  by  Pars.  151  and  136. 

155.  NuMEKALS — '  hundreds  '  and  '  thousands.' 
aB'fecTH  [dv6sti]  200 
Tpncxa  (cxa  gen.  sing,  of  cxo)  [tfistA]  300 
HCTbipecTa  [tjatirastA]  400 
nflTbCOTt  {gen.  plur.  of  cxo)  [petsot]  500 
mecxbcox'b  {gen.  plur.  of  cxo)  [Jasts6t],  etc.  600 
xbicflqa  [tisetJA]  1000 
AB-fe  xi^iCHHH  {gen.  sing.)  [dvs  tisatji],  etc.  2000 
HHXb  Xbicflq-B  {geni  plur.)  [pat  tisatj],  etc.  5000 
MHJiJiioH-b,  a,  M  [liiiijon]  1,000,000 

VOCABULAEY 

qHCJio,^     a,     ^a     (ejn>)     [tjisto],  qacxb,  h,  h  (6ii)  [tjast],  part 

number,  date  OKpecxHOCXb,    H,    h    [AkrssnAst], 
MHomecxBO,^    a     [mn63astvA],     a  neighbourhood 

number,  many,  a  lot  r6HqiH  [gontji],  hunting 

HOJK-L,  a,  H  (6h)  [no J],  knife  MorfmVt  [mAgutJi],  powerful 

ACHbrH,    erx>   {fem.  plur.)    [d6^ngi,  BejiHKOJi'fenHbift       [vaiikAlspni], 


d6nak],  money 
KBapxHpa,  bi,  H  [kvArtiTA],  h^me,      ocxpbiH  [ostri],  sharp 

flat  xynoii  [tupoi],  blunt 

ca6jiH,  H,  H  (ejib)  [sdbiA],  sabre  Majibiii  [mdti],  small 

^  Governs  the  genitive.     Cf .  Par.  30. 


126                                    LESSON  XL  §155 

M^Jioe    qHCJi6,^    a,    —a    [matAJa  CK63ihKO '^  [skoAkA],  how  many,  hoio 

tjisto],  a  small  number  much 

M^H-fee  ^  [m6naJ8],  fewer  H^CKOJlbKO  ^    [nsskA^kAJ,    a    few, 

66ji'fee  ^  [bo^ioja],  mx)re  some 

MHoroHHCJieHHbift  [mnogAtjisioiii],  ctojilko  ^    [sto^ikA],    so    many,    so 

numerous  much 

MiiJiuii  [miti],  nice,  dear  6oJibmaH  ^acxb  ^  [bAilJdJA  tjast], 

H3o6pamaiomiH    {a  present  parti-  a  large  part 

ciple)  [izAbrA3djuJtJi],  depicting  Sojibman  ^acTb  ^  [b6^ij9Ja  tJast],  the 

MaJio  ^  [matA],  few,  little  larger  part,  the  majority 
HCMHoro  1  [namnogA],  few,  little 


Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)    MHOJKeCTBO      TymilXTb      HOJK^ft.         (2)    H'fecKOJIbKO      npi^THblXT. 

p-feK-b.  (3)  Mnoro  GojibniHX'b  ycafleSi*.  (4)  GTOJibKO  Kon^eK-b. 
(5)  Ha  cyxoii  seMJirl^.  (6)  CKOJibKO  neHer-b?  (7)  Bojibuiafl  qacTb 
S^nHbix-b  JKenmHH'b.  (8)  Men-fee  jibBOB-b  h  Coji-fee  BOJiKdE-b.  (9) 
MHoroqHCJieHHMH  c^MbH  p^ccKHX-b  KpecTb^Hi..  (10)  B-b  npiiixHoii 
0Kp6cTH0CTH  HaiuHXT,  ^epeBeHb.  (11)  GjinniKOM-b  MH6ro  MOKpoii 
xpaBbi.     (12)  HeMHoro    Soraxbix-b    noM'femHKOB'b.     (13)  Mhojkccxbo 

OCXpblXX,    CaSeJIb.       (14)    H-fecKOJIbKO    ^OM^UIHHX'b    JKHBOXHblX'b.       (15) 

Majioe  HHCJio  KpaciiBbix-b  KOMHax-b.  (16)  GxojibKO  KapxiiH-b  h30- 
SpajKaiomnx-b  MyjKqHH-b  h  M^JibqHKOB-b.  (17)  GjinniKOM'b  mhofo 
BejiHKOJi^HHbix'b  aoMOBT..  (18)  Y  noM'femHKa  o^eHb  MH6ro  roHqnx'b 
coSaK-b.     (19)  GxojibKO  Jincni^'b.     (20)  O  Mory^qeMx.  KHiiat  h  noqe- 

pHXlj    CKpOMHarO    KpeCXbHHHHa.       (21)    IlpOCXblfl    JKHJIbH    CKp6MHbIXX> 

jiioaeH.  (22)  Gx6jibK0  A^nerx,  h  xaK-b  MaJio  xji-feSa.  (23)  Mo  A 
MHJiaa  HHHH  H  cii  MHoroqiicjieHHbie  «py3bii.  (24)  KaJK^OMy  MaJib- 
qHKy  naJiH  6cxpbiH  ho}kx>.  (25)  B6ceMbji;ecHXx>  nnxb  qejiOBrfeK'b. 
(26)  GcMb  xbicflq-b  mecxbc6xT>  xpiinuaxb  aepcB^Hb. 

B.  Translate  into  Eussian  : 

For  the  young  Russian  ladies,  the  large  estate  of  my  old  aunts,  the  dirty 
windows  of  that  large  infirmary,  without  money  and  without  books,  out  of 
the  dark  rooms,  the  great  doors  of  those  splendid  houses,  at  their  nurses',  his 
sisters'  games,  the  necks  and  tails  of  the  black  cats,  the  white  paws  of  their 
dogs,  old  women's  tales,  each  of  [na-b]  them,  100  cigars,  777  idle  men,  11  small 
rooms,  16  young  boys,  2222  wooden  houses,  the  majority  of  your  new  pictures, 
the  too  numerous  friends  of  our  elder  sisters,  so  many  difficult  lessons,  how 
many  splendid  churches. 

1  Governs  the  genitive. 


§155  LESSON  XLI  127 

LESSON  XLI 

Revision — Present,  Past,  Future  Tense. 

Vocabulary 

jiK)663Htifl      [iubszm],      agreeable^      HHiepecHO    [interssiiA],    it    is    in- 
amiable  teresting 

XHxpbitt  [xitri],  cunning  mojkho  [m63nA],  it  is  possible 

xiiiUHLiii  [xfjni],  ravenous  HcaaBHO   [naddvnA],   not   long  agoy 

HM^Tb  I A  [im6^t],  to  possess,  to  own  recently 

npeanoHHTaTb   I A  [pratpAtjitd^t],      B-feab  [ve^t],  why,  surely 

to  prefer  ch  fl-feTCTBa  [sdststvA],/rom  childhood 

H3o6pa>KaTb    I A    [izAbrA3d^t],  to      ohh    (oH'fe)    snaKOMbi    [ahi    (ahs) 
depict  znAkomi],  they  are  known 

3a6iiTb  [zAbit],  to  forget  bo    BCiiKOM-b    cji^qa-fe    [vAfsakAm 

stiitjAJa],  in  any  case 

.    ^       ,  ,  Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

Mbi  p'femaeM'B,  ona  SyflCTT.  cujiiThf  ona  H^cjiajia,  h  6fjxy  sajKnraTb, 
OHT.  TpdracT-b,  on-b  cnaji-b,  h  cxoib,  mu  sajKHraeM-b,  Bbi  roBopHxe, 

OHH  CJI^^maiOT-b,  H  CTpOK),  OH-b  CTOHT-b,  OHT.  CTOilTl),  OH-b  BilAHTT., 
CHHT-b  JIH  OHa?  npHrOTOBJIfleTT.  JIH  OH-b?   5tO  HMTb  HCHpaBHJIOCb,   OHii 

xoAHT-b,  fl  jiepmf,  h  nojiaraio,  ohh  ^qaxcfl,  KypHxe  jih  Bbi?  h  ot- 
KpbiBaio,  Bbi  CH^HTC,  ona  bhchtt.,  OHii  S^jtyx-b  cnaxb,  a  Kypib 
nanHp6cy,  ona  saRpbiBaex-b,  a  chjk^  HOMa,  a  cnjiib,  ohh  cji^JKax-b, 
qxo  OH-b  nep^KHx-b  B-b  pyK'fe?  onii  dpoAHX-b,  OH'b  CMOxpHXi*,  mh 
jiejKHM'b,  H  6yay  cnaxb,  Bh  cjnJiuiHxe. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

He  was  reading,  he  is  reading,  he  was  lying,  she  is  lying  in  [na]  bed,  they 
will  stand,  it  will  cost,  I  saw,  I  see,  I  worked,  I  am  working,  it  cost,  it  costs, 
he  stood,  he  stands,  we  do  that,  we  used  to  do  it,  it  used  to  hang,  it  hangs,  we 
slept,  we  are  sleeping,  I  hear,  she  heard,  he  is  here,  he  was  here,  he  will  be  here, 
I  do  not  love  her  and  she  does  not  love  me,  I  was  smoking  yesterday,  I  do  not 
usually  smoke,  I  shall  not  smoke  to-morrow,  I  serve,  he  served,  he  serves, 
what  are  you  gazing  at  [na  with  ace]  ?  we  shall  conceal  it  from  her,  it  belonged 
to  him,  it  belongs  to  me. 

C.  Translate  : 

(1)  B-b    Hamefi    OKp^cxHOcxH    ecxb   o^i^hx,   5oraxbiii   h   Mor^qiK 

nOM^mHK'b.         (2)     OhX>      HM-feeXX)      MHOJKCCXBO      rOHHHXX.      C06aKX>      H 

JiomaA^H    BX>    CBO^ft    yca^bSife.      (3)  EMy    HpHHaAJie}KHXi>    h    [also]- 


128  LESSON  XLI  §165 

aTOT-B    rpoManHbiii,    eejiHKOJi'fenHbift    jjom-b,    KOTopuft    ctoht'l    npn 

CaMOM-B  B-b^SA-fe  B-b   Jl-feCb.      (4)   KOFAa   CHffHTT.  y  MCHH  B^b  cnajibHife, 

]a[jiH  CTOiix-b  y  OKHa  B-b  nep^aHett,  mojkho  BH^-feTb  ^TOT-b  asopei^'b 

BOSJI-fe  IXepKBH.      (5)    GkOJIBKO    CTOHT-b   TaKOe   JKHJIbe?      (6)   IIpaBO,  H 

He  3HaK).  (7)  Bo  BCHKOM-b  cji^naib  Bce  ;§to  MH-fe  ne  HHxepecHo,  h6o 
(xaK-b  KaKT,)  H  npejtnoHHTaio  CKpoMHbix'b  jnoaett  h  npocTbiH  B^mn. 
(8)  Ha  npHM-fepij,  a  nacxo  xojk;^  CMOxp^xb  na  i^xh  MHJibiH  homhkh, 
Koxopbie  Bbi  BHAHxe  aa  JiyroMii.  (9)  Mn-fe  npaBHXCH  ^xh  Kpacii- 
Bbifl   KapxM[Hbi,   KOXopbiH   BHoixx.   Ha   cx-feHax^   Bameii   KBapxnpbi. 

(10)  He^aBHo  JiK)663Hbiii  apyr-b  moh  nocjiaji-b  Moett  cecxpi  ORuf 
HS-b  CBOHX-b  KHHrX)  Ch  pHCy^HKaMH  H3o6pa>KaK)mHMH  cxapbiH  p;^CCKifl 
6acHH  H  cKasKH,  KoxopbiH  KamaoMy  hsx.  nacb  ch  ^-fexcxBa  snaKOMbi. 

(11)  B-fejtb  H  Bbi  caMH  He  3a6biJiH  «BojiK'b  h  Ancx-b*,  «JTHca  h 
>KypaBJib»,  «JIeB'b  h  Mbimb»,  «GBHHbH  hoaT)  jiy6oM'b»,  «JJ,B'h  Go6aKH». 

D.  Bonpocbi : 

(1)  FA'S  HOM'l^mHK'b?  KaKOB-b  ^xox-b  HejiOB'feK'b?  (2)  KaK^x-b 
coSaKTb  y  Hero  MHOJKecxBO?  Fa-fe  on-b  hxi.  jtepjKHx-b?  (3)  Tjifb 
HaxoAHXCfl  [finds  itself,  i.e.  is]  ero  hobmh  aoM-b?  KaKoii  y  Hero 
AOM-b?  (4)  OxKyna  mojkho  EHj^-fexb  ero?  (5)  Hxo  roBopHn^eMy 
[speaker']  ropasAO  Sojibine  npaEHXCH?  (6)  Ha  qxo  eM^  npiaxHO 
CMOxp^xb?  (7)  Ffl-fe  HaxoAHXCfl  KapxHHbi?  (8)  KaK^K)  KHiiry 
nojiyqiijia  [received]  neaaBHO  MaJieHbKan  a-feBOHKa?  Ox^  Koro? 
Hxo  HSoSpajKaiox-b  phc^hkh?  (9)  Snaexe  jih  Bbi  cb  n-fexcxBa 
H^CKOJibKO  Sacen-b  h  CKasoK-b?     Kanie,  na  npHMibp-b? 

E.  Write  Exercise  C  in  the  past  tense. 

F.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  A  lot  of  tame  animals,  of  horses,  cows,  sheep,  pigs,  dogs,  cats. 
(2)  How  many  wild  animals,  lions,  wolves,  bears,  'foxes  ?  (3)  Twenty- 
one   cranes  and   five  storks.     (4)  Four  oaks  and  many  other  large  trees. 

(5)  Twenty  old    books,   forty-one    new    books,   ninety-six    French    books. 

(6)  Five  thousand  six  hundred  and  forty-four  men. 

G.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  teacher  showed  the  younger  pupils  a  number  of  pretty  sketches 
and  pictures.  (2)  He  asks  them  what  those  pictures  represent.  (3)  In  theii 
opinion  they  all  represent  old  Russian  fables.  (4)  You  could  see  the  raven- 
ous wolf  lying  [say  how  the  wolf  lies,  or  break  the  construction  and  say 
simply  the  woK  lies]  under  the  tall  oak  in  the  forest  along  with  the  sick 
lion  and  the  sly  fox.  (5)  I  always  thought  that  there  were  a  great  many 
beautiful  trees  on  the  large  estate  of  the  rich  proprietor  who  owns  this  village. 
(6)  Surely  they  are  not  still  sitting  at  table  in  the  dining-room  ?  (7)  I 
suppose  they  are  smoking  cigars  after  dinner  ;  at  least  they  usually  do  that. 


§§156-157  LESSON  XLII  129 

(8)  In  any  case  there  are  a  lot  of  books  lying  on  the  table.  (9)  I  know  that 
she  is  still  lying  in  bed.  (10)  We  have  known  [pres.  tense]  these  tales  from 
childhood  ;  the  majority  of  [hs'l]  them  are  also  known  to  om:  friends.  (11) 
Next  year  we  shall,  perhaps,  be  in  France,  and  if  we  like  yom*  town  and 
its  environs,  we  shall  stay  there  till  Christmas.  (12)  Did  those  Englishmen 
understand  what  was  said?  (13)  I  am  told  that  it  was  two  of  his  sons 
who  saved  him  when  he  fell  into  the  river.  (14)  We  are  all  taught  in  the  old 
school. 


LESSON  XLII 
Present  Tense,  I A  (a) 

156.  In  Paragrapli  121  a  small  group  of  verbs  is  given  under 
I A  (a,  6,  c).     They  are  sometimes  treated  as  irregular  verbs. 

The  present  tense  of  these  verbs  has  a  stem  ending  in  a  consonant, 
in  -^  (preceding  -htb),  or  in  -b  (see  Par.  162). 

These  verbs  all  have  in  the  present  tense  the  endings  -y,^  -eniL, 
-ext,  -eMT>,  -exe,  -yxi,.! 

157.  I A  (a).     Terminations  accented  throughout : 

(1)  MKHTi*  [sit],  to  live  Be3TH[  [vostf],  to  be  actiially  carrying 

>KHB^  [Sivii]  in  a  vehicle,  to  convey 

jKHBeuib  [sivoj]  Be3^  [vazii] 

jKHBCT'b  [sivot]  Besenib  [v8z6J] 
MKHBCMt  [s'ivom]  etc. 

H^HBCTe  [s'ivotQ] 
JKHBCT'b  [sivtit] 

Similar  are  : 

(2)  TKaxb  2  [tka^t],  to  weave 

TKy,  TKemb  or  xnemb,  etc.  [tku,  tkoj  (tjoj)] 
TKyT-b  [tkut] 

(3)  npHCTb  [prast],  to  spin 

npHA^,  npaaenib,  etc.  [prAdii,  prAd6J] 

(4)  HecTH  [nasti],  to  carry,  to  be  actually  carrying 

uecf,  Hccemb,  etc.  [nasii,  nasoj] 
(6)  HTTH  [iti],  to  go,  to  be  actually  going 

ujif,  Haenib,  etc.  [idii,  idoj] 
(6)  cwhAihCH.  [smajd^tsA],  to  laugh 

CMibibcb,  CM'feembCfl  [smajiis,  sihajoJsA] 

^  Become  lo  and  ion.  after  vowels  or  i>. 

2  This  verb  might  also  have  been  given  under  Par.  163. 


130 


LESSON  XLII 


158-159 


(a)  The  participles  of  these  verbs  have  the  following  forms  : 

Adverbial  participle  present : 
H^HBfl,  Be3fl,  — ,  npHHH,  HCCH,  HUH  (ujiymi),  CMMCb. 

Adjectival  participle  present  active  : 
TKHBymiii,  Beaymiii,  TKymifi,  upnjiyuxim,  necymiii,  HAymiii, 
CM^feiomiiicfl. 

Adjectival  participle  present  passive  : 

— ,  BeSOMBlii,  — ,  npanOMBIH,  HeCOMBIH,  — ,  — . 

Adverbial  participle  past : 
JKHBUIH,       BeSUIH,       TKaBUIH,       npHHUIH,       HeciiiH,       mefluiH, 
CM'feflBUIHCB.  ^ 

Adjectival  participle  past  active  : 
jkhbiuIh,.  Besmift,    TKaBiuiii,    npanmifi,    Hecmiii,    mefliulH, 
CM'feHBmiiiCH. 

Adjectival  participle  past  passive  : 
(npo)>KHTBiH,  (no)Be3eHHbm,  TKanHLm,  npflaenHBifi,  HeceHHtm, 


(6)  Compare  Pars.  80  (b),  96  (a),  131  (a),  139  (6). 

158.  Note  that  changes  in  the  stem  of  these  verbs  are  frequent, 
and  that,  as  well  as  the  typical  ending  of  the  infinitive,  viz. 

vowel  +  Tb,  e.g.  ji;4jiaTb,  to  do, 
there  are  the  forms  ^  in 

consonant  +  Tb,  e.g.  npacTb,  to  spin, 

consonant  +  th,  e.g.  hccth  ^,  to  carry, 

vowel  +  Hb,         e.g.  MOHb  ^  [motj],  to  be  able,  can. 

159.  XOAHJIT*  and  meJi'b,  which  were  exactly  distinguished  in 
Par.  40,  are  the  past  tenses  of  the  verbs  xo^HTb,  to  go,  to  be  in  the 
way  of  going  (pres.  xoJKy),  and  htth,  to  go,  to  be  actually  going 
(pres.  Hay),  e.g. 

06hkhob6hho  h  xgh^^  no  B^nepaM-B  A0M6ii  [AbiknAvsiiA  ja  xA3ii 
pAv^tJerAm  dAmoi],  I  generally  go  home  of  an  evening. 

Kyna  OHT,  Tenepb  Haexi.?  [kudd  on  tape^r  idot],  Where  is  he  going  now  ? 
Gn-fer-B  HflCTt  *  [snek  idot],  It  is  snowing. 
J^OKflB  HAex-B  [dojt  idot].  It  is  raining. 

^  See  Par.  239.  ^  Infin.  of  Heci,,  carried.  '  Infin.  of  Mort,  C(mld. 

*  =n^Haen.  [padAJat]  cntn.,  Snow  is  falling. 


§§  160-161 


LESSON  XLII 


131 


160.  The  compounds  of  htth  (see  Par.  122, 1  a,  6,  c  noiiTH,  etc.), 
like  tlie  compounds  of  most  other  simple  verbs,  have  a  form  which 
looks  exactly  hke  a  present  tense,  but  is  really  an  immediate  future 
referring  to  one  definite  event  (see  Par.  204),  e.g. 

H  nofia^  ccHHacB  [ja  pAidd  satjds],  /  shall  go  at  once. 

Oh-b  BOHaeTt  H^peat  nacb  bi.  KOMHaxy  [on  vAldot  tJ6ras  tjas 
fkomnAtu],  He  will  enter  the  room  in  an  hour  (lit.  through  an  hour,  after  the 
lapse  of). 

Cer6HHfl  Mbi  npiiineM-b  (or  npHaeM-b)  kt>  BaMi.  b'b  Tpn  naca  [sevodnA 
mi  pridom  kvam  ftri  tJAsd],  To-day  loe  shall  come  to  you  at  3  o'clock. 

Similarly : 

npoHji;^  [piAidii],  /  shall  go  through,  traverse. 
BbifiAy  [viidu],  /  shall  go  cnit  (come  out). 
nepettji^  [pareldii],  /  shall  go  through  to  the  other  side. 
TifiVmif  [dAldii],  I  shall  reach,  go  up  to. 

161.  Past  tenses  of  verbs  in  Par.  157  : 

Beat,  Bcsjia,  bcsjio,  bcsjiA 

H^HJIt,  JKHJia,  JKHJIO,  JKlijIH 

TKajit,  TKajia,  tk^jio,  TKajiH 
npflji-b,  npfljia,  npflji6,  npnjiii 
HecL,  Hccjia,  Hecjio,  necjiH 
meJiT>,  mjia,  mjio,  mjiH 
CM-feiijicfl,  CM-feiijiacb,  etc. 

Vocabulary 


JiibAH,  6h[  ^  (m.  pi.)  [iudi],  people 

CH-fer-L,  a,  k  [snsk],  stww 

B'b  CH'fer^  [fsnegu],  in  the  snow 

AOJK«b,  A,  ±  [dojt],  rain 

yfeaai),  a,  bi  [ujsst],  canton,  district 

rySepnlH,  h,  h  (ifi)   [gub^rniJA], 

government     (corresponding    to 

province  or  department) 
H35a,  iJi,  — y,  — bi  [izbd],  peasant's 

house,  hut 
H'fejio,  a,  a  [detA],  act,  deed,  business, 

affair 
rojiOAHbift  [gAtodni],  hungry 
OHT)  aoJUKeHi.  n-fejiaTb  [on  dotsan 

dstAt],  he  is  under  an  obligation 

to  (he  must)  do 

^  instr.  plur.  -i,uvl.  ^  Cf . 


OHa  AOJiJKHa  [dAt3na],  she  must 
oho  jiojijkho  [dAt5n6],  it  must 
OHH  aojijkheJi  [dAtsni],  they  must 
Ha  ABop'fe  [nA  dvArs],  out  of  doors, 

Kt.  on  the  yard 
HST)  HOMy  2  [izdAmu],  out  of  the  house 
OKCAHeBHO  [J938dnsvn.v],  daily,  each 

day 
coBci^M'b  H'feT'b  [sAfssm  nst],  not  ai 

all 
VL^pesTi  {gov.  ace.)  [tj^fas],  through, 

across 
HaxojiiHTbCfl  [nAXAditsA],  to  find  it' 

self,  to  be 
yMHpaxb  I A  [uriiirait],  to  die 

oTTb^xdjioHy  {gen.  in  -y),  Voc.  XLIII. 


132  LESSON  XLH  §161 


Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  Ha  HBop-fe  HseT'B  AOJKAb.  (2)  He  SHdexe  jih  Bm,  npHH^T-L 
jiH  [whether]  xen^pt  ;^th  CTap;^XH?     (3)  GoBcfeMt  H'^t'l;  OH-fe  TKyT-B. 

(4)  Mm  nojiaraeMTb,  hto  H-feMeitKie  coji^aTbi  nepeuiJiH  q6pe3T>  pin^. 

(5)  Ond  yjKe  Hexiiipe  roaa  jKHBexi.  b-l  ^tomt.  ccji-fe,  ho  Hxt  aepeBHH 
HaxoAHTca  BT)  npyroMTb  yfeaa-fe.  (6)  ^TOTt  MajitHHK'B  ujxeTb  b-l 
lUKdjiy,  BOTt  uoneuf  owb  HeceT-B  KHiirH  h  TexpaHH.  (7)  Cer6j];HH 
OH-B  npifinexT.  noMoii  ii3i>  niKOJibi  bx,  xpn  qaca,  ho  oSbikhob^hho 
x6jibK0  Bb  HHXb  qacoB-b  npHXOflHX'b.  (8)  Oxqer6  Bamn  jipyshA 
Bcerna  CM-feibxca?     (9)  Mbi  aojiJKHbi  paSoxaxb  okcah^bho  jio  <'^H^HHa. 

(10)  rojioffHbifl  co6dKH  jiejK^XTi  B-b  cH-fer^.  (11)  Hhm  iisSbi  cxoaxb 
3a  p-feKoii?  (12)  HeyjK^JiH  5xh  MHoroHHCJiemibm  c6MbH  Bcife  jKHB^^xb 
Bb  offHOM-b  nepeBiiHHOMb  HOMnK-fe?  (13)  HejibaA  yanaxb,  nomjj.eT-h 
JIH  OHa  «o  5xoro  M^cxa.     (14)  J];66pbie  jho^h  yMHpaioxx>,  ho  A'feJia  hxx. 

JKHB^X-b. 

B.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  In  the  hut  the  old  peasant  woman  is  spinning  or  weaving,  but  her 
husband  is  always  working  out  of  doors  in  summer.  (2)  She  will  come  out 
of  the  house  after  dinner ;  she  will  go  through  the  garden  and  come  to  us. 
(3)  We  have  lived  in  this  town  for  [we  Uve  already]  two  years.  (4)  Our  town 
is  [say  finds  itself]  in  one  of  the  large  governments  of  Russia.  (5)  Surely  you 
have  not  lived  here  for  two  years  ?  (6)  I  am  going  home  now.  (7)  I  go 
home  every  day  at  six  o'clock.  (8)  To-day  I'll  go  home  at  seven.  (9)  They 
went  along  the  street  this  morning.     (10)  We  must  carry  the  little  boy. 

(11)  She  is  not  to  go  out  of  the  house.  (12)  What  are  we  to  do  ?  Do  you 
know  that  it  is  snowing  ?  (13)  He  did  not  carry  it.  (14)  I  suppose  she  is 
spinning  ;  she  does  not  know  how  to  weave.  (15)  In  this  government  there 
are  [find  themselves]  seven  districts,  forty-six  towns,  two  hundred  villages, 
and  one  million  two  hundred  and  seventy  thousand  people.  (16)  Did  she 
get  to  know  that  ?  (17)  Not  at  all ;  she  never  reached  the  house  where  her 
friends  were  living  at  that  time.  (18)  I  did  not  know  whether  she  came  here 
yesterday.  (19)  They  continued  to  laugh,  because  they  did  not  understand 
what  the  old  teacher  was  [is]  saying  to  them. 


§§162-166  LESSON  XLIII  133 

LESSON  XLIII 

Present  Tense,  I A  (b)  (Par.  121),  Monosyllabic  Words 

162.  Initial  consonant  soft  tkrougliout : 

nHTb  [pit],  to  drink 

nbK)  [pju] 

nbenib  [pjoj] 

nbCTt  [pjot] 

nbCM'b  [pjom] 

nbCTe  [pj6t9] 

nbH)Ti>  [pjut] 
Similar  are : 

jiHTb  [lit],  to  pour 
BHTb  [vit],  to  windf  twine 
niHTb  [Jit],  to  sew 
6wTh  [bit],  to  beat 

163.  Some  other  monosyllabic  verbs,  often  called  irregular  : 

3KaTb  [3a H],  to  reap  jK^axb  [sda^t],  to  wait 

muy  [3nu]  mny  [sdu] 

JKHenib  [snoj],  etc.  mjieuih  [sdoj],  etc. 

H^aTb  [sa^t],  to  press  TKaTb 

TKmy  [smu]  (see  Par.  157) 

>KMemb  [siiioj],  etc. 
The  3rd  plural  forms  are  JKHyTi,  JKiviyx-b,  wnyTt,  TKyTl>. 

164.  Past  Tenses 

HHTb,  BHTB,  JIHTB,  MK^aTB,  TKaTB  bave  the  accent  on  tbe 
feminine  ending ;  all  tbe  otber  past  tense  forms  of  verbs  in  Pars. 
162,  163  have  tbe  accent  on  tbe  stem. 

165.  Distinguisb  hhtb  from  ni^TB,  noio,  euiB,  etc.,  n-fejiB,  nijia 
[pe^t^  pAJU;  pAJoJ — pet^  PstA],  to  sing. 

166.  Ordinal  numbers  are,  as  a  general  rule,  formed  from 
tbe  cardinals  by  giving  tbem  tbe  termination  Biii,  aa,  oe.  Just 
as  in  Engbsb,  among  tbe  first  few  ordinals  tbere  are  some  exceptional 
forms : 

n^pBbifi  [psrvi]        1st 
BTop6tt  [ftAr6I]         2nd 


134  LESSON  XLIII  §167 

xp^Tift  (hH,  be)  [tr6ti  (tj9,  tj9)]     3rd 

qcTBepTbift  [tj9tv6rti]  4th 

uAtuPl  [pati]  5th 

mecT6ft  [Jastoi]  6th 

cefli.M6fi  [sadmoi]  7th 

B0CbM6ft  [vAsmoI]  8th 

ACBiiTbitt  [davati]  9th 

neoiTHii  [dasati]  10th 

OAiiHHa«i;aTLiti  [AdinAtsAti]  11th 

and  so  on  up  to  IQtli,  the  accentuation  being  the  same  as  in  the 
cardinals. 

167.  These  words  are  decHned  Hke  any  regular  adjective  of 
corresponding  form. 

In  TpeTift  the  stem  is  everywhere,  except  in  the  nominative 
masculine,  Tpext-.  The  genitive  singular  is  xpeTbHro,  xpexbeH, 
xpexbflro  ;  otherwise  the  declension  is  that  of  qeft,  hlh,  etc.  (Par. 
106): 

Tp^TbHro  HHH  [tr6tJ8VA  dna],  tTie  day  before  yesterday. 

The  nominative  plural  is  xpextH  [ti-etji]  for  all  genders. 

Vocabulary 

qdft,  fl,  H  [tjai],  tea  bhh6,  4,  -^a  [vino],  wine 

pyqeii,  hA,  b6  [rutj^l],  brook,  stream  nJiaTbe,  h,  h  [ptdtja],  dress,  clothes 

q^uiKa,  H,  H  (cKt)  [tJdJkA],  cup  thxo  [tixA],  low,  softly 

q^mKa  naio  ^  [tJaJkA  tjdju],  a  cup  rpoMKO  [gromkA],  loudly,  alcmd 

of  tea  aojiro  [dotgA],  hng  {of  time) 

pyS^uiKa,   H,   H   (cK-b)  [rabajkA],  e^Ba  [jodva],  hardly 

shirt  HCCMOTpii   na  t6,  qxc   [nasmAtra 
nxAqKa,  h,  h  (ckT))  [ptftjkA],  little  nAt6,jt6],  not  looking  onto,  i.e.  in 

bird  spite  of,  the  fact  that 

BcpcBKa,    H,    H    (oK'b)    [varofkA],  noJiHBaxb  I A  [pAiiva^t],  to  liJa^er 

rope,  line  JiHXb     pyqbeMX.     (pyqbHMH)    [lit 
cjies^,  ii,  -bi  [siazd],  tear  nitjjom    (rutjjdriii)]    or    JiHXb 

He^-fejiH,  H,  H  (b)  [nad^lA],  week  KSLK^b  HS-b  BC^pa  [lit  kak  iz 

n'fecHH,  H,  H  (ewh)  [p6snA],  song  vadrd],  to  pour  in  torrents 

CHpoxcxBO,  a[sir6tstvA],  orp^w^oo^  jK^xbCH  ox-b  x6jiOAy  ^  [3a^tsA    At 
rHibaad,   A,  -a   [giiazdo,   gnozdA],  xotAdu],  to  shrink  together  with 

nest  cold,  to  be  pinched  with  cold. 

u&BO,  a,  d  [pfvA],  beer 

1  Cf.  Voc.  XXVII.  2  cf.  rial  HOMY  in  Voc.  XLII. 


§167  LESSON  XLIII  135 


Exercises 

A.  Translate : 

(1)  Bt  KOT6poMi>  qac;^  Bh  nbexe  ejKenH^BHo  H^ii?  (2)  Cer6AHfl 
HCJibSii  BiJiHTH  lisT*  AOMy,  noTOM^  HTO  Hexopomafl  noro^a.  (3) 
Hauia  MHJiaH,  TpyAOJiioSiiBaH  Maxb  mbeT-B  njiaxbH  ajih  MJiaarnHX-b 
H0Hep6ft  H  py6amKH  ^jih  cbiHoe^ft.  (4)  Bqepa  JHOTK^b  jikjit,  py^bjiMH; 
HecMOTpfl[  Ha  5x0,  CTapaa  cjiyat^HKa  nojiHeaeT'b  mokphh  ym^  cslkl. 
(5)  ^aBHiJiM'b-fl;aBH6  Bcife  KpecTbiiHe  Bt  ^xoii  ^ep^BH'fe  n^Jin  n'fecHH, 
HO  ym^naBHo  66jibme  saifecb  He  noibx-b.  (6)  Tp^xbHro  ahh  OH'b  BHJi-b 
BepeBKH.      (7)  He  BHSHxe  jih   Bm,   KaK-b   hxhhkh   Bbiox-b  rH^SAa? 

(8)  H   xox-fejix.   ysHaxb,  noHeM^  Bamx.  chhi.  6bexx>  CBOib  co6aKy. 

(9)  Ona  xaKi>  x6xo  noexx>,  hxo  h  e^Ba  cjnJimy.  (10)  Il^pBbm  aenb 
Heit-fejiH — BOCKpec^Hbe,  a  Bxop6ii — noHerfjibHHKi..  (11)  Ten6pb 
ce^bMaH  Hen'fejiH  rbaa.  (12)  Xopomo,  wto  xen^pb  xenjian  noro^a; 
npiflXHO  pa66xaxb  na  SBop'fe.  (13)  B'fecHoio  noc^HSiu,^  a  oceHbio 
jKHyxx>.     (14)  Majib^HKH  jKMyxcH  oxx>  x6jioAy.     (16)  Bx.  cnpdxcxB'fe 

>KHXb CJieSbl  JIHXb. 


B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Every  day  at  five  o'clock  most  ladies  drink  a  cup  of  tea ;  their  little 
daughters  drink  a  glass  of  milk.  (2)  It  is  well  that  she  can  [knows  how  to] 
sew.  (3)  I  used  to  see  her  sewing  [how  she  sews]  at  the  window.  (4)  It  is 
pouring  in  torrents  to-day,  and  all  the  little  birds  are  sitting  in  their  nests, 
huddled  together  [and  they  press  themselves]  with  cold.  (5)  Our  friends 
did  not  sow  in  spring  and  they  will  not  reap  in  autumn.  (6)  When  does  that 
bird  build  [wind,  weave]  its  nest  ?  (7)  In  spite  of  the  bad  weather  we  go  to 
school  each  day,  but  to-day,  perhaps,  we  shall  not  go  to  school.  (8)  How 
many  cups  of  tea  do  you  drink  ?  (9)  The  industrious  peasants  must  make 
[wind]  ropes  in  the  evenings,  when  it  is  impossible  to  work  out  of  doors.  (10) 
A  lot  of  large  birds  are  building  their  nests  in  the  wood.  (11)  I  thought  that 
they  usually  reaped  the  harvest  with  a  scythe  or  a  sickle.  (12)  They  have 
lived  for  fifty  years  ^  in  our  government.  (13)  Why  were  they  speaking  of  the 
sixth  day  of  the  week  ?  (14)  When  I  passed  her,  there  she  was  pouring  [pours] 
the  water  on  the  garden  in  front  of  our  door.  (15)  Ten  men  came  through  the 
second  field.  (16)  Five  easy  books,  eighty- two  white  horses,  four  deep  streams, 
six  long  years. 2     (17)  He  never  drinks  wine  or  beer. 

^  the  sowing  was  done. 

*  Genitive  plural  with  numerals  after  qexiipe  is  JitrB  from  Ji-fexo. 


136  LESSON  XLIV  §§  168-169 

LESSON  XLIV 

168.  Present  Tense,  IA(c)  (Par.  121) 

Termination  accented  only  in  1st  singular  or  not  at  all. 

(1)  nnc^Tb  [pisait],  to  write 

nnm^  [piju] 
nHUieniB  [pijaj] 
nHincT'L  [pijet] 
nAm^Wh  [pijam] 
niimeTe  [pijata] 
nnmyT'L  [pijut] 

Similar  to  nHcaxt  are : 

(2)  BHsaxb  [veza^t],  to  knit 

BflJKy,  Bi^H^emb  [v93u,  vasaj],  etc. 

(3)  njiaKaxb  [ptakAt],  to  weep 

njiaqy,  njianeuib  [ptatju,  ptdtjaj],  etc. 

(4)  HCKaxb  [iskd^t],  to  seek  (governs  gen.  or  ace.) 

vmxf,  Hmemb  [ijtjii,  ijtjej],  etc. 

(5)  ^xaxb  ^  [jsxAt],  to  drive  in  a  vehicle,  ride,  go 

-feay,  ijtenib  [jedu,  jsdaj],  etc. 

(6)  naxaxb  [pAxa^t],  to  plough 

nam^,  namemb  [paJu,  pdjaj],  etc. 

(7)  MO^b  [motj],  to  he  able,  can 

uovf,  MbjKenib,  etc.,  Moryxt  [mAgu,  111659 j — m6gat] 

(a)  Verbs  in  -"feflXb,  like  cfenxB,  to  sow,  have  the  same  endings  : 
ctio,  ctenib  [seju,  sejaj],  etc.,  K)  replacing  y  after  the  vowel. 

169.  Notice  in  these  verbs  the  changes  in  the  form  of  the  stem  : 

(1)  Verbs  in  -caib,  e.g.  nHcaib,  change  c  into  m  in  the  present 
tense. 

(2)  Verbs  in  -3HTI>  and  -saxb,  e.g.  Bflsaxb,  change  3  into  m. 

(3)  Verbs  in  -xaxb  and  -Kaxb,  e.g.  njiaKaxb,  change  x  or  k 
into  H. 

(4)  Verbs  in  -cxaxb  and  -CKaxb,  e.g.  HCKaxb,  change  ex  or  CK 
into  m. 

(7)  Verbs  in  -Hb,  e.g.  MOHb,  change  q  in  the  1st  singular  and  3rd 

plural  into  r  or  K,  in  the  other  forms  of  the  present  tense  into  jk  or  q. 

^  The  important  distinction  between  this  verb  and  htt6  was  pointed  out  in 
Par.  97. 


§170-171  LESSON  XLIV  137 

170.  Past  Tense  of  verbs  in  Par.  168  : 

(1)  nHcajn>,  nncajia,  ajio,  ajiH  (2,  4,  6  similar). 
(3)  njiaKajiTj,  njiaKajia  (5  similar).    In  fact  all  these  verbs 
preserve  in  the  past  tense  the  accent  of  the  infinitive. 
(7)  Mor-b,  Morjia,  Morjio,  mofjih. 

171.  Ordinal  Numerals — tens,  hundreds. 
ABajxnaTLiii  [dvAtsati]  20th 
ABaanaxb  n6pBHii  [dvdtsAt  p^rvi]  21st 
ne^AUaTL  BTop6ii  [dvdtsAt  ftAr6i]         22nd 

and  so  on  to  29th. 

TpnanaTMft  [tritsati]  30th 

COpOKOBOft  [SATAkAVOl]  40th 

nflTHjteciiTbifl  [p9tid9sati]  60th 

mecTH«ecflTBiti  [Jastidesati]  60th 

ceMHaecjiTMH  [saihidesati]  70th 

BOCbMHAecHTBiii  [vAsihidasdti]  80th 

aeBHH6cTLiii  [davanosti]  90th 

c6Ti.m  [soti]  100th 
CTO  c6poKi>  HjiTbift  [sto  sorAk  pati]     146th 

Notice  in  the  last  example  that,  as  in  Enghsh,  only  the  last 
element  has  the  form  of  an  ordinal. 

Vocabulary 

M'fecfln'b,  a,  Bi  (eB-b)  [ih^sats],  month  taaxb  3a  rpanAny  [za  grAnitsu],  to 
liHCbMO,  a,  —a  (cMT*)  [pismo],  letter  go  abroad,  i.e.  beyond  the  frontier 

^lyjiOK-b,  JiK^,  JiKli  (oK-b)  [tJuMk],  dHTb  3a  rpaHnneio  [grAiiitsaju],  to 

stocking  be  abroad 

npyr'b  np^ra    [druk  drtigA],   each  BcpKbHi}  [varxom],  on  horseback  (Kt. 

other  as  the  top,  the  upper  part) 

flpyr'b  Ap^ry  [druk  driigu],  to  each  rfexaxb  BepxoM-b  [varxom],  to  ride,  to 

other  be  riding 

rpaniina,  h,  h  [giAnltsA],  frontiery  xoAHXb  n-femKOM-b  [xAdit  pajkdm], 

boundary  to  go  on  foot 

TiopbM^,    li,    -^H    (cMb)    [turma],  Haflxii  [iiAlti],  to  find 

prison  BaaA'b  h  Bnepefl-b  [vzatifpardt],  back- 
wards and  forwards,  to  and  fro 

Hxo  Bbi  xaKX)  nocxyn^exe?  [Jto  vi  tak  pAstupd  jata].  Why  do  you  act  so  ? 
(Hxo?  =  Oxqer6?)  ./ 

P^SB-fe  OH-b  iSxo  cn^Jiaji-b?  [rdzva  on  stA  sd^tAt],  Perhaps  he  did  that?     V 


138  LESSON  XLIV  §171 

Did  he  do  that  ?  equivalent  to  M6>KeT'B-6HTb,  OHi.  5to  crfjiaJi-L,  or  simply 

Ga^JiaJI-b  JIH  OHTb  ^TO? 

Oh-l  He  xoT'feji'b  (}Keji^jn>)  OTB-fenaTb,  na  h  T6jibK0  [on  na  xAt^t  (satat) 
Atvatja^t,  da  i  t64kA],  He  did  not  wish  to  answer,  and  that  is  ally  that  is  the 
end  of  it. 

He  bcAkiVl  xjifeSi.  n^meTi.,  aa  BcAviVi  er6,'fecT'b  [na  fsaki  xisp 
pajat,  dA  fsaki  J9v6  jest],  Not  everyone  grows  {ploughs)  corn,  but  everyone 
eats  it. 

JJ,vltA  njianeTb,  y  Maxepn  c^parte  SojniTt^  [ditd  ptatjot,  u  mdtari 
s6rtso  bAlit],  The  child  cries,  the  mother's  heart  is  sore,  i.e.  wh£n  the  child 
cries,  etc.,  etc. 


Exercises 


A.  Translate : 


(1)  PasBife  OHi.  HHKorad  He  niimeT'L?  (2)  H  noKopno  6jiaro- 
«api5  ji;65pyK)  cxap^xy,  KOTdpan  MH-fe  BHrneTb  nyjiKH,  ho  ona  Bce 
roBopiiT'b:  ne  cxdHTb.  (3)  Kb  comaji^Hiio  OHb  Bb  HacTonmee 
Bp^MH  'fe^eT'b  3a  rpaHiii^y;  nejiba^  cnpociiTb  ero.  (4)  Kte>  cqacxiio 
OH-b  ym€  AOJiro  jKHBeTb  3a  rpaHiii;eK).  (5)  PasB-fe  Bbi  ne  3HaeTe, 
HOHeM^  A-feBOHKa  njianexb?  (6)  Mnife  CKasaJiH,  hto  jnoHKa  T'fex'b 
Sfenbixb  Jiiojt^ii  yjK6  A6jiro  limexb  MaTb,  ho  ne  MoiKexb  HattxA  en. 
(7)  Hxo  OHH  ^myxb  cBoero  oxua?  (8)  H  ne  mejiaio  5xoro  CKa3axb, 
aa  H  xojibKO.  (9)  Mn-fe  homhhxch,  hxo  moh  cecxpbi  npittn^xb  cioji;^ 
cero^HH.  (10)  Hxo  OH-fe  Bce  x6ji;HXb  B3a^b  h  Bnepefl-b?  (11) 
H-fecKOJibKO  Jiioa^ii  nojiaraioxb,  qxo  ym€  oxBesji^  Bauiero  apyra  bi. 
TiopbM;^.    (12)  H  He  Mor^  BaMi  noKasaxb  naiunxb  HOBMXb  KapxHHb. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Perhaps  you  did  not  know  for  whom  the  countr3rwoman  was  knitting 
stockings.  (2)  What  sort  of  stockings  does  she  knit  ?  (3)  I  think  she  does 
not  knit  stockings  at  all.  (4)  They  write  letters  to  each  other.  (5)  They  are 
riding  to-day  in  the  forest.  (6)  I  usually  go  to  the  town  on  foot.  (7)  I 
cannot  send  them  all ;  neither  can  they  [they  also  cannot  do  it].  (8)  Why 
are  they  weeping  ?  (9)  Whose  letters  was  she  carrying  ?  (10)  What  are  you 
writing  about  and  to  whom  ?  (11)  Surely  you  have  known  that  for  long  ? 
(12)  They  told  me  he  was  walking  to  and  fro  in  the  garden.  (13)  He  is  at 
the  present  moment  riding  along  the  street.  (14)  Why  can  they  not  relate 
that  story  to  you  ?  (15)  I  suppose  they  do  not  wish  to,  that  is  all.  (16) 
The  25th  day  of  this  month  is  Sunday.  (17)  I  was  talking  of  the  37th  week 
of  the  year.     (18)  A  great  many,  too  many,  wealthy  Russians  live  abroad. 

1  With  a  personal  subject  this  verb  Soji-ixi.  belongs  to  I  A, 


§§172-174  LESSON  XLV  139 

LESSON  XLV 
Genitive  Plural  of  Neuter  Nouns 

172.  Nouns  in  -o  have  genitive  plural  in  -t,  e.g. 

Ji'feTO,  Ji'fex'B  [istA,  let],  yeaff  summer. 

As  was  explained  in  Par.  153  it  is  often  necessary  to  insert  o 

or  e,  e.g. 

okh6,  6kohi»  [Akno,  6kAn],  window. 
Kp6cJio,  Kp^ceji-B  [kr^stA,  kf^set],  arm-chair. 

173.  Nouns  in  -e  preceded  by  a  consonant  have  -eft,  e.g. 

M6pe,  Mop6ft  [more,  mAr6i],  sea. 
Nouns  in  -ie  take  -ift,  e.g. 

ajii^Hie,  BAaHiii  [zddnja,  zdani],  building. 

174.  The  genitive  plural  of  aU  neuter  nouns  is  either  indicated 
in  the  vocabulary  or  accounted  for  in  Par.  172. 

Vocabulary 

HSB'ifecTHbifi      [izvss(t)ni],      certain,      yibTHBifi  [ujutni],  comfortable,  cosy 

Tmown,  well-known  BBicoTa,  ii,  bbic6ti^i  [visAtd],  height 

HaJieKift  [dAi6ki],  distant 

Exercise 
on  the  Declension  of  Nouns  of  all  Genders 
Translate  : 

The  colour  of  the  blue  seas,  how  many  distant  places,  a  lot  of  wooden 
arm-chairs,  the  height  of  those  tall  buildings,  a  few  pretty  villages,  for  the 
splendid  houses,  towards  the  angry  men,  in  a  certain  place,  to  [into]  a  remote 
village,  of  the  simple  pictures,  from  [OT^]  other  friends,  from  [cl]  the  long 
tables,  from  [nsi.]  a  distant  government,  a  few  difficult  things,  a  number  of 
'large  pails  of  [with]  water,  too  little  good  rye,  about  the  bad  weather,  he 
does  not  know  these  enormous  buildings,  he  does  not  know  these  rich  land- 
owners, of  your  gold  rings,  so  many  pleasant  rooms,  about  [o  or  npo]  the 
large  estates,  in  a  numerous  family,  the  larger  part  of  the  dark  forest,  the 
majority  of  the  Russian  peasants,  in  my  cosy  bed-room,  in  their  splendid 
dining-room,  on  to  the  green  meadow,  in  front  of  their  new  red  house,  the 
angry  lion's  tail,  in  that  beautiful  neighbourhood,  on  the  blue  walls,  under 
the  wooden  chairs;  6  brothers,^  13  wooden  chairs,^  8  sons,^  18  friends,^ 
31  chairs,  86  years,  804  people. 

1  See  Par.  77  (9). 


140 


LESSON  XLVI 


§174 


LESSON  XLVI 


Revision 
toXLV. 


Verbs  of  all  the  types  discussed  in  Lessons  XXXII 


Vocabulary 


n^aymKa,^  h,  h  (cKt)  [deduJkA], 

grandfather 
6aTK)mKa  ^  [batujkA],  father 
MaxyiUKa  ^  [matuJkA],  mother 
can6n>,  4,  ti  (-l)  [sAp6k],  booty  foot- 
gear 
K6jKa,  H,  H  [k65A],  leather 
noc^Aa,  H  {sing,  collective)  [pAstidA], 

vessels,  utensils 
M66ejib,  H  [rh^h^i],  furniture 
MCT^Jib,  H,  H  [m9t6^i],  snow-storm 
n^qb,  H,  H  (ett)  [p6^tj],  stove 
npoBa,     %     {neut,    plur.)    [drAva], 

wood  fuel 
H'^TH  {an  irregular  neuter  noun,  Par. 

229)  [d6ti],  children 
B3p6cjibiii  [vzrosti],  grown  up 
Apyr-L  CL  Hp^roMt  [druk  sdrdgAm], 

with  on£.  another 
^TO    npocTO   [stA   pr6stA],    that  is 

simple 
^TO  yibTHO  [stA  ujiitnA],  that  is  cosy 


6biBaTb  I A  [bivd^t],  to  be  usually  the 
case,  to  be  customary,  to  happen 

saHHMaxbCfl  I A  [zAnimd^tsA],  to 
busy  oneself,  to  be  engaged 

TCMH-feTb  I  A  [tamn^^t],  to  grow 
dark 

paacKasbiBaxb  I A  [rAsskdzivAt], 
to  be  relating  {stories) 

noHHHjiTb  I A  [pAtJind^t],  to  re- 
pair 

ToniiTb  (jiib,  6nHmb)  [tApit],  to 
heat 

BaxonjiflTb  I A  [zAtApld^t],  to  heat, 
make  up  fire 

npOBOAHTb    (>K^,    OAHUIb)    [piAVA- 

dit],  to  spend  {time) 
poBHO  [roviiA],  exactly 
OAH^KOKT.  [AdndkAj],  however 
HTTii  cnaxb  [iti  spa^t],  to  go  to  bed 
np^JK^e  Bcero  [pr^sda  fsavo],  before 

all,  i.e.  first  of  all 
OHa  XOHCXX.  (Par.  222),  she  wishes 


Exercises 

A.  Paying  attention  to  the  accentuation  of  each  word,  read  aloud 
and  translate  the  following  verb  forms  : 
OHH  xodujiu,  OHa  HCCJia,  mh  npsuiu,  bh  n^exe,  xbi  ^Mcueemh,  oH-fe 
ruiaHymh,  h  npuHadjieotcy ,  ohh  BomjiH,  ona  ebemh,  Bbi  jkhbcxc,  h 
cjiyoicy,  OHT)  depofcumh,  h  xomy,  Bbi  MO>Kexe,  mh  Sy^eM-b  cudrhmb, 
ynumecb,  eudmnib,  cmounvb  {two  words),  cmoumb,  cmoRirib,  cmpoumh, 
npHACxTb,  MorjiH,  nucajia,  ona  mKertih,  mm  neceM'b,  bh  omKphieaeme, 
ona  npnuijia,  h  CMompw,  lubjomh,  cmeim,  cmapacMCH,  npuzomoe/isiemh, 
/iiodumb,  jiwdumb,  h  cnmy,  ohh  cAbiuiamb, 

^  Diminutives  in  frequent  use  instead  of  the  more  formal  H'feH'B,  oT^n-b,  MaTb. 


§174  LESSON  XLVI  141 

B.  Give  tlie  infinitive  and  the  1st  singular,  2nd  singular,  3rd  plural 

of  the  past,  present,  future  tenses  of  the  verbs  printed  in 
italics  in  Ex.  A. 

C.  Translate  : 

(1)    Mh  JKHBCMt  B-L  M^JICHLKOtt  HSS-fe  BT*  yfes^-fe  BCkMli  HSB-fecTHOfi 

jiajicKoii  ry66pHiH.  (2)  SnMott  oqenb  ^acTO  y  nact  SbiBaeT-b  nypnafl 
noroAa.  (3)  IIo^TOMy  mm  HHor«a  He  MOH^eM-B  ryjiaxb  bt.  Ji-fec^ 
[or  no  Ji-fecy].  (4)  Gero^HH  cn-fer-b  HACT'b.  (5)  Ha  jiBop^  cepaHxafl 
MCT^jib  H  HCJibSfl  BbiiiTH  ik3T>  ffOMy.  (6)  Mofl  MJiaflmaH  cecTp^ 
njiancT-b  h  xoqex'b  snaxb,  qxo  naiM-b  A'fejiaTb  h  o  ^ewh  roBopHXb. 
(7)  Oah^kojkx.  Bce  5xo  dneuh  npocxo.  (8)  TaK-b  KaKX.  yjKe  pano 
xeMHibexx>,  3a>KHr^K)xx>  jiaMny  bx>  xpn  ^aca.  (9)  Ho  np^JK^e  Bcer6 
Mbi  3axonjiiieMX>  ne^b;  ne^b  x6nflxx>  (HpoBaMH).  (10)  M^jiCHbKifl 
A-fexH,  KOxopbiH  He  «oji>KHi»i  pa66xaxb,  y>Ke  c^jih  na  cxyjibH  Bosji-fe 

HCH.     *(11)    OhH  HHXaK)Xl>   KHiirH,  Hrpdl0XX>   Ap^rX>    CX>    npyTOMT>,   HJIH 

pa3CKa3biBaK)xx>  j;pyrx>  ap^ry  CKa3KH  h  6^chh.  (12)  B-b  h36^ 
nplHXHO  H  yibxHO.  (13)  JK^HnjHHbi  npHroxoBJiiiioxx>  K^manbe. 
(14)  B^qepoMx.  Mbi  nbCMX.  naniKy  naio  poBHO  bx>  ccMb  qac6Bx>;  nox6MT> 
Moft  MJianmiii  6paxx,  jiojkhxch  cnaxb.  (15)  Ho  BspocjibiMX.  n6cji'fe 
fmnna.  eme  AOJiro  h^jkho  paSoxaxb.  (16)  MaxyniKa  h  6a6ymKa 
XKyxx>,  npflA^xx>,  BHJKyxx>  HyjiKii,  nibioxx>  njiaxbH.  (17)  A  CaxiouiKa 
mbexx>  canorii  h3x>  kojkh,  i^jih  noHHHiiexx>  noc^^ay  h  MeSejib. 

D.  Rewrite  Ex.  C,  1-9,  11-17,  in  the  past  and  future. 

E.  BonpocLi : 

(1)  Fa'fe  roBop^imiii  H<HBexx>?  (2)  Hxo  6biBaexx>  qacxo  y  !Sxhxx> 
jiiOA^tt  3HM6ft?  (3)  IloqeM]^  hmx>  Hejib3H  ryjiaxb  na  ABop-fe? 
(4)  KaKafl  cero^HH  nor6aa?  (5)  IloHCMy^  ne  M6ryxx>  bijhxh  ii3x> 
HOMy?  (6)  Hxo  xo^exx.  snaxb  MJia^maH  cecxpa?  (7)  Tp^^HO  jih  5xo 
CKa3^xb?  (8)  Bx>  KOx6poMX>  ^ac^  3a>KHraioxx>  Jiaiwny?  (9)  rioHCM^? 
(10)  H'feMx>  x6nHXX>  neqb?  (11)  Ky^a  yjKe  c^jih  a^xh?  (12)  KaKiiMX> 
66pa30MX.  OHi^  npoBOAHXx.  bp^mh  ji;o  fmvLUSi'7  (13)  KaKX>  6biB^exx> 
Bx,  H36'fe?  (14)  B-b  Kox6poMx>  nsLCf  nbioxx>  naniKy  Haio?  (15)  Korfl^ 
H«^xx>  cnaxb  cerojiHfl?  (16)  H-feMX.  3aHHMaioxcH  JK^nmnHbi  h 
MyH^HHHM  nocji-fe  ;^mHHa? 

F.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  I  was  told  that  this  man's  two  sons  lived  in  the  little  village  beyond 
the  river,  but  at  the  present  time  they  live,  I  am  told,  in  that  great  house 
that  you  see  before  you.  (2)  Surely  you  sometimes  have  good  weather 
in  this  district.     (3)  Do  you  know  what  problem  they  are  solving  now  ? 


142  LESSON  XLVII  §§  176-176 

(4)  I  suppose  their  father  has  been  carried  away,  that  is  why  they  are  crying. 

(5)  Perhaps  they  did  not  tell  you  that  they  went  upstairs  and  entered  the 
large  dining-room,  where  the  old  lady  was  sitting.     She  was  sewing  or  knitting. 

(6)  What's  to  be  done  now  ?  (7)  What  is  he  to  do  ?  He  does  not  know 
how  to  work.  (8)  I  thought  that  the  stove  used  to  stand  near  the  windows, 
but  there  it  is  standing  behind  the  door.  (9)  I  was  lying  on  one  bed  and  he 
lay  down  on  the  other.  (10)  He  is  sitting  there  now.  (11)  What  are  they 
talking  about  ?  (12)  We  told  each  other  that  that  was  not  the  truth.  (13) 
Why  did  most  of  these  poor  people  always  drink  tea  ?  (14)  They  do  not  drink 
tea  at  all ;  they  drink  water  or  milk  or  bad  wine  or  beer.  (16)  She  remembers 
that  the  EngUsh  lady  gave  him  that  little  gold  ring.  (16)  I  do  not  like  the 
colour  of  those  enormous  buildings  at  all.  (17)  Surely  she  does  not  want  to 
go  to  school  yet  ?  (18)  Really  I  cannot  say  whether  boots  are  always  made 
of  good  leather.     (19)  You  are  obliged  to  remain  at   home   after   dinner. 

(20)  Did  you  never  think  of  the  lesson  that  you  were  to  learn  by  heart  ? 

(21)  Usually  we  go  home  at  five  o'clock ;  to-day  we  are  going  home  at 
four  and  after  Sunday  we  shall  always  go  home  at  three  o'clock. 


LESSON  XLVII 
The  Numerals 

175.  The  declension  of  ordinal  numerals  was  indicated  in  Par.  167. 
If  an  ordinal  numeral  be  compound,  only  the  last  element  is 

declined,  e.g.  in  "  the  674tli  verst," 

mecTbCOTi.  ceMbAecHTT)  HCTBepTaa  BcpcT^  [J9s(t)s6t  s^mdasat 
tJ9tv6rtAJa  versta] 

only  qeTBepxafl  is  declined  along  with  the  noun. 

176.  The  declension  of  cardinal  numbers  : 

(a)  Numbers  ending  in  b  are  declined  like  regular  feminine 
nouns  in  b ;  in  5-10,  20,  30  the  accent  is  on  the  termination,  e.g. 
naxb,  HHTH  [ptft,  pati]. 

(6)  copoKt,  nesHHOCTO,  CTO,  TbiCflHa,  MHJiJii6HT>  are  declined 
like  nouns  of  corresponding  form.  But  when  copoKb,  aeBHHOCXO, 
CTO  stand  before  other  numerals  the  oblique  cases  all  end  in  a, 
e.g.  copoKa  nflXH,  of  45  ;  directly  before  nouns  this  also  happens  ; 
the  prepositional  ends  in  ife  or  a.     The  genitive  plural  of  cto 

is  COT'L. 


§§177-179  LESSON  XLVII  143 

(c)  The  declension  of  ojiuuh  was  indicated  in  Par.  107  (6). 
The  plural  means  the  only^  alonej  the  ones. 

(d)  nom.  66a  (m.  and  n.)  [obA],  66"^  (/.)  [oba],  both,  has 

gen.  o66hxl  [Aboix],  o6ivLXh  [Abeix],  etc.,  etc. 
65a,  like  PiBa,  takes  the  noun  in  the  genitive  singular.     66'fe 
takes  the  nominative  plural. 

(e)  nom.  JiBa  (w.  and  n.),  HB'fe  (/.) 
gen.  Hsyxii  [dvux] 
dat.  SByM-B  [dvum] 
ace.     nom.  or  gen. 

instr.  aeyMH  [dvuriia] 
prep.  neyx'B  [dvux] 

(/)  nom.  xpH  [tri]  qextipe  [tjafire] 

gen.  Tpex-L  [trox]  qcTHpext  [tjefirox] 

dat.  TpcMT*  [trom]  qexBipcMTj  [tjatirom] 

ace.  Tpn  or  xpexx.  nom.  or  gen. 

instr.  xpcMii  [treihd]  qexfcipbMfl  [tjatiriha] 

prep,  xpexi  [trox]  lexbipext  [tjatirox] 

177.  In  numerals  of  two  or  more  digits  each  figure  is  separately 
decHned,  if  the  number  be  cardinal,  e.g. 

nom.  xpiicxa  [tfistA],  300  mecxbXbiCHq'B  [|9s(t)tis9tJ],  6000 

gen.  xpex-LCOX-b  [troxsot]  mecxHXbiCHHb  [jastitisatj] 

dat.  xpcM'bCxaM'b  [tromstam],  etc.       mecxHXi^iCHqaM'b[j8stitisatJam],eto. 

Fortunately,  however,  numerals  occur  with  great  frequency  in 
the  nominative  or  accusative. 

178.  It  has  already  (Par.  138)  been  pointed  out  that  after  the 
word  ojuhhTj  in  the  singular,  even  when  this  is  merely  the  last  element 
in  a  compound  numeral,  the  noun  is  singular,  e.g. 

cxo  ACBAHdcxo  OAHa  JKenmnna,  191  women. 

179.  JIBS,  and  qcTLipe  {two  pairs)  were  dual  forms.  The  dual  of 
masculine  nouns  happened  to  be  identical  with  the  genitive  singular, 
and  when  the  dual  fell  into  disuse  the  mechanical  rule  became 
universal  that  after  2  and  4,  even  when  they  are  merely  the  last 
element  in  a  compound  numeral,  the  genitive  singular  of  the  noun 


144  LESSON  XLVII  §§180-181 

must  be  used.  Tpn  came  to  liave  the  same  effect  by  analogy.  In 
any  phrase  involving  one  of  these  three  words,  i.e.  where  the  con- 
struction normally  requires  nominative  or  accusative,  though  the 
noun  is  in  the  genitive  singular,  the  adjective  is  nominative  plural 
or  genitive  plural,  e.g. 

jtB^auaTB  «Ba  6ojihm.uxT>  (6ojibmie)  a6Ma  [dvatsAt  dva  bAiijix 
(bA^ijije)  domA],  22  large  houses. 

180.  After  other  numerals  from  5  upwards,  when  the  numeral 
is  nominative  or  accusative,  both  noun  and  adjective  are  in  the 
genitive  plural,  e.g.  xpiiauaTb  mixb  6ojii>mHxi>  aom6bi.  [tfitsAt],  thirty- 
five  great  houses. 

Whatever  be  the  cardinal  numeral  used  in  a  phrase,  if  the 
phrase  be  nominative  or  accusative,  the  numeral  determines  the 
form  of  the  noun  ;  if  the  phrase  be  in  any  other  case,  the  numeral 
must  agree  with  the  noun. 

181.  (a)  The  date  of  the  month  is  expressed  by  using  the 
genitive  {^  of  the  tenth  of  the  month '),  or  nominative  neuter. 

HCCHTaro  Man,  cer6  (M'fecHua)  [dasatAVA  maJA,  sevo  (rii^satsA)],  on  the 
tenth  of  May,  of  this  month,  curt. 

Cer6«Hfl  neciiToe  (qHCJi6)  iibjin  [s9v6dnA  dasatAJa  ijiilA],  To-day  is  the 
10th  of  July. 

(b)  The  date  of  the  year  is  expressed  in  two  ways  : 

(1)  '  1892  A.D.'  is 

B-b  TiicHqa  B0ceMLc6Ti>  neBHHocTO  BTopbHi.  Tonf  no  POJK- 
necTB'fe  {no  =  after  takes  the  prep.)  XpHCTOBOM'b  [xrist6vAm]  {after  the 
birth  of  Christ). 

(2)  '  the  22nd  June  1892  '  is 

SBaAuaxb  BTop6ro  libHH  TMCHHa  BOceMbcoT-b  aeBHH6cT0  BTop6ro 
r6na. 

(3)  'In  June^  is  B-b  iibni^  [vijiina]. 

(4)  *  On  Monday '  is  B-b  nonea^JibHHK'b  [fpAnadd^lriik]. 

*  On  Mondays,"  *  of  a  Monday,"  is  no  nonen'fejibHHKaM'b  [pApAnad^^l 
riikAm]. 

(c)  The  time  of  day  is  expressed  thus : 
MHH^xa  [ihintitA],  minute. 

qacb  [tjas],  one  o" clock  {=hour). 

flBa,  xpn,  qexijpe  nacd  [tjAsd],  two,  three,  four  o'clock. 

nflXb,  mecxb  etc.  HacoBT)  [tJAsof],  five,  six  etc.  o'clock. 


§§  182-184  LESSON  XLVII  145 

q^TBepxb  qcTBcpTaro  [tj^tvart],  3*16  {a  quarter  ofihefcmrth  hour). 
nojiOBHHa  HeTBepxaro  [pAtAvuiA],  3-30  {half  of  the  f mirth  hour). 
Sea-L  H^TBcpxH  Hexiiipe  [bas  tj^tverti],  3-45  {four,  less  a  qimrter). 
A^CHXb  MHH^xi>  nnxaro  [d^sat  riiinut  patAVA],  4-10  {ten  minutes  of  the 

fifth  hour). 
Qes-b  A^CflXH  unufTb  nflXb  [d^sati],  4*50  {five  less  ten  minutes). 
B'b  nflXb  ^lacdB-L,  at  five  o'clock 
6kojio  nflxii  qacoBt  [6kAtA],  about  five  o'clock  (genitive). 

182.  To  indicate  an  approximate  number  the  numeral  is  placed 
after  the  noun,  e.g. 

HBaartaxb  py5ji6H  [dvatsAt  rubMi],  twenty  roubles. 
but  py6ji6fi  flBajmaxb  [ruble!  dvdtsAt],  about  twenty  roubles. 
rdaa  Hexbipe  [g6dA  tjatira],  about  four  years. 

183.  To  express  the  distributive  form  {at  the  rate  of,  so  many 
each)  no  is  used  with  the  accusative  of  HBa,  xpn,  HexBipe,  but  with 
the  dative  of  any  other  numeral,  e.g. 

Oh-l  viwh  AajiX)  no  «Ba  pySjiii  [on  jim  dat  pA  dva  rubld],  He  gave  them 
two  roubles  each. 

no  oaH6ft  Kon^liK'fe  [pA  Adnoi  kAp6ika],  one  copeck  each. 
Ilo  xpHHaauaxH  [pA  trinatsAti],  at  the  rate  of  thirteen. 

184.  Ordinal  numbers  that  have  not  yet  been  given  are  : 

HByx-bC^Xbift  [dvuxs6ti]  200th 

xpex-LCOXbifi  [tfoxs6ti]  300th 

Hexbipex-LcdxHii  [tjatiroxsoti]  400th 

nHXHCOXbiii  [patisoti]  500th 

mecxHCOXbift  [Jastisoti]  600th 

ccMHCOXbiH  [samisoti]  700th 

B0CbMHc6xbm  [vAsmis6ti]  800th 

aeBHXHCOXbitt  [davatisoti]  900th 

XbiCfl^Hbiii  [tisatjni]  1000th 
HByxt  xi^icfl^Hbiii  [dvux  tisatjm]        2000th 

cxoxbiCHHHbiii  [stAtisatJni]  100,000th 
MHJiJii6HHHH  [mii6ni]                    1,000,000th 


146  LESSON  XLVIII  §185 

Vocabulary 

BOCK^ec^Hhe, Sunday (Voc.XXXIV)  MapTT>,  a,  bi  [mart],  March 

noHeH'fejibHHK'b,      Monday     (Voc.  anp-fejib,  h  [Apf6^i],  April 

XXXIV)  Maft,  fl,  H  [mai],  May 

BxdpHHK'b,  a  {second  {working -)day)  iibnb,  h,  h  [ijii^n],  June 

[ft6rnik],  Tuesday  iiOJib,  h,  h  [ijii^i],  July 

cpeaa,  li  {middle  {of  week))  [sradd],  ^Brycx'b,  a,  bi  [avgust],  August 

Wednesday  cenx^Spb,  A,  h  [sontabr],  September 

HBTB^pr-b,  a  [tjatvsrk],  Thursday  OKTHSpb,  h,  h  [Aktabf],  October 

ni^THHita,  bi  [patnitsA],  Friday  H0H6pb,  a,  h  [iiAJabr],  November 

cy666Ta,     bi     {sabbath)     [subotA],  ^CKaCpb,  A,  w.  [dekdbr],  December 


poUHTbCfl  [rAditsA],  to  be  bom 
HHB^pb,  fl,  H  [janva^r],  January  CKOHqaTbCfl  [skAntja^tsA],  to  die,  lit. 

^eBpaJib,  A,  II  [favra^i],  February  to  come  to  an  end,  to  decease 

Exercise 
Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  woman's  rich  friend  died  on  the  29th  of  January,  1852.  (2)  They 
were  born  on  the  10th  of  May  1903.  (3)  To-day  is  the  9th  of  October.  (4) 
How  much  did  she  give  you  ?  She  gave  us  only  ten  copecks  each.  (5)  In 
June  we  sometimes  have  good  weather,  seldom  hot  weather.  (6)  The  third 
day  of  the  week  is  Tuesday.  (7)  There  are  365  days  in  the  year.  (8)  Twenty 
men  went  into  this  Uttle  room ;  but  the  twenty-first  man  they  did  not 
admit.  (9)  The  landed  proprietor  who  lives  near  [in  the  neighbourhood  of] 
the  town  has  four  beautiful  white  horses  and  about  twenty  hunting-dogs. 
(10)  The  twenty-fifth  of  December  is  Christmas.  (11)  They  came  here  early 
in  the  morning  of  the  23rd  of  this  month.  (12)  We  saw  about  40  soldiers 
who  were  walking  along  this  wide  street.  (13)  546  men,  the  546th  man. 
(14)  On  Fridays  we  always  go  to  church.     (15)  257,649  roubles. 


LESSON  XLVIII 

185.  Certain  verbs  in  frequent  use  require  tlie  complement  in 
the  instrumental  case.     Such  verbs  are  : 

6biTb  [bit],  to  be  ^ 

cxaxb  [sta^t],  to  become  ^ 

cjt'fejTaTbCfl  I A  [sdstAtsA],  to  become  ^ 

cjiyjKHTb  (^,  ^Hinb),  to  serve  as 

3BaTb  (30B^,  euib)  [zvQ^t],  to  Call,  to  name 

^  Especially  when  a  merely  temporary  quaUty  or  change  of  state  is  expressed. 
See  note  to  Par.  69. 


§186 


LESSON  XLVIII 


147 


HasHBaTbCH  I A  [nAziva^tsA],  to  he  called 
c^HTaTb  I A  [stjita^t],  to  reckoriy  to  consider 
no^HxaTbCH  I A  [pAtJita^tsA],  to  be  regarded  as 
BJia^'i^Tb  I A  [vtAd6^t],  to  dominate^  to  rule  over 
Examples : 

Owh   CTaji-b   doraTbiMT.  KyniidM-b  [on  stat  bAgatim  kupts6m],  He 
became  {a)  rich  merchant. 

pT3L  KdMHaxa  CM^  c^frnvLTTy  cnaJibHCK)  [stA  k6mnAtA  jamti  sttisit 
spd^naju],  This  room  serves  him  as  a  bedroom. 

Ero    aoB^^Tt    HnKOJiaeM'b   [J9v6   zAviit   nikAtdjam],   They  call  him 
Nicholas  {by  the  name  of  N.) 

5to  h  CHHxdio  Hy^jKHbiM-b  [stA  JQ  stjitdju  niisnim],  /  consider  that 


186.  caMbiii  [sami]  preceding  an  adjective  gives  to  it  the  force 
of  a  superlative.     This  word  itself  means  self,  same  ;  prefixed  to  an 
adjective  it  means  extremely ,  in  the  highest  degree,  e.g. 
cksLhiVi.  6ojibm6ft  [sdmi  bA^ijoI],  the  largest. 

Vocabulary 


KysH^iXT),  a,  bi  [kuznsts],  smith 
B'feK'b,  Si,  u  or  a.  [vsk],  age,  century 
Ha  CBoeM-b  B-feK^  [na  svAJom  vekii], 

in  his  {life)time 
itapcTBO,  a,  a  [tsdrstvA],  kingdom, 

empire 
i^apcTBOBaxb  [tsdrstvAVAt]  (^apcT- 

Byio,    emb    [tsdrstvuju])    (see 

Par.  225),  to  reign 
rocyHapb,    a,    h    [gAsudd^r],    the 

Ruler,  Lord,  Emperor 
HMnepaTop-b,    a,    bi    [impordtAi], 

Emperor 
rocya.  HMnep.  [gAsudd^r  impord- 

tAr],  His  Majesty  the  Emperor 
rocyflapcTBO,  a,  a  [gAsuddrstvA], 

state,  empire 
Kopoji^Ba,  bi,  bi  [kAFAisvA],  queen 
BJiaa-fenie,    h,    h   (Ih)   [vtAd^nje], 

territory,  possession 
BJiaA-fexb  I A  [vtAd^^t],  to  rule  over. 


cfeBcpi),  a  [ssver],  north 


ibr-b,  a  [jug,  juk],  south 
BOCTOK'b,  a  [vAstok],  east 
sanaa'b,  a  [zdpAt],  west 
npHTOKTi,  a,  H  [prit6k],  a  tributary 
BcpSjiiofl'b,  a,  bi  [verbiiit],  camel 
CM^pxb,  H,  H  (6tt)  [sriiert],  death 
Bcpcxa,  ii,  -H  [varstd],  verst  (1067 

metres) 
pa66xa,  bi,  bi  [rAbotA],  work 
nycxbiHH,  H,  H  [pustinA],  wilderness, 

desert 
oaepo,  a,  ^'a  [oi^erA],  lake, 
noKOHHbili  [pAkoIni],  deceased,  late 
paSoHlft    [rAbotji],    working,    work- 
man 
npasffHHHHbift  [prdz(d)nitjni],  holi- 
day, feast{-day)  (adj.) 
noji63HbiH  [pAiszni],  useful 
XHH^xbCfl  {f,  ^enib)  [UnuitsA],  to 

stretch,  extend 
Hoxoniixb  (}K^,  6«Hmb)  [dAXAdit], 

to  reach 
Bnajt^xb  I A  [fpAdd^t],  to  fall  into 


148  LESSON  XLVIII  §186 

.    »,       ,  ^  Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

(1)  B-L  mecTH^HuaTOM'L  B-feKife  h6  6hjio  bi>  BJiaa-feHiH  Poccfn  hh 
OHHor6  M6pH,  HO  xenepb  ona  BJianibeT-b  h^ckojibkhmh  Mop;iMH. 
(2)  B-B  npdmjiOMt  rojt,f  iiapcxBOBaji-Lrocyaapb  MMnepaxop'L  HnKOJiaii 
BTopoli;  OHt  cxaji-b  (cA-fejiajicfl)  HMnepaxopoMT,  nocji'fe  (or  no  vdth 
prep.)  CMepxH  noKofinaro  AjieKcan^pa  xpexbaro.  Bi.  nacxojimee 
Bp^MH  y>K6  ne  napcxByexT>;  xenepb  n-fex-b  HMnepaxopa.  (3)  P^ccKoe 
napcxBO,  KOx6poe  xflnexcn  cx>  B0cx6Ka  na  3anaHx>  na  xpHnaanaxb 
XHCfl^'b  BepcxT),  a  cb  cfesepa  na  lor-b  na  qexbipe  xbicnqn  Bepcx-b, 
pyccKie  cHnxaioxx,  caMbiM-b  6ojibmHMx>  rocyaapcxBOM-b  na  CB-fex-fe. 
(4)  HexBepxbift  aenb  neaibjiH  nasbiBaexcH  cpeaoio,  a  mecxoii  nenb — 
nnxHHna.  (5)  Illecxb  paSoqnx'b  «h6h  jnban  paSdxaioxi,  n'fejibifi 
nenb,  a  Bb  BOCKpec^Hbe  h  B-b  apyrie  npasAHHqnbie  hhh  Bcfe  oxjtbixaioxb 
ox-b  paGox-b  H  xonflx-b  Bb  nepKOBb.  (6)  B-b  rojif  AB-fenaanaxb 
M^CHncB-b,  a  ^BifeHaAnaxbiii  M'fecHnb  soB^x-b  jj,eKa6pewb.  (7)  P-feKa, 
KOXopaH  He  nox6flHxx>  ao  Mopn  iijih  jio  63epa,  a  BnaA^exi.  bt,  apyryio 
P'^K^,  HasbiBaexcH  npHXOKOMb.  (8)  Bep6jiio«x> — onenb  noji^snoe 
WHBOXHoe,  xaK-b  KaK-b  MOJKexb  npoiixii,  q6pe3x>  nycxbinio,  ox-b  cxa 

BOCbMHJXeCHXH    «0    ^B^^XCOXT*  BepCX-b    B^   HefltjIK).      (9)    On-b    pOAHJICfl 

B-b  xi^iCHqa  BOceMbcdx-b  SBaanaxb  BxopoM-b  rojif,  a  CKon^ajicfl  (^Mep*b) 
xpiAanaxb  n^pBaro  MaH  xbiCHHa  BOceMbcoxi.  aeBHH6cxo  niixaro  rd^a. 

B.  BonpocLi:  ^^        ^? 

(1)  Kor^a  Poccifl  ne  BJia^-fejia  hh  oaneiso  M6p»?  (2)  Kxo  ^ 
napcxBOBajiT.  B-b  Anrjiin  bx>  xi^icnqa  BoceMbCoxx.  AeBflnocxo  naxoMX* 
roa;^?  (3)  Kxo  ^  cxajib  KopojieM-b  no  CMepxn  5xoti  Kopoji^Bbi? 
Koxopoe  napexBO  anrjinqane  cqnxaiox'b  c^MbiMb  dojibniHM'b  na 
CB-fex-fe?  (4)  GKOJibKO  padoqnx-b  an^ft  B-b  nefl-feji^?  (6)  KaKX>  /j 
30Byxb  n6pBbiii  HeHb  He^^Jin?  A  xpexiii  j];eHb?  (6)  KaKan  pi^K^ 
Ha3biBaexcH  npnxoKOMb?     (7)  rioHCM^  BepSjiib^b  cqaxaexcH  nojies- 

HMMX.    JKHB6XHbIMb?       (8)    KOFA^   Bbl   pOffllJIHCfl? 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  I  have  been  told  that  the  present  landowner  is  the  son  of  a  smith 
who  lived  in  this  district  forty-five  years  ago.  (2)  The  smallest  wooden  house 
in  the  village  served  his  father  as  a  dwelling  at  that  time.  (3)  But  a  few  years 
after  the  death  of  his  wife  the  man  went  abroad.  (4)  He  lived  in  one  of  [031.] 
the  largest  towns  in  England.  (5)  There  he  became  a  merchant  and  was 
soon  regarded  as  a  very  rich  man.  (6)  The  youngest  son,  who  was  only  ten  i 
years  old  at  the  time  of  his  mother's  death,  was  boirn  on  the  24th  of  February 
1885.  (7)  The  father  died  abroad  ten  years  ago  and  the  second  son,  who  had 
always  wished  to  live  in  Russia,  bought  this  little  estate.  (8)  He  has  been 
Uving  here  for  five  years  now  [pres.  tense  with  ym€]. 

^^  BHKT6pifl.  ^  Bfly&pa-b. 


§§187-189  LESSON  XLIX  149 


LESSON  XLIX 

187.  Most  of  the  adjectives  that  have  occurred  have  been  used 
attributively,  i.e.  they  quaUfy  nouns.  But  there  is  also  a  shorter 
form  of  the  adjective  ending  in  -t,  -a,  -o,  -u  (or  -h),  which,  in  theory, 
ought  to  be  used  when  the  adjective  is  predicative. 

y  Hero  6ojii>h6h  cbih'l,  He  has  a  sick  son,  shows  the  attributive 
form. 

Ero  CbiHTi  SojieHTj  [jovo  sin  bolen],  His  son  is  ill,  shows  the 
predicative  form. 

This  form  is  obtained  from  the  attributive  by  substituting  in  the 
mascuUne  t  for  hh,  oft,  by  dropping,  in  the  feminine  and  neuter, 
the  final  fl  and  e,  and,  in  the  plural,  the  final  e  or  fl,  e.g. 

cjiaSbift,  cji^SaH,  cji^5oe,  cjidSbie,  hh 

cJiaS'L,  cjia6a,  cji^So,  cji^Sbi  [stab  (p),  stAba,  stabA,  stabi],  weak. 

In  fact  the  predicative  adjective  in  the  singular  and  often  in  the 
plural  has  the  endings  already  associated  with  the  past  tense  of  the 
verb  and  with  the  noun. 

188.  The  word  pa^Tj  [rod  (t)],  meaning  glad,  has  no  longer  form. 
Adjectives  in  ckIh  Hke  pyccKift,  and  adjectives  indicating  materials 
and  ending  in  hhhhh,  Hke  AepeBHHHtiH,  are  without  the  predicative 
form.  Most  other  quahfying  adjectives  have  this  form.  As  it  is 
found  very  frequently  in  current  speech  and  in  Hterature,  the  pre- 
dicative form  must  be  known,  but  both  in  writing  and  speaking  the 
attributive  form  takes  its  place  to  a  very  great  extent.  Outside 
popular  poetry  one  rarely  meets  the  predicative  form  in  the  obHque 
cases. 

189.  The  neuter  singular  is  of  very  frequent  occurrence  : 
(1)  Used  as  an  adverb,  e.g. 

xopom6  [xArAjo],  loell. 
nji6xo  [pt6xA],  badly. 


150  LESSON  XLIX  §§190-191 

(2)  As  the  complement  of  the  verb  to  he  expressed  or  mider- 
stood  in  phrases  like 

MH'fe  H^JKHO,  HcnpiHTHO,  JierK6,  Tp^«H0  5to  A'fejiaTB  [mne  nu5nA, 
naprijatnA,  l9xk6,  triidiiA  stA  detAt],  It  is  necessary ^  unpleasant^  easy,  difficult, 
for  me  to  do  this.     (Cf.  Par.  116.) 

190.  It  will  be  observed  in  the  lists  given  in  Par.  237  that  o  or  e  is 
sometimes  inserted  in  the  mascuUne  to  faciUtate  pronunciation  ;  e.g. 

KopoTKifl  :  Kop6TOK'L  [kArotAk],  KopoTKa,  etc.,  sTiort, 
TTpfjlKuPL :  Tp^ACHt  [truden],  Tpyana,  etc.,  difficult, 

but  to  give  a  rule  is  hardly  practicable,  for  combinations  of  consonants 
that  at  first  seem  almost  impossible  to  the  foreigner  are  quite  easily 
negotiated  by  the  Russian,  e.g. 

MepxBjb  [mortf],  dead. 

191.  The  accentuation  of  the  attributive  adjective  is  a  very 
simple  matter  :  the  accent  remains  throughout  on  the  syllable 
corresponding  to  the  accented  syllable  of  the  nominative  singular 
mascuhne.  In  the  predicative  form  the  accent  can  only  be  mastered 
by  continual  observation.  Paragraph  237  gives  the  predicative 
forms  of  most  of  the  adjectives  that  are  used  in  this  book. 

Vocabulary 

r'pn6'b,  ^,j^i[gH^,gviha'\,  mushroom  rpoaa  (in  ace.  sing,  and  nom.  plur. 
Tp^Cb,  a,  LI  (oBt)  [trus],  coward  stem  accented)  [grAza],  thunder- 

SbiKT),  a,  H  [bik],  ox  storm 

necB,  nca,  bi  [pos],  dog  miksHh,  h  [31211],  life 

r^Cb,  H,  H  [gns],  goose  KOCTb,  h,  h  (6h)  [kost],  bone 

mK^n-b,  a,  i>i  [Jkap]   (ei.   musiuf  Hano  [nadA],  it  is  necessary 

[fJkApti]),  cupboard  jk^jiko  [3dtkA],  it  is  a  pity 

rpdwh,  a,  bi  (oB'b)  [grom],  thunder  BJi'feBTb  [vlest]  (BJi'fes'b,  BJi-fesjia  ; 
jiOAKa,  H,  H  (oK-b)  [totkA],  boat  fut.  -"feay,  -emb),  to  climb 

JianKa,H,H  (oK-b)  [tdpkA],/oo<,^a!z;  exaxb  [sta^t],  to  become,  get;  to  set 
(diminutive)  about 

H  He  3H^io,  npomeji-b  jih  ohi.  [ja  na  znaju,  prAjot  ii  on],  I  do  not 
know  whether  he  has  passed,  it  is  past. 

epasy  no  ABa,  AB'fe  [srazu  pAdva,  dvs],  tivo  at  a  time. 

The  following  simple  examples  are  taken  chiefly  from  Tolstoi's 
AsSyKa.  Any  adjectives  not  yet  given  in  the  vocabularies  will 
be  found  in  the  Hst  in  Par.  237  and  in  the  general  vocabulary. 


§191  LESSON  XLIX  151 


Exercises 

Translate : 
A. 

(1)  A-fea-b  SbiJit  CTapi.  H  cjiaSi.,  a  BHyKi.  MJiaA-L^H  rjiyn-B.  (2) 
GTajit  HaniT.  cajHT.  rojit.  (3)  Cxaji-B  nam-b  neci>  njioxi,.  (4)  Majib- 
qHK-b  CbiJiTb  pafl-b.  (5)  FpHS-b  6hmT>  rnnji'b.  (6)  Owb  SbiJi-b  Tpy- 
cjiHB'b.  (7)  Gxaji-b  6uK'b  aoji-b.  (8)  Owb  n6cjiife  Toro  He  fl6jiro 
SbijiT.  rnHB-b. 

B. 

(1)  Hrp^  SbiJia  njiox^.  (2)  Go6aKa  6biji^  yMHa.  (3)  HsSd  6biJi^ 
He  Majia.  (4)  Ba6a  6biJi^  pa^a.  (5)  Bo^a  SbiJia  ^Hcxa.  (6) 
CTajia  JioHKa  nojina  Bomi.  (7)  Jlnca  ijia  cpaay  no  rb^  ADbiuin,  n 
CT^jia  jKHpna.     (8)  Eh  >KH3Hb  Tpy^n^.     (9)  Kp^nKd  KaK-b  Kocxb. 


r      C. 


(1)  Ha  Boa-fe  61J1J10  TSikjiKO.  (2)  Ha  «Bop^  Sijjio  HiicTo.  (3) 
Em^  cxajio  CMibmno  {he  felt  inclined  to  laugh).  (4)  Mwh  JierK6 
5x0  a^Jiaxb.  (5)  BbiJia  rpoaa  h  rpoM-b.^  MajibHHK-b  dHJi-b 
xpycb.  On-b  BJi-fes-b  b-l  niKani).  TaMi.  6iiiJio  cm^  xeMHo  h  a^mno. 
Em^  h6  6biJio  cjibimno,  npouiJia  jih  rposa.  (6)  TnibaAO  ym6  Si^iJio 
nycxo.  (7)  Bee,  hxo  Haji;o.  (8)  Ab6ph  Si^ijih  x-fecHbi.  (9)  JIanKH 
ryceii  6i^ijih  BHflHbi.  (10)  Majib^HKH  cxajin  mokph.  (11)  >KaJiKO 
61J1J10. 

Proverbial  Sayings 

X^AO  XOM^,  Kxo  Ao6pa  ne  n-fejiaex-b  hhkom^  [xMa  tAmd,  xto  dAbrd 
na  detAJat  nikAmu],  Woe  he  to  him  who  does  good  to  no  man. 

}KH3Hb  Aana  na  aoGpbm  oi'fejia  [sizfi  dAnd  iia  dobrija  data],  Life  was 
given  us  for  good  deeds. 

(j^aHT}  is  the  predicative  form  of  JtaHHbiii,  passive  past  participle  of 
juaxb.     Such  participles  in  anx*,  ana,  ano,  anbi  are  very  frequent.) 

CKyqeH-b  nenb  js,o  B^^epa,  kojiii  A'fejiaxb  H^qero  [skiitjan  de^ii  dA 
v^tJarA,  kAii  dstAt  n^tJavA],  The  day  is  long  {weary,  tedious)  till  evening,  if 
there  is  nothing  to  do. 

y  Bora  Bcfe  p^BHbi  [u  bogA  fss  ravm  (rAvni)],  Before  Ood  all  are 
egual. 

.  1  =m6jioai».  ^  rpoMT,  rpewcATb  [grom  gtonilt],  the  thunder  rolls. 


152  LESSON  L  §§  192-195 

LESSON  L 
The  Compaeative  Degree 

192.  Tlie  predicative  form  of  the  comparative  degree  of  the 
adjective  is  formed  by  changing  tift,  ift,  or  oii  into  "fee.  The  short 
form  'feii  is  frequently  used  in  poetry  and  popular  speech.  In  most 
adjectives  of  more  than  two  syllables  the  accent  remains  where 
it  falls  in  the  positive  ;  in  words  of  only  two  syllables  in  the  positive, 
the  predicative  comparative  is  accented  on  the  ife. 

Examples  : 

npflM6tt,  npHM'fee  [pr9m6i,  pram6J9],  upright,  straight 
npiiiTHbitt,  npiiiTH'fee  [prijatni,  prijdtiiaja],  pleasant 
KpacHBbitt,  Kpaci^B'fee  [krAsivi,  krAsivajo],  beautiful 
^MHBitt,  yMHibe  [umni,  umn^ja],  intelligent 
MOKpLift,  MOKpie  [mokri,  mAkr^jo],  damp,  wet 

193.  A  number  of  adjectives,  mostly  in  frequent  use,  have  the 
predicative  comparative  in  -e.  Many  of  these  also  modify  the  final 
consonant  of  the  stem.  A  Hst  of  some  of  the  forms  in  frequent  use 
is  given  in  Par.  238. 

194.  Than  following  the  comparative  is  translated  by  H'feM'b 
[tSem]  or  He>KeJiH  [nesali],  e.g. 

Gbm-b  j^MH-fee  H-feMTj  n6HKa  [sin  umn^ja  tjgm  dotJkA],  Th£  son  is  more 
intelligent  than  the  daughter. 

JKeji-feao  nojiesHifee  q'feM'b  cepe6p6  [^bUza  pA^znaja  tjsm  sorabro], 
Iron  is  more  useful  than  silver. 

M6tt  nplHTCjib  ji^HUie  H-twh  A  [m6i  prijatai  tdtja  tjsm  ja],  My  friend 
is  better  than  I. 

Another  way  of  using  the  comparative  is  to  omit  H'feM'b  or 
HCJKejiH  and  substitute  for  the  nominative  the  genitive  case.  The 
three  examples  might  therefore  have  been  written  : 

GbiH-b  yMH-fee  HO^KH  [dotjki]. 

JKcji'feao  nojiesHifee  cepe6pa  [sarabrd]. 

Moii  nplHTCJib  Ji^^me  MCHii. 

195.  When  the  comparative  is  attributive  it  is  formed,  as  in 

EngHsh,  by  prefixing  doji'fee  [bolaje],  more,  to  the  positive,  e.g. 

OoJiifee  Hoporoii  cxyjii)  [bdiaja  dArAgoI  stut],  a  more  expensive,  a 
dearer,  chair. 


§§196-198  LESSON  L  153 

(a)  As  in  English,  a  few  words  have  exceptional  forms,  e.g. 

xop6mitt  [xAroJi],  good  Ji^qmift  [Mtji],  better 

xyji6u  [xudoi],  bad  x^^flmitt  [xutji],  worse 

MOJioaoft  [mAtAdoi],  young  MJiaflmift  [mtdtji],  younger  or  junior 

CTapbifi  [stdri],  old  CTapuiiii  [starji],  elder  or  senior 

BbicoKiii  [visoki],  high  Bi»icmifi  ^  [viji],  higher 

HH3Kitt  [niski],  low  Hiianiitt  ^  [niji],  lower 

MaJiMft  [mati],  little  fM^Hbmift  [rii^^nji],  less  or  lesser 

iMCHbrnofi  [m9nj6i],  younger,  youngest 

6oJibm6tt  [bA^ijo!],  Zarae^  ^,  •«  ri^'iir-n 

'    -^r-i'i-i  /    Y  663ihUiiVi  [ho}lh\  greater 

BCJiHKift  [velikij,  great    J  l       j  j>  ./ 

196.  A  few  adjectives  have  a  special  form  for  the  attributive 
superlative  ending  in  -aHmin,  -tlimiH,  e.g. 

rJiySoKiii,  deep  rjiydoHaftmlii  [gtubAtJdlJi] 

npocToii,  simple  npocT-feiimifi  [prAst^iJi] 

cjiaSbiH,  weak  CJiaG-fefimitt  [stAb^iJi] 

SoraTbiii,  rich  SoraT-fetiiniii  [bAgAt6lJi] 

sajieKifi,  distant,  far  ^ajibH-feiiniift  [dA4n6lJi] 

KopoTKitt,  short  Kpaxq^fimift  [krAtJaIJi] 

HdJirifi,  kmg  nojiJK^iimitt  [dAtsaiJi] 

Kp-fenKitt,  strong  Kp-fenHaiimift  [kraptjdlji] 

These  words  are  absolute  superlatives  in  meaning,  as  they 
correspond  to  the  English  very  deep,  very  simple,  etc. 

197.  The  relative  superlative,  the  form  corresponding  to  the  Eng- 
hsh  adjective  in  -est,  is  expressed  in  various  ways  ;  the  most  useful 
form  is  obtained  by  prefixing  caMbifi  to  the  positive  (cf.  Par.  186). 
This  superlative  is  used  both  attributively  and  predicatively. 

198.  The  three  degrees  of  comparison  of  an  adjective  having 
all  the  forms,  attributive  and  predicative,  that  have  been  mentioned, 
are  therefore  as  follows  : 

Attbibutive  Form  Predicative  Form 

Positive 

Kp-feuKift  CTOJI-b  CTOJI-b  Kp'fenOK'B 

Comparative 
Sdji-fee  Kp-feuKift  CTOJi'b  ctojit,  Kp-fenqe 

Superlative 
Kp-fenHaHiuifi  CTOJi'b  A 

CaMblft  Kp-fenKifi  CTOJi'b  CTOJi'b  C^Mblft  Kp-feuKlft       ')   Qj]>f^ 

^  These  forms  are  not  now  so  frequent  as  the  regular  forms  with  Sdnie.  / 


154  LESSON  L  s  198 


Vocabulary 

edp-B,  a,  LI  (oBt)  [vor],  thief  paneHbifi  [ranani],  wounded 

CEHH^ix-B,  Hi^a  [svinets],  lead  {metal)  Hopor6fi,  Hop6jKe  [dArAg6i,dAr659], 

CTOJiilua  [stAiitsA],  capital  {city)  dear,  dearer 

CKapjiaxHHa    [skArtAtinA],    scarlet-  meji^SHLiii  [5oiszni],  iron  (adj.) 

fever  6pHTaHCKiH  [britanski],  British 

nepqaxKa,  h,  h  (ok-b)  [partJdtkA],  HcnancKm  [ispdnski],  Spanish 

glove  3apa6aTbiBaTb  [zArAbdtivAt],  to  earn 

Aop6ra  [dArogA],  road,  way  BopoBaxb  (pyio,  feuih)  [vArAvdit], 

CTpana,  ik,  -^ti  [strAnd],  country  to  steal 

npnCbiJib,    H,    H    [pribii],    profit,  MHt    KaJKexcH    [mns    kdsatsA],    it 

gain  seems  to  me 

rnSejib,  h,  h  [gibai],  ruin  A'fefiCTBHTejibHO        [d8ls(t)vit9inA], 

njiomaffb,    H,    H    (6h)    [ptoJtJAt],  really 

place,  square  66jibnie  Bcero  [bo^ija  fsavo],  more 

3HaHie,  fl,  fl  (ift)  [zndnja],  knowledge  than  all,  most 

Gor^TCTBO,     a,     a    [bAgdts(t)vA],  nanpoTHB-b   {with  gen.)   [nAprotif], 

wealth  opposite 


Exercises 
A.  Translate  : 

(1)  HepHoe  Kp6cjio,  na  KOxopoM'b  bm  chahtc,  ropasao  KpacHB-fee 
^Toro  cxyjia.  (2)  Bijibifi  xji'fe6'b  ne  Bcer^a  AopojKe  qepnaro.  (3) 
GaMoe  6ojibm6e  saanie  bt,  nameM-b  ropoAife — caMan  cxapan  rtepKOBb, 
HO  nocji-feaHHfl  M^Hbine  toh  i^^pkbh,  KOTopyio  bm  Biia-fejiH  HanpoTHB-b 
CBoeii  KBapTHpbi  B-b  cTOjnkixh.  (4)  yMniiiuiaH  yqeHH^a  HHKorAa 
He  xoneT'b  oTB-fenaTb,  Korji;a  ee  cnparnHBaex-b  ao^paa  yHHxejibHHi^a. 
Ona  yMHa,  ho  en  cxapmiH  dpax-b  npnjiejKCH'b  h  ropasao  BHHMaxejib- 
H-fee  en.  (5)  P;^kh  paHeHbix-b  6ifeji'fee  q-feM-b  KpoBaxn,  na  Koxopbn/b 
OHH  jiejKaxTb.  (6)  HeyjKejiH  ne  Bcfe  SHaioxT,,  hxo  xojiepa  Coji-Be 
yjKacHafl  Soji-fesHb  H-hwh  CKapjiaxiina?  (7)  GaMan  xeMHaa  KOMHaxa 
MH-fe  HpaBHXCfl  dojibme  Bcero.  (8)  Mn-fe  roBopHxi,,  mo  caMaa  cxapan 
jKenmnna  BHrnex-b  caMbie  Jiyqmie  qyjiKH  h  nepnaxKH.  (9)  UoHemf 
Sorax-feHinie  ^0Mib^:^HKH  Bcer^a  mejiaiox-b  HM'fexb  en;e  66jibme  scmjih? 
(10)  Mn-fe  KaJKexcH,  qxo  HacxoHmiii  aomtj  ixapa  BejiHKOJi'fenH'fee  ^xoro 
rpoMaanaro  ABopi^a,  Koxopbiii  xen6pb  expoHX-b.  (11)  Xopom6,  qxo 
caMbie  xpyjtoJiK)6iiBbie  Kpecxbane  HHor^a  sapaSaxbmaiox'b  66jibme. 
(12)  Ohh  nojiyqaiox-b  caMyio  SoJibmyio  npnGbiJib.  (13)  npaB^a 
CB'fexji'fee  cojiHLta.  (14)  SnaHie— Jiyqmee  6oraxcxBO.  (15)  FIpaBaa 
nopojKe  36jioxa.  (16)  Bop-b  Bop^ext  He  hjih  npii6biJiH,  a  hjih  cBo6fi 
rii6ejiH. 


§§199-201  LESSON  LI  155 

B.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  In  their  letter  they  say  that  white  bread  is  now  dearer  than  black. 
(2)  Perhaps  your  sister  is  younger  than  you.  (3)  In  the  majority  of  towns 
there  are  broad  streets  and  narrow  streets,  and  all  the  streets  are  narrower 
than  the  squares.  (4)  The  largest  village  is  more  distant  than  your  town. 
(5)  I  do  not  like  that  white  paper  that  you  sent  me,  it  is  too  thin  ;  send  me 
some  thicker  paper  [partitive  genit.].  (6)  Of  course,  the  railway  [iron  way]  is 
shorter  than  the  river.  (7)  It  seems  to  me  that  the  problem  we  are  solving 
to-day  is  far  easier.  (8)  In  our  country  the  evem'ng  in  summer  is  generally 
hotter  than  the  morning.  (9)  The  Russian  language  is,  in  my  opinion,  much 
harder  than  Spanish.  (10)  When  I  was  living  in  that  village,  they  told  me 
that  the  old  blacksmith  was  richer  than  all  the  hard-working  peasants.  (11) 
We  thought  that  the  light  was  brighter  in  the  other  room.  (12)  I  thought 
that  everybody  knew  that  lead  was  heavier  than  iron,  and  also  that  iron 
was  cheaper  than  lead.  (13)  I  do  not  know  whether  the  Russian  Empire  was 
really  larger  than  the  British  Empire,  but  in  the  opinion  of  the  Russians  their 
empire  was  the  largest  of  all. 


LESSON    LI 
The  Aspects  of  the  Verb 

199.  The  Russian  verb  has  no  special  form  for  the  conditional 
mood  of  other  tongues  :  this  is  rendered  by  simply  adding  the 
particle  6bi  [bi]  to  the  past  tense,  e.g. 

Oh-l  HM-fejiT)  6bi  [on  iriist  bi],  He  would  have. 

200.  Nor  is  there  any  special  form  for  subjunctive  or  conjunctive  : 
the  past  tense  introduced  by  the  conjunction  ht66h  [Jtobi],  that, 
in  order  that,  does  duty  for  that  mood,  e.g. 

IJapb  nocjiajit  MHHHCxpa,  qT66bi  oHt  KynHji-L  caATb  My>KHKa  [tsa^r 
pAstdt  ihinistrA,  jtobi  on  kupit  sat  mu3ikd].  The  czar  sent  his  minister,  that 
he  might  buy  the  peasant^ s  garden. 

201.  In  order  to  express  modifications  in  the  meaning  of  verbs 
some  languages  have  elaborate  systems  of  moods  and  tenses  :  this 
is  characteristic  of  Greek,  Latin,  and  the  Romance  tongues.  Other 
languages  achieve  the  same  end  by  the  facihty  with  which  they 
combine,  in  an  almost  endless  variety,  infinitive  and  participles 
with  auxihary  and  modal  auxihary  verbs  :   Enghsh  and  German 


156  LESSON  LI  §§202-204 

are  two  sucli  tongues.  The  Russian  verb  lias  but  tbree  moods : 
infinitive,  imperative,  indicative  ;  and  of  these  only  the  indicative 
appears  in  different  tenses  ;  it  has  the  three  tenses  that  have  been 
discussed.  The  Russian  verb  possesses  only  to  a  very  Hmited  extent 
the  power  of  forming  compound  tenses.  Yet,  lacking  the  character- 
istic features  of  both  the  French  and  the  Enghsh  verb,  the  Russian 
verb  is  one  of  the  subtlest  instruments  of  expression,  as  the  want 
of  variety  in  mood  and  tense  is  more  than  compensated  for  by  the 
modifications  introduced  by  the  use  of  numerous  prefixes  and  by 
transformations  of  the  stem  itself. 

202.  One  form  of  the  verb  indicates  merely  that  the  action  was 
going  on,  is  going  on,  or  will  be  going  on,  without  any  reference  to 
its  beginning  or  end,  without  affording  any  information  as  to  its 
completion.  In  this  form,  which  is  called  the  imperfective  aspect, 
the  action  is  thought  of  only  as  a  duration. 

Most,  not  all,  simple  verbs,  i.e.  verbs  not  compounded  with  a 
prefix,  are  imperfective.  All  the  verbs  under  A,  in  Paragraph  121, 
are  examples  of  this  aspect,  which  therefore,  in  the  indicative  mood, 
has  three  tenses  :  past,  present,  future. 

203.  Another  form  of  the  verb  expresses  the  action  from  the 
point  of  view  of  its  completion  :  it  indicates  that  something  happened 
once  and  was  done  with,  or  that  something  is  about  to  be  begun  and 
completed.    This  form  of  the  verb  is  called  the  perfective  aspect. 

All  the  verbs  under  B,  in  Paragraph  122,  are  examples  of  this 
aspect.  Now,  as  an  action  cannot  at  one  and  the  same  time  be 
conceived  as  perfected  and  as  still  going  on,  this  aspect  has  no 
present  tense  ;  it  has  only  two  tenses  :  past  and  future. 

204.  For  foreigners  the  chief  pecuharity  of  this  perfective  aspect 
is,  that  the  future  tense  has  exactly  the  appearance  of  a  present 
tense.^  That  is  to  say,  all  the  verbs  under  B,  in  Paragraph  122, 
have  a  tense  with  the  inflexions  of  a  present  tense  and  the  meaning 
of  an  immediate  future.  A  mistake  that  must  be  carefully  avoided, 
is  to  form  the  future  of  the  perfective  aspect  on  the  model  of  the 
imperfective  future. 

^  The  verbs  given  in  Par.  160  are  examples  of  this  perfective  future. 


§§206-206  LESSON  LI  157 

205.  The  complete  scheme  of  the  verb  in  the  infinitive,  indicative, 
and  imperative,  is  therefore  as  follows  : 

Impebfbotive  Aspect  Perfective  Aspect 

Infinitive 
HHCdTb,  to  loritey  to  he  busied  with      Hannc^Tb,    to   turite   once,    to   start 
writing  writing  and  get  it  finish^ 

Indicative  Past  ^ 
fl  nHC^JiT*,  /  vrrotey  I  was  writing,      h  nannc^Ji'L,  I  wrote  once,  I  Jiave 
I     was    occupied    in    writing,  written   on   a  definite  occasion, 

I  buried  myself  with  ivriting  I  have  completed  the  writing 

Indicative  Present 
H  niim^,  I  write,  I  do  write,  I  am      None 

^*'*^  Indicative  Future 

fl  ^fjiy  HHC^TB,  /  shall  write,  I  shall      H  nannm^,  /  shall  write  now  or  soon, 
busy  myself  with  writing  I  shall  get  the  writing  started  and 


Imperative 
nnm^xe,  write,  make  it  your  practice      Hannm^TC,  write  now,  write  something 
to  write,  be  busied  with  writing  definite   on  a  definite  occasion, 

write  and  get  it  finished 

206.  In  the  hst  of  verbs  given  mider  A,  in  Paragraph  121,  it 
will  be  observed  that  each  word  is  accompanied  by  a  prefix  enclosed 
in  brackets,  or  by  one  of  the  signs  (1),  *,  or  (2). 

a.  Verbs  marked  (2)  have  no  separate  form  for  the  perfective 
aspect,  are  not  used  as  perfective  veits,  or  undergo  a  real  change 
of  meaning  in  the  so-called  perfective. 

6.  *  indicates  a  verb  whose  perfective  aspect  is  expressed  by 
the  use  of  a  different  root,  e.g. 

roBop6TB,2  cKasdTb,  to  say. 

c.  (1 )  indicates  a  verb  whose  perfective  is  derived  by  modifying  the 
form,  often  the  length,  of  the  stem  or  by  changing  the  termination ;  e.g. 
cnp^mHBaTb,  cnpocHTb,^  to  ask, 
P'femdTb,  p-feniHTb,  to  resolve. 

In  this  class  of  words  the  perfective  is  frequently  a  simpler  form 

than  the  imperfective,  the  latter  being  derived  from  the  former. 

^  These  Past  Tenses  also  render  our  /  have  or  had  written. 
^  roBopttTi.=<o  speak  has  as  the  perfective  noroBopATi.. 
3  For  this  type  see  Par.  232. 


158  LESSON  LI  §§207-208 

d.  Where  a  prefix  is  given,  it  is  this  prefix  that  is  used  to  form 
the  perfective  aspect,  e.g. 

n]^MaTb,  non^MaTb,  to  think. 
nji^Kaxb,  sanjiaKaTb,  to  weep. 

The  Hst  of  perfective  verbs  given  under  B  in  Paragraph  122  is 
marked  in  the  same  way. 

207.  All  the  words  in  those  Hsts  are  in  frequent  use  and  as  the 
lists  were  not  compiled  for  the  special  purpose  of  illustrating  the 
formation  of  the  aspects,  they  may  not  unfairly  be  regarded  as  a 
representative  collection  of  verbs.  It  would  therefore  appear 
(1)  that  the  majority  of  Kussian  verbs  come  under  headings  c  ov  d 
of  the  last  paragraph,  i.e.  that  they  have  a  perfective  aspect ;  (2) 
that  perfectives  formed  by  modification  of  the  stem  are  numerous  ; 
(3)  that  any  prefix  may  be  used  to  form  the  perfective,  but  that  the 
prefix  no  is  of  far  greater  frequency  than  any  other.  Very  often 
this  no  has  the  effect  ot  '  doing  the  action  a  little.'' 

208.  Which  prefix,  if  any,  is  precisely  the  right  one  to  use  for 
any  given  verb,  can  be  learned  only  by  observation.  If  any  other 
prefix  be  taken,  the  compound  verb  resulting,  if  it  really  exist,  is 
indeed  a  perfective  verb,^  but  one  in  which  the  meaning  has  been 
altered  according  to  the  meaning  of  the  prefix.  The  peculiarity 
of  THE  perfective  aspect  of  an  imperfective  verb  is,  that  the  force 
of  the  prefix  is  more  completely  exhausted  in  making  the  verb  per- 
fective, though  even  in  thi^form  the  modification  of  the  sense 
may  be  so  decided,  that  the  meaning  is  best  rendered  into  English 
by  a  different  verb. 

Some  illustrations  : 

Simple  verb  nHcaxb  [pisd^t],  to  write  ji.'fejiaTb  [d^tAt],  to  do 

Perfective     HanncaTb  [iiApisa^t]  CAibjiaxb  [sdstAt] 

Other  Com-  cnHcaxb  [spisd^t],  to  copi/  nan'fejiaTb  [iiAdstAt],  to  prepare 

pounds      BixinHcaTb    [vipisAt],   to  Biia'fejiaTb  [vidatAt],  to  fashion,   to 
extract,  sitbscribe  for  execute 

Simple  verb  nnxb  [pit],  to  drink  njiaxiiTb  [ptAtit],  to  pay 

Perfective     Bbmnxb  [vipit]  sanjiaxnxb  [zAptAtit] 

Other  Com-  naniixbCfl  [nApitsA],  to      oxnjiaxnxb  [AtptAtit],  to  pay  back 
pounds          drink  one's  fill  of  Bi^injiaxHXb  [viptAtit],  to  pay  out 

^  See  note  following  this  paragraph. 


§209  LESSON  LI  159 

Simple  verb  Jifmscrh  [dumAt],  to  think 
Perfective  nofl;^MaTB  [pAdumAt] 
Other  Compounds  BJ^myuscTh  [vidumAt],  to  devise 

3aji;>^MaTb  [zAdiiinAt],  to  propose  to  oneself 

All  the  verbs  given  under  *  other  compounds  '  are  perfective  verbs 
in  virtue  of  the  fact  that  they  are  simple  verbs  compounded  with 
prefixes,  and  corresponding  imperfective  forms  are  made  from  most 
of  them  on  a  system  which  is  explained  in  Paragraph  232. 

Note. — There  is,  however,  a  class  of  verbs  of  which  xoahtb  and 
HTTH  (for  the  distinction  see  Paragraph  40)  may  be  taken  as  the 
type.  These  words  occur  in  two  forms,  each  form  having  both 
imperfective  and  perfective  aspects.  xoflHTb  is  called  the  indefinite, 
potential,  or  abstract  form  of  the  word,  and  htth  the  definite,  actual, 
or  concrete  form.  In  verbs  belonging  to  this  category  the  com- 
pounds of  the  indefinite  verb  are  all  imperfective  and  the  com- 
pounds of  the  definite  verb  are  perfective.  (See  Voc.  LII  (4) ;  LIV 
(5) ;  LV  (5) ;  LVI  (4).) 

Such  verbs  are  : 

(no)6^raTb  (aio)  and  (no)6'fejKaTb,  to  run 

(no)BOj];HTb  (jk;^,  6AHmb)  (no)BecTH,  to  lead 

(no)B03HTb  (jk^,  63Hmb)  (no)Be3TH,  to  convey 

(no)roHHTb  (>iK))  (no)rHaTb,  to  drive,  persecute 

(no)jieTaTb  (aio)  (no)jieTibTb  (nf,  ernmb),  to  fly 

(no)HOCHTb  (m^,  6cHMb)  (no)HecTii,  to  carry 

(no)njiaBaTb  (aio)      3  (no)njibiTb  (hiBf,  enib),  to  swim,  float 

(no)'fe3ji;HTb  ('fe3}Ky,  ^anuib)        (no)'fexaTb,  to  drive,  ride,  travel 

209.  Onty  a  few  exercises  on  the  use  of  the  aspects  are  given, 
but  before  undertaking  these  exercises  it  will  be  useful  to  read 
carefully  the  following  passages,  observing,  in  the  light  of  Pars. 
199-208,  in  which  aspect  each  verb  appears.  New  words  occurring 
in  these  passages  are  given  in  the  vocabulary,  but  as  the  purpose 
in  printing  them  here  is  solely  to  illustrate  the  distinction  between 
the  imperfective  and  the  perfective,  a  close  translation  of  each 
passage  is  given :  the  English  version  is,  for  our  present  purpose, 
as  important  as  the  Kussian. 


160  LESSON  LI  §209 

1 

{Perfective  Verbs  are  in  Italics) 

Jld^Ka  6liji^  roT6Ba.  H  crbjih  bt>  nee  cl  JteyMii  rpeSi^aMH.  Ohh 
omndjiujiu  u  yddpujiu  Bt  Becjia. 

H660  6iijio  HCHO.  Jlyna  cinjia.  nor6Ha  6wji^  THxan.  Bojira 
Hecjiacb  poBHo  h  cnoKofino.  JIojtKa  cKOJibSHJia  no  noB^pxHocxH 
TeMnLix-L  BOJiHt.  npouuio  OKOJio  nojiy^aca.  Mh  docmdzAii  cpe- 
fliiHbi  p-feKii.     Bjipyr-L  rpeSi^iii  HdHCUiu  inenxaTtcH  M^JK^y  co66k). 

—  Hto  TaK6e?  cnpocujih  h. 

—  He  SHaeMTj. 

FpeSuii  CMOTp'fejiH  B-B  onuf  CTopoHy.  Fjiaaa  MOii  npduAjiu  T6/Ke 
HanpaBJi^Hie,  h  h  yeudrnjih  b-b  cyMpaK-fe  ht6-to.  HesnaKOMbift  npen- 
M^TT.  njibijn>  BHHS-b  no  Bojirib.  npnSjiHJKajicfl.  Jlyna  aaiu/id  3a 
66jiaKO.  IIjibiB^mift  npnapaK-b  cdrbJicuicR  e^^e  TCMn-fee.  Oh-b  6biji'b 
oil,  Menfl  yjKc  6jih3ko,  a  h  Bce  eme  ne  Mor-b  ero  pasAUHumh. 

Bapyr-b  Jiyna  ei^iiujia  H3b-3a  66jiaKa,  h  osapd/ia  3p'fejiHme  ymacnoe. 
K-b  naivi-b  naBCTp-fe^y  njibijia  BHcfejini^a,  ymeep^HcdeHHaa  na  njioxy. 
Tpn  T^jia  BHcfejiH  na  nepeKJiannnife.  Boji'fe3nennoe  JiioSonbiTCTBo 
OBAadrbJio  Mnoio.     H  aaxomfbAh  ese/iHH^mb  na  JiHLta  Biic'fejibHHKOB'b. 

«  KannxancKaH  J];6qKa, » 
n^mKHn-b. 


{Perfective  Verbs  are  in  Italics) 

BojibuiaH,  BbicoKan,  TeMnaa  34jia,  ocerhii^eHHaR  TOjibKO  Hexbipbiviii 
lijiH  nflxbib  CB'feHaMH,  ch  KOxopbiMH  AOKXopa  noAXOAHjiH  ocMaxpHBaxb 
p^nenbix-b,  6hijik  SynBajibno  nojina.  HociijibmnKH  desnpecxanno 
BHOCHJiH  panenbix-b,  cKJia^biBajin  hxx>  ojiMWh  n6ji;ji'fe  npyroro  na 
noji-b,  na  KOxdpoM-b  ym6  6biJio  xaKX)  x^cno,  qxo  necnacxnbie  xojiKajincb 
H  MOKnyjiH  B-b  KpoBH  Apyr'b  apyra,  n  mjin  sa  noBbiMH.  Gecxpbi,  co 
cnoKOHHbiMH  JiHitaMH  H  cb  BbipaH^^HicMx.  A-fenxcjibHaro  npaKxii- 
qecKaro  yqacxin,  xo  xaMb,  xo  chmt*  MCJibKajin  uemjiy  panenbiMH. 
J^OKxopa,  Cb  sacyneHHUMU  pynaBaMH,  ocMaxpHBajin,  onj^nbmajiH 
H  3onfl6poBajiH  panbi,  necMoxpn  na  yjKacHbie  cxonbi  cxpasajibLteB-b. 
Oflnn-b  H3'b  AOKxopoB-b  cHfl-fejib  6kojio  HBepn  3a  cxojiHKOMb,  n  B-b 
xy  MHn^xy,  nan-b  bt*  KOMnaxy  eoiuejib  o^nnep-b,  3anHCbiBaji'b  yjK6 
532. 

«  GeBacx6nojibCKie  Pa3CKa3bi,» 
ToJicx6ft. 


209  LESSON  LI  161 


Translation 

The  boat  was  ready.  I  embarked  (seated  myself  into  it)  with  two  boatmen . 
They  cast  off  and  set  to  work  (struck  away)  at  the  oars. 

The  sky  was  clear  (bright).  The  moon  shone.  The  weather  was  calm. 
The  Volga  flowed  smoothly  and  quietly  along.  The  boat  glided  over  the 
surface  of  the  dark  waves.  About  half-an-hour  elapsed.  We  had  reached  the 
middle  of  the  river.  Suddenly  the  oarsmen  began  to  whisper  to  each  other 
(among  themselves). 

"  What  is  that  ?  "  I  asked.     "  We  do  not  know." 

The  oarsmen  were  looking  in  a  certain  direction  (to  one  side).  My  eyes 
took  the  same  direction,  and  I  caught  sight  in  the  gloom  of  something  or  other. 
The  unknown  object  was  floating  down  the  Volga.  It  was  approaching. 
The  moon  went  behind  a  cloud.  The  floating  apparition  became  still  darker. 
It  was  already  close  to  me,  but  I  was  still  unable  to  make  it  out. 

Suddenly  the  moon  shone  out  from  behind  the  cloud,  and  illumined  a  terrible 
spectacle.  The  thing  that  was  floating  along  to  meet  us  was  a  gallows /os^ericd 
to  a  raft.  Three  bodies  were  hanging  from  the  crossbeam.  A  morbid  curiosity 
mastered  me.  I  was  seized  with  the  desire  to  look  upon  the  faces  of  the  dead 
men  (hanged  men). 

The  Captain's  Daughter, 
Pushkin. 


Translation 

The  great,  high,  dark  hall  lighted  only  by  the  four  or  five  candles,  by  the 
aid  of  which  the  doctors  were  stepping  up  to  examine  the  wounded,  was 
literally  full.  Stretcher-bearers  were  continually  bringing  in  wounded  men  ; 
they  laid  them  down  one  beside  the  other  on  the  floor,  on  which  they  were 
already  so  closely  packed  that  the  unfortunate  men  were  roUing  up  against 
each  other  and  weltering  (being  drenched)  in  each  other's  blood  ;  [then]  they 
would  go  for  more.  The  nurses,  with  unruffled  countenance  and  an  expres- 
sion of  active  practical  sympathy,  flitted  hither  and  thither  among  the 
wounded.  The  doctors,  with  sleeves  turned  up,  examined,  palpated,  probed 
the  wounds,  in  spite  of  the  awful  groans  of  the  sufferers.  One  of  the  doctors 
was  sitting  near  the  door  at  a  little  table  and  at  the  moment  when  the 
officer  came  into  the  room  he  was  already  entering  number  532. 

Tales  of  Sebastopol, 
Tolstoi. 
L 


162  LESSON  LI  §209 

3 

{Perfective  Verbs  are  in  Italics) 

—  Ilocji^uiaii,  cji-fendtil  cKasd/ih  oh'l:  —  depern  to  m^^cto  .  .  . 
SHaeuib?  THM-B  CoraTbie  TOBapLi  .  .  .  cnaofcd  xosHnny,  hto  h  eM^ 
66jibme  ne  cjiyr^ .  J^ifejia  nouiJiu  xyflo ,  oht,  Menii  66  Jibuie  ne  yeudumh : 
Tenepb  onacHo:  nomdy  HCKaxb  paSoTbi  B-b  npyroM-b  M-fecx-fe;  xaM-b  a 
6^«y  }Kji;aTb  y^oSnaro  cjiyqaa.  fla  ckq^hcil,  ecjinS-b  ohT)  nojiynme 
njiaTHJi-b  3a  Tpyabi,  xan-b  u  h  6bi  ero  ne  noKunyjih.  Ona  noihdemh 
CO  MHOK);  em  nejibSH  s^-fecb  ocxaBaTbCH. 

—  A  fli  cKaadjih  cji-fenott  >Kajio6HbiM'b  rojiocoM-b. 

On-b  HTo-TO  nojiooicuAh  cjiifenoMy  B-b  pyny,  npuMOJieueh:  « Ha, 

Kynd  ceG-fe  npHHHK0B'b.»  —  TojibKo?   cnasdAh  cji-fenott.     «Hy,  botT) 

Te6^   eme, »   h   yndemaR  MOHexa   saaeenrbjia,  y^apacb   o   KaMCHb^. 

Cji-fenoii  eii  ne  noduRjih.     Ohh  cm/iu  B-b  jiojuKy;  Bibxepi.  ayji-b  ox-b 

6epera;  ohh  Si^icxpo  noHecjidcb.     ^ojiro  npn  cB-fex-fe  whcRixa.  MCJib- 

KaJiX)  S-fejibiH  napycx>  M^H^^y  bojihT);  cji-feHoii  Bce  CHflibji-b  na  6eper^ 

H  HJiaKaji-b,  H  AOJiro  sojiro.  ^     ,  „     , 

«  FepoH  Hamero  BpeMenn  » 

[slightly  altered], 
JlepMOHTOBT>. 

4 

{Perfective  Verbs  are  in  Italics) 

TeMa  q^BCXBOBaji-b  ce6A  OKonqaxejibHo  cddmuMh  cb  noaJiuiH: 
K6pnycT>,  eme  xaKT>  neaaBHO  KasaBinittcH  a^JioM-b  pmiueHHbiMh, 
omodeuHyjicH  Kyaa-xo  najieKO-aajieKo . 

— Tbi  Korjia,  TeMa,  nomdeuibl — cnpocuAa  Haxama,  Bxopan 
cecxpa,  cxapaacb  cnpumh  BOJinoBaBiniH  ee  nyBCXBa  nosx>  MacKoft 
npocxoro  jiio6onbixcxBa. 

TeMa  sazjiRHyAh  B-b  rjiasa  cecxpiJi. 

— HHityna  fl  ne  nomdy,  omerhmujih  ohx>,  eadoxHijeh,  h  ecmaeh, 
HanpdeujiCR  bx.  Ka6HH6xx.. 

TaMx>  OHX)  marajix>  bx>  coananiH  npuHeceuHou  hmx>  jKepxBM. 
M6>KexX)-6bixb,  hjih  jKepxBbi  ero  BHnx>  6bmx>  cjihuikomx.  cnoK6eHx>, 
HO  xifeMx>  He  MCH-fee  ^xo  He  M-femajio  eMy  cnnxaxb  ce6H  JKepxBoii,  h 
eMy'  Kasajiocb,  hxo  ohx>  cpaay  xohho  eiiipoch  na  nibcKOJibKO  Ji'fexx>. 
Ohx>  ^626  Ha  HHBaHXj,  sajiootcujih  3a  rojioBy  py^KH  h  aad^MQAca.  o 
xoMx>,  Hxo  jKH3Hb  He  xaKafl  npocxan  h  JierKaa  Ben^b,  KaKoii  ona 
Kamexcfl  no  napyjKHOMy  BHuy. 

TaKx>  H  ycH^jih,  ny^Man  Bce  o  xomt>  JKe. 

«  CeMefiHaa  XpoHHKa,  v> 

FapHHTj. 

1  o= against  governs  the  accusative. 


§209  LESSON  LI  163 

8 

Translation 

"  Listen,  blind  boy,"  he  said ;  "  keep  a  watch  on  that  place. — You  know  ? 
There  is  great  wealth  (are  rich  wares)  there.  Tell  the  master  that  I  am  no 
longer  his  servant.  Things  have  turned  out  (gone)  badly,  he  wonH  see  me  any 
more  ;  it's  dangerous  now.  I  am  going  to  seek  work  in  another  place.  There 
I  shall  await  a  convenient  opportunity.  And  tell  him,  if  he  had  paid  me  better 
for  my  labour,  I  should  not  have  left  him  in  the  lurch.  She  is  going  to  go  with 
me  ;  it  is  impossible  for  her  to  remain  here." 

"  And  what  about  me  ?  "  said  the  blind  boy  in  a  piteous  voice. 

He  put  something  in  the  blind  boy's  hand,  adding  {having  said)  as  he  did 
so,  "  There,  buy  yourself  some  spice-buns."  "  That's  all  ?  "  said  the  blind 
boy.  "  Well,  there  is  something  more  for  you,"  and  a  falling  {fallen)  coin 
tinkled  as  it  struck  (striking)  the  stone.  The  blind  boy  did  not  pick  it  up. 
They  took  their  places  in  the  boat ;  the  wind  was  blowing  off  the  shore  and 
they  ivere  swiftly  carried  away.  For  a  long  time  the  white  sail  in  the  midst 
of  the  waves  shimmered  in  the  light  of  the  moon  ;  the  blind  boy  still  continued 
sitting  on  the  shore  and  wept  and  wept. 

A  Hero  of  Modern  Times ^ 
Lbrmontof. 

4 

Translation 

Timothy  felt  himself  driven  once  for  all  from  his  position  \i.e.  felt  that 
he  had  no  ground  left  to  stand  upon] ;  [his  entrance  into]  the  corps  [of 
officers],  which,  such  a  short  time  before,  had  appeared  a  settled  thing,  had 
[now]  receded  to  a  point  (somewhere)  far,  far  away. 

"  When  are  you  to  set  off,  Timothy  ?  "  asked  Natalia,  his  second  sister, 
trying  to  con^ceal  the  emotions  that  agitated  her  under  the  mask  of  mere 
curiosity. 

Timothy  looked  into  his  sister's  eyes. 

"I  am  not  going  anywhere,"  he  answered  with  a  sigh  {having  sighed) 
and  getting  up  {having  stood  up),  he  betook  himself  to  his  room. 

There  he  strode  up  and  down  in  the  consciousness  of  the  sacrifice  he 
had  made  (that  had  been  made  by  him).  Perhaps,  for  a  victim,  his  aspect 
was  too  calm,  but  nevertheless  that  did  not  prevent  him  from  regarding 
himself  as  a  victim,  and  it  seemed  to  him  that  he  had,  as  it  were,  grown 
older  all  at  once  by  several  years.  He  lay  down  on  the  sofa,  put  his  hands 
behind  his  head,  and  gave  himself  up  to  musing  on  the  fact  that  life  was  not 
such  a  simple,  easy  thing  as  it  seemed  on  a  superficial  view. 

And  thus,  still  thinking  over  that  fact,  befell  asleep. 

Family  Chronicle, 
Garin. 


164  LESSON  LII  §§210-212 


LESSON  LII 
The  Imperative 

210.  As  indicated  in  Paragraph  205,  both  the  imperfective  and 
the  perfective  aspects  have  an  imperative  mood,  formed  in  the  im- 
perfective from  the  present  and  in  the  perfective  from  the  future 
tense. 

The  2nd  singular  ends  in  -li,  -h  or  -h ; 
the  2nd  plm-al  ends  in  -Hie,  -HTe,  -LTe. 

211.  I.  When  the  termination  of  the  2nd  singular  is  preceded 
by  a  vowel,  change  the  termination  into  -ft  and  -ftxe,  e.g. 

CH-fejiaemb  cfeemb  CTapaemBCfl 

CA^jiatt  [sdetA!],  do  cfeft  [s6i],  sow  cxapaftcb  [stArdis],  try 

Cfl'fejiaHTe  [sdetAlta]  cibftre  [s6lt9]  cxapaiiTecb  [stAraltas] 

(a)  The  verbs  in  Par.  162  change  the  h  which  follows  the  initial 
consonant  into  e,  e.g. 

nbemb 

n6ft  [p61],  drink 
nefixe  [p^Ita] 

(6)  The  verb  HaTb,  which  is  very  irregular  in  the  future  tense, 
has  JXSlPl  [dai],  flattTe  [daita]  (cf.  Par.  231). 

212.  II.  When  the  termination  of  the  2nd  singular  is  preceded 
by  a  consonant : 

A.  If  the  termination  is  accented  in  the  1st  singular,^  change 
the  termination  of  the  2nd  singular  into  H  and  Hxe,  e.g. 

necf  CKajK^  xomf 

Hecemb  CKajKcmb  x6ji;Hmb 

HecH  [nasi],  carry  CKSimA  [skA3i],  say,  tell  xoAti  [xAdi],  go 

HCCHTC  [nasita]  CKamAxe  [skA3it8]  xouhxc  [xAdita] 

jiio6jii5  y^f 

jubSnmb  ynnmb 

JI1066  [iubi],  love  ynik  [utjf],  teach  (learn) 

jiK)6Axe  [iubita]  yq^xe  [utjita] 

^  The  accentuation  of  the  1st  sing.  pres.  is  generally  that  of  the  infinitive* 


§§2ia-2i6  LESSON  LII  165 

B.  If  the  stem  is  accented  in  the  1st  singular,  change  the  termina- 
tion of  the  2nd  singular  into  h  and  bxe  ;  e.g. 

BJiibsy  njia^y  G^sy  (future) 

Bji-feaemfa  njianemt  dyaemb 

BJi-fesb  [vie^s],  climh            njia^b  [ptatj],  weep  6yAb  [bu^t],  be 

BJi-fesbTC  [vksta]                 njiaHbTC  [ptatjta]  O^Abxe  [bd^ta] 

C.  If  two  consonants  precede  the  termination,  then,  irrespective 
of  where  the  accent  faUs,  change  the  termination  into  H  and  Hxe  ;  e.g. 
KpiiKHy  [kriknu]  M^ajiH)  [lii^dlu]  nyni^  [pujtjd] 
KpiiKHcmb  [kriknaj]            M^AJinmb  [ih^diij]                n^CTHmb  [ptistij] 

KpiiKHH  [krikni],  cry  out      MCflJiH  [ihedii],  hesitate        nycTH  [pustl],  let 
KpiaKHHxe  [krflinita]  m^ajihtc  [rii^dlite]  nycTHTe  [pustita] 

213.  The  verb  jichb  has  Jifln>  ^  [lak],  Jiarxe  [iakta],  lie  down. 

„      „    -fecTB    „  tmb[jeS],'fjmbTe[jeSt8],ea^.  (Cf.Par.220.) 

214.  The  first  plural  of  the  future  perfective  may  be  used  without 

a  subject  as  the  equivalent  for  let  us  do  etc. ;  e.g. 

Gfl'fejiaeM'L  TO,  HTO  oht.  naM-b  BejiHTi>  [sdstAJam  to,  Jto  on  nam  valit]. 
Let  us  do  what  he  orders  us  (dat.)  to  do. 

215.  The  imperative  nycKaft  [puskai]  of  nycKaxb,  to  allow^  or 
the  form  nycxb  [pu^st]  is  used  with  the  3rd  sing,  or  plur.  of  the  present 
imperfective  or  future  perfective  as  3rd  sing,  or  plur.  imperative ;  e.g. 

nycKaii  on-b  npoHAeT-b  ca^-b  [puskdi  on  prAidot  sat],  Let  him  go 
through  the  garden. 

216.  Many  salutations  and  other  frequently  used  expressions 
are  imperatives ;  e.g. 

sjtpaBCTByiiTe  [zdras(tvul)t8],  good  day,  how  are  you? 

is  really  the  imperative  derived  from  the  present  SApaBCXByK),  euib 

etc.  of  the  verb  SflpaBCXBoeaxb,  and  means  hail  I  he  of  good  health  ! 

npon;aftTel  [prAJtJalta],  farewell ! 

(no  CBHsanifl  [dA  sviddnja],  au  revoir) 
and  npocTATcI  [prAstite],  pardon  me/ 

are  respectively  the  imperfective  and  perfective  imperative  of 
npomaxb,  npocxnxb. 

CMOTpHTel  [smAtrita],  look  out/    H3BHHiiTeI  [izvinita],  excuse  me/ 
nomaJiyHl  [pA3dtui],  after  all,  as  far  as  I  am  concerned,  may  be; 
nojKajiyftCTal  [pA3dt(ui)stA],  please. 

^  The  only  imperative  ending  in  i. 


166  LESSON  LII  §§217-218 

217.  The  imperfective  imperative  is  a  general  command ;  the 
perfective  imperative  is  an  indication  that  something  is  to  be  done 
now,  at  once. 

In  negative  commands  the  imperfective  form  is  generally  used. 

218.  The  infinitive  is  often  used  instead  of  the  imperative  in 
general  commands  or  prohibitions,  e.g. 

He  BCxaBaTbl  [na  fstAva^t],  Do  not  stand  up! 
He  roBopHTbl  [na  gAVArit],  No  speaking  ! 

Vocabulary 

(1)  Perfective  formed  with  prefix 

(no)6oiiTbCfl  (lb,  nmb)  [(pA)bAJa^tsA],  to  fear 
JjKeHb  (JKry,i  jKJKeuib,  JKryT-B)  [setj],  to  hum 
\c>Keqb  (coJKr^)  [ssetj] 

(noji;o)>KAaTb  (y^,  emb)  [(pAdA)5da^t],  to  wait,  await 

(2)  Imperfective  in  axb,  perfective  in  HTb 
rnojiyqaTb  I  A  [pAtutJait],  to  receive 
InojiyMHTb  (qy,  ^qnmb)  [pAtutjit] 
fnocTynaTb  I  A  [pAstupd^t],  to  act,  behave 
\nocTynHTb  (njiib,  ^nnmb)  [pAstupit] 
JnycKaxb  I A  [puskd^t],  to  let,  allow,  admit 
\nycTiiTb  {m^,  ^CTHmb)  [pustit] 

(npomaxb  I  A  [prAjtJd^t],  to  remit,  pardon 
npocTHTb  {u\f,  CTiimb)  [prAstit] 

(3)  Imperfective  long  :  perfective  short. 
(In  this  group  many  of  the  imperfectives,  especially  those  in  eaxb,  are 
verbs  indicating  the  repeated  or  continuous  occurrence  of  the  act,  and  are 
derived  from  the  perfective  verb,  which  is  itself  a  compound  of  a  simple  verb. 
Cf.  Par.  232.) 

rnoKasbiBaTb  I A  [pAkdzivAt],  to  show 

\n0Ka3aTb  (my,  aJKcmb)  [pAkAzd^t] 

/BCxaBaTb  (Bcxaib,  euib)  [fstAvd^t],  to  stand  up,  get  up,  rise 

^BCTaxb  (any,  emb)  [fstait] 

r  oai^BaTbCH  I  A  [Adavd^tsA],  to  clothe  oneself,  dress 

[oji^ThCH.  (^Hycb,  embcfl)  [Ad^^tsA] 

Jpaan'feBaTbCfl  I A  [rAzdavd^tsA],  to  undress 

\pa3jtibTbCH  [rAzd6^tsA] 

{yMbiBaxbca  I A  [umivd^tsA],  to  wash  {oneself) 
yMi^iTbCfl  (oH),  emb)  [umitsA] 

^  Imperative  mm,  mrHxe. 


§218  LESSON  LII  167 

(4)  Imperfective  and  perfective  from  different  roots  or  from 
different  forms  of  cognate  stems 
/npoxoaHTb  (mfy  OAHUib)  [prAXAdit],  to  traverse 
\npofiTH  (nf,  euib)  [prAiti] 
f  npHHOCHTB  (m^,  ocHUib)  [pririAsit],  to  bring 
\npHHecTli  (c;^,  enib)  [prinasti] 

(Cf.  note  to  Par.  208.) 

T6jibK0  qxo  [to^ikA  |to],  just  (with  «o  chx-l  nopi.  [dAsixpor]  {up  to 
past  tenses)  these  times),  till  now 

nopa  cj^'fejiaxb  (perf.)  5x0  [pArd  Cb  T-fex-b  nopi.  [stexpor]  {since  those 
sdstAt  stA],  it  is  time  to  do  that  times),  since  then 

nopa,  ik,  -^y,  -^u  [pAra],  time 

Proverbial  Sayings 

KfA  (from  KOBaxb)  JKeji-feao,  noKa  ropHqo,  Strike  the  iron  while  ifs  hot. 

yeaJKatt  cxapHKa,  caMX.  6fji,emh  cxapx..  Honour  {esteem)  the  aged 
{man),  you  will  be  old  yourself 

B-feKX)  JKHBii,  B'feK'b  yqilCb,  Live  a  life-time  {an  age),  learn  a  life-time,  i.e. 
it's  never  too  late  to  learn, 

Beperii  KoneeqKy  npo  nepHbiii  nenb,  Save  the  farthing  for  a  rainy  day. 

J1io6h  6jiiiJKHHro,  KaKX>  caMor6  ce6fl,  Love  thy  neighbour  as  thyself 

He  MOJiH  Ji'fexa  aojiraro,  mojih  xenjiaro,  Don't  pray  for  a  long  summer, 
pray  for  a  warm  one. 

.    rr,       T  ^  Exercises 

A.  Translate  : 

I.  ji-fejiaiixe,  cfeflxe,  cxapaiixecb,  aaBaft,  cjiy^maftxe,  cxott,  cxpottxe, 
nycKatt,  npomaiixe,  sjipaBcxByiixe,  HM'fettxe,  ne  66iixecb,  noJKa- 
Jiyiicxa,  play,  answer,  work,  ask  questions,  read,  build,  continue,  laugh,  do 
not  blush,  dress,  undress,  let,  farewell,  sing,  wash,  behave. 

{a)  n6iixe,  Ji^iixe,  beat,  wind,  sew. 

II.  {a)  HecH,  CKajKHxe,  cnpocHxe,  xoanxe,  n^iixe,  yniixecb,  speak, 
show,  sleep,  sit  down,  pardon  me,  live,  seek,  write,  look,  inquire,  plough,  act 
{perf),  bring. 

(6)  BJi^3bxe,  njia^b,  Bcxanb,  eat,  sit  down,  dress, 
(c)  Kp^KHHxe,  Me«JiHxe,  let,  press,  reap,  wait,  burn. 

III.  cA-fejiaeMX),  noHeceMX>,  sanjiaqeMX.,  KpliKHeMX>,  let  us  sow,  let 
us  listen,  stand,  build,  play,  go,  live,  look,  wait,  write,  burn,  dress,  wash. 

B.  Translate  : 

(1)  IIpHHeciixe  MH-fe,  noH^ajiyHcxa,  5xy  H6ByK)  p^ccKyio  KHHryl 

(2)    npHHOCHXe      MH'fe     OKCflH^BHO     Xexpa^H     CXapmHXX>     yHCHHKOB'bl 


168  LESSON  LIII  §219 

(3)  JIojKHxecb  cnaTb  Ka>Kflbiii  BdHep-b  b-l  ceMb  Hacoetl  (4)  Ilopa 
UTTik  cnaTbl  Pasfl^Hbxecb,  M^jib^HKH,  h  siAne  cnaxbl  (5)  niiuiH 
M^flJieHHO  H  npaBHJibHoI  (6)  HanniiTHTe  to,  ^to  h  BaM-B  CKam;^I 
(7)  GMOTpHxel      (8)  nocMOTpHxe    to,    hto    OHii    fl-fejiaioT-b    Tenepbl 

(9)  He  roBopi'iTe  6ft  o  tom-b,  ^to  h  BaMi>  TOJibKo  hto  paacKasajiTiI 

(10)  He  a-fejiafixe  ^Torol  (11)  He  oTB-fenattTe  Ha  dTOTTb  Bonpocbl 
(12)  nycKdii  OHa  CA-fejiaeT-b,  KaK-b  ona  JKejiaeTi,!  (13)  IlycTb  ohh 
noPLjxfT-h  Tenepb  b-b  uiKdjiyl  (14)  Bcer^a  cjiymafiTe  to,  hto  roBO- 
p^T-b  yqiiTejibI      (15)  Y^HTejib  roBopHTi.  xen^pb;  nocjiymaHTC  erol 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  Stand  up  at  once.  (2)  Always  sit  on  this  chair,  please.  (3)  Don't 
do  that.  (4)  Let  him  receive  the  money.  (5)  Read  this  paper  quickly. 
(6)  Read  aloud  at  home.  (7)  Let  us  have  a  look  ^  at  what  is  going  on  out  of 
doors.  (8)  Show  me,  please,  what  you  are  holding  in  your  hand.  (9)  Do 
not  eat  so  quickly.  (10)  Halt  [stand].  (11)  Get  up  early  in  the  morning, 
wash,  dress,  and  go  to  school ;  do  [act]  so  every  day.  (12)  It  is  time  to  get 
up,  boys.     Get  up,  wash,  dress,  and  go  to  school.     (13)  Let  them  live  here. 


LESSON  LIII 

219.  Declension  of  BpeMfl,  time. 

Sing.  Plur. 

nom.  Bp^MH  [vr^riiA]  BpcMCH^  [vrariian^] 

gen.  — CHH  [vr6m9m]  — CH'b  [vraihon] 

dat.  — CHH  [vr^marii]  — enaM-b  [vraiiiondm] 

ace.  — H  [vr^iiiA]  — ena  [vraihana] 

instr.  — CHCM'b  [vf^ihenam]  — enaMH  [vramondmi] 

prep.  — CHH  [vr6m8iii]  — enax-b  [vramandx] 

There  is  a  small  group  of  nouns,  all  neuters,  of  this  form.     The 
most  frequently  used  of  them  are  : 

6peMfl  [br^riiA],  burden 

Amh  [iihA],  name 

3HaMfl  (sHaMCHa)  [zndriiA],  banner 

nJiCMH  [pierfiA],  tribe 

njiaMfl  [ptdriiA],  flame 

CTp^MH  [str6mA],  stirrup 

cfeMH  [s6mA],  seed 

^  Perfective  of  cMOTp^Tb. 


§§220-224  LESSON  LIII  169 

220.  The  verb  -fecTb,  noicTL  [jest,  pAJest],  to  eat,  is  irregular.  The 
present  tense  is 

^Mt,  'fenib,  'fecT'L  [jsm,  jej,  jsst],  ImAwby  lixe,  AtTj  [jedim,  jedita,  jaddt] 
The  imperative  is  'feuib,  i^iULTe  [jeJ,  jejta]. 

221.  (no)'fexaTb,  to  drive  or  ride,  has  in  the  present  "637, 
-^euib  [jedu],  and  only  one  form  in  the  imperative,  no'fesjKaii, 
afixe  [pAJQsai]. 

222.  Present  tense  of  xoT'tib  [xAte^t],  to  wish;  perfective 
BaxoTiTb  [zAXAte^t],  to  conceive  a  wish  or  desire  : 

XOHf  [XAtJli]  XOTHMt  [xAtim] 

xo^emb  [xdtjaj]  xoxiiTe  [xAtita] 

xo^eTT.  [xotjat]  xothtt*  [xAtat] 

223.  (1)  The  conditional  in  Russian  is  formed  by  adding  the 
particle  6h  to  the  past  tense,  e.g. 

Oht.  npociiJn>  6m  [on  prAsit  bi],  He  would  ask  or  he  would  have  asked. 

If  the  condition  is  unfulfilled,  this  form  of  the  verb  is  used  in 
both  parts  of  a  conditional  sentence,  e.g. 

H  6bi  HanHC^Ji-B  cm^,  6cjih  6bi  h  snajit  ^to  [ja  bi  iiApisat  jamti,  j6sii 
bi  ja  znat  stA],  /  should  write  {have  written)  to  him,  if  I  knew  [had  knoum)  that. 

With  ecjiH  or  qxo,  6u  often  becomes  6t>  :  ecjiH  61.,  htoSt,. 

(2)  If  the  present  tense  is  used  in  EngHsh  in  the  conditional 
clause,  there  is  still  a  chance  of  the  condition  being  fulfilled  or  if 
may  have  the  force  of  whenever ;  and  in  Russian  the  present  and 
future  tenses  without  6hi  are  used,  e.g. 

JScjih  Bbi  SyACTe  roBopiiTb  cb  HHM-b,  CKamiiTe  cm^,  etc.  [j^sii  vi 
budate  gAVAiit  siiim,  skA3it8  jemii],  If  you  speak  with  him,  tell  him,  etc. 

H  B-fepio  CM^,  6cJiH  OHT.  MH-fe  THK^  roBop^T'b  [JQ  v6ru  jamu,  j6sii 
on  mns  tak  gAVArit],  /  believe  him  (dat.),  if  he  speaks  to  me  so. 

224.  (1)  With  xoxixb  when  only  one  person  or  group  of  persons 
is  involved,  the  construction  is  the  same  as  in  Engfish,  e.g. 

H  XOH^  (c)xi;'fejiaTb  [ja  xAtJd  (s)d8tAt],  /  wish  to  do. 

(2)  If  there  are  two  persons  or  groups  of  persons  involved,  the 
Russian  does  not  say  I  wish  you  to  do  but  /  wish  that  you  did  or 
I  wish  that  you  should  do : 

H  xo^f,  ht6  ^h  Bbi  CA-fejiajiH  [ja  xAtJii,  Jto  bi  vi  sd^tAli], 

This  is  the  construction  to  use  with  other  verbs  of  requesting. 


170  LESSON  LIII  §224 

Vocabulary 

(Where  no  special  indication  of  genitive  case,  etc.  is  given,  it  is  to  be  understood 
that  the  oblique  cases  of  the  noun  in  question  are  regularly  derived  and  that  there 
is  no  change  of  accent.) 

Bon>  [box],  God  cxap^niKa  [stAriijkA],  old  woman 

BojKel  [bosa],  0  God/  Jionaxa  [lApatA],  spade 

^paHi^^ST)  [frAntsiis],  Frenchman  CTapHHa  [stArina],  former  days,  days 

KJiaST)  [ktad  (t)],  treasure  of  old 

HaxoAKa  [nAxotkA],  a  find,  treasure-      6iiiJib  [bii],  true  story 

trove  HTO-HH6y3L   [jto-nibu^t],  something 

or  other 
CB'feTJioe  BocKpec^HLe  [svsttAJa  vAskres^njg],  Easter  Sunday  {Bright 
day  of  Resurrection) 

Heqero  [ni^T'i.  nnqero,  Hero]  [n^tJavA],  {there  is)  nothing  of  which 
HCH'feM'B  [H-fexi*  HH^ero,  H-feMT*]  [n^tjam],  {there  is)  nothing  with  which 

Verbs 
(1)  Perfective  formed  by  use  of  prefix 

{HTTH  {ujif,  euib)  [iti],  to  go  {on  foot) 
noHTii  (noiiay)  [pAiti] 
(no)piJiTb  (oK),  eiub)  [(pA)rit],  to  dig 
(no)npocHTb  (m^,  ochuib)  [(pA)prAsit],  to  request,  beseech 
(no)MOJiHTbCH  (locb,  -HUibCfl)  [(pA)mAiitsA],  to  pray,  say  one* s  prayers 
/(no)njiaKaTb  (a^y,  euib)  [(pA)ptakAt],  to  weep,  lament,  bewail 
\(3a)njiaKaTb  ^  [(zA)ptakA.t],  to  weep,  start  weeping 
(o6)paaoBaTbCH  (paayiocb,  embcn)  [(Ab)radAVAtsA],  to  rejoice 

(2)  Imperfective  lon^ — perfective  short  {see  Par.  232)  / 

JnoMoraxb  I A  [pAmAga^t],  to  help,  assist 
\noM6Hb  (like  Mory,  Par.  168)  [pAmotj],  {dat.  of  person) 
fsapbiBaxb  I A  [zArivd^t],  to  bury 
\3ap1iiTb  (6k),  euib)  [zATit] 
TnocbiJiaTb  I A  [pAsitd^t],  to  send 
\nocjiaTb  (niJiio,  euib)  [pAstd^t] 
/BcnoMHHaTb  I A  [fspAriiind^t],  to  remember 
^BcnoMHHTb  (k),  Hinb)  [fspomnit] 
fnoKynaxb  I A  [pAkupd^t],  to  buy 
\KyniiTb  (njiib,  fnmuih)  [kupit] 

.  .        (3) 
fpasroBJiiiTbCfl  I A  [rAzgAvid^tsA],  to  eat  meat  for  the  first  time  after  a  fast 
\pa3roB^TbCH  (-feiocb,  ^eiiibCfl)  [rAzgAv6^tsA] 

^  Perfectives  formed  with  the  prefix  aa  are  mostly  inchoatives,  i.e.  they  indicate 
the  beginning  of  an  action. 


; 


t>bsjt>tCe^       C<^^.^*^^        /<S^owvv«.    « 

§  224  (T  LESSON  LIII  171 

(4)  Imperfective  and  'perfective  from  different  roots 

froBopiiTb  1  (i5,  HUib)  [gAVArit],  to  speaky  say 
tcKasaTb  (>Ky,  euib)  [skAzd^t],  to  say,  tell 
(Gpaxb  (6epfy  enib)  [bra^t],  to  take 
\B3flTb  (B03bM^,  euib)  [v:ia^t] 


Exercises 

A.  Translate:  ^^^^^ 

B-b  OAHofi  Aep^BH-fe  WHJia  cxap^uiKa  co  (cb)  BH^qKoft.  OH-fe 
6i»[JiH  oqcHb  6feHbi,  H  i^CTb  HMT,  6iijio  H^qero.  rXpHiiiJio  CB-feTJioe 
BocKpec^Hbe.  Hapda-b  pa^yeTCH.  Bcfe  KyniijiH  ce6^  paaroB-feTbCH, 
xdjibKo  cTap^uiK'fe  CO  BH^qKOH  H^qi^MT.  paaroB-fexbCH.  IIonjiaKajiH 
OH^  H  cTajiH  B6ra  npocnxb,  qxodx.  On-b  hmx.  noMdrx..  H  Bcn6MHHJia 
cxapy^uiKa,  qxo  bt>  cxapHHy^,  bo  bp6mh  $paHi;^3a,  MyjKHK^  A^Hbrn 
Bx>  a^MjiK)  sapbiBajiH.  Cxap^xa  h  roBopiix-b  BH^qK'fe:  «  BosbMli  (xh), 
BH^qKa,  Jionaxy  h  HAii  na  cx^poe  ceji6,  noMOJi6cb  Bory,  Ha  nop6tt 
Bx,  acMJii:  M6>Kexx.  6bixb,  Borx>  HaMx>  h  nonijiex-b  wro-uvL6fji,h.» 

Tojicx6ii 

(a)  Pboverbial  Sayings 

He  p6tt  Apyr6My  HMy,  caMX>  bx>  nee  nonaAeiub,  DonH  dig  a  pit  for 
another y  you  may  fall  into  it  yourself. 

Hxo  nocfeemb,  xo  h  noJKHeuib,  WJmt  you  sow^  that  also  shall  you  reap. 

Oxx>  xyji;6ro  c^mchh  He  >kah  A66paro  njieMCHH,  From  had  seed  do 
not  expect  a  good  stock. 

Kxo  pa66xaexx>,  xom^  Bori.  noMor^exX),  Who  worksy  him  Ood  helps, 

B.  Translate  into  Kussian  : 

(1)  Do  you  know  that  they  are  digging  ?  Always  let  him  dig  here.  Dig 
now.  We  shall  dig  at  once.  You  will  be  digging  (this)  afternoon.  She 
has  just  dug.  She  was  digging.  She  would  dig  if  she  had  a  spade.  Her 
mother  wants  her  to  dig. 

(2)  Why  will  she  be  crying  ?  Why  will  she  lament  ?  Why  will  she  begin 
to  cry  ?  Do  not  cry.  She  bewailed  her  misfortune.  She  would  have  started 
to  cry,  if  they  had  taken  her  father  away.     We  do  not  want  her  to  cry. 

(3)  Go  home  at  once.  Do  you  not  know  that  she  has  gone  already  ?  I 
am  going  home  now.  I  shall  go  home  now.  I  should  go  to  the  village,  if 
my  mother  told  me  that  (there  was)  a  treasure  there. 

(4)  The  old  woman  would  have  been  glad,  if  God  had  sent  her  a  treasure. 

*  The  perfective  noroBopiiTi.  must  be  used  when  the  verb  corresponds  to  to  speak. 


172  LESSON  LIV  §§226-227 

(5)  She  says  her  prayers  every  morning.  Has  she  said  her  prayers  this 
morning  ?  No,  she  is  going  to  say  her  prayers  now.  Every  day  say  your 
prayers  night  and  morning. 

(6)  Who  usually  helped  the  poor  girl  to  do  her  work  ?  We  often  help  her. 
You  are  going  to  help  her  now.  Surely  you  did  [neyjK^JiH  .  .  .  He]  help  her. 
She  wants  me  to  help  them.     I  should  be  glad  if  you  helped  them. 

(7)  Send  us  a  lot  of  those  pretty  flowers  every  week.  Send  her  the  flowers 
now.     I  should  have  sent  them,  if  I  had  got  to  know  that  she  liked  flowers. 

(8)  I  generally  buy  my  books  of  [y]  that  man,  but  to-day  I  am  going  to 
buy  what  I  need  [what  to  me  (is)  necessary]  of  my  friend.  Surely  you  have 
not  bought  yours  already  ?  I  should  have  bought  them,  if  I  had  had  any 
money.     I  want  you  to  buy  your  books  here. 

(9)  She'll  tell  you  what  we  are  talking  about.  Speak  with  him  about  it 
and  tell  him  what  you  think  of  the  matter.  I  should  speak  to  him  about  it, 
if  I  knew  where  he  lived  [hves].     I  want  to  tell  you  something. 

(10)  Take  this  pen  and  paper.  We'll  take  them  now.  He  is  always  taking 
what  does  not  belong  to  him.  You  would  have  taken  the  money,  if  it  belonged 
to  them. 

(11)  Do  not  eat  that  meat. 

(12)  He  will  drive  to  church.     Drive  home. 

C.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

Before  [js,o  with  genitive]  that  time  I  did  not  know  that  peasants  in  that 
district  buried  their  treasure  in  the  earth,  but  at  Easter,  when  the  others  were 
buying  food  for  the  feast,  we  prayed  to  God  that  He  might  send  us  something, 
80  that  we  too  might  have  food  and  clothes.  I  took  a  spade  and  went  into 
the  old  village ;  I  asked  God  to  help  me  and  started  to  dig  in  the  damp  earth. 


LESSON  LIV 

225.  Verbs  in  -OBaxb  have  the  present  in  -yio,  -yenib  ;  -eBaib 
changes  to  -lOK),  etc.,  e.g, 

pHCOBaTb,  pHC^^K),  imperat.  pHc;^fi  [risiii],  to  draw. 
p^AOBaxbCH,  panyiocB,  imperat.  pa^yficfl  [raduIsA],  to  rejoice. 
ropeeaTB,  ropibio,  imperat.  ropibii  [gArava^t,  gArtii],  to  grieve,  mourn. 

226.  Verbsin-biBaibj-HBaxb  are  regular  verbs  with -BaK),-Baemb, 
etc.,  e.g.  oTKpBmaTB,  otkpbib^k)  [Atkrivaju],  to  open. 

227.  Ex.  A  of  the  last  lesson  and  Ex.  A  of  this  lesson  are  almost 
exactly  Tolstoi's  version  of  this  story.     It  will  be  noticed  that  the 


§228  LESSON  LIV  173 

writer  mingles  past  and  present  tenses,  where,  in  English,  we  should 
prefer  the  past  or  the  present  throughout. 

228.  Kemember  the  form  corresponding  to  whether  in  sub- 
ordinate clauses : 

Oht.  MBHii  cnpocHJi'b,  3H^K)  (sHaji-L)  JiH  fl  ^TO  [on  ihana  sprAsft, 
zna  ju  (znat)  li  ja  dtA],  He  ashed  we,  if  {whether)  I  knew  {had  known)  that. 

Vocabulary 

FocnoAb  (rocno^a,  y,  a,  OMt,  -fe)      MOJiHTBa  [mAiftvA],  prayer 

[gAspo^t],  the  Lord  cep^SpflHMtt  [ser^brani],  of  silver 

rocnoaHl  [gospAdi],  0  Lord  nojind  [pAtno],  {it  is)  fill 

npasAHHKTb  [prdznik],  festival  n6jiH0  [polnA],  stop,  enough  ! 

JKiixeJib  [sitai],  inhabitant  o,  66o  (with  ace.)  [o,  obA],  against 

iiMa  [jamA],  pit,  hole  BHcaanHO  [vnazapnA],  suddenly 

KySbiuiKa  [kubiJkA],  jug  ny  [nu],  loell 

MOH^xa  [mAnstA],  coin  S^ACTt  [budat],  that  will  do,  evmtgh  I 

Verbs 
(1)  Perfective  with  prefix 
(no)a^MaTb  I A  [(pA)diimAt],  to  think 

(no)Beji'feTb  (lb,  Hinb)  (dat.  of  person)  [(pA)v9i6^t],  to  order,  command 
(^o)6JIa^oJ^apIiTb  (ib,  nmb)  [(pA)btAgAdArit],  to  think 
(no)6'fejKaTb  ("fer^,  JKiiuib,  3rd  plur.  Tfi-h)  [(pa) basalt],  to  run 
(3a)3BeH'feTb  (lb,  Auib)  [(zA)zv9n6^t],  to  ring,  tinkle,  jingle 
(3a)xoT'feTb  (Par.  222  and  note  to  Voc.  LIII)  [(zA)xAt6it],  to  wish 
(c)A'fejiaTb  I A  r(s)dstAt],  to  do,  make 
(y)cjnimaTb  (|6,  nnib)  [(u)stiJAt],  to  hear 
(y)Bi;ifl'feTb  (>Ky,  ^Hmb)  [(u)vid9t],  to  see  (perf.  =to  catch  sight  of) 

(2)  axb,  HTb 
rSpocaTb  I A  [brAsa^t],  to  throw 
t6p6cHTb  (6my,  ocHUib)  [brosit] 

(3)  Long  and  short  {see  Par.  232) 
jEbipbiB^Tb  I A  [viriVa^],  to  excavate 
VBiipbiTb  (oK),  enib)  [virit] 
JoTRpbiBaTb  I A  [Atkriva^t],  to  open 
\oTKpiiiTb  (oH),  enib)  [Atkrit] 

{noAHHMaTb  I A  [pAdnimd^t],  to  lift,  pick  up 
nosHiiTb  (hhm^,  ^Menib)  [pAdna^t] 
/noTpflcaxb  I A  [pAtrasd^t],  to  shake 
tnoTpacTH  (c^,  euib)  [pAtrastfj 


174  LESSON  LIV  §228 

(4)  Perfective  in  Hyxb 

{HarHSaxb  I A  [iiAgiba^t],  to  bend 
HarH^Tb  (ny,  euib)  [nAgnuit] 
fcxyqaxb  (qy,  HHUib)  [stutja^t],  to  knock 
\cxyKHyxb  (y,  euib)  [stuknut],  to  knock  once 
JKpHHaxb  (h^,  qiiuib)  [kritja^t],  to  cry,  call  out 
(KpHKHyxb  (y,  euib)  [kriknut],  to  cry  out  once 
Perfective  verbs  in  Hyxb  indicate  a  single,  and  often  sudden,  performance 
or  occurrence. 

(5)  Different  stems 
jHaxoaiixb  {mf,  ojirnuh)  [nAXAdit],  to  come  upon,  find 
\iiaHXH  (ay,  euib)  [nAiti] 

Exercises 

A.  Continuation  of  the  "  True  Story  "  from  Tojictoh. 

Translate  : 

Bu^qKa  H  jiyMaex-b :  «KaK'b  mojkho  KJiaa-b  HaftxH?  Hy  aa,  cn-fejiaio , 
KaK-b  6a6ymKa  bcjiuxtj.))  BsHJia  Jionaxy  h  noiujia.  Biiipbijia  oua 
;iMy  H  ayMaex-b:  «By3ex'b,  nottay  «0M6ft.»  Xoxijia  noaunxb 
Jionaxy,  cjuiiuiHX'b —  ^  66o  hx6-xo  Jionaxa  cxyKuyjia.  Oua  Haruyjiacb, 
BiiAHX'b —  1  KySiiiUKa  Gojibmaa.  noxpncjia  ee,  hx6-xo  BBeuHX'b.  Oua 
6p6cHJia  Jionaxy,  noS'fejKajia  kX)  6a6yiUK'fe,  kphhhxx>:  «Ba6ymKa, 
KJiaa-b  nauiJial »  OxKpi^iJin  KyObiuiKy,  B'b  nen  nojino  cepeSpHUbix'b 
Monex-b.  H  6a6ymKa  co  BnyHKott  KyniiJiH  ceS-fe  ki>  npaaaHHKy, 
q-feM-b  pasroB-fexbCfl,  n  KopoBy  KyniiJiH,  h  6jiaroflapiijiH  Bora,  hxo 
Ohtj  ycjuiuiaji-b  ux-b  MOJiuxBy. 

{a)  Proverbial  Sayings 

MaxepHHCKafl  MOJiuxBa  co  jina  [dna]  Mopa  noflUHMaex'b,  A  mother's 
prayer  raises  (even)  from  the  bottom  of  the  sea,  i.e.  can  remove  mountains. 

Focnojib  noBCJi'feji'b  ox-b  scmjih  KopMHXbCH  [gAspo^t  pAvoist  At  4amii 
kArriiitsA],  The  Lord  commanded  men  to  live  on  the  fruits  of  the  earth. 

Kxo  BHepa  cojiraji^,  xoMy  h  saBxpa  ne  noBibpax-b  [xto  ftjara 
SAtgat,  tAniu  i  zaftrA  na  pAv6rAt],  Who  {hus)  lied  yesterday,  ivill  not  be  believed 
to-morrow. 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  How  difl&cult  (it  is)  to  find  the  treasure  we  are  seeking  !  How  easy  to 
dig  a  hole  in  the  garden  when  you  have  a  good  spade  !  We  must  do  as  granny 
has  ordered. 

(2)  Thank  you.  When  we  thanked  him  for  his  goodness,  he  said,  "  Don't 
mention  it." 

^  This  broken  construction  with  verbs  of  hearing  and  seeing  is  very  common. 


§228  LESSON  LIV  175 

(3)  The  old  man  ordered  his  grandson  to  bring  him  his  pipe.  Why  does 
he  order  you  to  take  a  look  at  what  the  other  pupils  are  doing  ?  Order  him 
to  write  this  letter  to-day. 

(4)  Why  is  she  running  ?  They  are  not  running.  I  should  like  [condit. 
of  xoT'feTb]  to  know  whether  she  did  indeed  run  home  to  her  grandmother. 
Run  to  her. 

(5)  Suddenly  we  felt  a  desire  to  hear  what  they  were  saying  to  each  other. 
Did  you  hear  that  they  had  already  opened  the  book  ?  We  hear  the  coins 
jingling  [how  the  coins  jingle  or  we  hear — the  coins  are  jingling]. 

(6)  We  caught  sight  of  them  throwing  stones  at  the  dog  [how  they  were 
throwing  with  stones  into  the  dog].  Throw  (away)  the  wooden  spade.  I 
shall  throw  it  away,  if  you  command  me. 

(7)  What  are  they  excavating  in  the  ground  ?  Let  them  go  into  the 
garden  ;  let  them  excavate  a  deep  pit,  perhaps  they  will  find  what  we  want. 

(8)  Do  you  know  whether  they  have  opened  the  door  ?  They  always  open 
the  doors  at  six  o'clock.  They  will  open  them  at  once.  If  they  open  them, 
we  shall  go  in.     If  they  opened  them,  we  should  go  in. 

(9)  I  want  them  to  pick  up  all  those  white  stones  and  throw  them  into  the 
river.  Pick  them  up.  She  will  pick  up  the  spade  at  once.  Why  did  the  old 
teacher  want  the  elder  pupils  to  write  on  white  paper  instead  of  copy-books  ? 
If  you  shake  the  black  jug,  you  will  hear  the  coins  jingling.  If  you  had  shaken 
it,  you  would  have  heard  the  coins  jingling.     Shake  it.     Do  not  shake  it. 

(10)  She  was  always  bending  down.  She  bent  down  and  saw  something 
in  the  ground. 

(11)  It  is  well  that  they  always  knock.  Then  he  knocked,  opened  the 
door  and  went  in.  Surely  they  are  not  still  crying  out  ?  They  started  to 
cry  out.  He  cried  out,  "  Mother,  I  have  found  that  beautiful  treasure  you 
were  speaking  of.  God  has  heard  our  prayer."  We  do  not  always  find  that 
which  we  seek.  We  always  used  to  find  it.  I  found  it  yesterday.  I  want 
to  find  it.  I  want  you  to  find  it.  I  asked  him  whether  you  had  found  it. 
I'll  seek  it  and  perhaps  I'll  find  it.     If  I  find  it,  I'll  tell  you. 

(12)  If  those  foreigners  had  known  that  cholera  (was)  in  the  town, 
perhaps  they  would  not  have  come  to  the  fair.  I  should  like  to  know  how 
many  of  the  unfortunate  inhabitants  have  already  died  of  such  dreadful 
diseases. 


176 


(1) 


(2) 


T.ESSON  LV 

§§  229-2 

LESSON  LV 

129.  Declension  of  two  words  for  child. 

8ing, 

Plur. 

nom. 

aHTji  [dita] 

Ai^TH  [deti] 

gen. 

— Ath  [ditdti] 

—eft  [dat6i] 

dat. 

— HTH  [ditati] 

H'feTHM'b  [d6tam] 

ace. 

— fl  [ditd] 

—6ft  [daUi] 

instr. 

— HTCK)  [ditataju] 

— kmi  (bmh)  [data  mi 

(datmf)] 

prep. 

— HTH  [ditati] 

a-feTflX-L  [d^tax] 

nom. 

pe6eH0KT>  [rabonAk] 

pe6iiTa  [rabatA] 

gen. 

— HKa  [r9b6nkA] 

— "L  [rabat] 

dat. 

— HKy  [rabonku] 

— aM-L  [rabatAm] 

ace. 

— HKa  [rabonkA] 

— t  [rabdt] 

instr. 

— HKOM-b  [rabonkAm] 

— aMH  [rabdtAiiii] 

prep. 

— HK-fe  [rabdnka] 

— ax-B  [rabdtAx] 

(3)  Of  these  the  singular  of  (2)  and  the  plural  of  (1)  are  in 
most  frequent  use. 

Pe6flTa !  is  used  by  officers  addressing  soldiers. 

(4)  The  declension  shown  in  (2)  is  typical  of  the  names  of 
young  of  animals.     (Of.  Group  10,  Par.  77.) 

230.  Many  names  of  peoples,  of  classes  or  ranks,  end  in  -anHHt, 
-HHHHt,  -HHt.  In  the  singular  they  are  regular.  The  plural 
endings  are 

-(aH)e,  -(aH)'b,  -(aH)aMT>,  -(an)!,,  -(aH)aMH,  -(aH)ax'b 
or 

-HHC,  etc.     (Cf.  Group  11,  Par.  77.) 

Such  words  are  : 

6ojirapHHT>,  ape  [bAtgdrin,  dfa],  Bulgar 
aHrjiHqaHHHTb,  dne  [angiitjdmn,  dna],  Englishman 
naTqaHHHt,  ane  [ddtjanin,  Ana],  Dane 
flBopHHHH-L,  HHe  [dvAranin,  rdna],  noble 
rpajKflaHAHT.,  ane  [grA3dAnfn,  dna],  burgher 
M'fen^aHiiHT),  ane  [liiajtjanin,  dna],  small  townsman 
KpecTbiiHHH'b,  Ahq  [krastjdmn,  jdna],  peasant 
xpHCTlaHJ^Ht,  ane  [xristJAnfn,  jdna].  Christian 

Typical  feminine  form  : 

Gojir^pKa;  anrJiHq^HKa  [bAtgdrkA,  angiitJdnkA] 


§231  ^         LESSON  LV  177 

231.  The  verb  ji;aBaTi>,  naxb,  to  give,  is  irregular. 
Present  tense  of  HaBaTb  is 

^aI5,  eiiib,  etc.  [dAJii,  dAJ 6J], 
but  the  imperative  is 

aae^fi,  ^ftxe  [dAval,  dAvdIta]. 

Future  tense  of  flaxb  is 

jtaMT)  [dam],  aanib  [da J],  AacTi)  [dast],  HaA^M-B  [dAdfm],  ^xe  [dAdfta], 
Hafl^TT.  [dAdiit], 

and  tbe  imperative  is 

Aaft  [dal],  n^iiTe  [daita] 
The  imperative  pjaBaii  is  frequently  used  with  an  infinitive  in  the 
sense  of  let  us,  e.g. 

Jl^aB^ti  ^HT^Tb  [dAvdl  tjitd^t],  Let  us  do  some  reading. 

Vocabulary 

CJiyr^,  iky  -^H  {masc.)  [stuga],  servant  cepaue,  a,  d  (^itt)  [s^rtsa],  heart 

caMOBapt  [sAmAvdr],  tea-urn  KOJi'feHO,  a,  h  [kAlsiiA],  knee 

SapHHi),  a,  6ape  [barin],  master  ocTaJibHoii  [AstA^noI],  remaining 

maji^Hi.  [Jatun],  young  scamp  ^OBOJlbHO     [dAvo^nA],    sufficiently, 
npnpoaa  [prirodA],  nature  fairly,  rather 

npHx6>KaH  {adj.  inform)  [prix659J9],  KaK6ii-HH6yAb  [kAkoi-nibii^t],  some 

ante-room,  corridor  or  other 

BopoTa  {also  accent  on  a)  {neut.  pi.)  np6cT0  [prostA],  simply 

[vAr6tA],  gate  caajiiH  [ssadi],  from  behind 

CTopoHd  {accent  on  ct6  in  ace.  sing.  hb  to  [na  t6],  not  that,  if  not  that,  or 

and  nom.  pi.)  [stAiAnd],  side  else 

JiejK^HKa    [i83dnkA],    bench    beside  HeTaKT>[ri^  tak],  not  in  the  right  way 

the  stove  paByM^excH    [rAzum^jatsA],    it    is 
K^qa  [ktitjA],  h£ap,  lot,  group  understood,  of  course 

Verbs 
(1)  Perfective  formed  with  prefix 
(no)6oJiTaTb  I A  [(pA)bAttd^t],  to  chatter 

(no)cT^BHTb  (bjik),  Hmb)  [(pA)stdvit],  to  set,  put,  stand  (trans.) 
(no)cTOHTb  (lb,  limb)  [(pA)stAJd^t],  to  stand  (intrans.) 
(no)jiK)6HTb  (6jii5,  ^nuih)  [(pA)lubit],  to  love 
(no)MHpHTb  (lb,  limb)  [(pA)mirit],  to  reconcile,  make  peace  between 

(MMpi)  [riiir],  peace) 
(no)cHji;'feTb  (JK^,  anmb)  [(pA)sid6^t],  to  sit 
.  (no,  3a)BopHaTb  (f,  uuih)  [(pA,  zA)vArtJd^t],  to  grumble,  growl 
(B3)HpeMaTb  (<MJiib,  eMJiemb)  [(vz)dr9md^t],  to  doze,  slumber 
(y)BUJikrh  I A  [(u)viddit],  to  see 

M 


178  LESSON  LV  §23i 

(2)    aTb,  HTb 

j  sacxaBJiflTb  I A  [zAstAviaH],  to  cause,  get,  make,  oblige 
\3acTaBHTb  (bjik),  BHinb)  [zAstdvit] 

ocTaBJiiixb  [AstAvia^t],  to  leave,  abandon 

nocTaBJiHTb  [pAstAvia^t],  to  set,  put  on 

(3)  Imperfective  long — perfective  short  {see  Par.  232) 
rnoHMCTdTb  I A  [pAdmeta^t],  to  sweep  up 
(noHMecTii  (exy,  enib)^  [pAdmasti] 
fo6BHBaTb  I A  [Abvivd^t],  to  twine  round,  embrace 
\o6BHTb  (o6oBbK),  enib)  [Abvi't] 

rnocMaxpHBaTb  I A  [pAsmdtrivAt],  to  look  on  things  about  you 
^nocMOTp-feTb  (k),  -^HUib)  [pAsmAtr^^t] 

{ycxpaHBaxb  [ustraivAt],  to  arrange,  organize 
ycTpoHTb  (610,  HUib)  [ustroit] 

(4)  Perfective  in  nyxb 
(noKHHaxb  I A  [pAkidd^t],  to  give  up,  leave 
\noKHHyxb  (y,  euib)  [pAkinut] 

(5)  Different  Stems 
/yxoanxb  (JK^,  oflHinb)  [uxAdit],  to  go  away 
\yiixH  (jif,  eiiib)  [uiti] 

f  npoBoanxb  (>K^,  — anuib)  [prAVAdit],  lit.  to  lead  through,  pa^s,  spend  (time) 
\npoBecxH  (ejif,  eiiib)  ^  [prAvasti] 

Exercises 

A.  Translate:  Ji-feHHBBm  Cjiyra 

JI-feHiiBbitt  ox-b  npnpoabi,  0HT>  ocxajibH6e  BpeMH  HH^ero  ne  A'fejiajix>. 

On-b  He  aaBaji-b  ced'fe  xpy^a  hh  ^  nocxaBHXb  caMOBapa,  hh  ^  noflMecxii 

iJ7       nojioB-b.     On-bi  HJiH  jipcMaji-b  B-b  npHXOJKeii,  hjih  yxoAHJi-b  6oJixaxb 

BT>  KyxHK);  He^  x6,  xaK-b  no  n'fejibiMx>  nacaM-b  cxoHJi-b  y  Bopox-b  n 

nocMaxpHBaji-b  na  Bc-fe  cxopoHbi.     Oht,  Bopqaji-b  BCHKin  pasx.,  KaKx> 

rojiocX)   Capnna   3acxaBJi^jn>   ero   noKnaaxb   jiemanKy.     HecMOxp)i 

na  Bce  ^xo,  oht>  6biJix>  aoBOJibno  MarKaro  n  aoSparo  cepana.     Onx* 

jiK)6Hjn>  flame  npoBo^nxb  BpeMH  cii  fl-fexbMH.     Ha  flBop-fe,  y  Bopox-b, 

er6  ^acxo  BHflajin  cx>  Kyqeii  fl-fexen.     Ohi>  hxx»  Mnpiix-b,  ycxpanBaexX) 

i^rpbi,  6jih  npocxo  cHfliixx>  c-b  hhmh,  BSfiB-b^  oflHoro  na  03h6  KOJi-feno, 

flpyroro  na  npyroe,  a  csaflH  m^io  ero  oSoBbexx,  enie  KaKofi-nndyab 

maji^m>  pynaMH. 

Adapted  from  «  06^6U0B'b  », 

by  FonqapoBX) 

*  For  past  tense  see  List  A,  Par.  239.  ^  neither  .  .  .  nor  .  .  . 

^  '  Having  taken,''  from  BSHXb,  to  take. 


§231  LESSON  LV  179 

(a)  Proverbial  Sayings 

He  ocTaBJiHH  [AstAvidi]  oxixa  h  M^Tepn  na  cTapocTH  [staiAsti] 
Jii^TT),  H  Bor-b  Te6fl  He  ocTaeHT'b,  Do  not  abandon  father  and  mother  in  their 
old  agCf  and  God  ivill  not  abandon  you. 

Kto  npaBJibi  iimex-B,  Toro  Bon.  dimex-b  [sijtjat].  Who  seeks  truth, 
him  Ood  will  find  {seek  out). 

KaKX.  Borx>  no  Jiioa^ft,  xaKi>  ox6ux>  ao  n'fex^ft,  As  Ood  is  to  men,  so 
is  a  father  to  his  children. 

MajieHBKoe  ahxh — Maxepn  rope;  GojiBuioe  ahxh — oxiiy  3a66xa 
[zAbotA],  A  young  {little)  child  is  the  mother'' s  sorrow :  an  older  (big)  child  is 
the  father'' s  care. 

3a  yqenaro  [utJonAVA]  «Byxx»  HeyqeHbixi»  [n9utJ6nix]  Aaibxx>,  One 
instructed  person  is  worth  two  ignorant  ones. 

Tepninie  Aaexx.  yM'fenie  [tgrp^nja — uih^nje],  Patience  brings  power 
[understanding). 

B.  Translate  into  Russian  : 

(1)  The  rich  burghers  would  sometimes  like  to  be  [Lesson  XL VIII]  nobles, 
and  poor  workmen  often  wish  to  be  burghers. 

(2)  Surely  those  two  lazy  servants  are  not  always  standing  chattering  in 
the  corridor  ?  Would  you  like  to  know  what  they  are  chattering  about  ? 
Perhaps  they  are  grumbling  because  their  master  makes  them  get  up  so  early. 
Make  them  go  to  bed.  When  their  master  is  kind,  few  industrious  servants 
will  grumble. 

(3)  Let  us  sweep  this  dirty  floor.  I  thought  it  had  been  swept  already. 
Give  me  what  you  are  holding  in  your  hand.  I  am  not  holding  anything.  I'll 
give  the  poor  man  what  he  needs.     Give  him  a  few  silver  coins. 

(4)  As  he  was  rather  kind-hearted  [of  a  fairly  kind  heart],  you  might 
[could]  often  have  seen  him  sitting  near  the  iron  gate,  playing  with  his  master's 
little  children.  One  would  sit  [sat]  on  one  knee,  a  second  would  be  on  his  other 
knee,  while  (a)  third  young  scamp  would  embrace  his  great  thick  neck  from 
behind. 

(5)  He  is  always  looking  about  him  on  all  sides.  Look  at  [na  with  acc.'\ 
him  !  If  you  had  looked  at  what  [xo,  qxo]  was  going  on  out  of  doors,  you 
would  have  known  that  he  was  not  a  bad  man,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  [xo, 
Hxo]  he  was  lazy  by  nature.  He  has  just  been  arranging  the  children's  games, 
but  he  did  not  do  it  right.  I  wish  you  would  make  peace  [between]  those 
three  children. 

(6)  I  wonder  why  [I  should  wish  to  know]  he  always  makes  me  leave  the 
bench  when  I  am  dozing  in  the  comfortable  kitchen.  He'll  make  you  go 
away.  They  will  oblige  us  to  go  to  one  of  [H3X>]  those  old  houses  that  still 
stand  on  the  meadow  behind  the  wooden  church.  Do  not  leave  your  kind 
old  master.  _  ^ 


180  LESSON  LVI  §232 

(7)  How  do  you  spend  so  much  time  at  home  when  it  is  raining  and  it  is 
impossible  to  work  outside  ?  I  like  to  play  with  the  child  ;  I  study  a  little, 
of  course  not  too  much ;  or  I  repair  the  furniture.  I  should  have  spent  the 
whole  day  in  bed,  if  I  had  not  been  well  [healthy].  I  want  her  to  spend  the  day 
at  home  ;  I  want  her  to  sweep  the  floor,  to  prepare  the  dinner  and  then  to  knit 
stockings  for  her  father.     Do  you  know  whether  she  has  put  on  the  samovar  ? 

(8)  You  have  lived  a  long  time  [already  Uve  long]  with  us  in  this  cold, 
dark  forest ;  if  you  went  away  now  you  would  never  know  what  might  [  =  could 
{cond.)]  happen  to  [CB,  instr.]  all  your  friends.  If  she  goes  away,  what  will 
you  say  to  her  ?  I  do  not  want  her  to  go  away.  She  goes  away  every  day 
at  six  o'clock.     Go  away.     Do  not  go  away. 


LESSON  LVI 

232.  In  vocabularies  LII-LV  appear  a  number  of  verbs 
under  *  Long  and  short '  belonging  to  a  very  numerous  class.  The 
typical  verb  of  this  class  has  in  tbe  perfective  aspect  a  form  com- 
posed of  prefix  plus  simple  verb,  and  from  the  perfective  is  formed 
the  imperfective  infinitive  by  adding  to  tbe  stem  tbe  termination 
(i>i)BaTb  or  (H)BaTL,  the  stem-vowel  occasionally  being  modified. 
Such  words  are  : 

(1)  (Ha)nHcdTi>,  to  tvrite  (5)  (no)cTp6HTL,  to  build,  construct 
fonucsLTh  (perf.),  to  describe  TycTpdHTb,  to  arrange 
\onHCbiBaTb  (imperf.)                       tycTpaHBaxb 

(2)  (no)piJiTb,  to  dig      .  (6)  (c)BHTb,  to  twine 
/sapiJiTb,  to  bury  f  o6BHTb,  to  embrace 
\3apbiBaTb                                          1o6BHBaTb 

(3)  (no)KpiJiTb,  to  cover  (7)  KaadxbCH,  to  appear 
j  OTKpbiTb,  to  open  /noKasaxb,  to  show 

\OTKpbIBaTb  \nOK^3bIBaTb 

TsaKpiiTb,  to  close  rpaacKaaaxb,  to  relate 

tsaKpbiBaTb  tpascKasbiBaTb 

(4)  (no)npocHTb,  to  request 
/cnpocHTb,  to  ash 
\cnpamHBaTb 

This  type  of  imperfective  indicates  that  the  action  takes  place 
again  and  again  (cf.  Voc.  XIX,  cnpauiHBaTb  and  cnpocHTb)  or 
occupies  some  duration  of  time. 


§§23a-235  LESSON  LVI  181 

233.  The  verbs  (no)Hafl;'feflTBCH  [(pA)nAdejotsA],  to  hope,  and 
(no)6oflTLca  [pAbAJa^tsA],  to  fear,  have  the  same  construction  as 
xoT^Tb  (cf .  Par.  224  (2)),  i.e.  they  are  used  with  the  conditional,  e.g. 

H  HaA'feiocb,  htoSbi  ona  npnuiji^  [ja  nAddjus,  Jtobi  Ana  prijtd],  I  hope 
she  comes. 

Owb  6oiiTCfl,  ht66li  h  hc  ndHflJii)  [on  bAitsA,  Jt6bi  ja  na  ponAt],  He 
is  afraid  I  shall  understand. 

Note  the  He  in  the  last  example. 

234.  If  the  subordinate  clause  following  6oflTLCfl  is  negative, 

use  the  future  perfective  with  conj.  hto,  e.g. 

Owb  doiiTCH,  HTO  fl  He  noiiM^  [on  bAftsA,  Jto  ja  na  pAlmii],  He  is 
afraid  I  shall  nx)t  under sta7id. 

235.  Distinguish  clearly  between  caMBiH  (used  before  nouns 
with  the  meaning  of  same,  very,  and  before  adjectives  to  form  the 
superlative)  ^  and  caMt,  the  emphatic  pronoun  (meaning  self). 

CaMHH  is  decHned  Uke  any  adjective  in  -hh. 

CaMT)  is  dechned  hke  o^HHt  (see  Par.  107  (c)).    Examples  : 

Oh^  caMa  He  noHHMdex'B  [And  sAma  na  pAiiimdjat],  She  herself  does 
not  understand. 

GaMO  co66k)  paayM-feeTCH  [sAm6  sAboju  rAzum^jatsA],  That  understands 
itself  of  itself,  i.e.  it  is,  of  course,  understood  ;  it  goes  without  saying. 

but 

TOJKe  caMoe  [tosa  sdmAJa],  (just)  the  same  thing  ; 

B-B  caMOMT>  a-feji-fe  [fsdmAm  d6ia],  in  very  deed  ; 

c^MBifi  Ji^qmiti  npHM-fept  [sdmi  tiitji  priihsr],  the  best  example. 

VOCABULAKY 

rCHcpaJi'b  [ganardt],  general  BCibAy   [fstidu]    or   BCSff^    [vazd^], 
nox6ji;'L  [pAxot],  campaign  everywhere 

HenpiiiTejib  [liaprijdtai],  enemy  He  B-fepHO?  [na  vsrnA],  not  tru£  ?  i.e. 
b6hcko,  a,  a  [voiskA],  army  is  it  not  so  ? 

Bpari>,  a,  ii  [vrak],  enemy  HcnpaBHbiii  [isprdvni],  correct,  exa^it 

pa3CKa3'B,Bi  [rAsskds], toZe,mirra^*o?i  CM'fejiBift  [srfisti],  6oiW 

cJi^JKSa  {gen.pl.  e6'B)[stu3bA],5emce  BCceJiBiii  [vasoti],  glad,  jolly 

Kama  [kdjA],  gruel,  porridge  cojifl^TCKlH  [sAtddtski],  soldierly 

m^TKa  (OKT))  [jntkA],  joke  bo6hhbih  [vAJsni],  warlike,  military 

uxa,    m^fi    (/em.    pi.)    [Jtji,    |tJ6i],  h.t.h.  =HTaK'BAaji'fee[itakddiaja], 
cabbage-soup  and  so  forth 

CTOHTB  Ha  nacaxT)  [stAJd^t  nA  tJAsdx],  to  be  {stand)  on  guard. 

1  Cf.  Voc.  X,  Pars.  186,  197. 


182  LESSON  LVI  §235 

Verbs 
(1)  Perfective  formed  with  prefix 
(no)6HTB  (6bH),  eiiib)  [(pA)bit],  to  heat 
(no)HiicTHTb  (nmy,  iActhuib)  [(pA)tjistit],  to  clean 
(no)Han^flTbCH  (tio,  •feeuib)  [(pA)nAd6J8tsA],  to  hope 
(na,  no)cM'femiiTb  (;^,  HUib)  [(ha,  pA)smoJit],  to  make  laugh 
(Ha)yqHTbCH  {dat.  of  svhject  learned)  [(nA)utjitsA],  to  learn,  study 
(Bbi)y^HTbCfl  ^  {dat.  of  subject  learned)  [(vi)utjitsA],  to  learn,  learn  off 
(o)6e3noK6HTbCH  (lo,  HUib)  [(A)b9spAk6itsA],  to  put  oneself  about,  take 
thought 

/noK6ft  (m.),  rest 

i  noKottHbiii  [pAkoini],  peaceful,  at  rest,  deceased 
\(c)noK6fiHOH  HOHH  I  [(s)pAk6inAl  notji],  good  night  // 
(npo)cJiyH{HTb  (f,  -^HUib)  [(prA)stu3it],  to  serve 

(c)KOMaHAOBaTb   (ayio,   euib)    (gov.   instr.   case)   [(s)kAmandAVAt],   to 
command 

(2)  axb,  HTb 
fnocxynaTb  I A  [pAstupa^t],  to  step,  act,  behave,  enter  (upon) 
\nocTynHTb  (njiib,  ^nniub)  [pAstupit] 
/noS'femAaTb  I A  [pAb85dd^t],  to  conquer,  overcome 
tno6ifeflHTb  (-hmjif,  'femiuib)  [pAbadit] 

(3)  Long  and  short 
/oniicBiBaTB  I A  [ApisivAt],  to  describe 
\onHcaTb  (m;^,  ^uieuib)  [Apisa^t] 

{CHHTaxb  I A  [stjita^t],  to  count,  consider,  regard  as 
cqecTb  (co^xy',  enib)  [stjest] 
/HaHHH^Tb  I A  [iiAtJina^t],  to  begin 
\usmkTh  (HHy,  Henib)  [nAtja^t] 

(4)  Different  stems 

{npHXOfliiTb  [prixAdit],  to  come 
npHTTii  [priti] 


Exercises 
A.  Translate : 

CyBopoBt 
MaJibHHKt  p^HO  HaqajiTb  yqiiTbCH  h  cb  p^hhhx'b  ji'feT'B  nojiioSiijn, 

KHiirH,  BT,  KOTOpbrXT)  OHliCBIBaJIHCB  BOfiHBI,  nOXO^BI,  H.T.A.       IlflTH^A- 
^  Perfectives  in  bu  are  accented  on  the  prefix. 


§235  LESSON  LVI  183 

AaTH  ji-feTt  MOJioA6fi  CyB6poB'B  nocTyn^Jit  na  so^HHyio  cji;^>K6y  h 

fl^BHTb  JI-feTT,  npOCJiyJKHJI-b  npOCTMMT.  [aS  a]  COJIAaTOM-b. 

H6  6biJio  cojiAaxa  HcnpaeH'fee  ero :  OHt  BCTaB^jn>  panbuie  ApyrHX-L , 
caMt  qncTHJi-b  ceG'fe  canorii  h  njiaxbe  h  cxoiijii.  na  qacaxi.  bo  BCiiKyio 
nor6«y.  JKHJi-b  OH-b  BM'fecx'fe  ch  npocxiiMH  cojinaxaMH  h  ifejn>  coji^ax- 
CKifi  mn  H  Kamy;  CbiJiii  Bcer^a  CM-feji-b  h  Becejii.  h  CM-fem^jix.  cboiixt. 
xoBapHmeii  BecejibiMH  ui^xKaMH  h  paacKaaaMH.  Bcfe  jik)66jih  er6. 
Korj];a  oht*  cxaji-b  o^ni^^poMX)  h  nanaji'b  KOManaoBaxb  coji^axaMH, 
BcioAy  Ha  BOHH-fe  OH-b  noS-femaajii.  nenpiflxejifl. 

«Pe6Hxa — roBopHJiT.  GyBdpoB-b  cojiaaxaM-b, — Bceraa  mjivne  Bne- 
pea-b  Ha  Bpara.     He  6e3noK6ttxecb  o  xoM'b,  CKOjibKO  nepe^-b  BaMH 
Henpiiiiejieft.     Bh  B-fe^b  npHuijiii  6HXb  HX-b,  a  ne  cHHx^xb.» 
From  «  HexBepxafl  Kniira  ajih  Hx^hIh  », 

by  H.  G.  MnxecB'b 

(KaaaHb,  1907) 


B.  Translate  into  Eussian  : 

(1)  The  brave  general  was  at  that  time  only  a  private  [Lesson  XL VIII] 
in  the  Russian  army.  I  thought  that  the  Russians  regarded  [Lesson  XL VIII] 
him  as  their  best  officer.     Why  did  he  call  him  their  weakest  general  ? 

(2)  Don't  beat  the  poor  children.  She  was  always  beating  them.  I  wish 
she  would  not  beat  them.  Let  her  beat  them,  if  she  likes.  If  she  often  beat 
them,  they  would  not  love  her. 

(3)  I  want  the  same  servant  to  clean  the  children's  black  boots  and  I  hope 
that  she  will  clean  all  the  windows  and  the  utensils  in  the  kitchen  too.  She 
is  cleaning  them  now,  I  am  told. 

(4)  Some  of  that  boy's  friends  are  always  laughing  ;  he  keeps  them  laugh- 
ing all  day.  It  would  be  a  pity  if  the  silly  boy  made  his  little  friends  laugh 
on  that  occasion. 

(5)  Surely  your  youngest  brother  has  not  learned  his  lesson  yet  ?  Yes, 
he  has  already  learned  it  by  heart.  Has  he  been  studying  the  Russian  lan- 
guage [dat.  case]  ? 

(6)  If  you  put  yourself  about  over  that  business,  it  would  be  a  pity.  It 
will  be  a  pity,  if  you  put  yourself  about.  Don't  put  yourself  about.  I  should 
be  glad  if  she  took  [gave  herself]  a  little  more  trouble  when  I  tell  her  to  put 
on  the  samovar  and  to  sweep  the  floor.  Perhaps  she  did  not  understand 
what  you  said. 

(7)  Perhaps  your  eldest  son  finished  his  service  long  ago.  Do  you  not 
understand  that  that  dark  pit  served  the  animal  as  a  dwelling  ?  I  did  not 
understand  you. 

(8)  Of  course,  as  an  officer,  he  had  command  of  large  numbers  of  private 
soldiers. 


184  LESSON  LVI  §235 

(9)  Would  you  not  like  to  know  how  he  would  act,  if  you  told  him  whai 
had  happened  to  [ct,  instr.]  his  rich  old  aunt  ?  When  will  you  enter  military 
service  ?  Really,  I  scarcely  know  myself  yet.  I  hope  that  I  may  soon  enter 
the  service,  but  I  am  afraid  that  I  may  not  enter  it  till  Christmas. 

(10)  Is,  it  really  true  that  that  general  always  defeated  his  numerous 
enemies  ?     He  would  always  defeat  them,  if  he  had  enough  soldiers. 

(11)  If  you  ask  those  two  intelhgent  children,  they  will  describe  fairly 
well  what  took  place.     Describe  it  to  me. 

(12)  You  must  never  count  your  enemies.  Do  not  count  them.  I  hope 
he  won't  start  counting  them  to-day.  If  he  does,  we  shall  not  come  home 
till  late  [come  only  late]. 

(13)  I  am  afraid  the  lazy  boys  will  not  get  up  before  nine  o'clock.  We 
always  used  to  get  up  early  in  the  morning,  but  to-day  we  did  not  get  up  till 
eight.     Stand  up.     Sit  down,  please. 

(14)  When  the  four  httle  boys  came  into  the  wooden  hut,  they  found 
their  father  and  mother  weaving.  They  begin  to  work  very  early.  When 
will  he  begin  to  repair  the  old  arm-chair  ?  He  has  already  begun,  hasn't  he  ? 
We  shall  begin  a  little  later.     Begin  now,  if  you  Uke.     Why  must  I  begin  ? 


PREPOSITIONS 


185 


236. 


PREPOSITIONS 

EMPLOYED  IN  LESSONS  I-LVI 
With  Oeniiive 


dJiHS'L,  near 
BM^CTO,  instead  of 
B63Ji'fe,  near,  beside 
KpoM'fe,  besides 
MHMO,  past 
HanpoTHB'L,  opposite 
6kojio,  about,  approximately 
n6AJi'fe,  beside 
nocji-fe,  after 
np6THB'b,  against 

(The  words  from  SjiHSt 


np^JK^e,  before  (of  time) 
caa^H,  from  behind 
6 est,  without 
«Jifl,  for 

flO,  up  to,  till,  before 
usii,  out  of,  from 
M^JKJty  (cf.  instr.),  between 
OTb,  away  from,  from 
Ch  (co)  (cf.  instr.), /rom,  ojf 
y,  at,  near,  with 
to  cs^AH  are  also  adverbs.) 


With  Dative 
Kt  (ko),  to,  txywards 
no  (cf.  ace.  and  prep.),  over,  on,  along,  according  to 


BTb,  into  (cf.  prep.) 

3a,  behind,  in  exchange  for,  in  return 

for  (cf.  instr.) 
Ha,  on  to  (cf.  prep.) 
HecMOTpii  Ha,  in  spite  of 
o,  oOT),  66o,  against  (cf.  prep.) 
n^peai,,  before  (place)  (cf.  instr.) 


With  Accusative 

no,  up  to,  at  the  rate  of  (cf.  dat.  and 

prep.) 
no^t,  under  (cf.  instr.) 
npo,  about,  concerning 
CKB03b  which  has  not  occurred  means 

through 
H^peat,  through,  across,  in  (of  time) 


M^WKHy,  between  (cf.  gen.) 
CL  (co),  with  (cf.  gen.) 


With  Instrumental 

3a,  uowby  ndpe^t  (cf.  ace.) 
Hajti),  over,  above 


With  Prepositional 

no,  after  (cf.  dat.  and  ace.) 
npn,  near,  at,  in  the  time  of 


BT,,  in  (cf.  ace.) 
Ha,  on  (cf.  ace.) 
o,  oST),  66o,  concerning  (cf.  ace.) 

_^ofe. — 3a,  n^pe^t,  noaii  govern  ace.  or  msfr. 
Bt,  Ha,  o  govern  ace.  or  ^e^. 

CT,  governs  gen.,  ace.  (=a5  in  comparisons),  or  instr, 
no  governs  dat.,  ace,  or  prep. 
M^JKjuy  governs  gen.  or  tW^r. 


186 


PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVE 


§287 


237.      PREDICATIVE  FORM  OF  ADJECTIVES 

Observe  that  o  or  e  is  inserted  very  frequently  in  the  mascuUne 
singular. 

Other  forms  in  brackets  indicate  alternatives. 

The  neuter  may  generally  be  used  adverbially,  though  the  accent 
sometimes  changes. 

(1)  Feminine  termination  accented^  e.g. 

npocToii :  npocT'L,  npocxa,  npocTO,  np6cTbi 
Similar  are : 


Sji-feaHHii  (ch-l) 
S-feflHbiH  (en-b) 
C-fejibiii  (6) 
BCcejibiH  (Beceji-b) 
BHflHblH  (cH-b;  6,  li) 

BKy^CHblH  (CHt) 

BbicoKiii  (6,  h) 
rjiasKiH  (OKT*  ;  6) 
rjiySoKift  (6,  A) 
rjiynbift 
rHHJi6ft 

rOJIOaHbitt  (CHT)) 

rojibifi  (6) 
rp6MKiH  (OK-b) 
rpjisHbift  (cH-b) 
aiiKitt 

HJIHHHblft  (liHCH'b) 

AOJiriii  (on.) 
aypnott  (cH-b) 
a^mHbiii  (cHT.) 
majiKift  (oK-b) 
jKapKiii  (oK-b) 
jKejiTbift  (6) 

JKHBOii 

mnpHbiii  (cH-b) 
sejieHbift 

Kp^CHblH  (CHT,  ;  6,  li) 
KpOTKiii  (OKT)) 

Kp^rjibiii 

Kp-fenKitt  (OKT.) 

mcjikIh  (okt.) 
MepTBblfi  (6,  li) 


Mlijiblfi 

MOKpblii 

MOJIOAOtt  (MOJIOflT.) 

HH3Kift  (OKT.) 

HOBblH 

H^JKHblfi  (CH-b) 

njioxoii 

nOJIHblH  (OH-b) 

npaBbiii 
npocToii 
npHMofi 
nycToii 
paBHbiii  (eiTb) 
p66Kitt  (oK-b) 
poBHbiH  (en-b) 

p-feaKift  (OKT.) 

ciijibHbiii  (cHJieH'b ;  or  (2)) 

CKpOMHblii  (CHl.) 
CK^qHblH  (CHT.) 

cjiaSbitt 

cjnJimHbiii  (en-b) 

cn'fejibitt 

CTapbiti 

cyxoft 

cfepbitt  (or  (2)) 

TBcpjiibiii 

Tenjibitt  (xeneji-b  ;  or  (2)) 

Tiixiii 

xpyaHbift  (bhtj) 

^3Kitt  (OKTi) 

xpa6pbm  (a  or  a) 
xyaott 


PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVE 


187 


HepHBiii  (eu-b) 
H^CTHbitt  (em,) 

Note. — ciiHift  :  chhb  ;  A,  e,  h 

(2)  Terminations  accented,  e.g. 
H66pbiH  :  flo6pT>, 
SojibHoii  (66jieH'b ;  o) 
Sojibinottl  .        ,  . 

Be^HKlft   /(B^^HK-t;    O.  ") 
BOJIBHblH  (BOJlCH'b) 
BblCOKift 

ropiiqift  (e,  h) 
n66pbiii 

KaKOBOH  (OB-b) 
KOpOTKitt  (dTOK-b) 

jierKiii  (oK-b) 

HMaji'b) 
MajibiH        J  ^  ^ 


qncTHii 
iipKift  (OKT,) 
iicHbift  (em,) 


no6pa,  Ao6p6,  aoSpii 
MiirKia  (oK-b) 
6cTpbift  (ocTep-b) 
CB-feTJibiii  (ejiTb) 
CHJibHbiii  (see  (1)) 
CMifeUIHOH  (dH-b) 
TCMHblft  (ewb) 
Tynoii 

THJKCJIblii 

;^MHbiii  (en-b) 
XHTpbiii  (ep-b) 
xopomiii 
mnpoKift 


(3)  Accentuation  of  the  attributive  adjective  preserved,  e.g. 

SAOpOBblH  :    S^OpOB'b,  SflOpOBa,  SAOpOBO,  3«Op6BW 


SoraxbiH 

BCJiHKOJi'fenHbm  (en-b) 
BHeaanHbiii  (en-b) 

BHHM^TejIbHblii  (CHTb) 
n-fettCTBHTeJIbKblii  (CHT.) 
HOBOJIbHblH  (CHT,) 
SflOpOBblfit 

3JI0H  (aoJiT,),  3Jia,  etc. 

H3B^CTHHH[  (CHT,) 
HHTep^CHblft  (eHT,) 

HcnpaBHHti  (en-b) 
KHCJibiii  (ejiT. ;  or  (1)) 
KpaciiBHft 

JlibHHBblfi 
JII0663Hblii  (CH-b) 

M^ajieHHbiil 

Morynitt 

HCKpaciiBbift 

HeCH^CTHblii  (CH-b) 


OHeBiiflHbm  (cH-b) 

noKottHbiii  (ocH'b) 

noK6pHbift  (em,) 

noJi63Hbiii  (em,) 

npHJi6?KHbiii  (em,) 

npiiiTHbift  (em,) 

(pa^T,) 

piiiJKiii 

cepAiiTbifl 

CKopbiii 

CM'fejibiii 

cyp6Bbifi 

CHacTJiHBbiii 

TpyA0JIK)6HBblft 

Tpycjii^Bbiii 
T-fecHbiii  (em,) 
yMKacHbiii  (eni,) 
yibxHbitt  (em,) 
xiimHbiHi  (eni.) 


(4)  iVo^e. — xoJiojXHbiH  :  xojioaem,,  nna,  6  or  o,  li  or  bi 

xopomeHbKifi  :  xopomeHeK-b,  ^HbKa,  etc.  {pretty) 
CBHToft :  CBiixa  etc. 


188  PREDICATIVE  COMPARATIVES  §238 

238.        PREDICATIVE  COMPARATIVE  IN  -E 

(1)  ENDING  IN  ->Ke 

6ji63Kiii,  lame,  near  H^SKitt,  lijKe,  low  {not  high) 

rjia^Kii!,  ^jkb,  smooth  p-fej^Kifi,  'hme,  rare 

rjiySoKift,  6me,  deep  cxporift,  ome,  strict 

aoporoii,  6>Ke,  dear  TBepatiH,  pme,  ^rd 

H^iiAKift,  ume,  fluid  ;^3Kifi,  ;^JKe,  narrow 

MOJioflott,  6me,  young  xyaoii,  x^jKe,  bad 

Note. — The  stem  of  the  positive  ends  in  -r,  -a,  -HK,  -3K. 

(a)  n63AHHtt  has  n63?Ke  or  nosAH-fee,  late. 

(2)  ENDING  IN  -me 
BbicoKift,  Biiime,  high  cyxoii,  3^me,  dry 
najiCKlii,  Jibme,/ar                               Ti^xift,  i4me,  Zot^?  {not  loud) 
ndJiritt,  ojibme  or  oji-fee,  long              T6HKift,  OHbiue,  thin 

Note. — ^The  stem  of  the  positive  ends  in  a  guttural. 

{a)  Observe  the  irregular  forms  : 
xop6mlft,  Ji^^Huie,  good  CT^pbifi,  ^pme,  old 

6ojibm6tt,  SoJibuie,  large  paHHitt,  ^Hbine,  early 

M^jieHbKitt,  M^Hbine,  little 

(3)  ENDING  IN  -me 

rycT6fi,  ^me,  thick,  dense  TOJiCTbift,  6jime,/a^ 

npocT6tt,  6me,  simple  ^iicTbitt,  ^me,  clean 

Note. — ^The  stem  of  the  positive  ends  in  -ct. 

(4)  ENDING  IN   -He 

6or^Tbifi,  dne,  rich  Kpyxofi,  fne,  steep,  brusque 

r6pbKiii,  pne,  bitter  Kp^nKiii,  n^e,  strong 

rp6MKiH,  qe  or  n-he,  loud  JierKiii,  erqe,  light 

JKaJiKift,  ne  or  H'he,  pitiful  m^jikIA,  Jibne,  fine,  shallow 

H<apKifi,  He,  hot  MiirKiii,  M^irqe,  soft 

KopoTKifi,  one,  short  p66Kiii,  6qe,  timid 

KpoTKifi,  6He  or  othc,  gentle  lipKlft,  pqe,  bright 

Note. — ^The  stem  of  the  positive  ends  in  -K  or  -T. 

(a)  Observe : 

nliKift,  anq-fee,  wild 

(5)  Irregular  Forms 
jnemcBbifi,  6BJie,  cheap    *  TflJKejibiii,  Tfl>K6jie  or  XHJKeji'fee, 

mHp6Klii,  mnpe,  broad  heavy 

The  pronunciation  of  these  forms  in  -e  is  simple :  the  syllable  preceding 
the  termination  bears  the  accent. 


239 


IREEGULAK  VERBS 


189 


239.      A  FEW  COMMON  IRREGULAR  VERBS  i 
A.  Some  verbs  in  -ctb,  -cth 
Infin.  Pres.         Imperat.  Past 

(1)  (no)BecTH  ejify  enib        ejsjk         ejit,  d,  6,  ii,  to  lead 

KJiacTb         any,  enib        a^Ii         ajit,  a,  o,  h,  «o  put,  lay 
The  perfective  is  noJioJKHTb  (JK^,  6jKHmb). 


(y)KpacTb  ' 
(no)npiicTb 

(2)  (BlJl)MeCTH 

(3a)i;B'fecTii 

(3)  (no)rp6cTb 


an^,  enib  ajuk  aji-b,  a,  o,  h,  to  s^eaZ 

sijlf,  enib  fl«ii  flJi-b,  ^,  6,  iky  to  spin 

eTff  enib  exii  ejii>,  ^,  6,  li,  to  ^i^eep 

i^T^,  euib  "feTH  'feji'b  [jot],  ^,  6,  li,  to  bhom 

e6f,  euih  e6A  eS^,  6ji^,  6,  h,  to  rot/? 


Perfective  also  rpeSn^Tb. 
CKpecTii       e6fy  enib        e6ii 
Perfective  CKpeSnyTb. 


e6T3,  6jid,  6,  H,  to  scrape 


(4)  (no)HecTH 
(no)TpHCTii 

(BIj)pOCTH 

(5)  (npo)KJi;icTb 


Infin. 
(no)Be3TH 

(pa3)rpiJ3Tb 
(no)ji^3Tb 


ec:^,  eiub  ecii  eciy,  cjia,  6,  h,  to  carry 

ncf,  enib  hch  HCb  [jos],  cji^,  6,  ili,  to  sAafce 

CT^,  enib  CTii  OCT.,  ocjid,  6,  h,  to  grow 

Huf,  enib  HHH  HJiT),  &y  o,  H,  to  cwrse 

B.  Verbs  in  -3Tb,  -3th 
Pres.         Imperat.  Past 

esf,  euib         636         gs-b,  3Jia,  6,  ii,  to  convey, 

carry  in  a  vehicle 
bi3^,  enib        bi3H        rpiJis-b,  Jia,  o,  h,  to  gn^iw 
^3y,  enib        •fe3b         Ji'fe3'b,  Jia,  o,  h,  to  climb 


C.  Verbs  in  -hb 

Infin.  Pres.  Imperat. 

(no)6ep6Hb  r^,  jKenib  ^     ern 

(c)jKeqb  ry,  JKenib  ^     jKrn 

Future  Perfective  coJKr;^  etc. 

(no)c'feqb  K^,  Henib  ^     'hK^ 

(no)T6Hb  K^,  Henib  ^      eKH 


Past 
enb,  rjia,  6, 6,  to  jfcee^,  preserve 
jKer-b,  jKFJia,  o,  h,  to  bum 

"feK-b,  "feKJia,  o,  H,  to  cw^,  ^0^ 
CK-b,  Kjia,  6,  A,  tofiow 


Infin. 
jieqb 

CfeCTb 


D.  The  perfective  verbs  jichb  and  cifecTb 

Fut.  Imperat.  Past 

Jiflry,  iijKemb  Jifln>,  Hrxe    Jien,,  Ji^,  6,  li,  to  Zie  down 

cjiny,  enib  cit^fc,  bxe      cifejfb,  a,  o,  h,  to  sit  down 

The  Imperfectives  are  JiOJKiATbCfl  and  cafli^TbCH. 


»  Cf.  Par.  156. 

2  Present  tense  like  that  of  Mo^b  :    ry  (ky),  wenn.  (qenn.)  e<c.,  ryn.  (Kyrb). 


EXAMPLES  OF  RUSSIAN  SCRIPT 

"Glie  Writtetv  AlpK^Vec 
A  a  iJ¥^a  C  c  ^  <? 

E  e  /^V  U  u  <^/^  1?//  «^  ^ 


0  0  ^^  n  aS  ^  a- 

n  u/l/ln  e  e  <^  ^ 

190 


EUSSIAN  SCRIPT  191 


Wo^U  from  Sficdon^  VUl  -XX 

o^/o^uii^^  ru:H^.^^u^^i^^  Al(2^^aJc^^^^ 

f^rmdjty,  ^l^Ciy,     Jl/l^uc^,  ^Cl^t^'l^ 


z  ^drancu^,  ct/c^ciy,    Jl^^uc^,  ^^^^< 

3  ^aci/c:i^  c^i^^^H^^  /:^a^^  ^M^^^^^ui^^iey 

xi.  I  0<ye^a^,/7i^7Uy,zyi^,^/n^^/i^^^ 

xii.    1  y^i 


t^^/^  j^i^fm^^  n^fii/ii^^  /yz^ci^mtf 


192 


RUSSIAN  SCRIPT 


t^^^' 


xvi    wa^M/^i^^,  9j^fe;  ^^^^,  ^^^^  ^ 


XViii    U^i^^  ^U^a^  ^/^^/pt/ ci^a^4^^^^ 

r^i^^i^a^i/^  /^f^^  a:^^^^   ^^^^v^  ' 

Sen.ibmce^   in  It^ic^ 
jVotn  Lessons  I --XXXt 


KUSSIAN  SCRIPT 


193 


in 

iv 

V 

vi 

Mil 

viii 


X\ 

Xiii 

XV 

xvi 

xviii 

xix 

xxi 

xxh 

xxvii 


^m^^^u^{Z  /yiAuc^o/  az/afUytc 


xxviii  J/loM^^ 


//^/Ui4^uS  ^Oc^e^^t:^ 


XXXI 


N 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT 


Exercise  I 

(1)  starid8d(t).  (2)  naSAtsts.  (3)  on— stabi  stari  tJetAvsk.  (4) 
bsK  xlsp  i  tSorni  xlsp.  (5)  yaj  sin — sdni  mAtAdoi  ma^tjik.  (6) 
tSorni  iss.  (7)  on — ptAXoi  ma^itjik.  (8)  naj  sin — gtupi,  a  vaj  sin — 
umni  ma^tjik.     (9)  stari  dom.     (10)  naj  det — 49g!iipi  tjatAvek. 


Exercise  II 

A.  (1)  vaj  dst  bit  stari  tJotAvsk.  (2)  zimoi  on  lAbotAt  liamnogA  ; 
on  spat.  (3)  ja  xaiaJo  znai  tjorni  dom,  gds  on  sit  zimoi.  (4)  naj 
Atsts  bit  n9  tAkoi  stabi  tJotAvsk.  (5)  IstAm  on  XAdit  vlss,  gds  on 
mnogA  lAbotAt.  (6)  J9v6  sin  bit  umni  md^tjik.  (7)  IstAm  on  igrat 
i  prigAt.  (8)  nA  on  bit  nogtupi  ma^tjik.  (9)  gds  on  igrat  zimoi  ? 
(10)  ti  namnogA  rAbotAt  zimoi ;  ti  n9  XAdit  vlss.  (11)  stAt  ma^ltjik 
jst  bsti  xlsp.  (12)  ti  XArAjo  znat  naj  dom.  (13)  ti  J9v6  znat. 
(14)  moi  mAtAdoi  sin  znat  tvoi  dom.     (15)  vot  moi  sin.     (16)  vot  on. 

B.  VAprosi.  (1)  xto  bit  stari  tj9tAvsk  ?  (2)  Jto  on  dstAt  zimoi  ? 
(3)  kak  ja  znat  dom,  gds  ^'il  vaj  dst  ?  (4)  xto  ns  bit  tAkoi  stabi  ?  (5) 
kuda  on  XAdit  ?  (6)  kAgda  on  XAdit  vlss  1  (7)  kAkof  bit  J9v6  sin? 
(8)  Jto  on  dstAt  ?     (9)  Jto  jet  mdltSik  ?     (10)  znat  li  ja  tvoi  dom  ? 


Exercise  III 

B.  (1)  ma^tjik  dot  stAriku  tot  tjomi  xlsp.  (2)  tvoi  dobri  Atsts 
pAkAzat  mns  tvoi  sad  (t)  i  AgArot.  (3)  vaj  vnuk  miis  skAzdt  stA. 
(4)  on  rii9na  n9  znat.  (5)  ja  t9ba  n9  znat.  (6)  J9v6  umni  sin 
pAkAzdt  t9bs  moi  stari  dom.  (7)  ja  pAkAzat  sinu  bsti  dom  bratA. 
(8)  stA — ns  bsti,  a  tjorni  xlsp.  (9)  ja  dot  J9mu  vaj  sir.  (10)  on 
J9v6  jst.  (11)  jix  brat  gAVArit  XArAjo  pAruski,  ua  on  gAVArit  tAgdd 
6tS9ii  ptoxA  pAongiiski.  (12)  gds  yaj  Atsts?  (13)  on  t9pe^f  zdes  (s). 
(14)  IstAm    siini    mus'ik    XAdit    vlss;    on    tam    rAbotAt.     (15)  tvoi 

194 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT  195 

vnuk  ;pAkAzat  miis  AgAiot  Atsa.  (16)  naj  druk  bit  tAgda  niAtAdoi, 
a  on  tope^i"  stari  tJatAvek.  (17)  ja  xaiaJo  znat  stciri  dom,  gde  s'it 
starik.     (18)  ti  nikAgda  no  rAbotAt. 


Exercise  IV 

A.  (1)  dlA  maUtJikA.  (2)  basstArika.  (3)  udnigA.  (4)  unavo. 
(5)  dlA   riiand ;    u   nix ;    dk    toba.     (6)  dlA    kAvo  ?     (7)  u    kAVO  ? 

(8)  bos  taba.  (9)  u  Atsd.  (10)  dU  Atsa.  (11)  gds  31!  dobri  stari 
druk  Atsa  ?  (12)  Jto  jomti  dot  tvoi  Atsts  ?  (13)  Adnajdi  on  dat 
tJotAvsku  XAroJi  bsK  dom.  (14)  komu  on  skAzat  stA?  (15)  IstAm 
stAt  ma^ltjik  bit  tJastA  u  musika.  (16)  tAgda  vaj  limni  druk  sit 
zdes  (s).  (17)  zimoi  sin  tarn  lAbotAt  bos  Atsa.  (18)  ti  xaiaJo  znat 
stA.  (19)  brat  Atsa  skAzat  jim  stA.  (20)  kuda  ma'-ItSik  tJastA 
XAdit  IstAm  ?  (21)  moi  niAtAdoi  vnuk  tope^r  u  ihona.  (22)  xto  bit 
tAgda  u  toba  ?  (23)  u  ihona  zdes  (s)  dobri  druk.  (24)  u  stAVA 
mu3ika  bit  tjorni  xlsp.  (25)  sir  ne  dlA  toba,  a  dlA  nix.  (26)  on 
nikAgdd  no  igrat  u  ihona. 

Exercise  V 

A.  (1)  bos  goroJA.  (2)  dlA  stArika.  (3)  dva  stArikd.  (4)  u 
tsArd.  (5)  bos  AlenA.  (6)  tri  goroJA.  (7)  bA^ljoi  SArdi.  (8)  xrdbri" 
goroi.  (9)  silnitsa^f.  (10)  zdArovi  md^ltjik.  (11)  mAtAdoi  sin  tSArd. 
(12)  u  tobd  bAgdti  druk. 

B.  (1)  bsdni  musik  zndt  goroJA.  (2)  xrdbri  goroi— dobri  tJotAvsk. 
(3)  zimoi  stdri  rAbotnik  no  tJdstA  XAdit  fsad  (t).  (4)  IstAm  vaj  bA^lnoi 
sin  sit  zdes  (s).  (5)  gds  on  tope^r  ?  (6)  u  Atsd  tri  sinA ;  vot  Ani ! 
(7)  u  mu5ikd  tope^r  otjon  mdlonki  AgArot  bos  SArdJA  ;  on  lis  bAgdti,  ua 
otjon  bsdni  tJotAvsk.     (8)  raz  (ras)  silni  tsa^r  dot  goroju  bA^Soi  dom. 

(9)  u  StArikd  tSofiro  vnukA.  (10)  u  novo  bA^noi  sin.  (11)  Adin 
sin  tsA^rd  gAVArit  xArA^o  pAfrAntsuski  i  pAniski,  a  drugoi  gAVArit 
to^kA  pAruski.  (12)  ja  jovo  nikAgdd  no  znat.  (13)  gds  sit  bA^ijoi 
Ale^n  ? 

Exercise  VI 

E.  (1)  tjotiro  Astd.     (2)  bos  jotSihond.     (3)  dlA  Astd.     (4)  Astu. 

(5)  bit  tAgdd  otjon  silni  i  bAgdti  tsd^r ;  u  novo  bit  bA^ljoi  dvArsts. 

(6)  u  tsArd  bit  druk-goroi.  (7)  tsa^r  dot  goroju  dva  domA  i 
Wijoi  Iss.  (8)  istAm  on  xAtst  gAnd^t  AlenA.  (9)  bsdni  musik 
pAkAzdt  jomu  tri  AlenA.     (10)  mdlonki    sin  xAtst  tjdstA   igrd^t,   a 


196  PHONETIC  TRANSCKIPT 

javo  Atsts  na  xAtst.  (11)  on  bit  nobAgati  tJatAvsk;  u  liavo  matA 
xlebA,  nA  on  sejat  mnogA  jatjriiena  i  Afsa.  (12)  zimoi  on  na  mog 
lAbotAt.  {13)  siini  tsa^r  xAtet  kupit  jevo  malonki  dom.  (14)  u 
musika  toHkA  dva  sinA ;  Adin  sin  mnogA  lAbotAt^,  drugoi  liikAgda 
nitSavo  na  dstAt,  nA  on  jet  XAioSi  xlsp  u  Atsa.  (15)  Atsts  nikAgda 
n9  XAtet  da^t  jamu  xlsbA.  (16)  stArik  dat  Astii  mnogA  Afsa.  (17)  u 
novo  nst  jotjihana.     (18)  ja  mog  to^kA  matA  pAnima^t. 


EXEKCISE    VII 

A.  (1)  fkusnAJa  jabtAkA.  (2)  sini  tsvst  nsbA.  (3)  siiieja  mora. 
(4)  \)b\aJ9  nsbA.  (5)  spstAJa  jabtAkA.  (6)  malankAJa  zdanija.  (7) 
xAroJi  sir  i  xAroJoja  pitjo.  (8)  vot  tvAJo  spstAJa  jabUkA.  (9)  naja 
XAro^aja  kuSAiija.  (10)  kistAJo  pitjo.  (11)  vaja  Wljoja  sato.  (12) 
stA  zdanja — bA^ljoi  dvArsts,  kAtori  dot  garoju  siini  tsa^r.  (13)  malanld 
sin  drtigA  bit  zdArovi  ma^ltjik;  on  jst  stA  bA^Joja  jabtAkA,  kAtorAJa 
ti  mns  dot.  (14)  pAtom  on  xAtst  igra^t.  (15)  ma^ltjik  igrat  i 
prigAt ;  vot  pAtJamu  ja  nikAgdd  na  mog  spa^t. 


Exercise  VIII 

B.  (1)  sini  tsvst  morA  i  nsbA  mns  otjan  nrdvitsA ;  bA^ijoi  Iss  mns 
nrdvitsA,  nA  vdja  malaiikAJa  sato  mns  otjan  mdtA  nrdvitAS.  (2) 
savodnA  Adin  tJatAvsk  xAtst  vidat  madvedA  vlasti.  (3)  knas,  druk 
tsATO,  gAnat  ihadvedA.  (4)  stA  jamii  skAzat  musik.  (5)  pAtom 
ja  vidat  stAVA  tJatAvskA  fsAdu  musikd.  (6)  ksASAlenju  u  musikd 
bA^noi  malanki  sin ;  savodnA  on  bit  u  stAVA  stArika,  kAtori  fsAdti 
lAbotAt.  (7)  fkusnAJa  kujAnja  jamii  nrdvitAs,  pAtAmtiJtA  on  XAtst 
jest.  (8)  bAHjoja  zdanja,  kAtorAJa  ti  tam  vidat, — dvArsts  knazA. 
(9)  moi  druk  na  domA  tape^i*.  (10)  ksASAlenju  ja  javo  Atsd  nigds  na 
mog  vidat ;  on  nikAgda  ns  bit  domA.     (11)  vot  on  tape^r. 


Exercise  IX 

C.  (1)  mAgutJi  knaz  sihinistrAm.  (2)  fkusni  xlsp  bas  mastA.  (3) 
spstAJa  jabtAkA  jamu  nanravitAs.  (4)  javo  dobri  druk  sit  zalasAm. 
(5)  Adno  ki-estA  stAJdtA  pefat  Aknom,  a  drugoja  stAJdtA  u  stAtd  (perat 
stAtom).  (6)  stAt  stot  na  stoit  tSafira  rubla.  (7)  malanki  ma^ltjik 
igrat  stAvdri^tJam  fsAdu.  (8)  bsdni  sin  stAJdt  sAtsom  perat  etim 
Aknom.     (9)   sksm  on  Jot  kmofu  ?     (10)  u  ihand  bit  tAgda  kdniani 


PHONETIC  TRANSCKIPT  197 

doihik  ssArajem.     (11)  skoUkA  stoitA  stA  doravanAJa  kr^sU  ?     (12)  u 
kAiAia  bit  kiAsivi  sad  (t). 

Exercise  X 

B.  (1)  Adin  silni  tsa^f  stroit  bA^ijoi  kaiiiani  dvArets.  (2)  perat  etim 
zdanjom  bit  otjan  krAsm  sad  (t).  (3)  ha  pri  samAm  vjezda  fsat  stAJat 
malanki  dafavani  doriiik.  (i)  stA  nonravitAs  tsAru.  (5)  vetAm 
doihika  5it  bsdni  mus'ik,  a  snim  javo  Atets.  (6)  istAm  tsa^r  tJdstA 
gulat  sihinistrAm  fsAdti.  (7)  ras  on  gAVArit  stAvariStJam  Atom 
musiks.  (8)  nAkAnsts  tsa^r  pAstdt  ihinistrA  kmusiku,  Jtobi  on  kupit 
stari  doriiik.  (9)  kAgda  riiinistr  pAjot  vAgArot,  tJatAvek  ne  bit  domA  ; 
on  lAbotAt  tAgda  vlasii.  (10)  stArik  tagsa  ns  bit  domA,  a  toHkA 
otjan  maianki  sin  musika  bit  zAstAtom.  (11)  kujAt  tSorni  xlsp 
smastAm,  a  ksA3Alenju  tot  maHtJik  na  mog  skAza't  riiinistru,  gds  tAgda 
bit  Atsts.     (12)  Jto  detAt  ?     naiza  kupit  doihikA. 

Exercise  XI 

B.  uriiana  ;  baskAVo  ?  Atjom  ?  ZAmnoju  ;  utaba  ;  basnavo  ;  stem  ? 
Anom  ;  ftabs  ;  stAboju ;  nAtJom  ?  Akom  on  gAVArit  ?  Atjom  ?  kArnu 
on  stA  gAVArit  ?  setim  ;  kstAmu  ;  kAkAvo  bitA  stA  zdanja  ?  paro, 
kAtorAJa  lasatA  tam ;  maianki  dom,  kAtori  stAJat  pri  vjesda ;  kAkof 
bit  javo  sin  ?     ti  pAjot  knamu ;  tjsm  ?   ksASAlenju ;  .ja  nikAgdd  na 

skAZat  StAVA. 

Exercise  XIII 

A.  (1)  u  sAbaki  kusok  riiasA.  (2)  bstAJa  tdpA  kojki.  (3)  staiAJa 
nanA  dsvAtSki.  (4)  u  navo  bAgatAJa  babuJkA.  (5)  dobrAJa  ruskAJa 
damA  sdsvAtJkAi — fsAdu.  (6)  ZAtJem  tJornAJa  kq^kA  nAstAls  ?  (7) 
Ana  tape^i"  nA  pAtii.  (8)  ja  vidat  damn  ssAbakAi  vlasu.  (9)  maianki 
riiski  maUtJik  igrat  snaiiaju  nAmAstii.  (10)  u  ko^ki  kiAsivAJa  JeJA. 
(11)  savodnA  mAJa  mAtAdaJA  sastra  nAtugii.  (12)  Jto  on  savodnA  dot 
SAbaka  ?  (13)  ja  na  gAVArit  a  sAbaka.  (14)  xAioJi  xlsp  bas  mastA 
i  ihasA  nanrdvitsA  stusanka.  (15)  gfaznAJa  vAda  vvadrs  ;  tJistAJa 
VAda  fsAdii. 

Exercise  XV 

A.  (1)  Ana  prijta  nA  jarmArku.  (2)  SAbakA  stArika  lasatA  nA  sontsa. 
(3)  tJoriiAJa  koJkA  upatA  vrakii  (vrsku).  (4)  ja  jajo  nigds  na  vidat,  nA 
stAt  mdUtJik  jajo  spas.     (5)  Ana  smAtrstA  nA  samku  vlasu.     (6)  on  nos 


198  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT 

V8dr6  svAdoju.  (7)  nauseli  Ana  spAta  nA  stAm  riiesta  ?  (8)  vstAm 
sMtjAJQ  Ana  J9J6  na  mAgta  vidat.  (9)  mAtAddJA  pAdrugA  senStJini 
piAjtd  sad  (t)  i  vAjta  vlss.  (10)  nalza  skAza^t,  gds  And  tape^f.  (11) 
neuseli  And  updtA  vvodu  ?     (12)  vot  And  ! 


Exercise  XVI 

A.  (1)  ftjord  dobri  stArik  sidet  zdes  nA  stAm  sttila,  kAtori  J8v6  vnuk 
prinos  nA  bersk.  (2)  s6nts9  jaS^S^  sijdtA.  (3)  on  vidst^  kak  tarn 
losdtA  ssrAJ9  ko^kA.  (4)  pAtom  And  stdtA  pit  mAtAko  kAtorAJo  jei 
prinastd  angliskAJg  dsvAtSkA.  (5)  kak  ras  vaJW  fsat  1159]  a  sAbdkA. 
(6)  priStd  kko^ka,  xAtstA  AtAgnd^t  J9J6.  (7)  n9  mAgtd.  (8)  bitd 
drdkA  riiesdu  sAbdkAi  i  koSkAi.  (9)  stArik  smAtrst  nA  drdku.  (10) 
vstA  vreiiiA  stdiAJa  bdbA  Jta  liiimA.  (11)  vid9tA  i  And  to^  Jto  stutJitAs. 
(12)  n9std  kak  ras  bA^Jojg  V9dr6  svAdoi  i  stdtA  lit  vAdoi  nA  ko^ku  i 
SAbdku.  (13)  SAbdkA  ub95dtA.  (14)  koJkA  lagtd  i  snovA  stdLv  spa^t 
nA  s6nts9. 

Exercise  XVIII 

A.  (1)  ftjard  utrAm  ja  fstretitA  pAdrugu^  kAtoiAJa  mns  lAsskAzdtA 
fso  to,  Jto  dstAtAS,  kAgdd  And  06  vd9revn9.  (2)  bitd  vasnoi  J95tS6 
XAt6dnAJ9  pAgodA,  nA  trudAlubivi  kr9stjdnin  pAxdt  m6krAJ9  pola 
SAxoju,  i  seJAt  jatjriie^n  i  avos.  (3)  dnom  on  lAbotAt  nAhigu  ili 
fsAdti;  vetJgrAm  on  Adixdt,  a  notjju  on  spat.  (4)  V9sn6i  mAJd 
pAdrtigA  t659  xAdita  fjkotu.  (5)  vetJarAm  And  prigAtAvldtA  urok. 
(6)  IstAm  bitd  AbiknAvenA  xAr659J9,  toptAJa,  inAgdd  3drkAJ9  pAgodA,  i 
jatjme^n  U58  viiAstdt.  (7)  osanju  bitd  sdtvA.  (8)  krastjdnin  sat 
S'itA  S9rp6m  ili  kAsoju.  (9)  zimoi  bitd  pAtjii  fsagdd  durndJA  pAgodA 
i  silni  mAros.     (10)  zimoi  n9lzd  lAbotAt  nA  dvArs. 


Exercise  XIX 

A.  (1)  moi  stdrji  sin  U3S  kontjit  Jkotu.  (2)  nA  kAgdd  ja  bit  vdarevno, 
J9v6  mtdtji  brat  pAsaJt^dt  jaJtSo  mdi9nkAJ9  utJiliStJa,  kAt6rAJ9  stAJdtA 
biiz  VAkzdtA.  (3)  ras  on  pfijot  dAmoi  is  JkoK.  (4)  J9v6  fstretit  javo 
mdiaiiki  tAvdriStS.  (5)  sprAsit  J9v6,  "  Jto  ti  savodnA  utrAm  dstAt 
fjkoig  ?  "  (6)  prilssni  utS9nik  pAkAzdt  J9mu  knigu  i  t9trd^t,  rAsskAzdt 
fso  to,  Jto  dstAtAs  AbiknAVsnA,  i  skAzdt,  Jto  l)9s  knigi  i  tatrddi  nalzd 
utJitsA.  (7)  kroriia  kiiigi  bit  u  navo  tSorni  kArAnddJ.  (8)  inAgdd 
stdrji  utS9rLik  pisdt  parom  vmestA  kArAndAjd.     (9)  kroriia   tAvo  on 


PHONETIC  TKANSCRIPT  199 

pisat  nA  bumaga.  (10)  ktasnAJa  dAskd  stAJatA  vozlo  kahdn  utJitalA 
i  perat  Aknom.  (11)  trudAlubivi  utjitai  tJastA  pisat  liistAm  ha  dAske. 
(12)  lonivi  utjanik  fsogda  sidst  da  skAiiieika  blis  kdfadri.  (13) 
surovi  stdri  utjitai  dot  urok  sQvodnA  utrAm.  (14)  on  mnogA  spraJivAt, 
nA,  ksA3Alenju,  t64kA  Adin  vnimdtaini  utjaiiik  XAtet  Atvotja^t.  (15) 
stAt  md^ltSik  pAtutJit  At  utJitalA  pAxvAlu. 


Exercise  XXI 

A.  (1)  prikdstjik  prijot  gdrugu.  (2)  kArovA  i  Aftsd  u  senjtjini. 
(3)  vniitSkA  guidtA  sbabuSkAi.  (4)  ja  jamu  dat  knigu  sastri.  (5) 
utjitol    gAVAi-it   Atotrddi.      (6)  svsttAJa    ulitsA   mne   otjon   nrdvitAs. 

(7)  mokiAJa  trAvd  nAtugti.  (8)  suxdJA  zamla  jomu  nanravitAs. 
(9)  on  stroit  doravani  dom  pefat  dvArtsom.  (10)  sastra  Atsa  bita 
tarn.  (11)  moi  tAvdriStJ  kupit  bA^Joi  ZAmok  sklutSom.  (12)  ti 
prijot  kAtsu.  (13)  staiAJa  stusankA  prinostd  malankAJo  vadro 
svAdoi.  (14)  utSitoinitsA  sidstA  nAmAstu.  (15)  on  tudd  pAjol  bos 
maUtSikA.  (16)  tSornAJg  tojAt  jetA  trAvu.  (17)  bstAJo  sAbakA  stAJatA 
perat  toSAdju.  (18)  kiias  vidst  jarki  svst  fkomnAta.  (19)  u  stArikd 
svstti  doriiik,  malanki  sat,  bA^ljoi  hik,  bsti  Asot,  tJornAJa  Aftsd.  (20) 
utJanitsA  prAjtd  Jkotu. 

Exercise  XXII 

A.  (1)  senJtJinA  pAjtd  pAulitsa  sdotjorju.  (2)  nAkAnets  And  prijld 
gdveri.  (3)  stdrAJa  ma^t  AtkfitA  sAmd  dve^r  i  vAStd.  (4)  snAtJdtA 
And  piAjtd  kuxnu  i  dvs  komnAti.  (5)  pAtom  bsdnAJa  senJtJinA 
pAdnAtds  pAlesnitsa  i  uzndtA  dve^r.  (6)  dva  godA  tAmii  nAzdt  And 
otSan  xaiaJo  zndU  sty  dve^r.     (7)  nA  senJtJinA  naxAtstA  SAmd  Atkrit. 

(8)  pAstAmu  And  dAtd  dotjari  kiutj  At  komnAti.  (9)  dotj  bas  trudd 
AtkritA  i  Aiis  jaS^Jo  ias  VAjli. 


Exercise  XXVII 

A.  (1)  vAdnom  goiAda  bitd  jdrmArkA.  (2)  vstA  vfemA  bitd  xaIsia. 
(3)  mnogA  nArodu  uriiartA  AtstAi  usdsnAi  bAlezni.  (4)  prijsxAt  nAstu 
jdrmAiku  Adin  kupsts  izdrugovA  goiAdA  ssanoi  i  mAtAdoi  dotSkAi. 
(5)  dsvAtSka  bitA  to^kA  tSatira  godA.  (6)  vdruk  Atsts  i  ma^t  zAbAleli. 
(7)  sotjds  Atvazii  vbA^nitsu  bA^novA  Atsd  sbsdnAi  mdtarju.  (8)  -zndtjit, 
AstdtAs  mdiankAJa  dsvAtSkA  Adnd.     (9)  ptdkAtA,  bsdnAJa,  ptdkAlA. 


200  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT 


Exercise  XXVIII 


A.  (1)  nAkAnets  Ana  ZAdumAtA  iska^t  Atsa  i  ma^t.  (2)  pAjta  Ana 
pAgorAdu.  (3)  brAditA  tssK  de^n  i  to^ikA  kvetSoru  dAjta  Ana  dA 
bA^lJoi  bA^mtsi.  (4)  no  vbA^nitsu  J9J6  no  puskdli.  (5)  jsxaI  riiimA 
devAtSki  bAgati  kupsts.  (6)  And  lAsskAzatA  J9mu  pro  svAJo  gora. 
(7)  dobri  tJotAvek  vaJoI  vbA^iiiitsu  uznd^t  pro  Atsa  i  ma^t  nastSas(t)nAi 
devAtJki.  (8)  tarn  jamu  skAzdli,  Jto  Ani  U5s  tiriiarii.  (9)  i  rajit 
dobri  kupsts  vza^t  sirotku  ksobs.  (10)  tak  i  sdstAt.  (11)  stdtA  sit 
n9stSds(t)nAJ9  sirAta  ftjusoi  soiiijs  kak  fsvAJei. 

Exercise  XXIX 

A.  (1)  vi  stroili  svoi  dom.     (2)  xArAjo^  Jto  ja  xAtst  kupit  vaj  dom. 

(3)  on  rAbotAt  fsvAJom  sAdu.  (4)  n9U5eii  on  suda  prijsxAt  istAvo 
gorAdA  ?  (5)  mi  stA  pAtutJili  At  svAJ9v6  Atsa.  (6)  voJa  kArovA 
brAditA  ves  de^n  pA  stAmu  tugu.  (7)  tjei  gromki  gotAs  mi  tak  tJastA 
sHJaII  ?  (8)  fse  eti  dikiJ9  5iv6tniJ9  jeli  to^lkA  Admi  Aftsti.  (9) 
ntisnA  bitA  jix  druzjam  skAza^t  fso  to,  Jto  mi  U3s  tS9tif9  godA  znali. 
(10)  vAzmosnA  li  bilA  iidot  to,  Jto  vi  dstAli  fsvAJei  k6mnAt9  ?  (11) 
fse  naji  druzja  bili  tAgdd  zdes  (s).  (12)  tSJ9mu  sinu  vi  dali  staruju 
svAJii  knigu  ?  ^  (13)  tjjei  dotSofi  vi  rAsskAzali  fso  to,  Jto  stutJitAS  ? 
(14)  n9U3eli  stA  pravdA  ?      (15)  pAstJastju  ja  n9  znat  stAVA  gorAdA. 

Exercise  XXXI 

A.  (1)  Adna  mAl:AdaJ9  senStJinA,  kAtorAJg  sidstA  Adnasdi  radAm 
ssvAJei  starAi  totkAi,  i  mAjina^lnA  igralA  pa^itsAihi  J9J6  ruki,  zAihetitA 
ZAtAt6J9  kA^tso  nA  pa4ts9  totki.  (2)  Ana  sprAsitA,  "  totkA,  Jto  ^tA  za 
kA^tso  ?  "  (3)  starAJ9  damA  pAkrAsnstA,  pAtom  pAbl9dnstA,  i  skAzatA 
nAkAnsts  drAsaJtJim  gotASAm,   ^'  mns   n9prijdtnA  Ab  stAm  gAVArit." 

(4)  AtS9vidnA  Ana  stArdtAs  skrit  At  pigriidnitsi  svai  tJufstvA. 

Exercise  XXXII 

A.  (1)  prdvdA,  ja  stAVA  n9  znat.  (2)  rdnA  ili  poznA  ja  fso  budu 
zna^t.  (3)  tAgdd  on  gAVArit  pAruski,  nA  6tS9n  ihedlonA.  (4)  skorA 
on  budgt  gAVArit  jdsnA  i  pravilnA.  (5)  on  prijot  poznA,  a  And 
priStd  gArdzdA  P639.  (6)  nixto  stAVA  nikAgdd  n9  biid9t  j)Animd^t. 
(7)  m639t-bit,  on  ihgnd  nikAgda  n9  pAnimdt.  (8)  Ana  to^lkA  6tS9n 
n9mn6gA  gAVAfitA  pAn9rii6tski  i  pAitaljanski.     (9)  presdg  Ani  to^lkA 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT  201 

namnogA  tjitali,  nA  fSkolo  jim  ntisnA  budat  gAiazdA  bo^Ja  tjita^t. 
(10)  xaiaSo,  Jto  Ane  to^lkA  posa  btidut  Atvotja^t. 


Exercise  XXXIV 

A.  (1)  presdo  malonkAJa  utJanitsA  to^kA  nomnogA  utJitAS,  a 
vbuduJtSom  gAdii  Ana  gArazdA  bo^Ja  budot  utJitsA.  ^  (2)  pAtJamu 
Ana  btidat  skriva^t  At  riiana  svai  mnenJA  ?  (3)  nalza  zna%  Jto 
zdftiA  budot.  (4)  vvAskr9senJ9  Ani  btidut  (j)im  pisa^t.  (5)  jesli  vi 
fsogdd  dnom  i  notjju  btidota  PAbotAt,  vi  budata  bAle^t.  (6)  prdvdA, 
ja  nikAgdd  Ab  stAm  na  dtimAt.  (7)  liixto  nikAgdd  na  budot  puska^t 
tAkovA  mdionkAVA  md^itJikA  vnaju  komuAtu.  (8)  vbtidujtjom  gAdu 
eti  bAgatiija  inAstrantsi  btidut  stroit  grAmddni  novi  dvArsts  ua  baragti 
faki.  (9)  dA  lAsdastva  mi  budam  utJitsA  domA.  (10)  ua  drugoi 
de^n  mi  gAVArili  svajim  driigAm.  (11)  vasnoi  prils5ni  krastjanin 
btidat  seJAt  jatjihe^n  i  avos,  a  osanju  roj  i  pjanitsu.  (12)  pAtJamu 
anglitjdna  nikAgdd  na  xAteli  gAVArit  sniihi  ?  (13)  fkAtoiAm  tjAsii  vi 
prijii  dAmoi?  (14)  on  prijot  ua  drugoi  de^n.  (15)  Ani  vofsa  na 
pAnimdii  fsavo  stAVA. 

Exercise  XXXV 

A.  (1)  ja  vnimdtalnA  stiijAJu  fso  to,  Jto  vi  tjitajata.  (2)  Ani  fsagdd 
dstAJut,  kak  satdjut.     (3)  pAtJamu  vi  piAdAtsdjata  gAVArit  Ab  stAm  ? 

(4)  Jto  nam  sdstAt  ?     Ani  skrivdjut  At  nas  fso  to,  Jto  Ani  diimAJut. 

(5)  And  xaiaJo  uihejat  prigAtAvld^t  stA  ihdsA.  (6)  fsagdd  li  rdnA 
ZA3igajut  tdmpu?  (7)  ja  diimAJu,  Jto  And  lia  stujAJat.  (8)  viAsii 
i  vgarmdnii  roj  upAtrabldjut  fpiJtSu.  (9)  kak  vi  pAtAgdjata  ?  (10) 
nauseli  on  U5s  utjit  urok  ?  (11)  na  pAtAgajat  li  on,  Jto  jajo  utjanitsi 
posa  biidut  utJitsA  ?  (12)  xaiaJo,  Jto  mi  rd^nja  na  prijli  suda.  (13) 
kak  vi  pA3ivdjata  ? 

Exercise  XXXVI 

D.  (1)  Jto  d^tAJat  tape^i"  vaj  mAtAdoi  sin?  (2)  prdvA  na  znaju, 
nA  ja  pAtAgaju,  Jto  on  tape^f  viiiesta  SAsvAim  brdtAm  vutJiiiStSa.  (3) 
on,  mosat-bit,  SAfseihi  drugiihi  mdiankiihi  md^ltSikAriii  igrdjat  nA 
utJiliJuAm  dvAre  fsAtddti,  tak  kak,  vnAstAJdJtJaja  vferiiA,  fsaki 
tJatAVsk  ZAnimajatsA  VAinoju,  ddsa  mdlankija  diimAJut  to^IkA  a 
nei.  (4)  kdsdi  vetjar,  kAgda  ZAsigdjut  tdmpu,  (j)ix  mtdtji  sin  fsagdd 
rddAm  sstdrjiihi  sostrAiiii  u  stAtd.     (5)  trogAJat,  Atkrivdjat,  zAkrivdjat 


202  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT 

knigi  i  totradi.  (6)  fso  vnimatainA  stiiSAJat  to,  Jto  tjitajut  J9v6  brat j a 
i  sostri.  (7)  AbiknAvenA  pAsIednaja  dA  lisinA  pfigAtAvlajut  uroki  i 
rojajut  zAdatJi,  a  on  fsogda  38}aJ9t  uzna^t,  Jto  detAJQtsA.  (8)  baspra- 
stanA  sprdJiVAJat,  nA  sostri  otjan  tJastA  na  Atvotjajut  nA  javo  VAprosi. 

Exercise  XXXVII 

A.  (1)  devuSki  sidat  u  Akna.  (2)  Ana  sidstA  nA  stub  u  Akna  ;  Ana 
sstA  nA  stut.  (3)  dnom  Ivi  i  fss  drugija  zveri  spat  vlasu.  (4)  lisa  stAit 
ZA  etim  deravAm.  (5)  aisti  i  sutavIi  stAJat  nA  mAstu.  (6)  mi  vofsa  na 
pAnimajam,  pAtJamu  jajo  kiAsivija  kAitini  visat  nA  stanax  stAi  tomnAi 
komnAti.  (7)  mi  pAtAgajam,  Jto  ts  svinji  prinAdlasat  bsdnAmu 
krastjaninu ;  jamti  3a  prinAdlasit  stA  bstAJa  tojAt.  (8)  eti  fiAntsuskija 
SAtdati  tA3atsA  nazarii  (nA  zemlu) ;  Ani  ia3at  nA  mokiAi  zamls. 

Exercise  XXXVIII 

A.  (1)  vidita  li  vi  stAt  grAmadni  dom  ?  (2)  pAtAgaju,  Jto  on 
pnnAdla3it  stAmu  pAiheJtJiku.  (3)  ts  kAitini  jim  vofsa  nanravatsA. 
(4)  miis  otSan  nravitsA  stA  malankAJa  SAbakA.  (5)  svinji  stAJat  pAd 
dubAm.  (6)  sko^ikA  stoit  ta  usa^dbA  ?  (7)  na  stoit  dumAt  Ab  stAm. 
(8)  nms  pomnitsA,  Jto  vaji  druzja  liikAgda  ns  bili  u  riiana.  (9)  on 
liiana  pAkornA  btAgAdArit,  nA  pravA  lia  stoit.  (10)  vot  pAtJamu  mol 
dadA  novi  sArai  stroit.  (11)  lialza  stijAt  fstAtovAi  javo  drA3a5tSavA 
gotASA.  (12)  ja  nikAgda  na  slijAt,  Jto  And  javo  nAjta  nAhigii.  (13) 
trinatsAt  ma^tJikAf  nA  utSiliJnAm  dvArs. 

Exercise  XXXIX 

A.  (1)  AbiknAvsnA  mi  xodim  dAmoi  vdevat  tjAsof.  (2)  sinAvja 
kuptsa  brodat  pAgorAdu.  (3)  stAt  daravdni  sArai  stu3it  bA^lnomu 
stAriku  3ilj6m.  (4)  on  kiirit  graznuju  trupku  ;  sigari  i  papirosi  stojat 
siiJkAm  mnogA.  (5)  mi  liibim  vajix  druzei  za  jix  dAbiAtii  i  prAvdivAst. 
(6)  btAgAdArii  vas  za  kiAsivuju  knigu,  kAtoruju  vi  mns  ddli.  (7) 
nalzd  uzna^t,  Jto  on  der3it  rukoju  (vruks).  (8)  stA  pre3da  siu3itA 
dvAitsom.  (9)  prile3nija  utjaniki  litjAt  uroki  UAiztist.  (10)  starAstA  i 
davanostA  Jest  krastjan  stAJat  perat  domAm  tJinovnikA. 

Exercise  XL 

A.  (1)  mn63astvA  tupix  nA3ei.  (2)  nsskA^kA  prijdtnix  rsk.  (3) 
mnogA  bA^Jix   usadap.     (4)  stoUkA   kApejak.     (5)  ua   suxoi   zamls. 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT  203 

(6)  skoUkA  denek  ?  (7)  bo^ISoje  tjast  bsdmx  senStJin.  (8)  ihenajg 
Ivof    i    b64aJ9    vAtkof.     (9)  mnogAtSlslonija    semji   riiskix   krastjan. 

(10)  fprijatnAi  AkrssnAsti  najix  dorove^n.  (11)  sliSkAm  mnogA  mokrAi 
trAvi.  (12)  nomnqgA  bAgatix  pAiheJiJikAf.  (13)  mnosostvA  ostrix 
sabol.  (14)  nsskA^kA  dAmaSnix  sivotnix.  (15)  matAJa  tjisto  krAsivix 
komnAt.  (16)  sto'lkA  kArtin  izAbiAsajuStSix  muStJin  i  ma^itJikAf. 
(17)  sliJkAm  mnogA  volikAlspnix  dAmof.  (18)  u  pAiheJtSikA  otjan 
mnogA  gontjix  sAbak.  (19)  sto^lkA  lisits.  (20)  o  mAgutJam  kndza  i 
dAtJarax  skromnAVA  krostjaninA.  (21)  piAStijo  31IJA  skromnix  ludei. 
(22)  sto^kA  denok  i  tak  matA  xlsbA.  (23)  mAJa  ihitAJa  nanA  i  jgjo 
mnogAtSislomJG  druzja.  (24)  kasdAmu  ma'ltjiku  dali  ostri  noj. 
(25)  vosamdosat  pa^t  tJatAvsk.     (26)  seih  tisotS  Jastsot  tritsAt  dorove'n. 

Exercise  XLI 

C.  (1)  vnajoi  AkresnAsti  jest  Adin  bAgati  i  mAgutJi  pAriieJtJik. 
(2)  on  iihejat  mnosastvA  gontjix  SAbak  i  tAjAdei  fsvAei  usa^ba.  (3) 
jamu  prinAdlosit  i  stAt  giAmadni,  valikAlspni  dom,  kAtori  stAlt  pri 
samAm  vezde  vies.  (4)  kAgdd  sidat  u  riiond  fspa4n9,  ili  stAJat  u  Akna 
fporednaij  mosnA  vidat  stAt  dvArsts  vozla  tserkvi.  (5)  sko^lkA  stoit 
tAkoja  siljo  ?  (6)  pravA,  ja  na  zndju.  (7)  va  fsakAm  stiitjAJo  fso  stA 
mns  n9  intaresnA,  ibA  (tak  kak)  ja  protpAtJitaju  skromnix  ludei  i 
piAstija  ve^tji.  (8)  nA  pririisr,  ja  tJastA  XA5U  smAtre't  nA  eti  riiiKja 
doiiiiki,  kAtorija  vi  vidito  zatugAm.  (9)  mns  nravatsA  eti  kiAsivija 
kArtini,  kAtori j  9  visdt  nA  stanax  vajoi  kvArtiri.  (10)  nodavnA  lubezni 
druk  moi  pAstat  mAJei  sastrs  Adnu  is  svaix  knik  srisiinkAriii 
izAbrAsajuJtSiiiii  starija  ruskaja  basni  i  skaski,  kAtorija  kdsdAmu 
is  nas  sdststvA  znAkonu.  (11)  ve^t  i  vi  sariii  na  ZAbili  'Wotk  i  aist/' 
"  iisa  i  suraf/'  "  lef  i  nuj,"  "  svinjd  pAd  dubAm/'  "  dve  SAbaki." 

Exercise  XLII 

A.  (1)  nA  dvAr^  idot  dojt.  (2)  na  zndjata  li  vi,  pradut  li  tape^r  eti 
stAruxi  ?  (3)  SAfssmnst ;  Ane  tkut.  (4)  mi  pAtAgajam,  J  to  nariistskija 
SAtdati  parajii  tjeras  reku  (rakii).  (5)  And  U5S  tjatira  godA  sivot 
vstAm  sals,  nA  jix  darevnA  nAxoditsA  vdrugom  ujesda.  (6)  stAt 
md^tjik  idot  fSkotu,  vot  pAtJamu  on  nasot  knigi  i  tatrddi.  (7)  savodnA 
on  priidot  dAmoi  is  Jkoti  ftri  tjAsd,  nA  AbiknAvsnA  to^lkA  fpa^t  tjASof 
prixodit.  (8)  Atjavo  vdji  druzjd  fsagdd  sriiajutSA  ?  (9)  mi  dAtsni 
TAbotAt  jasadnsvnA  dA  u5inA.     (10)  gAtodnija   SAbdki  lasdt  fsiiagti. 

(11)  tjji   izbi    stAJdt    za    rakoi  ?       (12)  nauseli   eti    mnogAtSisIanija 


204  PHONETIC  TRANSCEIPT 

semji  fss  sivut  vAdnom  deravaiiAni  doihika  ?  (13)  nalza  uzna^t, 
dAidot  li  Ana  dA  stAVA  ihsstA.  (14)  dobrijo  ludi  uihirajut,  nA  data 
jix  sifvut. 

Exercise  XLIII 

A.  (1)  fkAtoiAm  tjAsu  vi  pjota  josadn^vnA  tjai  ?  (2)  sovodnA 
nolza  viiti  izdAmu,  pAtAmuStA  naxAioJaja  pAgodA.  (3)  naJA  ihitAJa, 
trudAlubivAJa  ma^t  Jjot  ptdtja  dlA  mtatjix  dAtJarei  i  rubajki  dlA  sinAvei. 
(4)  ftjara  doSt  lit  rut  J  j  ami ;  nssniAtra  nA  stA,  staiAJo  stusdnkA  pAlivajat 
mokri  uss  sad  (t).  (5)  dAvnim-dAvno  fss  krestjdno  vetAi  darevna  peli 
pesni,  nA  U38  dAvno  bo^ja  zdes  (s)  lia  pAJiit.  (6)  tretjavA  dna  on  yit 
varofki.  (7)  na  vidita  li  vi,  kak  ptitjki  vjut  gnozdA  ?  (8)  ja  xAtst 
uzna^t,  pAtJamu  vaj  sin  bjot  svAJti  sAbaku.  (9)  And  tak  tixA  pAJot, 
Jto  ja  jadvd  stiju.  (10)  psrvi  de%  nadeli — vAskrasenja,  a  ftAroi — 
pAnade^lnik.  (11)  tape^r  sadmdJA  nadelA  godA.  (12)  xArAjo,  St<^ 
tape^r  toptAJa  pAgodA ;  prijdtnA  lAbotAt  nA  dvAre.  (13)  vasnoju 
pAseJAli,  A  osanju  snut.  (14)  md^tjiki  smiitSA  AtxotAdu.  (15) 
fsirotstva  5it — slozi  lit. 

Exercise  XLIV 

A.  (1)  rdzva  on  nikAgdd  na  pijat  ?  (2)  ja  pAkornA  btAgAdArii  dobruju 
stArtixu,  kAtoiAJa  mns  vdsat  tjutki,  nA  And  fso  gAVArit  :^  na  stoit. 
(3)  ksA3Alenju  on  vnAStAJdJtJaja  vreihA  jedat  za  grAiiitsu  ;  lialzd  spiAsit 
javo.  (4)  kstjdstju  on  U3S  dotgA  sivot  za  grAiiitsaju.  (5)  rdzva  vi  na 
zndjata^  pAtJamu  dsvAtJkA  ptdtjat  ?  (6)  miis  skAzdli,  Jto  dotJkA  tsx 
bsdnix  ludei  U3S  ddtgA  iStJat  ma^t,  nA  na  mosat  nAiti  jajo.  (7)  Jto  Ani 
ijtjut  svAJavo  Atsd  ?  (8)  ja  lia  satdju  stAVA  skAzd^t,  da  i  to^lkA. 
(9)  mns  pdmnitsA,  Jto  mAi  sostri  priidut  sudd  savodnA.  (10)  Jto  Ans 
fso  xodat  vzat  i  fpafot  ?  (11)  lisskA^kA  ludei  pAtAgdjut,  Jto  U3S 
Atvazli  vdJavA  drugA  ftufmu.  (12)  ja  na  mAgti  vam  pAkAzd^t  ndjix 
novix  kArtin. 

Exercise  XLVI 

C.  (1)  mi  3iv6m  vrndlankAi  izbe  vujezda  fssm  izvss(t)nAi  dAlokAi 
gubernii.  (2)  zimoi  otjan  tJdstA  u  nas  bivdjat  durndJA  pAgodA. 
(3)  pAstAmu  mi  iuAgdd  na  m63am  guld^t  vlasii  (polasu).  (4)  savodnA 
siisk  idot.  (5)  nAdvArs  sarditAJa  riiateU  i  nalzd  viiti  izdAmu.  (6) 
mAJd  mtdtjaja  sastrd  ptdtjat  i  xotjat  zna^t,  Jto  nam  dstAt  i  Atjom 
gAVArit.     (7)  AdndkAj  fso  stA  otjan  prostA.     (8)  tak  kak  U3S  rduA 


PHONETIC  TEANSCRIPT  205 

tamneJQt,  zAsigajut  tampu  ftri  tjAsa.  (9)  nA  presda  fsavo  mi 
ZAtAplajam  petj ;  petj  topat  (drAvaihi).  (10)  mdlankija  deti,  kAtorijo 
n9  dAtsni  lAbotAt,  use  seli  ha  stulJA  vozla  najo.  (11)  Ani  tjitajut 
knigi,  igrajut  druk  zdrugAm,  ili  lAsskazivAJut  druk  drugu  skaski  i 
basni.  (12)  vizbs  prijatiiA  i  ujutnA.  (13)  senjtjini  prigAtAvlajut 
kujAnja.  (14)  vetSorAm  mi  pjom  tjajku  tjaju  rovnA  fsem  tjAsof ; 
pAtom  moi  mtatji  brat  tAs'itsA  spa^t.  (15)  nA  vzrostim  posla  lisinA 
jajtjo  dotgA  niisnA  lAbotAt.  (16)  matuJkA  i  babuJkA  tkut,  pradut, 
vdsut  tjutki;  Jjut  ptdtja.  (17)  a  batuJkA  Jjot  SApAgi  iskosi,  ili 
pAtJinajot  pAsudu  i  mebol. 

Exercise  XL VIII 

A.  (1)  fSas(t)natsAtAm  veka  ne  bitA  vvtAdenii  lAsii  lii  AdnAvo  moi-A, 
nA  tepe^r  Ana  vtAdeJ9t  nsskAHkiriii  mArdriii.  (2)  fproJtAm  gAdu 
tsarstvAVAt  gAsudd^r  impordtAr  nikAtdi  ftAroi;  on  stat  (sdetAtsA) 
impardtAPAm  posla  siiierti  pAkoinAVA  AloksdndrA  tretjavA.  fnAstAJdStSaja 
vreiiiA  U3S  no  tsdrstvujat ;  tape^  net  impordtArA.  (3)  ruskAJa  tsdrstvA, 
kAtoiAJa  tdnatsA  svAstokA  nA  zdpAt  nA  trindtsAt  tisatj  vorst,  a  ssevQiA 
nA  juk  nA  tSotiro  tisatji  vorst,  ruskajo  stjitdjut  sdmim  bA^lJim 
gAsuddrstvAm  nA  sveta.  (4)  tjatvorti  de^n  nadeli  nAzivdjatsA  srgdoju, 
A  Sostoi  de^n — pdtnitsA.  (5)  Jest  lAbotJix  dnei  liidi  lAbotAJut  tseti  de^n, 
A  yvAskrasenjo  i  vdrugija  prdznitSnijo  dni  fse  Adixdjut  At  rAbot  i 
xodat  ftserkAf.  (6)  vgAdu  dvandtsAt  riiesatsaf,  a  dvandtsAti  ihesats 
ZAviit  dakAbrom.  (7)  rakd,  kAtorAJa  na  dAxodit  dA  moi-A  ili  dA  ozqia, 
A  vpAddjat  vdrugtiju  rakii  (feku),  nAzivdjatsA  pritokAm.  (8)  varbliit 
— otSan  pAleznAJa  sivotnAJa,  tak  kak  mosat  prAiti,  tjeras  pustinu, 
At  sta  vAsriiidasati  dA  dvuxsAt  vorst  vnadelu.  (9)  on  lAditsA  ftisatjA 
VAsamsot  dvdtsAt  ftArom  gAdu^  a  skAntJdtsA  (uriiar)  tritsAt  pervAVA 
mdJA  tisatjA  vAsamsdt  davanostA  pdtAVA  godA. 

Exercise  XLIX 

A.  (1)  ded  (t)  bit  star  i  stap,  a  vnuk  mtat  i  gtup.  (2)  stat  naj  sad  (t) 
got.  (3)  stat  naj  pos  ptox.  (4)  md^tjik  bit  rad  (t).  (5)  grip  bit 
gnit.  (6)  on  bit  truslif.  (7)  stat  bik  zot.  (8)  on  posla  tAvo  na  dotgA 
bit  5iv  (sif). 

B.  igrd  bitd  ptAxd.  (2)  sAbdkA  bitd  umnd.  (3)  izbd  bitd  no 
mAtd.  (4)  bdbA  bitd  rddA.  (5)  VAdd  bitd  tjistd.  (6)  stdtA  tdtkA 
potnd  vAdi.  (7)  lisd  jetA  srdzu  pAdve  miji,  i  stdtA  3irnd.  (8)  jajo 
5izn  trudnd.     (9)  krapkd  kak  kost. 


206  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT 

C.  nA  VAcls  bitA  gtatkA.  (2)  nA  dvAre  bitA  tJistA.  (3)  jamii 
statA  sriiaSno.  (4)  mns  laxko  stA  dslAt.  (5)  bita  grAza  i  grom. 
maUtJik  bit  trus.  on  vies  fjkap.  tarn  bitA  jamii  tomno  i  duJnA. 
J9mu  lis  bitA  stiJnA,  prA^ta  li  grAza.  (6)  gnazdo  U5S  bitA  pustA. 
(7)  fso,  jto  nadA.  (8)  dveri  biii  tssni.  (9)  tapki  gusei  bill  vidni. 
(10)  ma^ltjiki  stall  mokri.     (11)  satkA  bitA. 

Exercise  L 

A.  (1)  tJornAJo  krsstA^  nA  kAtoiAm  vi  sidito,  gArazdA  kiAsiveja  etAVA 
stutA.  (2)  bsti  xisp  119  fsogda  dArose  tSornAVA.  (3)  samAJa  bA^ljoja 
zdanja  vnajom  goiAda — samAJa  starAJo  tssrkAf,  nA  pAslsdnoja  me^iija 
toi  tssrkvi,  kAtoruju  vi  vidali  nAprotif  svAJei  kvArtiri  fstAlitsa.  (4) 
umneijaja  utSoiiitsA  nikAgda  no  xotjet  AtvotSa^t,  kAgda  J9J6  spraJivAJat 
dobiAJo  utJitoinitsA.  Ana  umna^  nA  jajo  starji  brat  prileson  i  gArazdA 
vnimatelnoja  jojo.  (5)  riiki  ranonix  beleje  tSsm  krAvati^  nA  kAtorix 
Ani  lo5at.  (6)  nauzeli  n8  fss  znajut,  Jto  XAlsrA  boUaja  usdsnAJa 
bAlezn  tjsm  skArtAtinA  ?  (7)  samAJa  tomnAJa  komnAtA  mne  nravitsA 
boHja  fsavo.  (8)  mns  gAVArat,  Jto  saniAJa  starAJe  senJtJinA  vasat 
samija  tutjija  tjutki  i  partjatki.  ^  (9)  pAtJamii  bAgAteiSija  pAriieStSiki 
fsagda  satajut  iriie't  jajtjo  bo^Ja  zamli  ?  (10)  mns  kasatsA,  Jto 
nAstAJaJtSaja  dom  tsAra  valikAlepnaja  stAVA  grAmadnAVA  dvArtsa, 
kAtori  tape^r  strojat.  (11)  XArAjo,  Jto  samija  trudAlubivije  krastjana 
inAgda  ZArAbativAJut  bo^Ja.  (12)  Ani  pAtutJajut  samuju  boUjuju 
pnbil.  (13)  prdvdA  svatleja  sontsA.  (14)  znanja — tiitjaja  bAgats(t)vA. 
(15)  pravdA  dArosa  zotAtA.  (16)  vor  VArujat  ne  dU  pribiii,  a  dlA 
svAJei  gibali. 

Lesson  LI 
Illusteative  Passages 

1 

totkA  bita  gAtovA.  ja  sst  vnajo  zdvuma  graptsami.  Ani  Atjalili 
i  udarili  vvostA. 

nsbA  bitA  jasnA.  tuna  sijatA.  pAgodA  bita  tixAJa.  votgA  nastas 
rovnA  i  spAkoinA.  totkA  skA^lzitA  pA  pAvsrxnAsti  tomnix  votn.  prAjto 
okAtA  pAtutJasA.  mi  dAstigli  sradini  raki.  vdruk  graptsi  natjAli 
Japta^tsA  ihssdu  sAboju. 

— Jto  tAkoja  ?  sprAsit  ja. 

— na  zndjam. 

graptsi  smAtreli  vAdnii  storAnu.     gtAzd  mAi  pfinati  tosa  nAprA- 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT  207 

vienJ9,  i  ja  uvidet  fsiimrAkg  Jto-tA.     liaznAkomi  predriiet  ptit  vniz  pA 

votga.     pribiisatsA.     tuna  zaJW  za  oblAkA.     pKvuStSi  pfizrAk  sdstAtsA 

jaStJo  tamneja.     on  bit  ot  mana  U3S  bliskA,  a  ja  fso  jajtjo  na  mog 

javo  lAzlitJit. 

vdruk  tuna  viStA  iza  obtAkA,  i  AZAritA  zreliStJa  usasnAJa.     knam 

nAfstretJu  ptitd  visalitsA,  utvarsdonAJa  nA  ptAtii.     tri  tstA  viseli  nA 

paraktadiiia.     bAlsznanAJa  lubApitstvA  AvtAdstA  mnoju.     ja  ZAXAtet 

vzglanu^t  nA  litsA  visalnikAf.  ,. ,    ..,,     ,    .     ^,,„     „ 

"  kApitanskAja  dotJkA, 

puSkin. 


bA^ijaja,   visokAJa,   tomnAJa  zdtA  AsvaJtSonAJa  t64kA  tSatiriha  iii 

pAtju  svatSaihi,  skAtoririii  dAktAra  pAdxAdili  AsmatrivAt  rananix,  bita 

bukva^uA  pAtna.     nAsilStSiki  basprastanA  vnAsili  rananix,  sktddivAli 

jix  Adin  podia  drugovA  na  pAt,  nA  kAtoiAm  U3S  biJA  tak  tesuA,  Jto 

nastSds(t)nija  tAtkdlis  i  moknuli  fkrovi  druk  driigA,  i  Jli  za  novimi. 

sostri,  SA  spAkoiniriii  litsAihi  i  zviiAsenjam  deJAtalnAVA  prAktitJaskAVA 

utJastjA,  to  tarn,  to  sam  malkdli  riissdu  rananimi.    dAktAid^  zzAsutJoniihi 

rukAvdihi,  AsmatrivAli^  AjtJupivAli  i   zAndirAVAli  rdni,  nasmAtrd   nA 

U5asnifja   stoni  strAdaHtsaf.     Adin  iz  dAktArof  sidst  okAtA    dveri  za 

stolikom,   i   ftu  ihiniitu,  kak  fkomnAtu  vAjot  Afitssr,  zApisivAt  U3S 

patsot  tritsAt  dva.  ,,  ,        ^,     .,-,..  ,  ,  ..  „ 

"  savAstopA4ski]e  lAsskazi/ 

tAtstOl. 

3 

— pAstuJa  (ai),  slapoi !  skAzat  on  : — bafagi  to  liisstA  .  .  .  znajaj  ? 
tarn  bAgdtija  tAvari  .  .  .  skAsj  xAzdinu,  Jto  ja  jamu  b64Ja  na  stugd. 
datd  pAjii  xudA_,  on  ihand  boija  na  uvidit :  tape^f  ApdsnA ;  pAJsdu 
iskd^t  lAboti  vdrugom  riiesta ;  tarn  ja  budu  sda^t  udobnAVA  stiitjAJA. 
da  skAsi,  jeslib  on  pAtiitJa  ptAtit  za  trudi,  tak  i  ja  bi  javo  na  pAkinut. 
And  pAJedat  SAmnoju ;  jei  nalzd  zdes  AstAvd^tsA. 

— a  ja  !  skAzdt  slapoi  sdtAbnim  gotASAm. 

on   $t6-tA   pAtAs'it   slapomu   vruku,    pfimotvif:    '^nA,    kupi   sabs 

prdnikAf."     "  t64kA  ?  "     skAzdt   slapoi.     "  nu_,    vot   tabs    jaJtSo/'    i 

updfjAJa  mAnstA  zAzvanetA,  udArds  o  kdihan.     slapoi  jajo  na  podnAt. 

Ani  ssli  vtotku ;  vetar  dut  ot  beragA  ;  Ani  bistiA  pAnaslis.     dotgA  pri 

sveta  ihesatSA  riialkdt  bsti  pdrus  ihesdu  votn ;  slapoi  fso  sidst  ua  baragu 

i  pldkAt,  i  dotgA  dotgA.  ...      ,.     ,.  .,       ..  „ 

'^garoi  naJavA  vremani/ 

IsrniAntAf. 


208  PHONETIC  TEANSCEIPT 

4 

tomA  tJufs(t)vAVAt  saba  AkAntJatolnA  sbitim  spAzitsii :  korpus, 
joStJo  tak  nadavnA  kAsafJisA  dstAm  rejonim,  AtAdvinutsA  kudatA 
dAloko-dAloko. 

— ti  kAgda,  tomA,  pAJedaJ  ?  spiAsftA  nAtajA,  ftAiaJA  sastra,  stAiaJAS 
skrit  vAtnAvafJija  J9J6  tSufs(t)vA  pAd  (t)  maskAi  piAstovA  iubApits(t)vA. 

tomA  zAglAnut  vgtAza  sastri. 

— ^nikuda  ja  n9  pAJsdu,  Atvetit  on,  vzdAxnuf,  i  fstav  (f),  nApravitsA 
fkAbinst. 

tam  on  ^Agat  fsAznanja  prinasonAi  jim  5srtvi.      mosat-bit,  dla 

3srtvi  javo  vid  bil:  sliSkAm  spAkojan,  nA  tsm  na  menaja  stA  na  ihaSatA 

jamu  stjita^t  sabd  ssrtvAi,  i  jamu  kAzatAs   Jto  on  srazu  totJnA  virAS 

nA  nsskA4kA  Ist.     on  log  nA  divan,  zAtAs'it  m  gAtAvu  ruki  i  zAdumAtsA 

A  torn,  Jto  s'izn  na  tAkdJA  prAStaJA  i  loxkAJe  vejtj,  kAkoi  Ana  kasatsA 

pA  nAiusnAmu  vidu. 

tak  i  usntit,  dumAJA  fso  Atomge.  „  .      ,.     .        , .  m     »> 

"sariiemAja  xromkA, 

gdrin. 
Exercise  LII 

B.  (1)  prinasita  mns,  pA5dt(ui)stA,  etu  novuju  riiskuju  knigu ! 
(2)  prinAsita  mns  jasadnevnA  tatradi  stdrjix  utjanikof !  (3)  tA3itas 
spa^t  kdsdi  vetjar  fsem  tjAsof !  (4)  pAia  iti  spa^t !  rAzde'ntas,  ma^tjiki, 
i  iakta  spa^t !  (5)  piji  ihedlanA  i  pravilnA !  (6)  nApiJita  to,  Jto  ja 
vam  ska5u !  (7)  smAtrita  !  (8)  pAsmAtrita  to,  Jto  Ani  dstAJut  tape^r  ! 
(9)  na  gAVArita  jei  Atom,  Jto  ja  vam  to^lkA  Jto  rAsskAzat !  (10)  na 
dstAita  stAVA  !  (11)  na  Atvatjaita  nA  stAt  VApros  !  (12)  puskai  Ana 
sdsUjat,  kak  Ana  satajat !  (13)  pu^st  Aiii  pAidtit  tape^r  fjkotu ! 
(14)  fsagda  stujata  to,  Jto  gAVArit  utSital !  (15)  utSital  gAVArit 
tape^r  ;  pAsttiJata  javo  1 

Exercise  LIII 

A.  bii 

VAdnoi  darevna  5ita  stAitiSkA  SAvnutSkAi.  Ans  bili  otjan  bsdni,  i  jest 
jim  bi'tA  netJavA.  prijto  svsttAJa  VAskrasenja.  nAiot  radujatsA.  fss 
kupili  sabs  lAzgAve^tsA,  toUkA  stAruJka  SAvnutSkAi  netjam  lAzgAve^tsA. 
pAptdkAli  Ans  i  stdli  bogA  piAsit,  Jtob  on  jim  pAmog.  i  fspomnitA 
stAruSkA,  Jto  fstArinu,  VAvremA  fiAntsusA,  mnsiki  de^ngi  vzemlu 
ZAiivali.  stAnixA  i  gAVArit  vnutSka  :  "  vAzmi  (ti)^  vnutJkA,  tApatu  i 
idi  nA  starAJa  sato,  pAmAlis  bogu,  da  pAroi  vzamls :  mosat  bit,  bog 
nam  i  pASlot  Jto-nibu^t." 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPT  209 

Exercise  LIV 
A.  vnutSkA  i  dumAJot:  "kak  mosnA  ktad  (t)  nAiti?  nu  da 
sdetAJu,  kak  bdbuJkA  valit."  vzAta  tApdtu  i  pASta.  viritA  Ana  jdmu, 
i  dumAJQt :  "  biidat,  pAidii  dAmoi."  xAtstA  pAdna^t  tApatu,  stiSit — obA 
Jto-tA  UpatA  stuknutA.  Ana  nAgnuUs,  vidit — ^kubiSkA  bA4jaJA.  pAtrostd 
J8J6,  Jto-tA  zvonit.  And  brositA  tApdtu,  pAbasdtA  xbdbujka,  kritSit : 
^'  bdbuJkA,  ktat  nAjtd ! "  Atkrili  kubiSku,  vnei  pAtno  sarebronix 
mAnst.  i  bdbuJkA  sAvnutSkAi  kupili  sabs  kprdzniku,  tjem  lAsgAve^tsA, 
i  kAiovu  kupili,  i  btAgAdArili  bogA,  Jto  on  ustijAt  jix  mAHtvu. 

Exercise  LV 

A.  lanivi  slugd 

ianivi  At  prirodi,  on  AstA^noja  vferiiA  nitjavo  na  dstAt.  on  na 
dAvdt  sabs  trudd  ni  pAstdvit  sAmAvdiA,  rd  pAdihasti  pAtof.  on,  ili 
dramdt  fprixosai,  ili  uxAdit  bAttd^t  fkuxnu ;  na  to,  tak  pA  tsetim 
tjAsdm  stAJdt  u  vArdt  i  pAsnidtrivAt  nA  fse  stoiAni.  on  VArtSdl:  fsdki 
ras,  kak  gotAs  bdriuA  zAstAvldt  javo  pAkidd^t  lasdnku.  nasmAtrd  ua 
fso  stA,  on  bit  dAv64nA  ihdxkAVA  i  ddbiAVA  sertsA.  on  lubit  ddsa 
prAVAdit  vreriiA  sdatihi.  nAdvArs,  u  vArot,  javo  tJdstA  viddli  skutjai 
datei.  on  jix  riiifit,  ustrdivAJat  igri,  ili  prostA  sidit  sniriii,  vzaf  AdnAvo 
UA  Adno  kAleuA,  drugovA  nA  drugoja,  a  sddi  Jeju  javo  AbAvjot  jaStJo 
kAkoi-rdbii^t  jAtun  rukdihi. 

Exercise  LVI 

A.  SUVOIAf 

md^itjik  rduA  ndtjAt  utJitsA  i  srdnix  1st  pAlubit  knigi,  fkAtorix 
ApisivAlis  voini,  pAxodi,  i  tak  ddlaja.  patndtsAti  1st  mAtAdoi 
SUVOIAf  pAstupit  UA  vAJsnuju  stu5bu  i  devat  1st  prAstus'it  prAstim 
SAtddtAm. 

ns  bitA  sAtddtA  isprdvnaja  javo :  on  fstAvdt  rd^nja  drugix,  sam 
tjistit  sabs  SApAgi  i  ptdtja  i  stAJdt  nA  tjAsdx  vAfsdkuju  pAgddu.  s'it 
on  vihesta  sprAstiiiii  sAtddtAihi  i  jst  sAtddtskija  Jtji  i  kdju ;  bit  fsagdd 
sihst  i  yesat  i  sihsSit  svAix  tAvdri^tJai  vasotiriii  JutkAihi  i  rAsskdzAriii. 
fss  lubili  javo. 

kAgdd  on  stat  A^itssiAm  i  ndtjAt  kAmdndAVAt  sAtddtAihi,  fstidu  nA 
VAins  on  pAbasddt  naprijdtalA. 

"  rabdtA — gAVArit  suvoiAf  sAtddtAm, — fsagdd  idita  fparot  nA  viAgd. 
na  baspAkoitas  Atom,  sko^IkA  perat  vdihi  naprijdtalai.  vi  ve^t  prijll 
bit  jix,  A  ns  stjitd^t." 

o 


GENERAL  VOCABULARIES 


VOCABULARY  OF  VERBS 

The  verbs  are  arranged  alphabetically  according  to  the  form  of  the  imperfective 
aspect,  but  every  verb  used  in  the  exercises  is  given  separately  whenever  its  form 
differs  so  markedly  from  that  of  the  imperfective  infinitive  that  its  meaning  might 
be  troublesome  to  find. 

The  form  of  the  perfective  aspect  is  indicated  by  the  prefix  enclosed  in  brackets 
or  is  given  immediately  below  as  a  separate  verb. 

First  and  second  singular  present  and  first  and  second  singular  future  perfective 
are  indicated.     Reflexive  pronouns  are  not  always  repeated. 

The  number  enclosed  in  brackets  indicates  the  vocabulary,  paragraph,  or 
exercise  where  a  phonetic  transcript  of  the  word  will  be  found. 

Verbs  marked  with  an  asterisk  will  be  found  also  in  the  lists  in  Par.  239. 


(o)6e3noK6HTbCH  (6k)ci>  dviuihcn)  (56), 
put  oneself  about,  take  thought 
*(no)6ep.6Hi.  (6eper^,  Hierat,  r^rfc),  pre- 
serve, keep,  watch 
(no)6HTb  (6bib,  eiut)  (Par.  162),  beat 
(no)5jiaronapHTb  (i5,  iimi>)  (38),  thank  > 
(no)6ji1iHH-feTb  (-tio,  -feemb)  (31),  turn  pale 
(no)6ojiT^Tb  (^K),  ^emb)  (55),  chatter 

{(3a)6oji'feTb  (-tio,  feeuib)  (27),  be  (fall)  ill 
SojniTT,,  SojiHT-b   (3rd   pers.   form) 
(44),  be  sore,  hurt 
(no)6orfTbCH  (oibcb,  liuibCH)  (52),  fear 
/Spaxb  (6epy,  emb)  (53),  take    « 
\B3HTb  (BoabMy,  emb)  (28) 
(no)6ponHTb  (my,  6nHmb)  (28),  wander 
about 
/6poc^Tb  (&K),  &erab)  (54),  throw 
\6p6cHTb  (6my,  6cHmb)  (16) 
eyaex-b  (54),  that  will  do ! 
ewB^Tb  (aio,  Aeuib)  (46),  be  usually, 

happen,  occur 
6biTb  (see  2,  6 ;  Par.  123),  be  - 
(no)6'fe>KaTb  (ry,  JKiimb,  ryxx.)  (54),  run 

*(no)Be3xii  or  Be3Xb  (af,  euib)  (Par.  157), 
convey,  drive  (trans.) 
Beat  (Par.  96),  past  tense  of  Be3xii 
(no)Beji-fexb  (lb,  limb)  (Par.  214),  order, 
command 


*(no)Becxii  or  Becxb  (ji^r,  emb),  lead 
/  B3r JirfflbiBaxb  (aio,  aemb),  look  at 
\  BsrjiHHyxb  (y,  rfnemb) 
/B3nbix6xb  (^K),  aemb),  sigh 
\B3aoxHyxb  (ny,  oxnemb) 
B3HXb  (28)  (see  6paxb),  take;  B3HTb 
Kx  ceS-fe,  adopt 
(y)BHflaxb  (aio,  ^emb)  (55),  see 
(y)BHH'fcxb  (JKy,  numb)  (8),  see 
fBHc-fexb  (my.  Climb)  (Par.  141),  hang 
-|       (intrans.) 
(noBHcnyxb  (y,  emb) 
^BHXb  (BbK),  emb)  (Par.  162),  wind, 
-|       twine,  build  (nest) 

[cBHXb  (cOBbK),  emb) 

(3a)B.iTaH'fexb  (-feio,  -feeiiib)  (48),  rule,  pos- 
sess, command 
/BJi'fe3^xb  (aio,  aemb),  climb  into 
\  BJitsxb  (3y,  emb)  (49) 
/BHOcrixb  (my,  dcumb),  bring  in^ 
\BHecxii  (cy,  emb) 
Boiixii,  see  Bxoniixb 
(B3)BOJiHOB&xb     (Hyio,    yemb),     excite, 
agitate 
(c)BopoBaxb  (pvK),  yemb)  (50),  steal 
(3a)BopMaxb  or  (no)BopHaxb  (iy,  limb) 
(55),  grumble 
Bomeji-b    (Par.    62)    {see   Bxoaiixb), 
entered 


210 


VOCABULAEY  OF  VERBS 


211 


fsnajiATh  (km,  ^einb),  fall  into 
VenacTB  (any,  eiiib)  (48) 
BcnoMiiHaxb  (aio,  deiin>)  (53),  re- 
member 
BCnOMHHTb  (k),  nuuy) 
BCTaBaTi>  (^K>,  ^emi>)  (52),  stand 

up,  rise 
Bcxaxt  (^ny,  emi.) 
/Bcxp-feq^Tb  (km,  Aeuib),  meet 
XBcxp-fexHXB  ("feny,  -fexHrnt)  (18) 
(sxojiATb   («Ky,   oflHmjb),  go  into, 
-|      enter 
[BOttXH  (H^p-,  euxb) 

I  Btm-fejiMBaxb  (aio,  aemb),  prepare, 
-|      execute 
[ BiiH-fejiaxfe  (aio,  aemb)  (Par.  208) 

Bbiflfly,  Bi^MxH,  see  Buxomixs 
fBtrnji^qiiBaxb  (aio,  aemi>),  pay  out 
^BbmjiaxHXb  (ny,  xHuib)  (Par.  208) 
f  BbipacxAxb^     (aio,    ^eiiib)     (18), 
-j       sprout,  grow  up 
\  *BiiipacxH^  (cxy,  enib) 

{BbipbiBdxb  (^lo,   ^enib)   (54),  dig 
out,  excavate 
BiJipbixb  (oH),  enib) 
rBwxoHiixb  (>Ky,  6jmua,)f  go   out, 
-|      come  out 

[bMiixH  (ny,  emb)  (Par.  160), 
(no)B'tpHxb    (k),    Hiiib)    (Par.    223), 
believe,  trust 
(c)BH3^xb    (jk;^,  -«*iiib)    (Par.    168), 
knit,  bind 

(no)rH4xb  (6hh),  dnHiiib),  hunt,  drive 

/(no)roBopiixb  (ib,  limb)  (3),  speak,  say 

\        CKaa^xb  (jKy,  ^TKeoib)  (3),  say,  tell 

(no)roHrfxb  (hk),  euib)  (6),  hunt 

(no)ropeB^xb  (pibio,  eiiib)  (Par.  225), 

grieve,  mourn 
(3a)rpeM'fexb  (mjiio,  Miimb)  (Ex.  49  (c)), 
thunder 
*(no)rpecx^  (e6y,  eiiib),  row 
*(pa3)rpii3Xb  (3:y^,  eiub),  gnaw,  torment 
(no)ryjijixb  (jiio,  ri;emb)  (10),  walk ;  be 
idle 

naB^it  {imperat.  of  naBdxb,  Par. 
231),  let  us,  etc. 
/naB^xb  (naib,  emb),  give 
Inaxb  (3)  (jiaM-b,  Par.  231) 
HajiT,,  he  gave 
(no)aep>KAxb  (>K^,6p>KHiiib)  (Par.  149), 
hold 


flottxii,  see  «oxoHHXb 
/aocxHr^xb  (&K),  aeuib),  reach 
tflocxiirHyxb  (ny,  emb) 

{noxo^HXb  (>Ky,  oflHmb)  (48),  reach, 
arrive  at 
Hoaxii  (ttfly,  emb)  (Par.  160) 
Homejit,  mjia  {see  «oxoflHXb)  (28), 
reached 
(B3)jxpeMaxb  (MJiib,  6MJieinb)  (55),  doze, 

slumber 
r(3a)flpo>K^xb  (mf,  limb)  (29),  tremble 
\        Hpornyxb  (ny,  eiub,  or  n^,  emb) 
(no)aj'Maxb  (aio,  aemb)  (10),  think 
(no)Hyxb  (y^H),  emb),  blow 
(c)«'fejiaxb  (aio,  aemb)  (2),  do,  make 
(c)H'tjiaxbCH  (Par.  69),  happen,  take 
place,  become 

ecxb  (13)  {pres.  tense  of  6iirrb,  be), 
there  is,  there  are 

r(no)a{axb  (>KMy,  emb)  (Par.  163),  press 
-|    (c)}Kaxb  (coH«My,  emb) 
\       Ht^xbCfl  (43),  shrink  together 
r     Hiaxb  (>KHy,  enib)  (18,  Par.  163), 
-|  reap 

[  (c)H{axb  (cojKH^,  emb) 
(noao)H{H&xb  (mjnYy  euib)  (Par.  163),  wait, 
await,  expect 
(no)Htejiaxb   (^H),    ^enib)    (35),   wish, 
desire 
(*mem>  (52)  (>Kry,  HOKenib,  jKryx-b), 
-|        burn 
(^CHteqb  (cojKry) 
(no)w^xb  (jKHBy,  emb)  (2,  6),  live 

/3a6oji'feB&xb  (km,  ^emb),  faU  ill 
Xsaeoji-txb  (-tio,  iemb)  (27) 
/3a6MB6xb  (^lo,  aemb),  forget 
\3a6uxb  (5yay,  eim.)  (41) 
(no)3^BxpaKaxb  (aio,  aemb),  breakfast 
r 3arjiHHBiBaxb  (aio,  aemb),  glance  at 
Vsarjimiyxb  (ny',  rfnemb) 
r3aHyMLiBaxb  (aio,  aeuib),  conceive 
-]      a  plan 

(^3aayMaxb  (aio,  aemb)  (28) 
aamurkTb  (610,  Aemb)  (35),  light, 

kindle 
3a}K6»ib  (H<ry,  Htmemb) 
'aaKJi&^XbiBarb    (aio,    aemb),    put; 

pawn ;  yoke ;  lay 
aajiOTKiixb  (y-,  6>KHmb) 
/saKpuB^xb  (^K),  Aemb)  (35),  cover 
\3aKp1ixb  (p6K),  6emb) 


^  Also  spelt  with  o  in  stem. 


212 


VOCABULARY  OF  VERBS 


/aaM-feq^TB  (&I0,  ^eniB),  notice 
XaaM-txHTi.  (-feny,  -feTHim,)  (31) 
raaHHMaxB  (^lo,   ^eim>)   (36),  busy, 
4      occupy,  engage 
[aaHjiTB  (sattMy,  eim.) 
fsanikcuBaTB   (aio,   aemB),  inscribe, 
4     enter 
l^aanHc^Tfc  (Hmy,  iimemb) 

{aapaS^THBaxfc     (aio,     aenn>)     (50), 
earn 
aapaSoxaTt  (aro,  aeiiib) 
/aaptiB^xB  (^H>,  aems)  (53),  bury 
\3ap1i1xb  (poK),  deuTb) 
raacxaajijixb  (hk),  rieiiib)  (55),  oblige, 
-J      compel,  cause 
[aacxasHXfc  (bjiio,  bhuib) 
faacyqaxb  or  aacy^HBaxB  (aio,  aeim>) 
XaacyqiixB  (y,  yqHnib),  roll  up 
aaxonjifixb  (hh),  rieuib)  (46),  stoke, 

keep  up  fire 
aaxoniixfc  (njiio,  6nmui.) 
faaxoHHXb  (jKy,  oaHiiib)  /set (of  sun) 
\3aftxH  (finy,  eiiu,)  \go  behind 

(no)3Baxb  (aoBy,  eiin>)  (Par.  185),  caU 
(aa)3BeH'fexb  (hio,  linib)   (54),  resound, 

tinkle 
(y)3Hdxb  (kK),  aemb)  (2),  know 
andiHXb  (qy,  ninb)  (27),  mean 
aoHfliipoBaxb  (pyio,  yemt),  sound, 
auscultate 

/  Hrpaxb  (km,  aeim,)  (2),  play 
\  CMrpaxB 
/naBHHHXb  (liK),  rieiub),  excuse 
VnaBMHiixb  (mb,  limb)  (Par.  216) 
rH3o6pa>Kaxb  (aio,  aenib)  (41),  depict, 
-|      represent 
(HaoSpaaiixb  (JKy,  aiinib) 
/Hsyqaxb  (aio,  &emb)   \ learn,  study 
\HayuHXb  (iiy,  yiHiub)/ thoroughly 
HM-txb    ("tic,    "feeiiib)    (41),    have, 
possess 
(no)HCKaxb  (Hiny-,  ]&memb)  (28),  seek 
f     HxxH  (HAy,  enib)  (Par.  157),  go,  go 
-|         on  foot,  be  actually  going 
(nottxii 

Hxxii  endxb  (46),  go  to  bed 

Kaa^xbCH  (KajKexcH)  (50),  appear, 

seem 
/*K;iiacxb  (ajif,  emb),  put,  lay 
\   nojiojKiixb  (>Ky,  6>KHuib) 
(c)KOBaxb  (Kyi5,  emb),  forge,  hammer 
(c)KOMaHaoBaxb  («yK),  erab)  (56),  have 

command  of  troops 


/     KOHq^xb  (4h),  ^emb),  finish,  end 
\(o)K6HqHXb  (qy,  emb)  (19) 
(Ha)KopMHXb  (MJiib,  opMHmb)  (39),  feed 
(no)KpacH'fexb    or    (3a)KpacH4xb    (•hio, 
■keuih)  (31),  blush 
*(no)Kp&cxb  or  (y)Kp^cxb  (ny,  emb),  steal 
r(aa)KpHq&xb  (qy,  limb)  (54),  cry,  cry 
J  out 

1        KpiiKHyxb  (ny,  enib)  (Par.  212),  cry 
1,  out  once 

Kyniixb  (see  noKyn^xb)  (6),  buy 
(no)Kyp6xb  or  (3a)KypHXb  (ib,  :^pmnb) 

(Par.  149),  smoke 
(no)Kymaxb  (aio,  aemb)  (10),  eat 

(co)jir^xb   (jiry-,  jiJKemb,   Jiryxt)   (Ex. 
54  (a)),  tell  lies 
jierx,  (15)  (see  jiontiixbCH),  he  lay 
down 
(no)jiemkTh  (my,  jKiimb)  (10),  lie,  recline 

Jieqb  {see  JiojKHxbCH),  lie  down 
(no)jiHXb  (jibib,  emb)  (16),  pour 

jiojKHXbCH    (mycb,    HiiimbCH)    (Par. 
141),  lie  down 
*jieqb  (;iiiiry,  jijiHteiiib,  jiryxt) 
*(no)ji't3Xb  ("feay,  enib),  climb 
(no)jiio6HXb  (Sjiib,  ibSnuib)  (Par.  149), 
love 

(no)M6jiJiHxb   (k),  Hnib)  (Par.  212,   C), 
hesitate,  delay 
/MCJibK^xb  (aio,  aeiiib),  flit,  flit  past 
\MejibKHyxb  (ny,  emb) 
(no)MHpiixb  (h),  limb)  (55),  reconcile 
Mort  (6)  (past  tense  of  MO'ib),  could 
MdHtex-b  (present  tense  ofmovcb),  can, 
may 
(npo)M6KHyxb  (ny,  emb),  be  wet  through 
(npo)M6jiBHXb  (bjik),  BHmb),  speak,  say 
(no)MOJiiixb  (jiib,  6jiHmb),  pray 
(no)MOJiiixbCH  (53),  say  one's  prayers 
(c)MOHb  (Mor;^,  djKemb,  dryxx.)   (Par. 
168),  be  able,  can,  may 
(no)MyqHXb  (iy,  mnb),  torture,  torment 
(no)M'femaxb  (^K),  ^emb),  prevent,  dis- 
turb 

rHarH5^xbCH    (4iocb,   aenibCH)    (54), 
4      bend,  stoop 
(HarH^xbCH  (H^cb,  HembCH) 
(no)Han'tHXbCH    (-feiocb,   -feembCH)    (56), 
hope 
CHaabiB^xb  (Aid,  4emb),  call,  name 
HaaB^Xb  (aoBy,  emb) 
HaawB^xbCH  (Par.  185),  be  called 


1: 


VOCABULARY  OF  VERBS 


213 


/nanpaBaiiTi.  (Am,  Aemb),  direct 
(nanp^BHTb  (bjik),  BHinb) 
fuaxojiATi,  (jKy,  6ji.muh)  (64),  come 
J      upon,  find 
I  HattTii  (iifly,  emt)  (44) 
VHaxomixbCH  (42),  be,  be  found 
THaqMH^Tb  (km,  ^eim>)  (56),  begin 
Vnaq^Tb  (»my,  enib) 
HamejiT.  (Par.  62),  found 
HeHp^BHTbCH,  neg.  of  Hp^BHTbca 
*(no)HecTik  (necy,  enib)  (Par.  157),  carry, 
be  actually  carrying 
HecTHCb,  hurry  along 
Hect  (Par.  63),  carried 
(no)HociiTb  (my,  denmb),  carry,  be  in 

the  way  of  carrying 
(no)HpaBHTbCH  (BJiiocb,  BHuib)  (Par.  38), 
be  pleasing 

roSBHB&Tb   (km,   kemb)   (55),   twine 
-j     round,  embrace 

VoSBiiTb  (oSoBbib,  enib) 
(no)o6^HaTb  (aio,  aeuib),  dine 

roBJian-feB^Tb     (aio),     master,     take 
-I      possession 

I^OBjiaji-feTb  (-feio,  -feemb) 

roa-feB&Tb  (aio,  aeuib)  (52),  put  on, 
-|      dress,  clothe 

Vofl-feTb  (iny,  emb)  (52) 

I  oaapjiTb  (riio,  rfenib),  shine  (upon), 
-|      light  up 

[  oaapiiTb  (lb ,  limb) 

{on^cbiBaTb    (km,   aemb)    (56),    de- 
scribe 
onHC^Tb  (my,  limemb) 
{ocB-fem&Tb  (km,  ^emb),  illumine 
ocB-feTiiTb  ("femy,  'fexHinb) 
{ocM^TpHBaxb   (aio,   aemb),  survey, 
inspect 
OCMOTp-feTb  (pib,  dxpHiiib) 
rocTaB^xbCH   (ocTaibcb,  embCH),  re- 
-|      main,  be  left,  stay 
VocTdTbCfl  (dnycb,  embcn)  (27) 

{ocxaBJijiTb  (Am,  ^ienib)  (55),  leave, 
forsake 
OCT^BHTb  (bJIK),  BHUIb) 

foTBoaikTb  (>Ky ,  dannib),  convey  away 
\oTBe3Tii  (3f,  emb)  (27) 
/oTB-feH^Tb  (km,  ^einb)  (19),  answer 

XoTB-feTHTb  (iiy,  "fexHIIIb) 

J  OTroHjiTb  (Am,  jiemb),  drive,  chase 
-|      away 

(oTroHdTb  (oTroHib,  dHHmb)  (16) 
/oTHBHr&Tb  (km),  remove 
\oT(o)HBliHyTb  (ny,  nemb) 


/oTHMx^Tb  (km,  ^enib)  (18),  rest 
\oTaoxHyTb  (h;^,  emb) 

{oTKpuBATb  (km,  ^emb)  (35),  uncover, 
open 
OTKpiiTb  (6io,  6eiiib)  (22) 
f oTi^jiHBaTb    (aio,    aemb),    unmoor, 
cast  off 

OTH^JIHTb  (H),  Hmb) 

oTh-kamkTb    (km,   &enib),    drive   off, 

start 
OT-b-fexaxb  ("feny,  emb) 
omi^nbiBaxb     (aio,    aemb),     palpate, 

finger 
om^axb  (aK),  aemb) 

/n^Haxb  (aio,  aemb)  (Par.  159  note),  fall 
\nacTb  (ajif,  enib) 
(Bc)naxaTb  (namy',  ^meiiib)  (Par.   168), 
plough 
nepettay  (Par.  160),  see  nepexo«6Tb 
TnepexomiTb  (my,  6aHmb),go  through, 
-j      across 

(nepeiiTH  (eiAjif,  emb) 
(Ha)nHc^Tb  (my,  nmemb)  (Par.  168),  write 
(BiJi)nHTb  (nbio,  nbemb)  (Par.  162),  drink 
(3a)naaKaTb  or  (no)nMKaTb  (k^y,  emb) 
(27  and  53),  weep,  bewail,  lament 
nji^KaxbCH,  wail  (intrans.) 
(3a)njiaTiiTb  (aiy,  ^xHmb)  (Par.  208),  pay 
noGji'feAH'feTb,  see  Gji-fe^H-feTb 
rnoS-feHta^Tb  (km,  keun>)  (56),  conquer, 
4      vanquish 

l^noS-fefliiTb  ("kmuf,  'l^nilmb) 
/  noflMeT^Tb  (aio,  ^enib)  (55),  sweep  up 
\*nonMecTii  (erf,  emb) 

{nojiHHMdxb  (km,  ^enib)  (54),  lift,  raise 
nojiHHTb  (HHMy,  Am  emb)  (22) 
noHKHM^TbCH,  rise 
(nojixomixb  (mf,  dniraib),  go  up  to; 
-|     resemble 
( noHoiixH  (ii«y,  emb) 
fnojKHB^xb    (km,    demb)    (35),    live, 
-]      dwell 

VnoHoiTb  (>KHB^,  emb) 
/noK^3biBaTb  (aio,  aemb)  (52),  show 
\n0Ka3ATb  (mf,  ^Htemb)  (3) 

{noKHH&Tb  (^10,  ^eiiib)  (55),  abandon, 
leave  in  the  lurch 
noKriiiyxb  (y,  eim>) 
noKpacirtxb,  see  Kpacirfexb 
/noKynaxb  (km,  keuib)  (53),  buy 
\Kyniixb  (njiib,  ynnmb)  (6) 
Tnojiar^xb  (^10,  4eiiib)  (35),  suppose, 
J      think 
l^nojioHoixb  (my,  dmwnh)  (ofoo=  put) 


214 


VOCABULARY  OF  VERBS 


/nojiHBAxb  (Aio,  Aeim.)  (43),  water 
i.nojiHTt  (jii>K),  bemt.) 
nojiojKHTi.  {see  KJiacxt,)  lay,  put 
/nojiyq^Tt  (dio,  deiiib)  (52),  receive 
\nojiyqHTb  (yiy,  ^qninb)  (Par.  98) 
(Bc)n6MHHTi>  (h),  Huib),  remember;  cm;^ 
noMHHTCH,    he    remembers    (Par. 
147) 
/noMoraxb  (aio,  4erab)  (53),  help 
\noM6qb  (ory,  6>Kemb,  6ryTh) 

{noHHM^Tb    (^H),    Aemb)    (6),    under- 
stand 
noHiiTb  (noiiMy^,  erab) 
TnonaAaTb  (aio,  ^emb),  faU  upon,  light 
-{      upon 

VnondcTb  (any,  emb) 
(Hc)n6pTHTb  (6pqy,  dpxHmb)  (39),  spoil, 
ruin 
/nopbiBaxb  (^H),  aeim>),  tear 
\nopBaTb  (pBy,  eiiib) 
nopMB^TbCH,  strive  for,  try  hard 
nocji^Tb  {see  nocbiJiaxb),  send 
nocMarpHBaTb  (aio,  aemb)  (55),  look 

at,  observe 
nOCMOTP'feTb  (h),  dTpHmb) 
nocxaBJiHTb  (hk),  fieuib)  (55),  set,  set 

up,  erect 
nocxaBHXb  (bjifo,  BHinb) 
rnocxynaxb  (aio,  Aemb)  (44),  behave, 
-|     act,  enter  upon 
Vnocxyniixb  (njiio,  yoHmb)  (16) 
/nocbiJi^xb  (4io,  ^euib)  (53),  send 
Inocji^xb  (mjiib,  emb)  (10) 
[noc-femaxb    {km,    aemb)    (19),   visit, 
-|      frequent 
VnoctxHXb  (-ferny,  "fexiiuib) 
nocfenjiH,  see  c-feaxb 
/  noxpHc^xb  (^K),  aemb)  (54),  shake 
l*noxpHCXH  {cf,  emb) 
/noiHHHXb  (liio,  Hemb)  (46),  repair 
InoqHHiixb  (w,  liHBtmb) 
fnoHurkTb    {Am,    &ena>)    (Par.    185), 
I     esteem,  regard,  consider 

\noq6cxb  ('ixjf,  emb) 
noHHX&xbCH,  be  considered  as 

nomejix>,  mji&  (10)  {see  hxx6),  went 

noicxb,  see  -fecxb 
/npewnoiHx^xb  {Am,  aemb),  prefer 
\npennoHecxb  (qxy,  emb) 
/npeHCxaBJirixb  (hid,  Hemb),  represent 
Vnpeacx^BHXb  (bjiio,  Bumb) 
rnpH5jiH}Kaxb     {km,     ^emb),      bring 
-|      nearer 
VnpH5Jiii3HXb  (liJKy,  iiaimib) 

npH6jiHH<&xbCH,  approach 


rnpHroxoBJiflXb  (liio,  lieiiib)  (18),  pre. 
-|     pare 

(^npHrox6BHXb  (bjiio,  BHmb) 
npHHaHJieH^^xb    (my,    ikmb)    (Par. 
,141),  belong 
/npHHHMaxb  (aio,  &emb),  accept 
\npHHrixb  (npHMy,  laiviemb) 
rnpHHociixb  (ouiy,  6cHmb)  (52),  bring 
-j  npHHCcxH  (cy,  emb)  (52) 
(npuHecx.  (Par.  63),  he  brought 
rnpHxoHiixb  {my,  d^nmb)  (56),  arrive, 
J     come  (on  foot) 
j  npHxxH  {ujif,  emb) 
l^npnmejib,  mji^,  etc.  (Par.  62),  came 
npiHHyx-b  (Par.  160),  will  come,  are 

to  come 
Tnpi'feaHiaxb  {km,  6eiiib),  arrive  (not 
-|     on  foot) 

(npi-txaxb  (-fejiy,  emb)  (Par.  97) 
rnpoBOHHXb  (my,  djmmb)  (55),  lead 
-j      through,  spend  (time) 
^npoBecxii  (ejiy,  emb) 
/npoflaB^xb  (aaib,  emb),  sell 
\npoflaxb  (aMb)  (Par.  231) 
rnpoflojiHtaxb  (^10,  ^emb)  (35),  con- 
A      tinue 

[npoji6ji>KHXb  (6ji>Ky,  6ji>Kikmb) 
npofifly,  see  npoxofliixb,  go  through 
(no)npocHXb    (my,    6cHiiib)    (53),    beg, 
request 
'npoxofliixb  {my,  6HHiiib)  (52),  tra- 
verse, go  through 
npottxii  (ftAy,  emb)  (52) 
npomejn>,  mjia,  6,  A  (Par.  62),  tra- 
versed 

rnpomaxb  {km,  ^enib)  (52),  pardon, 
I      remit 

1  npocxiixb  (om^,  cxiimb)  (52) 
inpom^xbCH,  bid  farewell 
/npiiraxb  (aio,  aemb)  (2),  jump  about 
\npiirHyxb  (ny,  emb),  jump  (once) 
*(no)np}icxb     (nay,    eim.)     (Par.     157), 
spin 
/nycK&xb  {km,  ^eiiib)  (28),  let,  admit 
\nycxHXb  (ymy,  ycxHmb)  (52) 

nycxb,  let !  (Par.  215) 
(c)n'fexb  (noH),  emb)  (Par.  165),  sing 

(no)pa56xaxb  (aio,  aemb)  (2),  work 
{o6)pkjioBaTb  (ayio,  emb)  (53),  delight 
(o6)panoBaxbCH,  rejoice,  be  glad 

rpasroBJiflXbCH  (rfioeb,  liembCH)  (53) 
J  paaroB-ixbCH   (-feiocb,  -tembCH),   eat 
1      meat  for  the  first  time  after  the 
I.     fast 


VOCABULARY  OF  VERBS 


215 


rpaaa-bBaxb  (km,  &einb)  (52),  undress 
J      {trans. ) 

I  paaa-fexb  (iny,  -tHenib)  (52) 
l^pasfl-feB^TbCH,  undress  (m<m/i5.) 
/paajiHiaxb  (Ah),  ^eiub),  distinguish 
\pa3JiHqHTt  (qy,  hi^iiib) 
fpaacK^sbiBaTb  (aio,   aeim.)  (46),  re- 
-|      late,  tell 

l^paacKaa&Ti.  (m^,  kmeuib)  (18) 
(y)pa3yM'feTi>  (ifero,  'temt),  understand 
paayM-fecTCH  (55),  it  is  understood, 
it  goes  without  saying 
*(Bii)pacTH  or  pocxH  (cxy,  euib),  grow 
(Ha)pHcoBaTB  (cyio,  euib)  (19),  draw 
/posKji^TBCH  (^locb,  keuibcn),  be  born 
\poaiiTi>CH  (Htycb,  niiuiBCfl)  (47) 
(no)pi.iTb  (p6io,  6emb)  (53),  dig 
(no)p6TbCH,  stir  up,  rummage  about  in 

{p-feuiaxb    (^lo,    aeuib)    (35),    solve, 
resolve 
p-femHTb  (y,  6mt)  (28) 

(no)caaiiTt  (JKy,  kwkuib),  plant 
/   cajxHETbCH  (jKycb,  ^HiiuibCH),  sit  down 
t.*c'fecTi>  (cjiay,  euib)  (15) 
rcGHBaxb    (^K),    aemb),    knock    off, 
A      lead  astray 
l^cSnxb  (co5bK),  erab) 
ca-fejiaxb  (see  aifejiaxb),  do,  make 
(no)cHfl'fexb  ()Ky,  HHUib)  (15),  sit 
(3a)cirfxb  (fiio,  riemb)  (16),  shine 
JcK^awBaxb  (aio,  aemb),  relate 
\cKaaaxb  (my,  antemb)  (3),  tell,  say 
TcKJi^auBaxb    (aio,   aemb),   put    to- 
I      gether,  fold 

\CKaacxb  (aAy,  emb) 
cjiojKHXb  (my,  6>KHiin>)  also  means 
compose 
/cKOjibaiixb  (my,  aiimb),  slide,  glide 
\cKOJib3Hyxb  (uy,  emb) 
CKOiiqaxbca    (aiocb,   dembca)   (47), 
die 

{CKpbiBaxb  (kjo,  ^emb)    (31),  hide, 
conceal 
CKpbixb  (p6K),  6emb)  (31) 
(no)cjiy}KHXb  (my,  ymnmb)  (Par.  149), 
serve 
/cJiyi^xbCH  (aexcH),  happen 
\cjiyquxbCH  (-^uxcn)  (16) 
(no)cjiymaxb  (aio,  aemb)  (35),  listen 

(y)cjibimaxb  (y,  umb)  (29),  hear 
(no)cMOxp-fexb  (i5,  dxpumb)  (Par.  149), 
contemplate,  look  upon,  consider 
(no)cMtiUHXb  or  (Ha)cM'feinH[xb  {^,  limb) 
(56),  make  laugh 


(3a)cM'ferfxbCH    ("feibcb,    -feeuxbCH)    (Par. 
157),  laugh 

{CHHM^xb   (^H),  ^euib),  take  down, 
take  off 
CHHXb  (cHHMy',  liMeim.)  (Par.  98) 
cojiraji-b,  see  Jiraxb 
Tcnac^xb  (Aio,  Aeuib),  save 
-I  cnacxii  (cy,  emb) 
icnac-b  (15),  he  saved 
(no)cnAxb  (cnjiib,  cniimb)  (2),  sleep 
[  cnpamHBaxb  (aio,  aemb)  (19),  ques- 
-|      tion,  ask 

[cnpociixb  (my,  6cHmb)  (19) 
(no)cxABHXb    (bjik),    BHiub)    (55),    set, 
stand 

{CXaHOBHXbCfl       (BJIlbCb,       dSHmbCH), 
become 
cxaxb  (16)  (cxAny,  emb),  become, 
set  about,  begin 
(no)cxapaxbCH  (aiocb,  aeuibCH)  (31),  try, 
strive,  endeavour 
TcxdHXb   (oH),   6Him>)   (9),   cost,    be 
-!     worth ;  ne  cxohxt.,  don't  mention 
I     it 
(no)cxojixb  (oi5,  oiimb)  (9),  stand 
(no)cxp6HXb  (6io,  dumb)  (10),  build 
'(no)cxy»iAxb  (qy-,  limb)  (54),  knock 
cxyKiiyxb  (ny,  emb) 
cinxaxb   (aio,   aemb)    (56),    count, 

reckon 
cqecxb  (eoqx^,  emb) 
clicKHBaxb  (aio ,  aeiub)  (Ex.  55  A  (a)), 

seek  out 
CMCK&xb  (emu^,  i^memb) 
c-feji-b  (15)  (see  ca^iixbcfl),  he  sat 
down 
♦c-fecxb  (see  cajnixcH),  sit  down 
*(Bbi)c'fe«ib   or   *(no)c'feHb  (-feKy,  -feqemb, 
■feKyx-b),  chop  up;  flog 
(no)c'feflxb  ("feio,  -feemb)  (6),  sow 

(no)xeMH-fexb  or  (3a)xeMH4Tb  (iio,  -ieiiib) 

(46),  grow  dark 
(Ha)xK4xb  or  (c6)xKaxb  (xny,  qemb,  Kyxi) 
(Par.  157),  weave 
rxojiKaxbCH  (Aiocb,  AeuibCH),  strike, 
-!      knock  against 
VxojiKHyxbCH  (nycb,  embCfl) 
(Hc)xonHXb  (njiib,  dnumb)   (46),  heat, 
stoke 

{xp6raxb   (aio,   aemb)    (35),   touch, 
move 
xpdiiyxb  (ny,  emb) 
(no)xflHyxbCH  (xHHycb,  jinembCH)  (48), 
extend  (intrans.) 


216 


VOCABULARY  OF  VEEBS 


/yS-fer^Tb  (^lo,  Aemb),  run  away 
XyG-fewK^Tb  (try,  jkhiiib,  ryxt)  (16) 
[  ynaw^TB     (Aio,     4emi>),      respect, 
-|      esteem 

[  yB^HtHTJb  (jKy,  «KHnii>) 

TyroHiiTb  (riio,   jieuib),  drive,  hunt 
-j     away 

(^yrii^Tb  (roHib,  dHHUib) 
/ynapiiTB  (rfio,  jteuib),  strike 

\yfl^pHTB  (K),  HUIfc) 

TyaHaB^Tb  (yanaib,  emi.),  recognize, 
-!      get  to  know 

(ysHaxB  (yaiiaio,  eim>)  (22) 
jyunpk-Tb  (aio,  ^erni.)  (42),  die 
\yMep6Tb  (yMpy,  emt)  (Par.  96) 

TyMfciB^Tb    (^Hj,    ^emb)   (52),    wash 
-{      (face  and  hands,  etc.) 

[  yivrfiTb  (yM6io,  6emb)  (52) 
(c)yM'feTb    (fkio,    -feeuib)    (35),    under- 
stand, know  how  to,  be  able 
/ynafl^Tb  (^lo,  &emb),  fall  (off),  sink 
\yn&CTb  (any,  enib) 
ynaji-b  (15),  he  fell 

r ynoxpeSJiHTb  (hk),  jienib)  (35),  use 
\ynoTpe6iiTb  (6jik),  6iimb) 

{ycxp^HBaTb      (aio,      aeuib)      (55), 
arrange 
ycxpoiixb  (6io,  6Hnib) 
/  ycbinaxb  (^lo,  &emb),  fall  asleep 
\ycHyxb  (Hy,  emb) 
r  yxBep>K;iaxb    (aio,    aeuib),    affirm, 
-{      strengthen 
t  yxBcparixb  (pH{(«)^,  pHiiiiib) 

{yxoanxb    (>Ky,    6flHmb)     (55),     go 
away;  escape 
yfiXH  (iifly,  eiiib) 


{(Ha)yqHXb  (y^y,  ^HHiiib)  (19),  teach 
(Ha)yHHXbCH  (19),  learn,  study 
yniixb  Hanaycxb,  learn  by  rote 
ymeji-b.mjia,  etc.  (34)  (see  yxcjiiixb), 
went  away 

(no)xBajiHXb  (lb,  ajiumb)  (39),  praise 
xoHHxb  (xoHty',  xdflHmb)  (2,  Par. 
149),   go,  be  in   the  habit  of 
going 
(3a)xox'fexb  (6;  Par.  222),  wish 
xdHeim.  (46 ;  Par.  222) 

n^pcxBOBaxb   (cxByio,    emb)    (48), 
rule,  reign 
*(3a)tiBecxik  (-fexy,  emb),  bloom 

(no)qHCXHXb     or    (BiJi)HHCXHXb     (limy, 

licxHmb)  (56),  clean 
(no)qHxaxb  (aio,  aeuib)  (19),  read 
(no)iyBCXBOBaxb  (BCXByio,  yemb),  feel 

/mar^xb  (aio,  ^emb),  step,  stride 
\marHyxb  (ny,  emb) 
mejib,  mjia,  etc.  {see  iixxii),  went 
/(npo)menxaxb  (nny,  6nqemb),  whisper 
\^  mennyxb  (ny,  emb) 

mnxb  (lubio,  mbenib)  (Par.   162), 
sew 
(c)mHXb  (combib,  euib) 

•fejib,  past  tense  of  -fecxb 
(no)'fccxb  (6 ;  Par.  220),  eat 
(no)'fexaxb  (iny,  -tjiemb)  (Par.  97),  go 

by    any    conveyance,    not   on 

foot 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


Verbs  are  given  in  a  special  vocabulary  on  pp.  210-216,  and  do  not  appear  in 
this  vocabulary. 

Of  nouns  the  nominatives  singular  and  plural,  and  occasionally  the  genitive 
plural,  are  given.  When  the  noun  ends  in  -t  or  when  any  other  cause  of  ambiguity 
is  present,  the  gender  is  marked. 

Otherwise  nouns  in  -t,  -ft  are  masculine ;  nouns  in  -a,  -h  are  feminine  ;  nouns  in 
-o,  -e,  -Mfl  are  neuter. 

When  a  masculine  noun  ^  is  printed  : 
I.  Bt-taa-b,  Bi,  the  accent  remains  throughout  on  the  stem ; 
II.  rdj^h,  a,  the  accent  in  the  singular  is  on  the  stem  and  in  the  plural  on  the 
termination  ; 

III.  flBopT>,  li,  the  accent  falls  throughout  on  the  termination. 

IV.  b6jiki.,  h  (dBi.),  all  cases  of  the  singular  and  the  nominative  plural  are 

accented  on  stem,  oblique  cases  in  plural  have  accent  on  termination. 

Of  adjectives  the  predicative  forms  (see  Lesson  XLIX),  when  in  common  use, 
are  given  in  the  lists  in  Par.  237. ' 

Regularly  derived  adverbs  in  -o  (see  Par.  189  (1))  are  not  always  separately 
mentioned. 

The  number  enclosed  in  brackets  indicates  the  vocabulary,  paragraph,  or 
exercise  where  a  phonetic  transcript  of  the  word  will  be  found. 


a  (1),  and,  but 

^BrycTT.,  H  (47),  August 

6BTopi>,  BI,  author 

636yKa,  H,  alphabet,  ABC  book 

Ahcti.,  bi,  I  (37),  stork 

AjiBKC^HHpa,  Alexandra 

AjieKc^nHpi,,  Alexander 

aHrjiHq^HHH'b,  ^ne  (34),  Englishman 

anrjinqaHKa,  h  (Par.  230),  Englishwoman 

aHrjiIticKitt  (13),  English 

AhfjiIh  (34),  England 

anp-fejib,  H  (m.)  (47),  April 


665a,  bi  (14),  peasant-woman 
6&6yuiKsi,    H     (12),    grandmother, 

woman 
e^pHH-b,  66pe  (55),  master,  lord 


old 


66cHH,  H  (eni)  (39),  fable 

66TK)mKa,  H  (m.)  (46),  father,  dear  father 

6e3npecT&HHo  (36),  incessantly 

SeanpecT^HHbiii,  continual,  incessant 

Seat,  5630  (4),  without 

Ceper-b,  6,  II  (10),  shore,  bank 

6JiH>Ke,  nearer 

6jiiijKHifi[  {adj.)  (52),  neighbour 

6jiH3Kift,  near 

6jiH3'b  {gen.)  (Par.  70),  near 

Sji-fenHbiii  (31),  pale 

eor^TCTBo,  a  (50),  riches,  wealth 

6oraTHii  (5),  rich 

Gor^ue,  richer 

B6r'b,  H  (dB-b)  (53),  God 

B6>Ke!  (53),  O  God ! 

Sojir^pHHT,,  6pe  (Par.  230),  Bulgar 

BojirAplH,  Bulgaria 

6ojirapKa,  H  (Par.  230),  Bulgarian  woman 

eojibHiina,  bi  (27),  infirmary,  hospital 


^  With  many  nouns,  and  especially  with  monosyllables,  the  use  of  the  figures  I,  II,  etc. 
not  necessary. 

217 


218 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


6ojibH6ii  (4),  sick,  ill 

66abme  (32),  more;  66ai>me  Bcer6  (50), 

more  than  all,  most 
65jibmitt  (Par.  195),  greater,  larger 
Sojibiudtt  (5),  great,  large,  grown  up 
66ji-fee  (40),  more 
Soji-fesHeHHtitt,  sickly 
eoji-fesHb,  H  (/.)  (27),  disease,  sickness 
Span,  TbH  (eBi)  (3),  brother 
epHxAHCKitt  (50),  British 
SyflexT.  {impers.  verb)  (54),  that  will  do, 

enough 
e^nymitt  (Par.  128),  future,  coming 
SyKBaJitHua,  literal,  exact 
6yM^ra,  h  (19),  paper 
6m,  61.  (Par.  199),  conditional  particle 
diiK-b,  H  (49),  ox 
SbiJib,  H  (/.)  (53),  true  story 
GucTpbitt,  quick,  sudden 
eijmocTb  (/.)  (17),  poverty 
S-fe^HbEa  (5),  poor 
6'fe.ribitt  (1),  white 


BAra-b,  a,  e,  H  (7),  your,  yours 

Bflpyr-b  (27),  suddenly 

Bcapd,  e«pa  (13),  pail 

Besfl-fe  (56),  everywhere 

BejiiiKift  (25),  great 

BejiHKOJi^nHbitt  (40),  splendid,  magni- 
ficent 

BepSjiibH-b,  M  (48),  camel 

BepeBKa,  h  (43),  rope 

BepcT^,  epcTM  (48),  verst  (1067  metres) 

Bepx6Mi,  (Par.  48),  on  horseback;  ixaxb 
BepxdM-b,  to  ride 

BfepxT,,  H  (10),  top,  summit 

BecejiMtt  (56),  merry,  glad,  jolly 

Becji6,  ecjia,  oar 

BecM,  ecHM  (18),  spring  (season); 
BecH6H),  ofi,  in  spring 

Becb,  BOH,  Bce,  Bc-fe  (Par.  106),  all,  entire 

BecbM^,  very,  extremely 

B^qep-b,  k  (18),  evening;  BeqepoM-b,  in 
the  evening 

B6mb,  H  (/.)  (39),  thing,  affair 

BsaflT.  (44),  backwards 

B3p6cjibitt  (46),  grown-up,  adult 

Biiaubiti,  visible,  evident 

BiiflT.,  M,  sight,  view,  aspect 

bhh6,  -^a  (43),  wine 

BiicfejiHua,  bi,  gallows 

B^cfejibHHKT.,  H,  man  who  has  been 
hanged 


BKycHutt  (7),  nice,  tasty 

Bjiafl-fenie,  H  (48),  possession,  territory 

BM-tcTo  {gen.)  (Par.  70),  instead  of 

BM-fecT-fe  (36),  together 

BHcsanHLili  (54),  sudden 

BHHSb,  down(stream) 

BHHM^xejibHbia  (19),  attentive 

BHyKa,  H,  granddaughter 

BHyK-b,  H  (3),  grandson 

BHyqKa,  h  (14),  little  granddaughter 

Bo^B-b,  in,  into 

BOBce  (34),  at  all,  completely;  BdBce  hb, 

not  at  all 
BOH^,  -^M  (12),  water 
Bo6HHMft  (56),  military,  warlike 
Bdsji-fe  {gen.)  (Par.  70),  beside,  near 
B03M6>KHbitt  (Par.  41),  possible 
BoitHa,  -M  (28),  war 
BdiicKO,  k  (56),  army 
BOKs^ji-b,  u  (19),  railway-station 
BdjiK-b,  H  (dB-b)  (37),  wolf 
BOJiH^,  -bi,  wave 
B6jibHbili,  free 
Bopdxa  {neut.  pi.)  (55),  gate 
B6pb,  bi  (oBT.)  (50),  thief 
BoceMH^Huaxb  (Par.  148),  eighteen 
B6ceMb  (36),  eight 
BoceMbHecflxT,  (Par.  150),  eighty 
BoceMbcox'b  (181  (6)),  eight  hundred 
BOCKpeceHie,  resurrection,  Easter 
BOCKpec6Hbe,  h  (Par.  128),  Sunday 
BocxdR-b,  I  (48),  East 
BocbMHaeciixbiti,  eightieth 
BocbMHcdxbiii  (Par.  184),  eight-hundredth 
BocbM6ft  (Par.  166),  eighth 
Boxb  (2),  here  is  !  there  is  I  there  are  I 
BuepeA'b  (44),  forwards 
Bparb,  li  (56),  enemy 
bp6mh,  mcM  {n.)  (Par.  219),  time 
Bce  (18),  all,  entire;  always 
BcerAa  (18),  always 
Bcer6,  gen.  case  of  Bccb,  etc. 
Bcibay  (56),  everywhere 
BOH,  fern.  sing,  of  Bscb 
BcriKia  (36),  each,  every 
Bx6pHHK'b,  H  (47),  Tuesday 
Bxop6ft  (Par.  166),  second 
Biep^  (16),  yesterday 
Bb,  BO  {ace.  or  prep.)  (10),  in,  into 
B-bisHb,  M  (10),  entrance 
Bbi  (Par.  80),  you 
BbipajKCHie,  H,  expression 
Bbicdidtt  (30),  high,  tall 
Bbicox^,  oxu  (45),  height 
Bbicmitt  (Par.  195),  higher,  highest 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


21& 


Biiime  Bcerd,  higher  than  all,  highest 
B'hjib  (41),  ^y,  surely 
B-tKT,,  H  or  k  (48),  age,  century,  lifetime 
B-fepHo,  truly ;  iie  B-fepno?  (56),  is  it  not 

so? 
B^pHtifl,  true,  faithful 
B^Tepi.,  xpH  or  k,  wind 


ra*  (2),  where 

reHep^ji-b,  bi  (56),  general 

repMaHiH  (34),  Germany 

rep6H,  H  (5),  hero 

repoiinH,  h  (14),  heroine 

rii6ejib,  h  (/.)  (50),  ruin 

rjianKiti,  smooth 

rjidai,,  k  (i.)  (16),  eye 

rjiy66Kitt  (30),  deep 

rjiynbrti  (1),  stupid 

rHHJi6tt,  decayed 

ra-feaad,  -a  (43),  nest 

roBop^miii,  the  person  speaking 
I        rdfli.,  k  (10),  year 
^         rojioBd,  r6;ioBu  (16),  head 

roJioHHMa  (42),  hungry 

rdjioc-b,  ky  II  (29),  voice 

rojibitt,  naked 

rdnqiii  (40),  hunting  (dog) 

rop^ano  (32),  by  far 

r6pe,  A  (28),  grief,  misfortune 

rdpofli,,  k,  II  (27),  town 

r6p»ie,  more  bitter 

r6pbKifi,  bitter 

ropHHiti  (Par.  94),  hot 

rocn6«b  (m.)  {gen.  sing.  r6cno«a)  (54), 
the  Lord 

rocyH^pcTBo,  a  (48),  state,  empire 

rocyflapb,  h  (m.)  (48),  ruler 

roTdsMii,  ready 

rpajKHamiHt,  ^ne  (Par.  230),  burgher, 
citizen 

rpamina,  m  (44),  frontier 

rpeSeu-b,  6mi,  III,  rower 

rpHS-b,  li  (49),  mushroom 

rpo3^,  -^bi  (49),  thunder-storm 

rpoM^aHbift  (34),  enormous 

rpdMKift  (29),  loud 

rpdM-b,  bi  (^B-b)  (49),  thunder 

rpyjta,  u,  heap,  lot 

rpynb,  H  (/.),  breast 

rpjisHbiii  (13),  dirty 

ryGepulH  (42),  a  government 

rycxda,  thick,  dense 

i^cb,  H  (6ft)  (m.)  (49),  goose 


Ha  (6),  yes,  and,  but 

«aBHiS[Mi.-HaBH6  (21),  long  ago 

flaBH6,  long,  long  since 

H^me  (18),  even 

flajieKitt  (45),  far,  remote 

n^jibme,  H^ji-fee,  farther 

H&Ma,  bi  (12),  lady 

H^mibiit,  given 

naTqaHHH-b,  aiie  (Par.  230),  Dane 

nkHSL,  H,  summer  resort 

HBa,  SB-fe  (7),  two 

flB^auaxb  (36),  twenty 

HBepb,  H  (6ii)  (/.)  (Par.  64),  door 

HBop^n-b,  pm^iy  III  (5),  palace 

ABop-b,  li  (36),  court,  yard;  na  nBop-fe 

(Ex.  18,  A),  out  of  doors 
HBopHmiH-b,  jine  (Par.  230),  nobleman 

(courtier) 
«Byxc6Tbitt  (Par.  184),  two-hundredth 
HB-feH^nnaxb  (Par.  148),  twelve 
HB-tcTH  (Par.  155),  two  hundred 
«eBHH6cTo  (Par.  150),  ninety 
HeBHTHc6Tbiii  (Par.  184),  nine -hundredth 
acBHTH^nuaxB  (Par.  148),  nineteen 
fleBHTb  (36),  nine 
ji;eBflTbc6T'b,  nine  hundred 
flCK^Spb,  6  (w.).  Ill  (47),  December 
HCHb,  HHH  (w.)  (18),  day 
«6HbrH  (/.  pi.)  (40),  money 
Acp^BHH,  H  (6Hb)  (18),  hamlet  (without 

church) ;  bt.  Hep6BH'fe,  in  the  country 
n6peBo,  k  or  cbbh  (bes-b)  (37),  tree 
HepeBHfflibiit  (9),  wooden 
H6cHTb  (36),  ten 
nem^BJie,  cheaper 
HcmeBbiit,  cheap 
HHB^H'b,  w,  couch 
HiiKitt  (Par.  92),  wild 
flHTH,  n-fexH  (ji.)  (Par.  229),  child 
njiiiHHbitt  (16),  long 
AJiH  {gen.)  (4),  for 
flHCMi.  (Par.  68),  by  day 
flHo,  «6HbH  (beBT.),  bottom 
flo  {gen.)  (Par.  70),  up  to,  till,  before 
floGpoT^  (39),  goodness,  kindness 
H66pbili  (1),  good,  kind 
flOBdjibHo  (55),  sufficiently,  fairly,  rather 
nojKHb,  li  (m.)  (42),  rain 
HOKTopi.,  ^,  II,  doctor 
jl6jiritt  (30),  long 
fldJiro  {adv.)  (43),  long 
adjimen-b,  predicative  of  n^JimHua  (42), 

obliged,  compelled 


220 


KUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


ndma  (8),  at  home 

noM^uinifl  (24),  domesticated,  tame 

ndMHKT..  H  (9),  little  house 

noMdii,  home,  homewards 

H6MTb,  &  (l),  house 

nop6ra,  H  (50),  way,  road 

Hopordii,  «op6}Ke  (50),  dear,  dearer 

HOCK&,  -^H  (19),  board 

jxd'iKa,  H  (14),  little  daughter 

HciB,  fldqepH  (Par.  86),  daughter 

HP^Ka,  H  (16),  fight,  scrimmage 

upoB^  {n.  pi.)  (46),  firewood,  timber 

UpoHtdmitt  (29)  trembling 

«pyr6ft  (5),  other,  second 

Apyrt,  «py3b}4  (36tt)  (Par.  15),  friend 

Hpynb,  npyra  (44),  one  another;  npyrt 

CB  npyroM-B  (46),  with  each  other 
HPj'jKdKi,,  li.  III  (14),  little  friend,  dear 

friend 
HySi,,  bi  (38),  oak 
HypHofi  (18),  bad,  hateful 
H^mHMii,  close,  oppressive 
niBOHKa  (12),  little  girl 
nieymKa,  h  (37),  girl  (growing  up) 
H-feHymKa,  h  (eKt)  (m.)  (46),  grandfather 
H-fefli.,  BI  (1),  grandfather 
H-feticTBHTejibHO  (50),  really,  indeed 
n-fejio,  &  (34),  deed,  affair,  business 
H-fexH  {n.  pi)  (Par.  229),  children 
n^TCTBo  (41),  childhood 
H-feHxejifcHbiii,  active 
jijiHH,  H  or  Bji  (b6bb)  (w.)  (29),  uncle 


er6  (2),  him,  of  him,  his,  it,  its 

ejxB^  (43),  hardly,  scarcely 

eateHH^BHBitt  (42),  daily 

eMy-  (Par.  21),  to  him 

6CJ1H  (34),  if 

ecTB  (13),  there  is,  there  are 

eme  (16),  still 

eA  (12),  her,  of  her,  hers 

Ht&jiKitt,  piteous,  pitiful 

jK&jiKo  (49),  it  is  a  pity 

Ht^pKiii  (18),  hot 

Ht^TBa,  BI  (18),  harvest,  crops 

jKe  (37),  for,   but,   yet,   on   the  other 

hand,  though,  too,  anyway 
jKCJiTBitt  (23),  yellow 
jKeji-fesHBia  (50),  of  iron 
>Keji-fe30,  a  (Par.  194),  iron 
JKBH^,  eHH  (27),  wife 
HtfemnHiia,  BI  (12),  woman 


w6pTBa,  H,  victim,  sacrifice 
HtHB6ft,  living,  alive 
H«HBdTHoe  {n.  adj.)  (24),  animal 
jKiiflKift,  thin  (of  fluids) 
«H3HB  (/.)  (49),  life 
jKHJiBc,  -^H  (39),  dwelling 

JK^pHBllt,  fat 

jKiixejiB,  H  (m.)  (54),  inhabitant 
jKiJTo,  a  (18),  crops,  com 
jKyp&BJib,  Tk  (m.).  Ill  (37),  crane 


3a  (ace,  instr.)  (Par.  44),  behind,  for, 
at;  HH  3^  ^xo,  not  at  any  price; 
1TO  3a-?  what  sort  of  ? 
3a66Ta,  u,  care 
3^BTpa  (Par.  68),  to-morrow 
s^BxpaK-B,  H  (34),  breakfast,  lunch 
sajikna,  H  (36),  exercise,  problem 
s^jia,  BI,  hall,  drawing-room 

3^MOKB,  3^MKH,   Castlo 

3aM6K'B,  3aMKH,  III  (21),  lock 

3&najiB,  I  (48),  west 

3aqi;MB  (10),  for  what,  why 

sB-tpb,  H  (61i)  (m.)  (37),  wild  beast 

3fl&Hie,  H,  I  (7),  building 

33;op6BBiii  (4),  well,  healthy 

3Hop6Bbe,  health 

3Ap&BCTByttTe!  (Par.  216)  {imperative 
mood  of  sHp^BCTBOBaxb  (Byio,  yemb), 
good  day  !  how  are  you  ?  hail ! 

3Htcb  (3),  here 

sejieHwti  (16),  green 

3eMJiri,  -^H  (6nb)  (21),  land,  earth 

3hm6,  -^bi  (2),  winter 

3HM6fi  (Par.  68),  in  winter 

3Ji6ii,  bad,  cross,  spiteful 

3HaK6MBifi  (41),  known 

BH^K-b,  H  (23),  sign 

3H^MH,  ena  (Par.  219),  banner 

sH^Hie,  H  (50),  knowledge 

ankHvu-h  (pres.  tense  of  ank^mrb)  (27), 
that  means,  that  is 

36JIOTO  (29),  gold 

30JioT6tt  (29),  golden 

30JI1.,  predicative  form  of  sjioft 

ap^jinme,  a,  sight,  spectacle 

H 

H  (1),  and,  also 
ii6o  (conj.)  (36),  for 
Hrp6,  -^Bi  (Par.  60),  game 
H36^,  -^u  (42),  peasant-house,  hut 
H3BHmiTe!  (Par.  216)  {imperative  mood), 
excuse  me  I 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


221 


H3BtcTHHtt  (45),  well-known,  certain 
H3o6paataiomift    {pres.   part.)    (40),    re- 
presenting 
Hsi.,  H30  (gen.)  (Par.  70),  out,  out  of,  from 
Hat-aa  igen.),  from  behind 
lijiH  (18),  or 

HMnepaTopt,  u  (48),  emperor 
HMt  (Par.  21)  (dat.),  to  them 
liMH,  HMenA  (Par.  219),  name 
HHor«4  (18),  sometimes 
HHocTpAHem,  HnM  (34),  foreigner 
HHTep6cHfcitt  (41),  interesting 
Hcn^HCKlft  (50),  Spanish 
Hcnp^Biibifi  (56),  correct,  exact 
UxkniPL  (34),  Italy 
HTEJibiiHCKiti,  Italian 
HXT,  (Par.  21),  them,  of  them,  their 


iiojii,,  H  (47),  July 
libHb,  H  (47),  June 

K 

KaCHH^Ti,,  w,  I,  private  room 
Kamaua  (36),  each 

KaK6Bi>  (2),  predicative  of  KaKOBdii? 
which  ?  what  sort  of  ?  , 

KaK6ii?  (6),  which  ?  what  sort  of  ? 
KaK6ii-HH6yHi»  (55),  some  or  other 
KaKT.  (2),  how,  as 

KaK-b  paat  (16),  just,  just  as  it  happened 
K^MeHHBift  (9),  of  stone 

K&MCHt,  MHH  (6ft)  (W.),  StOUO 

KaoHxaHCKift,  belonging  to  the  captain 

Kapana^m-B,  h.  III  (Par.  67),  pencil 

KapxiiHa,  u  (37),  picture 

K&ma,  H  (56),  gruel 

Kaeenpa,  u  (19),  pulpit,  teacher's  desk 

KBapxHpa,  ti  (40),  flat,  dwelling 

KB&c-b,  I,  kvass  (beverage  made  with 
rye-bread  and  malt) 

KiicjiBitt  (7),  sour 

KJikKb,  M  (53),  treasure 

KJi^ccHMft  (19),  class,  belonging  to  class- 
room 

KJHoq-b,  li  (21),  key 

KHiira,  H  (18),  book 

KHjiat,  hA  (aeft)  (m.)  (8),  prince 

KO=K'b 

Korn^  (2),  when 

Kor6?  (Par.  21),  whom  ?  whose  ? 

KdjKa,  H  (12),  leather,  skin 

Koiak,  if 

K0Jibu6,  K6jibna  (29),  ring 

KOJi-tHo,  a  (55),  knee 


K6MHaTa,  w  (21),  room 

KOMy  (Par.  21),  to  whom 

KOMT.  (prep,  of  KTo)  (10),  whom 

KOHT6pa,  bi,  office 

KOHibmHH,  H  (17),  stable 

Kon6eHKa,  h,  a  little  copeck 

KoneftKa,  h  (Par.  153),  copeck 

Kop^Sjib,  li,  III  (m.),  ship 

Kop6Ba,  bi  (21),  cow 

Kopoji6Ba,  w  (48),  queen 

Kopdjib,  H,  III  (w.)  (9),  king 

Kop6TKift  (30),  short 

Kopdie,  shorter 

K6pnyc'b,  k,  II,  corps  (of  officers) 

KocA,  -^bi  (18),  scythe 

KdcTb,  H  (eft)  (/.)*  (49),  bone 

KOxeHOK-b,  Tfixa  (Ex.  16,  C),  kitten 

KOTopbift  {relat.  pron.  ;  relat.  or  interrog. 

adj.)  (7),  who,  which 
K6mKa,  H  (12),  cat 
KpMnift  (Par.   82),  extreme,  last;    no 

Kp^ftHcft  M-tpi,  at  least 
KpacHBuft  (9),  beautiful 
KpdcHbift  (19),  red;  beautiful 
Kpecjio,  a  (9),  arm-chair 
KpecTbfiHHn'b,  jine  (18),  peasant 
KpoB^xb,  H  (/.)  (31),  bedstead 
KpdBb  (/.),  blood 
KpbM-fe  (gen.)  (Par.  70),  besides,  except; 

KpdM*  Tord,  besides  (that) 
KpdxKitt,  gentle 
KpyrJibift  (16),  round 
Kpyxdft,  stiflF,  abrupt,  thick 
KpinKift  (29),  firm,  strong 
Kxo  (2),  who 

KySiimKa,  h  (54),  jug,  pot 
Kyn^  (2),  whither 

KyHa-xo,  to  somewhere  or  anywhere 
Kyanen-b,  li.  III  (48),  smith 
KyneuT.,  niw.  III  (23),  merchant 
KycdK-b,  CKii,  III  (13),  piece,  bit 
Kj^xHH,  H  (oHb  or  OH-b)  (21),  kitchcu 
Kyqa,  H  (55),  heap,  lot 
Kj^maiibe,  a  (7),  food 
KT.,  KG  {dat.)  (Par.  39),  towards,  to 
K-feMx.?  (ci.)  (9)  (interrog.),  with  whom  ?  ' 

ji^Mua,  bi  (35),  lamp 

ji^na,  bi  (12),  paw 

jiauKa,  H  (49),  little  paw 

jicBT.,  jibBbi  (37),  lion 

jierKitt  (25),  light,  easy 

jierne,  easier 

jiejK^HKa,  H  (55),  bench  by  the  stove 


222 


EUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


jiH,  Jib,  interrogative  particle  (Par.  12), 

whether 
(jiHc4)  jiHCHita,  w  (37),  fox 
jiHu6,  -^a,  face;  person 
jid«Ka,  H  (49),  boat 
jion^xa,  u  (53),  spade 
ji6maHi>,  H  (6tt)  (/.)  (17),  horse 
jiyn>,  6  (10),  meadow 
jiyM,  -^bi,  moon 
ji^qmitt  (Par.  195),  better,  best 
ji-&Hi)Bbifi  (19),  idle,  lazy 
ji-fenb  (/.)  (39),  laziness 
ji-fecTHHna,  u  (22),  stair 
Ji-fecb,  ^  (1),  wood,  forest 
ji-feTO,  k  (2),  summer,  year 
ji-feroMb  (2),  in  summer 
jiK)663Hbitt  (41),  amiable,  dear 
jiio56Bb  {gen.  6Bii)  (/.)  (39),  love 
jiio6oniiTCTBO,  a,  curiosity 
nibHH  (w.  pl.)f  6ft  (42),  people 

M 
M&tt,  H  (47),  May 
M&jiem>Kitt  (5),  little,  small 
M^ao  {adv.)  (6),  little 
Majibiti  (40),  little 

M&JIbHHKb,  H  (1),    boy 

M^px-b,  bi  (47),  March 

M^cKa,  H  (oKx),  mask 

M&cjio,  a  (9),  butter 

M^xepH,  see  Maxb,  mother 

MaxepHHCKifl,  motherly 

M^xymKa,   h   (bki)   (46),   mother,   dear 

mother 
Maxb,  Maxepii  (Par.  86),  mother 
MamiiH&jibHO  (31),  mechanically,  absently 
M66ejib  (/.)  (46),  furniture 
McnB-fenb,  H,  I  (8),  bear 
M6jiJieHHbiii  (32),  slow 
M6mffy  {instr.    or  gen.)   (16),   between, 

among 
M^JiKitt,  small,  fine 
M^Hbiue,  M^H-fee  {adv.  and  adj.)  (40),  less ; 

M^Hbme  Bcer6,  least 
M6Hbraitt  (Par.  195),  smaller,  less 
MeHbm6ft  (Par.  195),  younger,  youngest 
MBHrf  (3),  me,  of  me 
MepxBHtt  (Par.  190),  dead 
Mex6jib,H  (/.)  (46),  snow-storm,  blizzard 
MHJiJiidHT.,  M  (Par.  155),  million 
MiiJiwii  (40),  nice,  dear 
M^MO  {prep,  with  gen. ;  adv.)  (Par.  62), 

past 
MHHricxp-b,  bi  (9),  minister 
MHH^xa,  bi  (Par.  181  (c)),  minute 


Miip-b,  I  (55),  peace 

Mipx,,  li  (39),  world;  village  community 
MJian6ft= Moaojx6ti 
MJi^amitt  (19),  younger,  youngest 
MHcJro  (2),  much 
MHdroHHCJieHHbiii  (40),  numerous 
MH6>KecxBo,  a  (40),  a  lot,  large  number 
MH6ii,  mh6io  (9),  (with  etc.)  me 
MH-fe  (Par.  21)  {dat.  or  prep.),  me 
MH^Hie,  H  (34),  opinion 
Mory»iitt  (9),  mighty 
Mdatex-b-Suxb  (32),  may  be,  perhaps 
MdJKHO  (4),  it  is  possible 
M63rb,  ri,  brain,  marrow 
M6ii,  MOH,  Moe,  moh  (Par.  104),  my,  mine 
Mditpbift  (18),  wet,  damp 
MOJiHXBa,  M  (54),  prayer 
MOJiofldtt  (1),  young 
MOJIOK6  (16),  milk 
MOH^xa,  bi  (54),  money,  coin 
M6pe,  ri  (7),  sea 
Mop63i>,  bi  (18),  frost 
MdcTh,  ik  (10),  bridge 
My>KHKb,  ik.  III  (3),  peasant 
MyHiqiina,  u  (23),  man 
M^m-bj  MyjKbrf  (6ii),  husband 
Mbi  (Par.  80),  we 
Miimb,  H  (6ii)  (/.)  (38),  mouse 
M-fejib,  I  (19),  chalk 
M-fepa,  bi  (22),  measure 
M-fecxo,  &  (16)  place 
M-fecHirb,  bi,  I  (44),  month,  moon 
M'femaHHH'b,  ^He  (Par.  230),  small  towns- 
man 
MriFKiii  (25),  soft 
MHco  (13),  flesh,  meat 

H 

Ha  {ace.  and  prep.)  (10),  on  to,  on 

HaBcxp-feqy,  towards,  to  meet 

Hajio  (49),  it  is  necessary;  Mn-fe  ukjio,  I 

have  to,  I  must 
Haa-b,  naao    {instr.)    (Par.    127),   over, 

above 
Haa^-b  (21),  back,  ago 
HaHsycxb  (39),  by  heart 
HaKOH^n-b  (10),  at  last 
HanpaBJi§Hie,  h,  direction 
Hanp6xHB'b  (50),  but,  on  the  contrary; 

{prep,  with  gen.),  opposite 
napdwb,  bi,  I  (27),  people 
nacxoriiuiii  (Par.  128),  present;  real 
HaxdflKa,  H  (53),  a  find 
Hai^ao,  a  (28),  beginning 
Ham-b  (7),  our,  ours 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


223 


He  (1),  not 

h66o,  iieSec^  (7),  sky,  heaven 
iier6,  form  used  for  ero  after  prepositions 
Hen^BHo  (41),  recently,  not  long  since 
He^-tjiH,  H  (43),  week 
H6>KejiH=q-feMTb  (Par.  194),  than 
He3HaK6Mbitt,  unknown,  strange 
HeKpaciiBbitt  (9),  ugly,  not  pretty 
Hejifcsji  (Par.  41),  (it  is)  impossible 
HeMH6ro  (2),  a  little,  not  much,  some- 
what 
HeM^=eM:('  after  prep. 
Henpijixejib,  h  (66),  enemy 
HenpifiTHuft  (Par.  116),  unpleasant 
HecMOTpji  Ha  {ace.)  (43),  in  spite  of 
HeciAcTie,  h  (26),  misfortune 
HecMdcTHbiti  (28),  unfortunate,  unhappy 
He  t6  (55),  if  not  that,  or  else 
HeyjK^JiH   (15),   surely  not,  can  it  be  ? 

is  it  possible  that  ? 
Heyq^Hie  {or  be)  (7),  ignorance 
HeyqcHMii  (55),  ignorant 
H64ero  (53)=H'feT'b  naqerd,  qxo   (qer6), 

nothing  of  which 
H^q-feM-B      (53)=H'feT'b      HHqer6,     q'feMi., 

nothing  whereby 
HHrn-fe  (8),  nowhere 
HiiJKe,  lower 

HH3Kitt  (30),  low,  not  high 
HHKaKdit,  no  sort  of 
HHKorjii  (3),  never 
HHKOJiatt  {gen.  &h),  Nicholas 
hhkt6  (Par.  47,  E),  no  one 
HHKyji&,  to  nowhere 
HHM-b  (ct  HHMT.)  (9)  tnstr.  of  oHt,  him 
HiiMH  (cT.  HiiMH)  (9)  instr.  of  oHii,  them 
HHXT.,  see  Par.  126 
Hwqerd  (6),  gen.  of  Hnqxd,  nothing;  (^to) 

HHqero  (34),  it  does  not  matter 
HHqT6  (Par.  47,  E),  nothing 
HO  (2),  but 
HOBBift  (34),  new 
HaJK-b,  li  (40),  knife 
HocHJibmHKT.,  H,  bearer 
h6ci.,  ik  (16),  nose 
Hdqb,  H  (ett)  (/.)  (17),  night ;  H6qbK)  (Par. 

68),  by  night 
HorfSpb,  li  (m.).  Ill  (47),  November 
Hy  (54),  well 
HyMKHBitt  (29),  necessary ;  mh*  HyatHo,  I 

need 
H*MeuKiii,  German 
H-iMeni.,  Mubi,  German 
n-fecKOJiBKle  {adj.),  a  few,  some 
H-fecKOJibKo  {with  gen.)  (40),  a  few,  some 


H-fexTb  (6),  no,  not,  there  is  not 
HfiHH,  H  (12),  children's  nurse 


o,  66o, 061. ( 1 0),conceming, about  {prep,); 

against  {ace.) 
66a,  66*  (Par.  176  {d)\  both 
66jiaKo,  A,  cloud 
66pa3'b,    H   (Par.   115)    form,    manner, 

image;  KaKiiM-b  66pa30M'b?  in  what 

manner  ?  how  ? 
o6MKnoB6HHo  (9),  usually 
o6MKHOB6HHMtt,  usual,  customary 
66*,  fern,  of  66a 
oe-feat,  H  (34),  dinner;  nocjit  o&kjvBLy  in 

the  afternoon 
oaecTb,  OBCii,  III  (6),  oats 
OBu^,  -^w  (21),  sheep 
orop6HT.,  M  (3),  kitchen -garden 
oflHHHajmaxb  (Par.  148),  eleven 
omiH-b,  «H^,  6,    li  {m.    and  w.),  i  (/.) 

(Par.  107  (6)),  one,  a  certain,  sole, 

alone 
oHH^HtHbi  (4),  once 
onH&KOJK'b  (46),  however 
63epo,  a  or  epa  (48),  lake 
okh6,  -^a  (9),  window 
6KOJ10  (Par.  181  (c)  {gen.),  about,  nearly 
OKOHq&xejibHo,  finally,  definitively 
OKp6cxHocxb,  H  (/.)  (40),  environs 
oKxri6pb,  li  (m.).  Ill  (47),  October 
oji6Hb,  H  (m.)  (5),  stag 
oHi.,  OH&,  6,  li  (i)  (2,  12,  Par.  126),  he, 

she,  it,  they 
onacnbitt,  dangerous 
ocejix.,  cjiii.  III  (6),  ass 
6ceHb,  H  (/.)  (17),  autumn 
ocxajibH6fl  (5^,  remaining 
6cxpbift  (40)  ^^^ 
0x6111.,  xniii,  r^^^,  father 
oxKyna  (19),  wheni 
oxqer6  (28),  wherefoT^^^yhy 
ox-b,  6x0  {gen.)  (Par.  70)VaHpfclrom,  from 
o(|)Hu6pT.,  bi  or  ^,  I  or  II,  01 
oqeBiiflHO  (31),  evidently 
6qeHb  (3),  very 

n 

n^jieHTb,  abnw  (29),  finger 

nanHp6ca,  w  (39),  cigarette 

n^peHb,  pHH  (31),  (peasant)  lad 

napyc-b,  6,  II,  sail 

n&cnopx'b,  M  or  6  (Par.  146),  passport 

n6pBbiii  (Par.  166),  first 

nep6«HHH  {fern,  adj.)  (24),  ante-room,  hall 


224 


KUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


n6pejti>  (Par.  44)  (ace,  instr.),  before, 

in  front  of 
nepcKJi^HHHa,  bi,  cross-beam 
nep6,  nepbH  (10),  feather,  pen 
nepi^TKa,  h  (50),  glove 
necT.,  ncbi  (49),  dog 
n6Hb,  H  (6ft)  (/.)  (46),  stove 
niiBO,  k  (43),  beer 
nHCbM6,  ^a  (44),  letter 
miTbe,  ri  (7),  drink 
niima,  H  (35),  food 
nji&MH,  CH^  (w.)  (Par.  219),  flame 
nji^Tbe,  H  (besT.)  (43),  clothing 
nji6MH,  uenk  (Par.  219),  race,  breed 
njicM^iHHiiK'b,  H  (29),  nephew 
njiBMHHHHua,  M  (29),  niece 
nji6Ti»,  M,  raft 
nji6xo  (2),  badly 
njiox6ft  (1),  bad 
njidmajxb,  H  (/.)  (50),  square,  (market-) 

place 
no  (Par.  87),  {dat.)  on,  along,  according 

to,  etc. ;  {ace. )  up  to,  as  far  as,  at  the 

rate  of  (Par.  183);  (Par.  69)  {prep.) 

after 
no-^HrjiiftcKH  (3),  in  English 
noBapHxa,  n  (Par.  69),  cook 
noBepxHocTb,  h  (/.),  surface 
noBTopeHie,  h  (22),  repetition 
norojia  (18),  weather 
n6j;ji'b  {gen.),  beside,  near 
noapiy^ra,  h  (14),  friend  (/.) 
noH-b,  ndflo  {ace,  instr.)  (Par.  127),  under 
nom^jiyii  {imperat.  of  noHcajiOBaxb)  (Par. 

216),  if  you  like,  as  far  as  I  am 

concerned,  perhaps 
nojK^jiyficTa  (Par.  216),  please 
ndaflHitt  (24),  late 
n63>Ke  (32),  later 
noaiiniH,  h  (ift),  position 
noK^,  as  long  as ;  noK^  ne,  tUl,  until 
noKdfiHLift    (48),     peaceful;    deceased; 

(c)noK6ftHoft  Hdqn!  (56),  good-night ! 
noKopHo  (38),  humbly,  obediently 
n6jie,  H  (18),  field 
nojiesHbift  (48),  useful 
n6jiHo  (54),  stop,  that  is  enough 
n6jiHbiH  (54),  full,  complete 
nojiyime,  better,  in  a  better  manner 
nojiHaca ,  gen.  nojiyiaca  {m. ) ,  half -an-hour 
no  JIT.,  6  (10),  floor 
nojii,  H,  sex 

noM-feiuHKi,,  n  (38),  land-ownei* 
noHea'feabHHK'b,  h  (34),  Monday 
nop^,  -^bi  (52),  time ;  nopa,  it  is  time 


nopdn-b,  H  (17),  vice 

nopTH6ft,  MH  (30),  taflor 

no-pyecKH  (3),  in  Russian 

ndcji-b  {gen.)  (32),  after 

nocji-tnHift  (36),  latter,  last 

nocT6jib,  H  (/.)  (15),  bed 

nocyna  (/.  coll.)  (46),  vessels,  utensils 

noTOMy,  therefore 

noTOMy  mo  (8),  for,  because 

noTdM-b  (7),  thereafter,  then 

no-(J)paHny3CKn  (5),  in  French 

noxBajid,  ii  (19),  praise 

noxdAi,  bi  (56),  campaign 

noqeMy  (6),  wherefore,  why 

nouTH  (18),  almost,  nearly 

no^TOMy  (22),  therefore 

npaB«a  (32),  truth 

npaBHHBocTb  (39),  truthfulness,  upright- 
ness 

np^BHJiBHHtt  (32),  regular,  correct 

np^BO  (32),  really,  truly 

np^Bbift,  right,  just 

npasflHHK-b,  H  (54),  festival 

np^3flHHimbitt  (48),  festival  {adj.) 

npaKTHHHutt,  practical 

npeBocxoAHbiii,  excellent 

npeHJiojKeHie,  h,  offer,  proposal 

npeflMexi,,  h,  object 

npfejKfle  {prep,  with  gen.  ;  adv.)  (32), 
before;  npe;Kj;eBcer6(46),firstof  all 

npn  {prep.)  (Par.  45),  at,  near,  in  the 
time  of 

npiiSbiJib,  H  (/.)  (50),  profit 

npHK^aqHK'b,  h,  I  (21),  shop-assistant, 
clerk 

npHJiejKHMft  (19),  diligent 

npHM-fep-b,  bi,  example;  na  npHM-fepi 
(39),  for  example 

npHpdfla  (55),  nature 

npHTdK-b,  H  (48),  confluent,  tributary 

npHx6>KaH  (/.  adj.)  (55),  ante-room, 
corridor 

npirtxejib,  h  (Par.  194),  friend 

npiflXHbift  (Par.  116),  pleasant 

npo  {ace.)  (Par.  100) =o  {prep.),  concern- 
ing, about 

npocxiixe!  {imperat.  of  npocxiixb)  (Par. 
216),  excuse  me  !  pardon  me  ! 

np6cxo  (55),  simply 

npocxoft  (Par.  88  (6)),  simple 

upduijibiii  (34),  past ;   last,  preceding 

npomattxe!  {imperat.  of  npom^Tb)  (Par. 
216),  farewell ! 

npHM6a  (Par.  192),  upright 

npHHHKi.,  H,  gingerbread 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


225 


nxiiixa,  Bi  (12),  bird  ^ 

nTiiHKa,  H  (43),  little  bird 

nycxdft,  empty;  vain 

nycTiiHH,  H  (48),  desert,  wilderness 

nmemina  (34),  wheat 

n-fecHH,  H  (43),  song 

n-fiuiKdwh  (44),  on  foot 

nHTHc6TMti  (Par.  184),  five-hundredth 

nHTH&anaTfc  (Par.  148),  fifteen 

n^THHna,  u  (47),  Friday 

HHTuti  (Par.  166),  fifth 

HHTi.  (36),  five 

HHTbHecriT-B  (Par.  150),  fifty 

HHTbcdTi,  (Par.  155),  five  hundred 


paSdxa,  bi  (48),  work 

paSdTHHKt,  H,  I  (5),  workman 

pa66Hia  (48),  workman;   working  (day) 

paBHojtymHBitt,  indifferent 

p^BHwtt,  equal 

pkR-b,  a,  o,  BI  (Par.  188),  glad 

p^aB-fc  (44),  perhaps  ;  interrog.  particle 

paacKda-B,  bi  (56),  tale,  narration 

p^a-B,  li,  time,  occasion ;  (adv.)  (4),  once 

p^na,  BI,  wound 

paneHBifl  (50),  wounded 

P^HHitt  (Par.  89),  early 

pdHo  (32),  early 

p^Hbme,  pka-he  (32),  earlier 

peSeHOK-B,  HKa,  Grfxa  (Par.  229),  child 

PHcynoK-B,  HKH  (38),  sketch,  drawing 

p66Kili  (5),  timid 

p6bho  (46),  exactly 

poHH6ft  (14),  related,  native,  dear 

poKHecTBd  (28),  Christmas 

poKB  (/.)  (34),  rye 

pdaoBBiit  (16),  pink 

Poccfa  (34),  Russia 

pyS^mna,  h  (43),  shirt 

pySjiB,  A{m.)  (9),  rouble 

pyK^,  -^H  (29),  hand,  arm 

pyccKifi  (13),  Russian 

pyH6ii,  BH  (b^b-b).  III  (43),  brook,  stream 

pyifceMi.,  pyqBHMH  (43),  in  torrents 

PMJKifi  (16),  tan( -coloured) 

p-tHKitt  (Par.  128),  rare,  infrequent 

p-feKd,  -«-H  (16),  river 

pAjiOM-b  c-B  (31),  beside,  in  one  row  with 

pjia-B,  6  (31),  row 


c45jih,  h  (40),  sabre 
c^-B,  ^  (3),  garden 


cdMKa,  H  (14),  female  animal;  hind 
caMOB^p-B,  BI  (55),  tea-urn,  lit.  self-boiler 
caM-B,  k,  5,  H  (emphatic)  (22),  self,  same 
c^MBitt  (Par.  186),  very,  same;  prefixed  to 

adjective  it  has  the  force  of  extremely, 

most 
can6r'B,  li,  III  (46),  boot 
capAfi,  H  (5),  barn,  cart-shed 
CBHa^Hie,    H,     re-union,    meeting;     no 

cBHH^HiH  (Par.  216),  au  revoir 
cBHii^u-B,  gen.  sing,  nq^  (50),  lead 
CBHHBri,  ^H  (eft)  (37),  pig 
CB6tt,  A,  e,  A  (Par.  104),  one's  own 
cB-ixjiBiii  (17),  light,  bright 
CB-fexjioe     BocKpecdHfce     (53),     Easter 

Sunday 
CB-fexT,,  I  (7),  light ;  world 
cB'fe'i6,  -^H,  candle 
CBflx6fl:,  holy 
ce6;i  (reflex.)  (Par.   103),  self,  of  self; 

cesi,  to  oneself 
cer6jmH  (8),  to-day 
ce«BM6ft  (Par.  166),  seventh 
cefi,  ci;i,  e,  6  (Par.  106),  this 
ceiiqac-B  (27),  at  once 
cejid,  ejia  (7),  village  (with  church) 
ceMHc6xBiii  (Par.  184),  seven-hundredth 
ccMH^auaxB  (Par.  148),  seventeen 
ceMB  (36),  seven 
ceMBHecHxi  (Par.  150),  seventy 
ceMBcox'B,  seven  hundred 
ceMBji,  -^H  (6fl)  (28),  family 
cenxiiepB,  A,  III  (47),  September 
cepaiixBitt  (21),  angry,  violent 
c6pAue,  &  (44),  heart 
cepe5p6  (Par.  194),  silver 
cep65pHHBitt  (54),  of  silver 
cepe«iiHa,  u,  middle 
cepn-B,  li  (18),  sickle 
cecxpA,  ecxpH  (12),  sister 
ca&jin  (adv.   and  prep,  with  gen.)  (56), 

from  behiad 
CHTdpa,  BI  (39),  cigar 
c^jiBiiBitt  (1),  strong 
c^Hitt  (7),  blue 

CHpox^,  -^H  (m.  or  f.)  (28),  orphan 
CHpdxKa,  H  (28),  Uttle  orphan 
CHpoxcxBo  (43),  orphanhood 
CKasKa,  H  (39),  fairy-tale 
cKaM6ttKa,  H  (19),  bench,  seat 
CKapjiaxikiia  (50),  scarlet  fever 
ck6jibko  (6),  how  much,  how  many 
CK6po  (32),  soon 
ckp6mhocxb  (/.)  (39),  modesty 
cKp6MHBift  (39),  modest 


226 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


cKyHiiLitt,  sad,  wearisome 

cjia6Mti  (1),  weak 

cjiesA,  e3H  (43),  tear 

cjiiiniKOM'b  (39),  too 

cjiyr&,  -^H  (w.)  (65),  servant 

cjiywKdHKa,  H  (12),  maid,  servant 

cjiy>K6a,  M  (56),  service 

cjiyqall,  H  (Par.  61),  case,  occasion,  op- 
portunity ;  BO  BCHKOM-b  cay^iat  (41), 
in  any  case 

cmJiraHHii,  audible 

cji-feflyiomitt,  following 

cji-fendti,  Tblind 

CMepxi.,  H  (6a)  (/.)  (48),  death 

CM-fejibiii  (56),  bold 

CMtmndit,  ridiculous,  laughable;  eiviy 
cM-femnd,  he  is  inclined  to  laugh 

CHa^Ajia  (22),  first,  to  begin  with 

CH6Ba  (16),  again,  anew 

CH-feri.,  &  (42),  snow 

00=01. 

ooS^Ka,  H  (12),  dog 
oo66ii,  6io,  instr.  case  of  ceQA,  self 
ooBo-tMi.  HO  (H-fext)  (42),  not  at  all 
oojKaji^nie  (8),  regret;  Kt  ooHtaji-feHiio 

(8),  unfortunately 
ooaHAHie,  consciousness 
cojiaaxoKiJl  (56),  soldierly 
oojin^xx,,  Bi  (XT.)  (36),  soldier 
o6jiHu;e,  a  (Par.  61),  sun 
oopoKOBdtt  (Par.  171),  fortieth 
c6poK'b  (Par.  150),  forty 
ooxi,,  gen.  of  oxo,  hundred 
odxbiii  (Par.  171),  hundredth 
COX&,  -^H  (18),  Russian  plough 
on&jibHJi,  H  (em.)  (38),  bedroom 
onoK6iiHBitt  (66),  quiet,  still,  restful 
on-fejiuii  (7),  ripe 

op^ay  (49),  together,  at  one  time 
opena,  -^bi  (47),  Wednesday 
cpejiHHa,  bi,  middle 
cxaKdii-b,  bi  (39),  glass,  tumbler 
oxapuK-b,  li,  III  (3),  old  man 
cxapHM  (53),  days  of  old 
cx^pooxa,  bi  (m.)  (39),  village  elder 
cx&pooxB  (/.),  old  age 
oxapyxa,  h  (14),  old  woman 
cxapyraKa  (53),  old  wifie 
cx4pmiit  (19),  elder,  eldest 
ox^pbitt  (1),  old 
oxo  (Par.  150),  hundred 
oxoJIJi^a,  bi  (50),  capital  (city) 
0TOJi6Ban  (/.  adj.)  (38),  dining-room 
oxDji-b,  III  (9),  table 
CTdjifcKo  (40),  so  much 


oxdH-b,  M,  groaning 

oxopoH^,  6poHbi  (56),  side 

oxoxbicHHHbiii,  hundred-thousandth 

oxpaAajieu-b,  jibuu,  sufferer 

oxpanA,  -^bi  (60),  country,  land 

oxp6MH,  en^  (Par.  219),  stirrup 

oxp6riti,  strict 

cxyji-b,  oxyjiBH  (esi.)  (Par.  60),  chair 

cx-fena,  -^bi  (37),  wall 

cy666xa,  m  (47),  Saturday 

oyMpaK-b,  I,  twilight,  gloom 

o^rn,,  bi  (26),  soup 

oyp6Bbiti  (19),  rough,  severe;  dark 

oyx6fi  (21),  dry 

OH^cxie  (26),  happiness ;  no  (ki)  cq^cxlio, 

happily 
oqaoxjniBbrti  (28),  happy 
o-b,  oo  (gen.)  (Par.  44),  from,  off,  since; 

{ace. )  about   (approximately),    as ; 

(instr.)  with,  along  with 
c6hx,,  cbiHOBbH  (6ii)  (1),  son 
oiipi.,  bi  (3),  cheese 
o-feBep-b,  I  (48),  north 
o-feiviH,  cfeMOHa  (Par.  219),  seed 
c-ipbiit  (16),  grey 
ciojik  (16),  hither 


xaSAK-b,  A,  III,  tobacco 

x^itjKe  (10),  also,  likewise 

xaK6ft  (2),  such 

xaK-b  (2),  so;  xaK-b  Mki.  (36),  as  (conj.); 

He    x^K-b,   not    so,    in    the   wrong 

way 
xaM-b  (3),  there 
xBepHHfi  (23),  hard 
xBoit,  ji,  e,  Tk  (Par.  104),  thy 
xe5i  {dat.  or  prep,  o/xm)  (Par.  21),  thee 
xe6ji  (gen.  or  ace.  of  xm)  (Par.  21),  thee 
xBKyniiii  (Par.  128),  current 
xeMH6,  (it  is)  dark 
xeMHbiii  (17),  dark 
xenepb  (3),  now 
xen^nbift  (17),  warm 
xepninie  (55),  patience 
xexKa,  H  (29),  aunt 
xexpajib,  H  (/.)  (17),  copy-book 
xAxift  (30),  low,  soft,  not  loud 
xo,  neuter  of  xox-b,  that;  ne  x6,  if  not 

that,  or  else ;  xo  me,  the  same  thing ; 

xo  . . .  xo  . . .,  now . . .  then,    at    one 

time ...  at  another  time 
xo56k),  6tt,  instr.  of  xm  (9),  the© 
TOB^pmm.,  H  (9),  companion 


RUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


227 


TOB^p-b,  M,  wares,  goods 

Tor«d  (3),  then,  at  that  time 

Tord,  gen.  of  toti.,  to  (Par.  21) 

T6)Ke=T^KH<e  (10),  also 

TdJiCTtrtt,  thick 

TdJifcKo  (5),  only ;  na  h  xdjibKO  (44),  and 

that's  all;    xdjubKO  qro   (52),   just 

{tvith  past  tenses) 
TOM^,  dat.  o/TOTt,  TO  (Par.  21) 
TOTb,  Ta,  TO,  T-fe  (2,  Par.  107),  that,  the 

one 
t6tt.  jKe,  same 
T6qHo,  as  it  were 
TpaB^,  -^Bi  (21),  grass 
Tp6Tiii  (Par.  166),  third 
TpexcdTHii  (Par.  184),  three -hundredth 
Tpn  (Par.  27),  three 
TpHAuaTB  (Par.  150),  thirty 
TpHH^Huaxb  (Par.  148),  thirteen 
TpAcTa  (Par.  155),  three  hundred 
Tpy6Ka,  H  (39),  pipe 
TpyflHHii  (23),  difficult 
TpyHOJiK)6HBMtt  (18),  industrious 
Tpyflt,  li  (21),  trouble,  labour 
TpycjiHBbiii,  cowardly 
Tpyct,  H  (681.)  (49),  coward 
TYRk  (16),  thither 
Tyn6ii  (40),  blunt 
TM  (2),  thou 

TiicHqa  (Par.  155),  thousand 
TiicOTHBiit  (Par.  184),  thousandth 
TbMa  (/.),  darkness 
T-fejio,  a,  body 

T-feM-b  (9),  instr.  of  totx.,  with  that 
T-feM-b  He  M^Hte,  none  the  less 
T^cHMii,  narrow,  close 
TiopbMa,  -^bi  (44),  prison 
THHtejibifl  (23),  heavy 


y  (gen.)  (Par.  70),  at,  near,  with ;  y  nerd, 

he  has 
yatacHbitt  (27),  terrible,  frightful 
fa<e,  narrower 
yjK6  (18),  already ;  y}K6  «aBH6,  for  a  long 

time  past;  ym^  He,.no  longer 
:^H:HH'b,  bi  (36),  supper 
•yaniii  (25),  narrow 
yjiHua,  bi  (21),  street 
yMHuii  (1),  intelligent 
yM-fenie,  understanding,  capacity 
yHH3iiTejibHbitt,  humiliating 
yp6KT.,  H  (18),  lesson 
yc^jSbSa,  u  (38),  farm ;  estate 


^Tpo,  &  (18),  morning;  ;^TpoM'b,  in  the 

morning 
yq^cTie,  share,  part,  interest 
yqemiK-b,  6,  III  (19),  pupil 
yqcHHua,  m  (19),  pupil  (/.) 
yqeHbiit,  learned  man 
yq6Hbe,  h  (7),  learning,  teaching,  study 
yiiijiraite,  a  (Par.  73  (a)),  school 
yqiijimuHbia  (36),  connected  with  the 

school 
yqiiTejib,  Af  II  (19),  teacher 
yHHxejibHHqa,  h  (19),  lady-teacher 
yfeajj-b,  H  (42),  circuit,  district,  canton 
yibTHbitt  (45),  comfortable 

<D 

^cBp^jib,  li  (m.).  Ill  (47),  February 
Op&HulH  (34),  France 
^paHuj^acKitt  (13),  French 
^panuyai,,  bi  (53),  Frenchman 


xBocTi.,  6  (16),  tail 

xiiTpMti  (41),  sly 

xikmHbifi  (41),  ravenous 

xji-ie-b,  M  (1),  bread 

xjrkd-b,  k,  com 

xoB^iKH-b,  xo3jieBa,  host,  master 

xoji6pa  (27),  cholera 

xojidAHbiti  (17),  cold 

xopomift  (4),  good 

xopom6  (2),  (it  is)  well 

xp46pbift  (5),  brave 

xpHCTlamiH'b,  ^iie  (Par.  230),  Christian 

xpHCTdBT.,  a,  o,  hi  (Par.  181  (6)),  of  Christ 

xyH6ti,  bad 

x^nmili  (Par.  195),  worse,  worst 

x^jKe,  worse 

^ 

napiina,  M  (14),  czarina 

n^pcTBo,  a  (48),  reign,  empire 

Etapb,  ±  (5),  czar 

nsiTi,  ^  (7),  colour 

qB-iT-b,  li,  flower 

n^pKOBb,  KBH  (6ii)  (/.)  (19),  church 

n^jiufl  (28),  whole 


q^,  Haii,  II  (43),  tea 

q&CTo  (4),  often 

q^CTb,  H  (6h)  (/.)  (40),  part 

H^cb,  li  (Par.  128),* hour;  but  nsa,  xpn, 

qenipe  qac^,  2,  3, 4  hours  or  o'clock ; 

oHt  Ha  qac^x-b  (56),  he  is  on  guard 


228 


EUSSIAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


q&mKa,  h  (43),  cup 

qer6,  gen.  of  vlto  (Far.  21) 

qeii,  hi>j4,  e,  6  (Par.  106),  whose? 

qejioB-feKT.  {l)fPl  JiionH  (42),  man,  people 
{after  the  numerals  5,  6,  7,  etc.,  in  the 
nom.  or  ace.  use  ^ejioB-feK'B) 

qcM^,  dat.  of  ito  (Par.  21) 

qeMt  (10),  prep,  of  hto 

q^pea-B  {ace.)  (42),  across,  through,  after 
the  lapse  of 

qepHLitt  (1),  black 

q^cTHBiit,  honest 

qcTB^pn.,  li.  III  (47),  Thursday 

qexBepTbift  (Par.  166),  fourth 

q^TBepTb,  H  (6ft)  (/.)  (181  (c)),  quarter 

qexiipe  (Par.  27),  four 

qexiiipecTa  (Par.  155),  four  hundred 

qeTHpexc6TMfi  (Par.  184),  four-hundredth 

qexiipnajmaTi.  (Par.  148),  fourteen 

qHHdBHHKt,  H  (39),  ofiSicial 

qncjid,  -^a  (40),  number 

qiicTHft  (13),  clean 

qx^Hie,  H,  reading 

qxo  {pron.  and  conj.)  (2),  which,  what; 
that;  why 

qx6,  that  which,  what 

qx66M,  qxce-b  (10),  that,  in  order  that 

qx6-jiH5o,  anything;  qxo-HH6:^Hb  (Par. 
47,  E),  something  or  anything  j  qxo- 
xo,  something 

q^BcxBo,  a  (31),  feeling 

qyAHutt,  wonderful 

qyjKdft  (28),  strange,  not  one's  own 

qyjidKt,  JiKi'i,  III  (44),  stocking 

qyxb,  scarcely 

q-feMTb,  instr.  case  of  qxo,  conj.  (9),  where- 
with; than  (Par.  194) 

m 

majiyH-b,  li.  III  (55),  scamp 


raecxHc6xHft  (Par.  184),  six-hundredth 
mecxiiAHuaxB  (Par.  148),  sixteen 
mecxdft  (Par.  166),  sixth 
luecxb  (36),  six 

mecxBHecHxi.  (Par.  150),  sixty 
m^Hy  H  (12),  neck 
miipe,  broader 
mHp6Kia  (25),  broad 
mnant  or  mK^$i>,  li  (49),   press,  cup- 
board 
mndjia,  h  (18),  school 
m:^xKa,  H  (56),  joke 

m 

mendKi.,   HKii  or  menrfxa  (Ex.   16,  C), 

puppy 
mn  (/.  pi.)  (56),  cabbage  soup 


acx^MHi,,  M,  print,  engraving 
^xoro,  gen.  of  i^xoxi,,  5xo  (Par.  21) 
5xoMy,  dat.  of  ^xoxi,  dxo  (Par.  21) 
5x0X1,,  i^xa,  o,  H  (2,    Par.    107),   this, 
that 


K) 


i5ri.  (48),  South 


H  (2),  I 

}i6jiOKO,  H  (7),  apple 

HsiiKt,  A,  III  (23),  tongue,  language 

Ama,  u  (54),  pit,  hole 

HHB^pb,  ri,  III  (47),  January 

fipKitt  (21),  bright-coloured 

ripMapKa,  H  (27),  a  fair 

jicHbift  (32),  bright,  clear 

HqM6Hb  (w.).  Ill  (6),  barley 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


The  two  preceding  vocabularies  give  more  detailed  information  as  to  forms  of 
verbs  and  nouns  and  to  pronunciation.  This  vocabulary  gives,  quite  frequently, 
only  one  form  for  each  verb — the  infinitive  of  the  imperfective  aspect ;  where  two 
verbs  are  given  separated  only  by  a  comma,  the  second  form  is  perfective.  Of 
nouns  the  nominative,  singular  and  plural,  is  given. 


abandon,  to,  ocTaBJuiTb ;  noKHn^Tb 

ABC,  ^36yKa 

able,  to  be,  Mca ;  ywkji, 

about,  o  {prep.);  npo  (ace);  no  {dat); 

6KOJIO  (gen.) 
about,  to  be  put,  CeanoKdHTbCH 
above,  over,  naHi.  {instr.) 
abroad,     aa     rpaniiny     (motion);     aa 

rpamiueio  (rest) 
abrupt,  Kpyxdft 
absently,  MamHH^jn,HO 

accept,  to,  npHHHM&TB 

according  to,  no  (dat.) 

across,  q6pe3'b,^pe3i>  (ace);  CKBoab  {ace.) 

act,  to,  nocTynaxb 

active,  fl-feHxejibHwii 

activity,  H-feHxejibHocTb  (/.) 

admit,  to,  nycKaxb 

adopt,  to,  B3Hxb  {perf.)  ki  ceS-t 

adult,  B3p6cjiLift 

affair,  H-fejio,  &;  B6mb  (/.),  h 

affirm,  to,  yxBepjKflaxb 

afraid,  to  be,  see  to  fear 

after,  ndcji-fe  {gen.);  no  {prep.) 

afternoon,  ndcjit  06'jbHa 

again,  cndsa;  onjixb 

against,  npdxHBt  {gen.) 

age,  see  century 

age  (old),  cxapocTb  (/.) 

agitate,  to,  bojihob^xb 

ago,  xoMy  Haa^H-b 

Alexander,  AjieKC^Ewp-b 

Alexandra,  A;ieKc4HHpa 

alive,  moBda 

all,  Becb,  BCfl,  see,  Bc-fe 


all,  not  at,  ndBce  nifex-b  (ne);    coBcfeM'b 

H-fcx-b  (ne) 
all,  that  is,  aa  h  xdjibKO 
almost,  noqxii 
alone,  oniiH'b 
along,  no  {dat.) 

along  with,  ex.,  pji^oMi.  ex.  {instr.) 
aloud,  rp6MKO 
alphabet,  ^36yKa 
already,  yHt6 
also,  x^KJKc ;  x6jKe ;  h 
always,  BcerHd 
amiable,  jiio6e3Hbift;  M^Jiutt 
among,  m^mjiy  {gen.  and  ivMr. ) 
and,  h;  a  (=but) 
angry,  cepniixbift 
animal,  jKHBdxHoe,  uh 
another,   npyroft;    one  another,  npyn 

Apyra;     to    one     another,     jtpyrb 

«P:^ry;    with  one  another,    Hpyrt 

ex,  np:y'roMx> 
answer,  to,  oxB'feq&xb  {dat.  of  person; 

Ha  with  ace.  of  question) 
anything,  Mxo-HH6^wb 
anywhere,  rfl-fe-KHG^flb 
appears,  it,  KajKcxcH 
apple,  hSjioko,  h 
approach,  to,  npHSjiHHt^xbCH 
April,  anp-tjib  (w.) 
arm,  pyK&,  -^h 
arm-chair,  Kp6cjio,  a 
army,  B6ttcK0,  k 
arrange,  to,  ycxp^HBaxb 
arrive,  to,  npHxoniixb ;  npi-txaxb ;  (attain 

to)  «ocxiiraxb 
arrived,  he,  npnmejn. ;  npi-fexajix. 
as,  KaKx.;  xaKX>KaKx>;  instr.  case  of  nouns 


230 


ENGLISH-KUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


as  it  were,  T6qHo 

ask,  to,  npociixb  (request) ;  to  ask  (ques- 
tions), cnp^uiHBaxb,  cnpociiTb 

aspect,  BiiAt,  m 

ass,  oceji-B,  cjiii 

at,  y  {gen. ) ;  npn  {prep. ) ;  bt.  ( = in,  prep. ) ; 
Ha  (=on,  prep.);  aa  (=for,  behind, 
ace.) 

at  once,  ceHMkcb 

ate,  -feji-b ;  Kyniajit 

attentive,  BHHMaxejibHHtt 

audible,  cjniiimuft 

August,  ^BrycT-b 

aunt,  TCTKa,  h 

author,  aBTopb,  bi;  nnc^xejib  (m.),  h 

autumn,  6ceHb  (/.),  h 

await,  to,  jKn^xb 

away  from,  ox-b  {gen.) 


backwards,  Bsajix. 

bad,  HypH6it;  xyA6ii;  njiox611 

badly,  nji6xo 

bank  (shore),  Cepen,,  k 

banner,  sh^mh,  ena 

barley,  H^iMeub  (m.) 

bam,  capati,  h 

be,  to,  6bixb ;  HaxoHiixbCfl ;  to  be  usually, 

6biBaxb ;  to  be  (of  health),  noatHB^xb 
bear,  uejua-kab  (w.),  h 
bearer,  HocikjibmHK'b,  h 
beast,  wild,  sB-fepb  (w.),  h 
beat,  to,  Snxb 

beautiful,  KpaciiBbift;  npcKp^cHbitt 
because,  noxoMy  mo 
become,  to,  (c)H'fejiaxbCH;  cxauoBiixbCH 
bed,  nocxejib  (/.),  h 
bed,  to  go  to,  see  Par.  143,  Voc.  46 
bedroom,  cnajibHH,  h 
bedstead,  KpoB&xb  (/.),  h 
beer,  niiBO,  k 
before,  {time)  np^mjie  {gen.);  no  {gen.); 

{space)  nepeab  {instr.  or  ace.) 
beg,  to,  npocHXb 
begin,  to,  HaiHH^xb;  cxaxb 
beginning,  Han^Jio,  a 
behave,  to,  nocxynaxb,  nocxyraixb 
behind,  aa  {ace.  or  instr.) 
behind,  from,  c3kjm  {gen.) 
believe,  to,  B^pnxb  {dat.) 
belong,  to,  npHnaajieHtaxb 
bench  (seat),  cKaM^fiKa,  h 
bench  by  the  stove,  jiem^HKa,  h 
bend,  to,  {trans.)  narHC^xb;    {intrans.) 

HarH6^xbCfl 


beside,  b63Ji*  {gen.);  priaoMb  cb  {instr.) 
besides,    {prep.)    Kp6M'fe    {gen.);    {adv.) 

KpdM-fe  xor6 
best,  jiy^miM;  HaHJiyimitt 
betake  oneself,  to,  nanpaBJijixbCH 
better,  ji^imitt 

better  {adv.),  Jiyqrae;  nojiyHrae 
between,  Memny  {instr.  or  gen.) 
bewail,  to,  (no)nJi4Kaxb 
beyond,  see  behind 
big,  6ojibm6a 

bird,  nxHua,  h;  little  bird,  nxj^qKa,  h 
bit  (piece),  Kyc6Kb,  CKJk 
bitter,  rdpbKiti ;  more  bitter,  r6pHe 
black,  qepHHti 
blacksmith,  see  smith 
blind,  cji'fen6tt 
blizzard,  Mex6jib  (/.),  h 

blood,  KpOBb  (/.) 

blow,  to,  ayxb 

blue,  chhIh 

blunt,  xyn61i 

blush,  to,  KpacirfeTb 

board,  nocKa,  -^h 

boat,  ji6aKa,  h 

body,  x-fejio,  & 

bold,  cM-tjiuti 

bone,  Kocxb  (/.),  h 

book,  KHiira,  h 

boot,  candrb,  li 

bom,  to  be,  po>K«axbCH,  poHJiTbCH 

both,  66a,  66* 

bottom,  AHo,  H6HbH 

bought,  he,  Kynnjib 

boy,  M^JIb^HKb,  H 

brain,  M63rb,  nk 

brave,  xpA6pbttt 

bread,  xji-teb,  u 

breakfast,  a^BxpaKb,  h 

breakfast,  to,  a^BxpaKaxb 

breast,  rpy«b  (/.),  h 

bridge,  M6cxb,  ii 

bright,  cB-txjibiii;  HCHHft;  ftpKifl 

bring,  to,  npHHocnxb  {impf.);  npHHecxii 

bring  in,  to,  BHociixb  (carry);  BBOjtHXb 

(lead) 
bring  near,  to,  npuSjiuHt^xb 
British,  6pHxaHCKitt 
broad,  inupdKiili 
broader,  ni^pe 
brook,  pyH6ft,  bik 
brother,  ep^xb,  bH 
brown  (tan),  pi&Htia 
bucket,  see  pail 


ENGLISH-EUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


231 


build,  to,  CTp6HTb;  bhtb  (nest) 
building,  anknie,  h 
Bulgaria,  BojirapiH 
Bulgarian,     Sojir^pHH-B,     Ape; 

(/.),  SojirapKa,  h 
burgher,  rpasKaaniiH'B,  kne 
burn,  to,  mem, 
bury,  to,  sapuBaTB 
business,  ^-ijio,  A 
busy  oneself,  to,  aaHHMdTtcH 
but,  ho;  a 
butter,  M^cjio,  & 
buy,  to,  noKyn^TB,  KymiTB 
by,  instr.  case  of  noun 
by  far,  ropAaao 


cabbage  soup,  mn  (/.  pi.) 

call,  to,  sBaTb ;  HasuB^Tt 

called,  to  be,  HaabiBaxbCH 

came,  npnuieji-B  ;  npi-fexajit 

camel,  BepSjnoat,  u 

campaign,  noxdat,  bi 

can  (verb),  motb;  yM-fexb 

candle,  cB-fena,  ^h 

canton,  see  district 

capital  (city),  cTOjiiiiia,  bi 

care,  aaddxa,  bi 

carried  away,  he,  otbcs-b 

carry,  to,  HociiTB  (indef.);  aecrA  {def.) ; 

B036TB  (in  a  vehicle) 
cart-shed,  capatt,  h 
case  (occasion),  cjiyqait,  h;  in  that  case, 

b-b  TaK6M'B  cjiy^a-fe ;  in  any  case,  bo 

BCjiKOMB  cji;^qa'fe 
cast  off  (unmoor),  to,  OTqdJiHBaxt 
castle,  a^MOKi.,  mkh 
cat,  K6mKa,  h 
cause,  to,  aacTaBJijiTB 
century,  b-^k-b,  h  or  A 
certain,  oHto-B;  HaB-fecTHBifl 
chair,  cxyji-B,  bh;  (arm-chair),  Kp6cjio,  a 
chalk,  M-feji-B 
chatter,  to,  6o:ixAxb 
cheap,  neraeBuft 
cheaper,  jiemeBJie 
cheese,  ciip-B,  u 

child,  AHxti ;  peSenoK-B  {see  Par.  229) 
childhood,  n'txexBO 
children,  n-fexn;  peSiixa 
cholera,  xoji6pa 
Christ,  of  {adj.),  xphcx6b'b 
Christian,  xpHcxiamiH'B,  Ane 
Christmas,  PojKflecxB6  (Xphcx6bo) 
church,  aepKOBB,  kbh  (/.) 


cigar,  CHr&pa,  m 
cigarette,  nanHp6ca,  m 
citizen,  rpajKflanAH'B,  Ana 

class,  KJIACCB,  BI 

class,  connected  with,  kjiAcchuK 

clean,  qncxBiii 

clean,  to,  iiicxHXB 

clear,  rfcHutt;  CB'jbxjiBi^t 

clerk,  npHKasHHR-B,  h 

climb,  to,  ji-feaxB  ;  to  climb  into,  BJi-feaAxt 

close  (stuffy),  aynraBitt 

close,  to,  see  to  shut 

clothing,  njiaxBC,  a 

cloud,  66jiaKO,  A 

coin,  MOH6xa,  u 

cold,  xoji6«HBitt 

cold,  with,  ox-B  x6jiony 

colour,  nB-fex-B,  A 

come,  to,  npHxoAiixB ;  npi'l^aHt^xB  (not  on 

foot) 
come  out,  to,  biIxojihxb 
comfortable,  cosy,  yibxHutt 
coming  {adj.),  6yHymi» 
command,  to,  see  to  order 
command   of,   to    be    in,   KOMaH«oBaxB 

{instr.) 
companion,  xoBapHmt,  h 
compel,  to,  aacxaBjijixB 
compelled  (obliged),  «6ji>KHBitt 
complete,  ndjiHBiii ;  u,-hjihiii 
completely,  coBepra^HHo 
conceal,  to,  CKpBiBaxB 
conceive,  to,  aa^yiviBiBaxB  {see  Voc.  28) 
concerned,  as  far  as  I  am,  nojKdJiytt 
conquer,  to,  noS-featjiAxB 
consciousness,  coaHaHie 
consider,  to,  noHHxaxB 
considered,  to  be,  no^HxaxBCH 
contemplate,  to,  cMoxp-fexb 
continual,  eeanpecxAmiBiii 
continue,  to,  npoHOJiH^AxB 
contrary,  on  the,  nanpdxHBB;  naoSopdx'B 
convey,    to,  BoaiixB ;    Bcaxii;     (carry), 

HociixB ;  iiecxrit 
cook  (/.),  noBapiixa,  h 
copeck,  Kon6aKa,  h  ;  little  copeck,  mite, 

Kon6eiKa,  h 
copy-book,  xexpaj;B  (/.),  h 
corn,  xji-fee-B,  & 
corps  (officers'),  KopnycB,  & 
correct,  np^BiuiBHBitt 
corridor,  npnxdman.  {adj.) 
cost,  to,  Cx6HXb 
cosy,  see  comfortable 
couch,  jmnkwh,  M 


232 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULAEY 


could,  he,  Mort 

count,  to,  CHHT^TI. 

country,  expand,  -^m  ;  in  the  country,  bi 

course,  of,  see  understood,  it  is 

court(yard),  «Bopi.,  6 

cover,  to,  sanptiB^TB 

cow,  KopoBa,  M 

coward,  tp:^ci>,  m 

cowardly,  xpycjiiiBMii 

crane  (bird),  wKyp&Bjit  (w.),  ^ 

crops,  JK^TBa  {/.),  M 

cross  {adj.),  ajiott 

cry,  to,  KpH»iaTi>;  nji^Kaxb  (weep) 

cunning,  xiixptitt 

cup,  q^niKa,  h 

cupboard,  uiKani.  or  nm^^b,  ii 

curiosity,  JiK)6oniixcxBO 

current  {adj.),  xsK^mitt 

czar,  napB,  li  (m.) 

czarina,  napiina,  bi 


daily,  e>Keji;H6BHbia 

damp,  MdKpMli 

Dane,  naxqaHHrn.,  ane;  (/.),  naxidHKa,  h 

dangerous,  onacHbiii 

dark,  xeMHtiii ;  it  is  dark,  xeMHd 

dark,  to  grow,  xeiwH-fexb 

darkness,  xcmhoxA  ;  xbM^ 

daughter,  ji6m,,  qepn  ;  little  daughter, 

H6qKa, H 
day,  jteHb  (m.)»  Hhh;  by  day,   nneM-b; 

good  day !  aflp^BcxByfixel 
dead,  MepxBuft 
dear,  nopor6tt ;  M^Jiuii 
dearer,  nopbiKe 
death,  cMepxb  (/.) 
decayed,  mundn 
deceased,  noKdiiHbia 
December,  neK^6pb  (m.) 
deep,  rjiy66Kift 
defeat,  to,  see  to  conquer 
delay,  to,  M6j(JiHXb 
depict,  to,  H3o6paH<&xb 
describe,  to,  oniicHBaxb 
desert,  nycxiiHH,  h 
desire,  to,  jKCJiaxb;  xox-fexb 
desk  (teacher's),  K^eenpa,  m 
did,  H^jiaji-b,   ca'fejiaji'b ;    indicates  past 


die,  to,  yMHp^xb ;  cKOHq^xbCH 
died,  he,  ;^Mep'b 
difi&cult,  xpy'HHMtt 
difficulty,  xp^flHOcxb  (/.) 


dig,  to,  pHXb ;  to  dig  out,  BupwB&xb 
diligent,  npHJi6H{HbiiS 
dine,  to,  oS'tAaxb 
dining-room,  cxoji6Bafl,  uh 
dinner,  oQ-kn-b,  h 
direction,  HanpaBJidnie 
dirty,  rpriaHwfi 
disease,  Coji'taHb  (/.),  h 
distant,  see  far 
distinctly,  hcho 
district  (canton),  ytafl-b,  bi 
do,  to,  fl-tjiaxb 
doctor,  ndRxopx,  d 
dog,  coG^Ka,  H ;  necb,  ncH 
domesticated,  nomkumiH 
door,  «Bepb  (/.)»  h;   out  of  doors,  na 
HBop-fe 

down,  BKHSl. 

doze,  to,  HpcM^xb 

draw,  to,  pHcoB&xb 

drawing  (sketch),  pnc^^HOK'b,  hkh 

drawing-room,  a&jia,  m;  rocxIiHan,  ua 

dreadful,  ywdcHMtt 

drenched,  to  be,  M6KHyxb 

dress,  to  {act),  oatB^xb;  {neut.),  on-fe- 

B&xbCH,  onixbCH 
drink,  uHXbe,  h;  drink,  to,  nnxb 
drive,   to  (=go   in  a  vehicle),  -fexaxb ; 

(= convey  in    a   vehicle),   Boaiixb; 

to  drive  away  (  =  chase),  yroHHXb; 

oxroHriixb;  (  =  depart),  ox-b-fesHi^xb 
drove  up,  he,  npiixajix. ;  ncfexajiTb 
dry,  cyx6ft 
dwelling,  munb'e,  -^h 


E 

each,  KkmjihiPL ;  each  other,  Hpyn.  np^^ra ; 
to  each  other,  npyr-b  npyry;  with 
each  other,  Hpyrx.  ex.  «pyroMx> ;  see 
Par.  183 

early,  p^HHili ;  {adv.),  pkao 

earn,  to,  sapaG^xtiBaxb 

earth,  aeMJia,  -^h  ;  Mipi,  li  (world) 

easier,  jier^e 

east,  BocxdK'b 

Easter,  CB-fexjioe  BocKpec6Hbe 

easy,  jierKifi 

eat,  to,  -fecxb;  K^maxb 

eight,  B6ceiMb 

eighteen,  BoceMHAfluaxb 

eighth,  BOCbMdii 

eight  hundred,  BoceMbc6xi. 

eightieth,  BocbMHHeoixMii 

eighty,  BoceMbAecHX'b 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


233 


either,  lijin 

elder,  cxApmitt 

elder,  village,  cxdpocTa,  u  (m.) 

eleven,  onikHHamxaTib 

else  (or),  ne  t6 

embrace,  to,  oSBHB^Tb 

emperor,  HMnepAxopi. 

empire,  a^pcxBo,  & 

empty,  nycxdii 

end,  KoneuT.,  umi 

enemy,  iienpi&xejib,  h  (m.)j  Bparx.,  li 

engage,  to,  see  to  occupy 

England,  AhfjiIh 

English,   ^HrjiiftcKiii ;    in    English,   no- 

^HrJlfttCKH 

Englishman,  aHrjiKHdramx.,  ^ne 

enormous,  rpoMaAHtiit 

enough,  hob6jh.ho  ;  enough!  n6jiHoI 

enter,  to  (=go  in),  Bxcaiixi.;  (= in- 
scribe), 3an6cMBaxb ;  to  enter  upon, 
nocxyn^xB 

entered,  he,  Bomejii. 

entire,  i^-ijiutt;  h^jihuK 

entrance,  BTb-fesAx.,  ti 

entrance-hali,  nep6aHHH,  ia 

environs,  okp6cxhocxi>  (/.),  h 

equal,  p^Bii&iit 

erect,  to,  nocxaBJiiixb 

estate,  yc&abSa,  m 

esteem,  to,  ysajK^xt;  noHHxdxb 

even,  h^jkc 

evening,  B6Hep'i,,  k;  in  the  evening, 
B^qepoM'B 

every,  Kkmjihiii;  bcAkIH 

everybody,  BCjiKia  qeJiOB'&K'b 

everything,  Bce 

everywhere,  Bcibay;  Bean'^ 

evident,  oneBikjiHuA 

exact,  Hcnp^BHutt 

exactly,  p6bho 

example,  npHiviipi,  h;  for  example,  na 
npHM-fepx. 

excavate,  to,  BLipuBdxb 

excellent,  npeBocxdAHMit 

excuse,    to,     HaBHurfxi. ;     excuse     me ! 

H3BHHHXel 

execute,  to,  Bi>mijiuBaxi> 
exercise  (problem),  aanaqa 
expect,  to,  jKHaxb 
expression,  Bupa>K6Hie 
extend,  to  (intr.),  xHHyxbCH 
external,  napyHtHutt 
extreme,  Kp^uitt 
extremely,  c&uhiA  (adj.),  d^ieni. 
eye,  rji^ai*,  6 


fable,  6&CHH,  h 

face,  jiHuid,  -^a 

fair,  a,  >ipMapKa,  h 

fairly,  noB6abHO 

fairy-tale,  CKAsKa,  h 

faithful,  B-^pHbiH 

fall,  to,  ynafl^xb ;  to  fall  into,  Bnan^xb 

family,  ceMbii,  -^u 

far,  jianeuiPL 

far  {before  compar.),  rop^sno 

farewell  !  npom^xel 

farther,  nkn-he,  H^Jibme 

fast,  see  quick 

fat,  inApHuii 

father,  ox^u-b,  tu^;  C^xiomKa,  h 

fear,  to,  GojixbCH 

feast,  see  festival 

feather,  nep6,  n6pbH 

February,  $eBp^jib  (m.) 

feeble,  cji&6Mit 

feed,  to,  KopMiixb 

feel,  to,  lyBCXBOBaxb 

feel  a  desire,  to,  aaxortTt  (per/.) 

feeling,  qyBcxBO,  a 

fell,  he,  yn^Jix. 

festival,   np^aflmiKX.,   h;     {adj.)^   np&a- 

HHHHHMtt 

few,   H-tcKOJibKO  {with  gen.);   HeMH6rie 

{adj.) 
field,  n6jie,  A 
fifteen,  nnxH^naxb 
fifth,  njixutt 
fiftieth,  nHXHHecrtxBitt 
fifty,  naxbaecfixb 
fight,  Hp^Ka,  H 
finally,  oKOH^idTejibHo 
find,  a,  Hax6HKa 
find,  to,  iiaxoniixb 
fine,  see  good 
finger,  n^Jieub,  Jibqu 
finish,  to,  KOHq&xb 
fire,  or6Hb,  thA  (m.);   to  keep  up  the 

fire,  to  stoke,  aaxonaiixb 
firewood,  flpoB^  {n.  pi.) 
firm,  Kp-fenKitt 
first,  nepBMft ;  at  first,  cHaq^Jia ;  first  of 

all,  np6>Kae  Bcerd 

five,  HHXb 

five  hundred,  nnxbcdx-b 
flame,  hji^mh  {n.),  ena 
flat  (a  house),  KBapxiipa,  u 
flesh,  Miico 


234 


ENaLISH-BUSSlAN  VOCABULARY 


flit  past,  to,  MejibK&Tfc 

flog,  to,  C-tHB 

floor,  nojii,  i^ 

flower,  ElB'feT'B,  i^ 
fold,   to,  CKJI^HMBaXB 

following,  cjiinyiomifi 

food,  nnuxa,  h;  K;^inaHbe,  h 

foot,   HorA, -^h;    to   go   on    foot,   HTXii 

n'feniK6M'i. 
for    (conj.)  liSo,  noxoMy  qxo;    (prep.), 

HJiH   (gen.);    aa     (ace.)    {of  price); 

Ha     (ace.)     {time)  ;     as     lor,     qxo 

Kac^excH  {with  no  and  gen.) 
foreigner,  Hiiocxp^Hei^'b,  nqw 
forest,  ji-t cb,  a 
forge,  to,  KOB^xB 
forget,  to,  aaOHB^xB 
form  (figure,  way),  66pa3Tb,  bi 
fortieth,  copoKOBdfi 
fortunately,  kb  (no)  cq^cxiio 
forty,  cdpoK-B 
forwards,   Bnepen-B;    to   go    backwards 

and    forwards,     xoflrixB     Bsanx.     h 

BnepeflB 
found,  to  be,  HaxoHri;xBCH 
found,  he,  nameji'B 
four,  qex^pe 
four  hundred,  qex^pecxa 
fourteen,  qexiipHaauaxB 
fourth,  qexBepxBiii 
fox,  jiHc4 ;  aHCH^a,  bi 
France,  <Dp^H^iH 
free,  BdjiBHBifi 
French,  (JpanuyacKiii ;   in  French,  no- 

4)paHuy3CKH 
Frenchman,  ^pamtysB,  bi 
Frenchwoman,  ^paniiyjKeHKa,  h 
frequent,  to,  nocfem^xB 
Friday,  njixnana 
friend,  npfrh,  -ysBji;  noapyra  (/.),  h; 

npiflxejiB  (w.),  h 
frightful,  yHtacHbifi 
fro,  to  and,  saaa-B  h  BnepeffB 
from  (=out  of),  nai.  {gen.);  (=away), 

oxB  {gen.);  (=off,  since),  c-b  {gen.); 

from  behind,  ca^HH  {gen.) 
front  of,  in,  see  before 
frontier,  rpamiLta 
frost,  Mopda-B,  h;  hard  frost,  ciijiBHBifi 

MOp63B 

full,  nbjiHBia 
furniture,  Me6ejiB  (/.) 
future  {adj.),  6fRymiii 


gallows,  BxicfejiHi^a,  h 

game,  nrp^,  -^bi 

garden,  c^h-b,  li;  kitchen -garden,  oro- 

p6flB,  BI 

gate,  Bop6x^  {n.  pi.) 

gave,  he,  najii. 

gaze,  to,  see  to  look  at 

general,  renep^jiB,  bi 

generally,  o5fciKHOB6HHo 

gentle,  MiiJiBiii 

German,  H'tMcnx.,  mubi  ;  {adj.),  u-tM^ufdA 

Germany,  TepM^HlH 

get  up,  to,  see  to  rise 

ginger-bread,  npjiHHKB,  h 

girl,  fl-feBymKa,  h;  little  girl,  aiBOiKa,  h 

give,  to,  flaB^xB,  naxB 

given,  ji^HBui 

glad,  paa-B 

glad,  to  be,  p&noBaxBCH 

glance,  to,  aarjirf^BiBaxB 

glass  (drinking),  cxaK^n-B,  u 

glide,  to,  CKOJiBBiixB 

gloom,  cyMpaK-B 

glove,  nepqaxKa,  h 

gnaw,  to,  rpBiaxB 

go,  to,  xoh^xb;  hxx6  ;  -fexaxB  (not  on  foot) ; 
to  go  abroad,  -ixaxB  aa  rpaniiuy ;  to 
go  away,  yxoniixB^;  to  go  into, 
BxcH^XB^;  to  go  on,  ca'fejiaxBCH  (= 
to  take  place);  to  go  out,  bbixo- 
flHTB  ^ ;  to  go  through,  npoxoniixB  ^ ; 
nepexoHHXB^;  went  through,  npo- 
mejiB;  to  go  up  to,  noAxomixB^; 
HoxoHiixB  ^ ;  to  go  to  bed,  jioH<ikxBCH 
cn&xB ;  Hxxii  cn&xB ;  to  go  upstairs, 
Hxxi  HaB6px'B 

God,  Bdr-b,  H 

gold,  36J10XO 

golden,  aojiox6tt 

good,  xop6mifi;  n66pBifi 

good-bye,  ao  cBHutelH 

good-day,  aflpaBCXByiixe 

goodness,  jio6pox^ 

goods,  B6mb  (/.),  H ;  xoBapB,  bi 

goose,  rycB  (?n.),  h 

government  (administrative  division  of 
Russia),  rySepniH,  h 

grand-daughter,  BnyiKa,  h 

grandfather,  jt'feji'B,  w  ;  a-feAymKa,  h 

grandmother,  6^GymKa,  h 

grandson,  snyK'B,  h 


1  Cf.  note  to  Par.  208. 


ENGLISH-KUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


235 


grass,  TpaB^,  -^m 

great,  6ojii>m6ii;  Beji^nitt 

greater,  66jii>miK 

green,  aejienufl 

grey,  cfepufl 

grief,  r6pe,  A 

grieve,  to  (intr.),  ropesATb 

groaning,  cxdHt,  u 

ground,  see  earth 

grow,  to,  pacxA  ;  Btipacx^Ti. 

grown  up,  B3p6cjii>itt 

gruel,  K^ma 

grumble,  to,  Bopq^Tt 

guard,  on,  na  qac^xi. 


H 

half,  nojiOBiiHa,  h 

hall,  aajia,  li;  (vestibule),  nep6AHHH,  in 

halt  != stand! 

hamlet,  Hep6BHH,  h 

hammer,  to,  kob^tb 

hand,  pyK^,  -^h 

hang,  to  {intr.),  bhcIte* 

happen,    to,     cjiyq&TbCH,     cjiyqirrtcH ; 

H-tjiaXBCH 

happiness,  cq^cxie 

happy,  cqacxjiiiBtifl 

hard,  xsepnuii ;  see  difficult 

hardly,  ej^sk 

hard-working,  xpyHOJHoS^BBiit 

harvest,  w^xBa,  u;  to  harvest,  jKaxi. 

have,  to,  6uxi>  y  +  gen.  of  person;  hm^xb  ; 

BJiaaixt;  have  I  ?  ecxb  jih  y  Mcnii? 

I  have  to,  h  HdjiateHt  (hA,  h6,  mi) 
he,  oHx. 
head,    rojioB^,  r6jioBu;    to    take    into 

one's  head,  see  to  conceive 
health,  snopdBBe 
healthy,  3«op6Bufl 
heap,  K^qa,  h 
hear,  to,  cjnimaxB 
heart,   c6pAue,  k;    to  learn  by  heart, 

yv&Tb  HaH3;^cxi> 
heat,  to,  Tonrixb 
heaven,  h66o,  -6ec^ 
heavy,  xHHtejiHft 
height,  Bbicox^,  drui 
help,  to,  noMor^xfc  (dot.) 
hence,  oxcibfla 

her,  eA  {gen.),  ett  (dat),  ee  {ace.) 
here,  ajifbcb;  here  is  !  boit.! 
hero,  rep6il,  h 
heroine,  repo^HH,  h 
hesitate,  to,  m^ajihtb 


hide,  to,  cKpMB^xfc 

high,  Bucdrntt 

higher,  BumiA 

highest,  Biime  Bcer6 

him,  er6  {gen.  and  ace.),  eyif  {dat.) 

hind,  c^MKa  (oji6Hfl) 

his,  erd 

hither,  ck)h& 

hold,  to,  HepjKdxfc 

hole  (=pit),  AMa,  u 

holy,  cBHx6fi[ 

home,  at,  H6Ma;    home   {with  verbs  of 

motion),  RoudA 
honest,  q^cxHMtt 
hope,  to,  uafffeHXbCH 
horse,  ndmajif,,  h  (/.) 
horseback,  on,  Bepx6Mt 
hospital,  6ojibHuixa,  bi 
host  (master),  xosiiHH'b,  -^CBa 
hot,  ropjiiiii ;  mkpmA 
hotter,  rnkpne 
hour,  Hkcb,  Tai 
house,  jidwh,  k;   little  house,  ndMUK-b, 

H ;  peasant  house,  H36d,  -^h 
how,  KaK-b;  KaKiiM-b  dSpaaoMi;  how  are 

you  ?  KaKTb  BH  nojKHB&exe? 
however  {conj.),  ojmkKom'h;  BcexaKH 
how  many,  how  much,  CK6jibKO 
huddled,  to  sit,  see  to  press  (themselves) 
humble,  noK6pHbitt 
humiliating,  yHH36xejn>Hbia 
hundred,  cxo 
hundredth,  c6xutt 
hunt,  to,  roHHXb ;  raaxb 
hunting  (used  for),  rdniitt 
hurry  along,  to,  Hccxiicb   {used  of  the 

river) 
hurts,  it,  Gojiiix-b,  Cojihxi. 
husband,  MyHt-b,  bh 
hut  (wooden  house),  naQk,  -^m 


I,  H 

idle,  ji-feHHBMtt 

if,  6cjiH 

ignorance,  Heyq6Hie 

ignorant,  Heyneraibiti 

ill,  6ojiBH6tt ;  to  be  ill,  Qoirkji, ;  to  fall 
ill,  3a6oji'txB 

illumine,  to,  ocB-fem^TB;  oaapAvb 

image,  depaa-b,  m 

immense,  see  enormous 

impossible,  HeB03M6H<Hbiit ;  it  is  im- 
possible, iiejiB3>i 


236 


ENGLISH-EUSSIAN  VOCABULAEY 


in,  BT,,  BO  {prep.) 

incessant,  nocxoHHHMii;  Henpep^BHufi; 

SeanpecT&HHBifi 
indeed,  jx-feiicxBiiTejibHO ;  np^Bjta;  np^BO 
indifferent,  paBHoayniHua 
industrious,  npHJi6>KHHtt;  jpyAOjiioSiiBMit 
infirmary,  6ojibHikna,  m 
inhabitant,  jKj^xejiB,  h  (m.) 
inquire,  to,  see  to  ask 
inscribe,  to,  aanHCbiBaxs 
inspect,  to,  ocM^xpHBaxi. 
instead  of,  BM-tcxo  (gen.) 
intelligent,  ;y^MHwit 
interest,  yn^cxie 
interesting,  HHxep6cHBitt 
into,  Bx,  {ace.) 

iron,  meji-feao ;  of  iron,  mejrk3iahi& 
is  there  ?  ecxb  jih? 
is  to,  jidnmewb 

it,  oh6  ;  dxo  {or  masc.  or  fern,  forms) 
Italian,  HxajibfiHCKitt  {ad^.);  in  Italian, 

no-HxajibjiHCKH 
Italy,  Hx^jiiH 
its,  er6,  eA 

J 
January,  hhb^pi.  (w.) 
jingle,  to,  SBeH-fexfc 
joke,  myxKa,  h 
jolly,  BecejiMii 
jug,  KyeiimKa,  h 
July,  iibjib  (w.) 
jump  about,  to,  npiiraxb 
June,  iibm.  (m.) 
just  (= right),  np^BMii;  just  {with  past 

tense),    x6jibKo    mo;    just    as    it 

happened,  KaKx.  p^ax. 


keep,  to,  nepjK^xb;  6ep6qB 

key,  KJiioHi,  li 

kind,  adeptitt;  jiioS^shuM 

kindle,  to,  aajKHraxb 

kindness,  noSpox^ 

king,  Kop6jib,  1^  (w.) 

kitchen,    k:^xhh,    h;     kitchen-garden, 

oropoax.,  M 
kitten,  koxchokx.,  -Tiixa 
knee,  KOJi-feHO,  a 
knife,  hojkx.,  6 
knit,  to,  BH3^xi> 
knock,  to,  cxyi^xb 
know,    to,    3Haxb;    to   know    how    to, 

yM-fexb;  to  get  to  know,  yanaB^xi., 

yan^xb 


knowledge,  an^Hle 

known,  anaKdMbiii ;  weU-known,  HaaicT- 

HMti 
3,  KBaCb 


labour,  see  trouble 

lad,   MOJioA6tt   qejioB-tKT.;   n^penb  (w.), 

PHH  (= peasant-lad) 
lady,  n^Ma,  m 
lake,  daepo,  k  or  epa 
lament,  to,  (no)nji^Kaxb 
lamp,  jikMua,  h 
land,  aeMJiji,  -^n  ;  cxpaM,  -^h 
landed  proprietor  or  land-owner,  noM-fe- 

miiKX.,  H 
language,  h3ijkx>,  A 
large,  6ojibm6tt 
larger,  66jibmiit 
largest  of  all,  66jibraiit  Bcer6 
last,  nocji-feflHltt;  np6mjiMtt  (past) 
last,  at,  HaKOHenx. 

late,  n63«Hiii;  (  =  deceased),  noK^iiHuft 
late  {adv.),  n63AHO 
later,  n63me 
latter,  nocji^HHbitt 
laugh,  to,  cMtAxbCH;  to  make  laugh, 

CM-feinikxb 
laughable,  CMtmndit 
lay,  to,  KJiacxb 
lay  down,  she,  Jierji^ 
laziness,  jii&m>  (/.) 
lazy,  ji-knABhiA 
lead,  cBHHenx.,  gen.  Hu,k 
lead,  to,  BecxHi 
lead  astray,  to,  cSHB&xb 
learn,  to,  yHHXbCH  {neut.)  {dat.);  visyH&rh 

{transitive,=to  study  a  subject) ;  to 

learn   by  heart,  yq^xb  Hanaycxb ; 

see  to  get  to  know 
learned,  yqeHMfi 
learning,  yq^nie 
least,     M^Hbmitt;     at    (the)    least,    no 

Kp^Hcii  M-tpt;   not  in  the  least, 

COBcfeMX.  (He)  H'feXX> 

leather,  K6>Ka 

leave,  to,  noww^xb  (=to  leave  in  the 

lurch) ;  to  leave  (school),  K6HqHXb ; 

to  leave  alone,  ocxaBJijixb 
left,  ji-feButt 
left,  to  be,  ocxaB^xbCH 
less   {adj.),   M^ubmiik;    {adv.),  M^Hbme ; 

M^H-fee 
lesson,   yp6KX,,  h;    to  learn   a    lesson, 

yq]4xb  ypdKb 


ENGLISH-KUSSIAN  VOCABULAKY 


237 


let,  to,  nycK&Tb ;  let !  nycxt! ;  nycK&KI ; 

let  us !  aaB^tt! 
letter,  nHci>M6,  -«-a 
lie,    to    (=to    tell   lies),  Jiraxb;    (=to 

recline),    jieat^xb;    to    lie    down, 

JIOHtHTbCH 

life,  HuksHbt  H  (/.) 

lifetime,  in  his  own,  bi.  cBoeMt  B-feK^ 

lift,   to,  nOJXHHM^Tb 

light,  cB-feTi,  {gen,  sing,  a) 

light    (=not    heavy),    jiermfl;    (=not 

dark),  cB^xjiMii 
light,    to,    3aH«Hr&Tb;    to    light    upon, 

nonan^TB 
like,  to,  jiK)6iiTb;   Hp^BHTbcn   (=to  be 

pleasing) ;  if  you  like,  nomknyH 
lion,  jieB-b,  jibBbi 
listen,  to,  cjiymaxb 
literal,  GyKB^jibHbcft 
little  (adj.),  M^jieHbKift;  m^jiuj^;  {adv.), 

M^jio ;  a  little,  iieMndro 
live,  to,  HtHXb  ;  nomHB^xb 
living,  HtHBdfit 
lock,  aaMdR-b,  MKii 
long,    HJiHHHuli;    ndjiritt    {time);    long 

ago,  aaBHiiMT.-AaBH6 ;  not  long  since, 

Hefl^BHO 

look,  to  take  a,  nocMoxpikxb  {perf.) 
look,  to,  cMoxpixb ;  to  look  at,  cMOxpixb 

Ha    (ace);    nocM&xpMBaxb;    Bsrjiii- 

nbiBaxb  ;  to  look  for = to  seek 
Lord,  the,  rocndAb  (w.),  r6cno«a  {gen. 

aing.) 
lot,  a,  MH6ro;  MHimecxBO,  a;  (=heap), 

Kyqa, h 
loud,  rp6MKitt 

love,  jiK)66Bb  (/.),  gen.  sing.  6bA 
love,  to,  jiio6iixb 
low  (=not  high),  H^sKia;  (=not  loud), 

tAxiH 
lower,  Hiiamifi,  hAtkb 


M 
magnificent,  BejiHKOJiinHuft 
maid(servant),  cjiyjK^HKa,  h 
majority,  66jimaH  Hacxb,  h 
make,  to,  n^jiaxb  ;  see  to  oblige 
man,  qejioB-feK-b,  pi.  jiibnH ;  Mymqiiiia,  m 
manner,  dSpaax.,  w;  in  what  manner  ? 

KaKiiM'b  dSpaaoM-b? 
many,  MH6ro 
March,  M^px-b 

market-place,  n;ii6maHb,  h  (/.) 
marrow,  Mdan.,  6 


mask,  M&cKa,  h 

master,  xoariHH'b,  — jiesa 

matter,  ^-fejio,  k;  it  does  not  matter, 

HHqerd 
May,  M^tt 
may  {verb),  Moqb  (be  able);  it  may  be, 

M6Htex-b-6brrb 
me,  MCHji  {gen.,  ace),  mh*  {dat.) 
meadow,  Jiyrb,  k 
means,  that,  snainxb 
measure,  M-tpa,  w 
meat,  Miico 

mechanically,  MaraHH^jibHO 
meet,  to,  Bcxp-feqdxb;  till  we  meet  again, 

HO  CBujikain 
meeting,  cBiw^ie,  h 
mention  it,  don't,  ne  ctduTb 
merchant,  Kyn6itb,  nmk 
merry,  Becejiwtt 
middle,  cpe«ikHa,  m 
mighty,  Moryqiii;  ciijibUhiA 
military,  Bo^HHuii 
milk,  MOJioKo 
million,  MHJiJii6H'b,  h 
mind,  never,  HHHer6 
mine,  Mofi,  Mo>i,  Moe,  Moii 
minister,  MHHiicxpi>,  m 
minute,  Mnnyxa,  m 
misfortune,  Heci^cxie,  a;  rdpe,  A 
modest,  cKp^MHuli 
modesty,  CKp6MHocxb  (/.) 
moment,  mom6hxt.,  u  ;  MHH^xa,  u 
Monday,  noHen'&JibHHK'b 
money,  «6HbrH  (/.  pi.) 
month,  M'fecHU'b,  m 
moon,  nynk,  -^u 
more,  SdJi-fee,  66jibme;  far  more,  rop&sno 

66jibme 
morning,    ^xpo,    &;    in    the    morning, 

^xpoM-b 
most,  Sdjibrae  Bcer6 ;  see  majority 
mother,  Maxb,  M^xepn;  M^xymKa,  h 
motherly,  inaxepjiHCKift 
mourn,  to,  (no)nji^Kaxb  ;  ropsB^xb 
mouse,  Miimb,  h  (/.) 
much,  MH6ro 
mushroom,  rpne-b,  li 
must,  I,  H  fldjiHteiTb,   nrnk,  etc.;   mh* 

my,  Moii,  mojI,  Moe,  mo  A 


N 


naked,  rdjiuft 

name,  Amh,  hmchA  (w.) 

narrow,  :^3Kitt;  TicHutt 


238 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


native  tongue,  po«H6ft  aa^Kt 

nature,  npHp6Ha 

near,  ejinai.  {gen.);  6Jiii3Ko  oxi.  {gen.) 

nearly,  ho^itA 

necessary,  HyHtubifi 

neck,  m^H,  h 

need  to,  I,  mh*  h^h<ho  ;  mh*  h^«o 

neighbour,  6jiA«KHiii  {adj.) 

neighbourhood,  oKpecTHocxb,  u 

neither=  also  not;  hh 

nephew,  njieMjiHHHK'B,  h 

nest,  riitsHd,  rn-ksua;  to  build  nests, 
BHTb  rH-feajia  (4=e) 

never,  HHKor«4 

.never  mind,  HHier6 

nevertheless,  r-hwh  ne  M^n-fee 

new,  H6Butt       • 

next= following  or  future 

nice,  BKycHbili  (to  taste) ;  mAjimM  (dear) 

Nicholas,  HnKOJiAJi 

niece,  njieMjiHHHi;a,  m 

night,  Hd'iB,  h;  by  night,  ndHbio;  good- 
night !  (c)noK6ftHofi  H6qH! 

nine,  n^BHTB 

nine  hundred,  neBHTbc6T'b 

nineteen,  jteBHTHannaxi. 

ninety,  HeBflH6cTO 

no,  H-fexi.;  He 

nobleman,  HBopHHjiH'B,  hhc 

no  one,  hhkt6 

nor,  HH 

north,  c-feBept 

nose,  HdcB,  li 

no  sort  of,  HHKaK6ft 

not,  H-fexi ;  He ;  hh  ;  not  at  all,  coBC-feMi. 
He  (H'fexx>) ;  BdBce  ne  (H'fex'b) 

nothing,  hhix6;  HH'ierd 

notice,  to,  saM-fei^xb 

November,  hohSpb,  i4  (m.) 

now,  xen6pi> 

nowhere,  Hnrjrt 

nowhere  (nowhither),  hhkyh^ 

number,  qHCJi6,  -^a ;  MHomecxBO,  a  (=a 
great  many) 

numerous,  MHoroqiicjieHHLitt 

nurse  (child's),  Hjinn,  h 

O 

oak,  H^6i>,  ii 

oar,  Becji6,  -a 

oats,  oBecb,  bcbi 

object,  npenMext,  m;  B6mi>,  h  (/.) 

oblige,  to  (= compel),  sacxaBJirixb ;  to  be 

obliged,  6uxb  ndjuKent,  hkhA,  etc. 
observe,  to,  nocM^xpHBaxb ;  BaMffenaxb 


occasion,  cjiyqafi,  h 

occupy,  to,  saHHM^xb 

o'clock,  at  what  ?  bi  KoidpoMT.  qac^? 

October,  oKxriGpb  (w.) 

of,  H31.  (out  of;   gen.) ;  oxt,  (from  ;  gen.) 

off,  ex.  (away  from;  gen.);  ox-b  {gen.) 

offer,  npeHJioHK6Hie,  a 

office,  K0Hx6pa,  m 

officer,  o$HH6px>,  w  or  ^ 

official,  HHH6BHHK'b,  H 

often,  q^cxo 

old,  cxApMti;  old  age,  cx&pocxb  (/.);  old 

man,   cxaptiKx.,    li ;     old     woman, 

exapyxa,  h;  days  of  old,  cxapraia 
on.  Ha  {prep.);  on  to,  na  {ace.) 
once,    oflH&Htaw;    p^ax.;    oflHHX.    pAai; 

at  once,  cefiq&cx.;  once  more,  eme 

pa3x> 
one,  onliHx>,  hh^,  6,  li,  4 
only,  xojibKO 
open,  to,  oxKpMBaxb 
opinion,  MH-fenie,  h;  in  my  opinion,  no 

Mdejviy  (MH-feHlro) 
opportunity,  see  occasion 
opposite,  Hp6xHBi.  {gen.) 
oppressive,  HynmHtt  (= close) 
or,  ikjin;  jih 
order  that,  in,  wr66hi 
order,  to,  Bcaixb  {dat.) 
orphan,    cHpox^,    -^u;    little    orphan, 

CHp6xKa, H 
other,  npyr6ii ;  each  other,  Hpyrx.  np^ra ; 

to  each  other,  Hpyrx,  jipyry 
our,  ours,  Hamx>,  a,  e,  h 
out   of,  H3X.  {gen.);   out  of  doors,  na 

HBop-fe 
outside = out  of  doors 
over,  Hanx.  (above;   instr.);   o  (about; 

prep.);  qepeax.  (through;  ace.) 
own,  CBdft  ;  c66cxBeHHHrtt 
own,  to,  HM-ixb 

ox,  6l>IKX>,  H 


paU,  BeHp6,  -a 

palace,  ji;Bopenx>,  piui 

pale,    Cji-tAHbift;     to    be    (turn)    pale, 

Gji-feAH-txb 
palpate,  to,  omynHBaxb 
paper,  6yMara,  h 
pardon,  to,  npomaxb;  H3BHH>ixb;  pardon 

me !  npocxiixe! 
part,  'i^cxb,  H  (/.) 
pass,  to  {of  time),  npoBOHiixb ;  pass  by, 

Hxx6  m6mo 


ENGLISH-EUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


239 


passed  through,  he,  npomejii. 

passport,  n^cnopTT.,  u  or  k 

past    {adj.),    np6mjibitt;     (prep,     time), 

n^ca-fc  (gen.);  {adv.  or  prep,  space), 

mAmo  {gen.) 
patience,  Tepn-feiiie 
paw,  Ji^a,  m;  little  paw,  Ji^Ka,  h 
pay,  to,  njiaxHTb;  to  pay  out,  buhji^- 

HHBaXb 

peace,  uikp-b;  to  make  peace  between, 
see  to  reconcile 

peasant,  myskhki,,  A  ;  KpecTBjtiiHH'b,  Aue ; 
peasant-house,  H36a,  -^u;  peasant- 
woman,  645a,  bi 

pen,  nep6,  n6pBH 

pencil,  KapaHH^rai,  A 

people,  jubnii  (folks) ;  nap^nt,  h  (nation ; 
working-class) 

perhaps,  M6jKeT'b-6i.iTb 

person,  jiHa6,  -^a 

pick  up,  to,  see  to  lift 

picture,  KapxikHa,  u 

piece,  Kyc6K'i,,  ckh[ 

pig,  CBHHbji,  -^H 

pink,  posoBbitt 

pipe,  TpyGKa,  h 

pit,  siua,  H 

piteous,  pitiful,  mdjiKifi 

pity,  it  is  a,  jk^jiko 

place,  MicTO,  & 

play,  to,  Hrpaxb 

playground  (school),  yq^JiraijHbift  SBopi* 

pleasant,  npirixnufi: ;  M^jibift 

please,  to  (to  be  pleasing),  HpasaxbCH; 

if  you  please,  nojK&jiyiicxa 
plough  (Russian),  cox4,  -^h 
plough,  to,  nax&xb 
point,  x6HKa,  h 
poor,  e-feAHbia 
position,  no3iii5iH,  h 
possess,   to,   HM-fexb ;    BJianixi.  (=have 

under  command) 
possession,  BJian-ime,  h 
possible,   B03M6H{Hbitt ;    is  it    possible  ? 

m6jkho   jih?   B03M6mHO  JiH? ;   it   is 

possible,  m6>kho  ;  is  it  possible,  can 

it  be  ?  Hey}K6aH  . . .  He? 
pot  (jug),  KySiimKa,  h 
pour,  to,  jiHXb 
poverty,  S-feHHOcxb  (/.) 
powerful,  Moryiift 
practical,  npaKXHHHwti 
praise,  noxBajia,  6c 
praise,  to,  xBaaiixb 
pray,  to,  MOjniTb 


prayer,  MOJiiixBa,  w  ;  to  say  one's 
prayers,  MoMxbCH 

prefer,  to,  npeHno»iHx&xb 

prepare,  to,  npHroxoBJijixb ;  BbiA'^JibiBaTb 

presence  of,  in,  npn  {prep.) 

present  {adj.),  Hacxojimia 

preserve,  to,  6ep6Hb 

press,  see  cupboard 

press,  to,  jKaxb  :  hk&xbch  (Voc.  XLIII) 

pretty,  KpaciiBbiJi;  xopdmeHbKitt 

prevent,  to,  M-fem^xt 

price,  atnA,  -^m;  not  at  any  price, 
HH  3a  qx6  Ha  CB-fex* 

prince,  KHrfsb,  bA 

print,  a,  acx^Mnx,  m 

prison,  xiopbM^,  -^m 

private,  see  simple 

problem,  sandia,  h 

profit,  np:^6Mjn.,  h  (/.) 

proposal,  npeHJioKCHie,  h 

proprietor,  see  landed  proprietor 

pupil,  yneHiiK'b,  A  (m.);  yqeHiii;a,  m  (/.) 

puppy,  mendK-b,  hkiI  or  menrixa 

put,  to,  KJiacxb  (=lay);  to  put  on, 
cx^BHXb  (=set,  stand);  to  put  on 
(clothes),  oH'feB&xb ;  to  put  behind 
(to  pawn),  saKJidjibiBaTb ;  to  put 
questions,  see  to  ask 


quarrel,  see  fight 
queen,  Kopoji6Ba,  u 
question,  Bonp6cT>,  u 
question,  to,  cnp&mnBaxi. 
quick,  cK6pbiit 
quiet,  cnoK<iiiHHfl;  xAxia 


R 

race  (stock),  hji^mh,  mbh^  {n.) 

raft,  nji6x'b,  h 

railway,  jKeji-isHaH  nop6ra,  h 

rain,  HOjKAb,  A  (w.) 

rains,  it,  aojkhb  naexi. 

raise,  to,  ^oJ^IHM4xb 

rare,  p-feffKlft 

rarely,  p-taKo 

rate  of,  at  the,  no  (Par.  183) 

rather,  cKop'fee;  jiyqrae  (=in  preference 

to) ;  HOBOJibHo  (= fairly) 
ravenous,  xiimnbili 
reach,  to,  Hoxon:Axb  (=go  as  far  as); 

HocxHraxb  (=get,  attain) 
reachecl,  he,  Hom&inb  (ho) 


240 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


read,  to,  nwt&rb 

reading,  m^me 

ready,  roT6Bwtt 

really,     np^BO ;     ntttCTBHTejibHO ;      bi 

reap,  to,  jKaxi. 

recede,  to,  ox^BHr^TbCH 

receive,  to,  nojiyq^xb,  nojiyqArb 

recently,  Hejx^BHO 

reckon,  to,  ciht^tb 

recognize,  to,  ysHaB^xb 

reconcile,  to,  mhphtb 

red,  Kp^cHbiit 

regard,    to,    cMOTp-fexi. ;    noiHT^jb    (= 

esteem);  yBajK^xb  (= respect) 
regret,  coKaji-fenie,  h;  to  one's  regret, 

Kb  COHtaJI-feHilO 

regular,  npaBHJibHHtt 

reign,  it&pcxBOBaHie ;  itdpcxso,  a  (= em- 
pire) 

reign,  to,  ^apcxBOBaxb 

rejoice,  to,  p^HOBaxbCH 

relate,  to,  cK^auBaxb  ;  paacK^SHBaxb 

related,  closely,  po«H6ii 

remain,  to,  ocxaB&xbCH 

remaining,  ocxajibH6tt 

remember,  to,  n6MHHXb  ;  BcnoMHHaxb 

remote,  najicKitt 

repair,  to,  noiHHfixb 

repetition,  noBxopeHie 

represent,  to,  npeacxaBJijixb;  nsoQpajK^rb 

representing,  HsoSpaHt^iomitt 

request,  to,  npociixb 

resolve,  to,  p-fem^xb,  p-femiixb 

resound,  to,  aBCHifexb 

respect,  to,  yBaataxb 

rest,  to,  oxfluxdxb 

resurrection,  B0CKpec6Hie 

rich,  Sor&xutt 

richer,  6or&ie 

riches,  Gor^xcxBo 

ride,  to,  -txaxb  BepxoMX. 

right,  np&Bbili ;  not  right,  ne  xaKi 

ring,  KOJIb^6,  -^a 

ripe,  cn-fejiuft ;  sp-fejibift 

rise,  to,  BcxaBaxb  {=get  up);  Bocxonlixb 
{of  the  sun) ;  noHHHMdxbCH  (=go  up) 

river,  p-feK^,  -^h 

road,  Hopdra,  h  ;  nyxb,  6  (m.)^ 

room,  KbMHaxa,  h;  (private  room, 
study),  Ka6mi6rb,  h 

rope,  BepeBKa,  h 

rouble,  p^6jib,  li 


round,  Kpyrjiuft 

row  (rank),  pAji-h,  ix 

row,  to,  rpecxA 

rower,  rpeS^qb,  6u6i 

ruin,  riiSejib,  h  (/.) 

rule,  n^pcxBOBanie 

rule,  to,  BJiaH-fexb  (instr.) 

ruler,  rocyfl&pb,  h  (m.) 

rummage,  to,  piixbCH 

run,  to,  S^JK^xb ;  to  run  away,  yS-fejKfixb 

Russia,  PocciH 

Russian,  pyccKiii ;  in  Russian,  no-p;^ccKH 

rye,  poHtb  (/.) 


sabre,  c^Sjih,  h 

sacrifice,  jK^pxBa,  bi 

sad,  cK^qHMtt 

sail,  n^pycT,,  & 

same,  caMbuK 

samovar,  caMoa&p'b,  u 

sat  down,  he,  cfejii. 

Saturday,  cy666xa,  h 

save,  to,  cnac&xb 

saved,  he,  cnaci. 

say,  to,  roBopiixb,  CKaa^xb 

scamp  {playfully),  majiyni.,  i^ 

scarce,  p'ijtKili 

scarcely,  e^Bd 

scarlet-fever,  cKapaaxrina 

school,  mKdJia,  m;  yqHJiHme,  a;  {adj.), 

yqiijimuHbitt ;  school-boy,  yneHiiK-b, 

li;     rHMHasAcxx.,     h;     school-girl, 

ynemina,  m 
scrimmage,  HpdKa,  h 
scythe,  koc&,  -^m 
sea,  M6pe,  i4 
season,  bp6mh  rdna 
second,  Bxop6tt ;  Hpyr6ii 
see,  to,  BiiH-fexb  ;  BH^^xb 
seed,  cfeMH,  ch^ 

seek,  to,  HCKaxb  ;  to  seek  out,  c:^CKHBai'b 
seems,  it,  K^HtexcH 
seldom,  p-fenKo 
self,  ce6H  (refl.  pron.) ;  c^Mt,  &,  6,  -^h 

{emphatic) 
sell,  to,  npoaaBdxb 
send,  to,  nocujiaxb,  nocji^xb 
September,  cenxiiGpb  (m.) 
servant,  cjiyr^,  -^h  (w.);  cjiyat^HKa,  h 

serve,  to,  cjiymAxb 


^  Decliiie(^  as  a  fern,  noun,  but  the  instr.  sing,  is  nyxeivrb. 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


241 


service,  cjiywCa,  ti 

set,  to,  cxaBHTB  {trans.) ;  aaxoRun,  {of 

the  sun) ;  to  set  about,  HaHmik-n, ; 

cT^Tfc    {perf.    verb);    to     set     up, 

nocxaBJifiTb 
seven,  ccmb 

seven  hundred,  ceMBcdx-b 
seventeen,  ceunkjinaTi, 
seventh,  cejibrndA 
seventy,  c^MBaecHxt 
severe,  cyp6Bbiit ;  cxp6ritt 
sew,  niHXb 

shake,  to,  noxpHcAxi. 
share,  yq&cxie 
sharp,  6cxputt 
she,  oHd;  ^xa 
shed,  capdlt,  h 
sheep,  oBu^,  -bi 
shine,  to,  ciriixb 
ship,  Kop^6jib,  A  (w.) 
shirt,  py6amKa,  h 

shop-assistant,  clerk,  npunksnnKb,  u 
shore,  6epen>,  k 
short,  Kop6xKitt 
shorter,  Kop6qe 

show,  to,  noKasuBaxb,  noKas^xb 
shrink,  to,  waxbCH 
shut,  to,  saKpuB^xb 
sick,  6ojibH6a 
sickle,  cepm>,  ik 
sickness,  Soji-fesHb,  h  (/.) 
side,  cxopoH^,  -^  — m 

sigh,  to,  B3HHX^Xb 

sight    (spectacle)   3p■iJ^m^e,   a ;    (view) 

Bl^Kb,  bl 

sight  of,  to  catch,  yBHtH-fexb  {perf.) 

sign,  auawh,  h 

silly,  see  stupid 

silver,  cepe6p6;  {adj.),  cep66pHHbifl 

simple,  npocx6ii 

simply,  np6cxo 

since    {prep.),    c-b    {gen.);    {adv.),    ex. 

xtx-b  nopx. ;  xom^  Hasanx.  (  =  ago); 

long  since,   yme  flasHd;   not  long 

since,  HeH&BHo ;  {conj.)  xaKx>  KaKx. 

(=a8) ;   cx>  x-fexTb    n6px.,  KaKx.    {of 

time) 
sing,  to,  ntxb 
sister,  cecxp^,  -m 
sit,  to  (=to  be  seated),  cnn^xb;  to  sit 

down  (=take  a  seat),  cannxbCH 
six,  mecxb 

six  hundred,  mecxbc6xx. 
sixteen,  mecxnafluaxb 
sixth,  mecxdii 


sixty,  mecxbHec>ixx> 

sketch,  pHcyHOKX.,  hkh  ' 

skin,  udma,  h 

sky,  h66o,  He6eca 

sleep,  to,  cnaxb 

sleep,  to  go  to,  httA  cnaxb ;  jioadtTbCH 

enaxb ;  ycbra^xb 
slide,  to,  cKOJibsiixb 
slow,  MeHJieHHbrit 
slumber,  to,  npcM^xb  ;  cnaxb 
sly,  x6xpbitt 
small,     M&Jibitt ;      M&Jiem.Kiit ;     M6jiKltt 

(  =  fine) 
smaller,  M^Hbmitt 
smith,  Kyan^ux.,  i^ 
smoke,  to,  KypAxb 
smooth,  rji^Kitt 
snow,     cH-ferx.,  ^ ;      snow,     to,      cH*rb 

H«exx> 
snow-storm,  Mex6jib,  h  (/.) 
so,  xaKx,;  cxdjibKo;  so  much,  cx6jibKo; 

so  that,  qx66bi 
soft,  M^rKitt  (=not  hard);  xiixiii  (=not 

loud) 
soldier,  cojiHaxx.,  bi 
soldierly,  cojindxcKili 
solve,  to,  p-femdxb 
some,  irtKoxopwtt  (  =  a  certain);  KaK6Jt- 

HH6yab;  H-fecKOJibKie,  in  (=a  few) ; 

H-fecKOJibKo  {governs  g&n.) 
something,      m6  -  jihSo  ;      qxo  -  HH6yHb 

(= anything) ;  qx6-xo 
sometimes,  HHorH^ 
somewhat,  H-fecKOJibKo ;  neMndro 
somewhere  or  other,  to,  Kyfld-xo 
so  much,  cxdjibKO 

son,  CI>IHX>,  — HOBbril 

song,  n-tcHH,  H 

soon,  cKdpo ;  p^no 

sooner,  paiibme ;  CKop-fee 

sorrow,  r6pe,  A 

sort   of,  no,   HHKaK6ii;    what   sort   of, 

KaKOB^ft  (ae^*.) ;  KaK6fi 
soup,     cynx.,    h;     cabbage  -  soup,    ma 

sour,  KiicjiMtt 

south,  ibrx. 

sow,  to,  c-inxb 

spade,  Jionaxa,  bi 

Spanish,  HcnaiicKift 

speak,  to,  roBopiixb ;  M6jiBHXb 

spectacle,  3p•feJIra^e,  a 

spend,  to  (time),  npoBOHiixb 

spin,  to,  npjicxb 

spite  of,  in,  necMoxpii  na  {ace.) 


242 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


spiteful,  3;i6it 
splendid,  BejinKOJi-fenHua 
spoil,  to,  ndpxHTfc 

spring  (season),  bbchA,  ^ti;  in  spring, 
BecH6tt 

sprout,  to,  BHpaCT^TB 

square  (in  a  town),  njiima^b,  h  (/.) 

stable,  KOHibmHH,  h 

stag,  oji6Hb,  H  (w.) 

stair,  jiicTHHiia,  u 

stand,     to,     cxcjiTi.     (intr.);      ct^bhtb 

(tr.) 
stand  up,  to,  BCTaB^xB,  bct^tb 
start,   to,  Haimiaxi, ;    cxaxi.  (= begin); 

OTh'hamk'n,  (= drive  away) 
state  (polit.),  rocyn&pcxBo,  a 
station  (railway),  BOKsajit,  m 
stay,  to,  see  to  remain 
steal,  to,  BopoB^xfc;  Kpacxi. 
stiff,  Kp-iuKiti 
still    {adv.)f    see    yet;    {adj.),    xHxitt ; 

cnoK6flHott 
stirrup,  cxp6mh,  eM  (w.) 
stocking,  qyjidKt,  jikhi 
stoke,  to,  3axonji>ixb;  xomixi. 
stone,  KaMCHb,  mhh  (w.);  {adj.),  k^mbh- 

stoop,  to,  HarnSaxbCH 

stop  !  ndjiHo! 

stork,  ^Hcx-b,  bi 

story,  paacKAs-b,  m  ;  cK^SKa,  h 

stove,  n6»ib,  h  (jf.) 

strange,  cxp^HUbifi;  Hymdu  (=not  one's 

own) 
stream,  pyieii,  bii  ;  p-feK^,  -^h 
street,  yjiHua,  m 
strict,  cxp6rift 
stride,  to,  mardxb 
strike,    to,    ynapaxb;    Cnxb;    to  strike 

against,  xojiKAxbCH 
strive,  to,  cxapaxbcn 
strong,  cHJibHwtt ;  Kp-fenKiii 
study,  to,  see  to  learn 
stupid,  rjiyuMii 
such,  xaKoit 
sudden,  BHea^nHMft 
suddenly,  B^pyn. 
sufferer,  cxpanajieux,,  -^m^uhi 
sufficiently,  noBdjibHo  ;  Hocx^xcmo 
summer,  ji^xo,  k;  in  summer,  ji'fexoM'b; 

summer  (country)  residence,  «aqa, 

H 

sun,  c6jiHne,  a 
Sunday,  BocKpec6m>e,  h 
superficial,  Hapy^mnwii 


supper,  yjKHH-b,  M 

suppose,  to,  nojiar^xb 

sure,  B'fepHBia 

surely,  B-tpno;  surely  not,  Heyat^JiH 

surface,  noB^pxHocxb,  h  (/.) 

survey,  to,  ocM^xpHBaxb 

sweep  up,  to,  nomviex4xb 

sweet,  cji^HKiti 


T 

table,  cxcji-b,  6 ;  at  (the)  table,  aa  cto- 

Jl6M'b 

tail,  xBocxTb,  ii 

tailor,  nopxH6ft,  lie 

take,  to,  6paxb;  to  take  away  (in  a 
conveyance),  oxBoaiixb;  to  take  off 
(down),  cHHMaxb;  to  take  place, 
cjiyq&xbCH ;  n-fejiaxbCH ;  to  take 
thought,  6e3noK6fixbCH 

tale,  paacK&a'b,  m 

talk,  to,  Sojix^xb  ;  roBop^xb 

taU,  Bbic6Kiit 

tame,  j^oM^mHifi 

tan  (colour),  pbijKiitt 

tasty,  BKycHbdi 

taught,  to  be,  see  to  learn 

tea,  H^,  ik 

teach,  yqiixb 

teacher,  yuixejib,  A  {m.) ;  yqiixejn>HHi;a, 

BI  (/.) 

tear,  cjieaa,  -u 

tear,  to,  nopHB^xb 

tea-urn,  caMOB^pb,  h 

tell,    to,    CK^3HBaxb,   CKaa&xb ;    Bejiixb 

(order) 
ten,  n6cHXb 
terrible,  yiK&cauA 
territory,  BJian-fenie,  h 
than,  HtMb;  H^mejiH 
thank,   to,   ejiaronapHXb ;    thank    you, 

cnaciiSo 
that  {demonstr.),  xoxx.,  xa,  xo,  xt ;  t^xox-b, 

5xa,  ^xo,  ^xh;  {relative),  Koxopwft ; 

Kxo  ;  ixo;  {conj.),  ixo  ;  qx66u;  that 

is,  xo  ecxb  ;  SH&iHXb 
that  is  why,  boxx,  noqeM^ 
thee    {ace.    and    gen.),    xe6ji;     {dat.), 

xeS-fe 
their,  theirs,  hxx. 
them,  HXb,  HMX.,  etc. 
then,  xorfl^  (=at  that  time);  noxdMX. 

(= after  that) 
thence,  oxxy^na 
there,  xamx,;  there  is  or  are,  ecxb 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


243 


therefore,  noxoMiy',  no^xoMy 

there  is  !  there  are  !  botb! 

they,  ohA  {m.  and  n.) ;  oH-fe  (/.) 

thick,  T^jicTufi 

thief,  Bdpt,  u  (dfit) 

thin,  T6HKitt  ;  HK^sKifi  {of  fluids) 

thine,  see  thy 

thing,    B6mi>,    H    (/.);    npeHM^xt,    u; 

H-fejio,  & 
think,  to,  ny'Maxi. 
third,  xp6xifi[ 
thirteen,  xprni^qaxB 
thirty,  xpiijtqaxt 
this,  ^xox-B,  5xa,  i5xo,  ^xh 
thither,  xya^ 
thou,  xM 
though,  xoxji  6h 
thousand,  xiiicH^a 
three,  xpn;  three  hundred,  xpricxa 
through,  q^peai.  (ace.) ;  cKBoab  (ace.) 
through,  went,  nporaeji-B 
throw,  to,  6poc&xi>,  6p6cHXE. 
thunder,     rp^Mt,     u;      to     thunder, 

rpcM-fexb 
thunderstorm,  rpoa^,  -^u 
Thursday,  qexB^prB,  A 
thus,  xaKi.;  xaKiiMt  66paaowb 
thy,  xB6ii,  oA,  oe,  oik 
till,  «o  (gen.);  till  now,  ho  chxi.  ndpt; 

(co?y.),  noK^  .  .  He 
time,  bp6mh,  en^  (w.)»  p^s-b,  iJi  (=occa- 

sion);    it   is   time,    nopd;    at  the 

present  time,  bx,  Hacxorfmee  bp6mh  ; 

at  a  time  (=at  one  stroke),  cp^ay; 

what  time  is  it  ?    KoxdptEtt  qacx,? 

every  time,  BcriKifl:  paa-b ;  at  times, 

waoTjik 
time  of,  in  the,  npn  {prep.) 
timid,  p66Kitt 
tinkle,  to,  3Beirfexi> 
to,  Bi.  {ace.)  (=into);  kx.  {dat.)  (=to- 

wards);    ho   {gen.)  (=as    far    as); 

Ha    {ace.)    (=on   to);     hjih    {gen.) 

(=for) ;  dative  case  of  noun 
tobacco,  xaC^KT.,  ik 
to-day,  cerdHHH 
together,  BM-fecx* 
to-morrow,  a^Bxpa 
tongue,  HsiiKt,  li 
too,   cjiAmKOMt;    too   much   or  many, 

cji^mKOM'b    MHbro;     too     (  =  also), 

X&KJKe 

top  (= highest  part),  B6pxt,  6 

torment,  to,  Myqnxb 

torrents,  in,  pyqteMx. ;  pyqBrfMH 


torture,  to,  m^hhxi. 

touch,  to,  xp6raxi> 

towards,  kx.  {dat);  HaBcxp-iqy 

town,  rdpofl-i.,  k 

townsman,  small,  Mimantoi.,  ^ne 

traverse,  to,  npoxoHHxi» 

treasure,  kji^x.,  u 

tree,  afepcBo,  &  or  ^bbh 

tremble,  to,  npoHt^xi. 

trembling,  HpojK^ift 

tributary,  npHx6KX>,  h 

trouble,  xpym,  ^ 

true,  B-kpuuA 

truly,  Bnp4B«y;  np^BO 

truth,  np^Bna 

try,  to,  cxap&xBCH 

Tuesday,  bx6phhkx, 

turn  ill,  to=to  fall  ill,  see  ill 

turn  pale,  to,  CjifeflH-fexi. 

twelve,  HB'feH&mtaxb 

twenty,  ^B^ixaxB 

twice,  Hsa  p^aa ; 

twine,  to,  bhxi. 

two,  HBa,  HB-fe 

two  hundred,  SBicxH 


U 

ugly,  HeKpac^BMil 

uncle,  nfi«H,  h  (w.) 

under,  hohx,  {instr.  or  ace.) 

understand,  to,  noHHMdxb ;  yMi&xb 

understanding,  yM-fenie 

understood,  that  is  (=goes  without  say- 
ing), paayM-texen 

undress,  to  {intr.),  paan-feB^xbCH 

unfortunate,  Hec^acxHtitt 

unfortunately,  kx.  coHtaji'^HiH) 

unhappiness,  Hecq^cxie,  h 

unhappy,  Hecq^cxHufi: 

unknown,  He3HaK6ivii>Ltt 

unpleasant,  HenpiHXHutt 

until,  see  till 

up,  «o  {gen.)  (=as  far  as) ;  no  {dat.) 
(=over,  along);  {adv.),  BBepxt; 
HaBdpxx.;  up  and  down,  Baaax.  h 
Bnepefli. 

upright,  npHM6fi ;  npaBmkBufi 

uprightness,  npaBHriBocxb 

upstairs,  nas^px-B  {with  verb  of  motion) 

use,  to,  ynoxpeSjiiixb 

used  to,  rendered  simply  by  the  Im- 
perfective  Past  or  by  this  tense 
followed  by  6mb^jio 

useful,  nofl63Huii 


244 


ENGLISH-RUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


usual,  oSblKHOB^HHbltt 

usually,  06UKHOB6HHO 
utensils,  see  vessels 
utmost,  Kp^Hifi 


vanquish,  to,  noC-fejKaaTfc 

verst,  BcpcT^,  "m 

very  (adj.),  c^MLiii;  (adv.)  dqera. 

vessels  (= utensils),  noc^aa  (/.  collect.) 

vice,  nopdR-B,  h 

victim,  jK^pxaa,  u 

view,  B^jTB,  fci 

village,  ceji6,  -a  ;  nep^BHH,  h  (without  a 

church) ;  village  community,  Mfpt, 

u 
virtue  (quality),  K^qecxBo,  a 
visible,  BiiaHutt  ;  oqeBiiflHwtt 
visit,  to,  nocfemaxb 
voice,  r6jioc'b,  A 


W 

wait,  to,  }K«aTfc 

walk,  to,  xoflHTb  ;  htth  ;  ryjirixb ;  to  go 
for  a  walk,  u-nik  ryjiiixB 

wall,  CT^Hkf  -^u 

wander,  to,  Spo^iixi. 

want,  tOj  see  to  wish,  to  seek 

war,  BOiiH^,  -^m 

wares,  see  goods 

warlike,  BoiiHcxBemiMJi 

warm,  xenjibiii ;  ropriiiii  (=hot) 

was,  SiiiJix.,  jia,  JIG 

wash  (oneself),  to,  yMHsAxbCH 

water,  boa^,  -bi 

water,  to,  nojiHB^xB 

wave,  BojiH^,  -^bi 

way,  Hop6ra,  h  ;  nyxt,  6  {m.) 

we,  Mbi 

weak,  cji^Sbitt 

wealth,  GoraxcxBo 

wearisome,  CKy»mbiii 

weather,  nordfla 

weave,  to,  xKaxb  ;  bhxb  (wind) 

Wednesday,  cpcH^ 

week,  neaijiH,  h 

weep,  to,  nji^KaxB 

well,  xopomd;  ny;  see  healthy 

well-known,  HSBicxHbift 

went,    xowkrn, ;     meax.,     nomejix>,     see 

to  go 
were,  Sijjih 
West,  a^aax. 


wet,  M6KpBifi 

wet  through,  to  be,  M6KHyxB 

what  {adj.),  Koxopwii  (  =  which);  KaK6tt 
(=what  sort  of?);  (pron.),  qxo ; 
(=that  which)  qx6  ;  xo,  qxo 

wheat,  nmeniiua 

when,  Korfl^  ;  xorad  KaKx> 

whence,  oxKyna  ;  oxHer6 

where,  ra-fc;  nowhere,  Hnrni;  every- 
where, noBcibHy,  eeaa-fe;  where- 
with(al),  q-feM'B 

whether,  jih  (Par.  228) 

which,  Kox6pBEtt  {adj.  and  pron.);  ixo 
{pron.) 

whisper,  to,  menx^xB 

white,  e-fejiwtt 

whither,  Kya^ 

who,  Kxo ;  Kox6pbiii 

whole,  u'fejibitt;  BecB,  boh,  bcc,  Bcife 

whom,  Kor6,  KOMy,  etc. 

whose  ?  nePi,  hbh,  iBe,  hbh;  whose,  gen. 

of  KOXdpblfl 

why,  uo^euif ;  aaq-feivix. ;  oxHer6  ;  qxo 

wide,  miip6Kifi 

wider,  miipe 

wife,  meHk,  -u 

wild,    n^Kitt;     wild    beast    as-tpB,    h 

(m.) 
wind,  B-txepi,  xpbi  or  & 
wind,  to,  BHXB 
window,  oitud,  -^a 
wine,  Bmi6,  -^a 

winter,  aHM^,  -^h;  in'winter,  aHM6tt 
wish,  to,  Hteji^xB  ;  xox-fexB 
with,  c-B  {instr.);  y  {gen.);  {from)  on, 

{gen.) 
without,  6eax,  {gen.) 
wolf,  B6aKX>,  H  (6bx>) 
woman,    jK^Hmnna,    u;     old    woman, 

cxapyxa,  h 
wonderful,  yauBiixejiBHBEtt 
wood   (=fore8t),  ji-fecx.,  a;   (= timber), 

n6peBo  ;  (=fuel),  apoB^  {n.  pi.) 
wooden,  aepeBjimibrti 
work,  pa66xa,  bi;  work,  to,  pa66xaxB 
working  (day),  pa66qitt 
workman,  pa66xHHKB,  h;  pa66qitt 
world,  CBixT.;  Mipx,,  li;  acMJiri, -^h 
worse  ^ 
worst  /xyflmm,  xyjKe 

worth,  to  be,  cxohxb;   it  is  not  worth 

mentioning,  ne  cxduxx, ;  Hii^erd 
would,  see  Par.  199;= wished 
wound,  pana,  bi 
wounded,  p^eHBifl 


i 


ENGLISH-EUSSIAN  VOCABULARY 


245 


write,  to,  nnc^xb 

wrong,  Henp&Bufi;   in  the  wrong  way; 

He  T&Kt 


yard,  jtBopi,  iSi 

year,  r6Hi,,  & ;  Ji-fexo,  k.    After  1,  2,  3,  4 

use  roHt,  rdjia  ;  after  5,  6,  7,  etc. 

in    nominative    or   accusative    use 


yellow,  mernhiA 

yes,  «a 

yesterday,  sqepa 

yesterday,    the   day    before,   TpfexBHro 

HHH 

yet  (adJv.),  em6;   {conj.)y  osb&ko;   hc- 

cMOxpji  Ha  dxo 
you,  Bu,  Bacb,  e<c. 
young,  MOJiondtt 
younger,  MJi^Hiniit ;  ueHbrndA 
your,  yours,  B^mi,,  a,  e,  h 


INDEX 

The  figures  refer  to  the  paragraphs  in  the  text,  the  Roman  numerak  to  those 
of  the  Introduction. 


Accent,  importance  of,  vi,  xxi 
Accusative,  meaning  of,  16 

after  prepositions,  60, 100, 127, 160,183 
animate  and  inanimate,  16,  74,  84 
neuter,  74,  84 
in  time  phrases,  128,  181 
Adverbs  in  o,  e,  189,  237,  238 

of  quantity,  Voc.  XL 
Adjectives  : 

accentuation,  6,  191,  192,  237,  238 
declension,  see  Declension 
comparative,  attributive,  195 

attributive,      exceptional      forms, 

195  {a) 
predicative,  192 
in  e,  193,  238 
predicative  form,  187-190,  237,  238 

use  of,  69  (note),  116,  189 
superlative,  186,  196,  197 
Animate  and  inanimate,  see  Accusative 
Approximate  number,  181  (c),  182 
Aspects,  see  Verb 

GbFTb,  p.  34 

Bccb,  106 

BT.,  60,  61,  128,  181  (c) 

BBi     (pronoun)    written    with 

capital,  80  (note) 
BH,  prefix  in  perfective  verbs, 

always  accented,  Voc.  LVI 

(note) 

Consonants,  voiced  and  voiceless,  v 

Dash,  use  of,  8 
Date,  to  express  the,  181 
Dative,  meaning  of,  20 
after  prepositions,  39,  87 
after  verb  *  command,'  214;  *  believe,' 
223  (2);    *help,'  Voc.  LIII  (2); 
*leam,' Voc.  LVI(l) 
Declension  of  adjectives,  88,  89,  92,  94 
of  predicative  adjective,  187,  188 


Declension  of  nouns  : 
masculine,  43,  133-136 

names  of  young  animals,  229 
of  peoples  and  classes,  230 
feminine,  53,  64,  86,  151-153 

in  iH,  PoccfH,  Voc.  XXXIV,  152(2) 
in  B,  64,  86,  136 
neuter,  43,  172,  173,  219,  229 
in  ie,  43  (note),  173 
Declension  of  cardinal  numerals,  176,177 

of  ordinal  numerals,  167 
Declension  of  pronouns,  see  Summary, 

p.  33 
Dentals,  xvi 

HHTH,  229 

HO,  99 

e  dropped  or  interpolated  in 
declension,  14  (note),  153, 
172,  190,  237 

ecTi>,  ecTfc  jiH,  Voc.  XIII    • 

'  from,'  translation  of,  98 

3a,  44,  115,  Voc.  XXXIX 
8a  as  prefix,  Voc.  LIII  (note) 

Gender,  3,  66 
Genitive  : 

meaning,  19 

after  numerals,  27,  138,  179,  180 

after  prepositions,  70 

after  adverbs  of  quantity,  30,  Voc.  XL 

after  comparative,  194 

in  negative  phrases,  28,  29 

partitive,  31 

plural  masculine,  133-136 
feminine,  151-153 
neuter,  172,  173 

ending    in    y,   Voc.    XXVII    (note), 
Voc.  XLII,  Voc.  XLIII 

after  y  with  Cmtb,  24 


246 


INDEX 


247 


*  go,'  translation  of,  40,  97,  160 
Greetings,  Ex.  XXXV.  A  (13),  216 
Gutturals,  xv 

*  have,'  translation  of,  24 
Hours  of  the  day,  181  (c) 

iii=also,  Ex.  XVI  A  (11) 
Hs-b,  98 
Imperative,  see  Verb 
Instrumental  case  : 

after  prepositions,  44 

after  verbs,  69,  185 

exceptional  form  in  plural.  111 

of  means,  67 

of  manner,  115 

in  time  phrases,  68 
Interrogative  forms,  see  Verb 
Irregular  verb,  see  Verb 

ji  interpolated  in  1st  singular 
of  verbs,  141  (note  2) 
Labials,  xiv 
'  let  him  (them),'  215 
'  let  us,'  214,  231 
Liquids,  xx 

Modification  of  verb  stem,  141  (note), 
142,  158,  169,  201,  207,  232 

H  prefixed  in  declension,  25 
Ha,  60,  61,  128 
Hafli,,  127 
Nasals,  xix 
Negative,  8,  note  to  Ex.  I,  217 

double,  Voc.  Ill  and  note 
Nouns : 

accentuation,  48-60,  54,  75,  112 
declension,  see  Declension 
plurals,  72-76 

lists,  77-79,  117-119 
genitive,  see  Genitive 
fffert,  29 
Numerals  : 

approximate  number,  182 
cardinals  1-10,  20,  see  138,  and  Voc. 
XXXVI 
11-19,  see  148 
30-100,  see  150 
hundreds,  thousands,  155 
declension,  see  Declension 
distributive,  183 
ordinals,  l8t-19th,  166 
20th-100th,  171 
200th  upwards,  184 


Numerals — continued 
time  of  day,  181  (c) 
with  genitive  singular,  138,  179 
with  genitive  plural,  138,  180 

o  or  e  dropped  or  interpolated, 
39  (note),  Voc.  XIX  (note), 
153,  172,  190,  237 

ojniH-B,  107  (6),  178 
Orthography,  general  rule  of,  91 

oTb,  98 

Passive  voice,  see  Verb 
Peoples,  classes,  names  of,  230 

ndpejTi.,  44  (note  3),  Voc.  IX 
Phonetic  symbols,  iii 
transcript,  194-209 

iiHTi.  and  n-fexb,  165 
no,  87,  183 
no  as  prefix,  207 
nojri.,  127 
Prepositions,  list  of,  236 
Prepositions  in  o  or  i,  39  (note) 
Prepositional  Case  : 
occurrence,  45 

in  time  phrases,  128,  181  (6) 
in^,  46 

npn,  45 

npH  as  prefix,  62,  63,  97 
npo,  100 
npo  as  prefix,  62 
Pronouns,  see  Summary,  p.  33 
Pronunciation,  §ee  Introduction,  especi- 
ally iv  and  vi 

PoccfH,  Voc.  XXXIV 

Salutations,  216 

caMBitt  and  caMt,  107  (c),  186, 
235 

CBott,  104,  109 
Script,  pp.  190-193 

ceft,  106 
Sibilants,  xvii,  xviii 
Signs,  hard  and  soft,  xiii 
Suggestions  for  use  of  this  book,  p.  36 
Summary  of  Regular  Forms,  pp.  32-35 

CB,  CO,  39  (note),  44,  98 

*  than,'  194 

'  they  '  (indefinite),  101,  102 
Time  phrases — in,  on,  at,  by,  68,  128, 
160,  181 
date,  181 

TOTB,  107  (a) 


248 


INDEX 


Verbs : 

see  Summary  of  Regular  Forms,  pp. 
34-35 

actual  and  potential  (or  definite  and 
indefinite,  or  concrete  and  ab- 
stract), 40,  159,  208  (note) 

aspects,  199  et  seq. 

changes  in  stem,  141  (note),  142, 158, 
169,  201,  207 

classification,  129,  130;  202,  203; 
208  (note) 

conditional,  199,  223' 

dative,  governing,  214,  223  (2)  (ex- 
amples), Voc.  LIII  (2),  LVI  (1) 

of  fearing,  233,  234 

future  : 

6HTb,  123 

imperfective,  124 

perfective,  160,  204 
of  hoping,  233 
imperative,  formation  of,  210-218 

first  plural,  214 

imperfective  and  perfective,  217 

negative,  217 

expressed  by  infinitive,  218 
imperfective  aspect,  202 
imperfective  aspect  derived  from  per- 
fective, 232 
indefinite  3rd  plural,  101,  102 
indicating  a  state  of  rest  and  cognate 
verbs     describing    an     act     or 
motion,  60,  143 
infinitive,  32,  33,  41 

irregular  forms,  158,  239 

as  imperative,  218 

use  of,  33,  41,  218 
instrumental,  governing,  69,  185 
interrogative   forms,   12,   13,  24  (c), 

228,  Voc.  XV  and  XLIV 
irregular,  156,  220-222,  231,  239 

n    interpolated    in     1st     singular 
present,  141  (note) 

in  — OBaxB,  — CBaxb,  225 
omission  of  verb,  7 
participles,  see  Summary,  p.  35 
passive  voice,  see  Summary,  p.  35,  and 
Pars.  80  (a),  102,  139  (6),  157  (a) 
past  tense  : 

form,  32,  57,  58,  80,  161 

without  ji  in  masculine,  96 


Verbs — continued 
past  tense  : 

irregular  forms,  96,  239 
with  6h,  199,  223 
with  HToG-b,  200,  233 
perfective  aspect,  203 
formation  of,  206,  207 
forms  of,  illustrated  in  Vocs.  LII- 

LVI 
illustrative      passages,      following 
209 
plural   for   singular,  Ex.  XXVII   B 

(note) 
prefixes,  effect  of,  208 
present  tense  : 

in  — aio,  — aemb,  131 
— -fero,  Hfeeuib,  131 
—f,  -emfa,  157 
— bK),  — berab,  162 
-y  or  -f,  -^emb,  168 
— H),  —limb,  141 
-^K),  -^Hmb,  145 
— K),  -^Hmb,  149 
-yio,  — yemb,  225 
irregular    forms,    220,    221,    222, 
231,  239 
present  for  English  past,  144,  227 
reflexive  verb,  37 
spelling,  132 
for  passive,  102  (6) 
scheme  of  Russian  verb,  205 
tense  sequence,  144,  227 
tense  systems,  202,  203 
of  wislong,  224 
m  -HBaxb,  226,  232 
'  there  is,'  Voc.  II,  XIII 
Vowels,  hard  and  soft,  iv,  viii-xii 

'  whether,'  228 

y  with   genitive   and    6HTb= 
to  have,  24 
Young  of  animals,  declension  of  names 
of,  229 

XDjoiTb  and  HTni,  40,  159,  208 
(note) 

qeii,  106 

^TOTb,  107 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall 


'9H 


'^^'62KB 


IN  STACKS 


OCT    31962 


W 


wETC^D  LD 


^B=-tt 


^i^tWf 


/D  La 


APHj.3'6/-^ 


gJB^SLPi 


W 


23'G5-lPNl 


•'  T:C70978]0)476B 

UOAN  dEPT. 


^ 


fS630 


6 


m  8'fi9-9Pf^ 


LOAM 


D£PT. 


UiSiBI 


a\98^ 


^ 


SEP 


a 


joeral  Library 
Uiffversity  of  California 
Berkeley  _a 


U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


ft-  -f  * 


i^J290667 


W 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  UBRARY 


u 


